0 PBCDraftContractapril20

Performance Based Contract (PBC)
Implementation of Continuous Pressurized Water Supply in Shimla
GREATER SHIMLA WATER SUPPLY AND SEWERAGE PROJECT
PERFORMANCE BASED CONTRACT (PBC)
FOR
IMPLEMENTATION OF CONTINUOUS PRESSURIZED WATER SUPPLY IN SHIMLA
BETWEEN
SHIMLA JAL PRABANDHAN NIGAM LIMITED (SJPNL), (“AUTHORITY”)
AND
[●], (“OPERATOR”)
EXECUTED ON : [dd/mm/yyyy]
Page 1 of 432
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION ................................................................... 6

2. SCOPE OF THE PROJECT ......................................................................................21
3. CONDITION PRECEDENT .......................................................................................25
4. TRANSITION PERIOD CONDITIONS ......................................................................27
5. PROGRESSIVE HANDOVER OF EXISTING PROJECT FACILITIES DURING THE
TRANSITION PERIOD .......................................................................................................31
6. OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS .....................................................................................35
7. AUTHORITY OBLIGATIONS ....................................................................................53
8. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES ............................................................59
9. PERFORMANCE SECURITY ...................................................................................62
10. RIGHT OF WAY..........................................................................................................64
11. UTILITIES ...................................................................................................................66
12. ACTIVITIES RELATED TO REHABILITATION OF EXISTING PROJECT FACILITIES AND
CONSTRUCTION OF THE ADDITIONAL PROJECT FACILITIES.................................68
13. MONITORING OF CONSTRUCTION.......................................................................73
14. COMPLETION CERTIFICATES................................................................................76
15. SUSTAINING PERIOD CONDITIONS......................................................................78
16. CHANGE OF SCOPE ................................................................................................79
17. DISCLAIMER ..............................................................................................................82
18. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................83
19. MONITORING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .........................................85
20. TECHNICAL AUDITOR..............................................................................................86
21. CHANGE IN LAW .......................................................................................................88
22. OPERATOR PAYMENTS ..........................................................................................91
23. ESCROW ACCOUNT ................................................................................................98
24. INSURANCE ...............................................................................................................99
25. ACCOUNTS AND AUDIT......................................................................................... 101
26. FORCE MAJEURE ................................................................................................... 103
27. COMPENSATION FOR BREACH OF AGREEMENT ........................................... 109
28. SUSPENSION OF OPERATOR’S RIGHTS ........................................................... 110
29. TERMINATION ......................................................................................................... 112
30. HANDBACK REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 118
31. ASSIGNMENT AND CHARGES ............................................................................. 121
32. LIABILITY AND INDEMNITY ................................................................................... 122
33. RIGHTS AND TITLE OVER THE SERVICE AREA ............................................... 126
34. DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD .................................................................................. 127
35. DISPUTE RESOLUTION ......................................................................................... 129
36. MISCELLANUOUS................................................................................................... 130
SCHEDULE 1: PROJECT DETAILS ............................................................................... 134
SCHEDULE 2: PROJECT FACILITIES ........................................................................... 141
SCHEDULE 3: SERVICE AREA ...................................................................................... 143
SCHEDULE 4A: OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS DURING START UP PERIOD ............ 144
Page 2 of 432
SCHEDULE 4B: OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS DURING TRANSITION PERIOD ........ 162

SCHEDULE 4C: OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS DURING SUSTAINING PERIOD ....... 169
SCHEDULE 5: PERFORMANCE STANDARDS ............................................................ 175
SCHEDULE 6: OPERATOR PAYMENTS ....................................................................... 180
SCHEDULE 7: BID PRICE SCHEDULE ......................................................................... 189
SCHEDULE 8: APPLICABLE PERMITS ......................................................................... 191
SCHEDULE 9: SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.................................................................... 192
SCHEDULE 10: MINIMUM BULK WATER DEMAND .................................................... 202
SCHEDULE 11: COMPLETION CERTIFICATE FORMAT ............................................ 203
SCHEDULE 12: TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR TECHNICAL AUDITOR .................. 204
SCHEDULE 13: ESCROW AGREEMENT...................................................................... 211
SCHEDULE 14: ENVIRONMENTAL CODE OF PRACTICE ......................................... 222
SCHEDULE 15: VESTING CERTIFICATE ..................................................................... 249
SCHEDULE 16: DELETED .............................................................................................. 250
SCHEDULE 17: FORMAT FOR MOBILIZATION ADVANCE SECURITY.................... 251
SCHEDULE 18: FORMAT FOR START UP PERIOD PERFORMANCE SECURITY . 253
SCHEDULE 19: FORMAT FOR TRANSITION PERIOD PERFORMANCE SECURITY255
SCHEDULE 20: FORMAT FOR SUSTAINING PERIOD PERFORMANCE SECURITY256
SCHEDULE 21: M&E PLAN ............................................................................................. 259
SCHEDULE 22: THRESHOLD FOR CHANGE IN SCOPE ........................................... 260
SCHEDULE 23: WATER QUALITY STANDARDS, ....................................................... 261
SCHEDULE 24: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................... 268
SCHEDULE 25: MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 409
SCHEDULE 26: COMMISSIONING OF DMAS AND ACHIEVING 24X7 DMAS ........... 410
SCHEDULE 27: FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS OF IMIS ........... 416
SCHEDULE 28: INDICATIVE TIMELINES FOR HANDOVER OF HYDRAULIC ZONES422
SCHEDULE 29: LIST OF ITEMS FOR THE CAPITAL WORKS.................................... 423
Page 3 of 432
PERFORMANCE BASED CONTRACT (PBC)
THIS AGREEMENT is made on the [date] day of [month] [year].
AMONGST
(1) Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited (hereinafter referred to as “SJPNL”), a company organized,
incorporated, registered and existing under the Companies Act having its registered office at
______________[insert address] (hereafter referred to as the “Authority” which expression shall,
unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its administrators, successors and
assigns),
and
(2) [Name of the Operator], a joint venture of (i) [please insert name of the lead member] (“Lead
Member”); (ii) [please insert name of second member] (“Second Member”); (iii) [please insert name
of the third member] (“Third Member”); and (iv) [please insert name of fourth member] (“Fourth
Member”); who have together formed a joint venture agreement (“JVA”) dated [put the date on
which JVA was executed], a copy of which is attached herewith (hereinafter referred to as the
“Operator” which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its
successors and permitted assigns and substitutes);
Authority and Operator hereinafter are collectively known as the "Parties".
WHEREAS
A. The Government of Himachal Pradesh (“GoHP”) has prepared a medium term program for Water
Supply and Sewerage in Greater Shimla Area.
B. As a part of the medium term program, SPJNL is pursuing improvements in water service to achieve
a continuous 24x7 pressurized water supply in Shimla (“Project”).
C. At present, the Authority or its agencies are responsible for water supply and sewerage services in
the Greater Shimla.
D. The Authority, launched a competitive bidding process for the selection of an operator to undertake
works and perform services confirming to Performance Standards during the Project Period.
E. The Authority had invited proposals by its Request for Proposals (the "Request for Proposal" or
"RFP") from Qualified Bidders for undertaking the Project.
F. After evaluation of the bids received, the Authority had accepted the bid of the Selected Bidder, {the
[name of single entity or joint venture comprising __________, ____________ and _____________
(collectively the "Selected Bidder") with ________ as its lead member (the "Lead Member")} and
issued its Letter of Award No…………..dated…………….… (hereinafter called "LOA") to the
{selected bidder} requiring, inter alia, the execution of this Agreement within 45 (forty five) days of
the date of issue thereof.
G. The Selected Bidder has accepted the LOA and has agreed to undertake the Project in accordance
with the terms of this Agreement.
Page 4 of 432
H The Parties have agreed to enter into this Agreement for implementation of the Project, subject to
and on the terms and conditions set forth hereinafter.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and the respective covenants and agreements set
forth in this Agreement, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, and intending to be
legally bound hereby, the Parties agree as follows:
Page 5 of 432
1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

Whenever used in this Agreement, unless the context otherwise requires, the words and expressions defined
shall have the meanings assigned to them below:
Accounting Year means the financial year commencing from the first day of April of any
calendar year and ending on the thirty-first day of March of the next
calendar year
Additional Auditors shall mean the auditors, if any, deployed from time to time as provided in
Article 25.2 of this Agreement
Additional Project shall mean the facilities including the facilities mentioned in Schedule 2 to
Facilities be constructed by the Operator by developing new infrastructure
improvement works and replacements forming part of the water supply,
transmission, storage, and distribution system required to provide the water
supply service in the Service Area, as stated in the Agreed SIP and subject
to any addition or deduction that may occur pursuant to Change in Scope
approved by the Authority in accordance with this Agreement.
It is clarified that the Additional Project Facilities will include any additional
service pipeline required up to the water meter, stopcock and meter box in
each of the Customer premises in the Service Area.
Advisor means the engineering institute of repute (e.g. IITs) or any other persons /
agency as appointed by the Authority
Affected Party shall have the meaning set forth in Article 26.1.1
Agreed Service means the Service Improvement Plan agreed between the Operator and the
Improvement Plan Authority, in accordance with Article 6.2.5 (e)
(Agreed SIP)
Agreed Transition means the Transition Handover Plan agreed between the Operator and the
Handover Plan Authority, in accordance with Article 6.2.5 (e)
(Agreed THP)
Agreement means this Agreement, together with all amendments, annexures,
attachments and schedules;
Annual Service means the Service Improvement Plan updated annually by the Operator and
Improvement Plan agreed to, during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period, in
(Annual SIP) accordance with Article 2.4.4;
Applicable Laws means any statute, decree, ordinance, regulation or by-law or any rule, code
or direction including applicable technical, safety or environmental standards
or any direct and indirect tax laws including Goods and Service Tax and the
rules made thereunder or any licenses, consent, permit authorization or
other approval or interpretation thereof in force and effect during the
subsistence of this Agreement in India and/or Himachal Pradesh and issued
by any executive, legislative, judicial, regulatory or administrative authority
of the country;
Applicable Permits means all clearances, licenses, permits, authorizations, no objection
certificates, consents, approvals and exemptions required to be obtained or
Page 6 of 432
maintained by the Parties under Applicable Laws in relation to the due

performance of their respective obligations under this Agreement;
Arbitration Act shall have the meaning set forth in Article 35.3.1
Article means an article and / or sub-article of this Agreement or the corresponding
Schedule, unless otherwise specified
As-Built Drawings means have the meaning set forth in Article 12.2.3 (r)
Authority shall have the meaning attributed thereto in the name clause
Authority Applicable means the Applicable Permits required to be obtained by the Authority as
Permits listed in Schedule [●]
Authority Event of shall have the meaning set forth in Article 29.2.1
Default
Authority Indemnified shall have the meaning set forth in Article 32.1.1
Persons
Award shall have the meaning set forth in Article 35.3.3
Bank means a bank as defined under section 2(e) of the Reserve Bank of India
Act, 1934, as amended from time to time.
Bank Rate means the rate which is published under Section 49 of the Reserve Bank of
India Act, 1934, and as amended from time to time by Reserve Bank of
India.
Baseline Study shall have the meaning set forth in Article 5.3.2;
Bid means the documents in their entirety comprised in the bid submitted by the
Operator in response to the RFP in accordance with the provisions thereof
Bid Due Date means the last date for submission of the Bids specified in the RFP, as may
be extended from time to time.
BOQ means the bill of quantities provided along with the Bid Documents
Capex Envelope means a sum of INR 411 crores allocated by the Authority for financing the
implementation of capital works for the project, including but not limited to
IIP.
Certificate of means the Certificate issued by the Authority, upon satisfaction of the
Commencement of Sustaining Period Conditions, in accordance with Article 15.2.1
Sustaining Period
Certificate of means the Certificate issued by the Authority, upon satisfaction of the
Transition Transition Period Conditions, in accordance with Article 4.1
Commencement
Change in Control means with respect to a Joint Venture Member, the direct or indirect (i)
consolidation or merger of such Member with or into any other entity (ii)
sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of
such Member; or (iii) acquisition by any entity, or group of entities acting in
concert, of Control of such Member;
Page 7 of 432
Change in Law means as defined in Article 21;

Change in Ownership shall include Change in Control of any of the Joint Venture Members,
change in composition of the Joint Venture, or occurrence of any of the
events mentioned the RFP
Change of Scope means any change or amendment to the Operator Obligations in
accordance with Article 16;
Change of Scope shall have the meaning set forth in Article 16.2.1
Notice
Change of Scope shall have the meaning set forth in Article 16.2.3
Order
Clause means a clause or sub-clause of the Agreement or the corresponding
Schedule, unless otherwise specified
Commissioned means those DMA which are transformed to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized
DMA(s) Water Supply in accordance with Article 12;
Communication Action means the plan detailing the planned communication activities during the
Plan (CAP) Start Up period and Transition Period, and agreed by the Authority
Completion Certificate means the certificate issued by the Authority, of completion of the key
activities in the Implementation Schedules, as per the Agreed SIP, issued in
accordance with Article 14.2.1;
Condition Precedent shall have the meaning set forth in Article 3;
Comprehensive means the report submitted by the Operator based on detailed assessment
Assessment Report of existing water supply, including but not limited to, transmission mains,
(CAR) storage structures, pumping stations, piped distribution network and
household connections
Connection Policy shall have the meaning set forth in Article 6.1.14;
Continuous 24x7 means a continuous supply of water within each DMA of the Service Area,
Pressurized Water 24 hours a day through a network of pipes in which the water is subjected to
Supply a positive pressure being not less than 7 meters of water at all points in the
network at all times;
Control means with respect to any entity, the legal, beneficial, or equitable
ownership, directly or indirectly, of more than 50 percent of the capital stock
(or other ownership interest, if not a corporation) of that entity ordinarily
having voting rights;
CPHEEO Manual means the Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, published by Central
Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organization, Ministry of
Urban Development, Government of India, Third Edition, May 1999, as
updated from time to time;
Customer means all entities (including individuals) within the Service Area (i) which
from time to time avail the water supply service by using the Project
Facilities, (ii) whose premises are for the time being connected to the
Project Facilities for availing the water supply services, and (iii) any other
Page 8 of 432
person who under Applicable Law is required to pay User Charges.

Customer Service means the service centers to be established by the Operator to provide
Center (CSC) commercial and public relations services to Customers under this
Agreement
Customer Survey means the Survey of Customers to be conducted by the Operator in
accordance with Schedule 4A
Cure Period means the period specified in this Agreement for curing any breach or
default of any provision of this Agreement by the Party responsible for such
breach or default
Damages means the Liquidated Damages payable by the Operator, to the Authority
for a failure to meet the desired standards/ timeline, required to be met by
the Operator under or pursuant to the terms hereof
Defects or Deficiencies means any fault, imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality,
quantity, potency, purity or non-conformance to Performance Standards,
Technical Specifications and Good Industry Practice, nature and manner of
performance which is required to be maintained by or under Applicable
Laws or as has been undertaken to be performed by the Operator under the
Agreement (expressed or implied)
Defects Liability Period shall have the meaning set forth in Article 34.1.1;
Designated Reservoirs shall have the meaning set forth in Schedule 2;
Designated Supply shall have the meaning set forth in Schedule 2;
Points
Detailed Designs and means the designs and drawings, and other technical information submitted
Drawings by the Operator from time to time in relation to the Project Facilities in
accordance with the Article 5.3.4
Dispute means a dispute or difference of whatever nature howsoever arising under,
out of, or in connection with this Agreement between any of the Parties, as
defined in Article 35.1.1
Dispute Resolution means procedure for resolution of disputes as mentioned in Article 35;
Procedure
DMA (District Metered means each hydraulically isolated district metered area within the
Area) operational area of a storage / service reservoir which is established by the
Operator in the Effective Service Area
DMA Commissioning shall have the meaning set forth in Article 12.5
Certificate
DMA Establishment means INR [●] (Rupees [●]) per water connection, being the quote of the
Fees (B) Selected Bidder for undertaking Commissioning of DMA during Transition
Period, as quoted by the Selected Bidder in its Bid, which includes the all
taxes and all other expenses in accordance with Schedule 7
Effective Date means the date of execution of this Agreement by all the Parties as set out
above
Page 9 of 432
Effective Service Area means areas within the Service Area falling under those Hydraulic Zones for
which Progressive Handover of Project Facilities related to water supply has
been undertaken.
Emergency Response means the emergency response plan prepared in accordance with Schedule
Plan 4A;
Encumbrance means any mortgage, charge, pledge, lien or other encumbrance or third
party interest or any other type of preferential arrangement (including
without limitation title transfer and retention arrangements) having a similar
effect
End of Term means the end of the Agreement by early Termination or the Expiry Date;
Environmental and means the environment and social management plan to be developed by
Social Management the Operator set out in Schedule 4A
Plan (ESMP)
Environmental Code of means the guidelines to be followed by the Operator as set out in Schedule
Practice 14, towards environmental management in performing the Services under
the Agreement
Works Fees (C) means INR [●] (Rupees [●]), being the cost of construction/rehabilitation of
the Project Facilities, as quoted by the Selected Bidder in its Bid, which
includes the interest during construction, Taxes and all other pre-operative
expenses in accordance with Schedule 7
Escrow Account means a bank account with a Bank in India with a branch in Shimla and
which will follow provisions of Article 23 and will be governed by provisions
of Escrow Agreement
Escrow Agreement means the escrow agreement entered into between the Authority, the
Operator and the Escrow Bank prior to commencement of the Transition
Period substantially in the form set out in Schedule 17
Escrow Bank shall have the meaning set forth in Article 23.1
Event of Default shall mean the Operator Event of Default and / or the Authority Event of
Default
Existing Project shall mean the facilities to be rehabilitated by the Operator by infrastructure
Facilities improvement works and replacements forming part of the water supply,
transmission, storage, and distribution system required to provide the water
supply services in the Service Area, as stated in the Agreed SIP and subject
to any addition or deduction that may occur pursuant to Change in Scope
approved by the Authority in accordance with this Agreement.
It is clarified that the Existing Project Facilities include service pipeline up to
the water meter, stopcock and meter box in each of the Customer premises
in the Service Area.
Indicative list of Existing Project Facilities is given in Schedule 2.
Expiry Date means the date of completion of 10 years and six months from the SPCD, or
the date of Termination, whichever is earlier
Page 10 of 432
Financial Model means the financial model, setting forth the capital and operating costs of
the Project and revenues there from on the basis of which financial viability
of the Project has been determined, and includes a description of the
assumptions and parameters used for making calculations and projections
therein
Financial Proposal the financial proposal submitted by the Operator as part of its Bid
Force Majeure shall have the meaning set forth in Article 26.1.1
Force Majeure Cost shall have the meaning set forth in Article 26.7.3
Force Majeure Event shall have the meaning set forth in Article 26.1.1
GIS means the Geographical Information System
GoHP means the Government of Himachal Pradesh;
Good Industry Practice means the practices, methods, techniques, designs, standards, skills,
diligence, efficiency, reliability and prudence which are generally and
reasonably expected from a reasonably skilled and experienced operator
engaged in the same type of undertaking as envisaged under this
Agreement and which would be expected to result in the performance of its
obligations by the relevant party in accordance with this Agreement,
Applicable Laws and Operator Applicable Permits in a reliable, safe,
economical and efficient manner;
Government means any department, division or sub-division of the relevant Government
Instrumentalities and includes any commission, board, authority, agency or municipal and
other local authority or statutory body, including Panchayat, under the
control of the relevant Government, as the case may be, and having
jurisdiction over all or any part of the Project or the performance of all or any
of the services or obligations of the Operator under or pursuant to this
Agreement;
Handover Conditions means the conditions to be satisfied by the Authority prior to handover of all
the Existing Project Facilities , and to the grant of access to the relevant
Service area to the Operator, as set out in Article 5
Holdback shall have the meaning set forth in Article 22.3.8
Hydraulic Zone(s) means each hydraulically isolated boundary within the operational area of a
storage / service reservoir which is established in the Effective Service Area
Implementation means the implementation scheduled developed by the Operator and
Schedule approved by the Authority, for the activities to be undertaken during the
Transition Period in accordance with Schedule 4A
Indemnified Party shall have the meaning set forth in Article 32.3.1
Indemnifying Party shall have the meaning set forth in Article 32.3.1
Independent Auditor means a reputable firm of chartered accountants acting as the statutory
auditors of the Operator under the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013
including any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof, for the time
being in force, and appointed in accordance with Article 25
Page 11 of 432
Indexation shall be as set forth in Schedule 6-Article 1.9

Indirect Political Event shall be those event or events as set forth in Article 26.3
Infrastructure means the infrastructure improvement plan prepared by the Operator in
Improvement Plan accordance with Schedule 4A
(IIP)
Inspection Report shall have the meaning set forth in Article 13.2.1
Insurance Cover means the aggregate of the maximum sums insured under the insurances
taken out by the Operator pursuant to Article 24
Integrated means the IT and management information systems to be established by
Management the Operator for provision of Water Supply.
Information System
(IMIS)
Investment Plan shall have the meaning set forth in Schedule 4A
Joint Venture shall have the meaning as set forth in Recital (F)
Joint Venture shall mean each of the entities that constitute the Joint Venture
Members
Laboratories shall mean NABL accredited Class A Lab
Land Requirements shall mean the additional land required, if any , by the Operator for
implementation of the SIP in accordance with Schedule 4A
Lead Member shall have the meaning set forth in Recital (2)
Liquidated Damages means the Liquidated Damages payable by the Operator, to the Authority
for a failure to meet the desired standards/ timeline in accordance with
Schedule 5
Maintenance shall refer to the maintenance requirements of the Project Facilities, and
Requirements shall be in accordance with Schedule 25
Major Maintenance means any maintenance of an asset that is not Minor Maintenance;
Material Adverse means the effect of any act or event which materially and adversely affects
Effect the ability of a Party to exercise its material rights or perform any of its
material obligations under and in accordance with the provisions of this
Agreement.
Material Breach means a breach by either Party of any of its obligations under this
Agreement which has/ is likely to have a Material Adverse Effect on the
Project and which such Party shall have failed to cure within the Cure
Period.
Milestone means the project milestones as set forth in the Implementation Schedule
Milestone Standards means the milestone standards to be achieved by the Operator in the Start
Up Period, Transition Period and Sustaining Period in accordance with
Schedule 5
Minimum Bulk Water shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Schedule 10;
Page 12 of 432
Demand
Minimum Service means the minimum service levels to be achieved in respect of key
Levels Performance Standards for the purposes of calculating Performance Fee
under Schedule 6
Minimum Sub-Account shall mean the minimum balance to be available in the relevant sub-
Balance accounts of the Escrow Account, in accordance with Article 23.2
Minor Maintenance means any activity required to maintain the serviceability of an asset over its
economic life including:
 Routine maintenance of mechanical, electrical, electronic and
instrumentation equipment, motorized transport, whether
undertaken by Operator or contracted out, including provision of
spare parts, all in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and subject to following the Standard Operating
Procedures
 Repair or replacement of dosing pumps, drive-in motors less than
3kw capacity
 Fixing leaks in pipes and fittings including cost of associated works
such as road cutting, earthwork excavation, refilling the trenches
and restoring surfaces
 Repair, maintenance or replacement of valves and meters to ensure
functionality
 Regular painting, patching and protection of wooden and metallic
surfaces and structures
 Maintaining water tightness, functionality and appearance of
buildings, yards, depots, other structures and surrounding grounds
 Software upgrades, hardware maintenance including spares and
consumables;
 life cycle maintenance, routine maintenance and reactive
maintenance
Mobilization Advance shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Article 22.3.13
Mobilization Advance shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Article 22.3.12
Security
Monitoring and means the monitoring and evaluation plan developed by the Operator and
Evaluation Plan (M&E approved by the Authority, in accordance with Schedule 4A
Plan)
Non-Bulk Water shall be as set forth in Schedule 1
Customers
Non-Political Event shall be those event or events as set forth in Article 26.2
NRW means Non Revenue Water as defined in Schedule 5
Page 13 of 432
O&M means Operation and Maintenance

O&M Fees (D) means the Operator’s total Fixed Fee and Performance Fee for provision of
operation and maintenance services during the Transition Period and
Sustaining Period in accordance with Schedule 6 and Schedule 7
O&M Plan means the operation and maintenance plan developed by the Operator and
approved by the Authority, for the Project Facilities in accordance with
Schedule 4A
Obligations shall refer to the obligations of the Operator and/or Authority, in accordance
with Article 6 and Article 7 of this Agreement
Operations Bank means the account to be opened/ designated by the Authority to deposit
Account User Charges. The Authority is the sole owner of Operations Bank Account.
The Operations Bank Account will not be a part of Escrow Account. It may
or may not be with the same bank as in which the Escrow Account is
opened.
Operator shall have the meaning attributed thereto in the name clause
Operator Applicable means Applicable Permits other than the Authority Applicable Permits.
Permit
Operator Event of shall have the meaning set forth in Article 29.1.1
Default
Operator Invoice means an invoice submitted in respect of amounts claimed by the Operator
under this Agreement in accordance with Article 22;
Operator Obligations means obligations of the Operator under this Agreement in accordance with
Article 6, Schedule 4A, Schedule 4B and Schedule 4C.
Operator Payments means, for each Facility, the payments to be made to the Operator during
the Start Up Period, Transition Period and Sustaining Period upon
satisfactory completion of the Operator Obligations, as adjusted from time to
time, in accordance with Article 22
Panel of Chartered shall have the meaning set forth in Article 25.2
Accountants
Parties means the Authority and the Operator, or any one of them as the context
indicates, and the term "Party" shall be construed accordingly;
PBC Engineer shall have the meaning set forth in Article 7.1.11
Performance Fee shall mean the amount payable upon achievement of Performance
Standards in accordance with Article 22 and Schedule 6
Performance Security shall be the performance security in the amount to be furnished by the
(ies) Operator in accordance with Article 9 and substantially in the form set out in
Schedule 18, Schedule 19 and Schedule 20
Performance means the Required Service Level Standards and Milestone Standards to
Standards be achieved by the Operator during the Start Up Period, Transition Period
and the Sustaining Period, as set out in Schedule 6
Page 14 of 432
Political Event shall be those event or events as set forth in Article 26.4
Power Unit Rate means the unit rate of power in INR/ kWh applicable for water supply project
in Shimla. For the purpose of evaluation of bid, the unit rate is considered as
INR 4.4/ kWh.
Price Adjustment Shall have the meaning set forth in Schedule 30
Professional Fee Sub- means the sub-account set up as part of the Escrow Account, for the
Account purpose of paying O&M Fees to the Operator during Transition Period and
Sustaining Period, in accordance with the conditions of the Escrow
Agreement;
Progressive Handover shall have the meaning set forth in Article 5.1
Progressive Handover shall have the meaning set forth in Article 5.1.4
Date
Project means the project referred in Recital A of this Agreement
Project Facilities shall include both the Existing Project Facilities and Additional Project
Facilities, and the term "Project Facility" shall be construed to refer to each
of the facility
Project Period shall mean the time period from Effective Date and until the Expiry Date
Projected Daily Bulk shall have the meaning set forth in Article 7.1.3
Water Demand
Provisional Certificate shall have the meaning set forth in Article 14.1.1
Punch List shall have the meaning set forth in Article 14.1.1
Quality Assurance means the quality assurance plan developed by the Operator and approved
Plan (QAP) by the Authority, in accordance with Schedule 4A
Quote per Water means INR [●] (Rupees [●]) per month which the Operator will charge the
Connection Month Authority on a per connection basis for successfully billing each Customer,
(D1) as quoted by the Selected Bidder in its Bid, which includes the Taxes as per
Schedule 7
Relevant SOR Schedule of Rate of Government of Himachal Pradesh or Schedule of Rate
found more appropriate by the Authority;
Request for Proposal means the request for proposal dated [●] for selection of the Operator for
the Project issued by the Authority
Required Service means the service level standards required to be achieved by the Operator
Level Standards in the Transition Period and Sustaining Period in accordance with Schedule
(RSLS) 5
Right of Way means the permission and licenses authorizing the permission holder or
licensee to enter into or upon specific land, building or other property and
use the same for a limited duration and specific purpose(s) on the terms of
such permission or license without creating any right, title or interest in or
over such land, building or other property.
Risks and Risk means the risk identification and mitigation plan developed by the Operator
Page 15 of 432
Mitigation Plan and approved by the Authority, in accordance with Schedule 4A

Safeguard Plan means the safeguard plan developed by the Operator and approved by the
Authority, in accordance with Schedule 4A
Safety Requirements shall be in accordance with Schedule 9
Schedule means a schedule forming part of this Agreement;
Schedule for Daily shall have the meaning set forth in Article 6.1.6 (r);
Water Distribution
Scheduled Expiry Date means the date that is 10 years and 6 months from the date of SPCD
Scheduled Sustaining means the date that is four years from the TCD
Period
Commencement Date
(Scheduled SPCD)
Scheduled Transition means the date that is six (6) months from the Effective Date
Commencement Date
(Scheduled TCD)
Selected Bidder shall have the meaning attributed thereto in the Recital F
Service Area means the area within the jurisdictional boundaries of the City as at the
Effective Date as shown on the map at Schedule 1
Service Delivery means the service delivery improvement plan to be prepared by the
Improvement Plan Operator in accordance with Schedule 4A as part of the SIP;
Service Improvement means the service improvement plan developed by the Operator and
Plan (SIP) approved by the Authority, in accordance with Article 6 and Schedule 4A
SIP Fees (A) means INR [●] (Rupees [●]), being the quote of the Selected Bidder for
undertaking Operator Obligations during Start Up Period, as quoted
by the Selected Bidder in its Bid, which includes the all taxes and all
other pre-operative expenses in accordance with Schedule 7
SIP Fund Sub-Account means the sub-account set up as part of the Escrow Account, for the
purpose of implementing the SIP, in accordance with the conditions of the
Escrow Agreement;
Site means location of the Project Facilities;
Standard Operating shall have the meaning set out in Schedule 4A;
Procedures (SOP)
Start Up Period means the period, from the Effective Date until the day prior to the
commencement date of the Transition Period or as agreed between the
Parties in accordance with Article 4;
Start Up Period shall have the meaning set forth in Article 9.1.1
Performance Security
Sub-Account shall refer the sub-accounts of the Escrow Account set forth in Article 23;
Sub-Article shall refer to the sub-article of this Agreement;
Page 16 of 432
Sub-Clause shall refer to the sub-clause of this Agreement;

Sub-Contractor means any person or entity to whom the Operator subcontracts any part of
the Operator Obligations in accordance with the provisions of the
Agreement including any person or entity engaged by the Operator for the
supply of any plant and equipment in connection with the Project.
Sustaining Period shall be the period from the Sustaining Period Commencement Date until
the Expiry Date;
Sustaining Period shall have the meaning set forth in Article 15.2.1;
Commencement Date
(SPCD)
Sustaining Period mean the conditions for commencement of the Sustaining Period as set out
Conditions in Article 15;
Sustaining Period shall have the meaning set forth in Article 9.1.5;
Tax(es) shall mean all forms of taxation, duties, imposts, levies, charges, including
but not limited to income tax, capital gains tax, value added tax, service tax,
goods and services tax, fees, cess, labour cess, octroi and any interest,
surcharge or fine in connection therewith;
Technical Auditor means the technical auditor appointed in accordance with Article 20;
Technical means the technical specifications for construction, rehabilitation, operation
Specifications and maintenance of the Project Facilities, set forth in Schedule 24 of this
Agreement
Term means the duration of the Agreement from the Effective Date until the Expiry
Date
Termination means the expiry or termination of this Agreement in accordance with
Article 29 or other provisions of this Agreement.
Termination Notice means the communication issued in accordance with this Agreement by one
Party to the other Party terminating this Agreement
Termination Payment means the amount payable by a Party to the other Party, under and in
accordance with the provisions
Threshold Limit shall have the meaning set forth in Article 21.2.4;
Topographical Survey means the topographical survey of the Service Area to be prepared by the
Operator in accordance with Schedule 4A
Transition means the day after the last day of the Start Up Period, in accordance with
Commencement Date Article 4.1.5
(TCD)
Transition Coordinator means the transition coordinator designated by the Authority to be the day
to day contact person during the Start Up and Transition Periods in
accordance with Article 7.3.8
Transition Handover means the transition handover plan developed by the Operator and
Page 17 of 432
Plan (THP) approved by the Authority, in accordance with Schedule 4A

Transition Period means the period commencing on the Transition Commencement Date and
ending on the day prior to the Sustaining Period Commencement Date;
Transition Period shall have the meaning set forth in Article 4.1.1
Conditions
Transition Period shall have the meaning set forth in Article 9.1.2
Transition Team means those employees of the Operator who shall be granted access to the
Project Facilities during the Start Up Period, a list of which shall be provided
by the Operator to the Authority within the period stipulated in Article 6.2.1;
Treated Water means the treated water as available to the Operator as set out in Schedule
1 of this Agreement;
User Charges means the charges payable for availing the benefits of the Existing Project
Facilities (during the Transition Period) and the Project Facilities (during the
Sustaining Period) in accordance with tariff policy for Service Area as
approved by GOHP and other Applicable Laws;
Vesting Certificate shall have the meaning set forth in Article 30.4;
Water Quality shall have the meaning set forth in Schedule 23
Standards
1.1 Interpretation
1.1.1 References to any legislation or any provision thereof shall include amendment or re-enactment
or consolidation of such legislation or any provision thereof so far as such amendment, re-
enactment, or consolidation applies or is capable of applying to any transaction entered into
hereunder.
1.1.2 References to laws of India or Indian law or regulation having the force of law shall include the
laws, acts, ordinances, rules, regulations, bye laws or notifications which have the force of law
in the territory of India and as from time to time may be amended, modified, supplemented,
extended or re-enacted.
1.1.3 References to a “person” and words denoting a natural person shall be construed as a
reference to any individual, firm, company, corporation, society, trust, government, state or
agency of a state or any association or partnership (whether or not having separate legal
personality) of two or more of the above and shall include successors and assigns.
1.1.4 The Recitals and the Schedules to this Agreement shall form an integral part hereof and
references to Schedules shall be references to Schedules to this Agreement unless otherwise
agreed by the Parties.
1.1.5 The headings of clauses of this Agreement and the Table of Contents are inserted for
convenience and reference purposes only and shall not in any way affect the interpretation of
this Agreement.
Page 18 of 432
1.1.6 In this Agreement, words denoting the singular include the plural and vice-versa, words
denoting persons include corporation, partnerships or other legal persons and references to any
Party or person include references to its respective successors and authorized assignees.
1.1.7 The words “include” and “including” are to be construed without limitation and shall be deemed
to be followed by “without limitation” or “but not limited to” whether or not they are followed by
such phrases.
1.1.8 References to “construction” or “building” include, unless the context otherwise requires,
investigation, design, engineering, procurement, delivery, transportation, installation,
processing, fabrication, testing, commissioning and other activities incidental to the
construction, and “construct” or “build” shall be construed accordingly.
1.1.9 References to “development” include, unless the context otherwise requires, construction,
renovation, refurbishing, augmentation, upgradation and other activities incidental thereto, and
“develop” shall be construed accordingly.
1.1.10 Any reference to any period of time shall mean a reference to Indian Standard Time.
1.1.11 Any reference to day shall mean a reference to a calendar day.
1.1.12 References to a “business day” shall be construed as a reference to a day (other than a
Sunday) when the Authority is generally open for business.
1.1.13 References to any date, period or Project Milestone shall mean and include such date, period
or Project Milestone as-may be extended pursuant to this Agreement.
1.1.14 Any reference to any period commencing “from” a specified day or date and “till” or “until” a
specified day or date shall include both such days or dates; provided that if the last day of any
period computed under this Agreement is not a business day, then the period shall run until the
end of the next business day.
1.1.15 A reference to “crores” is a unit of ten million (10,000,000) and a reference to “lakhs” is a unit of
one hundred thousand (100,000).
1.1.16 Save and except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, any reference, at any time, to any
agreement, deed, instrument, license or document of any description shall be construed as
reference to that agreement, deed, instrument, license or other document as amended, varied,
supplemented, modified or suspended at the time of such reference; provided that this Sub-
Article (s) shall not operate so as to increase liabilities or obligations of the Authority hereunder
or pursuant hereto in any manner whatsoever.
1.1.17 Any agreement, consent, approval, authorization, notice, communication, information or report
required under or pursuant to this Agreement from or by any Party or the Technical Auditor
shall be valid and effective only if it is in writing under the hand of a duly authorized
representative of such Party or the Technical Auditor, as the case may be, in this behalf and not
otherwise.
1.1.18 Quantified Liquidated Damages and deductions payable by a Party to another Party under this
Agreement are mutually agreed genuine pre-estimates of loss and damage likely to be suffered
and incurred by the Party entitled to receive the same and do not in any way constitute a
penalty.
1.1.19 The rule of construction, if any, that a contract should be interpreted against the parties
responsible for the drafting and preparation thereof, shall not apply.
Page 19 of 432
1.1.20 Any word or expression used in this Agreement shall, unless otherwise defined or construed in
this Agreement, bear its ordinary English meaning and, for these purposes, the General
Clauses Act 1897 shall not apply.
1.2 Priority of agreements, clauses and schedules
1.2.1 The Schedules and Recitals to this Agreement and the Request for Proposals (“RFP”) forms an
integral part of this Agreement and will be in full force and effect as though they were expressly
set out in the body of this Agreement.
1.2.2 This Agreement, and all other agreements and documents forming part of or referred to in this
Agreement are to be taken as mutually explanatory and, unless otherwise expressly provided
elsewhere in this Agreement, the priority of this Agreement and other documents and
agreements forming part hereof or referred to herein shall, in the event of any conflict between
them, be in the following:
a) this Agreement;
b) the Schedules of this Agreement;
c) the latest and amended Financial Proposal of the Selected Bidder as accepted by the
Authority;;
d) the Letter of Award (LOA) issued to the Selected Bidder;
e) the written clarifications, if any, issued to the bidders and
f) the RFP and all other agreements and documents forming part of the bidding documents
published by the Authority.
1.2.3 Subject to the provisions of Article 1.2.2, in case of ambiguities or discrepancies within this
Agreement, the following shall apply:
a) between two or more Article of this Agreement, the provisions of a specific Article relevant to
the issue under consideration shall prevail over those in other Articles;
b) between the Articles of this Agreement and the Schedules, the Articles shall prevail;
c) between any two Schedules, the Schedule relevant to the issue shall prevail;
d) between any value written in numerals and that in words, the latter shall prevail;
e) between the dimension scaled from the Designs and Drawings and its specific written
dimension, the latter shall prevail;
f) between the written description on the Designs and Drawings and the Technical
Specifications, the latter shall prevail.
1.3 Joint and several liability
1.3.1 The Lead Member and other Members shall, without prejudice to the provisions of this
Agreement, be deemed to be jointly and severally liable to the Authority for the performance of
the obligations of the Operator under this Agreement.
Page 20 of 432
2. SCOPE OF THE PROJECT
2.1 Project Period

2.1.1 This Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date and shall continue in full force and effect
during the Project Period till the Expiry Date.
2.1.2 Extension of Project Period
a) This Agreement may be extended beyond the Expiry Date, upon agreement of the Authority
and the Operator. Such an extension may be requested by either the Operator or the
Authority not later than three (3) months before the Scheduled Expiry Date.
b) Upon receipt of a request for extension under Clause 1.2.1, the Parties shall endeavor to
take a final decision on extension of the Project Period within a period of 180 days from the
date of receipt of such request.
2.2 Project Phases
2.2.1 The Project Period has been divided into the following phases:
a) the Start Up Period will commence from the Effective Date (ED) and will end on the day
before the Transition Commencement Date (TCD).
b) the Transition Period will start from Transition Commencement Date (TCD) and will end on
the day before the Sustaining Period Commencement Date (SPCD);
c) the Sustaining Period will start from Sustaining Period Commencement Date (SPCD) and
will end on Expiry Date.
2.3 Scope of the Project
2.3.1 The scope of the Project (the “Scope of the Project”) shall include performance and execution
by the Operator of works, services and activities required to be performed and executed by the
Operator confirming to the Performance Standards and Technical Standards, within/during the
period and on the terms mentioned in the Agreement including the following:
a) the studies, analysis and assessment of the Existing Project Facilities and the conditions
prevailing in the Service Area, to be conducted by the Operator, during the Start Up Period
and Transition Period along with other obligations as set out in Operator Obligations;
b) the operation and maintenance of the relevant Project Facilities during the Transition Period
as per the Progressive Handover of Project Facilities in accordance with Agreed THP; along
with other obligations as set out in Operator Obligations;
c) rehabilitation, expansion and repair of the Existing Project Facilities and construction of the
Additional Project Facilities during the Transition Period in accordance with the Technical
Specifications;
d) provide service pipeline up to the water meter, stopcock and meter box in each of the
Customer premises in the Service Area. All works beyond the water meter and before the
Sewerage Connection will be the responsibility of the Customer.
e) operation and maintenance of the Project Facilities during the Transition Period and the
Sustaining Period;
Page 21 of 432
f) billing of User Charges during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period in the entire
Service Area;
g) rectification of Defects in the relevant Project Facilities during the Defects Liability Period;
and
h) performance and fulfilment of all other obligations of the Operator in accordance with the
provisions of this Agreement and matters incidental thereto or necessary for the
performance of any or all of the obligations of the Operator under this Agreement.
2.4 Activity Chart

2.4.1 Without in any manner limiting the scope of Operator Obligations the following major activities
and document submissions will form part of the obligations of the Operator under the
Agreement.
2.4.2 List of major activities:
Time Period
Activity
(unless extended in terms of this Agreement)
Scheduled Transition Commencement Date
Achievement of Transition Period
(Scheduled TCD) defined as six (6) months from
Conditions
the Effective Date
Completion of Transition Period 15 days prior to the Scheduled Transition
Conditions Commencement Date (TCD)
Progressive Handover of Existing
Project Facilities by Operator to start Transition Commencement Date (TCD)
from
Commencement of Construction of
Additional Project Facilities to start Transition Commencement Date (TCD)
from
Completion of Construction of Scheduled Sustaining Period Commencement
Additional Project Facilities Date (Scheduled SPCD)
Completion of Sustaining Period 15 days prior to the Scheduled Sustaining Period
Conditions Commencement Date (SPCD)
Commencement of operation of
Existing Project Facilities and Sustaining Period Commencement Date (SPCD)
Additional Project Facilities
End of Project Period Expiry Date
2.4.3 List of submissions:

Document submission Key Date
Start Up Period Performance
Before the Effective Date
Security
Transition Period Performance 21 (twenty one) days prior to the Scheduled
Security Transition Commencement Date (TCD)
21 (twenty one) days prior to the Scheduled TCD (if
Mobilization Advance Security
applicable)
Sustaining Period Performance 21 (twenty one) days prior to the commencement of
Page 22 of 432
Document submission Key Date

Security the Scheduled Sustaining Period Commencement
Date (SPCD)
Draft – Within one hundred twenty days (120) from
Effective Date
Service Improvement Plan (SIP)
Final – Within one hundred eighty days (180) from
Effective Date
Draft – Within one hundred twenty days (120) from
Integrated Management Information
Effective Date
System (IMIS)
Final launch – 15 days prior to Scheduled TCD
30 days prior to Progressive Handover Date for a
Detailed Design and Drawings
Hydraulic Zone
Executed Escrow Agreement Within ninety (90) days from the Effective Date
2.4.4 List of periodic document submission: In addition to the reports listed elsewhere in the
Agreement, the Operator will submit to the Authority the following reports duly verified by the
engineering institute of repute or any other persons / agency as appointed by the Authority and
/ or Technical Auditor, as the case may be, on operations:
Document
Frequency Content
submission
To be submitted within 270
days of start of year for the To update the Agreed SIP as per requirements of
Annual SIP following year during the Schedule 4A in the Transition Period and
Transition Period and Sustaining Period.
Sustaining Period
To be submitted as per requirements of
Schedule 4A, 4B and 4C covering cumulative
progress since Effective Date on all components
Monthly progress To be submitted within 15
and progress in the current month. The report will
report days of end of the month
also cover status of achievement of various
Performance Standards so as to adjust
performance fee payments due to the Operator.
To be submitted as per requirements of
Schedule 4A, 4B, and 4C including monthly
water account with details of production,
distribution and sales; flow and pressure logs,
water consumption, NRW, leakage, revenue
collection; energy consumption, new Customers,
Monthly Operational Performance Standards achieved or maintained
To be submitted within 7
Performance during the month; exceptional reports on
days of end of the month
Report emergencies; etc.;
The report will include a separate section on the
performance of each DMA with the assessment
of physical and commercial losses in liters per
connection per day including minimum night
flows, Customer complaints on no-water, low
pressure and poor water quality.
Page 23 of 432
Document
Frequency Content
submission
The report will provide for tracking of
performance differentiated by economic status
for project Performance Standards relating to
new connections, access to Continuous 24x7
Pressurized Water Supply, disruptions in supply,
billing and Customer complaints.
Page 24 of 432
3. CONDITION PRECEDENT
3.1 Condition Precedent to be fulfilled by the Authority before the Effective Date
3.1.1 Appoint a nodal officer or the PBC Engineer
3.1.2 Grant access to the Operator and its personnel to the relevant Project Facilities for conducting
initial assessment of the Existing Project Facilities and other conditions at the Service Area;
3.1.3 Obtain Authority Applicable Permits listed in Schedule 8;
3.2 Condition Precedent to be fulfilled by the Operator before the Effective Date
3.2.1 The Operator shall submit the Start Up Period Performance Security to the Authority before the
Effective Date.
3.3 Appointment
3.3.1 Subject to (a) fulfilment of Condition Precedent by the Authority, (b) fulfilment of Condition
Precedent by the Operator, and (c) other provisions of this Agreement, Applicable Laws and
Applicable Permits, the Authority hereby appoints the Operator and the Operator accepts its
appointment to undertake the Project.
3.3.2 As a part of the Project, the Operator agrees to undertake baseline surveys and completely
familiarize itself with the operation of the Existing Project Facilities and provision of water supply
system and levels of service provision by the Authority and its agencies in the Service Area
during the Start Up Period, carry out the comprehensive assessment of the Existing Project
Facilities and submit Comprehensive Assessment Report, develop the Service Improvement
Plan, and carry out the other Operator Obligations in accordance with this Agreement.
3.3.3 Subject to and in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, Applicable Laws and
Applicable Permits, the Authority grants an exclusive right to the Operator to undertake civil
works for developing Additional Project Facilities, operation and maintenance of Project
Facilities within the Effective Service Area in conformity with the Agreed SIP, the Technical
Specifications and the Key Standard Performance (the “Assignment”).
3.3.4 The Operator accepts the Assignment and agrees to implement the Project subject to and in
accordance with the terms and conditions set forth herein.
3.3.5 The Operator here by accepts to perform the activities and obligations set out in Operator
Obligations subject to fulfillment or waiver of the Transition Period Conditions and Sustaining
Period Conditions of Authority.
3.3.6 Subject to and in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, an exclusive assignment is
hereby granted which shall oblige or entitle or permit as a licensee of the Authority (as the case
may be) the Operator to:
a) access the Project Facilities during the Start Up Period;
b) Right of Way to the relevant Service Area during the Project Period for the purpose of and to
the extent conferred by the provisions of this Agreement;
c) Rehabilitate, upgrade, replace Existing Project Facilities and construct the Additional Project
Facilities during the Transition Period;
d) manage, operate and maintain the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area during the
Transition Period, as per the Agreed THP and Agreed SIP;
Page 25 of 432
e) manage, operate and maintain the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area during the
Sustaining Period;
f) perform and fulfil all of the Operator Obligations under and in accordance with this
Agreement;
g) save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, bear and pay all costs, expenses
and charges in connection with or incidental to the performance of the Operator Obligations
under this Agreement;
h) neither assign, transfer or sublet or create any lien or Encumbrance on this Agreement, or
the assignment hereby granted or on the whole or any part of the Existing Project Facilities
or the Additional Project Facilities nor transfer, lease or part with possession thereof, save
and except as expressly permitted by this Agreement;
i) bill User Charges from all the Customers during the Transition Period and the Sustaining
Period in the entire Service Area; and
j) It is understood by the Parties that the ownership of the Project Facilities shall, throughout
the Term of the Agreement, will vest in and remain with the Authority and is neither intended
to be transferred, nor being transferred in any manner to the Operator by or under this
Agreement.
Page 26 of 432
4. TRANSITION PERIOD CONDITIONS
4.1 Satisfaction of Transition Period Conditions

4.1.1 Save and except as expressly provided in Article 4, Article 5, Article 6, Article 7, Article 8, Article
9, Article 10, Article 17, Article 26, Article 35 and Article 36, or unless the context otherwise
requires, the respective rights and obligations of the Parties under this Agreement shall be
subject to the satisfaction in full of the conditions specified in this Article 4.2 (the “Transition
Period Conditions of Authority”) and the conditions specified in Article 4.3 (the “Transition
Period Conditions of Operator”).
4.1.2 Each Party shall satisfy or fulfill the Transition Period Conditions within the period specified in
Article 4.1.3 and shall provide the other Party with such reasonable cooperation as may be
required to assist that Party in satisfying its Transition Period Conditions. Notwithstanding
anything, fulfillment of its Transition Period Conditions is an independent obligation of each
Party.
4.1.3 Each Party shall fulfill each of its Transition Period Conditions no later than 15 days prior to the
Scheduled Transition Commencement Date.
4.1.4 The Parties shall notify each other in writing at least once a month on the progress made in
satisfying their respective Transition Period Conditions. Each Party shall promptly inform the
other Party when any of its Transition Period Conditions has been satisfied along with
documents establishing such fulfillment.
4.1.5 Each of the Parties shall by notice to the other Party advise its acceptance or rejection of
fulfilment or waiver of the Transition Period Conditions required to be fulfilled by the other Party,
with a copy to the Technical Auditor within 3 (Three) days of receipt of information under Article
4.1.4. The Technical Auditor shall by the date set out in Article 4.1.3 confirm in writing that the
Transition Period Conditions have been met and indicating, where relevant, which of any
Transition Period Conditions have not been met but waived at least ten days prior to the
Scheduled Transition Commencement Date and give its recommendation to the Authority.
Within three (3) business days of the receipt of Technical Auditor’s recommendation and its
acceptance by the Authority, the Authority shall issue a Certificate of Transition
Commencement. The Transition Commencement Date shall be the date immediately following
the date of such certification by the Authority (the “Transition Commencement Date”).
4.1.6 If any Party fails to satisfy any Transition Period Condition that it is required to fulfil for the
Project Facilities by the Scheduled Transition Commencement Date, due to:
(i) Force Majeure Event;
(ii) undue delay by the relevant Government Authority in granting any Applicable
Permit, despite the Party having duly and fully complied with the requirements of
Applicable Laws for procuring such Applicable Permit; or
(iii) delay by the Authority in fulfilling any of its Transition Period Condition or in
performing any other obligation under this Agreement, which impacts the ability of
the Operator to satisfy its Transition Period Condition,
then the Scheduled Transition Commencement Date shall be extended on a day-for-day basis
for the period of such delay, unless otherwise mutually agreed by Parties.
Page 27 of 432
4.1.7 If the Technical Auditor notifies that any of the Operator Transition Period Condition is not
fulfilled (or waived off in writing by the Authority) by the date specified in Article 4.1.5 or, if
applicable, within the period (extended under Article 4.1.6) then the Authority shall have the
right to:
a) give such further period for fulfilling such Transition Period Condition(s); or
b) terminate the Agreement immediately and the provisions related to Operator
Event of Default will be applicable.
4.1.8 If the Technical Auditor confirms that any of the Authority Transition Period Condition has not
been fulfilled or waived in writing by the date specified in Article 4.1.5 (as extended under
Article 4.1.6, as the case may be) but that such non-fulfillment will not have a Material Adverse
Effect on the Operator to undertake Operator Obligations, the Operator will be obliged to carry
out its responsibilities to the extent that this is possible and the Technical Auditor will advise the
Authority as to whether any of the responsibilities of the Operator during the Transition Period
should be amended or waived until the relevant Transition Period Condition has been achieved.
4.1.9 If the Technical Auditor confirms that any of the Authority Transition Period Condition(s) has not
been fulfilled or waived in writing by the date specified in Article 4.1.5 (as extended under
Article 4.1.6, as the case may be) and such non-fulfillment will have a Material Adverse Effect
on the Operator to undertake Operator Obligations, the Operator will be excused from
performance of Operator Obligations till fulfillment or waiver of all such Transition Period
Condition(s).
4.1.10 In case of termination of the Agreement by the Authority for reasons mentioned under Article
4.1.6 Operator will be entitled to those parts of costs reasonably incurred by the Operator, as
certified by the Technical Auditor, for preparation of draft SIP and other activities carried out
during the Start Up Period, the Performance Security(ies) shall be returned to the Operator.
None of the Parties shall be liable to the other for any other costs or charges or damages or
loss, whatsoever under law or otherwise.
4.1.11 To the extent that the Operator has failed to fulfill any of the Operator Transition Period
Condition by the date specified in Article 4.1.5 (as extended in accordance with Article 4.1.6)
except due to reasons specified in Article 4.1.6 (i), (ii) and (iii), the Authority shall be entitled to
forfeit the relevant Performance Securities submitted by the Operator.
4.1.12 Subject to the provisions of Article 4.1.9 upon the termination of this Agreement under this
Article 4.1, the provisions of Article 29 of this Agreement will apply.
4.2 Transition Period Conditions of Authority
4.2.1 The Authority shall fulfil the following the Transition Period Conditions:
a) within 30 (thirty) days from the Effective Date, provide Right of Way to the relevant Project
Facilities for undertaking Operator Obligations in line with the Agreed SIP and Agreed THP;
b) On and from the Effective Date, the Authority shall provide the Operator necessary access
to the relevant Site to enable the Operator and any Operator related Party to inspect and
survey the Existing Project Facilities, to assess the condition of the Existing Project
Facilities, including equipment, spare parts, assets, and other materials and structures
relating to the Existing Project Facilities and available at or existing on the relevant Service
Area.
c) within 30 (thirty) days from the Effective Date, appoint a Technical Auditor who can
undertake the role as an independent project engineer for this Project;
Page 28 of 432
d) within 30 (thirty) days from the Effective Date, provide the following existing database to
the Operator:
(i) list of Existing Project Facilities in the Service Area, both underground and above
ground
(ii) map of the Service Area (as available);
(iii) updated Customer database;
(iv) billing and collection database of User Charges;
(v) location of the Existing Project Facilities on the map;
e) execute the Escrow Agreement within ninety (90) days from the Effective Date;
f) opening of Professional Fee Sub-Account in accordance with Escrow Agreement;
g) opening of SIP Fund Sub-Account in accordance with Escrow Agreement;
h) the termination by the Authority and its agents of existing contracts in respect of water
supply services in accordance with the Agreed THP and the Agreed SIP;
i) review and approve the Agreed SIP (including O&M Plan and SOP) for the Project Facilities,
subject to Article 7.
j) Provide rights in all of the land and facilities that is required for Progressive Handover of
Project Facilities in accordance with the Agreed SIP and Agreed THP;
k) fulfil Handover Conditions in accordance with Article 5 and subject to the Operator fulfilling
the conditions specified in Article 4.3, handover the Existing Project Facilities;
4.3 Transition Period Conditions of Operator
4.3.1 The Operator shall:
a) provide the Mobilization Advance Security to the Authority within 21 days prior to the
Scheduled TCD (if applicable);
b) execute the Escrow Agreement within ninety (90) days from the Effective Date;
c) procure all the relevant Applicable Permits specified in Schedule 8, unconditionally or if
subject to conditions, then all such conditions required to be fulfilled by the date specified
therein shall have been satisfied in full and such Applicable Permits are in full force and
effect, within one hundred fifty (150) days from the Effective Date;
d) deliver to the Authority from the Joint Venture Members and their respective, confirmation of
the correctness of the representations and warranties set forth in Sub-Articles (k), (l) and (m)
of Article 8.1 of this Agreement, within 150 (one hundred fifty) days from the Effective Date;
e) submission of SIP in accordance with Article 6.
4.4 Damages for delay by the Authority

4.4.1 In the event that (i) the Authority does not procure fulfilment of any or all of the Transition Period
Conditions set forth in Article 4.2 within the period specified in respect thereof, and (ii) the delay
has not occurred as a result of breach of this Agreement by the Operator or due to Force
Majeure, the Authority shall pay to the Operator Damages in an amount calculated at the rate of
Page 29 of 432
0.01% (zero point zero one per cent) of the Start Up Period Performance Security for each
day’s delay until the fulfilment of such Transition Period Conditions, subject to the maximum
limit equal to 20% of the aggregate amount of the Start Up Period Performance Security. The
Damages payable under this Article 4.4.1 shall be the sole remedy available to the Operator for
delay by the Authority.
4.4.2 Provided that in the event of delay by the Operator in fulfilment of any Transition Period
Conditions specified in Article 4.2, no Damages shall be due or payable by the Authority under
this Article 4.4 until the date on which the Operator shall have fulfilled of the Transition Period
Conditions specified in Article 4.2.
4.5 Damages for delay by the Operator
4.5.1 In the event that (i) the Operator does not procure fulfilment of any or all of the Transition Period
Conditions set forth in Article 4.3 within the period specified in respect thereof, and (ii) the delay
has not occurred as a result of failure to fulfil the obligations under Article or other breach of this
Agreement by the Authority, or due to Force Majeure, the Operator shall pay to the Authority
Damages in an amount calculated at the rate of 0.10% (zero point one percent) of the Start Up
Period Performance Security for each day’s delay until the fulfilment of such Transition Period
Conditions. Provided, however, that the Damages payable hereunder shall be subject to the
maximum limit equal to 20% of the aggregate amount of the Start Up Period Performance
Security and upon reaching such limit, the Authority may, in its sole discretion may terminate
the Agreement due to Operator Event of Default.
4.5.2 In the event of delay solely due to delay by the Authority in procuring fulfilment of the Transition
Period Conditions specified in Article 4.3 no Damages shall be due or payable by the Operator
under this Article 4.5 until the date on which the Authority shall have procured fulfilment of the
Transition Period Conditions specified in Article 4.3.
4.6 Deemed Termination upon delay
4.6.1 Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 4.4 and Article 4.5, and subject to the provisions of
Article 9.2, the Parties expressly agree that in the event the Transition Period Conditions as set
out in Article 4.2 and Article 4.3 are not completed, for any reason whatsoever, within six
months from the Effective Date or the extended period provided in accordance with this
Agreement, all rights, privileges, claims and entitlements of the Operator under or arising out of
this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived by, and to have ceased with the
concurrence of the Operator, and this Agreement shall be deemed to have been terminated
subject to provisions of this Agreement. It is clarified that if the Agreement is terminated
because of reasons not attributable to the Operator, the Operator shall be entitled to receive
payment for eligible fees for the services provided till the termination of Agreement.
4.6.2 Provided, however, that in the event the non-occurrence of the Transition Commencement Date
is for reasons attributable to the Operator, the Start Up Period Performance Security, if any, of
the Operator shall be encashed and appropriated by the Authority towards Damages thereof.
Page 30 of 432
5. PROGRESSIVE HANDOVER OF EXISTING PROJECT FACILITIES DURING THE TRANSITION

PERIOD
5.1 Progressive Handover of the Existing Project Facilities during the Transition Period
5.1.1 The Authority shall handover the select Hydraulic Zones with relevant Existing Project Facilities
to the Operator in accordance with the Agreed THP (“Progressive Handover”), on ‘as is
where is basis’ in a progressive manner.
5.1.2 In line with the Agreed THP, the Parties will agree on dates (“Progressive Handover Date”)
on which the Authority will undertake Progressive Handover of select Hydraulic Zones identified
as a part of the Agreed THP. On the Progressive Handover Date, the Authority will handover
operations and maintenance of all Project Facilities in those Hydraulic Zones to the Operator. It
is clarified that different Hydraulic Zones may have different Progressive Handover Date.
5.1.3 Upon Progressive Handover of the Hydraulic Zones, the Operator shall be responsible for
operations and maintenance, rehabilitating, upgrading, replacing Existing Project Facilities and
constructing the Additional Project Facilities in those Hydraulic Zones in accordance with Article
6 and Article 12.
5.1.4 Upon Progressive Handover of the Hydraulic Zones, the Operator will be obliged to maintain
and operate those Project Facilities in order to at least meet the performance standards and the
service standards as defined in Baseline Study for those Hydraulic Zones. If the performance of
the Operator is lower than the performance standards and the service standards as set out in
Baseline Study for a specific Hydraulic Zones for a period of seven consecutive days, the
Operator shall not be eligible to receive any O&M Fees for the month for related to those
Hydraulic Zones.
5.2 Handover Conditions for the Authority

5.2.1 The Authority shall fulfil the conditions (“Handover Conditions”) mentioned in Article 5.2. The
handover of the facilities shall commence from at least 30 (thirty) days prior to the Scheduled
Progressive Handover Date of the respective Project Facilities, and shall be completed in
accordance with the Agreed THP.
5.2.2 The Authority shall transfer or cause to be transferred to the Operator, any existing contract
pertaining to Existing Project Facilities that the Operator has chosen to take over and terminate
all other existing contracts pertaining to Existing Project Facilities, except the technology license
agreements, if any, entered into with the technology providers for the Existing STPs, and
equipment supply contracts which have subsisting warranty obligations.
5.2.3 The Authority shall provide copies of or transfer (wherever relevant) all Applicable Permits
(including the Authority Applicable Permits) obtained for the Existing Project Facilities to the
Operator for the relevant Project Facilities handed over to the Operator.
5.2.4 The Authority shall remove all employees and workmen engaged by the Authority or the
relevant Government Authority or any contractor of the Authority or relevant Government
Authority, from the relevant Project Facilities handed over to the Operator.
5.3 Handover Conditions for the Operator

5.3.1 The Operator shall fulfil the following conditions for take Progressive Handover of the select
Hydraulic Zones as per the Agreed THP. The handover of the Project Facilities shall commence
Page 31 of 432
from at least 30 (thirty) days prior to the Scheduled Progressive Handover Date of respective
Project Facilities, and shall be completed in accordance with the Agreed THP.
5.3.2 The Operator shall at least 60 (sixty) days prior to the Scheduled Progressive Handover Date
submit to the Authority a baseline for level of services (“Baseline Study”) offered in Hydraulic
Zone being handed over to the Operator. During this phase, the Operator shall study the water
transmission, water distribution network within the selected Hydraulic Zones so as to establish
and improve network management and for ensuring the achievement of minimum Performance
Standards as specified under this Agreement. The Baseline Study will clearly define various
performance standards and service standard for each Hydraulic Zone, which are scheduled to
be handed over to the Operator. The Baseline Study will be approved by the Authority within 30
(thirty) days of submission by the Operator. The format for Baseline Study to be undertaken by
the Operator shall be prepared and provided by the Technical Auditor and shall be approved by
the PBC Engineer.
5.3.3 One of the main activities of this Project is the identification of District Metered Areas (DMAs)
boundaries in the Service Area. The Operator shall at least 60 (sixty) days prior to the
Scheduled Progressive Handover Date submit to the Authority and the Technical Auditor,
details of DMA boundaries. The population projections and ward wise water demand as
included in indicative hydraulic model will be applicable. The Operator has to confirm the
hydraulic model and define DMA boundaries actually on ground, which have been selected in
such a way that one DMA includes 500 to 2000 connections.
a) The Operator shall design water supply distribution network on DMA basis to ensure
equitable, continuous, pressurized water supply to the Customers by using the
hydraulic model and simulating both present (year 2019) and future (year 2050)
conditions.
b) With approval of the Authority, the Operator may revise the number of DMAs as per
site condition and shall serve all connections in Service Area.
c) The scope of work for creation of each DMA includes (but is not limited to):
(i) detailed site investigations, updating of distribution network drawings, complete

with all trial holes that might be required to verify pipe connections (and the
consequent re-instatement of road, sidewalk or any other surface);
(ii) Hydraulic modeling as basis for optimum DMA design and determination of feeder
main diameter. The Operator shall use either Water Gems or any equivalent
software that has the same functionality or better.
(iii) Verification and finalisation of suggested DMA boundaries; locating of existing
boundary valves, functioning and tightness checks of existing boundary valves,
identification of location for additional boundary valves to be installed identification
of locations where the pipes will be disconnected and capped.
(iv) Selection of location for DMA inflow chamber (if any);

(v) Identification of customer service connections that have to be re-located from a
trunk or distribution main outside the DMA (or in a neighboring DMA) to a
distribution main inside the DMA;
(vi) Site survey for DMA inflow point and location of underground assets.
Page 32 of 432
submit to the Authority and the Technical Auditor, a Detailed Design and Drawings (the
“Detailed Design and Drawings”) for the works to be undertaken within the Hydraulic Zone
being taken over by the Operator. The Operator shall seek approval of the Detailed Design and
Drawings from the Technical Auditor and PBC Engineer as provided in the Article 5.5 of this
Agreement. Detailed Design and Drawings shall include (but not limited to):
a) all new water pipelines that have to be laid and old new water pipelines that have to
be replaced. The Operator shall strive to use as much of the old water pipelines as
possible which it thinks does not need replacement or repair;
b) location details of old and new boundaries valves that have to be replaced / installed
c) design of DMA inflow point arrangement, complete design of pressure reducing valve
chamber with all pipe work and structures; design of inflow meter and PRV
specifications; location and design of above ground instrumentation box and design of
electromagnetic flow meter,
d) standard design and map with location of all customer connections to be relocated
e) details of all other civil, mechanical, installation or plumbing works that might be
required
submit to the Authority an updated version of the Transition Handover Plan for the next one
year from the Scheduled Progressive Handover Date. The updated THP shall be approved by
the Authority within 30 days of such submission.
5.3.6 The Operator shall at least 60 (sixty) days prior to the Schedule Progressive Handover Date
deploy its staff in the Hydraulic Zone to be handed over. The purpose of the Operator staff is to
work alongside the Authority staff or its agents, and operate and maintain the Hydraulic Zone
which are scheduled to be handed over to the Operator after 60 (sixty) days. During this period,
the Operator’s staff shall work closely with the Authority’s staff or its agents and built its
understanding about the Hydraulic Zone to ensure smooth transition of services from Authority
to Operator. The Operator shall at least 15 (fifteen) days prior to the Scheduled Progressive
Handover Date submit to the Authority, a self-certification confirming that the Operator is
prepared to take over the operations and maintenance of the Hydraulic Zone. The self-
certification shall also confirm that the Operator will ensure a level of performance standards or
service standards equivalent to or better than the performance standards or service standard
established in the Baseline Study undertaken for that Hydraulic Zone.
5.4 Fulfilment of Handover Conditions

5.4.1 Upon fulfilment of the Handover Conditions set out in Article 5.2 and Article 5.3 above, the
Parties shall notify the other Party of the completion of the Handover Conditions. Upon
acceptance of handover condition by both the parties, the Authority shall, initiate the handover
process at least seven within 7 days preceding the Scheduled Progressive Handover Date.
5.5 Preparation of Detailed Designs and Drawings

5.5.1 The Operator shall be responsible for preparation of Detailed Designs and Drawings (“Detailed
Designs and Drawings”) for the rehabilitation of Existing Project Facilities and construction of
Additional Project Facilities. The Operator shall comply with following provisions:
Page 33 of 432
a) The Operator shall prepare and submit at its cost, charges and expenses, the Detailed
Designs and Drawings in conformity with the Technical Specifications, with reasonable
promptness and in such sequence as is consistent with the Implementation Schedule, 3
(three) copies of Detailed Designs and Drawings with respect to all relevant Project Facilities
to the Authority and the Technical Auditor for review.
b) By submitting the Detailed Designs and Drawings for review to the Technical Auditor and the
Authority, the Operator shall be deemed to have represented that it has determined and
verified that the design and engineering, including the field construction criteria related
thereto, are in conformity with the Scope of the Project, the Agreed SIP, Technical
Specifications, Applicable Laws and Good Industry Practice.
c) Within thirty (30) days of the receipt of the Detailed Designs and Drawings, the Technical
Auditor and the Authority shall review the same and convey its observations to the Operator
with particular reference to their conformity or otherwise with the Scope of the Project and
the Technical Specifications.
d) If the Technical Auditor and the Authority are able to provide observations on the Designs
and Drawings, and those observations indicate that the Detailed Designs and Drawings are
not in conformity with the Scope of the Project or the Technical Specifications, such Detailed
Designs and Drawings shall be revised by the Operator and re-submitted to the Technical
Auditor and the Authority for review. The Technical Auditor and the Authority shall give their
observations, if any, within seven (7) days of receipt of the revised Detailed Designs and
Drawings.
e) Without prejudice to the foregoing provisions of this Article 5.5, the Operator shall submit to
the Authority for review and comments, its Detailed Designs and Drawings relating to the
Project, and the Authority shall have the right but not the obligation to undertake such review
and provide its comments, if any. The provisions of this Article 5.5 shall apply mutatis
mutandis to the review and comments hereunder.
f) No review and/or observation of the Technical Auditor and the Authority and/or its failure to
review and/or convey its observations on any Detailed Designs and Drawings shall not
relieve the Operator of its obligations and liabilities under this Agreement in any manner nor
shall the Technical Auditor or the Authority be liable for the same in any manner.
Notwithstanding the review by the Technical Auditor and the Authority, the Operator shall be
solely responsible for any defect and/or deficiency in the Detailed Designs and Drawings
relating to the Project or any part thereof and accordingly the Operator shall at all times
remain responsible for its obligations under this Agreement.
g) Any review of the Detailed Designs and Drawings conducted by the Authority is solely for
the Authority’s own information and that by conducting such review, the Authority does not
accept any responsibility for the same.
h) The Operator shall in no way represent to any Person that, as a result of any review by the
Technical Auditor, or the Authority has accepted responsibility for the engineering or
soundness of any work relating to the Project Facilities and services or part thereof carried
out by the Operator and the Operator shall, in accordance with the provisions of this
Agreement, be solely responsible for the technical feasibility, operational capability and
reliability of the Project Facilities and services or any part thereof.
Page 34 of 432
6. OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS
6.1 General Obligations of the Operator
6.1.1 The Operator shall comply with all Applicable Laws and procure and maintain all Applicable
Permits (including renewals as required) other than obtaining the Authority Applicable Permits
required for the performance of its obligations under this Agreement.
6.1.2 Save and except where this Agreement or Applicable Laws specifically require the Operator to
adopt higher or stringent levels or standards, the Operator shall, in discharge of all its
obligations under this Agreement, conform with and adhere to Good Industry Practice at all
times.
6.1.3 The Operator shall, at its own cost and expense, in addition to and not in derogation of its
obligations elsewhere set out in this Agreement:
a) make, or cause to be made, necessary applications to the relevant Government
Instrumentalities with such particulars, documents and details as may be required for
obtaining Applicable Permits, and obtain and keep in force and effect Applicable Permits in
conformity with Applicable Laws;
b) perform and fulfil its obligations under this Agreement;
c) ensure and procure that its sub-contractors comply with all Applicable Permits and
Applicable Laws in the performance by them of any of the Operator Obligations under this
Agreement.
6.1.4 The Operator shall promptly remedy any and all loss or damage to the Project Facilities during
the Defects Liability Period arising out of or resulting from the reasons specified in Article 34.3,
entirely at the Operator’s cost.
6.1.5 The Operator shall, promptly remedy any and all loss or damage to the Project Facilities during
the Transition Period, and the Sustaining Period, save and except to the extent that any such
loss or damage shall have arisen solely on account of any default or neglect of the Authority or
on account of a Force Majeure Event, in accordance with Article 26. .
6.1.6 Without prejudice to Operator’s specific obligations under the Start Up Period, the Transition
Period and the Sustaining Period, the Operator shall have the following general obligations as
they may be applicable during the Start Up Period, the Transition Period and the Sustaining
Period:
a) To provide service pipeline up to the water meter, stopcock and meter box in each of the
Customer premises in the Service Area. All works beyond the water meter and before the
Sewerage Connection will be the responsibility of the Customer.
b) to rehabilitate, replace, upgrade, construct, operate and maintain, the Project Facilities, as
the case may be, and provide water supply services in accordance with this Agreement, and
carry out its obligations with all due diligence, efficiency, and economy, in accordance with
Good Industry Practices, and to observe sound management practices, and employ
appropriate advanced technology and safe methods;
c) to undertake the operations and maintenance of the Existing Project Facilities in Effective
Service Area from the respective Progressive Handover Date during the Transition Period,
undertake designing, engineering, procurement, construction, operation and maintenance of
the Project Facilities and observe, fulfil, comply with and perform all its obligations set out in
Page 35 of 432
this Agreement or arising hereunder on the terms and subject to conditions mentioned in this
Agreement;
d) to always act, in respect of any matter relating to this Agreement, as faithful service provider
to the Authority, and at all times to support and safeguard the Authority’s legitimate interests
in any dealings with sub-contractors / service providers or third parties;
e) to ensure that all materials and workmanship used in the course of performance under the
Agreement confirms to the relevant standards of Bureau of Indian Standards and in the
absence of which to the relevant standards of International Standards Organization;
f) to maintain all Applicable Permits to operate the Project Facilities provide water supply
services throughout the Transition Period and the Sustaining Period;
g) to maintain all records and data in up to date format on IMIS and other information systems
as per Schedule 21 or as required by the Authority;
h) to permit the Technical Auditor or any agents of the Authority to conduct monthly, quarterly
and annual audits to regularly review the performance of the Operator under the Agreement
from the Effective Date till the Expiry Date, and to fully cooperate with the Technical Auditor
in the conduct of audit and review exercises and checks as may be required under this
Agreement and shall immediately provide all requested information and documents to the
Technical Auditor;
i) to permit the Technical Auditor or any agents of the Authority, during Project Period, to
review the data, analysis, and design computations which support the Operator’s proposals
in the SIP, and shall fully cooperate with the Technical Auditor in the conduct of any such
review;
j) to permit the engineering institute of repute (e.g. IITs) or any other persons / agency as
appointed by the Authority, during the Project Period, to review the data, analysis, and
design computations which support the proposals identified by Operator in the SIP, and to
fully cooperate with the engineering institute of repute (e.g. IITs) or any other persons /
agency as appointed by the Authority in the conduct of any such review;
k) to update on a periodic basis, the IMIS including the GIS system and all relevant maps and
drawings of the Service Area at a scale of 1:2000 and list of every connection and property
connected to the public water distribution network;
l) to ensure updation on a periodic basis the Customer data in the Service Area on any
additions to the property, addition or reduction in number of residents, usage of water for
intended use etc.;
m) not to engage, directly or indirectly and ensure that its employees do not engage, either
directly or indirectly, in any business or professional activities in India which would conflict
with the provisions under this Agreement;
n) to follow the safeguards requirements for the Contract;
o) to bill User Charges to the Customer of entire Service Area during the Transition Period and
the Sustaining Period.
p) to set-up a website (under the Authority’s website or as may be suggested by the Authority)
which shall provide information regarding plan maintenance, approved monthly performance
reports, select performance indicators, tariff details etc. including a link to online registration
of complaints. The Operator shall maintain the website dedicated to the Project which would
Page 36 of 432
disclose documents as per the norms of the Right to Information Act 2005, as amended. It is
clarified that the Operator shall comply with the directions of the Authority and ownership of
such website (including hardware and software) shall be with the Authority.
q) The Operator shall submit the projections of daily demand for bulk water, to be supplied by
the Authority or its agents at the Designated Reservoirs, on a weekly basis by Wednesday
of every week to meet its obligations and Performance Standards for the next week starting
from Monday. The Authority shall review these projections prepared by the Operator. The
Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand (“Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand”) approved by
the Authority shall be binding on both Parties for the specified period. The Operator will not
be relieved of any of its obligations and Performance Standards due to disagreement on the
Projected Daily Water Demand. However, if the Authority agrees with the Projected Daily
Water Demand submitted by the Operator and is unable to supply the required quantity of
bulk water, the Operator would be relieved of meeting the Performance Standards during
the days when Authority is unable to meet Projected Daily Water Demand. Based on the
approved Projected Daily Water Demand, Operator shall plan the water distribution in the
Effective Service Area.
r) Based on approved Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand to be supplied by the Authority at
the Designated Reservoirs, the Operator shall prepare a Schedule for Daily Water
Distribution (the “Schedule for Daily Water Distribution”) across all Hydraulic Zones and
DMAs. This will not only include Effective Service Area but also include Service Area not
under the purview of the Operator. The Authority or its agents will submit to the Operator an
estimate of the water demand in Service Area not under the purview of the Operator, which
the Operator will consider while preparing the Schedule for Daily Water Distribution and
Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand on a weekly basis. During the Transition Period and the
Sustaining Period, the Operator will be responsible for supplying pre-defined quantity of
water at the Designated Supply Points as per the Schedule for Daily Water Distribution to
the entire Service Area including areas not under the purview of the Operator across
different Hydraulic Zones and DMAs.
s) to permit the Authority or its agents, to implement annual energy audit, annual Customer
satisfaction surveys, annual review of Customer grievance redressal mechanism, and any
other reviews / surveys are required by the Authority from time to time. It is clarified that,
these reviews/ surveys will be conducted by the Authority or its agents and conducting the
above surveys are not part of Operator Obligations.
6.1.7 Drinking Water Quality Standards: The water supplied by the Operator in the Service Area
shall strictly comply with the applicable drinking water quality standards as declared from time
to time by the Central Public Health & Environmental Engineering Organization (CPHEEO),
Government of India, or such other equivalent or similar authority or department of Government
of India. The Operator shall comply with any requirements in relation to sampling, record
keeping or reporting as may be required under Applicable Laws.
6.1.8 Obligation to supply water for public purposes
a) The Operator shall make available free of costs an adequate supply of water for fire-fighting
and other public purposes as the Authority may reasonably request subject to any
considerations arising from the actual technical conditions of the Project Facilities and the
actual and adequate supply of bulk water by the Authority.
b) The volume of water provided by the Operator to the concerned Government body or for any
other public purpose for firefighting or to the Authority shall be deemed to have been billed
Page 37 of 432
to and collected from the relevant authorities or the Authority (if not billed and collected), as
the case may be, for the purposes of calculation of Performance Standards. The quantity of
water required in particular for firefighting and other public purposes shall be limited to a
maximum of 2% (two percent) of the total water supply or such other qualities percentage as
may be approved by the Authority.
6.1.9 Interruptions in water supply services: Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in
any provision of this Agreement, but subject to Applicable Laws:
a) The Operator shall be entitled to request the Authority / Technical Auditor to prohibit or
regulate the use of water by Customers, for any uses other than domestic use, upon the
occurrence of any event not attributable to the Operator and beyond its control (whether or
not such event is an event of Force Majeure under this Agreement) as a result of which the
Operator is unable to provide the entire quantity of water required by the Customers;
b) the Operator shall be entitled to make interruptions in the distribution of water supply
services:
(i) for any pre-approved repair / rehabilitation / replacement works, renewal works,
development of Additional Project Facilities and extension / modification of the
Project Facilities;
(ii) for repairs in the Project Facilities or in the event of accidents requiring an
immediate interruption in which case, the Operator shall be authorized to take any
measures as may be considered necessary.
It is clarified that the Operator shall not be entitled to these interruptions in distribution of
water supply services in case the interruption is due to the reasons attributable to the
Operator. The Performance Standards for the Operator will not be relaxed, if the
interruptions are due to reasons attributable to the Operator.
c) The Operator shall three (3) days in advance notify the Authority / the Technical Auditor and
affected Customers of any interruptions of water supply services in the Service Area to the
extent reasonably practicable and minimize the duration of any such interruption.
6.1.10 Disconnection:
a) Subject to Applicable Laws, in the event that the water supply connection of a Customer
warrants to be disconnected under the relevant Applicable Laws, the Operator shall be
entitled to request the Authority to disconnect such water supply connection stating the
grounds for seeking such disconnection in its request.
b) The Authority shall, if any of the ground under Applicable Laws for exercising the power of
disconnection is made out, take requisite actions towards undertaking such disconnections
in accordance with the relevant Applicable Laws.
c) Such defaulting Customer shall, subject to making the payments of applicable reconnection
charges to the Authority, be eligible to apply for a reconnection upon rectification of the
default, if any, due to which the connection of such defaulting Customer was disconnected
and upon payment in full of the whole of the outstanding amounts (including all previously
billed amounts which are outstanding and interest and/or late payment charges as
prescribed in the water supply regulations and/or the agreement for water provision entered
into with such Customer, as the case may be).
Page 38 of 432
d) However, the Authority shall have the right to direct the Operator to continue the supply of
water to any defaulting Customer by giving written instructions until such time the Authority
directs otherwise. Provided that, upon the Operator notifying the Authority of a defaulting
Customer and seeking disconnection under sub article 6.1.12 (a) hereof and the Authority
directs the Operator to continue the supply and/or services, the amounts due from such
defaulting Customer from the date of such instructions by the Authority for the purposes of
Performance Standards shall be deemed to have been billed and collected.
6.1.11 Overriding powers of the Authority
a) If in the reasonable opinion of the Authority, the Operator is in material breach of its
obligations under this Agreement including the Maintenance Requirements and the O&M
Plan, and such breach is causing or likely to cause hardship to the Customers, the Authority
may, without prejudice to any of its rights under this Agreement including Termination
thereof, by notice require the Operator to take reasonable and adequate measures at the
sole cost of Operator immediately for rectifying or removing such hardship, as the case may
be.
b) In the event that the Operator, upon notice under Article 6.1.11(a), fails to rectify or remove
the hardship within a reasonable period, the Authority shall have the right to undertake itself
or through any third party, such actions and measures as may be deemed necessary by the
Authority for rectifying or removing such hardship or danger; provided that the exercise of
such overriding powers by the Authority shall be of no greater scope and of no longer
duration than is reasonably required hereunder; provided further that all costs and expenses
in relation to such actions and measures shall be borne by the Operator and the Authority
shall be entitled to recover them from the Operator in such manner, including by
enforcement of Performance Securities, as the Authority may deem fit.
c) In the event of a national emergency, civil commotion or any act of Force Majeure, the
Authority may take over the performance of any or all the obligations of the Operator to the
extent deemed necessary by it, and exercise such control over the Project Facilities or give
such directions to the Operator as may be deemed necessary; provided that the exercise of
such overriding powers by the Authority shall be of no greater scope and of no longer
duration than is reasonably required in the circumstances which caused the exercise of such
overriding power by the Authority.
6.1.12 Excuse from performance of obligations: The Operator shall not be considered in breach of
its obligations under this Agreement if any part of the Project Facilities is not available on
account of any of the following for the duration of:
a) an event of Force Majeure;
b) compliance with a request from the Authority or the directions of any Government
Instrumentality, the effect of which is to close all or any part of the Project; or
c) Non-provision of adequate bulk water as per Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand agreed
with the Authority.
Provided, that any such non-availability and particulars thereof shall be notified by the Operator
to the Authority and the Technical Auditor without any delay;
Provided further that the Operator shall keep all unaffected parts of the Project Facilities
operational, to the extent they can be operated safely. The decision of the Technical Auditor will
be final in this regard.
Page 39 of 432
6.1.13 Connection to Users

a) The Operator shall prepare a draft connection policy for water supply services undertaking
sanction and installation of connections to new Customers and submit the same to the
Authority for its review and approval. The connection policy may be reviewed and approved
by the Authority. The approved connection policy (the “Connection Policy”). The
Connection Policy shall be in accordance to the principles of the water policy as may be
applicable in the State of Himachal Pradesh and any bye laws framed by the Authority from
time to time.
b) The Connection Policy will provide installation of the service connection pipeline at the cost
of the Authority before the Customer meter. For water supply, the installation of the service
connection pipeline till the household connection water meters will be the responsibility of
the Operator.
c) In the case of Bulk Water Supply with connections of 25mm diameter or higher, such as
apartments, housing societies, private layouts, institutions, commercial establishments,
hotels and industries within the Service Area, the Operator shall propose installation of a
suitably sized, accurate consumption meter with the automatic meter reading ability
compatible to smart meter technologies. The Operator as part of the revision of water
byelaws should examine and propose necessary amendments for installation of individual
Customer meters for all new apartment or community housing complexes to facilitate any
future legal requirements of billing individual apartment as a separate connection.
d) The Operator, based on the findings during the Start Up Period, and in accordance to the
proposed Connection Policy, shall take measures to identify illegal or un-authorized
connections theft of water, unauthorized tapings and pilferages in all forms and shall inform
the Authority for prevention and regularization of such illegal connections etc.. In the case of
a property with an illegal connection where the property owner accepts the option to
legitimize the connection, the Operator shall facilitate regularization of connection; and if the
property owner does not opt to legalize the connection, shall intimate the Authority for
disconnection of such illegal connections. The Authority shall be responsible for the
disconnection of such illegal connection.
e) The Operator shall develop procedures consistent with the Connection Policy for water
supply connections:
A. (i) sanctioning new service connections; (ii) change of ownership for existing
connections; (iii) division of existing connections consequent to division of property,
change in connection size or consumption quantity, (iv) disconnections in case of
defaulting Customers; and (v) reconnections and (vi) dealing with the un-authorized or
illegal connections;
B. billing for every Customer, reporting all outstanding accounts to the Authority, once in
every month unless otherwise agreed to with the Authority;
C. the issuance of dummy volumetric bills for a period of three (3) months after conversion
to metered connection to allow Customers to understand the implications of volumetric
charging and to undertake improvements to internal plumbing for prevention of leakage
or overflows or wastage; and
D. (i) meter reading procedures and arrangements, (ii) meter reader control (iii) efficient and
accurate meter reading practices (iii) respond to reports of malfunctioning meters from
Customers; (iv) testing and calibrating meters as required (v) replacing old,
Page 40 of 432
malfunctioning or low accuracy meters (vi) replacing all meters older than ten (10) years
and of metrological class lower than Class B; and (iv) how water consumption is
estimated for un-metered Customers.
f) The Operator shall prepare a plan to set up a water meter testing bench for testing and
calibrating water meters.
g) The Operator shall develop a plan to install a water meter at every service connection supplying
water to public and municipal buildings or property directly connected to the public network or
fed from a storage tank filled from the public network.
6.1.14 Damages for breach of Operator Obligations
a) In the event that the Operator fails to rectify or repair any Defect or deficiency set forth in the
Maintenance Requirement as set out in Schedule 25 or fails to perform any of the obligations
set out in Schedule 4A, Schedule 4B, or Schedule 4C, or fails to the Performance Standards as
set out in Schedule 5, it shall be deemed to be in breach of this Agreement. The Authority shall
be entitled to recover Liquidated Damages at the rate stated in Schedule 6 for the respective
breach from the Operator. Recovery of such Liquidated Damages shall be without prejudice to
the rights of the Authority under this Agreement, including the right of Termination thereof on
account of Operator Event of Default.
b) The Damages set forth in Article 6.1.14 (a) may be assessed and specified forthwith by the
Technical Auditor; provided that the Authority may, in its discretion, demand a lesser sum as
Liquidated Damages, if in its opinion, the breach has been cured promptly and the Operator is
otherwise in compliance with its obligations hereunder. The Operator shall pay such Liquidated
Damages forthwith.
6.2 Operator Obligations during Start Up Period
6.2.1 Within three (3) days of the Effective Date, the Operator shall provide the Authority with a list of
the names of the members of its Transition Team.
6.2.2 During the Start Up Period, the Operator shall be responsible for undertaking various surveys,
understanding the existing water supply, preparing the Service Improvement Plan (SIP),
Transition Handover Plan (THP), and such other activities in accordance with the work
requirements of this Agreement and Environmental Code of Practice, Applicable Laws, Good
Industry Practice. The Operator Obligations during the Start Up Period is presented in this
Article 6 and Schedule 4A of this Agreement. A summary of key activities to be undertaken by
the Operator during the Start Up Period is presented below, the details of which are provided in
detail in Schedule 4A
a) Undertaking Surveys and Comprehensive Assessment: Undertaking required technical
surveys and comprehensive assessment of the existing water supply assets as detailed in
Schedule 4A.
b) Submission of Service Improvement Plan (SIP): Preparation of a Service Improvement
Plan including Transition Handover Plan (THP) as detailed in Schedule 4A.
c) Development of Integrated Management Information System (IMIS): Development of
Integrated Management Information System (IMIS) as detailed in Schedule 4A.
6.2.3 During Start Up Period, the Authority may ask the Operator to undertake rehabilitation or
replacement or construction works of activities identified as a part of Infrastructure Improvement
Plan (IIP). Any expenditure on works undertaken by the Operator during the Start Up Period
Page 41 of 432
towards the Project Facilities (towards the cost of works or systems or equipment) will be
considered as part of the Infrastructure Improvement Plan (IIP) and will be met from the Capex
Envelope and Authority is required to bear the expenditure. Cost of such works, systems, or
equipment will be paid by the Authority to Operator. The Operator would be paid for such
works, systems or equipment based on BOQ rates quoted by the Operator as a part of Works
Fees (C) or a Relevant SOR , whichever is lesser.
6.2.4 Undertaking Surveys and Comprehensive Assessment
a) No later than one hundred twenty (120) days from the Effective Date, the Operator shall
complete undertaking the technical surveys, studies and undertaking a comprehensive
assessment of water supply assets in Shimla in accordance with Schedule 4A and Schedule
5.
b) Technical Surveys: Undertaking various Technical Surveys, Topographical Survey,
Customer Survey & Audits of the Service Area, the existing water supply system assets, and
service delivery arrangements in the Service Area;
c) Comprehensive Assessment: Undertaking detailed assessment of existing water supply
assets, including but not limited to, transmission mains, storage structures, pumping
stations, piped distribution network, in terms of its capacity , existing performance and
existing service delivery arrangements;
d) This comprehensive assessment and the surveys will assist the Operator in preparation of
the SIP.
6.2.5 Submission of Service Improvement Plan (SIP)
a) No later than one hundred twenty (120) days from the Effective Date, the Operator shall provide
to the Authority, Technical Auditor and the Advisor the draft Service Improvement Plan (SIP) in
accordance with Schedule 4A and Schedule 5, including its Annexes.
b) The Advisor and Technical Auditor shall review each of the draft SIP and provide to the
Authority with a copy to the Operator any comments and suggested amendments to the draft
SIP as it considers appropriate within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the draft SIP from the
Operator.
c) The Draft SIP will include detailed assessment of priority Hydraulic Zone. The Operator shall
verify the Hydraulic Zones identified by the Authority as per the Schedule 28. The Draft SIP will
include a Draft THP which will define phasing of Progressive Handover of Hydraulic Zones shall
be in line with an indicative schedule provided in Schedule 28. It is clarified that the preparation
of SIP will start from Effective Date and will be updated bi-annually during Transition Period and
annually during Sustaining Period.
d) Within fifteen (15) days of the date on which the Authority receives comments on the draft THP
and draft SIP from the Technical Auditor, the Authority shall review and, in consultation with the
Technical Auditor and the Operator, approve the draft THP and draft SIP, if the
recommendations are in line with the provisions of this Agreement and the Works Fees (C)
furnished by the Operator (Selected Bidder) along with the Bid. In case of any deviations, the
Authority will suggest the Operator to revise the draft THP and the draft SIP. In the event that
the Authority fail to approve the draft THP and the draft SIP or suggest any revisions thereto in
writing to the Operator within the time prescribed under this Article 6.2.5, the draft THP and the
draft SIP submitted by the Operator shall be deemed to be approved.
Page 42 of 432
e) Once the Authority has approved the SIP prepared by the Operator, the draft THP and the draft
SIP shall be approved and shall be designated as “Agreed THP" and “Agreed SIP"
respectively. The Agreed THP and Agreed SIP shall be updated as per the frequency provided
in Article 6.2.5 (c).
f) If the Operator is unable to deliver the draft SIP within the timeframe set out in Article 6.2.5(a),
the Authority may, at its sole discretion, agree to provide additional time to the Operator to
complete these obligations. If the Operator can reasonably demonstrate that the delay in
submission is due to a failure on the part of the Authority or its agents to make Project Facilities
or information requested by the Operator available to the Operator in a timely manner or due to
an event of Force Majeure, then the Operator will be granted such extension of time for delivery
of the draft SIP.
g) If the Operator fails to meet the time line set out in Article 6.2.5(a) (and as extended under
Article 6.2.5(f), if applicable), then:
i. the Operator will use its best endeavors to mitigate any delay in delivery of the draft
SIP;
ii. the date from which to calculate achievement of milestones for purposes of
calculating Performance Fee under Schedule 5 and Schedule 6 shall remain
unchanged/ extended only to the extent of the extension of time;
iii. if such delay is for thirty (30) days or more, then the Authority will have the right to
terminate the Agreement immediately and termination conditions pertaining to
Operator Event of Default shall apply.
iv. if such delay is for less than thirty (30) days, the Operator will be liable to Liquidated
Damages.
h) Within 120 (one hundred and twenty) days of the annual anniversary of Transition
Commencement Date (TCD) during the Transition Period , the Operator shall update the SIP.
Within 300 (three hundred) days of the annual anniversary of Sustaining Period
Commencement Date (SPCD) during the Sustaining Period, the Operator shall update the SIP.
Copy of the updated SIP shall be submitted to the Authority along with a copy to Advisor (if any)
and the Technical Auditor. The content of the updated SIP shall meet the requirements set out
in Schedule 4, Schedule 5, Schedule 12 and Schedule 14. The procedure for approval of SIP as
set out in Article 6.2.5(b) to Article 6.2.5(g).
6.2.6 Development of Integrated Management Information System (IMIS)
a) The objective of the IMIS is to compile and analyze data/ information from the entire WSS
system in the Service Area with respect to all matters including but not limited to asset
management, water quality, service delivery, Customer information, billing and collection,
stores management, financial management, and various other operational parameters in
accordance with the provision of Schedule 4A.
b) The Operator will conceptualize and design a comprehensive Integrated Management
Information System (IMIS) including Functional Specification Requirement and System
Specification Requirements for the IMIS, which are in line with Schedule 27.
c) No later than sixty (60) days from the Effective Date, the Operator shall provide a conceptual
design including Functional Specification Requirement and System Specification
Requirements for the IMIS to the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
Page 43 of 432
d) No later than one hundred and twenty (120) days from the Effective Date, the Operator shall
provide a draft version of the IMIS to the Authority in accordance with Schedule 4A and
Schedule 5.
e) The Authority shall within thirty (30) business days of receipt of the draft version from the
Operator shall review and, in consultation with the Technical Auditor approve or suggest
revisions to the draft version of the IMIS.
f) The Operator shall within 15 days of the receipt of the comments on the draft IMIS shall
incorporate and re-submit the revised draft version of the IMIS.
g) Subject to satisfactory incorporation of the changes suggested, the Authority shall approve
the revised IMIS and authorize the Operator to implement and commission the IMIS.
h) If the Operator is unable to launch the approved IMIS before 15 days of Scheduled TCD, the
Authority may, at its sole discretion, agree to provide additional time to the Operator to
complete these obligations. If the Operator can reasonably demonstrate that the delay is due
to a failure on the part of the Authority or its agents or information requested by the Operator
available to the Operator in a timely manner or due to an event of Force Majeure, then the
Operator will be granted such extension of time for the launch of the IMIS.
i) If the Operator fails to meet the time line set out in Article 6.2.6(d) (and as extended under
Article 6.2.5(h), if applicable), then:
i. the Operator will use its best endeavors to mitigate any delay in the launch of IMIS;
ii. the date from which to calculate achievement of milestones for purposes of
calculating Performance Fee under Schedule 5 and Schedule 6 shall remain
unchanged/ extended only to the extent of the extension of time;
iii. if such delay is for sixty (60) days or more, then the Authority will have the right to
terminate the Agreement immediately and termination conditions pertaining to
Operator Event of Default shall apply.
iv. if such delay is for less than sixty (60) days, the Operator will be liable to Liquidated
Damages.
6.2.7 Liquidated Damages during Start Up Period
a) In the event of a delay in the submission of SIP or THP by the Operator, other than where he
can demonstrate that the delay is due to an error or omission of the Authority or its agents or to
Force Majeure, the Operator shall be liable to pay Liquidated Damages for delay in submission
of the relevant component(s).
b) The amount of Liquidated Damages for such delays would be as per Schedule 6 of this
Agreement.
6.3 Operator Obligations during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period
6.3.1 The Operator shall be responsible for implementing the works as per the Agreed THP and in
accordance with this Agreement. The Operator shall be responsible for undertaking operations
and maintenance of Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area. The Operator Obligations
during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period is presented in this Article 6 and Schedule
4B and Schedule 4C of this Agreement.
6.3.2 The key activities to be undertaken by the Operator during the Transition and Sustaining Period
comprise the following :
Page 44 of 432
a) Implementation of the works in accordance with Agreed THP including all necessary
activities such as planning, procurement, project management, quality assurance,
implementation, construction, contract management and progress monitoring of all
components identified in the Infrastructure Improvement Plan (IIP) in accordance with Article
5 and Article 12. This is applicable for Transition Period.
b) Operation and Maintenance of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area from the
respective Progressive Handover Date in accordance with Article 5, the Operator shall
commence all operations and maintenance activities, and systematically move from
intermittent water supply to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply in line with the
Performance Standards, CPHEEO guidelines, the Environmental Code of Practice and this
Agreement.
c) Customer services: Managing all aspects of Customer services in the Effective Service
Area.
d) Meter reading: Undertaking responsibility for water meter reading for all the connections in
Service Area including the Service Area not under the purview of the Operator. The
Operator shall undertake the meter reading at frequency required under Applicable Laws
and at least at frequency specified in this Agreement.
e) Billing: Undertaking responsibility of generating water and sewerage bills for all Customers
in the entire Service Area. (including the Service Area under the Authority). The Authority
shall undertake the collection of User Charges.
f) Updating SIP: Updation of the SIP (including the O&M Plan, the SOP and the THP) based
on the revealed condition and performance information and other information with the
objective of optimizing the SIP to achieve increased capital and operating efficiency.
g) Progress reporting and Record Keeping: Reporting service performance and progress in
SIP implementation and keeping necessary records of water supply service.
h) Safety and security of Project Facilities: The Operator shall be responsible for safety and
security of water supply assets in the Effective Service Area. The Operator shall ensure
safety and security of assets on best effort basis. In case of damage of Project Facilities in
relevant Effective Service Area, the Operator shall undertake Minor Maintenance at its own
cost.
6.3.3 The Operator shall have the obligations as set forth in this Article 6, Schedule 4B, 4C, Schedule
5, and Schedule 14;
6.3.4 By the end of Transition Period, all the works as set out in the Detailed Designs and Drawings
and Agreed THP, as updated, will be completed and commissioned and all legal Customers in
the Effective Service Area will be provided with Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply
through water connections at the minimum service levels and the Operator will have achieved
all of the required Performance Standards.
6.3.5 On the Expiry Date, all the works as set out in the Agreed SIP, as updated, will be completed
and all Customers in the Effective Service Area will have been provided with Continuous 24x7
Pressurized Water Supply through Customer service connections at the minimum service levels
and the Operator will have achieved all of the required Performance Standards.
6.3.6 On the Expiry Date, all Project Facilities will be handed back to the Authority in accordance with
this Agreement.
Page 45 of 432
6.3.7 Maintenance Expenditure and other Operational Expenditure

a) The Operator shall carry out Major Maintenance / asset replacement activities during the
Transition Period and Sustaining Period so as to meet the Performance Standards. The detailed
plan for Major Maintenance / asset replacement will be detailed in the Detailed Design and
Drawings or the Annual SIP before the beginning of each year by the Operator. For all Major
Maintenance / asset replacement works, the Operator shall be take written approval from the
Authority.
b) Expenditure on Major Maintenance / asset replacement towards the Project Facilities (towards
the cost of works or systems or equipment) will be borne by the Authority. Cost of such works,
systems, equipment or consulting services related to Major Maintenance / asset replacement
activities will be paid by the Authority to Operator.
c) For Major Maintenance / asset replacement activities, the Operator would be paid for such
works, systems or equipment based on BOQ rates quoted by the Operator as a part of Works
Fees (C) or a Relevant SOR, whichever is lesser.
d) The Operator shall undertake any Major Maintenance / asset replacement of any Project
Facilities during the Project Period at its own cost for the assets where the Operator has already
replaced / refurbished the asset once during the Project Period where the cost of such activity
was financed by the Authority or by the Capex Envelop. Any such cost of subsequent Major
Maintenance / asset replacement activities will be borne by the Operator.
e) During Major Maintenance, any costs for alternative supply to Customers affected by such
works (including through water tankers) will borne by the Authority.
f) For the Effective Service Area any expenditure on Minor Maintenance including repairs,
electricity costs of Project Facilities, manpower costs, cost of consumables and other costs
associated with meeting Operator Obligations will be borne by the Operator as regular
operational expenditure.
g) All costs associated with Minor Maintenance, operational expenditure for day to day water
supply operations in Effective Service Area, planning, supervision, quality control and oversight
are considered as included in the O&M Fees quoted by the Operator and will not be met from
the Capex Envelope or will not be borne by the Authority.
h) For the Project Facilities related to water supply outside the Effective Service Area any
expenditure on Minor Maintenance including repairs, electricity costs of Project Facilities,
manpower costs, cost of consumables and other costs associated with operations and
maintenance will be borne by the Authority as Operator has not been handed over those Project
Facilities.
6.3.8 Performance Standards of the Operator during Transition Period and Sustaining Period
a) The Operator shall demonstrate to the Authority the achievement of the Milestones Standards
and Required Service Level Standards set out in Schedule 5 and ensure compliance to the
environment management practices as set out in Schedule 14 and the Technical Auditor shall
certify the date on which the relevant Performance Standards have been achieved.
b) In the event of a reduction in the quality or quantity of water available for any reason in Effective
Service Area:
i. In case of reduction in quantity and quality of water at the inlet of Designated
Reservoir, the Authority shall provide alternative water supply at its own cost.
Page 46 of 432
ii. In case of reduction in quality of water after the inlet of designated reservoir, the
Operator shall provide alternative water supply at its own cost. The Operator shall
provide an alternative free water supply, to affected Customers within 24 hours from
the time of disruption, with a minimum quantity of twenty (20) liters per person per
day for the duration of the reduced quality.
c) The Authority shall, through the Technical Auditor, monitor achievement of Performance
Standards as set out in Schedule 5 and the environment management practices as set out in
Schedule 14 by the Operator in accordance with this Agreement following the agreed
methodology for measurement of the Performance Standards developed by the Technical
Auditor in accordance with this Agreement.
6.3.9 Liquidated Damages and Incentives during Transition Period and Sustaining Period
a) In the event the Operator fails to achieve the Milestones Standards during the Transition
Period as set out Schedule 5, and such failure is not due to (a) Force Majeure, (b) the action
or inaction of the Authority in breach of this Agreement, the Operator shall be liable to
Liquidated Damages for delay in completion of such Milestones as detailed in Schedule 6 for
relevant components.
b) In case, the delay is attributable to the Authority or its agents, then the corresponding period of
delay being attributable to the Authority or its agents would be adjusted with the timelines for
the corresponding Milestone.
c) In the event the Operator fails to achieve the Required Service Level Standards (RSLS), then
the Operator shall be liable to Liquidated Damages for non-achievement of RSLS as detailed
in Schedule 6.
d) The Operator is eligible for Incentives as detailed in Schedule 6.
6.4 Sub-contractors
6.4.1 The Operator shall not subcontract any part of the Operator Obligations unless otherwise
specifically stated in its Bid or without obtaining prior written consent of the Authority.
6.4.2 The Operator shall be responsible for observance by all the Subcontractors of Applicable Laws
and all the provisions of the Agreement. The Operator shall be entirely responsible for the acts
or defaults of any Subcontractor, its representatives or employees, as if they were the acts,
omissions or defaults of the Operator, its representatives or employees and nothing contained
in Article 6.4.1 shall constitute a waiver of the Operator’s obligations under the Agreement. The
Operator shall provide to the Technical Auditor and Authority, certified true copies of all the
executed Subcontracts containing complete terms and conditions, and annexures. The
Operator shall make timely payments to the Subcontractors and resolve all matters and
differences with any Subcontractor speedily, without affecting the performance of works in any
manner. The terms and conditions of the Subcontract are the sole prerogative of the Operator
and are deemed to be included in the Operator Payments.
6.4.3 The terms and conditions of any Subcontract shall impose on the Subcontractor such terms and
conditions of the Agreement as are applicable and appropriate to the part of the works to be
executed by the Subcontractor, to enable the Operator to comply with its obligations under the
Agreement.
Page 47 of 432
6.4.4 Notwithstanding any consent to the selection of the Subcontractor given by the Authority, the
Authority may direct the Operator to terminate any Subcontract and substitute such
Subcontractor with any other subcontractor and the Operator shall be bound to follow such
directions.
6.4.5 The Authority shall, under no circumstances be liable to any Subcontractor and the Operator
shall indemnify and hold harmless the Authority and all of its representatives and the Technical
Auditor from and against all liabilities, costs, claims and demands of whatsoever nature by any
Sub-contractor.
6.4.6 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Agreement, the Authority may at any time require the
Operator to procure from a Subcontractor, a warranty in favor of the Authority in the form to be
provided by the Authority, to the effect that in case of termination of the Agreement, the
Subcontractor shall enter into a direct agreement with the Authority and/or nominee of the
Authority to perform the works or services with regard to the Project on the terms and
conditions as agreed with the Operator under its respective Subcontract.
6.4.7 The Operator shall be solely responsible for the payments to be made to the Subcontractors in
accordance with their respective Subcontracts and ensure proper and uninterrupted
implementation of the Project. The Authority shall not interfere in the day to day management of
the Subcontract between the Operator and its Subcontractor, but if any complaint is received by
the Authority (or the Technical Auditor) from any Subcontractor regarding non-payment or delay
in payment by the Operator to such Subcontractor, then the Authority may, by a written notice,
require the Operator to resolve such complaint within a reasonable period and provide the
details of the steps taken by the Operator to resolve the complaint, to the Authority. If the issue
is not satisfactorily resolved and the details provided by the Operator are not considered
satisfactory, the Authority may, at its sole discretion, make direct payment to the Subcontractor
as per its claim and recover the same from any payment due to the Operator.
6.4.8 Operator shall prepare compliance grid and compliance calendar which shall be provided to the
Authority
6.4.9 In case any investigation / enquiry by any Government agency against the Operator or any of
its Sub-Contractors, Operator including its Sub-contractors shall intimate in advance and its
developments periodically to the Authority. The Authority shall have the right to take such
actions concerning Project as the Authority may in its discretion decide keeping in view the
nature of charges against the Operator or the Sub-Contractor.
6.5 Protection of Environment and Ecological Balance

6.5.1 The Operator shall comply with all environmental and safety requirements stipulated in the
Environmental Code of Practice and with all Applicable Laws, including standards for noise and
vibration levels and airborne and waterborne pollutants. In the event of conflict or inconsistency
among the standards, the more stringent of such standards shall apply.
6.5.2 The Operator shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment and to avoid injury,
damage and nuisance to people and property resulting from pollution, noise and other effects of
its operations in relation to the Project. The Operator shall ensure that air emissions, surface
and effluent discharges from the site during the execution of the works shall not exceed the
values prescribed by Applicable Laws. The Operator shall be responsible and liable for any
stoppage, closure or suspension of the works due to any contravention of Applicable Laws
relating to protection of environment and the Operator shall indemnify and keep the Authority
Page 48 of 432
indemnified against all costs, expenses, charges, losses and damages that the Authority may
incur in this regard.
6.5.3 The Operator shall provide all necessary access, assistance and facilities to enable the
Technical Auditor, Authority’s representatives or a third party such as environment auditor to
monitor and conduct tests at site to verify that the Environmental Code is being properly and
fully implemented.
6.5.4 In the event of the occurrence or suspected occurrence of an incident caused by the execution
of the works or otherwise by the activities of the Operator which could, at any time, result in any
environmental damage or damage to the Project Facilities, the Operator shall:
a) Immediately notify the Authority of such incident and shall comply with any instruction of the
Authority relating to the incident;
b) Take and complete promptly whatever action is required to prevent, mitigate or remedy any
such environmental damage; and
c) Investigate the incident, and following such investigation, report to the Authority the details of
the incident and the cause and results of such incident.
6.5.5 The Operator shall at its own cost and without any claim for monetary compensation or
extension of time, comply with all the obligations under this Article and with the instruction of the
Technical Auditor and the Authority for the protection of the environment.
6.5.6 The Operator shall save harmless and indemnify and keep indemnified the Authority in respect
of all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges or expenses of whatsoever nature arising
out of claims for environmental damage by the Operator or in relation to any breach by the
Operator of its obligations under this Article.
6.5.7 The Operator shall maintain ecological balance by preventing deforestation, water pollution and
defacing of natural landscape. The Operator shall ensure execution of the works in such
manner so as to prevent any avoidable destruction, scarring or defacing of natural surrounding
in the vicinity of the Effective Service Area. In respect of ecological balance, the Operator shall
observe the following conditions:
a) Where destruction, scarring, damage or defacing may occur as a result of the execution of the
works, the same shall be repaired, replanted or otherwise corrected at the Operator's
expense. The site shall be smoothened and graded to conform to natural appearance of the
landscape as directed by the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
b) All trees and shrubs, which are not specifically required to be cleared or removed for the
execution of the works, shall be preserved and shall be protected from any damage. Special
care shall be exercised where trees or shrubs are exposed to injuries by construction
equipment, excavating, dumping, chemical damage, etc. The Operator shall adequately
protect such trees by use of protective barriers or other methods approved by the Technical
Auditor. Trees shall not be used for anchorage and all injured trees and shrubs shall be
restored, as nearly as practicable, without delay, to their original condition at Operator's
expenses.
c) Excessive emission of dust into the atmosphere will not be permitted during manufacture,
handling and storage of concrete aggregates materials and the Operator shall use such
methods and equipment as are necessary for collection and disposal or prevention of dust
during the execution of the works. The Operator's method of storing and handling cement
shall also include means of eliminating atmospheric discharge of dust. Equipment and
Page 49 of 432
vehicles that give objectionable emission of exhaust gases shall not be operated at the site by
the Operator.
6.6 Confidentiality /Secrecy

6.6.1 The Operator shall hold in strict confidence, all know-how, data, information and records
received by it in connection with the Project, and shall not disclose any such information to
third parties without the prior written approval of the Authority or render any service to a third
party based on such know-how, data, information and records received by it under the
Agreement.
6.6.2 The Operator shall bind its Subcontractors, officers, directors, employees, agents, consultants
and representatives and shall take all measures to observe the obligations of non-disclosure of
data, information and records received by it from Authority, Authority's representatives and the
Technical Auditors to third parties.
6.6.3 The obligations of non-disclosure under this Article shall not apply to such data, information and
records which at the time of the disclosure or thereafter:
a) Become a part of public knowledge or literature through no act or omission by the Operator or
Subcontractor or their employees, officers, directors, consultants or representatives; or
b) Had been independently prepared by the Operator or were otherwise in the Operator’s lawful
possession prior to the disclosure as shown by written records; or
c) Are hereafter disclosed to the Operator by a third party who has the lawful right to disclose
such information to the Operator; or
d) Required to be disclosed to comply with Applicable Laws or the direction/ order of any
competent Court of law provided that the Operator shall immediately inform the Authority of
such disclosure obligation and disclose only such part of the information as may be
reasonably required and necessary.
6.6.4 The provisions of this Article 6.6 shall survive termination of the Agreement and be in force for a
period of three (3) years after the Termination of the Agreement. In addition to any other
remedy hereunder, the Authority shall be entitled to seek equitable remedies, including
injunctive relief, in the event of any breach of the obligations of this Article by the Operator.
6.7 Employment Of Labour / Employees

6.7.1 The Operator shall employ for the Project, only employees with relevant experience. No person
below the age of eighteen years shall be employed by the Operator for the Project. Where
required by Applicable Laws or regulation of local or other authority, such personnel shall be
duly licensed by the competent authority to practice their trades, professions and callings.
6.7.2 The Operator shall be responsible for payment of salaries to all its labour / employees. The
Operator shall also be liable to extend / provide all the benefits admissible to said labour /
employee under various Applicable Laws in force and as amended from time to time.
6.7.3 The Operator's employees shall wear identification badges, safety helmets and appropriate
protective gear while working at the Site.
6.7.4 It is expressly agreed by the Parties that on the Operator’s failure to pay any amount due and
payable by the Operator to the Authority under the Agreement, including Damages, the
Authority shall have the right to recover the same by set-off or deduction against amounts
Page 50 of 432
otherwise owing to the Operator under the Agreement, or by drawing against the Performance
Guarantee(s), retention or any other security provided by the Operator for performance of its
obligations hereunder.
6.7.5 Labour Welfare
a) The Operator shall provide and maintain such temporary accommodation and amenities as
may be reasonably necessary for all its and its Sub-contractor's staff and labour employed at
the site, including all fencing, water supply (both for drinking and other purposes), electricity
supply, sanitation, fire prevention and firefighting equipment, air-conditioning and other agreed
requirements in connection with such accommodation or amenities.
b) The Operator shall in all dealings with its and its Sub-contractors' staff and labour have due
regard to all recognized festivals, days of rest and religious or other customs.
c) The Operator shall at all times take all reasonable precautions to prevent any unlawful riotous
or disorderly conduct by or amongst its or its Sub-contractors' staff and labour and for the
preservation of peace and protection of persons and property at the site and in its
neighborhood, against the same.
d) Operator will ensure maintenance and upkeep of above facilities.
6.7.6 The Operator shall be responsible for complying with all statutory obligations including but
without limitation, the following along with the rules and regulations framed there under, so long
as the same is applicable to the Operator and the Operator is bound by them:
a) Apprentices Act, 1961;
b) Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment. And Conditions of
Service) Act, 1996
c) Building and Other Construction Workers’ Welfare Cass Act, 1996.
d) Child Labour (Protection and Regulation) Act, 1986;
e) Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970,
f) Employment of Children Act, 1938;
g) Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1950,
h) Employees’ Pension Scheme, 1995;
i) Employees’ Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952;
j) Minimum Wages Act, 1948;
k) Payment of Bonus Act, 1965;
l) Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972;
m) Payment of Wages Act, 1936; and
n) Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923;
or any other relevant Government of India or State enactments as applicable, for their labour
and staff engaged in the Project.
6.8 Cleanliness
Page 51 of 432
6.8.1 The Operator shall be responsible for keeping the entire Effective Service Area clean and free
from rubbish etc. during the Project Period. The Operator shall employ enough number of
special personnel to thoroughly clean its work-area at least once in a day. All such rubbish and
scrap material shall be stacked or disposed in a place approved by the Authority. Materials and
stores shall be so arranged to permit easy cleaning of the area.
6.8.2 Customer Service Centres and offices of the Operator shall be kept clean and neat to the entire
satisfaction of the Authority. Proper sanitary arrangements shall be provided by the Operator, in
the work areas, Customer Service Centres and offices of the Operator.
Page 52 of 432
7. AUTHORITY OBLIGATIONS
7.1 Authority Obligations – General
7.1.1 The Authority shall, at its own cost and expense undertake, comply with and perform all its
obligations specifically set out in this Agreement.
7.1.2 Provided the Operator is not in breach of any of the Operators Obligations, the Authority
agrees to observe, comply with and perform, subject to and in accordance with the provisions of
this Agreement and Applicable Laws, the following:
a) upon written request from the Operator, and subject to the Operator complying with
Applicable Laws, provide reasonable support and assistance to the Operator in procuring
Applicable Permits required from any Government Instrumentality for implementation of the
Project;
b) upon written request from the Operator, on a best effort basis provide reasonable assistance
to the Operator in obtaining access to necessary infrastructure facilities and utilities as may
be required for performing the works during the Start Up Period, the Transition Period, and
the Sustaining Period;
c) procure that the performance of the Project is not obstructed by any Government
Instrumentality or persons claiming through or under the Authority, except for reasons of
Emergency or in accordance with Applicable Laws;
d) Subject to and in accordance with Applicable Laws, grant to the Operator the authority to
regulate use of the Project Facilities;
e) support, cooperate with and facilitate the Operator in the operation and maintenance of the
Existing Project Facilities and construction or rehabilitation, as applicable, and operation of
the Project Facilities in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement;
f) effect payment towards bulk water charges, power charges as applicable, operations and
maintenance of water supply infrastructure under the purview of the Authority and its agents,
provision for additional house service water connections.
7.1.3 The Authority will ensure supply of Minimum Bulk Water Demand (the “Minimum Bulk Water
Demand”) within the provisions of the Agreement. It is clarified that, at any time during the
Project Period in case the Authority makes any changes in the source of bulk water or the
supply system of bulk water from the source to the intake point of the Project, it shall make best
efforts to procure that such changes do not affect the design of the Project or cast additional
obligations on the Operator or materially affect the performance of the Operator in achieving the
Performance Standards under this Agreement.
7.1.4 The Authority will make available Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand as approved by it under
Article 6.1.6 (q). Provided that if the Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand, projected by the
Operator is higher than the Minimum Bulk Water Demand, the Authority will make available
Minimum Bulk Water Demand.
7.1.5 The Authority or its agents will submit to the Operator an estimate of the water demand in
Service Area not under the purview of the Operator, which the Operator will consider while
preparing the Schedule for Daily Water Distribution and Projected Daily Bulk Water Demand.
7.1.6 The Authority shall facilitate and execute the Escrow Agreement within ninety (90) days from
the Effective Date.
Page 53 of 432
7.1.7 The Authority shall bear all liabilities, including contingent liabilities related to any payable
accounts, environmental liabilities, arising out of or in connection with the operation of the
Project Facilities in the Service Area and Sites during the Start Up Period.
7.1.8 The Authority shall bear all liabilities, including contingent liabilities related to any payable
accounts, environmental liabilities, arising out of or in connection with the operation of the
Project Facilities by the Authority in the Service Area other than the respective Effective Service
Area during the Transition Period.
7.1.9 Any monetary liability on the Existing Project Facilities and Sites up to the Transition
Commencement Date shall be paid or resolved by the Authority.
7.1.10 In case of non performance in the Existing Project Facilities, which are certified to be in ‘good
condition’ by the Authority at the start of Start Up Period, the cost of replacement or repair save
and except any non-performance due to reasons attributable to the Operator or any of its
employees, representatives or Sub-contractors, or any non-performance during the Transition
Period and Sustaining Period required to be rectified by the Operator, shall be borne by the
Authority. After due approval from the Authority, the Operator will be reimbursed for the cost of
replacement of the asset based the Relevant SOR at the time of replacement published by a
relevant department under Government of Himachal Pradesh.
7.1.11 The Authority shall, before the Effective Date, appoint an internal officer not lower than the rank
of an executive engineer to act Authority’s representative (“PBC Engineer”) for this Project.
The Authority will notify the Operator in accordance with this Agreement of any change made to
the identity or contact details for the PBC Engineer within seven (7) days of such change. The
PBC Engineer will continue to perform its role for the entire duration of Project Period.
7.2 Authority Obligations during the Start Up Period
During the Start Up Period, in addition to the obligations set out in Article 5 and elsewhere in the Agreement,
the Authority will have the following obligations:
7.2.1 During the Start Up Period, the Authority, or its agents on its behalf, shall continue to be
responsible to provide water supply services including billing activities in the Service Area and
operate, maintain and repair the Existing Project Facilities in accordance with Applicable Laws
and with the existing performance standards and requirements in force.
7.2.2 The Authority shall give prompt written notice to the Operator of the commencement of any
dispute or proceeding between the Authority and/or any person which, if determined adversely
to the Authority, could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect on the
Authority’s operations and/or financial condition or the performance by the Authority of its
obligations hereunder,
7.2.3 The Authority shall give notice to the Operator of any major Defect, damage or alteration to any
of the equipment, machinery or assets of the Existing Project Facilities.
7.2.4 The Authority agrees and shall ensure that the Transition Team shall be granted access upon
reasonable notice during the Start Up Period to all Project Facilities (whether operated by the
Authority or an agency on its behalf) and information (including historical technical. Operational
financial and revenue data) regarding the water supply services in the Service Area so that the
Operator can study the management, operation and maintenance, and service levels of the
water supply system..
7.2.5 The Authority shall assist the Operator in undertaking and validating the technical surveys,
audits and studies and undertaking its obligations under this Agreement;
Page 54 of 432
7.2.6 Any operations and maintenance activity performed by the Operator during the Start Up Period
in the Service Area shall be done at the cost and expense of the Authority but at the risk of the
Operator for any loss or damage resulting from such operation and maintenance.
7.2.7 The Authority shall pay the Operator the Operator Payments in accordance with Article 22,
Schedule 6 and Schedule 7;
7.2.8 The Authority shall review and provide comments on/ approve draft SIP (including O&M Plan,
SOP and THP) and draft version of IMIS and sign such agreed plans in accordance with Article
6 and Schedule 4A;
7.2.9 The Authority may at its sole discretion authorize the Operator to commence procurement of
goods, works and services for Pre-Transition Activities during Start Up Period;
7.2.10 The Authority shall fulfil the Transition Period Condition required to be fulfilled by the Authority;
7.2.11 The Authority shall assist the Operator to carry out a communications campaign relating to
anticipated outputs of the Project and the scope of work and timelines of the Operator;
7.2.12 The Authority shall appoint a Technical Auditor, within 30 days from the Effective Date, to act as
an independent engineer.
7.2.13 The Authority may also appoint an Advisor like an engineering institute of repute (e.g. IIT) or
any other persons / agency to act as an independent reviewer and pay their costs and
expenses;
7.2.14 The Authority shall provide space in an already existing building for establishment of
Laboratories to the Operator. The ownership of the land or building shall not be transferred to
the Operator.
7.2.15 At any time during the Project Period, in the event of a shortfall in meeting the required
Minimum Sub-Account Balance, the Authority shall upon receiving notice from the Escrow Bank
transfer the shortfall amount from the Operations Bank Account or any other accounts to the
relevant sub-account of the Escrow Account so as to ensure the Minimum Sub-Account
Balance.
7.3 Authority Obligations during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period
During the Transition Period and the Sustaining Period, in addition to the obligations set out in Article 5 and
elsewhere in the Agreement, the Authority will have the following obligations:
7.3.1 In areas outside the Effective Service Area, the Authority, or its agents on its behalf, shall
continue to be responsible to provide water supply services and operate, maintain and repair
the Existing Project Facilities in accordance with Applicable Laws and with the existing
performance standards and requirements in force. Where the Authority has delegated any of
these functions and activities to other agencies or agents, the Authority shall ensure that the
Existing Project Facilities are maintained to ensure continuity of service.
7.3.2 Any operations and maintenance activity in the areas outside the Effective Service Area, if
performed by the Operator, shall be done at the cost and expense of the Authority but at the
risk of the Operator for any loss or damage resulting from such acts of the Operator.
7.3.3 During the entire Project Period, any expenditure on Major Maintenance required for the Project
Facilities (towards the cost of works or systems or equipment) will be borne by the Authority
provided that such need is not due to any reason attributable to the Operator. The Authority
Page 55 of 432
shall not bear the cost of repair and replacement of an asset replaced / refurbished by the
Operator once during the Project Period.
7.3.4 During the Transition Period, the Authority shall ensure that all contracts between the Authority /
other third party agencies and contractors in respect of the Existing Project Facilities and/ or
water supply services in the Effective Service Area shall be terminated / novated as mutually
agreed between the Parties based on the timelines as set out in the Agreed THP on or before
the relevant Progressive Handover Date.
7.3.5 During the Transition Period, the Authority shall provide to the Operator on the Progressive
Handover Date all information, records, accounts, invoices, statements, demands, notices,
insurance demands and other correspondence in relation to the relevant Project Facilities as
may be available with the Authority, reasonably requested by the Operator to perform Operator
Obligations under this Agreement;
7.3.6 During the Transition Period, the Authority shall provide necessary support to the Operator in
accordance with Agreed THP. The Authority will ensure a transition of the operations in a
progressive manner to the Operator to facilitate a smooth transition of the operations in the
Services Area during the Transition Period. .
7.3.7 During the Transition Period, the Authority shall facilitate the procurement of various works
contracts and services contracts including but not limited to timely sanction of funds for
implementation of IIP;
7.3.8 For the Transition Period, the Authority shall designate a senior officer as its transition
coordinator (“Transition Coordinator”). The Transition Coordinator can be the same as the
PBC Engineer. The Transition Coordinator shall be the point of contact for the Operator for day
to day matters including but not limited to granting access to Sites and Project Facilities,
managing interfaces with other local government agencies such as Irrigation and Public Health
Department, Shimla Municipal Corporation and police, amongst others. The Authority shall
notify the Operator of the identity and contact details for the Transition Coordinator within seven
(7) business days from the TCD. The Authority will notify the Operator in accordance with this
Agreement of any change made to the identity or contact details for the Transition Coordinator
within seven (7) days of such change. The Transition Coordinator will continue to perform its
role for the entire duration of Transition Period.
7.3.9 The Authority shall assist the Operator to give reasonable advance notice to Customers in
Effective Service Area about transfer over to volumetric billing due to the commencement of a
Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply services;
7.3.10 The Authority shall ensure activities under Communications Action Plan precede all capex work
or activities identified under IIP;
7.3.11 The Authority shall be responsible to obtain all relevant right of way, land acquisition and all
necessary approvals required for implementing the Project;
7.3.12 The Authority shall obtain Authority Applicable Permits to undertake its obligations under this
Agreement;
7.3.13 The Authority shall grant to the Operator authority, permit, or rights of way in Project Facilities to
enable the Operator to perform its obligations under this Agreement;
7.3.14 The Authority shall use its powers and best endeavors to make available the Projected Daily
Bulk Water Demand to the Operator;
Page 56 of 432
7.3.15 The Authority shall use its powers and best endeavors to make available electricity at the
Project Facilities;
7.3.16 The Authority shall make payments for raw water intake to Government of Himachal Pradesh or
any other authorities as the case may be (if required);
7.3.17 The Authority shall ensure timely payments are made on invoices submitted by the Operator,
the third party contractors/ service providers after being approved by the Operator and by the
Authority with respect of the third party works and services contracts;
7.3.18 The Authority shall pay the Operator the Operator Payments (including O&M Fees) in
accordance with Article 22, Schedule 6 and Schedule 7;
7.3.19 The Authority shall take such action as is necessary to maintain the Minimum Sub-Account
Balance in the SIP Fund Sub-Account for payment of Works Fees (C) for funding capex works
mentioned in IIP as per Agreed SIP and Agreed THP.
7.3.20 The Authority shall take such action as is necessary to maintain the Minimum Sub-Account
Balance in the Professional Fee Sub-Account for paying O&M Fees (D) to the Operator.
7.3.21 The amounts collected from the User Charges in the Operations Bank Account shall be used
for maintaining the Minimum Sub-Account Balance by the Authority. The Authority may use the
amounts in the Operations Bank Account for meeting its own expenses also.
Minimum Sub-Account Balance, the Authority shall upon receiving notice from the Escrow Bank
transfer the shortfall amount from the Operations Bank Account or any other accounts to the
relevant sub-account of the Escrow Account so as to ensure the Minimum Sub-Account
Balance.
7.3.23 In the event, as per applicable municipal rules, if the User Charges are deposited in any other
account designated by the Authority, the Authority may cause such amounts partially or fully to
be transferred to the Operations Bank Account.
7.3.24 The Authority shall retain the services of the Technical Auditor and shall retain the services of
an Advisor which could be any engineering institute of repute (e.g. IIT) or any other persons /
agency and pay their costs and expenses;
7.3.25 The Authority shall review, provide comments on and approve draft annual updates of the
Agreed THP and Agreed SIP and other draft documents and reports in accordance with Article
6 and Schedule 4B;
7.3.26 The Authority shall cause its employees or agents appointed by the Authority to monitor the
activities of the Operator in accordance with the Performance Standards and this Agreement
including but not limited to operation and maintenance of the Existing Project Facilities,
procurement and construction of the Additional Project Facilities. The Authority shall cause its
employees or agents appointed by the Authority to measure and analyse the achievement of
Performance Standards through on-field investigations and through the IMIS system developed
by the Operator for various operational aspects including but not limited to: (i) operational logs
of water / pressure at various points (ii) GIS mapped registers for all assets (iii) maintenance
management (iv) water resource monitoring (v) water quality monitoring (vi) Customer
complaints/suggestions (vii) Customer database (viii) financial management (ix) stores and
inventory management (x) human resource management (xi) operational performance etc.;
Page 57 of 432
7.3.27 The Authority shall maintain the website dedicated to the Project which would disclose
documents as per the norms of the Right to Information Act 2005, as amended;
7.3.28 On receipt of report from the Operator on defaulting Customers, the Authority shall take
necessary action for disconnection. The Authority shall take timely decisions for disconnecting
the water supplies in respect of Customers using water for other than for the approved purpose
or causing pollution or otherwise in violation of Applicable Laws.;
7.3.29 The Authority may in appropriate cases agree to provide new connections or reconnections or
regularize illegal connections and collect such amounts as prescribed in the tariff policy or
byelaws;
7.3.30 The Authority shall be entitled to carry out a sampling survey of Customers on a periodical
basis after the Sustaining Period Commencement Date to assess the satisfaction levels of
Customers and take mid-course corrective action as the Authority may decide .
Page 58 of 432
8. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES
8.1 Mutual Representations and Warranties

8.1.1 Each Party represents and warrants to the other Parties that:
a) it has full power and authority to execute, deliver and perform its obligations under this
Agreement, the Escrow Agreement and any other agreements required in relation to the
Project;
b) it has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution, delivery and performance of this
Agreement, the Escrow Agreement and any other agreements required in relation to the
Project; and
c) there are no actions, suits or proceedings pending or to its best knowledge, threatened
against or affecting it before any court, administrative body or arbitral tribunal which might
materially and adversely affect its ability to meet or perform any of its obligations under this
Agreement, the Escrow Agreement or any other agreements required in relation to the
Project.
8.2 Operator’s Representations and Warranties
8.2.1 The Operator represents and warrants to the Authority that:
a) it is duly organized, validly existing and of good standing under the laws of India;
b) it has the financial standing and capacity to meet Operator Obligations as set out in the
Agreement;
c) this Agreement constitutes its legal, valid and binding obligation, enforceable against it in
accordance with its terms, and its obligations under this Agreement will be legally valid,
binding and enforceable obligations against it in accordance with the terms hereof;
d) it is subject to the laws of India, and hereby expressly and irrevocably waives any immunity
in any jurisdiction in respect of this Agreement or matters arising thereunder including any
obligation, liability or responsibility hereunder;
e) the information furnished in the Bid of the Selected Bidder, and as updated on or before the
date of this Agreement is true and accurate in all respects as on the Effective Date;
f) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement will not conflict with, result in the
breach of, constitute a default under any of the terms of its memorandum and articles of
association/charter documents or any Applicable Laws or Applicable Permits or any
covenant, contract, agreement, arrangement, understanding, decree or order to which it is a
party or by which it or any of its properties or assets is bound or affected;
g) it has no knowledge of any violation or default with respect to any order, writ, injunction or
decree of any court or any legally binding order of the GoI or the GoHP which may result in
any Material Adverse Effect on its ability to perform its obligations under this Agreement and
no fact or circumstance exists which may give rise to such proceedings that would adversely
affect the performance of its obligations under this Agreement;
h) it has complied with all Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits in all material respects and
has not been subject to any fines, penalties, injunctive relief or any other civil or criminal
liabilities, which in the aggregate have or may have a Material Adverse Effect on its ability to
perform its obligations under this Agreement;
Page 59 of 432
i) none of its employees, consultants, service providers, suppliers, or Subcontractors,

including any O&M contractor, as of this day, have been engaged in any corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive, coercive or obstructive practice, and
j) no representation or warranty by it contained in this Agreement or in any other document
furnished by it to the Authority, GOI or GoHP in relation to Applicable Permits contains any
untrue or misleading statement of material fact or omits to state a material fact necessary to
make such representation or warranty.
8.3 Authorities Representations and Warranties
8.3.1 The Authority represents and warrants to the Operator that:
a) it is duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of India;
b) it has the financial standing and legal capacity to execute this Agreement and perform its
obligations under this Agreement;
c) it has taken all necessary approvals to execute this Agreement and perform its obligations
under this Agreement;
d) this Agreement constitutes legal, valid and binding obligations enforceable against it in
accordance with the terms hereof;
e) it has no knowledge of any violation or default with respect to any order, writ, injunction or
any decree of any court or any legally binding order of the GoI or the GoHP, which may
result in any Material Adverse Effect on its ability to perform its obligations under this
Agreement;
f) it has complied with all Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits in all material respects;
g) the Site is not subject to any mortgage, lien, charge or any other Encumbrance;
h) it does not have any liability for any Tax, or any interest or penalty in respect thereof, of any
nature, that may constitute a lien against the Site; and
i) all information provided by it in the RFP and this Agreement (including the Technical
Specifications) in connection with the Project is, to the best of its knowledge and belief, true
and accurate in all material respects.
8.4 Acknowledgement
8.4.1 The Parties acknowledge and confirm that the Parties have relied upon and have entered into
this Agreement on the basis of the representations, warranties and undertakings made by the
Parties hereunder.
8.4.2 If any occurrence or circumstance comes to the attention of a Party that renders any of its
aforesaid representations or warranties untrue or incorrect, such Party shall immediately notify
the other Parties. Such notification shall not have the effect of remedying any breach of the
representation or warranty that has been found to be untrue or incorrect nor shall it adversely
affect or waive any obligation of a Party under this Agreement.
8.4.3 The Authority and the related Parties, or any of their agents or employees shall not be liable to
the Operator in contract, tort, including negligence or breach of statutory duty, statute or
otherwise as a result of:
a) any inaccuracy, omission, unfitness for any purpose or inadequacy of any kind whatsoever
in the information relating to the Project disclosed by the Authority to the Operator; or
Page 60 of 432
b) any failure to make available to the Operator any materials, documents, plans or other
information relating to the Project.
Page 61 of 432
9. PERFORMANCE SECURITY
9.1 Performance Security

9.1.1 The Operator shall, as security for the due performance of its obligations during the Start Up
Period, provide to the Authority before the Effective Date an irrevocable and unconditional
guarantee from a Bank for a sum equivalent to 10% of the SIP Fees (A) in accordance with
Schedule 7, and as set out in the form provided in Schedule 18 (the “Start Up Period
Performance Security”). The Start Up Period Performance Security shall periodically renewed
and kept valid for a period of not less than sixty (60) days after the Scheduled TCD.
9.1.2 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, in the event Start Up
Period Performance Security is not provided by the Operator before the Effective Date, the
Authority may encash the Bid Security and appropriate the proceeds thereof as Damages, and
thereupon all rights, privileges, claims and entitlements of the Operator under or arising out of
this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived by, and to have ceased with the
concurrence of the Operator, and this Agreement shall be deemed to have been terminated by
mutual agreement of the Parties due to Operator Event of Default.
9.1.3 The Operator shall, as security for the due performance of its obligations during the Transition
Period, provide to the Authority no later than 21 (twenty one) days prior to the Scheduled
Transition Commencement Date, an irrevocable and unconditional guarantee from a Bank for a
sum equivalent to 5% of Works Fees (C) and 1.50% O&M Fees (D) in accordance with
Schedule 7, as set out in the form provided in Schedule 19 (the “Transition Period Performance
Security”). The Transition Period Performance Security shall periodically renewed and kept
valid for a period of not less than one hundred eighty (180) days after the Scheduled SPCD.
9.1.4 The Operator shall, as security for the due performance of its obligations during the Sustaining
Period, provide to the Authority no later than 21 (twenty one) days prior to the Scheduled
Sustaining Period Commencement Date an irrevocable and unconditional guarantee from a
Bank for a sum equivalent to 5% of the O&M Fees in accordance with Schedule 7, as set out in
the form provided in Schedule 20 (the “Sustaining Period Performance Security”). The
Sustaining Period Performance Security shall be periodically renewed and kept valid for a
period of not less than one hundred eighty (180) days after the scheduled Expiry Date.
9.1.5 Until such time the Start Up Period Performance Security is provided by the Operator pursuant
hereto and the same comes into effect, the Bid Security shall remain in force and effect, and
upon such provision of the Start Up Period Performance Security, the Authority shall release
the Bid Security to the Operator.
9.1.6 Until such time the Transition Period Performance Security is provided by the Operator
pursuant hereto and the same comes into effect, the Start Up Period Performance Security
shall remain in force and effect, and upon such provision of the Transition Period Performance
Security pursuant hereto, the Authority shall release the Start Up Period Performance Security
to the Operator.
9.1.7 Until such time the Sustaining Period Performance Security is provided by the Operator
pursuant hereto and the same comes into effect, the Transition Period Performance Security
shall remain in force and effect, and upon such provision of the Sustaining Period Performance
Security pursuant hereto, the Authority shall release the Transition Period Performance Security
to the Operator.
9.2 Appropriation of Performance Security
Page 62 of 432
9.2.1 Upon occurrence of an Operator Event of Default or failure to meet any Transition Period
Condition or Sustaining Period Conditions, the Authority shall, without prejudice to its other
rights and remedies hereunder or in law, be entitled to encash and appropriate from any of the
Performance Security(ies), the amounts due to it for and in respect of such Operator Event of
Default or for failure to meet any Transition Period Condition or Sustaining Period Conditions.
9.2.2 Upon such encashment and appropriation from any of the Performance Security(ies), the
Operator shall, within 7 (seven) days thereof, replenish, in case of partial appropriation, to the
original level of the relevant Performance Security(ies). In case of appropriation of the entire
amount from any of the Performance Security(ies), the Operator shall provide a fresh
Performance Security within 5 (five) days thereof, If the Operator fails to replenish/provide a
fresh Performance Security, within the said time period, failing which the Authority shall be
entitled to terminate this Agreement in accordance with Article 29 due to Operator Event of
Default.
9.3 Release of Performance Security
9.3.1 The Authority shall return the Start Up Period Performance Security to the Operator within 60
(sixty) days after the end of the Start Up Period, to the extent available for release after
enforcement, if any.
9.3.2 The Authority shall return the Transition Period Performance Security to the extent available for
release after enforcement, if any, to the Operator within 180 (one hundred eighty) days after
issuance of Completion Certificate as per Article 14 of this Agreement.
9.3.3 The Authority shall return the Sustaining Period Performance Security to the Operator to the
extent available for release after enforcement, if any within 180 (one hundred eighty) days after
the Expiry Date.
Page 63 of 432
10. RIGHT OF WAY
10.1 The Service Area

10.1.1 The site shall comprise of the area where the Existing Project Facilities and ancillary facilities
described in Schedule 2 are located and shall include all such areas in which the Additional
Project Facilities are to be constructed as per this Agreement (the “Service Area”) as
demarcated in the map attached as Schedule 3. The Operator shall be provided and granted
the Right of Way by the Authority to the Service Area as a licensee under and in accordance
with this Agreement.
10.2 License, Access and Right of Way
10.2.1 The Authority agrees to grants to the Operator access to the Service Area for carrying out any
surveys, investigations and soil tests that the Operator may require during the Start Up Period,
it being expressly agreed and understood that the Operator shall fully comply with all Applicable
Laws in carrying out such survey, investigation and soil tests and shall not cause any damage
to the site. The Authority shall have no liability whatsoever in respect of survey, investigations
and tests carried out or work undertaken by the Operator on or about the Service Area pursuant
hereto.
10.2.2 In consideration of the covenants and warranties on the part of the Operator herein contained,
the Authority, in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth herein, agrees to grant to
the Operator, during the Project Period, Right of Way, on all the land (along with any buildings,
constructions or immovable assets, if any, thereon) comprising the Service Area which is
described, delineated and shown in Schedule 3 hereto, on an “as is where is” basis, to enter
into and use merely to execute the Project, and for the ancillary purposes permitted under this
Agreement, and for no other purpose whatsoever.
10.2.3 The license, access and Right of Way agreed to be granted under this Agreement to the
Operator shall always be subject to existing rights of way and the Operator shall perform its
obligations in a manner that Existing Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area are
operational at all times during the Transition Period without disruption in accordance with this
Agreement, except and with prior notification to the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
10.2.4 It is expressly agreed that the license granted pursuant to the terms hereof shall terminate
automatically and forthwith, without the need for any action to be taken by the Authority to
terminate the license, upon the Termination of this Agreement for any reason whatsoever. Upon
Termination, all structures erected on the Service Area by the Operator or its Sub-contractors,
shall vest in the Authority without any further act or deed by the Parties.
10.2.5 It is expressly agreed that trees on the Service Area are and shall remain sole property of the
Authority.
10.3 Protection of Service Area from Encumbrances
10.3.1 During the Project Period, the Operator shall protect the relevant Effective Service Area from
any and all unauthorized occupations, encroachments or Encumbrances, and shall not place or
create nor permit any sub-contractor or other person claiming through or under the Operator to
place or create any Encumbrance or security interest over all or any part of the Effective
Service Area or the Existing Project Facilities or the Additional Project Facilities, or on any
rights of the Operator therein or under this Agreement, save and except as otherwise expressly
permitted in this Agreement.
Page 64 of 432
10.4 Access to the Authority and Technical Auditor

10.4.1 The license, and Right of Way to the Service Area granted to the Operator shall always be
subject to the rights of the Authority (including right of access of the Authority and the Technical
Auditor and their employees and agents) for inspection, viewing and exercise of their rights and
performance of their obligations under this Agreement.
Page 65 of 432
11. UTILITIES
11.1 Existing utilities and roads : Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the
Operator shall ensure that the respective entities owning the existing roads, right of way or utilities on,
under or above the Service Area are enabled by it to keep such utilities in continuous satisfactory use,
if necessary, by providing suitable temporary or permanent diversions with the authority of the
controlling body of that road, right of way or utility, and the Authority may at its own cost, upon written
request from the Operator, procure any Right of Way necessary for such diversion.
11.2 Shifting of obstructing utilities: The Authority shall, cause the utility companies owning such utilities
to undertake shifting of any utility including electric lines and telephone cables, to an appropriate
location or alignment within or outside the Service Area if and only if such utility causes or shall cause
a Material Adverse Effect on the construction, operation or maintenance of the Additional Project
Facilities. The cost of such shifting shall be borne by the Authority.
11.3 During Transition Period:
a) The Operator shall obtain, install, and maintain at its cost, all utilities necessary for undertaking the
construction/ rehabilitation of the relevant Project Facilities, including all temporary power and water
connections, lighting facilities, telephone connections, internet connections, etc. at the relevant
Effective Service Area. The Operator shall bear and pay the cost of all power, water, and other utilities
consumed by it for construction/ rehabilitation of the relevant Project Facilities during the Transition
Period, and the Operator shall not be entitled to claim any reimbursement from the Authority in this
regard.
b) The Operator may use the utilities available at the relevant Effective Service Area, to undertake the
rehabilitation, operation, and maintenance of the relevant Existing Project Facilities, including existing
power and water connections, lighting facilities, telephone connections etc. during the Transition
Period. To the extent the Operator requires any additional utilities to undertake the rehabilitation,
operation, and maintenance of the Existing Project Facilities, including any internet connection, power
back-up arrangements etc., during the Transition Period, then the Operator shall obtain, install, and
maintain such additional utilities at its own cost. The Operator shall bear and pay the cost of all power,
water, and other utilities consumed by it for the rehabilitation of Existing Project Facilities during the
Transition Period, and the Operator shall not be entitled to claim any reimbursement from the Authority
in this regard. It is clarified that there will be no enhancement of the number or sanctioned load of
power connections of Authority, which are already in place for the relevant Existing Project Facilities.
c) The Operator shall not be entitled to any extension of time or costs to comply with its obligations in
Article 11.3(a) and 11.3(b) above.
d) The Authority shall at its own cost, apply for and obtain in the name of the Authority, the power
connection for the operation of the Project Facilities, in its name. The Operator shall provide all
necessary assistance to the authority in procuring the power connection, including by providing all
documents and information necessary to complete the application process. The existing power
connections for the Existing Project Facilities will, to the extent required, be maintained at the relevant
Effective Service Area by the Authority for the Project Period.
e) The Authority shall provide any reasonable assistance required by the Operator to obtain the utilities
for the construction of the Additional Project Facilities, rehabilitation of the Existing Project Facilities.
11.4 During Sustaining Period:
Page 66 of 432
a) The Authority shall at its own cost, apply for and obtain in the name of the Authority, the power
connection for the operation of the Project Facilities, in its name, at least 30 days prior to the
Scheduled SPCD. The Operator shall provide all necessary assistance to the authority in procuring
the power connection, including by providing all documents and information necessary to complete
the application process. The existing power connections for the Existing Project Facilities will, to the
extent required, be maintained at the relevant Effective Service Area by the Authority for the Project
Period.
b) The Operator shall install and maintain at its cost, all utilities (other than power) necessary for the
O&M of the Project Facilities, including water, telephone connections, internet connections, etc. at
the relevant Effective Service Area. Specifically, to procure water for the O&M of the Additional
Project Facilities, the Operator may provide necessary connections at the relevant Effective Service
Area after obtaining all Applicable Permits (including any no-objection certificates from the relevant
Government Instrumentalities and the Authority).
c) The Operator may use the utilities available at the relevant Effective Service Area of the Existing
Project Facilities, to undertake the O&M of the Existing Project Facilities, including existing power
and water connections, lighting facilities, telephone connections etc. To the extent the Operator
requires any additional utilities and infrastructure to undertake the O&M of the Existing Project
Facilities, including any internet connection, power back-up arrangements, etc., then the Operator
shall obtain and maintain such additional utilities and infrastructure at its cost.
d) The Operator shall not be entitled to any reimbursement or additional costs to comply with its
obligations in this Article 11.4.
e) The Authority shall provide any reasonable assistance required by the Operator to obtain the utilities
for the O&M of the relevant Project Facilities.
Page 67 of 432
12. ACTIVITIES RELATED TO REHABILITATION OF EXISTING PROJECT FACILITIES AND

CONSTRUCTION OF THE ADDITIONAL PROJECT FACILITIES
12.1 Obligations of the Operator to undertake Rehabilitation and Construction Activities during
Transition Period
12.1.1 Before commencing the rehabilitation or construction activities, the Operator shall undertake, do
and perform all such acts, deeds and things as may be necessary or required before
commencement of construction under and in accordance with the terms of this agreement,
Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits.
12.1.2 The Operator shall proceed as per the Agreed THP for Progressive Handover of Hydraulic
Zones. The rehabilitation of Existing Project Facilities and construction of Additional Project
Facilities shall be executed based on priority DMA selected under Hydraulic Zones.
12.1.3 The works will be implemented DMA wise i.e. the Operator will take up rehabilitation and
construction activities from DMA to DMA. The Operator shall be allowed to do works for select
DMA’s in Effective Service Area simultaneously and subsequently. The DMAs may be subject
to addition / modification. Works in priority DMAs shall completed and commissioned first. The
priority works will depend on laying of express feeder or transmission main or construction
works in such DMAs.
12.1.4 This activity will be simultaneous with Baseline Studies of other Hydraulic Zones and shall be
completed within 180 days from the Progressive Handover Date.
12.2 Establishment of DMA’s in Hydraulic Zones
12.2.1 Based on Detailed Design and Drawings and the hydraulic model, the Operator shall verify and
finalize the boundaries of DMA while assessing the operational feasibility and proceed to isolate
the same without affecting the adjoining areas for water supply.
12.2.2 Where hydraulically possible, DMAs shall be single feed as proposed in the SIP. In cases
where it is advisable (for hydraulic or other reasons) to establish multiple feed DMAs, the same
shall be subject to approval by the Technical Auditor and PBC Engineer.
12.2.3 The Operator shall undertake following activities to rehabilitate Existing Project Facilities and
construct Additional Project Facilities in for the priority Zones while establishing DMAs.
a) The Operator shall, set up hydraulically isolated DMAs within the Service Area / operational
zone of each GSR and STP respectively. With approval of the Authority, the Operator may
revise the number of DMAs as per site condition and shall serve all connections in Service
Area;
b) Each DMA comprising of about 500-2000 Customer connections shall be considered as
basic administrative unit for the purpose of sectional commissioning and management
services;
c) Each DMA preferably have one inflow point and be isolated by installing valves / end plugs.
DMA at entry point will be provided with a bulk flow meter. Each DMA will have at least five
Critical Measurement Points (CMPs) for continuous logging of pressure, and the CMPs shall
be such that they should be at the highest and farthest points from the command reservoir;
d) The Operator shall lay new water pipelines and replace old water pipelines wherever
necessary based on approved Detailed Design and Drawings and as per Technical
Specifications.
Page 68 of 432
i. All non-metallic pipelines or underground components installed in the frame of the

Agreement shall be provided with metallic ribbon or other means enabling their
detection by metal detectors;
ii. All installed pipelines and appurtenances shall be disinfected to the satisfaction of
the Technical Auditor and PBC Engineer.
iii. All works involving excavation shall be finalized through reinstatement of the road
and sidewalk surface to the initial condition.
iv. All works involving traffic blocking shall be coordinated timely with SJPNL / traffic
department and traffic diversion measures shall be implemented by the Operator.
The Operator shall endeavor at any times to be in accordance with the Good
Industry Practice and will maintain the inconvenience caused by the construction
works at the lowest possible level.
e) The Operator shall undertake installation of new boundary valves and replacement of
existing boundary valves (if necessary) as per the Technical Specifications; A sufficient
number of valves for future operation shall be provided for each DMA, in such a way to
enable 4 or 5 steps for Step Test to be executed in leak detection campaigns;
f) The Operator shall undertake installation of DMA inflow chamber, as per the Technical
Specifications;
g) The Operator shall undertake construction and installation of the critical point above ground
instrumentation box at strategic locations; including supply of all required materials, fittings
and equipment, as per the Technical Specifications. However, if suitable place is not
available for locating the above ground instrument box, the same may be placed in the
monitoring station chamber;
h) The Operator shall undertake installation and commissioning and pressure reducing valve
(PRV) chamber complete with all fittings and pipe work, as per the Technical Specifications;
i) The Operator shall undertake underground installation of electromagnetic flow meter
including supply of all required pipes, materials, fittings and equipment, as per the Technical
Specifications;
j) The Operator shall undertake execution of all other civil, mechanical, installation or plumbing
works, including supply of all required pipes, materials, fittings and equipment required for
DMA establishment, that might be required as per the Technical Specifications;
k) The Operator shall undertake installation of multiple channel data logger (two pressure and
one flow channel) at the inflow point, setting up of data transfer to a central SCADA server
(SMS, GPRS or similar data transfer); supply and installation of respective software;
l) The Operator shall undertake installation of single channel data logger at the critical point
(point with lowest pressure in the DMA), setting up of data transfer to a central server (SMS,
GPRS or similar data transfer) with web enabled /cloud server facility along with application
software;
m) No Customer connection pipe shall cross a DMA boundary. If a boundary is in the middle of
the road, the main needs to be on the side of the road of the DMA to which it belongs, or the
boundary should be behind the line of houses. The Operator shall undertake relocation of
customer service connections from a trunk or distribution main outside the DMA (or in a
neighboring DMA) to a distribution main inside the DMA;
Page 69 of 432
n) Installation and integration of the entire system with SCADA and life flow monitoring
software;
o) DMA wise monthly reports will be generated to assess the DMA performance. Monthly
meter readings will be taken and data shall be provided to billing team of the Operator. The
Authority and Technical Auditor also may suggest good management practices. Lessons
learnt from other utilities / agencies will also be incorporated for better management
services;
p) The Operator shall construct the 5 pressure monitoring stations including protection
encasement and data logger facility;
q) The Operator shall execute of zero-pressure-test and execution of all subsequent
investigations and works should the first zero pressure- test have failed until the test is
successfully performed.
r) The Operator shall prepare detailed designs and As-Built Drawings (“As-Built Drawing”) of
the Effective Service Area maps in 1:2000 scale which would include
i. Standard design and map with location of all customer connections to be relocated
ii. Detailed section drawings of all works undertaken DMAs
iii. Detailed specifications of all assets including but not limited to pipelines, valves,
equipment and materials installed / constructed in DMAs
iv. Mapping underground and over the ground assets to the Comprehensive
Geographical Information System (GIS) including all physical features like roads,
culverts, drains, nallas, electrical transformers and any other relevant features
v. All key elevations with geo-reference shall be captured
12.3 Customer Management
12.3.1 The Operator shall organize at its own costs public awareness programs to achieve people's
participation in managing demand by using the continuously available water to their absolute
need only and not to waste, and to communicate importance of metered system and its benefit
12.3.2 The Operator shall make arrangements for maintaining the service of the presently connected
Customers under selected Hydraulic Zones though not covered under Commissioned DMAs or
arrange for alternative arrangement for water supply at his own cost.
12.3.3 The responsibility of the Operator will be limited to providing service pipeline up to the water
meter, water meter, stopcock and meter box in the consumer premises. All works beyond the
water meter and before the septic tank will be the responsibility of the Customer.
a) For the authorized consumers: For both water supply connections, if required, the
Operator will replace the existing service pipe lines from distribution main pipe lines to
the consumer premises with new saddles, ferrule, stop cock, MDPE pipe, GI pipe
above ground etc. as per Technical Specifications from the distribution pipe lines
under a DMA.
b) For new service connections: For both water supply connections, if required, the
Operator will provide new service pipe lines from distribution lines to the consumer
premises with new saddles, ferrule, MDPE pipe, stop cock etc. as per Technical
Specifications for the unauthorized consumers from the distribution pipe lines under a
DMA.
Page 70 of 432
c) For bulk water supply connections: For both water supply connections (equivalent or
higher than 25mm dia.) such as apartments, housing societies or private layouts
within the Service Area, if required, the Operator shall install a suitably sized,
accurate consumption meter, saddles, service pipe, water meter and stop cock per
Technical Specifications from the distribution pipe lines under a DMA.
d) Illegal Connections: For both water supply connections, the Operator based on the
findings from the consumer survey, and in accordance to the approved Connections
Policy, shall identify the illegal or unauthorized connections and inform the Authority
for regularization / disconnections of those connections.
12.3.4 The Operator shall validate the Customer water connection survey in the concerned DMA. The
parameters to be surveyed will at least include: type of Customer (residential, commercial,
governmental, etc.), geo-location, type of structure or dwelling, type of existing water
connection. The Customer Water Connection survey shall be validated and updated to correctly
reflect the status of water supply to each Customer, whether they have an authorized water
connection, illegal water connection or no water connection.
a) The data so collected shall be shared / submitted to SJPNL for transfer to GIS for
web enabled application software and will be used at the time of rehabilitation of
existing Customer connections and while releasing new Customer connections in
future.
b) The structure of data base and details of the Customer Connection survey shall be
finalized in consultation with the PBC Engineer.
c) Authority shall provide the Customer connections list with unique ID of existing billing
database for Customers of selected Hydraulic Zones.
d) Operator shall maintain and update database of such Customers with same unique ID
while pre-fixing any letter for further segregation /identification.
12.4 Testing and Commissioning
12.4.1 Testing of all materials, equipment and instrumentation shall be done as specified in the
Technical Specifications. Installation of all electro-mechanical equipment shall be carried out
strictly as per recommendations of the manufacturers. Pre-commissioning and trial run shall be
undertaken as specified in Technical Specifications covered under section Schedule 24 of this
document.
12.4.2 When supplying for the first time water to the DMA, the Operator has to check that none of the
replaced pipelines is still supplied with water via another pipeline inside or outside the DMA. In
case of water flowing from the replaced pipeline, the Operator has to take all necessary
measures to stop the supply of water to the replaced pipeline. The measures at least include
a. Valves in the immediate vicinity of the decommissioned pipe shall be closed to assess
the location of the connection.
b. Start digging out the decommissioned pipe from both ends until the unknown connection
is found. The found pipe has to be followed until at least the border of the DMA, in order
to isolate the DMA properly.
c. Gather latest information from SJPNL on valve settings and pump operations. If it
becomes evident that the water comes through a connection from outside the DMA, it
Page 71 of 432
will be necessary to examine jointly with the PBC Engineer what changes in pump or
valve settings has been done recently.
12.4.3 Testing for commissioning of a completed DMA shall consist of flow measurements at DMA
inlet and at all service connections to determine whether the target level of water loss, as
specified in Schedule 5 has been met.
a. Simultaneous flow measurements shall be undertaken during a 24-hour period;
b. In case the actual water loss thus measured is more than the target level, the Operator
shall propose a work method, to be approved by the Technical Auditor, to determine the
cause(s) of water loss;
c. The Operator shall investigate the cause(s) of water loss accordingly and shall make the
necessary rectifications;
d. The testing for commissioning shall then be repeated till the requirements are met and
24x7 water supply achieved in the DMA.
12.5 Issuing a Commissioning Certificate
12.5.1 Testing for commissioning of a completed DMA shall consist of flow measurements at DMA
inlet and at critical measurement point. The relevant DMA must meet the following criteria and
must be certified by the Technical Auditor.
a. 90% of the pressure readings maintained at a minimum level as specified in 24 hours in the
relevant DMA
b. 90% of water supply connections in the relevant DMA are receiving a Continuous
Pressurized 24x7 Water Supply and have demonstrated 30 days of maintaining Continuous
Pressurized 24x7 Water Supply;
c. 20% NRW or lower, in the relevant DMA
12.5.2 As certified by the Technical Auditor, if the DMA meets the standards detailed in Article 12.5.1,
the Technical Auditor shall put recommendation to the Authority to issue a DMA Commissioning
Certificate.
12.5.3 The Authority will within a period of 7 days from the date of receipt of recommendation from the
Technical Auditor, advise whether it agrees with the recommendation of the Technical Auditor.
If the Authority disagrees with the recommendations of the Technical Auditor, it shall return the
recommendation to the Technical Auditor and the Operator with reasons for disagreement. The
Operator shall take such measures and actions as may be required to address the reasons
raised by the Authority and present the documents again to the Technical Auditor for
certification and fresh recommendations to the Authority. Once the Authority agrees to the
recommendation of the Technical Auditor as per the Article 12.5.1, then
a. the Authority shall issue a DMA Commissioning Certificate (“DMA Commissioning
Certificate”), post which the relevant DMA will get converted to a Commissioned DMA
(“Commissioned DMA”) from the date of DMA Commissioning Certificate
12.5.4 Within ninety (90) days of receipt of Commissioning Certificate for a DMA or Hydraulic Zone,
the Operator shall furnish to the Authority and the Technical Auditor a complete set of all
Designs and As-Built Drawings of the each and every Project Facilities, in 2 (two) hard copies
and in its editable digital format.
Page 72 of 432
13. MONITORING OF CONSTRUCTION
13.1 Monthly progress reports

13.1.1 During the Transition Period, the Operator shall, no later than 7 (seven) days after the close of
each month, furnish to the Authority and the Technical Auditor report on progress of the Works
and shall promptly give such other relevant information as may be required by the Technical
Auditor and the Authority.
13.2 Inspection
13.2.1 During the Transition Period, the Technical Auditor shall inspect the Project at least once in a
month and make a report of such inspection (the “Inspection Report”) stating in reasonable
detail the Defects or deficiencies, if any, with particular reference to the Agreed THP and
Technical Specifications. It shall send a copy of the Inspection Report to the Authority and the
Operator within 7 (seven) days of such inspection and upon receipt thereof, the Operator shall
rectify and remedy the Defects or deficiencies, if any, stated in the Inspection Report. Such
inspection or submission of Inspection Report by the Technical Auditor shall not relieve or
absolve the Operator of its obligations and liabilities hereunder in any manner whatsoever.
13.3 Quality of Materials and workmanship
13.3.1 The Operator shall ensure that the construction, materials and workmanship are in accordance
with the requirements specified in this Agreement and Technical Specifications and if no such
specification is given in the Agreement, in accordance with Good Industry Practice.
13.4 Quality control system
13.4.1 The Operator shall establish a quality control mechanism to ensure compliance with the
provisions of this Agreement (the “Quality Assurance Plan” or “QAP”).
13.4.2 The Operator shall, submit 30 (thirty) days prior to the Scheduled TCD, to the Technical Auditor
and the Authority its Quality Assurance Plan which shall include the following:
a) Distribution of duties and responsibilities, procedures, inspections and documentation and
key representatives of the Operator;
b) quality control mechanism including sampling and testing of materials, test frequencies,
standards, acceptance criteria, testing facilities, reporting, recording and interpretation of
test results, approvals, check list for site activities, and proforma for testing and calibration in
accordance with the Technical Specifications, relevant Applicable Law and Good Industry
Practice; and
c) internal quality audit system.
13.4.3 The Technical Auditor and the Authority shall convey their comments to the Operator within a
period of 21 (twenty-one) days of receipt of the QAP stating the modifications, if any, required,
and the Operator shall incorporate those in the QAP.
13.4.4 The cost of testing of construction, materials and workmanship under this Article 13 shall be
borne by the Operator.
13.5 Inspection and technical audit
13.5.1 The Technical Auditor and the Authority may inspect and review the progress and quality of the
rehabilitation and construction of the Project Facilities and issue appropriate directions to the
Page 73 of 432
Operator for taking remedial action in the event the works are not in accordance with the
provisions of this Agreement.
13.6 Inspection of construction records
13.6.1 The Technical Auditor and the Authority shall have the right to periodically inspect the records
of the Operator relating to the rehabilitation and construction of the Project Facilities.
13.7 Samples
13.7.1 The Operator shall submit the following samples of materials and relevant information to the
Technical Auditor for pre-construction review:
a) manufacturer's test reports and standard samples of manufactured materials; and
b) samples of such other materials as the Technical Auditor may require.
13.8 Tests
13.8.1 For determining that upon rehabilitation and construction the Project Facilities conform to the
Technical Specifications, the Technical Auditor and the Authority shall require the Operator to
carry out or cause to be carried out tests, at such time and frequency and in such manner as
specified in this Agreement, and in accordance with Good Industry Practice for quality
assurance.
13.8.2 In the event that results of any tests conducted under this Article 13.8 establish any defects or
deficiencies in the rehabilitated Existing Project facilities and Additional Project Facilities, the
Operator, at its own costs, shall be responsible for carry out remedial measures and furnish a
report to the Technical Auditor and the Authority in this behalf. The Technical Auditor and the
Authority shall require the Operator to carry out or cause to be carried out tests to determine
that such remedial measures have brought the Project Facilities into compliance with the
Technical Specifications and the procedure shall be repeated until the Project Facilities conform
to the Technical Specifications. For the avoidance of doubt, the cost of such tests and remedial
measures in pursuance thereof shall be solely borne by the Operator.
13.9 Examination of work before covering up
13.9.1 In order to enable the Technical Auditor / Authority is entitled to examine, inspect, measure
and/or test any work before it is covered up or put out of view or any part of the work is placed
thereon, the Operator shall give notice to the Authority and the Technical Auditor whenever any
such work is ready and before it is covered up. The Technical Auditor and the Authority shall
then either carry out the examination, inspection or testing without unreasonable delay, or
promptly give notice to the Operator that the Technical Auditor and the Authority does not
require to do so. Provided, however, that if any work is of a continuous nature where it is not
possible or prudent to keep it uncovered or incomplete, the Operator shall notify the schedule of
carrying out such work to give sufficient opportunity, not being less than 3 (three) business
days’ notice, to the Authority and the Technical Auditor to conduct its inspection, measurement
or test while the work is continuing. Provided further that in the event the Operator receives no
response from the Authority or the Technical Auditor within a period of 3 (three) business days
from the date on which the Operator’s notice hereunder is delivered to the Technical Auditor,
the Operator shall be entitled to assume that the Technical Auditor would not undertake the
said inspection.
13.10 Rejection
13.10.1 If, as a result of an examination, inspection, measurement or testing, any plant, materials,
design or workmanship is found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the
Page 74 of 432
provisions of this Agreement, the Technical Auditor shall reject the plant, materials, design or
workmanship by giving notice to the Operator, with reasons. The Operator shall then promptly
make good the defect and ensure that the rejected item complies with the requirements of this
Agreement.
13.10.2 If the Technical Auditor requires the plant, materials, design or workmanship to be retested,
the tests shall be repeated under the same terms and conditions, as applicable in each case. If
the rejection and retesting cause the Authority to incur any additional costs, such cost shall be
recoverable by the Authority from the Operator; and may be deducted by the Authority from any
monies due to be paid to the Operator.
13.11 Remedial work
13.11.1 Notwithstanding any previous test or certification, the Technical Auditor or the Authority may
instruct the Operator to:
a) remove from the Effective Service Area and replace any plant or materials which are not in
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement;
b) remove and re-execute any work which is not in accordance with the provisions of this
Agreement and the Technical Specification; and
c) execute any work which is urgently required for the safety of the Project Facilities in the
Effective Service Area, whether because of an accident, unforeseeable event or otherwise;
provided that in case of any work required on account of a Force Majeure Event, the
provisions of Article 26.7 shall apply.
13.11.2 If the Operator fails to comply with the instructions issued by the Technical Auditor or the
Authority under Article 13.11.1, within the time specified in the Technical Auditor’s notice or the
Authority’s notice, the Authority will be entitled to have the work executed by another agency.
The cost so incurred by the Authority for undertaking such work shall, without prejudice to the
rights of the Authority to recover Damages in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement,
be recoverable from the Operator and may be deducted by the Authority from any monies due
to be paid to the Operator.
13.12 Suspension of unsafe construction works
13.12.1 Upon recommendation of the Technical Auditor to this effect, the Authority may by notice
require the Operator to suspend forthwith the whole or any part of the construction works if, in
the reasonable opinion of the Authority, such work threatens the safety of the Users or the
localities adjacent to the Effective Service Area. Provided, however, where the situation so
requires the Authority may suo moto issue the notice referred to hereinabove.
13.12.2 The Operator shall, pursuant to the notice under Article 13.12.1, suspend the construction
works or any part thereof for such time and in such manner as may be specified by the
Authority and thereupon carry out remedial measures to secure the safety of suspended works.
The Operator may by notice require the Technical Auditor to inspect such remedial measures
forthwith and make a report to the Authority recommending whether or not the suspension
hereunder may be revoked. Upon receiving the recommendations of the Technical Auditor, the
Authority shall either revoke such suspension or instruct the Operator to carry out such other
and further remedial measures as may be necessary in the reasonable opinion of the Authority.
Page 75 of 432
14. COMPLETION CERTIFICATES
14.1 Provisional Certificate

14.1.1 The Technical Auditor may, at the request of the Operator, within seven days from the request,
issue a provisional certificate of completion substantially in the form set forth in Schedule 10
(the “Provisional Certificate”) if the key activities indicated in the Implementation Schedule
submitted as a part of the Agreed THP, have been successfully completed post which the
Project Facilities can be safely and reliably put to commercial operation though some works or
things forming part thereof are outstanding and not yet complete. In such an event, the
Provisional Certificate shall have appended thereto a list of outstanding items signed jointly by
the Technical Auditor and the Operator (the “Punch List”); provided that the Technical Auditor
shall not withhold the Provisional Certificate for reason of any work remaining incomplete if the
delay in completion thereof is solely attributable to the Authority; provided further that the Punch
List shall also include the cost of completion of each of the outstanding items. If the Technical
Auditor observes that works are not completed substantially, it shall respond to the Operator
within seven days of receipt of the request from the Operator.
14.1.2 In an event where Certificate of Commencement of Sustaining Period is given based on
Provisional Certificate, the Operator will in no circumstances will be relived of its pending
Operator Obligations of the Transition Period.
14.2 Completion Certificate
14.2.1 Upon completion of balance works indicated in the list appended to the Provisional Certificate
or the waiver of some activities by the Authority, and the Technical Auditor determining the
successful completion of the same, it shall forthwith issue to the Operator and the Authority a
certificate substantially in the form set forth in Schedule 11 (the “Completion Certificate”).
14.3 Completion of Punch List items
14.3.1 All items in the Punch List shall be completed by the Operator within 90 (ninety) days of the
date of issue of the Provisional Certificate and for any delay thereafter, other than for reasons
solely attributable to the Authority or due to Force Majeure, the Authority shall be entitled to
recover Damages from the Operator to be calculated as per Schedule 5 and Schedule 6.
Subject to payment of such Damages, the Operator shall be entitled to a further period not
exceeding 120 (one hundred twenty) days for completion of the Punch List items. For the
avoidance of doubt, it is agreed that if completion of any Punch List item is delayed for reasons
solely attributable to the Authority or due to Force Majeure, subject to the provisions of Article
16.4.1, the completion date thereof shall be determined by the Technical Auditor in accordance
with Good Industry Practice, and such completion date shall be deemed to be the date of issue
of the Provisional Certificate for the purposes of Damages, if any, payable for such item under
this Article 14.3.1.
14.3.2 Upon completion of all the Punch List items, the Technical Auditor shall issue the Completion
Certificate. Failure of the Operator to complete all the Punch List items within the time set forth
in Article 14.3.1 for any reason, other than conditions constituting Force Majeure or for reasons
solely attributable to the Authority, shall entitle the Authority to terminate this Agreement due to
the reason of Operator Event of Default.
14.4 Withholding of Provisional Certificate or Completion Certificate
Page 76 of 432
14.4.1 If upon receipt of request from the Operator for the issue of Provisional Certificate Completion
Certificate, the Technical Auditor determines that the Project Facilities or any part thereof does
not conform to the provisions of this Agreement and cannot be safely and reliably placed in
commercial operation, it shall forthwith make a report in this behalf and send copies thereof to
the Authority and the Operator. Upon receipt of such a report from the Technical Auditor and
after conducting its own inspection, if the Authority is of the opinion that the Project Facilities or
the relevant part thereof is not fit and safe for commercial service, it shall, within 7 (seven) days
of receiving the aforesaid report, notify the Operator of the defects and deficiencies in the
Project Facilities or the relevant part thereof, and direct the Technical Auditor to withhold
issuance of the Provisional Certificate or Completion Certificate, as the case may be. Upon
receipt of such notice, the Operator shall remedy and rectify such Defects or deficiencies and
notify the same to the Technical Auditor. Such procedure shall be repeated as necessary until
all the Defects or deficiencies are rectified.
Page 77 of 432
15. SUSTAINING PERIOD CONDITIONS
15.1 Sustaining Period Conditions : The Sustaining Period Conditions to be met by the Operator are as
follows
15.1.1 90% of water supply connections in the Effective Service Area have been certified by the
Technical Auditor as receiving a Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply and have
demonstrated 30 days of maintaining Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply in the entire
Effective Service Area;
15.1.2 20% NRW or lower, as has been certified by the Technical Auditor, in the Effective Service
Area;
15.1.3 All Transition Period Milestones as set out in Schedule 5 have been completed
15.1.4 Completion Certificate and /or Provisional Certificates are issued under the provisions of Article
14;
15.1.5 Sustaining Period Performance Security has been submitted by the Operator to the Authority in
the form and substance set out in Schedule 20 and in accordance with Article 9.
15.2 Meeting of Sustaining Period Conditions
15.2.1 The Operator shall achieve the Sustaining Period Conditions by the end of forty five (45)
months from the Transition Commencement Date. The Technical Auditor shall confirm
achievement of the Sustaining Period Conditions and recommend to the Authority to issue a
certificate that the Operator shall commence the Sustaining Period (the “Certificate of
Commencement of Sustaining Period”). Within ten (10) business days from the receipt of
Technical Auditor’s recommendation and its acceptance by the Authority, the Authority shall
issue the certificate. The date on which the Certificate of Commencement of Sustaining Period
is issued shall be the Sustaining Period Commencement Date (SPCD).
Page 78 of 432
16. CHANGE OF SCOPE
16.1 Change of Scope

16.1.1 The Authority may, notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, for
any reason or at the discretion of the Authority require the provision of additional works and
services over and above rehabilitation of Existing Project Facilities and construction of
Additional Project Facilities or reduction of the scope of works/facilities including (but not limited
to) the following:
a) More than 10% increase in estimated investments in any Hydraulic Zone in accordance with
Article 5.3.4..It is clarified that if variation in estimated investment is less than 10%, the
payment to the Operator will be provided in accordance with Article 22.3 ;
b) change in the O&M obligations of the Operator subject to Article 16.1.2;
c) change in the Performance Standards provided in this Agreement;
d) change in Effective Service Area or Project Facilities or number of Hydraulic Zones or
number of DMAs under the Operator Obligation;
e) any other reasons or discretion of the Authority
Each such change by the Authority shall be considered as a revision of the Scope of the Project
as contemplated by this Agreement (the “Change of Scope”). Any such Change of Scope shall
be treated in accordance with the provisions of this Article 16 and the costs thereof shall be
expended by the Operator or the Authority and reimbursed or adjusted by the Authority or the
Operator in accordance with Article 16.3 or Article 16.4, as the case may be.
16.1.2 It is clarified that, following changes will not qualify for change in O&M obligations of the
Operator
a) Change in length of water pipeline which needs to be operated and maintained by the
Operator
b) Change in number of connections or number of Customers
c) Change in volume of water distributed / billed
It is further clarified that, for pipelines and connections, the Operator will be eligible for
payment of Works Fees in accordance with Article 22. It is also clarified that, the Operator
will be eligible for O&M Fees based on actual number of connections managed during the
period.
16.1.3 If the Operator determines at any time that a Change of Scope is necessary for providing safer
and improved services to the Customers, it shall by notice in writing give details of such
required change and request the Authority to consider such Change of Scope. The Authority
shall where Change of Scope for additional works is initiated by the Operator, within 15 (fifteen)
days of receipt of such notice, either accept such Change of Scope with modifications, if any,
and initiate proceedings therefore in accordance with this Article 16 or inform the Operator in
writing of its reasons for not accepting such Change of Scope, which decision of the Authority
shall be final and binding. If the Authority fails to respond to the Change of Scope request from
the Operator within the timeframe specified under this Article 16.1.3, then the Change of Scope
proposed by the Operator shall be deemed to have not been accepted by the Authority.
Page 79 of 432
16.1.4 Any works or services which are accepted by the Authority and provided under and in
accordance with this Article 16 shall form part of the Additional Project Facilities and the
provisions of this Agreement shall apply mutatis mutandis to such additional works or services.
16.2 Procedure for Change of Scope
16.2.1 In the event of the Authority determines that a Change of Scope is required it shall issue to the
Operator a notice specifying in reasonable detail the change in works and services
contemplated thereunder (the “Change of Scope Notice”).
16.2.2 Upon receipt of a Change of Scope Notice, the Operator shall, with due diligence, provide to the
Authority such information as is necessary, together with preliminary documentation in support
of:
a) the impact, if any, which the Change of Scope is likely to have on the Implementation
Schedule if the works or services are required to be carried out;
b) the impact, if any, which the Change of Scope is likely to have on the Performance
Standards if the works or services are required to be carried out;
c) the options for implementing the proposed Change of Scope and the effect, if any, each
such option would have on the costs and time thereof, including a detailed breakdown by
work classifications specifying the material and labour costs calculated in accordance with
the Relevant SOR applicable to the works assigned by the Authority to its contractors, along
with the proposed premium/discount on such rates; provided that the cost incurred by the
Operator in providing such information shall be reimbursed by the Authority to the extent
such cost is certified by the Technical Auditor as reasonable.
16.2.3 Upon receipt of information set forth in Article 16.2.2, if the Authority decides to proceed with
the Change of Scope, it shall convey its preferred option to the Operator and the time and costs
implementation thereof. The Authority shall thereafter issue an order (the “Change of Scope
Order”) requiring the Operator to proceed with the Change of Scope.
16.2.4 The provisions of this Agreement, insofar as they relate to construction works, shall apply
mutatis mutandis to the works undertaken by the Operator under Article 16.
16.3 Payment for increase in scope of work
16.3.1 The Operator shall, after commencement of work, under Change of Scope Order present to the
Authority bills for payment in respect of the works in progress or completed works, as the case
may be, supported by such documentation as is reasonably sufficient for the Authority to
determine the accuracy thereof. Within 30 (thirty) days of receipt of such bills, the Authority
shall disburse to the Operator such amounts as are certified by the Technical Auditor as
reasonable and after making a proportionate deduction of 10% of the cost identified in the
Change of Scope Order, towards retention money which shall be released after a period of 1
(one) year from the completion of works or SPCD, whichever is later, and in the event of any
Dispute, final adjustments thereto shall be made under and in accordance with the Dispute
Resolution Procedure. The Parties while agreeing the Change of Scope shall also agree to the
billing break-up for additional scope of work and the same shall be used to pay to the Operator.
16.3.2 In the event the increase in the scope of work with respect to the operation and maintenance
obligations of the Operator during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period, the Authority
shall estimate the cost of the increased works as per mechanism based on the
recommendations of the Technical Auditor. Such value shall be added to the O&M Fees of that
respective year.
Page 80 of 432
16.4 Reduction in the scope of work

16.4.1 If the Operator has not completed construction of any part of the Existing Project Facilities and
Additional Project Facilities on account of Force Majeure or for reasons solely attributable to the
Authority or a due to reduction in the scope the Parties shall jointly estimate the value of such
reduced scope of work based on the item rate as quoted by the Operator in the Bid. Such value
shall be deducted from the payments to be made to the Operator as per the payment terms in
this Agreement (Article 22).
16.4.2 In the event the reduction in the scope of work with respect to the operation and maintenance
obligations of the Operator during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period, the Authority
shall estimate the cost of the reduced works as per mechanism based on the recommendations
of the Technical Auditor. Such value shall be deducted from the O&M Fees of that respective
year.
16.5 Power of the Authority to undertake works
16.5.1 In the event the Parties are unable to agree to the proposed Change of Scope Order in
accordance with Article 16, the Authority may, after giving notice to the Operator and
considering its reply thereto, award the works or services, contemplated under the Article
16.1.1, to any person on the basis of open competitive bidding; provided that the Operator shall
have the option of matching the first ranked bid in terms of the selection criteria, subject to
payment of 2% (two percent) of the bid amount to the Authority, and thereupon securing the
award of such works or services. The amount of 2% of the bid amount shall be paid to the
Authority in form of a demand draft in favor of the Authority. It is also agreed that the Operator
shall provide assistance and cooperation to the person who undertakes the works or services
hereunder, but shall not be responsible for rectification of any Defects and/ or maintenance of
works carried out by other agencies.
Page 81 of 432
17. DISCLAIMER
17.1 The Operator acknowledges that prior to the execution of this Agreement the Operator has, conducted
a complete and careful examination and made an independent evaluation of the Request for
Proposals, Scope of the Project, Service Area, Existing Project Facilities, proposed Additional Project
Facilities, the BOQ, local conditions, and all information / documents provided by the Authority or
obtained, procured or gathered otherwise, and determine to its satisfaction the accuracy or otherwise
thereof and the nature and extent of difficulties, risks and hazards as are likely to arise or may be
faced by it in the course of performance of its obligations hereunder. The Authority makes no
representation whatsoever, express, implicit or otherwise, regarding the accuracy, adequacy,
correctness, reliability and/or completeness of any assessment, assumptions, statement or
information provided by it and the Operator confirms that it shall have no claim whatsoever against the
Authority in this regard.
17.2 The Operator acknowledges and hereby accepts the risk of inadequacy, mistake or error in or relating
to any of the matters set forth in Article 17.1.1 above and hereby acknowledges and agrees that the
Authority shall not be liable for the same in any manner whatsoever to the Operator, {the Joint Venture
Members and their Associates or any person} claiming through or under any of them.
17.3 The Parties agree that any mistake or error in or relating to any of the matters set forth in Article
17.1.1 above shall not vitiate this Agreement, or render it voidable.
17.4 In the event that either Party becomes aware of any mistake or error relating to any of the matters set
forth in Article 17.1.1 above, that Party shall immediately notify the other Party, specifying the mistake
or error; provided, however, that a failure on part of the Authority to give any notice pursuant to this
Article 17.1.4 shall not prejudice the disclaimer of the Authority contained in Article 17.1.1 and shall
not in any manner shift to the Authority any risks assumed by the Operator pursuant to this
Agreement.
17.5 Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, all risks relating to the Project shall be borne by the
Operator and the Authority shall not be liable in any manner for such risks or the consequences
thereof.
Page 82 of 432
18. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
18.1 Safety Requirements

18.1.1 The Operator shall comply with the provisions of this Agreement, Applicable Laws and
Applicable Permits and conform to Good Industry Practice for securing the safe operation of the
Project Facilities. In particular, the Operator shall comply with the safety requirements set forth
in Schedule 9 (the “Safety Requirements”).
18.1.2 The Technical Auditor shall carry out safety audit of the Project in accordance with the Safety
Requirements, and shall take all other actions necessary for securing compliance with the
Safety Requirements.
18.1.3 The Operator shall throughout the implementation of the Project:
(a) Take full responsibility for the adequacy, stability, safety and security of the Project
Facilities in the Effective Service Area;
(b) Have full regard for the safety of all persons on or in the vicinity of the Site (including
persons to whom access to the Site has been allowed by the Operator), comply with all
relevant safety regulations, including provision of safety gear. In so far as the Operator
is in occupation or otherwise is using areas of the Site, the Operator shall keep the Site
and the Project Facilities in an orderly state appropriate for the avoidance of injury or
accident to all persons on and in the vicinity of the Site and shall keep the Authority
indemnified against all costs, charges, losses and damages that may be suffered by the
Authority in any manner whatsoever as a result of any injury or accident to any person
on or in the vicinity of the Site in connection with the implementation of the Project;
(c) Provide and maintain all lights, guards, fences and warning signs and watchmen when
and where necessary or as required by the Technical Auditor or by any Applicable Laws
or by any relevant authority for the protection of the Facilities and for the safety and
convenience of the public and all persons on or in the vicinity of the Site;
(d) Where any part of the works would otherwise be carried out in darkness, ensure that all
parts of the Effective Service Area where such part of the works is being carried out are
so lighted as to ensure the safety of all persons on or in the vicinity of the Site and of
such part of the works;
(e) The Operator shall ensure that its employees and the employees of the Subcontractors
wear identification badges (cards), uniforms, helmets, gum boots and other
safety/protection wear as directed by Technical Auditor or Authority’s representative,
and to be provided by the Operator. Badges shall identify the Operator and/ or the
Subcontractor, as the case may be, and show the employee’s name and number and
shall be worn at all times while at the site;
(f) All vehicles used by the Operator at the site shall be clearly marked with the Operator’s
name or identification mark; and
(g) The Operator shall provide and maintain adequate security personnel to fulfill its
obligations. The requirements of security measures shall include, but not be limited to,
maintenance of law and order at the Site, provision of all lighting, guard, and all other
measures necessary for protection of Facilities at the site, all materials delivered to the
site and all persons employed in connection with the Project continuously throughout,
including nights, Sundays and holidays, the duration of the Agreement. However, in
respect of parts of the site in close proximity of traffic corridors where public and traffic
Page 83 of 432
are likely to come close to the work area, suitable barricading as directed by Authority
shall be provided by the Operator. It is clarified that separate payment for provision of
security services shall not be made to the Operator and shall be deemed to be included
in the Operator Payments.
18.1.4 The Operator shall fully comply with Environmental Code of Practice and all the safety, health
and environmental standards under Applicable Laws. In case, the Operator fails to comply with
the obligation contained herein, then the Authority shall be entitled to make the necessary
arrangements and recover the costs from the Operator. Persistent defaults or non-compliance
shall be deemed to be a material breach and shall entitle the Authority to terminate the
Agreement as an Operator Event of Default.
18.1.5 The Operator shall provide all necessary access, assistance and facilities to enable the
Technical Auditor and Authority's representatives or any other third party safety audit agency to
carry out inspections to verify that the safety plans are being properly and fully implemented.
18.1.6 The Operator shall ensure that the works are carried out and services are performed in such
manner that there is no damage to or interference with :
(a) water courses on and in the vicinity of the site;
(b) utility services on and in the vicinity of the site;
(c) structures (including foundations), roads, street fixtures, etc. on and in the vicinity of the
site;
(d) public or private, vehicular or pedestrian access routes and roads on and in the vicinity
of the site.
18.1.7 Items which are damaged or interfered with during the implementation of the Project and items
which are removed or diverted to enable the performance shall be reinstalled to the satisfaction
of the Authority. Any claims for damage or loss to third parties by the Operator shall be borne
by the Operator.
Page 84 of 432
19. MONITORING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
19.1 Inspection and measurement of Performance Standards

19.1.1 The Technical Auditor shall inspect the Project Facilities at least once in a month and measure
the compliance of the Operator with the Performance Standards. It shall make a report of such
inspection (the “Inspection Report”) stating in reasonable detail the defects or deficiencies, if
any, with particular reference to the Maintenance Requirements, the O&M Plan and Safety
Requirements, and send a copy thereof to the Authority and the Operator within 7 (seven) days
of such inspection. The Operator shall render such assistance and co-operation as may be
reasonably required by the Technical Auditor to conduct such inspections.
19.2 Tests
19.2.1 For determining that the Project Facilities conforms to the Maintenance Requirements, the
Technical Auditor may require the Operator to carry out, or cause to be carried out, tests
specified by it in accordance with Good Industry Practice. The Operator shall, promptly and with
due diligence, carry out or cause to be carried out all such tests in accordance with the
instructions of the Technical Auditor and furnish the results of such tests forthwith to the
Technical Auditor. Costs incurred on such tests shall be borne by the Operator.
19.3 Remedial measures
19.3.1 The Operator shall repair or replace the related Project Facilities to rectify the Defects or
deficiencies, if any, set forth in the Inspection Report or in the test results referred to in Article
19.1 and Article 19.2 and furnish a report in respect thereof to the Technical Auditor and the
Authority within 15 (fifteen) days of receiving the Inspection Report or the test results, as the
case may be; provided that where the remedying of such defects or deficiencies is likely to take
more than 15 (fifteen) days, the Operator shall submit progress reports of the repair works once
every week until such works are completed in conformity with this Agreement.
19.3.2 The Technical Auditor shall require the Operator to carry out or cause to be carried out tests, at
its own cost, to determine that such remedial measures have brought the Project into
compliance with the Maintenance Requirements and the procedure set forth in this Article 19.3
shall be repeated until the Project conforms to the Maintenance Requirements. In the event that
remedial measures are not completed by the Operator in conformity with the provisions of this
Agreement, without prejudice to any other right or remedy available to the Authority, the
Authority shall be entitled to recover Damages from the Operator under and in accordance with
Article 6, Schedule 5 and Schedule 6.
Page 85 of 432
20. TECHNICAL AUDITOR
20.1 Appointment of Technical Auditor

20.1.1 The Authority shall appoint a consulting engineering firm substantially to be the independent
engineer for the Project under this Agreement (the “Technical Auditor”). The appointment
shall be made no later than 30 (thirty) days from the Effective Date and shall initially be for a
period of 5 (five) years which may be extended for a further term of 5 (five) years. On expiry of
the aforesaid appointment. the Authority shall have the right to substitute Technical Auditor at
any time(s) during the Term
20.2 Duties and functions
20.2.1 The Technical Auditor shall discharge its duties and functions substantially in accordance with
the terms of reference set forth in Schedule 12.
20.2.2 The Technical Auditor shall submit regular periodic reports (at least once every month) to the
Authority in respect of its duties and functions set forth in Schedule 12.
20.2.3 A true copy of all communications sent by the Authority to the Technical Auditor and by the
Technical Auditor to the Authority shall be sent forthwith by the Technical Auditor to the
Operator.
20.2.4 A true copy of all communications sent by the Technical Auditor to the Operator and by the
Operator to the Technical Auditor shall be sent forthwith by the Technical Auditor to the
Authority.
20.3 Remuneration
20.3.1 The remuneration, cost and expenses of the Technical Auditor shall be paid fully by the
Authority.
20.4 Termination of appointment
20.4.1 The Authority, subject to Article 20.4.2, may terminate the appointment of the Technical Auditor
at any time, but only after appointment of another Technical Auditor in accordance with Article
20.1.
20.4.2 If the Operator has reason to believe that the Technical Auditor is not discharging its duties and
functions in a fair, efficient and diligent manner, the Authority shall, where applicable after
receiving a written representation from the Operator, hold a tripartite meeting with the Operator
and the Technical Auditor for resolution of the issues raised by the Operator.
20.5 Authorized signatories
20.5.1 The Authority shall require the Technical Auditor to designate and notify to the Authority and the
Operator up to 2 (two) persons employed in its firm to sign for and on behalf of the Technical
Auditor, and any communication or document required to be signed by the Technical Auditor
shall be valid and effective only if signed by any of the designated persons; provided that the
Technical Auditor may, by notice in writing, substitute any of the designated persons by any of
its employees.
20.6 Dispute resolution
Page 86 of 432
20.6.1 If either Party disputes any advice, instruction, decision, direction or award of the Technical
Auditor, or, as the case may be, the assertion or failure to assert jurisdiction, the Dispute shall
be resolved in accordance with the Dispute Resolution Procedure (Article 35).
Page 87 of 432
21. CHANGE IN LAW
21.1 Change in Law

21.1.1 The Operator may claim the benefit of and/or relief for a Change in Law event subject to and in
accordance with this Article 21.
21.1.2 Change in Law event include the occurrence of any of the following events after 28 days prior to
the Bid Due Date:
a) The enactment of any new Indian law;
b) The repeal, modification or re-enactment of any existing Indian law;
c) The commencement of any Indian law whose date of coming into effect has not been
notified until the Bid Due Date;
d) The non-commencement or delayed commencement of any Indian Law whose date of
coming into effect has been notified until the Bid Due Date;
e) a change in the interpretation or application of any Indian law by a judgment of a court of
record which has become final, conclusive and binding, as compared to such interpretation
or application by a court of record prior to the Bid Due Date;
f) Any change in the rates of any of the Taxes that have a direct or indirect financial effect on
the Project.
21.1.3 The Operator shall not be allowed any relief and/or compensation for any Change in Law which
is not a: (i) Qualifying Change in Law; or (ii) Fundamental Change in Law.
21.2 Consequences of Qualifying Change in Law
21.2.1 If a Qualifying Change in Law occurs, then the Operator shall notify the Authority and the
Technical Auditor of such Qualifying Change in Law along with details of:
a) any necessary change in the Agreed SIP, Agreed THP, O&M Plan, O&M Manual or the
Technical Specifications or Performance Standards on the basis of which construction &
rehabilitation works and O&M services are required to be undertaken for the Project
Facilities;
b) any changes that are required to the terms of this Agreement to deal with such Qualifying
Change in Law
c) any extension of the Scheduled TCD or Scheduled SPCD or Scheduled Progressive
Handover Date or scheduled date of commissioning of a DMA or any scheduled payment
date, to account for the delay, if any, resulting from the Qualifying Change in Law; and/or
d) any increase in Works Fees (C) or O&M Fees (D) that will result from the Qualifying Change
in Law.
21.2.2 As soon as practicable and in any event, within 30 days from the receipt of any notice from the
Operator under Article 21.2.1 above, the Parties shall agree on the consequences of the
Qualifying Change in Law, as specified in the notice, and any way in which the Operator can
mitigate the effect of the Qualifying Change in Law, including:
a) providing evidence that the Operator has used reasonable endeavours (including, where
practicable, the use of competitive quotes) to minimize any increase in cost of undertaking
Operator Obligations or oblige the Subcontractors to minimize any such increase;
Page 88 of 432
b) providing evidence as to how the Qualifying Change in Law has affected prices of materials
used for construction or O&M of Project Facilities; and
c) demonstrating to the Authority and the Technical Auditor that the Qualifying Change in Law
is the direct cause of the increase in costs or delay and the estimated increase in costs, or
extension of time could not reasonably be expected to be mitigated or recovered by the
Operator.
21.2.3 If the Parties fail to agree on the consequences of the Qualifying Change in Law within 30 days
from the receipt of any notice from the Operator under Article 21.2.2 above, the dispute will be
finally settled in accordance with the dispute resolution procedure set out in Article 35.
21.2.4 If the Operator has complied with Article 21.2.2 above and the Parties mutually agree or it is
determined in accordance with Article 35 that the Operator is required to incur additional costs
due to a Qualifying Change in Law, then:
a) the Operator shall be required to bear all costs resulting from any one or more Qualifying
Change in Law events, up to an aggregate amount equivalent to (the “Threshold Limit”)
i. INR 50,000 (Indian Rupees fifty thousand only)
b) for any additional Costs resulting from the Qualifying Change in Law, which is in excess of
the Threshold Limit, the Operator shall be entitled to be compensated for such additional
costs, in excess of the Threshold Limit, by way of,
i. a lump-sum payment of an amount equivalent to the additional costs incurred by the
Operator, over and above the Threshold Limit; or
ii. an appropriate adjustment in the O&M Fees (D).
21.2.5 If the Operator has complied with Article 21.2.2 above and the Parties mutually agree or it is
determined in accordance with Article 35 that the Operator will suffer any delay as a result of
the occurrence of a Qualifying Change in Law, then the Operator shall be entitled to an
extension of relevant time.
21.2.6 The quantum of relief (whether extension of time or compensation) that the Operator shall be
entitled to under this Article 21.2 shall be as agreed by the Parties or as determined in
accordance with Article 35, provided always that:
a) the Operator shall bear any increased cost to the extent of the Threshold Limit; and
b) the Operator shall only be entitled to relief that is reasonable for such Qualifying Change in
Law.
21.2.7 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, the Operator shall not be entitled to
any schedule relief and/or compensation or adjustment in the Works Fees (C) or O&M Fees (D)
due to a Qualifying Change in Law, if such Qualifying Change in Law becomes applicable as a
result of a delay attributable to the Operator.
21.3 Consequences of Fundamental Change in Law
21.3.1 If a Fundamental Change in Law occurs, then,
a) the affected Party may notify the other Parties of the effects of such Fundamental Change in
Law on the validity and enforceability of this Agreement or on the rights of the Operator
under this Agreement; and
Page 89 of 432
b) any Party may propose amendments to the Agreement, which would make the Agreement
compliant with Applicable Laws, while enabling the Parties to achieve their commercial
objectives.
21.3.2 If the Parties are unable to agree on necessary amendments to the terms of this Agreement
within 30 days of receipt of a notice from the affected Party or the Fundamental Change in Law
event is such that it cannot be mitigated with amendments to the terms of this Agreement, the
Fundamental Change in Law event shall be treated as a Political Event in accordance with
Article 26.
Page 90 of 432
22. OPERATOR PAYMENTS
22.1 Operator Payments

22.1.1 The Parties expressly agree that the Authority shall pay the Operator following payments
(“Operator Payments”) subject to this Article 22, Schedule 6 and Schedule 7:
No. Operator Payments Details
1 SIP Fees (A) Remuneration for submission of SIP, IMIS, achievement
of Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply
DMA Establishment Payment for creation and commissioning of a DMA
2
Fees (B)
3 Works Fees (C) Remuneration for Implementation of IIP
4 O&M Fees (D) Remuneration for O&M of Project Facilities
22.1.2 Quote of the Operator under each component shall be as per the Financial Bid submitted by the
Operator and has been provided in Schedule 7.
22.1.3 The Operator Payments set out in this Article 22, Schedule 6 and Schedule 7 shall constitute
the Operator’s sole remuneration in connection with this Agreement, and the Operator shall not
accept for its own benefit any trade commission, discount, or similar payment in connection with
activities pursuant to this Agreement or in the discharge of its Operator Obligations under the
Agreement, and the Operator shall ensure that its employees, any sub-contractors, and agents
of either of them similarly shall not receive any such additional remuneration.
22.1.4 All Operator Payments will be determined based on the Performance Standards as set out in
Schedule 5, and payment terms as set out in Schedule 6.
22.2 Operator Payments with respect to SIP Fees (A)
22.2.1 The Operator shall submit the monthly Operator Invoice, for activities completed based on
Schedule 6 and Schedule 7. The Operator shall indicate the amount payable on the basis of
progress made in completing of specified milestones achieved.
22.2.2 The Technical Auditor will certify the extent of activities undertaken. The Technical Auditor will
certify the amounts to be paid determined on the basis of progress made in completing the
respective activity/ milestones to the Operator after making deductions on account of advance
payments, recoveries, Liquidated Damages, other deductions, Incentives (if any) and other
adjustments in accordance with this Agreement and deduction of taxes at source, as applicable
under the law.
22.3 Operator Payments with respect to Works Fees (C)
22.3.1 The Works Fees (C) shall be as provided in Schedule 7, and shall be paid as per the provisions
of this Article 22.3 and Schedule 6.
22.3.2 At the end of every month during the Transition Period, the Operator shall submit to the
Technical Auditor and the Authority monthly progress of the works undertaken. The Operator
shall submit the monthly Operator Invoice based on Schedule 6 and Schedule 7. The Operator
shall indicate the amount payable on the basis of progress made in completing of specified
milestones achieved.
22.3.3 The Technical Auditor will certify the amounts to be paid determined on the basis of progress
made in completing the respective activity/ milestones to the Operator after making deductions
Page 91 of 432
on account of advance payments, recoveries, Liquidated Damages, other deductions Incentives

(if any) and other adjustments in accordance with this Agreement and deduction of taxes at
source, as applicable under the law.
22.3.4 At the end of every month during the Transition Period, the Operator shall submit to the
Technical Auditor and the Authority month-wise statements of the value of the work / services
completed less the cumulative amount certified previously, along with details of measurement
of the quantity of works executed in a tabulated form as approved by the Technical Auditor and
the Authority.
22.3.5 The Operator shall submit along with the monthly Operator Invoice, for works done for Project
Facilities listed based on Schedule 6 and Schedule 7, at the end of each month indicating the
amount payable on the basis of progress made in completing of specified milestones as
certified by the Technical Auditor and PBC Engineer in accordance with the item-wise break-up
of various components given in Schedule 7. Payment for construction works will be based on
the breakup provided in Schedule 6
22.3.6 The payment will be subject to following conditions:

(a) The quantities of materials are not excessive and shall be certified by the Operator to be
utilized within a reasonable time (not exceeding 3 months).
(b) The materials are in accordance with the requirement and Technical Specifications.
(c) The materials have been delivered to sites and are properly stored and protected against
damage or deterioration to the satisfaction of the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
(d) The Operator’s records of the requirement, orders, receipt and use of materials are kept
in a form approved by the Authority and the Technical Auditor and such records shall be
available for inspection by the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
(e) Ownership of such materials shall be deemed to vest in the Authority for which the
Operator shall submit an indemnity bond in a format provided by the Authority.
(f) The item rate applicable for each component will be based on BOQ provided by the
Operator in accordance with Schedule 7
(g) The payment released to the Operator in no circumstances shall be for quantities higher
than the quantities of works approved in Detailed Design and Drawings for the relevant
Hydraulic Zone. It is clarified that, the payment to the Operator will be based on actual
measurement of the work subject to the ceiling on qualities of works approved in Detailed
Design and Drawings.
Any such material that is unlikely to be utilized for the implementation of IIP will be taken back
by the Operator after the Authority has adjusted the payment already made for such material
from the invoice(s) submitted by the Operator.
The amounts to be paid to the Operator for implementation of IIP, shall include all costs and
expenses of the Operator in upgradation and refurbishment of Existing Project Facilities and
procurement, construction and commissioning of Additional Project Facilities, including all costs
and expenses relating to the manpower, sub-contracts, cartage etc..
22.3.7 The Technical Auditor will certify the amounts to be paid determined on the basis of progress
made in completing the respective activity/ milestones to the Operator after making deductions
Page 92 of 432
on account of advance payments, recoveries, Holdback, Liquidated Damages, other deductions

and other adjustments in accordance with this Agreement and deduction of taxes at source, as
applicable under the law.
22.3.8 The Authority shall deduct from each payment towards Works Fees (C) a Holdback (the
“Holdback”) to the extent of 3 percent of the amount certified for payment till the aggregate
deduction under Holdback reaches 2.5 percent of the total Works Fees (C). The holdback
amount shall be released to the Operator, subject to the Operator furnishing an irrevocable
Bank Guarantee from a Bank equivalent to the Holdback amount, valid up to two years from
TCD. If the Operator furnishes such Bank Guarantee in advance (prior to TCD), Holdback shall
not be deducted from each payment made during Transition Period,
22.3.9 The value of work executed shall be determined by the Technical Auditor after due check
measurement of the quantities / milestones claimed as executed by the Operator, and only
such items of works included in the monthly statement will qualify for verification/ payment if
these have been identified as such in the item-wise breakup of payment schedule provided in
this Article 22.3. For items of works not covered in the said item-wise schedule, payment as per
rate quoted and quantity executed shall be verified for payment.
22.3.10 The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the
price schedule read along the item wise break up table. The value of work executed shall
include the adjustments due to Change in Scope. All Change of Scope related to
implementation of IIP shall be valued and agreed mutually between the Operator, Authority and
the Technical Auditor before execution of such Change of Scope in accordance with Article 16.
22.3.11 The Technical Auditor may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the
proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information.
22.3.12 The Operator has an option of availing Mobilization Advance for implementation of IIP and
execution of works therein during the Transition Period. In case the Operator opt-in to avail
Mobilization Advance, the Operator shall provide to the Authority no later than 7 (seven) days
from the Transition Commencement Date (TCD), an irrevocable and unconditional guarantee
from a Bank for a sum equivalent to 110% of the Mobilization Advance sought by the Operator
in the form set forth in Schedule 17 (the “Mobilization Advance Security”). The Mobilization
Advance is deemed as interest bearing advance at an interest rate of 8% to be compounded
annually.
22.3.13 The Authority shall, on request of the Operator, made at any time after submission of the
Mobilization Advance Security, make an interest bearing loan for mobilization and cash flow
support for an amount not exceeding 10% (ten per cent) of the Works Fees (C) stated in the
Schedule 7 (“Mobilization Advance”). The Advance Payment is deemed as interest bearing
advance at an interest rate of Bank Rate to be compounded annually. The Mobilization
Advance shall be paid to the Operator only once the Mobilization Advance Security is duly
submitted by the Operator to the Authority. The Mobilization Advance shall be paid by the
Authority to the Operator in two instalments as under, subject to the provisions of the
Agreement:
a) 50% of the Mobilisation Advance may be sought after Effective Date;
b) 50% of the Mobilization Advance may be sought after TCD.
22.3.14 The Mobilization Advance shall be recovered by the Authority from the Operator Payments
commencing from the date on which the payment to the Operator with respect to
implementation of IIP has reached 20% of the Works Fees (C) or from the fourth Operator
Page 93 of 432
Invoice after the TCD, whichever is earlier. Thereafter, 15% percentage of Mobilization
Advance would be deducted from subsequent and each Operator Payments till the amount is
adjusted. The Mobilization Advance shall be recovered till payment of 90% of the Works Fees
(C).
22.4 Operator Payments with respect to O&M Fees (D)
22.4.1 Subject to adjustments to achievement of Performance Standards in accordance with Schedule
5, and in consideration of the Operator undertaking the operations and maintenance of the
Project Facilities, the Authority shall pay O&M Fees (D) in accordance with this Article 22.4,
Schedule 6 and Schedule 7.
22.4.2 O&M Fees (D) paid to the Operator during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period will be
on account of O&M of Project Facilities which will include but not limited to supply of spare
parts, consumables, chemicals, manpower, Minor Maintenance, and insurance. It is clarified
that energy charges for O&M of Project Facilities during the Transition Period and Sustaining
Period will be borne by the Parties in accordance to the sub-sections below:
a) Energy charges related to provision of water supply: Energy charges incurred on
operating the water pumping stations in the Service Area will be borne by the Authority
completely.
b) Energy charges for the associated infrastructure: Energy charges for operations of
service reservoir, SCADA system, customer service center, call center will be borne by
the Authority.
c) Energy charges for Operator’s office shall be borne by the Operator.
22.4.3 At the end of every month during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period, the Operator
shall submit to the Technical Auditor and the Authority on a monthly basis, Operator Invoice for
O&M activities undertaken by the Operator based on Schedule 6 and Schedule 7. The Operator
shall indicate the amount payable on the basis of activities undertaken by the Operator and
achievement of Performance Standards in accordance with Schedule 5.
22.4.4 The Technical Auditor will certify whether Operator Invoice is based on Schedule 6 and
Schedule 7, and whether necessary adjustments on the account of Performance Standards in
accordance to Schedule 5 has been assumed in the Operator Invoice. The Technical Auditor
will certify the Operator Invoice after making deductions on account of advance payments,
recoveries, Liquidated Damages, other deductions, Incentives (if any) and other adjustments in
accordance with this Agreement and deduction of taxes at source, as applicable under the law.
22.4.5 In the event that the occurrence of the TCD is delayed the O&M Fees shall be paid from the
date of delayed TCD till the Expiry Date (which shall be extended by the numbers of days of
delay) so as to achieve total Sustaining Period as specified in this Agreement.
22.4.6 When the grounds for withholding payments are removed, payments shall be made for amounts
withheld to the extent the Operator is entitled to payment.
22.5 Operator Payments with respect to Major Maintenance
22.5.1 Major Maintenance activities undertaken by the Operator during the Project Period will based
on approval of Detailed Design and Drawings, as the case may be, which is agreed and
approved by the Authority.
22.5.2 At the end of every month, the Operator shall submit to the Technical Auditor and the Authority
month-wise statements of the value of the work / services completed as Major Maintenance,
Page 94 of 432
along with details of measurement of the quantity of works executed in a tabulated form as
approved by the Technical Auditor and the Authority.
22.5.3 The Operator shall submit along with the monthly Operator Invoice, for works done for Project
Facilities listed based on Schedule 6 and Schedule 7, at the end of each month indicating the
amount payable on the basis of progress made in completing of specified milestones as
certified by the Technical Auditor and PBC Engineer in accordance with the item-wise break-up
of various components given in Schedule 7.
22.5.4 Payment for construction works (As per list of items indicated in Schedule 29). The payment
shall be as per breakup provided in Schedule 6
22.5.5 The payment will be subject to following conditions:

(a) The quantities of materials are not excessive and shall be certified by the Operator to be
utilized within a reasonable time (not exceeding 3 months).
(b) The materials are in accordance with the requirement and Technical Specifications.
(c) The materials have been delivered to sites and are properly stored and protected against
damage or deterioration to the satisfaction of the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
(d) The Operator’s records of the requirement, orders, receipt and use of materials are kept in
a form approved by the Authority and the Technical Auditor and such records shall be
available for inspection by the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
(e) Ownership of such materials shall be deemed to vest in the Authority for which the
Operator shall submit an indemnity bond in a format provided by the Authority.
(f) The item rate applicable for each component will be lower of the two: (i) BOQ provided by
the Operator in accordance with Schedule 7 or (ii) Relevant SOR.
(g) The payment released to the Operator in no circumstances shall be higher than the
quantities of works approved in Detailed Design and Drawings for the relevant Hydraulic
Zone. It is clarified that, the payment to the Operator will be based on actual
measurement of the work subject to the ceiling on qualities of works approved in Detailed
Design and Drawings.
Any such material that is unlikely to be utilized for the Major Maintenance will be taken back by
the Operator after the Authority has adjusted the payment already made for such material from
the invoice(s) submitted by the Operator.
22.6 Invoicing of Operator Payments
22.6.1 The Operator, in respect of every month, on or before the 10th day of the first month following
that month or, in case the 10th day of a month is a holiday then on the following business day,
submit to the Technical Auditor for its review and recommendation an invoice (the “Operator
Invoice”) stating the amount of Operator Payments with respect to different Payment
Component defined in Article 22.1 it considers that it is entitled to for the previous month
calculated in accordance with this Article 22, Schedule 5, Schedule 6 and Schedule 7, with
evidence to support its statement.
22.6.2 The Technical Auditor may request further information and clarifications from the Operator to
complete its review, before submitting its recommendation to the Authority. The Technical
Auditor shall submit its recommendation in accordance with Article 13 and Article 19 as
Page 95 of 432
applicable. The Technical Auditor shall check the details given in the Operator Invoice and
certify such invoices for payment within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of such invoice.
22.6.3 The Technical Auditor will certify such invoices on the basis of progress made in completing the
respective activity/ milestones after making deductions in accordance with this Article 22.
22.6.4 The Authority will review the Operator Invoice and the recommendation of the Technical Auditor
and determine the amount of Operator Payments to be paid to the Operator for the previous
payment period. Accordingly, the Authority will issue instructions to the Escrow Bank with a
copy to the Operator to make payments to the Operator in accordance with this Article 22.6.4.
22.6.5 The Authority agrees, in writing, to make payments to the Operator within 60 (sixty) days of
submission of recommendation of the Technical Auditor on the Operator’s Invoice. To the
extent that the Authority contests any element of the invoiced amount, it shall make payment of
the undisputed amount.
(a) if the invoiced amount is consistent with the determination of the Technical Auditor, and
Authority do not contest any element of the invoiced amount, the Authority, shall
recommend/ pay the full amount;
(b) if the invoiced amount is not consistent with the determination of the Technical Auditor,
and Authority contests any element of the invoiced amount, the Authority shall
recommend/ make payment of such amount that is uncontested and withhold, subject to
dispute resolution, the balance of the invoiced amount.
22.6.6 If the Authority unreasonably delays the payment of any amounts due to the Operator for a
period in excess of 60 (sixty) days from the date on which such amount falls due as stipulated
under the Article 22.6.5, the Authority shall be liable to pay interest on the Bank Rate calculated
weekly for the period of delay until payment has been made in full.
22.6.7 All payments would be made in Indian Rupees by the Authority to the Operator.
22.7 Taxes
22.7.1 Unless otherwise specified, the Operator shall pay such taxes, duties, fees and other
impositions as may be levied on the various components of Operator Payments put forth in this
Article 22 under the Applicable Laws. All payments under this Agreement shall be subject to
deduction of applicable withholding taxes and tax deducted at source.
22.8 Reductions in Operator Payments and other adjustments
22.8.1 In the event of failure to meet Performance Standards the Operator shall be subject to the
reductions to the Operator Payments and the other adjustments for shortfall in performance as
set out in Schedule 5 and Schedule 6.
22.9 Treatment of incomplete works
22.9.1 The Parties acknowledge and agree that in the event SPCD occurs upon issuance of a
Provisional Certificate, the payments made as per this Article 22 shall be made as if all works
comprising the Project Facilities have been completed. The works remaining incomplete shall
be completed by the Operator in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and
thereupon, the Completion Certificate shall be issued forthwith.
22.9.2 In the event the Authority determines that any incomplete works referred to in Article 22.9.1 are
not required to be completed for any reason, it shall modify the Scope of the Project in
accordance with the provisions of Article 16 and the payments shall be reduced on account of
Page 96 of 432
such reduction of scope as per the provisions of Article 16 and Article 22 and thereupon, the
Completion Certificate shall be issued forthwith.
Page 97 of 432
23. ESCROW ACCOUNT
23.1 Escrow Account

23.1.1 The Operator and the Authority, after signing of the Escrow Agreement or any time after ninety
(90) days from the Effective Date, agree open and establish an Escrow Account with a Bank
(the “Escrow Bank”) in accordance with this Agreement read with the Escrow Agreement. The
Parties agree that the Escrow Bank shall not be any bank with which either of the Parties have
transactions.
23.1.2 The scope of the Escrow Account are fully described in the Escrow Agreement (the “Escrow
Agreement”) to be entered into amongst the Operator, the Authority, and the Escrow Bank,
which shall be substantially in the form set forth in Schedule 13.
23.1.3 The Parties shall at the time of opening the Escrow Account, give irrevocable instructions, by
way of an Escrow Agreement, to the Escrow Bank instructing, inter alia, that deposits in and
withdrawals from the Escrow Account. The Parties agree the Escrow Account shall consist of
following separate sub-accounts namely (a) SIP Fund Sub-Account, and (b) Professional Fee
Sub-Account,
23.1.4 It is clarified that any interest earned on the amounts in the Escrow Account will be treated as
contribution from the Authority.
23.2 Minimum Sub-Account Balance in Escrow Account
23.2.1 The Authority shall ensure that the SIP Fund Sub-Account (a sub-account in Escrow Account)
has funds to make payment of Works Fees (C) to Operator, for the next 6 (six) month for the
works / services as per the Agreed THP and Agreed SIP and in accordance with Schedule 6
and Schedule 7;
23.2.2 The Authority shall ensure that the Professional Fee Sub-Account (a sub-account in Escrow
Account) has funds to make payment of O&M Fees (D) to Operator for the next 6 (six) month
based on projections in accordance with Agreed THP and Agreed SIP and in accordance with
Schedule 6 and Schedule 7;
Minimum Sub-Account Balance, the Authority shall upon receiving notice from the Escrow
Bank, transfer the shortfall amount from the Operations Bank Account or any other account to
the relevant sub-account of the Escrow Account so as to ensure the Minimum Sub-Account
Balance within 90 (ninety) business days of such notice from the Escrow Bank.
23.2.4 A failure to maintain the Minimum Sub-Account Balance by the Authority in accordance with
Article 23.2, would be treated as Authority Event of Default and provisions of Article 29.2.1 shall
follow.
23.2.5 It is clarified that any interest earned on the amounts in the respective sub-accounts will be
treated as contribution from the Authority and counted towards Minimum Sub-Account Balance.
23.2.6 After making the Termination Payments due to the Operator, the amounts remaining in the all
Sub-Accounts of the Escrow Account will be transferred to the Authority.
Page 98 of 432
24. INSURANCE
24.1 Insurance during Project Period
24.1.1 The Operator shall effect and maintain at its own cost, during the Start Up Period, the Transition
Period or the Sustaining Period, such insurances for such maximum sums as may be required
under the Applicable Laws, and such insurances as may be necessary or prudent in
accordance with Good Industry Practice. The Operator shall also effect and maintain such
insurances as may be necessary for mitigating the risks that may devolve on the Authority as a
consequence of any act or omission of the Operator during the Transition Period. The Operator
shall procure that in each insurance policy, the Authority shall be a co-insured and that the
insurer shall pay the proceeds of insurance into the Escrow Account.
24.2 Insurance Cover
24.2.1 Without prejudice to the provisions contained in Article 24.1, the Operator shall, during the Start
Up Period, procure and maintain Insurance Cover including but not limited to the following:
a) The Operator’s general liability arising out of the Assignment;
b) Liability to third parties for goods or property damage;
c) Workmen’s compensation insurance; and
d) any other insurance that may be necessary to protect the Operator and its employees,
including all Force Majeure Events that are insurable at commercially reasonable premiums
and not otherwise covered in items (a) to (c) above
24.2.2 Without prejudice to the provisions contained in Article 24.1, the Operator shall, during the
Transition Period or the Sustaining Period, procure and maintain Insurance Cover including but
not limited to the following:
a) Loss, damage or destruction of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area, including
the Existing Project Facilities handed over by the Authority to the Operator, at replacement
value;
b) Comprehensive third party liability insurance including injury to or death of personnel of the
Authority or Operator’s employees / agents / sub-contractors during the execution of the
Project;
c) The Operator’s general liability arising out of the Assignment;
d) Liability to third parties for goods or property damage;
e) Workmen’s compensation insurance; and
f) any other insurance that may be necessary to protect the Operator and its employees,
including all Force Majeure Events that are insurable at commercially reasonable premiums
and not otherwise covered in items (a) to (e) above.
24.3 Notices to the Authority
24.3.1 No later than 45 (forty five) days prior to commencement of the Start Up Period, the Transition
Period or the Sustaining Period, as the case may be, the Operator shall by notice furnish to the
Authority, in reasonable detail, information in respect of the insurances that it proposes to effect
and maintain in accordance with this Article 24. Within 30 (thirty) days of receipt of such notice,
the Authority may require the Operator to effect and maintain such other insurances as may be
necessary pursuant hereto.
Page 99 of 432
24.4 Evidence of Insurance Cover

24.4.1 All insurances obtained by the Operator in accordance with this Article 24 shall be maintained
with insurers on terms consistent with Good Industry Practice. Within 15 (fifteen) days of
obtaining any insurance cover, the Operator shall furnish to the Authority, notarized true copies
of the certificate(s) of insurance, copies of insurance policies and premium payment receipts in
respect of such insurance, and no such insurance shall be cancelled, modified, or allowed to
expire or lapse until the expiration of at least 45 (forty five) days after notice of such proposed
cancellation, modification or nonrenewal has been delivered by the Operator to the Authority.
24.5 Remedy for failure to insure
24.5.1 If the Operator shall fail to effect and keep in force all insurances for which it is responsible
pursuant hereto, the Authority shall have the option to either keep in force any such insurances,
and pay such premium and recover the costs thereof from the Operator, or in the event of
computation of a Termination Payment, treat an amount equal to the Insurance Cover as
deemed to have been received by the Operator.
24.6 Waiver of subrogation
24.6.1 All insurance policies in respect of the insurance obtained by the Operator pursuant to this
Article 24 shall include a waiver of any and all rights of subrogation or recovery of the insurers
thereunder against, inter alia, the Authority, and its assigns, successors, undertakings and their
subsidiaries, affiliates, employees, insurers and underwriters, and of any right of the insurers to
any set-off or counterclaim or any other deduction, whether by attachment or otherwise, in
respect of any liability of any such person insured under any such policy or in any way
connected with any loss, liability or obligation covered by such policies of insurance.
24.7 Operator’s waiver
24.7.1 The Operator hereby further releases, assigns and waives any and all rights of subrogation or
recovery against, inter alia, the Authority and its assigns, undertakings and their subsidiaries,
affiliates, employees, successors, insurers and underwriters, which the Operator may otherwise
have or acquire in or from or in any way connected with any loss, liability or obligation covered
by policies of insurance maintained or required to be maintained by the Operator pursuant to
this Agreement (other than third party liability insurance policies) or because of deductible
clauses in or inadequacy of limits of any such policies of insurance.
24.8 Application of insurance proceeds
24.8.1 The proceeds from all insurance claims, except life and injury, shall be paid to the Operator by
credit to the Escrow Account and it shall apply such proceeds for any necessary repair,
reconstruction, reinstatement, replacement, improvement or delivery of the Project Facilities in
the Effective Service Area, and the balance remaining, if any, shall be applied in accordance
with the provisions contained in this Agreement.
24.9 Compliance with conditions of insurance policies
24.9.1 The Operator expressly acknowledges and undertakes to fully indemnify the Authority from and
against all losses and claims arising from the Operator’s failure to comply with conditions
imposed by the insurance policies affected in accordance with this Agreement.
Page 100 of 432

25. ACCOUNTS AND AUDIT
25.1 Audited accounts

25.1.1 The Operator shall maintain books of accounts recording all its receipts from the Authority
(including all Operator Payments), income, expenditure, payments (including payments from
the Escrow Account), assets and liabilities, in accordance with this Agreement, Good Industry
Practice, Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits. The Operator shall provide 2 (two) copies of
its Balance Sheet, Cash Flow Statement and Profit and Loss Account, along with a report
thereon by the Independent Auditor, by the month of March of the subsequent Accounting Year.
The Authority shall have the right to inspect the records of the Operator and require copies of
relevant extracts of books of accounts, duly certified by the Independent Auditor.
25.1.2 On or before the thirtieth day of March each Year, the Operator shall provide to the Authority,
for the preceding Accounting Year, a statement duly audited by the Independent Auditor giving
summarized information on the expenses incurred in the operation and maintenance of the
Project Facilities, the receipt of Operator Payments and such other information as the Authority
may reasonably require.
25.2 Appointment of auditors
25.2.1 The Operator shall appoint, and have during the subsistence of this Agreement as the
Independent Auditor, a firm chosen by it from the mutually agreed list of 10 (ten) reputable firms
of chartered accountants (the “Panel of Chartered Accountants”). All fees and expenses of the
Independent Auditor shall be borne by the Operator.
25.2.2 The Operator may terminate the appointment of its Independent Auditors after a notice of 45
(forty five) days to the Authority, subject to the replacement Independent Auditors being
appointed from the Panel of Chartered Accountants.
25.2.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, the Authority shall have
the right, but not the obligation, to appoint at its own cost from time to time and at any time,
another firm (the “Additional Auditors”) from the Panel of Chartered Accountants to audit and
verify all those matters, expenses, costs, realizations and things which the Independent Auditor
is required to do, undertake or certify pursuant to this Agreement.
25.3 Certification of claims by the Independent Auditor
25.3.1 Any claim or document provided by the Operator to the Authority in connection with or relating
to receipts, income, payments, costs, expenses, accounts or audit, and any matter incidental
thereto shall be valid and effective only if certified by the Independent Auditor. For the
avoidance of doubt, such certification shall not be required for exchange of information in the
normal course of business.
25.4 Set-off
25.4.1 In event any amount is due and payable by the Authority to the Operator, it may set-off any
sums payable to it by the Operator and pay the balance remaining. Any exercise by the
Authority of its rights under this Article shall be without prejudice to any other rights or remedies
available to it under this Agreement or otherwise.
25.5.1 In the event of there being any difference between the findings of the Additional Auditors and
the certification provided by the Independent Auditor, such Auditors shall meet to resolve the
Page 101 of 432

differences and if they are unable to resolve the same, such Dispute shall be resolved by the
Authority by recourse to the Dispute Resolution Procedure.
Page 102 of 432

26. FORCE MAJEURE
26.1 Force Majeure

26.1.1 As used in this Agreement, the expression “Force Majeure” or “Force Majeure Event” shall
mean occurrence in India of any or all of Non-Political Event, Indirect Political Event and
Political Event, as defined in Article 26.2, Article 26.3 and Article 26.4 respectively, if it affects
the performance of the Party claiming the benefit of Force Majeure (the “Affected Party”) of its
obligations under this Agreement and which act or event (i) is beyond the reasonable control of
the Affected Party, and (ii) the Affected Party could not have prevented or overcome by
exercise of due diligence and following Good Industry Practice, and (iii) has Material Adverse
Effect on the Affected Party.
26.1.2 If the Parties are unable to agree in good faith on the occurrence or existence of a Force
Majeure Event, such dispute shall be finally settled in accordance with the dispute resolution
procedure set out in Article 35, provided however that the burden of proof as to the occurrence
or existence of such Force Majeure Event shall be upon the Affected Party.
26.2 Non-Political Event
26.2.1 A Non-Political Event shall mean one or more of the following acts or events:
a) act of God, epidemic, extremely adverse weather conditions, lightning, earthquake,
landslide, cyclone, flood, volcanic eruption, chemical or radioactive contamination or ionising
radiation, fire or explosion (to the extent of contamination or radiation or fire or explosion
originating from a source external to the Effective Service Area);
b) strikes or boycotts (other than those involving the Operator, Contractors or their respective
employees/representatives, or attributable to any act or omission of any of them) interrupting
supplies and services to the Project for a continuous period of 7 (seven) days, and not being
an Indirect Political Event set forth in Article 26.3;
c) any failure or delay of a Contractor but only to the extent caused by another Non-Political
Event and which does not result in any offsetting compensation being payable to the
Operator by or on behalf of such Contractor;
d) any judgement or order of any court of competent jurisdiction or statutory authority made
against the Operator in any proceedings for reasons other than (i) failure of the Operator to
comply with any Applicable Law or Applicable Permit, or (ii) on account of breach of any
Applicable Law or Applicable Permit or of any contract, or (iii) enforcement of this
Agreement, or (iv) exercise of any of its rights under this Agreement by the Authority; or
e) the discovery of geological conditions, toxic contamination or archaeological remains in any
part of the Effective Service Area that could not reasonably have been expected to be
discovered through a site inspection.
26.3 Indirect Political Event
26.3.1 An Indirect Political Event shall mean one or more of the following acts or events:
a) an act of war (whether declared or undeclared), invasion, armed conflict or act of foreign
enemy, blockade, embargo, riot, insurrection, terrorist or military action, civil commotion or
politically motivated sabotage;
Page 103 of 432

b) industry-wide or State-wide strikes or industrial action for a continuous period of 7 (seven)

days;
c) any civil commotion, boycott or political agitation which prevents the Affected Party from
performing any of its obligations for an aggregate period exceeding 7 (seven) days in an
Accounting Year;
d) any failure or delay of a Contractor to the extent caused by any Indirect Political Event and
which does not result in any offsetting compensation being payable to the Operator by or on
behalf of such Contractor.
26.4 Political Event
26.4.1 A Political Event shall mean one or more of the following acts or events by or on account of any
Government Instrumentality:
a) Change in Law, only if consequences thereof cannot be dealt with under and in accordance
with the provisions of Article 21 and its effect, in financial terms, exceeds the sum specified
in Article 21;
b) compulsory acquisition in national interest or expropriation of any part of the Project
Facilities or rights of the Operator or of the Contractors;
c) unlawful or unauthorized or without jurisdiction revocation of, or refusal to renew or grant
without valid cause, any clearance, license, permit, authorization, no objection certificate,
consent, approval or exemption required by the Operator or any of the Contractors to
perform their respective obligations under this Agreement and the Project Agreements;
provided that such delay, modification, denial, refusal or revocation did not result from the
Operator’s or any Contractor’s inability or failure to comply with any condition relating to
grant, maintenance or renewal of such clearance, license, authorization, no objection
certificate, exemption, consent, approval or permit; or
d) any failure or delay of a Contractor but only to the extent caused by another Political Event
and which does not result in any offsetting compensation being payable to the Operator by
or on behalf of such Contractor.
26.5 Duty to report Force Majeure Event
26.5.1 Upon occurrence of a Force Majeure Event, the Affected Party shall by notice report such
occurrence to the other Party forthwith. Any notice pursuant hereto shall include full particulars
of:
a) the nature and extent of each Force Majeure Event which is the subject of any claim for
relief under this Article 26 with evidence in support thereof;
b) the estimated duration and the effect or probable effect which such Force Majeure Event is
having or will have on the Affected Party’s performance of its obligations under this
Agreement;
c) the measures which the Affected Party is taking or proposes to take for alleviating the
impact of such Force Majeure Event; and
d) any other information relevant to the Affected Party’s claim.
26.5.2 The Affected Party shall not be entitled to any relief for or in respect of a Force Majeure Event
unless it shall have notified the other Party of the occurrence of the Force Majeure Event as
soon as reasonably practicable, and in any event no later than 7 (seven) days after the Affected
Page 104 of 432

Party knew, or ought reasonably to have known, of its occurrence, and shall have given
particulars of the probable material effect that the Force Majeure Event is likely to have on the
performance of its obligations under this Agreement.
26.5.3 For so long as the Affected Party continues to claim to be materially affected by such Force
Majeure Event, it shall provide the other Party with regular (and not less than weekly) reports
containing information as required by Article 26.5.1, and such other information as the other
Party may reasonably request the Affected Party to provide.
26.5.4 In the event that the Parties are unable to agree in good faith about the occurrence or existence
of a Force Majeure Event, such Dispute shall be finally settled in accordance with the Dispute
Resolution Procedure; provided that the burden of proof as to the occurrence or existence of
such Force Majeure Event shall be upon the Party claiming relief and/or excuse on account of
such Force Majeure Event.
26.6 Effect of Force Majeure Event
26.6.1 Upon the occurrence of any Force Majeure Event prior to the Transition Commencement Date,
the Transition Commencement Date shall be extended by a period equal in length to the
duration of the Force Majeure Event.
26.6.2 At any time after the Transition Commencement Date, if any Force Majeure Event occurs
before SPCD, the Project Period, SPCD, and the other dates set forth in the Implementation
Schedule shall be extended by a period equal in length to the duration for which such Force
Majeure Event subsists.
26.6.3 If any Force Majeure Event occurs after SPCD, the Project Period, the Expiry Date and any
other dates set forth in the Implementation Schedule shall be extended by a period equal in
length to the duration for which such Force Majeure Event subsists.
26.7 Allocation of costs arising out of Force Majeure Event
26.7.1 Upon occurrence of any Force Majeure Event prior to the Transition Commencement Date, the
Parties shall bear their respective costs and no Party shall be required to pay to the other Party
any costs thereof.
26.7.2 Upon occurrence of a Force Majeure Event after the Transition Commencement Date, the costs
incurred and attributable to such event and directly relating to the Project (the “Force Majeure
Costs”) shall be allocated and paid as follows:
a) upon occurrence of a Non-Political Event, the Parties shall bear their respective Force
Majeure Costs and neither Party shall be required to pay to the other Party any costs
thereof;
b) upon occurrence of an Indirect Political Event, all Force Majeure Costs attributable to such
Indirect Political Event, and not exceeding the Insurance Cover for such Indirect Political
Event, shall be borne by the Operator, and to the extent Force Majeure Costs exceed such
Insurance Cover, one half of such excess amount shall be reimbursed by the Authority to
the Operator and the other half shall be borne by the Operator; and
c) upon occurrence of a Political Event, all Force Majeure Costs attributable to such Political
Event shall be reimbursed by the Authority to the Operator.
26.7.3 For the avoidance of doubt, Force Majeure Costs (the “Force Majeure Costs”) shall include all
cost required to meet each obligations of respective parties including but not limited to
Page 105 of 432

a) Cost of restoring, replacing or making good any part of the Project Facilities or any part
thereof destroyed or damaged due to Force Majeure Event and all other costs directly
attributable to the Force Majeure Event;
b) any increase in the cost of construction or rehabilitation of the Project Facilities on account
of inflation;
c) any O&M expenses including major maintenance which may have to be additionally incurred
due to the Force Majeure Event;
d) Deduction of any sum recovered from the Insurance Cover;
26.7.4 Force Majeure Costs shall not include loss of profit, interest on any loan the Operator may have
taken for undertaking its obligations.
26.7.5 For determining such Force Majeure Costs, information contained in the Schedule 7 may be
relied upon to the extent that such information is relevant.
26.7.6 In case of Force Majeure Event, if the Authority does not require the Operator to replace or
make good any such destruction or damage to the Project Facility, the Authority shall either
request a Change of Scope in accordance with Article 16 excluding the performance of that part
of the Project Facility thereby destroyed or damaged or, where the loss, destruction or damage
affects a substantial part of the Project Facility.
26.7.7 Save and except as expressly provided in this Article 26, neither Party shall be liable in any
manner whatsoever to the other Party in respect of any loss, damage, cost, expense, claims,
demands and proceedings relating to or arising out of occurrence or existence of any Force
Majeure Event or exercise of any right pursuant hereto.
26.8 Termination Notice for Force Majeure Event
26.8.1 If a Force Majeure Event subsists for a period of 180 (one hundred and eighty) days or more
within a continuous period of 365 (three hundred and sixty five) days, either Party may in its
discretion terminate this Agreement by issuing a Termination Notice to the other Party without
being liable in any manner whatsoever, save as provided in this Article 26, and upon issue of
such Termination Notice, this Agreement shall, notwithstanding anything to the contrary
contained herein, stand terminated forthwith; provided that before issuing such Termination
Notice, the Party intending to issue the Termination Notice shall inform the other Party of such
intention and grant 15 (fifteen) days’ time to make a representation, and may after the expiry of
such 15 (fifteen) days period, whether or not it is in receipt of such representation, in its sole
discretion issue the Termination Notice.
26.8.2 In case of termination due to Force Majeure Event, the Parties shall cause handback of Project
Facilities and the Site in accordance with Article 30.
26.9 Termination Payment for Force Majeure Event
26.9.1 Any Termination Payment for Force Majeure Event shall not include a claim for lost or foregone
profits, revenues, etc.
26.9.2 Upon termination of this Agreement due to Force Majeure Event, the Authority will return all
Performance Security(ies) to the Operator.
26.9.3 Upon Termination of this Agreement pursuant to Article 26.8 above, prior to TCD, the following
Termination Payment shall be in accordance with Article 26.7.1.
Page 106 of 432

26.9.4 Upon Termination of this Agreement pursuant to Article 26.7 and Article 26.8 above, after TCD,
the following Termination Payment shall be made to the Operator:
a) If Termination is on account of a Non-Political Event and Indirect Political Event, the
Authority shall make a Termination Payment to the Operator
(i) Any portion of the Operator Payments payable to the Operator for works and
services satisfactorily performed prior to the date of termination in accordance
with Article 22;
(ii) The value of any unused or partially used plant, equipment, stores and spares on
the Site, except to the extent that such plant, equipment, stores and spares have
already been paid for by the Authority;
(iii) The cost if any, incurred by the Operator in protecting the Project Facilities and
leaving the Site in a clean and safe condition;
(iv) Any deduction or Liquidated Damages or any form of advance or any such sums
due to the Authority from the Operator prior to the date of termination shall be
deducted;
(v) Any Force Majeure Cost incurred by Parties shall be adjusted in accordance with
Article 26.7;
b) If Termination is on account of a Political Event, the Authority shall make a Termination
Payment to the Operator
(i) Any portion of the Operator Payments payable to the Operator for works and
with Article 22;
(ii) The value of any unused or partially used plant, equipment, stores and spares on
(iii) The cost if any, incurred by the Operator in protecting the Project Facilities and
leaving the Site in a clean and safe condition;
deducted;
(v) Any Force Majeure Cost incurred by Parties shall be adjusted in accordance with
Article 26.7;
(vi) Cost incurred by the Operator in removal of Operator’s equipment from the Site
and in repatriation of Operator’s personnel and its sub-contractors;
(vii) Any sum required to be paid by the Operator to its sub-contractors in connection
with termination of any sub-contracts, including any reasonable cancellation
charges.
26.10 Excuse from performance of obligations
26.10.1 If the Affected Party is rendered wholly or partially unable to perform its obligations under
this Agreement because of a Force Majeure Event, it shall be excused from performance of
Page 107 of 432

such of its obligations to the extent it is unable to perform on account of such Force Majeure
Event; provided that:
a) the suspension of performance shall be of no greater scope and of no longer duration than
is reasonably required by the Force Majeure Event;
b) the Affected Party shall make all reasonable efforts to mitigate or limit damage to the other
Party arising out of or as a result of the existence or occurrence of such Force Majeure
Event and to cure the same with due diligence; and
c) when the Affected Party is able to resume performance of its obligations under this
Agreement, it shall give to the other Party notice to that effect and shall promptly resume
performance of its obligations hereunder.
Page 108 of 432

27. COMPENSATION FOR BREACH OF AGREEMENT
27.1 Compensation for default by the Operator

27.1.1 Subject to the provisions of Article 27.3, in the event of the Operator being in material breach or
default of this Agreement at any time after the TCD, it shall pay to the Authority by way of
compensation, all direct costs suffered or incurred by the Authority as a consequence of such
material breach or default, within 30 (thirty) days of receipt of the demand supported by
necessary particulars thereof; provided that no compensation shall be payable under this Article
27.1 for any material breach or default in respect of which Damages are expressly specified
and payable under this Agreement or for any consequential losses incurred by the Authority.
27.2 Compensation for default by the Authority
27.2.1 Subject to the provisions of Article 27.3, in the event of the Authority being in material breach or
default of this Agreement at any time after the TCD, it shall pay to the Operator by way of
compensation, all direct costs suffered or incurred by the Operator as a consequence of such
material breach or default within 30 (thirty) days of receipt of the demand supported by
necessary particulars thereof; provided that no such compensation shall be payable for any
material breach or default in respect of which Damages have been expressly specified in this
Agreement.
27.3 Mitigation of costs and damage
27.3.1 The Affected Party shall make all reasonable efforts to mitigate or limit the costs and damage
arising out of or as a result of breach of Agreement by the other Party.
Page 109 of 432

28. SUSPENSION OF OPERATOR’S RIGHTS
28.1 Suspension upon Operator Event of Default

28.1.1 Upon occurrence of a Operator Event of Default which affects or is likely to affect the operation
and maintenance of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area during the Transition
Period and the Sustaining Period, the Authority shall be entitled, without prejudice to its other
rights and remedies under this Agreement including its rights of Termination hereunder, to (a)
suspend all rights of the Operator under this Agreement, and pursuant hereto, and (b) exercise
such rights itself and perform the obligations hereunder or authorize any other person or agents
to exercise or perform the same on its behalf during such suspension (the “Suspension”).
Suspension hereunder shall be effective forthwith upon issue of notice by the Authority to the
Operator and may extend up to a period not exceeding 180 (one hundred and eighty) days from
the date of issue of such notice; provided that upon written request from the Operator, the
Authority shall extend the aforesaid period of 180 (one hundred and eighty) days by a further
period not exceeding 90 (ninety) days.
28.2 Authority to act on behalf of Operator
28.2.1 During the period of Suspension, the Authority or its agents shall, collect all User Charges
under and in accordance with this Agreement and deposit the same in the Operations Bank
Account .
28.2.2 During the period of Suspension hereunder, all rights and liabilities vested in the Operator in
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement shall continue to vest in the Operator and all
things done or actions taken, including expenditure incurred by the Authority for discharging the
obligations of the Operator under and in accordance with this Agreement, shall be deemed to
have been done or taken for and on behalf of the Operator and the Operator undertakes to
indemnify the Authority for all costs incurred during such period. The Operator hereby licenses
and sub-licenses respectively, the Authority or any other person authorized by it under Article
28.1 to use during Suspension, all Intellectual Property belonging to or licensed to the Operator
with respect to the Project and Project Facilities and its design, engineering, construction,
operation and maintenance, and which is used or created by the Operator in performing its
obligations under the Agreement.
28.3 Revocation of Suspension
28.3.1 In the event that the Authority shall have rectified or removed the cause of Suspension within a
period not exceeding 90 (ninety) days from the date of Suspension, it shall revoke the
Suspension forthwith and restore all rights of the Operator under this Agreement. For the
avoidance of doubt, the Parties expressly agree that the Authority may, in its discretion, revoke
the Suspension at any time, whether or not the cause of Suspension has been rectified or
removed hereunder.
28.3.2 Upon the Operator having cured the Operator Event of Default within a period not exceeding 90
(ninety) days from the date of Suspension, the Authority shall revoke the Suspension forthwith
and restore all rights of the Operator under this Agreement.
28.4 Termination
28.4.1 At any time during the period of Suspension under this Article 28, the Operator may by notice
request the Authority to revoke the Suspension and issue a Termination Notice. The Authority
Page 110 of 432

shall have the right to terminate this Agreement under this Article 28.4.1, within 15 (fifteen) days
of receipt of such notice as if it is an Operator Event of Default.
28.4.2 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, in the event that
Suspension is not revoked within 180 (one hundred and eighty) days from the date of
Suspension hereunder or within the extended period, if any, set forth in Article 28.1, the
Agreement shall, upon expiry of the aforesaid period, be deemed to have been terminated by
mutual agreement of the Parties and all the provisions of this Agreement shall apply, mutatis
mutandis, to such Termination as if a Termination Notice had been issued by the Authority upon
occurrence of a Operator Event of Default.
Page 111 of 432

29. TERMINATION
29.1 Termination under Operator Event of Default

29.1.1 Save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, in the event that any of the defaults specified
below shall have occurred, and the Operator fails to cure the default within the Cure Period set
forth below, or where no Cure Period is specified, then within a Cure Period of 60 (sixty) days or
any other duration as mutually agreed between the Parties, the Operator shall be deemed to be
in default of this Agreement (the “Operator Event of Default”), unless the default has occurred
as a result of any breach of this Agreement by the Authority or due to Force Majeure. The
defaults referred to herein shall include the following:
a) The Performance Security(ies), has been encashed and appropriated in accordance with
Article 9.2 and the Operator fails to replenish or provide the fresh Performance Security(ies),
within a Cure Period of 30 (thirty) days;
b) subsequent to the replenishment or furnishing of fresh Transition Period Performance
Security in accordance with Article 9.2, the Operator fails to cure the Operator Event of
Default, for which whole or part of the Performance Security(ies) was appropriated, within a
Cure Period of 90 (ninety) days;
c) the Operator does not achieve the latest outstanding Milestone Standards due in
accordance with the Implementation Schedule and continues to be in default for 270 (two
hundred and seventy) days;
d) the Operator abandons or manifests intention to abandon the rehabilitation and construction
of the Project Facilities or operation of the Project Facilities without the prior written consent
of the Authority;
e) the Operator is in material breach of its obligations under Article 4, Article 5, Schedule 9 and
Schedule 14, as the case may be;
f) the Operator creates any encumbrance in breach of this Agreement;
g) the Operator repudiates this Agreement or otherwise takes any action or evidences or
conveys an intention not to be bound by the Agreement;
h) a Change in Ownership has occurred in breach of the provisions of Article 5.8;
i) there is a transfer, pursuant to law either of (i) the rights and/or obligations of the Operator
under this Agreements, or of (ii) all or part of the assets or undertaking of the Operator, and
such transfer causes a Material Adverse Effect;
j) an execution levied on any of the assets of the Operator has caused a Material Adverse
Effect;
k) the Operator is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent, or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the
Operator or for the whole or material part of its assets that has a material bearing on the
execution of the Project;
l) the Operator has been, or is in the process of being liquidated, dissolved, wound-up,
amalgamated or reconstituted in a manner that would cause, in the reasonable opinion of
the Authority, a Material Adverse Effect;
m) a resolution for winding up of the Operator is passed, or any petition for winding up of the
Operator is admitted by a court of competent jurisdiction and a provisional liquidator or
Page 112 of 432

receiver is appointed and such order has not been set aside within 90 (ninety) days of the
date thereof or the Operator is ordered to be wound up by a court except for the purpose of
amalgamation or reconstruction; provided that, as part of such amalgamation or
reconstruction, the entire property, assets and undertaking of the Operator are transferred to
the amalgamated or reconstructed entity and that the amalgamated or reconstructed entity
has unconditionally assumed the obligations of the Operator under this Agreement; and
provided that:
(i) the amalgamated or reconstructed entity has the capability and operating
experience necessary for the performance of its obligations under this
Agreement;
(ii) the amalgamated or reconstructed entity has the financial standing to perform its
obligations under this Agreement and has a credit worthiness at least as good as
that of the Operator as at the Effective Date.
n) any representation or warranty of the Operator herein contained which is, as of the date
hereof, found to be materially false, incorrect or misleading or the Operator is at any time
hereafter found to be in breach thereof;
o) the Operator submits to the Authority any statement, notice or other document, in written or
electronic form, which has a material effect on the Authority’s rights, obligations or interests
and which is false in material particulars;
p) the Operator has failed to fulfil any obligation, for which failure Termination has been
specified in this Agreement;
q) the Operator commits a default in complying with any other provision of this Agreement if
such a default causes a Material Adverse Effect;
r) an Escrow Default has occurred and the Operator fails to cure the default within a Cure
Period of 15 (fifteen) days.
29.1.2 Without prejudice to any other rights or remedies which the Authority may have under this
Agreement, upon occurrence of a Operator Event of Default, the Authority shall be entitled to
terminate this Agreement by issuing a Termination Notice to the Operator; provided that before
issuing the Termination Notice, the Authority shall by a notice inform the Operator of its
intention to issue such Termination Notice and grant 15 (fifteen) days to the Operator to make a
representation, and may after the expiry of such 15 (fifteen) days, whether or not it is in receipt
of such representation, issue the Termination Notice, subject to the provisions of Article 29.1.3.
29.1.3 In case of termination due to Operator Event of Default, the Parties shall cause handback of
Project Facilities and the Site in accordance with Article 30.
29.2 Termination under Authority Event of Default
29.2.1 In the event that any of the defaults specified below shall have occurred, and the Authority fails
to cure such default within a Cure Period of 90 (ninety) days or such longer period as has been
expressly provided in this Agreement, the Authority shall be deemed to be in default of this
Agreement (the “Authority Event of Default”) unless the default has occurred as a result of
any breach of this Agreement by the Operator or due to Force Majeure. The defaults referred to
herein shall include the following:
Page 113 of 432

a) The Authority commits a material default in complying with the provisions of Article 7.1.2 (b),
and Article 7.1.2 (c) of this Agreement and such default has a Material Adverse Effect on the
Operator;
b) The Authority has failed to make payment of 3 (three) consecutive Operator Payments due
to the Operator within the period specified in this Agreement;
c) The Authority fails to provide, the Right of Way required for rehabilitation of Existing Project
Facilities and construction of the Additional Project Facilities.
29.2.2 Without prejudice to any other right or remedy which the Operator may have under this
Agreement, upon occurrence of an Authority Event of Default, the Operator shall, be entitled to
terminate this Agreement by issuing a Termination Notice to the Authority; provided that before
issuing the Termination Notice, the Operator shall by a notice inform the Authority of its
intention to issue the Termination Notice and grant 15 (fifteen) days to the Authority to make a
representation, and may after the expiry of such 15 (fifteen) days, whether or not it is in receipt
of such representation, issue the Termination Notice.
29.2.3 In case of termination due to Authority Event of Default, the Parties shall cause handback of
Project Facilities and the Site in accordance with Article 30.
29.3 Termination Payment
29.3.1 Any Termination Payment shall not include a claim for lost or foregone profits, revenues, etc.
29.3.2 Upon Termination of this Agreement due to Operator Event of Default
a) Upon Termination of this Agreement prior to TCD, following payments shall be made to the
Operator:
(i) Authority is not liable to pay any portion of the Operator Payments not yet paid on
the date of such Termination Notice;
(ii) Authority will have the right to encash and appropriate the Start Up Period
Performance Security;
(iii) Authority will have the right to encash and appropriate the Mobilization Advance
Security, for and in respect of the Mobilization Advance outstanding, if any and
interest thereon, as agreed pre-determined compensation to the Authority for any
losses, delays and cost of completing the works and maintenance activities under
this Agreement;
deducted;
(v) Recover all amounts payable by the Operator under its indemnity obligations
under the Agreement.
b) Upon Termination of this Agreement after TCD but prior to SPCD, following payments shall
be made to the Operator:
(ii) Authority will have the right to encash and appropriate the Transition Period
Page 114 of 432

this Agreement;
(iv) Recover all amounts payable by the Operator under its indemnity obligations
under the Agreement;
(v) Any portion of the Operator Payments payable to the Operator for works and
with Article 22;
(vi) The value of any unused or partially used plant, equipment, stores and spares on
(vii) Any deduction or Liquidated Damages or any form of advance or any such sums
deducted;
c) Upon Termination of this Agreement after SPCD, following payments shall be made to the
Operator:
(ii) Authority will have the right to encash and appropriate the Sustaining Period
this Agreement;
(iv) Recover all amounts payable by the Operator under its indemnity obligations
under the Agreement;
(v) Any portion of the Operator Payments payable to the Operator for works and
with Article 22;
(vi) The value of any unused or partially used plant, equipment, stores and spares on
(vii) Any deduction or Liquidated Damages or any form of advance or any such sums
deducted;
29.3.3 Upon Termination of this Agreement due to Authority Event of Default
a) Upon Termination of this Agreement any time during the Project Period, following payments
shall be made to the Operator:
Page 115 of 432

(i) Authority will return all Performance Security(ies) to the Operator not already
returned; as and if applicable;
(ii) Recover all amounts payable by the Operator under its indemnity obligations
under the Agreement; as and if applicable;
(iii) Any portion of the Operator Payments payable to the Operator for works and
with Article 22; as and if applicable;
(iv) The value of any unused or partially used plant, equipment, stores and spares on
already been paid for by the Authority; as and if applicable;
(v) The cost if any, incurred by the Operator in protecting the Project Facilities and
leaving the Site in a clean and safe condition; as and if applicable;
(vi) Any deduction or Liquidated Damages or any form of advance or any such sums
deducted; as and if applicable;
(vii) Any sum recovered from the Insurance Cover shall be deducted; as and if
applicable;
(viii) Cost incurred by the Operator in removal of Operator’s equipment from the
Site and in repatriation of Operator’s personnel and its sub-contractors; as and if
applicable;
(ix) Any sum required to be paid by the Operator to its sub-contractors in connection
with termination of any sub-contracts, including any reasonable cancellation
charges; as and if applicable.
29.3.4 Termination Payment shall become due and payable to the Operator within 60 (sixty) days from
the date of Termination and demand made by the Operator to the Authority with necessary
details and in the event of any delay, the Authority shall pay interest at the Bank Rate, on the
amount of Termination Payment remaining unpaid; provided that such delay shall not exceed
180 (one hundred and eighty) days. For the avoidance of doubt, it is expressly agreed that
Termination Payment shall constitute full discharge by the Authority of its payment obligations
in respect thereof hereunder.
29.3.5 The Operator expressly agrees that Termination Payment under this Article 29 shall constitute a
full and final settlement of all claims of the Operator on account of Termination of this
Agreement for any reason whatsoever and that the Operator or any shareholder thereof shall
not have any further right or claim under any law, treaty, convention, contract or otherwise.
29.4 Other rights and obligations of the Authority
29.4.1 Upon Termination for any reason whatsoever, the Authority shall:
a) Be deemed to have taken possession and control of the Project Facilities forthwith;
b) Take possession and control of all materials, stores, implements, construction plants and
equipment on or about in the Service Area for which the payment has been made as part of
the Termination Payment;
Page 116 of 432

c) Be entitled to restrain the Operator and any person claiming through or under the Operator
from entering upon the Service Area or any part of the Project Facilities;
d) Require the Operator to comply with the Handback Requirements set forth in Article 30;
e) succeed upon election by the Authority, without the necessity of any further action by the
Operator, to the interests of the Operator under such of the agreements with sub-contractors
as the Authority may in its discretion deem appropriate, and shall upon such election be
liable to the sub-contractors only for compensation accruing and becoming due and payable
to them under the terms of their respective agreements from and after the date the Authority
elects to succeed to the interests of the Operator. For the avoidance of doubt, the Operator
acknowledges and agrees that all sums claimed by such sub-contractors as being due and
owing for works and services performed or accruing on account of any act, omission or
event prior to such date shall constitute debt between the Operator and such sub-
contractors, and the Authority shall not in any manner be liable for such sums. It is further
agreed that in the event the Authority elects to cure any outstanding defaults under such
agreements, the amount expended by the Authority for this purpose shall be deducted from
the Termination Payment.
29.5 Survival of rights
29.5.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, but subject to the
provisions of Article 29.3, any Termination pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement shall be
without prejudice to the accrued rights of either Party including its right to claim and recover
money damages, insurance proceeds, security deposits, and other rights and remedies, which
it may have in law or contract. All rights and obligations of either Party under this Agreement,
including Termination Payments and Handback Requirements, shall survive the Termination to
the extent such survival is necessary for giving effect to such rights and obligations.
Page 117 of 432

30. HANDBACK REQUIREMENTS
30.1 Handback Requirements

30.1.1 Upon Termination, the Operator shall comply with and conform to the following Handback
Requirements:
a) notify to the Authority forthwith the location and particulars of all Project Facilities in the
Effective Service Area;
b) deliver forthwith the actual or constructive possession of the Project Facilities in the Effective
Service Area, free and clear of all encumbrances, in at least the same condition with normal
wear and tear as they were when made available to or purchased by the Operator;
c) handover all vehicles, equipments, materials, spares, stores, supplies etc., made available
to the Operator pursuant to this Agreement or purchased by the Operator under this
Agreement in at least the same condition with normal wear and tear as they were when
made available to or purchased by the Operator;
d) cure all Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area of all defects and deficiencies so that
these Project Facilities are compliant with the Maintenance Requirements as mentioned in
the O&M Plan; all the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area shall be handed over on
‘as is where is’ basis after bringing them to a safe condition;
e) deliver and transfer relevant records, reports, Intellectual Property and other licenses
pertaining to the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area and its design, engineering,
construction, operation and maintenance, including all programmers and manuals pertaining
thereto, and complete As-Built Drawings as on the Transfer Date. For the avoidance of
doubt, the Operator represents and warrants that the Intellectual Property delivered
hereunder shall be adequate and complete for the design, engineering, construction,
operation and maintenance of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area and shall
be assigned to the Authority free of any Encumbrance;
f) transfer and/or deliver all Applicable Permits to the extent permissible under Applicable
Laws;
g) execute such deeds of conveyance, documents and other writings as the Authority may
reasonably require for conveying, divesting and assigning all the rights, title and interest of
the Operator in the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area, including manufacturers’
warranties in respect of any plant or equipment and the right to receive outstanding
insurance claims to the extent due and payable to the Authority, absolutely unto the
Authority or its nominee;
h) Comply with all other requirements as may be prescribed or required under Applicable Laws
for completing the divestment and assignment of all rights, title and interest of the Operator
in the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area, free from all Encumbrances, absolutely
unto the Authority or to its nominee.
30.1.2 Subject to the exercise by the Authority of its rights under this Agreement to perform or procure
the performance by a third party of any of the obligations of the Operator, the Parties shall
continue to perform their obligations under this Agreement, notwithstanding the issuance of any
Termination Notice, until the Termination of this Agreement becomes effective in accordance
with its terms.
Page 118 of 432

30.2 Inspection and cure

30.2.1 Not earlier than 90 (ninety) days prior to Termination but not later than 15 (fifteen) days prior to
the effective date of such Termination, the Technical Auditor shall verify, after giving due notice
to the Operator specifying the time, date and place of such verification and/or inspection,
compliance by the Operator with the Maintenance Requirements, and if required, cause
appropriate tests to be carried out at the Operator’s cost for this purpose. Defaults, if any, in the
maintenance of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area in comparison with the
requirements of operation and maintenance under this Agreement, shall be cured by the
Operator at its cost and the provisions of Article 34 shall apply, mutatis mutandis, in relation to
curing of defects or deficiencies under this Article 30. Provided if the Termination occurs any
time after the SPCD, if the Operator fails to rectify any of the defaults in the maintenance of the
Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area, the Authority may rectify such default and adjust
the costs incurred thereof, from the Sustaining Period Performance Guarantee.
30.3 Cooperation and assistance on handback of Project Facilities
30.3.1 The Parties shall cooperate on a best effort basis and take all necessary measures, in good
faith, to achieve a smooth transfer of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area in
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement so as to protect the safety of and avoid undue
delay or inconvenience to the Customers, other members of the public or the lawful occupiers
of any part of the Effective Service Area.
30.3.2 The Parties shall provide to each other, 9 (nine) months prior to the Transfer Date in the event
of Termination by efflux of Period and immediately in the event of either Party conveying to the
other Party its intent to issue a Termination Notice, as the case may be, as much information
and advice as is reasonably practicable regarding the proposed arrangements for operation of
the Project following the Transfer Date. The Operator shall further provide such reasonable
advice and assistance as the Authority, its Operator or agent may reasonably require for
operation of the Project until the expiry of 6 (six) months after the Transfer Date.
30.3.3 The Authority shall have the option to purchase or hire from the Operator at a fair market value
and free from any encumbrance all or any part of the plant and machinery used in connection
with the Project but which does not form part of the Project Facilities and is reasonably required
in connection with operation of the Project. For the avoidance of doubt, in the event of dispute
or difference relating to fair market value, the Dispute Resolution Procedure shall apply.
30.4 Vesting Certificate
30.4.1 Handback of rights, title and interest in the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area shall
be deemed to be complete on the date when all of the Handback Requirements have been
fulfilled, and the Authority shall, without unreasonable delay, thereupon issue a certificate
substantially in the form set forth in Schedule 15 (the “Vesting Certificate”), which will have
the effect of constituting evidence of handback by the Operator of all of its rights, title and
interest in the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area, and their vesting in the Authority
pursuant hereto. It is expressly agreed that any defect or deficiency in the Handback
Requirements shall not in any manner be construed or interpreted as restricting the exercise of
any rights by the Authority or its nominee on, or in respect of, the Project Facilities in the
Effective Service Area on the footing that all Handback Requirements have been complied with
by the Operator.
30.5 Costs of Handback
Page 119 of 432

30.5.1 The Operator shall bear and pay all costs incidental to handback of all of the rights, title and
interest of the Operator in the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area in favour of the
Authority upon Termination, save and except that all stamp duties payable on any deeds or
documents executed by the Operator in connection with such divestment shall be borne by the
Authority.
30.5.2 In the event of any dispute relating to matters covered by and under this Article 30, the Dispute
Resolution Procedure shall apply.
Page 120 of 432

31. ASSIGNMENT AND CHARGES
31.1 Restrictions on assignment and charges

31.1.1 This Agreement shall not be assigned by the Operator to any person, save and except with the
prior consent in writing of the Authority, which consent the Authority shall be entitled to decline
without assigning any reason.
31.1.2 The Operator shall not create nor permit to subsist any encumbrance, or otherwise transfer or
dispose of all or any of its rights and benefits under this Agreement or any Project Agreement to
which the Operator is a party, except with prior consent in writing of the Authority, which
consent the Authority shall be entitled to decline without assigning any reason.
31.2 Assignment by the Authority
31.2.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, the Authority may, after
giving 60 (sixty) days’ notice to the Operator and based on mutual agreement of the Parties,
assign and/ or transfer any of its rights and benefits and/or obligations under this Agreement to
an assignee who is, in the reasonable opinion of the Authority, capable of fulfilling all of the
Authority’s then outstanding obligations under this Agreement.
Page 121 of 432

32. LIABILITY AND INDEMNITY
32.1 General indemnity

32.1.1 The Operator shall indemnify, defend, save and hold harmless the Authority and its officers,
servants, agents, Government Instrumentalities and Government owned and/or controlled
entities/enterprises, (the “Authority Indemnified Persons”) against any and all suits,
proceedings, actions, demands and claims from third parties for any loss, damage, cost and
expense, whether arising out of any breach by the Operator of any of its obligations under this
Agreement or any related agreement or on account of any defect or deficiency in the provision
of services by the Operator to the Authority or to any Customer, or from any negligence of the
Operator under contract or tort, save and except to the extent that any such suits, proceedings,
actions, demands and claims have arisen due to any negligent act or omission, or breach or
default of this Agreement on the part of the Authority Indemnified Persons.
32.1.2 The Authority shall indemnify, defend, save and hold harmless the Operator against any and all
suits, proceedings, actions, demands and claims from third parties for any loss, damage, cost
and expense arising out of:
a) The Authority commits a material default in complying with the provisions of Article 7.1.2 (b),
Article 7.1.2 (c), and Article 7.2 of this Agreement and such default has a Material Adverse
Effect on the Operator;
b) The Authority has failed to make payment of 3 (three) consecutive Operator Payments due
to the Operator within the period specified in this Agreement;
c) The Authority repudiates this Agreement or otherwise takes any action that amounts to or
manifests an irrevocable intention not to be bound by this Agreement.
which materially and adversely affect the performance by the Operator of its obligations under
this Agreement, save and except that where any such claim, suit, proceeding, action, and/or
demand has arisen due to a negligent act or omission, or breach of any of its obligations under
any provision of this Agreement or any related agreement, and/or breach of its statutory duty on
the part of the Operator, its subsidiaries, affiliates, sub-contractors, servants or agents, the
same shall be the liability of the Operator.
32.1.3 The Authority shall indemnify and hold harmless the Operator and its employees, officers and
Sub-contractors from and against any and all suits, actions, claims, demands, losses, damages,
fines, penalties, costs or any other liability incurred or suffered by Operator in the course of
performance of Operator Obligations solely as a result of any unlawful actions or omissions on
the part of the Authority in accordance to this Agreement. As a condition of this indemnification,
the Operator shall
a) Immediately notify the Authority of all such suits, actions or proceedings or the notice
threatening commencement thereof;
b) Provide copies of all such documents as may be reasonably required by the Authority;
c) Allow the Authority to represent the Operator in such suits, actions or proceedings by such
representatives including lawyers as the Authority may choose and shall abide by the
instructions of the Authority;
d) Not enter into any compromise or settlement without obtaining prior written approval of the
Authority.
Page 122 of 432

32.2 Indemnity by the Operator

32.2.1 Without limiting the generality of Article 32.1, the Operator shall fully indemnify, hold harmless
and defend the Authority and the Authority Indemnified Persons from and against any and all
loss and/or damages arising out of or with respect to:
a) Failure of the Operator to comply with Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits;
b) Payment of taxes required to be made by the Operator in respect of the income or other
taxes of the Operator’s sub-contractors, suppliers and representatives;
c) any amounts due to the suppliers of material or service to the Operator or its sub-
contractors;
d) the Operator not implementing the Project as per the Implementation Schedule, resulting in
time and cost overruns;
e) the Contractor not adhering to the Performance Standards which has resulted in the
deterioration of services provided to the Customers residing in the Effective Service Area
and/or action initiated by such Customers against the Authority;
f) any defects in the Designs and Drawings leading to claim for damage by third parties
against the Authority;
g) any material breach of the representations and warranties provided by the Operator under
this Agreement.
32.2.2 Without limiting the generality of the provisions of this Article 32, the Operator shall fully
indemnify, hold harmless and defend the Authority Indemnified Persons from and against any
and all suits, proceedings, actions, claims, demands, liabilities and damages which the
Authority Indemnified Persons may hereafter suffer, or pay by reason of any demands, claims,
suits or proceedings arising out of claims of infringement of any domestic or foreign patent
rights, copyrights or other intellectual property, proprietary or confidentiality rights with respect
to any materials, information, design or process used by the Operator or by the Operator’s sub-
contractors in performing the Operator Obligations or in any way incorporated in or related to
the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area. If in any such suit, action, claim or
proceedings, a temporary restraint order or preliminary injunction is granted, the Operator shall
make every reasonable effort, by giving a satisfactory bond or otherwise, to secure the
revocation or suspension of the injunction or restraint order. If, in any such suit, action, claim or
proceedings, the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area, or any part thereof or
comprised therein, is held to constitute an infringement and its use is permanently enjoined, the
Operator shall promptly make every reasonable effort to secure for the Authority a license, at no
cost to the Authority, authorizing continued use of the infringing work. If the Operator is unable
to secure such license within a reasonable time, the Operator shall, at its own expense, and
without impairing the Technical Specifications, either replace the affected work, or part, or
process thereof with non-infringing work or part or process, or modify the same so that it
becomes non-infringing.
32.3 Notice and contest of claims
32.3.1 In the event that either Party receives a claim or demand from a third party in respect of which it
is entitled to the benefit of an indemnity under this Article 32 (the “Indemnified Party”) it shall
notify the other Party (the “Indemnifying Party”) within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of the claim or
demand and shall not settle or pay the claim without the prior approval of the Indemnifying
Party, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. In the event that the
Page 123 of 432

Indemnifying Party wishes to contest or dispute the claim or demand, it may conduct the
proceedings in the name of the Indemnified Party, subject to the Indemnified Party being
secured against any costs involved, to its reasonable satisfaction.
32.4 Defense of claims
32.4.1 The Indemnified Party shall have the right, but not the obligation, to contest, defend and litigate
any claim, action, suit or proceeding by any third party alleged or asserted against such Party in
respect of, resulting from, related to or arising out of any matter for which it is entitled to be
indemnified hereunder, and reasonable costs and expenses thereof shall be indemnified by the
Indemnifying Party. If the Indemnifying Party acknowledges in writing its obligation to indemnify
the Indemnified Party in respect of loss to the full extent provided by this Article 32, the
Indemnifying Party shall be entitled, at its option, to assume and control the defense of such
claim, action, suit or proceeding, liabilities, payments and obligations at its expense and through
the counsel of its choice; provided it gives prompt notice of its intention to do so to the
Indemnified Party and reimburses the Indemnified Party for the reasonable cost and expenses
incurred by the Indemnified Party prior to the assumption by the Indemnifying Party of such
defense. The Indemnifying Party shall not be entitled to settle or compromise any claim,
demand, action, suit or proceeding without the prior written consent of the Indemnified Party,
unless the Indemnifying Party provides such security to the Indemnified Party as shall be
reasonably required by the Indemnified Party to secure the loss to be indemnified hereunder to
the extent so compromised or settled.
32.4.2 If the Indemnifying Party has exercised its rights under Article 32.3, the Indemnified Party shall
not be entitled to settle or compromise any claim, action, suit or proceeding without the prior
written consent of the Indemnifying Party (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or
delayed).
32.4.3 If the Indemnifying Party exercises its rights under Article 32.3, the Indemnified Party shall
nevertheless have the right to employ its own counsel, and such counsel may participate in
such action, but the fees and expenses of such counsel shall be at the expense of the
Indemnified Party, when and as incurred, unless:
a) The employment of counsel by such party has been authorized in writing by the
Indemnifying Party;
b) The Indemnified Party shall have reasonably concluded that there may be a conflict of
interest between the Indemnifying Party and the Indemnified Party in the conduct of the
defense of such action;
c) The Indemnifying Party shall not, in fact, have employed independent counsel reasonably
satisfactory to the Indemnified Party, to assume the defense of such action and shall have
been so notified by the Indemnified Party; or
d) The Indemnified Party shall have reasonably concluded and specifically notified the
Indemnifying Party either:
(i) that there may be specific defenses available to it which are different from or
additional to those available to the Indemnifying Party; or
(ii) that such claim, action, suit or proceeding involves or could have a Material
Adverse Effect upon it beyond the scope of this Agreement:
e) Provided that if Sub-Articles (b), (c) or (d) of this Article 32.4.3 shall be applicable, the
counsel for the Indemnified Party shall have the right to direct the defense of such claim,
Page 124 of 432

demand, action, suit or proceeding on behalf of the Indemnified Party, and the reasonable
fees and disbursements of such counsel shall constitute legal or other expenses hereunder.
32.5 Limitation of liabilities
32.5.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Contract, the maximum overall
liability of any Party under this Agreement shall not exceed the total value of Agreement set out
in Schedule 7.
32.5.2 Provided that the limitation of liability set out in Clause 32.5.1 above shall not apply to the
following:
a) breach of Applicable Law and Applicable Permits;
b) breach of any third party intellectual property rights;
c) fraud and wilful misconduct;
d) gross negligence;
e) damages to or loss of third party property;
f) damage caused to the environment;
g) misrepresentation by the Operator; and
h) health hazard, bodily injury or loss of life.
32.6 Survival on Termination

32.6.1 The provisions of this Article 32 shall survive Termination.
Page 125 of 432

33. RIGHTS AND TITLE OVER THE SERVICE AREA
33.1 Licensee rights

33.1.1 For the purpose of this Agreement, the Operator shall have rights to the use of the Effective
Service Area as a licensee subject to and in accordance with this Agreement, and to this end; it
may regulate the entry and use of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area by third
parties in accordance with and subject to the provisions of this Agreement and Applicable Laws.
33.1.2 The Operator acknowledges that its possession of the Effective Service Area shall not be
exclusive to the Operator and shall in addition to the restrictions as contained in the Agreement
be subject to the following:
(a) Any public passage or right existing over any part of the Effective Service Area from time to
time;
(b) The rights and obligations of persons or authorities under any Applicable Laws; and
(c) The rights of the Authority, Authority’s Representative and any statutory authorities.
33.2 Access rights of the Authority and others

33.2.1 The Operator shall allow free access to the Effective Service Area at all times for the authorized
representatives and vehicles of the Authority and/or its contractors, and the Technical Auditor,
and for the persons and vehicles duly authorized by any Government Instrumentality to inspect
the Project, Project Facilities and Site and to investigate any matter within their authority, and
upon reasonable notice, the Operator shall provide to such persons reasonable assistance
necessary to carry out their respective duties and functions.
33.3 Property taxes
33.3.1 All property taxes on the Project Facilities in Effective Service Area shall be the liability of the
Authority and payable by the Authority as owner; provided, however, that any such taxes
payable by the Operator under Applicable Laws for use of the Effective Service Area or the
Project Facilities therein shall be the liability of the Operator and shall not be reimbursed or
payable by the Authority. Stamp duties, if any, due and payable on the grant of license
comprising this Agreement shall be paid by the Operator
33.4 Restriction on sub-letting
33.4.1 The Operator shall not sub-license or sub-let the whole or any part of the Effective Service
Area, save and except as may be expressly set forth in this Agreement; provided that nothing
contained herein shall be construed or interpreted as restricting the right of the Operator to
appoint sub-contractors for the performance of its obligations hereunder including for operation
and maintenance of all or any part of the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area.
Page 126 of 432

34. DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD
34.1 Defects Liability Period

34.1.1 The Operator shall be responsible for all the defects and deficiencies, except usual wear and
tear in the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area or any part thereof, till the expiry of a
period of 1 (one) year commencing from the date of Completion Certificate (the “Defects
Liability Period”). Provided that the Defects Liability Period shall in no case be less than 6
(six) months from the date of Completion Certificate for and in respect of works for which time
extension was granted. For the avoidance of doubt, any repairs or restoration on account of
usual wear or tear in the Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area or any part thereof shall
form a part of the maintenance obligations of the Operator as specified in Article 5 and Article 6.
The Operator’s liability hereunder shall survive any Termination of this Agreement prior to the
Expiry Date.
34.2 Remedying Defects
34.2.1 The Operator shall repair or rectify all Defects and deficiencies observed by the Technical
Auditor during the Defects Liability Period within a period of 15 (fifteen) days from the date of
notice issued by the Technical Auditor in this behalf, or within such reasonable period as may
be determined by the Technical Auditor at the request of the Operator, in accordance with Good
Industry Practice.
34.3 Cost of remedying Defects
34.3.1 For the avoidance of doubt, any repair or rectification undertaken in accordance with the
provisions of Article 34.2, including any additional testing, shall be carried out by the Operator
at its own risk and cost, to the extent that such Defect or deficiency is attributable to:
a) the design of the Additional Project Facilities;
b) plant, materials or workmanship not being in accordance with this Agreement and the
Technical Specifications;
c) improper maintenance of the Project by the Operator.
34.4 Operator’s failure to rectify Defects
34.4.1 In the event that the Operator fails to repair or rectify such defect or deficiency within the period
specified in Article 34.2, the Authority shall be entitled to get the same repaired, rectified or
remedied at the Operator’s cost so as to make the Project Facilities in the Effective Service
Area conform to the Technical Specifications and the provisions of this Agreement. All costs
consequent thereon shall, after due consultation with the Authority and the Operator, be
determined by the Technical Auditor. The cost determined as (i) Damages, (ii) covered within
Article 34.3 hereof shall be recoverable by the Authority from the Operator and may be
deducted by the Authority from any monies due to the Operator or from the relevant
Performance Security(ies).
34.5 Operator to search cause
34.5.1 The Technical Auditor may instruct the Operator to examine the cause of any Defect in the
Additional Project Facilities or part thereof before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
34.5.2 In In the event any Defect identified under Article 34.5.1 is attributable to the Operator, the
Operator shall also bear the cost of the examination of such Defect.
Page 127 of 432

34.5.3 In the event such Defect is not attributable to the Operator, the Technical Auditor shall, after
due consultation with the Authority and the Operator, determine the costs incurred by the
Operator on such examination and notify the same to the Operator, with a copy to the Authority,
and the Operator shall be reimbursed by the Authority such costs of rectifying such defect.
34.6 Extension of Defects Liability Period
34.6.1 The Defects Liability Period shall be deemed to be extended till the identified Defects under
Article 34.2 have been remedied.
34.7 Replacement of assets upon expiry of Defects Liability Period
34.7.1 Upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period, any replacement of the assets in the Project
Facilities in the Effective Service Area shall be performed in accordance with the process
provided in the Technical Specifications.
Page 128 of 432

35. DISPUTE RESOLUTION

35.1.1 Any dispute, difference or controversy of whatever nature howsoever arising under or out of or
in relation to this Agreement (including its interpretation) between the Parties, and so notified in
writing by either Party to the other Party (the “Dispute”) shall, in the first instance, be attempted
to be resolved amicably in accordance with the conciliation procedure set forth in Article 35.2.
35.1.2 The Parties agree to use their best efforts for resolving all Disputes arising under or in respect
of this Agreement promptly, equitably and in good faith, and further agree to provide each other
with reasonable access during normal business hours to all non-privileged records, information
and data pertaining to any Dispute.
35.2 Conciliation
35.2.1 In the event of any Dispute between the Parties, either Party may call upon the Technical
Auditor to mediate and assist the Parties in arriving at an amicable settlement thereof. Failing
mediation by the Technical Auditor or without the intervention of the Technical Auditor, either
Party may require such Dispute to be referred to the head (CEO or Managing Director) of the
Authority and the head (or Chairman or Head or Managing Director or CEO) of the Operator for
amicable settlement, and upon such reference, the said persons shall meet no later than 7
(seven) days from the date of reference to discuss and attempt to amicably resolve the Dispute.
If such meeting does not take place within the 7 (seven) days period or the Dispute is not
amicably settled within 15 (fifteen) days of the meeting or the Dispute is not resolved as
evidenced by the signing of written terms of settlement within 30 (thirty) days of the notice in
writing referred to in Article 35.1.1 or such longer period as may be mutually agreed by the
Parties, either Party may refer the Dispute to arbitration in accordance with the provisions of
Article 35.3.
35.3 Arbitration
35.3.1 Any Dispute which is not resolved amicably by conciliation, as provided in Article 35.2, shall be
finally decided by reference to arbitration by an arbitral tribunal constituted in accordance with
Article 35.3.2. Such arbitration shall be subject to the provisions of the Arbitration and
Conciliation Act, 1996 and rules made thereunder (“Arbitration Act”). The place of such
arbitration shall be Shimla and the language of arbitration proceedings shall be English.
35.3.2 There shall be an arbitral tribunal comprising three arbitrators, of whom each Party shall select
one, and the third arbitrator shall be appointed by the two arbitrators so selected and in the
event of disagreement between the two arbitrators, the appointment shall be made in
accordance with the Arbitration Act.
35.3.3 The arbitral tribunal shall make a reasoned award (the “Award”). Any Award made in any
arbitration held pursuant to this Article 35 shall be final and binding on the Parties as from the
date it is made, and the Operator and the Authority agree and undertake to carry out such
Award without delay.
35.3.4 The Operator and the Authority agree that an Award may be enforced against the Operator
and/or the Authority, as the case may be, and their respective assets wherever situated.
35.3.5 This Agreement and the rights and obligations of the Parties shall remain in full force and effect,
pending the Award in any arbitration proceedings hereunder.
Page 129 of 432

36. MISCELLANUOUS
36.1 Governing law and jurisdiction

36.1.1 This Agreement shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with and governed by the
laws of India, and subject to the provisions of Article 35 (Dispute Resolution) the courts in
Shimla shall have exclusive jurisdiction over matters arising out of or relating to this Agreement.
36.2 Waiver
36.2.1 Waiver, including partial or conditional waiver, by either Party of any default by the other Party
in the observance and performance of any provision of or obligations under this Agreement:
a) Shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any other or subsequent default hereof or
of other provisions of or obligations under this Agreement;
b) Shall not be effective unless it is in writing and executed by a duly authorized representative
of the Party;
c) Shall not affect the validity or enforceability of this Agreement in any manner.
36.2.2 Neither the failure by either Party to insist on any occasion upon the performance of the terms,
conditions and provisions of this Agreement or any obligation thereunder nor time or other
indulgence granted by a Party to the other Party shall be treated or deemed as waiver of such
breach or acceptance of any variation or the relinquishment of any such right hereunder.
36.3 Liability for review of Documents and Drawings
36.3.1 Except to the extent expressly provided in this Agreement
a) no review, comment or approval by the Authority or the Technical Auditor of any Project
Agreement, Document or Designs and Drawings submitted by the Operator nor any
observation or inspection of the construction, operation or maintenance of the Project
Facilities nor the failure to review, approve, comment, observe or inspect hereunder shall
relieve or absolve the Operator from its obligations, duties and liabilities under this
Agreement, Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits;
b) The Authority shall not be liable to the Operator by reason of any review, comment,
approval, observation or inspection referred to in Sub-Article (a) above.
36.4 Exclusion of implied warranties etc.
36.4.1 This Agreement expressly excludes any warranty, condition or other undertaking implied at law
or by custom or otherwise arising out of any other agreement between the Parties or any
representation by either Party not contained in a binding legal agreement executed by both
Parties.
36.5 Survival
36.5.1 Termination shall:
a) Not relieve the Operator or the Authority, as the case may be, of any obligations hereunder
which expressly or by implication survive Termination hereof; and except as otherwise
provided in any provision of this Agreement expressly limiting the liability of either Party, not
relieve either Party of any obligations or liabilities for loss or damage to the other Party
arising out of, or caused by, acts or omissions of such Party prior to the effectiveness of
such Termination or arising out of such Termination.
Page 130 of 432

36.5.2 All obligations surviving Termination shall only survive for a period of 3 (three) years following
the date of such Termination.
36.6 Entire Agreement
36.6.1 This Agreement and the Schedules together constitute a complete and exclusive statement of
the terms of the agreement between the Parties on the subject hereof, and no amendment or
modification hereto shall be valid and effective unless such modification or amendment is
agreed to in writing by the Parties and duly executed by persons especially empowered in this
behalf by the respective Parties. All prior written or oral understandings, offers or other
communications of every kind pertaining to this Agreement are abrogated and withdrawn. For
the avoidance of doubt, the Parties hereto agree that any obligations of the Operator arising
from the Request for Qualification or Request for Proposals, as the case may be, shall be
deemed to form part of this Agreement and treated as such.
36.7 Severability
36.7.1 If for any reason whatsoever, any provision of this Agreement is or becomes invalid, illegal or
unenforceable or is declared by any court of competent jurisdiction or any other instrumentality
to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality or enforceability of the remaining
provisions shall not be affected in any manner, and the Parties will negotiate in good faith with a
view to agreeing to one or more provisions which may be substituted for such invalid,
unenforceable or illegal provisions, as nearly as is practicable to such invalid, illegal or
unenforceable provision. Failure to agree upon any such provisions shall not be subject to the
Dispute Resolution Procedure set forth under this Agreement or otherwise.
36.8 No partnership
36.8.1 This Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed to create an association, joint venture or
partnership between the Parties, or to impose any partnership obligation or liability upon either
Party, It is expressly clarified that expect as specifically permitted under this Agreement, the
Operator shall not have any right, power or authority to enter into any agreement or undertaking
for, or act on behalf of, or to act as or be an agent or representative of, or to otherwise bind, the
Authority.
36.9 Third parties
36.9.1 This Agreement is intended solely for the benefit of the Parties and their respective successors
and permitted assigns, and nothing in this Agreement shall be construed to create any duty to,
standard of care with reference to, or any liability to, any person not a Party to this Agreement
including any Operator’s sub-contractor.
36.10 Successors and assigns
36.10.1 This Agreement shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of the Parties and their
respective successors and permitted assigns.
36.11 Limitation of Liability
36.11.1 Neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for loss of use of any works, loss of profit, loss
of any contract or for any indirect or consequential loss or damage which may be suffered by
the other Party in connection with this Agreement, save and except as provided under Article 29
and Article 32.
36.11.2 The total liability of one Party to the other Party under and in accordance with the provisions
of this Agreement, save and except as provided in Article 29 and Article 32, shall not exceed
Page 131 of 432

the 20% of the Works Fees (C) during the Transition Period and 20% of the total O&M Fees for
the Sustaining Period in accordance with the projections provided in the Schedule 7. This
Article shall not limit the liability in any case of fraud, deliberate default or gross negligence or
reckless misconduct by the defaulting Party.
36.12 Notices
36.12.1 Any notice or other communication to be given by any Party to the other Party under or in
connection with the matters contemplated by this Agreement shall be in writing and shall:
a) in the case of the Operator, be given by facsimile or e-mail and by letter delivered by hand to
the address given and marked for attention of the person set out below or to such other
person as the Operator may from time to time designate by notice to the Authority; provided
that notices or other communications to be given to an address outside Shimla may, if they
are subsequently confirmed by sending a copy thereof by registered acknowledgement due,
air mail or by courier, be sent by facsimile or e-mail to the number as the Operator may from
time to time designate by notice to the Authority.
Attention:
Designation:
Address:
Fax No:
Email:
b) in the case of the Authority, be given by facsimile or e-mail and by letter delivered by hand at
the address given below and be addressed to the person named below with a copy
delivered to the Authority Representative or such other person as the Authority may from
time to time designate by notice to the Operator.
Name:
Designation:
Address:
Fax No:
Email:
c) any notice or communication by a Party to the other Party, given in accordance herewith,
shall be deemed to have been delivered when in the normal course of post it ought to have
been delivered and in all other cases, it shall be deemed to have been delivered on the
actual date and time of delivery; provided that in the case of facsimile or e-mail, it shall be
deemed to have been delivered on the working day following the date of its delivery.
36.13 Language
36.13.1 All notices required to be given by one Party to the other Party and all other
communications, Documentation and proceedings which are in any way relevant to this
Agreement shall be in writing and in English language.
36.14 Counterparts
36.14.1 This Agreement may be executed in two counterparts, each of which, when executed and
delivered, shall constitute an original of this Agreement.
Page 132 of 432

WITNESS WHEREOF THE PARTIES HAVE EXECUTED AND DELIVERED THIS AGREEMENT AS OF
THE DAY, MONTH AND YEAR FIRST ABOVE WRITTEN. SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED
For and on behalf of THE AUTHORITY by:
(Signature)
(Designation)
(Name)
(Address)
(Fax No.)
(e-mail)
THE COMMON SEAL OF OPERATOR has been affixed pursuant to the resolution passed by the Board of
Directors of the Operator at its meeting held on the [•] day of [•], 2018 hereunto affixed in the presence of [•]
Director, who has signed these presents in token thereof and, Company Secretary / Authorized Officer who
has countersigned the same in token thereof:
(Signature)
(Designation)
(Name)
(Address)
(Fax No.)
(e-mail)
Page 133 of 432

SCHEDULE 1: PROJECT DETAILS

The Greater Shimla Water Supply and Sewerage project is being planned for addressing the water and
sewerage challenges in Shimla, the surrounding areas of Shoghi, Kufri and Ghanahatti and residential
townships being developed by Himachal Pradesh Housing and Urban Development Authority (HIMUDA),
together known as Greater Shimla Area. The population of Shimla city is 1.69 lakhs, population of Kufri,
Shoghi and Ghanahatti is 12,550, 12,417 and 10,715 respectively and population in additional Shimla
planning area is 33,928 as per 2011 census.
Shimla and the surrounding areas of Kufri, Shogi and Ghanahatti have experienced moderate to rapid
population growth. Shimla has observed a decadal population growth rate of 18.9% between 2001 and 2011.
Kufri, Shogi and Ghanahatti experienced decadal growth rates of 17.1%, 9.6% and 5.2% respectively
between 2001 and 2011.
The figure below presents the map for the above area.
* The area in blue color, which is beyond Shimla MC, Kufri, Shoghi and Ghanahatti is called the additional
Shimla Planning area.
Shimla is presently dependent on surface water sources like springs, nallahs and streams for its water
supply. The existing water supply is not sufficient to meet current demand. In addition high water loses also
lead to lower per capita water supply and irregular water supply.
The water loss in distribution system, has huge financial impact on SJPNL as the cost of water production is
very high. Further, the billing cycle is long. Thereby impacting the cash flow for SJPNL.
Total water supply connections in the Shimla city are around 32,000. The breakup of the connections across
different types are:
Page 134 of 432

Objective of this project

The objectives Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited wish to achieve through the Project are:
a) Ensure universal coverage of water and sanitation to every household

b) 24x7 supply of water
c) Promote public health and environment
d) Accountability and responsiveness to citizens
e) Decentralized service delivery through autonomous and professional institution
SJPNL intends to appoint a private Operator for implementation of continuous pressurized water supply in
Shimla.
The list of key project components is as follows:

1. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
a. Pipe Network:
Galvanized Iron Pipes (Heavy Approximate length

class)
80 mm 204369.00 mt.
100 mm 31083.00 mt.
150 mm 510121.00 mt.
MS ERW Pipelines
ID 206.5 mm dia & 6.3 mm thick 21412.00 mt.
ID 339.6 mm dia & 8 mm thick 163.00 mt.
b. Electronically controlled valves
Flow Pressure
Isolation
Diameter Control Reducing Scour Valve Air Valve
Valve
Valves Valves
25 mm dia 2.00 Nos.
50 mm dia 60.00
Page 135 of 432

Nos.
80 mm dia 266.00 Nos. 352.00 Nos. 234.00 Nos. 2.00 Nos.
200 mm dia 29.00 Nos. 51.00 Nos. 101.00 Nos. 1.00 No.
250 mm dia 10.00 Nos. 12.00 Nos. 8.00 Nos.
300 mm dia 25.00 Nos. 6.00 Nos. 41.00 Nos.
350 mm dia 2.00 Nos.
400 mm dia 1.00 No. 3.00 Nos. 1.00 Nos.
c. Electromagnetic Flow Meter (EMF)
150 mm dia 21.00 Nos.
200 mm dia 30.00 Nos.
250 mm dia 10.00 Nos.
300 mm dia 25.00 Nos.
400 mm dia 1.00 No.
d. Pressure Transmitters: 640 Nos
e. House Service Connection & Consumer Metering
i House Service Connection of G.I. pipes with G.I. fittings complete including
Chamber.
15 mm dia 52250 Nos.
20 mm dia 1650 Nos.
25 mm dia 1100 Nos.
ii Domestic battery-operated ultrasonic AMR water meters
20 mm dia 1650 Nos.
25 mm dia 1100 Nos.
iii Direct acting PRV for each house service
connection
20 mm dia 1650 Nos.
25 mm dia 1100 Nos.
2. STORAGE RESERVIORS:
Capacity Enhancement of existing
i) Tanks
244.00 367.00 Cum
1 Corner House 21 Dhalli_WTP2_Sump
Cum
1797.00 407.00 Cum
2 Totu 22 Sackrala
Cum
509.00 462.00 Cum
3 Kelestone 1 23 Basant Vihar
Cum
506.00 340.00 Cum
4 Fingask_2 24 Vikas nagar
Cum
713.00 128.00 Cum
5 Tutikandi_2 25 IAS_Colony2
Cum
Page 136 of 432

437.00 849.00 Cum

6 Advance Study Steel Tank 26 HP PWD Near Kusumpti
Cum
739.00 2003.00
7 Chakkar/Sandal 27 Jakhu
Cum Cum
713.00 227.00 Cum
8 Kamnadevi Temple 28 North_Oak_1
Cum
1131.00
9 Tara Hall ii New Tanks
Cum
413.00 565.00 Cum
10 Phagali 1 Z7_Tutikandi_3
Cum
604.00 1005.00
11 Mains_Field1 2 Z6_Baluganj_Harinagar
Cum Cum
362.00 393.00 Cum
12 Shivpuri 3 Z4_New1
Cum
731.00 1272.00
13 Khalini Forest Steel Tank 4 Z3_Knolls_Wood
Cum Cum
291.00 1272.00
14 SDA Complex 5 Z8_Dhingo5
Cum Cum
142.00 884.00 Cum
15 New_Shimla_Sector3A 6 Z5_Dhingodevi4
Cum
298.00 501.00 Cum
16 New_Shimla_Sector4 7 Z1_Dhingodevi3
Cum
1056.00 10.00 Cum
17 Dhingodevi1 8 Z11_Sargeen_Chowk
Cum
113.00 565.00 Cum
18 Dhingodevi2 9 Z10_Tibti_Panthaghati
Cum
1.00 Cum 1901.00
19 Mashobra 10 Z2_Jakhu2
Cum
220.00 565.00 Cum
20 Dhalli_WTP1_Sump 11 Z9_Shoghi
Cum
3. TRANSMISSION MAIN
a. Pipe network
i Galvanized Iron Pipes (Heavy

class)
100 mm 1602.00 mt.
150 mm 10601.01 mt.
ii MS ERW Pipelines
ID 260.4 mm dia & 6.3 mm thk. 5220.00 mt.
ID 309.7 mm dia & 7.1 mm thk. 1589.00 mt.
ID 339.6 mm dia & 8 mm thk. 5394.00 mt.
ID 388.8 mm dia & 8.8 mm thk. 3293.00 mt.
ID 437 mm dia & 10 mm thk. 506.00 mt.
ID 486 mm dia & 11 mm thk. 1161.00 mt.
ID 585 mm dia & 12.5 mm thk. 3067.00 mt.
ID 585 mm dia & 15 mm thk. 83.00 mt.
b. Electronically Controlled Valves
Flow Pressure
Isolation Scour
Diameter Control Reducing Air Valve
Valve Valve
Valves Valves
Page 137 of 432


80 mm dia 2.00 Nos. 2.00 Nos. 2.00 Nos. 2.00 Nos. 10.00 Nos.
150 mm dia 29.00 Nos. 26.00 Nos. 28.00 Nos. 27.00 Nos. 1.00 No.
600 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 3.00 Nos.
80 mm 2.00 Nos.
100 mm 7.00 Nos.
150 mm 23.00 Nos.
200 mm 22.00 Nos.
250 mm 8.00 Nos.
300 mm 17.00 Nos.
400 mm 9.00 Nos.
450 mm 6.00 Nos.
500 mm 4.00 Nos.
d. Pressure Transmitter = 162 Nos
4. BPT & TANKS:
BPT Tanks
1 667 Cum 1 17 Cum
2 667 Cum 2 4 Cum
3 430 Cum 3 192 Cum
4 100 Cum 4 71 Cum
5 325 Cum
6 74 Cum
7 88 Cum
8 102 Cum
9 102 Cum
10 497 Cum
11 49 Cum
5. Pumping Main:
a. Pipe Lines
Approx. Length
class)
100 mm 621.70 mt.
150 mm 22.80 mt.
ii MS ERW Pipelines
ID 206.5 mm dia 29.30 mt.
ID 260.3 mm dia 373.10 mt.
ID 309.7 mm dia 22.90 mt.
Page 138 of 432

ID 312.7 mm dia 90.50 mt.

ID 341.5 mm dia 1424.40 mt.
ID 396.4 mm dia 464.70 mt.
ID 419 mm dia 1102.30 mt.
ID 585 mm dia 16.80 mt.
Flow Pressure
Isolation Scour
Valve Valve
Valves Valves
25 mm dia 5.00 Nos.
50 mm dia 3.00 Nos.
100 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 1.00 No.
150 mm dia 3.00 Nos. 2.00 Nos. 3.00 Nos.
200 mm dia 4.00 Nos. 4.00 Nos. 5.00 Nos.
250 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 1.00 No.
300 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 2.00 Nos.
400 mm dia 1.00 No.
500 mm dia 1.00 No.
600 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 2.00 Nos.
100 mm 2.00 Nos.
150 mm 3.00 Nos.
200 mm 4.00 Nos.
250 mm 4.00 Nos.
300 mm 2.00 Nos.
450 mm 1.00 No.
600 mm 2.00 Nos.
d. Pressure Transmitter: 34 Nos
6. Pumping Machinery, Transformer & Substation

 Pumping machinery along with its allied accessories complete with a provision of 100% standby.
 Transformer and Substation along with its allied accessories
Particulars Pump HP Transformer
Pump house (PH Kamnadevi) to the Kamnadevi Temple 110.00 BHP 1 No
Sanjauli tank to the BPT1 150.00 BHP 1 No
Sump Digodevi Rest to various tanks in this area 150.00 BHP 1 No
Kusumpti tank to HP PWD Near Kusumpti 990.00 BHP 1 No
Sanjauli tank to Jakhu tanks 20.00 BHP 1 No
Sanjauli tank to North_Oak_1 360.00 BHP 1 No
Head work to Ridge and Sanjauli tanks 110.00 BHP 1 No
7. Pumping House cum Attendant Quarter:

Pump house cum attendant quarter 2 Nos. of 600 Sqm. Each for Kusumpti
1200.00 Sq.mt.
tank to HP PWD Near Kusumpti and Sanjauli tank to North_Oak_1
Page 139 of 432

8. STAFF QUARTERS:
Staff quarters Type-I, II & III. At New Reservoir (11 Nos.) 1100.00 Sq.mt
Staff quarters Type-I, II & III. At New Reservoir 100 sqm (15 Nos) 1500.00 Sqm
Staff quarters Type-I, II & III. At New Reservoir 100 sqm x 7 pumping station 700.00 Sqm
9. SCADA WORK: For Distribution, transition and Pumping system

S. N Particulars No
i Interfacing Software Design to PLC 1 No.
ii Installation of the software 1 No.
iii Centralized Historian Server 1 No.
Iv Secondary Computer Station 1 No.
v 46" LCD monitor at Conference Room 1 No.
Page 140 of 432

SCHEDULE 2: PROJECT FACILITIES

The Project Facilities include the list of project components mentioned in Schedule 1.
The list of reservoirs and storage tanks is as follows:
List of Designated Reservoir
Source WTP Designated Reservoir

Giri Giri Mashobra storage tank
Gumma Old Gumma Craignano storage tank
New Gumma Craignano storage tank
Nauti Khad Sanjauli storage tank
Sanjauli Shikhrodi Sanjauli storage tank
Zone wise details of the storage tanks as per data available with SJPNL are given below:
DETAILS OF WATER TANKS IN SHIMLA CITY
TYPE OF CAPACITY (Lakh
SR. NO. LOCATION
TANK Ltr)
NEW SHIMLA AND CHHOTA SHIMLA ZONE
1 SARGHEEN UGR 0.50
2 SARGHEEN IAS COLONY ESR 0.25
3 SHIV PURI UGR 0.45
4 VIKAS NAGAR NEAR C-41 GSR 0.40
5 PHASE-III TANK NEAR POLICE CHOWKI GSR 2.00
6 PHASE-III TANK NEAR BLOCK 6 & 7 UGR 1.20
7 KASUMPATTI NEAR SDA COMPLEX GSR 1.00
8 SAKRALA NEAR TYPE-IV UGR 0.50
BASANT VIHAR STORAGE TANK RANI
9 GSR 1.20
GROUND
10 NEW SHIMLA SECT.-I UGR 1.25
11 NEW SHIMLA SECT.-II UGR 1.25
12 NEW SHIMLA SECT.-III OLD ESR 0.80
13 TARA MATA MANDIR GSR 6.00
14 KNOLLS WOOD GSR 9.00
15 NEW SHIMLA SECT.-III NEW GSR 6.00
16 NEW SHIMLA SECT.-IV GSR 4.00
17 MAINS FIELD- I & II GSR 36.30
CHAURA MAIDAN ZONE
1 TARA HALL TANK GSR 1.00
2 PHAGLI UGR 0.70
3 NABHA TANK GSR 1.00
4 STEEL TANK (BOILEAUGANJ) GSR 0.45
5 BOILEAUGANJ UGR 1.00
6 KAMNA DEVI GSR 3.00
7 SUMMER HILL BAZAR TANK UGR 1.00
8 ADVANCE STUDY TANK GSR 9.00
9 IIAS STEEL TANK GSR 2.25
10 TUTI KANDI TANK GSR 9.00
Page 141 of 432

DETAILS OF WATER TANKS IN SHIMLA CITY

TYPE OF CAPACITY (Lakh
SR. NO. LOCATION
TANK Ltr)
11 103 TUNNEL TANK GSR 1.00
12 TOTU YADGAR TANK GSR 0.25
13 TOTU BHIMA KALLI MANDIR TANK GSR 16.00
14 SANDDALE CHAKKER TANK GSR 9.00
LAKKER BAZAR/CENTER ZONE
1 JAKHOO BELOW MANDIR OLD (LOWER) UGR 0.50
2 JAKHOO BELOW MANDIR OLD (UPPER) GSR 3.00
3 BHARARI GSR 12.00
4 KELESTON ESR 3.00
5 FINGASK TANK (2TANKS) GSR 1.60
SANJAULI ZONE
1 ENGINE GHAR GSR 3.00
2 NORTH OAK (OH) ESR 0.50
3 NORTH OAK (UG) GSR 1.00
4 DHINGU MANDIR (SANJUALI) GSR 3.00
5 BANGALA COLONY TANK GSR 1.00
6 DHINGU MANDIR GSR 1.50
7 HOUSING BOARD COLONY (UPPER) GSR 0.5
8 HOUSING BOARD COLONY (LOWER) GSR 0.5
9 KALYANI TANK (CHARABRA) UGR NA
Page 142 of 432

SCHEDULE 3: SERVICE AREA
The service area extends from inlet of Designated Reservoir to the ferrule point of house service connection
in Shimla city. The scope of service also includes supply of bulk water to at select tapping points for Shoghi,
Kufri and Ghanahatti.
Page 143 of 432

SCHEDULE 4A: OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS DURING START UP PERIOD
1.1 Technical Surveys, Studies & Audits: During the Start Up Period, the Operator will carry out a
various Technical Surveys, Studies & Audits of the Service Area, the existing water supply system
assets, and service delivery arrangements in the Service Area. The Technical Surveys, Studies &
Audits will form the basis for the Comprehensive Assessment Report, which needs to be prepared
thereafter as a part of the Start Up Period. It will include
a) Topographical Survey Map, Infrastructure Survey and Digital Elevation Model of the
Service Area and GIS Mapping of all WSS asset as a part of developing an Asset Register
During the Start Up Period, the Operator will undertake a detailed topographical survey covering
the entire Service Area and existing infrastructure from the source to the Customer including
those areas within the Service Area that are not provided with water supply. The survey data
should be sufficient to prepare the Comprehensive Assessment Report (CAR) and the Service
Improvement Plan (SIP) during the Start Up Period and provide input for development of a
comprehensive Geographical Information System (GIS) based base maps.
The Operator may utilize the information collected in the drone based survey and household
survey conducted by the Authority. The Operator may conduct a validation survey to verify the
same. The Operator will document all key elevations with geo-reference and all physical features
such as roads, culverts, drains, nallahs, electrical transformers, trees, existing valve chambers,
and any other relevant features which would affect installation and maintenance of existing
and/or new pipe lines, pumping stations, service reservoirs, will be captured in the survey. The
Operator will prepare Service Area Maps in at least 1:2000 scale and to produce a Digital
Elevation Model (DEM) in 1m contour interval. The output from the survey will be based on real
on-ground fresh survey using Total Station equipment and GPS etc. and will not be by mere
updating of available maps by desktop digitization methods.
Using the Service Area maps prepared, the Operator will undertake GIS mapping of all water
supply assets and will prepare a detailed asset registers. Operator will also compile As-Built
Drawings within the appropriate system. Asset registers and asset GIS information will be
updated periodically by the Operator to reflect any changes to the Project Facilities.
b) Customer Survey and creation of Customer database and mapping of Customers on GIS
map
During the Start Up Period, the Operator will validate the door-to-door survey undertaken by the
Authority. The information collected in door-to-door survey will be documented by the Operator
in Customer database. The Operator may choose to integrate the customer database in the
IMIS. The Customer database shall include information of all Customers whether connected to
the water supply network or un-connected and obtain the details in regard to location, name,
address, mobile and landline telephone numbers, number of resident members, status of billing
and metering. The Operator will also map the Customer database to the GIS.
The Customer database shall include socio-economic classification of household (e.g. SC, ST,
BPL, slum/ non-slum), availability of water connection, water supply schedule and actual timing,
estimated consumption levels, alternate water supply arrangements (the “Customer Survey”).
The Customer Survey will include key details of all Customers whether connected or un-
connected in the categories of general residential households (independent housing, group
housing connections and apartments), urban poor households, commercial properties, hotel
properties, construction, institutional, government housing, religious places, industrial and fire
Page 144 of 432

services and any other category of Customers resident in the Service Area. The output from the
survey will be sufficient to validate and improve existing billing data and for integrating the
Customer data into the GIS based Customer management system.
The Operator may use suitable smart devices such as tablets or mobile phones (based on
android/window/apple platforms) for field surveys. The Operator will develop a suitable software/
application which should include all the necessary features such as quality checks, skip logics
etc. enabling the proper integration of data based on filled up questionnaire. Features including
geo-referencing location of the surveyed households, daily database updation and preliminary
quality checks of the collected data should also be built into the system.
Apart from the various data points to be captured through the survey, software/application
should be built in such a way that each household data should be time-stamped, geo-tagged
and mapped against the corresponding enumerator and the supervisor who have been involved.
A two-tier mechanism for data quality control and monitoring should be followed where in a
supervisor is positioned at every ward, and an overall coordinator at the Service Area level. The
Operator will submit the software/application along with the data quality control mechanism for
approval from Authority and make necessary changes if any recommended by the Authority.
The Operator will create a Customer database and will check for inconsistencies with the
existing billing and collection. The Operator will develop a strategy to bridge the gaps in the two
databases as a part of the Service Improvement Plan (SIP).
1.2 Comprehensive Assessment: Based on the Technical Surveys, Studies & Audits, the Operator will
carry out a comprehensive assessment of the existing water supply system assets, and service
delivery arrangements in the Service Area. This will include but not be limited to assessing the
condition and performance of existing assets such as the transmission mains, storage structures,
pumping stations, piped distribution network.
The assessment will evaluate the existing service delivery arrangements including the organizational
structure, systems, procedures and equipment. Operator will be responsible for preparing the
Comprehensive Assessment Report (CAR), which will in detail document the outputs of the
Comprehensive Assessment undertaken. Comprehensive Assessment Report (CAR) will form the
basis for the Service Improvement Plan (SIP) to be prepared and approved before the end of the Start
Up Period, and implemented during the Transition Period. The Comprehensive Assessment will
include, but not be limited to, the following activities:
a. General
 The Operator will establish contact with all relevant stakeholders, and become familiar with the
water supply systems in the Service Area, and the applicable standards and guidelines for water
supply, and with current on-going works in the Service Area.
 Satisfy themselves as to the nature and scope of work and the prevailing site conditions.
 Liaise with the Authority, the local traffic police and other government agencies regarding
Applicable Laws and regulations in order to undertake studies and other activities under the
Contract.
b. Familiarization with on-going Activities and Arrangements
 The Operator will familiarize itself with and understand the relevant institutional arrangements
and Applicable Laws to determine in detail which roles the Authority, as the asset holding and
Page 145 of 432

operating entity, plays in the following: (i) sanction of water connections, (ii) installation of water
connections, and (iii) disconnections and reconnections.
 The Operator will review all available reports commissioned during project preparation.
 The Operator will review the Detailed Project Report for the project, Study on NRW assessment,
Study on energy efficiency for bulk water production, household consumer survey etc.
 The Operator will identify any changes that have taken place in the water supply system in the
Service Area since those reports were prepared as a result of on-going or recently completed
activities by the Authority / other Parties.
 The Operator will familiarize themselves with any other recent, on-going or programmed
development activities including but not limited to AMRUT, Smart Cities, and other programs
being implemented by the Authority and GoHP as the case may be.
c. Assessment of Water Quality
 The Service Area is supplied with water sourced from a combination of surface water sources.
The Operator will collect the required number of samples at the house service connections.
Operator will also collect the required number of samples from a representative number of
locations around the distribution network including but not limited to all UGRs, OHSR, and
storage reservoirs.
 The Operator will analyze the water supply samples collected for all the physical, chemical and
bacteriological characteristics in a recognized/accredited lab as approved by the Authority/
GoHP. The results of the water quality analysis will be evaluated by the Operator for determining
whether any emergency measures are required such as / rehabilitation of the water treatment
plant or closure of a water source due to Fluoride, Nitrates, Arsenic or any other harmful physical
/ chemical constituents or ensuring robust disinfection in case of bacteriological contamination
as the case may be. The results of such tests will be notified to the Authority on the same day of
receipt of the results.
d. Assessment of Existing Water Supply Assets
Operator will carry out a detailed assessment of reservoirs, pumping stations, piped distribution
network.
 Assessment of water service reservoirs: The Operator will undertake a detailed assessment
of the structural condition, capacity and hydraulic performance of the existing service reservoirs /
storages. This will allow the Operator to identify those that could be used in a Continuous 24x7
Pressurized Water Supply system, what repairs or rehabilitation is needed, what capacity
expansions are required, and where new reservoirs / storages will need to be constructed (if
any). Efforts will be made to ensure optimum use of the available storage capacity and land area
so as to minimize or avoid requirement of additional land acquisition.
 Water supply networks: The Operator will undertake a study of the condition of the existing
water transmission and water distribution network within and outside the Service Area through
Flow and Pressure Measurement (FPM) and review of historical repairs data if available and
through detailed interactions with the Authority in order to assess the strength and capacity of
the networks for provision of Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply services to the
Customers.
The Operator will undertake studies to determine the hydraulic capacity of the existing water
distribution networks so as to assess the hydraulic carrying capacity for ensuring Continuous
Page 146 of 432

24x7 Pressurized Water Supply, determine the residual life of the networks, and assess what
strengthening and extensions are needed to meet the Performance Standards.
The hydraulic capacity assessment will require at least the following:
o From the findings of the Customer survey the Operator will develop a robust city level
demand model both establishing the current water account and the projected annual
demand growth duly taking into consideration the differential and dynamic zonal
growth patterns, progressive reduction in water losses and the price elasticity of water
consumption pattern.
o The Operator will develop a hydraulic network model (HNM) which includes all
pipelines down to 63mm diameter based on the available information and by
undertaking site investigations as required. The HNM will be in two parts the first part
being the strategic mains model (SMM) and the second being the all mains model
(AMM). The HNM will be built on a digital elevation model (DEM) of the city depicting
1m elevation contours. The data pertaining to reservoirs, pipes, valves and demand
allocations will be obtained through field study and captured on the network model.
AutoCAD or equivalent will be the drawing software and WATERGEMS or equivalent
will be the modeling software for building the network model.
The Operator will prepare a Water Balance, following the IWA Methodology, for the hydraulically
separable areas, and for the system as a whole.
Taken together these tasks will allow the Operator to develop a plan for rehabilitation,
replacement, reinforcement and expansion of the water distribution networks as part of the SIP
and in order to meet the Performance Standards.
The Operator will undertake a structured condition assessment of the pipe network and house
connections using the methodology presented in Schedule 16. The design of the condition
assessment will be completed during the Start Up period so that its implementation can be
initiated at the start of the Transition Period.
 Assessment of Service Delivery Arrangements: The Operator will undertake an assessment
of the current service delivery arrangements in the Service Area including, but not limited to:
o Organizational structure and workforce numbers and capacity;

o O&M practices in the Service Area;
o Water quality compliance mechanisms;
o Computer systems, equipment and operating procedures;
o Customer service arrangements;
o Commercial practices including billing and collections;
o Financial management practices;
o Assessment of costs/revenues of existing service delivery.
The Operator will collect and record the data on historical (at least for three continuous years in
the immediate past from the Effective Date) financial performance of revenues and the existing
operations, maintenance and service delivery costs with sufficient detail covering the broad
headings of energy, staffing, repairs, routine maintenance, capital expansion, administration,
Page 147 of 432

outsourced contract services and others. The revenues and costs will be analyzed and the
baseline cost trend established for the prevailing intermittent water supply regime.
 Assessment of Baseline: The Operator will assess, by distinct hydraulic areas, the existing
intermittent water supply situation including timing (during day), quantity, quality, availability
(hours) and pressure of water delivery to Customers. The Operator will also assess, by distinct
hydraulic areas including flows, quality, and quantity. The assessment will be based on
observation, historic operating procedures, and inputs from consumers resident in the areas.
The assessment will highlight seasonal variations as appropriate.
The Operator will, from the investigations and the historical performance data, establish the
baseline service level benchmarks with respect to water supply for both a) the Government of
India Service Level Benchmark program and b) the Performance Standards of this contract.
 Comprehensive Assessment Report: The Operator will prepare a Comprehensive
Assessment Report describing the results of these various assessments. The report will include
a summary section not exceeding one hundred pages (100) supported by annexes for each of
the individual assessment areas.
1.3 Service Improvement Plan (SIP)

1.3.1 Based on the findings from the Comprehensive Assessment, the Operator will prepare the
Service Improvement Plan (SIP) for the activities to be carried out during the Transition Phase
in accordance with Applicable Laws and Good Industry Practice.
1.3.2 The objectives of the activities presented in the Service Improvement Plan (SIP) include but are
not limited to the following:
(a) To ensure safe, efficient, Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply services to the
all Customers in the Service Area to meet their need for water supply service
provisions;
(b) To ensure last mile connectivity to each (each domestic property) and each non-
domestic property with appropriate water supply connection;
(c) To ensure development of hydraulically efficient water supply distribution network;
(d) To ensure availability of sufficient volume quantity of treated water, taking into account
the permissible levels of losses in treatment, transmission and distribution;
(e) To ensure optimization of performance of existing pumping machinery for energy
consumption in the transmission and distribution of water;
(f) To ensure an effective program of non-revenue water control including active leakage
control by applying continuous and vigilant monitoring, leak detection and good quality
and long lasting leak repair techniques;
(g) To ensure efficient and effective commercial and Customer services in management of
the water utility for providing un-interrupted water supply to the Customers, duly
redressing and resolving complaints and problems from existing Customers and
providing network connectivity to new Customers and ensuring timely expansion of
networks and system capacities;
(h) To ensure establishment of robust and proven IT systems like Integrated Management
Information System (IMIS) and processes including standard operating procedures for
Page 148 of 432

ensuring sustainable water services capable of forward planning, timely decision

making, attending to emergencies and ensuring cost recovery;
(i) To establish performance monitoring systems so as to enable a) monitoring of
Performance Standards as per Schedule 5 and b) overall collection and disclosure of
data related to water supply services in the Service Area.
1.3.3 The SIP will include specific proposals of the Operator on the equipment, spares, works
contracts for repair activities, leakage monitoring systems and procedures.
1.3.4 Where interventions proposed in the SIP are not part of the Project or are part of the Project but
require substantial modification, or not in conformity with the general guidelines in the CPHEEO
Manual, the Operator will provide in the SIP sufficient explanation and justification as to how
implementing such interventions would benefit the Authority in terms of, for example, the costs,
speed, inconvenience to Customers, or sustainability of the Performance Standards.
1.3.5 In preparing the SIP, the following design horizons will be adopted for any investments in
physical infrastructure required in the Service Area to meet the Performance Standards. No
additional investment is expected beyond the Transition Period except for investments to meet
network growth beyond that included in the SIP, and for routine replacement of plant,
equipment, and other systems at the end of their design life.
(a) Storage Reservoirs - 2050

(b) Water Distribution Systems – 2050
1.3.6 All proposed interventions or works, installation and workmanship will confirm to relevant
standards provided by Bureau of Indian Standards, and in the absence of which to the relevant
standards of International Standards Organization and to the guidelines in the CPHEEO
Manual.
1.3.7 In preparing the SIP, the Operator shall adopt the following standards for estimating cost of
road restoration on completion of laying of pipes and refilling of the trench.
Specification for restoration of Bituminous (Asphalt) Roads
(a) Wet mix macadam – 150 mm thick

(b) Primer coat - 0.6 kg per sq meter
(c) Tack Coat – 0.2 kg per sq meter.
(d) Bituminous macadam – 50 mm thick
(e) Open graded pre mix carpet – 20 mm thick
Specification for restoration of Concrete Roads
(a) Wet mix macadam – 150 mm thick.

(b) Sub base mix M 5 grade concrete – 100 mm thick
(c) Unreinforced Pavement Quality Concrete (PQC) M20/M30 – 100 mm thick
Specification for restoration of Macadam Road
(a) Wet mix macadam – 150 mm thick.
Page 149 of 432

1.3.8 The elements constituting the Service Improvement Plan (SIP) should include, but not be
limited to
(a) Infrastructure Improvement Plan (IIP)
(b) Transition Handover Plan (THP)
(c) Service Delivery Improvement Plan
(d) Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
(e) Operation and Maintenance Plan (O&M Plan)
(f) Customer Service Arrangements including Connection Policy
(g) Investment Plan
(h) Implementation Schedule
(i) Monitoring and Evaluation Plan (M&E Plan)
(j) Safeguards Plan
(k) Risks and Risk Mitigation Plan
(l) Land Requirements
(m) Capacity Building Plan
(n) Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP)
Activities to be undertaken under these are detailed in the sections below.
1.4 Infrastructure Improvement Plan (IIP)

1.4.1 The Operator will prepare an Infrastructure Improvement Plan (the “Infrastructure Improvement
Plan”) detailing the capital works (which would be undertaking during the Transition Period)
required to deliver the Performance Standards set out in Schedule 5.
1.4.2 As a part of IIP, the Operator will identify the relevant specifications, standards on all materials,
equipment and goods proposed to be used in IIP. The IIP will also include a plan for
establishing the quality of all types of equipment, machinery materials, pipes, fittings etc. to be
used, as well as setting workmanship protocols and standards.
1.4.3 The IIP will be financed out of the Capex Envelope. In preparing the IIP, the Operator should
recognize and allocate a portion of funds in the Capex Envelope towards capital maintenance
and expansion during the Sustaining Period. This should be based on the existing situation,
condition and availability of the WSS assets, asset stock and their planned O&M arrangements
during the Transition / Sustaining Period, so as to ensure that the Performance Standards will
continue to be met until the End of Term.
1.4.4 Activities to be undertaken by the Operator with respect to IIP for water supply is detailed
below:
(a) Identification of District Metered Areas (DMAs)
The Operator will, based on the results of the Hydraulic Network Modelling (HNM), review the
present distribution zones and identify boundaries for setting up hydraulically isolated district
metered areas (“DMA”s) within each Hydraulic Zone in the Service Area. Each DMA will
Page 150 of 432

preferably have one inflow point and be isolated by installing boundary isolation valves /
chambers. The inflow will be fitted with a pressure reducing valve and an electro-magnetic bulk
flow meter of reputable brand synchronized with a sufficient capacity data logger with the facility
to record, store, monitor and analyze the consumption and pressure pattern in the respective
DMA. The Operator will identify and propose at least five Critical Measurement Points (“CMP”)
in each DMA for continuous logging of pressure, and the CMPs will be such that atleast one
point will be at the inlet of DMA, atleast one point at the highest elevation within the DMA
boundary and atleast one point will be the farthest point from the DMA inlet. The Operator will
propose necessary actions/tasks for periodical calibration of the flow and pressure monitoring
equipment and capture the data generated by the respective equipment, analyze and monitor
the consumption and level of losses in the DMAs and take remedial actions as necessary to
meet the Performance Standards.
It is envisaged that, the DMA chambers will be standardized in size and type of equipment to be
housed inside (including flow control valve, pressure reducing valve flow meter and pressure
transducer and the data loggers) for speed and efficiency of construction.
(b) Migration Plan from Intermittent to Continuous Water Supply
In accordance with Article 12, the Operator will present their overall strategy for transforming the
existing intermittent water supply to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply outlining the
approach to infrastructure improvements, improving service delivery arrangements, compliance
with social and environmental safeguards and communications. In this respect the Operator, to
the extent possible, should sequence DMA chamber construction in order to bring as many
DMAs to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply as early as possible. The migration plan
should meet or exceed the Milestones and Performance Standards set out in Schedule 5.
The Operator will also set out a DMA-based plan to improve the hours of supply and pressure in
till the DMAs are converted to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply. The Operator will
propose DMAs based targets for increased hours of supply and pressure which will form part of
Performance Standards in accordance with Schedule 5.
(c) Rehabilitation of Water Supply Feeder Networks
Using the hydraulic model and simulating both present and future conditions, the Operator will
review the capacity of the feeder networks required from a continuous water service perspective
and propose network strengthening measures in a cost effective manner.
An essential objective of the treated water feeder main improvements will be to ensure
availability of sufficient supply volume in all neighborhoods of the Service Area so as to ensure
equity and rapid service improvements across the Service Area pending conversion to
Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply.
The Operator will identify existing feeders that are in good operational condition and could be
utilized to enable the Operator to meet the Performance Standards. Deteriorated feeders will be
identified and replaced or rehabilitated in a cost effective manner. The Operator will assess
options for any new feeder mains to serve existing or new storage reservoirs and propose the
optimum solution.
(d) Optimizing Service Storage Reservoirs
The proposals from Operator for ensuring adequate service storage capacity for the Service
Area will use existing reservoirs to the extent possible with abandonment only in the event that
a reservoir is structurally unsafe. It is expected that, the Operator will aligned DMAs to the
Page 151 of 432

existing service reservoirs in the Service Area. A key factor to be taken into account is the
highly restrictive availability of land for installation of new reservoirs and hence the proposals
should focus on expanding the utilizable storage through improved hydraulics and re-assigned
demand patterns or DMAs. The rehabilitation works for the existing service reservoirs may be
planned in the first year of the Transition Period.
(e) Rehabilitation and Expansion of Water Supply Distribution Networks
The Operator should propose a plan for new networks to currently underserved areas. For
currently served areas, the Operator should propose a plan for the optimal mix of rehabilitation,
repair, and replacement of the existing distribution network. In the latter case, the Operator
should optimize capital and operational solutions to develop the most cost effective solutions
and using the existing assets to the maximum extent possible.
This will include provision of new infrastructure in the area which are not provided with network
access. This will also have a continuous program of rehabilitation, repair and replacement of
existing networks. This exercise will be undertaken so as to ensure that by the end of the
Transition Period, sufficient network capacity and levels of water losses is achieved to meet the
desired Performance Standards.
The proposed network improvements will be on the basis of a carefully planned progressive
DMA-wise transformation to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply taking into account
possible increased leakage in the short term and the need to minimize supply deterioration in
other DMAs serviced with intermittent water supply.
In all network improvements or expansions, or replacement or construction of new house
connections/ non-domestic connection, the Operator will also plan for temporary road re-
instatement pending permanent road re-instatement.
The improved network will exhibit increased hydraulic carrying capacity to meet the demand at
the required design horizon and will deliver water at a minimum pressure of seven (7) meters
measured at the Critical Measurement Points (CMP) during peak hour flow conditions in
accordance with the Performance Standards. The network will be fitted with isolation valves
such that any intervention for maintenance such as extensions, connections, and leak repair will
not affect more than one hundred (100) Customer connections.
The Operator will include in their rehabilitation and expansion plan for replacing house
connections/ non-domestic connections and meters as needed, installing Customer meters in
non-metered connections, and installing new connections with meters to unconnected
households / properties and those with illegal connections. By the end of the Transition Period,
all properties will have domestic connections or relevant non-domestic connection with
individual meters financed out of the Capex Envelope.
(f) Non-Revenue Water Control
The Operator will propose a detailed program of activities for effective reduction and long term
control of Non-Revenue Water (NRW) in the entire water supply chain from bulk water source to
Customers. This will include detailed system pressure and flow control & monitoring,
preparation of water balances, appropriate SCADA systems, pressure management, and active
leakage control methods.
The network and service pipe repair, rehabilitation and replacement program covering
transmission, feeder and distribution networks will be based on an effective NRW monitoring
Page 152 of 432

activity and active leakage control. Timely and high quality leak repair will be supplemented by
network and service pipe replacement as needed.
(g) Laboratories
The Operator will conceptualize and design a comprehensive NABL accredited Laboratories.
The objective of Laboratories is to test water samples at different consumer points in the
Service Area as per CPHEEO Guidelines.
The Operator will develop a detailed plan of implementation of Laboratories including identifying
the requirement for tools and equipment, and processes and timelines for implementation.
The construction of Laboratories shall be completed and by the end of 6 months from TCD, the
Operator shall ensure that the Laboratories are operational. Laboratories will be financed out of
the Capex Envelope.
(h) Miscellaneous Items
In addition to identifying and costing the capital works required during the Transition Period, in
accordance with the Performance Standards set out in Schedule 5, the Infrastructure
Improvement Plan (IIP) will include all Major Maintenance items and minor repairs, and required
consumables (chemicals, fuel, routine maintenance materials), during the Transition Period.
1.5 Transition Handover Plan (THP): During the Start Up Period, the Operator will prepare a Transition
Handover Plan detailing protocol for phase wise handover of operations and maintenance of Project
Facilities during the Transition Period from the Authority to the Operator in accordance with the Article
5. The Operator will prepare the THP in line with an indicative schedule provided in Schedule 28. The
phasing of Progressive Handover of Hydraulic Zones will be agreed to between the Parties in the
THP. THP will also include details of expected Progressive Handover Dates of each Hydraulic Zones.
On Progressive Handover Dates, the Operator will take over respective Hydraulic Zones for
refurbishment, repair and O&M. Thereafter the Operator will be responsible for designing,
constructing, rehabilitating, operating and maintaining Project Facilities in the Hydraulic Zones which
are handed over to the Operator. In the Transition Handover Plan, the Operator is expected to take
handover of all Hydraulic Zones identified in the Service Area between the Transition Commencement
Date (TCD) and Sustaining Period Commencement Date (SPCD).
a) The Transition Handover Plan will identify all existing contracts related to the provision of
water supply services in the Service Area and clarify whether they are to be continued or
terminated and on what terms.
b) The Transition Handover Plan will be reviewed by the Authority and other relevant parties
and would be adjusted as needed. The Transition Handover Plan will be agreed by all
Parties, or such earlier date as mutually agreed between the Parties.
c) The Transition Handover Plan will be implemented jointly by the Operator and the Authority
(whether directly or by procuring the necessary support). In the event that any Party does
not follow the Transition Handover Plan then representation should be made in writing by
the other parties to the Authority and Authority will seek to propose a solution to the Parties.
1.6 Service Delivery Improvement Plans
1.6.1 The Operator will prepare a service delivery improvement plan (the “Service Delivery
Improvement Plan”) which will detail the institutional and operational strategy to deliver
continuous water supply and the investments needed to support that strategy including at least
the following components:
Page 153 of 432

(a) Manpower deployment to Operator

The Operator may seek support of staff from the Authority for implementation of the Project.
The Operator may provide the list of staff along with the designation to be hired by the
Operator. The Authority will consult the staff mentioned in the list and decide on deputation of
staff with the Operator. It is clarified that the employment of the staff will remain with the
Authority while the staff is deputed with the Operator. The Operator will reimburse the Authority
for utilization of such staff or the Authority may deduct the same from the Operator Payments. It
is clarified that the Operator is not obligated to hire any staff from the Authority.
(b) Tools and Equipment Plan
The Operator will prepare a plan outlining all the tools and equipment required during the
Transition Period and Sustaining Period to support the normal functioning of management,
operations and maintenance of the water supply system in the Service Area. The tools and
equipment plan is likely to include, but not be limited to:
o Motorized transport;
o Workshop equipment, including meter test bed if required;
o Mobile maintenance equipment;
o Meter reading equipment; and
o Specialist operational equipment such as electronic leak detection listening sticks, leak
noise correlators, pigs for pipe swabbing, sonde for leak detection in large pipelines,
potable flow and pressure measurement instruments, hot-tapping tools, leak repair
kits, mobile water quality analysis kits, standard safety apparatus including personal
protective equipment etc.
1.7 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP): For the term Standard Operating Procedures will
constitutes a suite of activities as outlined below:
1.7.1 Standard Operating Procedures: The Operator will prepare a set of Standard Operating
Procedures (SOPs) for the management and operation of the water supply system in the
Service Area.
1.7.2 Policies and Procedures: The Operator will develop various policies and procedures for
effective and efficient service delivery which will include but not be limited to, the following:
o Quality Assurance Plan (QAP);
o Emergency Response Plan (ERP);
o Customer Management and Communications Plan;
o Energy optimization program;
o Environmental Management Plan, including health and safety;
o Connections policy for all types of connections including treatment of illegal
connections;
o Network expansion and replacement policy;
o Stores and inventory management policy;
o Human resource management and training policy.
Page 154 of 432

1.7.3 Water Quality Surveillance Program: The Operator will develop a comprehensive Water
Quality monitoring and surveillance program covering storage, distribution systems. The
program will be based on statutory requirements if any as per the Applicable Law and will
comprise of following minimum sampling and testing requirements. The program should be
aligned to Water Quality Standards.
1.8 Operations and Maintenance Plan (O&M Plan)
1.8.1 The Operator will prepare an annual operation and maintenance plan for the Project Facilities
(the “O&M Plan”) with sufficient detail of all critical and routine operating tasks at each of water
supply asset with the objective of achieving the Performance Standards. To this effect, the
Operator will be required to propose with sufficient justification any adjustment to the
Performance Standards found necessary during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period.
1.8.2 The O&M Plan will comprise the operating and maintenance strategy for improving the
operating efficiency, methodology, equipment deployment plan, environmental management
measures, responsibilities matrix for operations, monitoring and evaluation, emergency
response, related processes, systems, protocols, procedures, life cycle maintenance, routine
maintenance and reactive maintenance including detailed costs for each activity under O&M
Plan etc.
1.8.3 The O&M Plan will have a separate plan for non-commissioned areas of a Hydraulic Zone and
Commissioned DMAs,.
1.8.4 O&M Plan will present in details the envisaged Major Maintenance activities and the Minor
Maintenance activities for the Project Facilities for the Transition Period and Sustaining Period.
1.8.5 O&M Plan will present in detail the monitoring protocol for monitoring water quality. This
protocol will cover the whole process from designing the sampling regime, taking samples,
testing samples, and reporting samples. The O&M Plan will also present the on-line water
quality reporting system.
1.9 Customer Service arrangements
1.9.1 Customer Service Centres (CSC): The Operator will design, and prepare a plan for setting up
of Customer Service Centers (“CSC”) of at least one CSC for every 10,000 connections and
part thereof including one central control center to facilitate receiving and resolving Customer
requests, complaints, and grievances in the areas of new connections, service deficiencies,
resolution of billing disputes, inappropriate actions by staff, etc. While preparing a plan for
setting up CSCs, the Operator will take into consideration the existing Customer grievance
redressal mechanisms and propose an optimal solution.
The plan should address mechanisms to receive Customer complaints during peak and non-
peak hours. The plan should have a facility to receive Customer complaints and grievances
through telephone, fax, text message, email and any other reasonable electronic means.
The Operator should design a capacity building program every year (or earlier if required) to
train staff at the CSCs to handle and address Customer complaints in an efficient and effective
manner.
1.9.2 Communications and Stakeholders Intermediation Strategy (CSIS): The Operator shall be
aware of the Communications and Stakeholders Intermediation Strategy (CSIS) that has been
designed to inform the general public, commerce, industry, the municipal administration and
other stakeholders about the content, rationale, and objectives of the project. The Operator will
be expected to co-operate with Government and the Authority in the implementation of the
Page 155 of 432

CSIS to foster ownership of the Project by the local stakeholders and encourage their support
for the work. The Operator shall disseminate to the Customers within each Hydraulic Zone, the
communication materials prepared under CSIS through their inclusion with water bills` and their
availability at the Customer Service Centres established.
1.9.3 Customer Connections: The Operator will prepare a detailed programme to support the
Authority to design its new connection policy (“Connection Policy”) for undertaking sanction and
installation of water supply connections. The Connection Policy will include but not be limited to:
(a) ensuring the policy principle of universal access that assures provision of water
connections to all categories of Customers;
(b) provision of individual or shared metered connections irrespective of possession of
legal tenure for the property;
(c) installation of new water connection .
(d) provision of Customer meter to unmetered connections and rehabilitation of existing
connections, where required, by replacing the existing connections with better and
higher standard of pipe material, good network connecting practice, installation of right
size ferrules/ saddles, installation of a consumption measurement meter, accessories
and meter chamber at the nearest point inside the Customer property boundary;
(e) simplified procedures for receipt, processing, sanction and installation of new
connections to the new Customers;
(f) simplified procedures for change of name, splitting of connections at times of division
of properties etc.;
(g) template Customer Service Agreement stipulating the obligations of service provision
standards especially regarding Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply assured by
the Authority and responsibilities of Customers on receipt of services, particularly
regarding safety of connection and meter, access to meter reader or any authorized
representative of Authority to verify the consumption, timely payment of bills, use of
water for the intended purpose;
(h) proposal of necessary revisions to existing water and sanitation byelaws or in the
absence, preparation of new water and sanitation byelaws to enable implementation of
the proposed Connection Policy, which will need to be instituted by the Authority
before the Transition Commencement Date.
1.9.4 Provisions making it mandatory for the Customer installing at its own cost the following optional
improvements:
(a) Service pipe after the Customer meter connected to a faucet (tap) at a convenient
point;
(b) A ball-cock valve on an existing ground storage tank after the meter for prevention of
overflow or back flow.
1.9.5 Bulk Water Supply Connections: In the case of Bulk Water Supply (Treated or Raw Water)
with connections of 25mm diameter or higher (such as commercial, hotel, construction,
institutional, residential apartments/housing societies and industries within the Service Area),
the Operator will propose installation of a suitably sized, accurate consumption meter. The
Operator as part of the revision of water and sanitation byelaws should examine and propose
necessary amendments for installation of individual Customer meters for all new apartment or
Page 156 of 432

housing complexes to facilitate any future legal requirements of billing individual apartment as a
separate connection.
1.9.6 Illegal Connections: The Operator, based on the findings from the Customer Survey, and in
accordance to the proposed Connections Policy, will lay out a plan for identification of illegal or
un-authorized connections. The Operator will identify and detail out necessary steps to be taken
by the Authority to regularize of such illegal connections.
1.9.7 Commercial practices including billing: The Operator will develop procedures consistent
with the proposed Connection Policy for:
(a) (i) sanctioning new water supply connections (ii) change of ownership for existing
connections (iii) division of existing connections consequent to division of property, (iv)
disconnections in case of defaulting Customers and (v) reconnections and (vi) dealing
with the un-authorized or illegal connections;
(b) preparing, issuing, and collecting a bill for water service for every Customer, and
dealing with under-payment or non-payment; including reporting all outstanding
accounts to the Authority, once in every month unless otherwise agreed to with the
Authority;
(c) the issuance of dummy volumetric bills for a period of three (3) months after
conversion to volumetric billing system to allow consumers to understand the
implications of volumetric charging and to undertake improvements to internal
plumbing for prevention of leakage or overflows or wastage;
(d) (i) meter reading procedures and arrangements, (ii) meter reader control (iii) efficient
and accurate meter reading practices (iii) respond to reports of malfunctioning meters
from Customers (iv) testing and calibrating meters as required (v) replacing old,
malfunctioning or low accuracy meters (vi) replacing all meters older than ten (10)
years and of metrological class lower than Class B; and (iv) how water consumption is
estimated for un-metered Customers.
The Operator will prepare a plan to set up a well-functioning water meter workshop for testing
and calibrating water meters, fully accredited if possible and train staff in meter testing &
calibration, selection, replacement and repair of domestic and commercial water meters.
The Operator will develop a plan to install a water meter at every stand-post or other service
connection supplying water public and municipal buildings or property directly connected to the
public network or fed from a storage tank filled from the public network and to replace all
faucets on stand-posts with self-closing taps.
The Operator will develop standard designs for installing approved water meters in a lockable
box on the connection pipe to every connected property at the external side of the wall of the
main building (within the compound, if a compound wall exists, or at a safe and convenient
location if there is no compound wall) where the connection enters the building.
1.10 Investment Plan
1.10.1 The Operator will estimate the cost of procuring and implementing SIP. The Operator will
prepare a detailed investment plan for the Transition Period (the “Investment Plan”). This will be
based on detailed bottom up cost estimation of each component under SIP with summary
information provided by asset category and by timing period.
Page 157 of 432

1.11 Communication Activities by Operator

1.11.1 The Operator will participate in customer outreach during the entire contract period. The first set
of activities will be a campaign for informing the Customers that they will be carrying out the
initial Customer Survey and encourage customers for getting individual water supply connection
1.11.2 The Operator will coordinate with the Authority and undertake implementation of the CAP
1.11.3 The Operator will undertake Stakeholder Outreach. The Operator in consultation with the
Authority will, notify the communities and Customers in each Hydraulic Zone well in advance
regarding the plans and timelines of conversion to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply
zone in accordance with the transition schedule in the Agreed THP. The stakeholder outreach
would also include detailing the procedures that will be followed and actions that will need to be
taken by the consumers/ households, billing related issues, type of supported / guidance
available from the Operator.
1.11.4 The Operator will participate in the major communication and outreach activities events
organized by the Authority to introduce themselves to provide / supplement inputs related to the
Project.
1.11.5 The Operator in consultation with the Authority will, provide clear information to all Customers
on connection policy for existing connection holders, new connections, regularization of illegal
connection, collection of arrears, and settlement of disputes.
1.11.6 The Operator in consultation with the Authority will, inform the Customer that dummy bills will
be issued in the beginning of Transition Period to test the billing system and to make
Customers aware of the new procedures, payment facilities and Customer complaint and
information mechanisms.
1.11.7 The Operator in consultation with the Authority will, provide information on the importance of
safe storage and handling of water after the conversion to Continuous Water Supply and on the
opportunities for householders to manage their demand for water.
1.11.8 The Operator in consultation with the Authority will, provide advance warning to Customers of
planned maintenance that will affect such Customers.
1.11.9 The Operator will ensure that Operator employees and all vehicles used during communication
outreach carry the Authority’s logo. All communications sent out by the Operator must have
prior approval from the Authority and should be sent out on behalf of the Authority.
1.11.10 The Operator should explain that their role is to professionalize services for improvement of
water supply service and not to privatize.
1.11.11 The Operator will coordinate with the Authority to undertake Stakeholder Outreach regarding
notification and sensitization of Customers to the transition to Continuous Pressurized Water
Supply and agree a timeline for notification to Customers in Hydraulic Zones in accordance with
the transition schedule in the Agreed THP.
1.12 Implementation Schedule
1.12.1 The Operator will prepare a detailed project management program showing the all activities to
be undertaken during the Transition Period including start and end dates and dependencies
between the activities. The critical path items will be clearly identified.
Page 158 of 432

1.12.2 Where the implementation plan requires action to be taken by the Authority, these activities will
be highlighted and separately identified with a clear description of the activity, the projected
start date, and the time allowed for the Authority to undertake said activity.
1.12.3 The Operator, based on the implementation schedule, the investment plan, the communication
plan, the Performance Standards, the Milestones, and any other relevant material, will prepare
a detailed plan for monitoring and reporting the implementation of the SIP.
1.13 Monitoring and Evaluation Plan (M&E Plan)
1.13.1 The Operator will develop detailed M&E Plan capturing various performance indicators of the
entire system to reflect DMA / ward wise service delivery, system efficiency, operational
efficiency, financial efficiency, institutional efficiency, consumer focus etc. An indicative list of
these indicators is given in the Schedule 21.
1.13.2 As a part of M&E Plan, the Operator will detail a methodology for measurement of these
performance indicators. The Operator will detail the method for recording of data, method of
compilation, reporting formats, method for cross verification and frequency of reporting.
1.13.3 The Operator will use IMIS developed to monitor and evaluate these indicators. Till the time
IMIS is being developed, the Operator detail the interim arrangements for measurement of
performance and reporting, including manual record keeping.
1.14 Safeguards Plan
1.14.1 The Operator will explain how the project’s safeguards requirements as required by Schedule 9
will be incorporated into the different stages of the project activities, how they will be monitored,
and what information will be reported as part of the monitoring plan.
1.15 Risks and Risk Mitigation
1.15.1 In preparing the SIP, the Operator will take into account the quality and availability of data on
system condition and performance, on Customer numbers and types, on other elements. The
Operator will include in the SIP, an assessment of the key risks in the SIP and their proposed
mitigation measures.
1.16 Land Requirements
1.16.1 The Operator will produce a list of any additional land that will be required to allow
implementation of the SIP. The status of ownership of such land will be recorded as will any
implications for its acquisition, including the application of the Project’s safeguards / Social
Management Framework (SMF) requirements.
1.17 Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP)
1.17.1 The Operator will undertake Environmental and Social Assessment and develop Environmental
and Social Management Plans for the Service Improvement Plan proposed by the Operator in
line with the Environmental Code of Practice.
1.17.2 The Operator will prepare an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) in accordance with
Schedule 14.
1.18 Integrated Management Information System (IMIS)
1.18.1 The Operator will conceptualize, design and develop a comprehensive Integrated Management
Information System (IMIS). At first, the Operator will develop Functional Specification
Requirement and System Specification Requirements for the IMIS for the consideration and
Page 159 of 432

approval of the Authority. The implementation and the launch of IMIS shall be undertaken
during the Start Up Period.
1.18.2 The objective of the IMIS is to compile and analyse data/ information from the entire WSS
system in the Service Area with respect to all matters including but not limited to:
(a) Geographical Information System (GIS) comprising of all WSS assets in the Service
Area from intake structures till Customer connection point
(b) Asset registers from the perspective of maintaining a prudent GIS based or
computerized maintenance management system (CMMS) linked to financial and
inventory systems
(c) Computerized Maintenance Management System
(d) Migration of existing Customer and billing/ collection software information .
(e) Water resource monitoring
(f) Water quality monitoring and surveillance system
(g) Continuous data logging of water quality, flow and pressure at all reservoirs / DMAs
(h) Consumption of energy, chemicals and other consumables
(i) Billing software and collection software
(j) Customer services, including data bases relating to complaints and questions,
response times and resolution
(k) Customer database to have GIS mapping of all Customer connections (water
connections) in the Service Area
(l) Financial management including accounting systems
(m) Stores and Inventory Management
(n) Human resources management system
(o) Operational performance information and monitoring systems
(p) Procurement processes including third-party contracts
(q) Monitoring various performance indicators and service levels of Bulk Water Supplier –
contracted out separately by the Authority
1.18.3 The Operator will develop a detailed program of implementation of IMIS including identifying the
external resources required, tools and equipment, procurement plan and processes and
timelines for implementation.
1.18.4 The Operator will detail a methodology for measurement of performance as per the
Performance Standards in Schedule 5. The Operator will detail the method for recording of
data, method of compilation, reporting formats, method for cross verification and frequency of
reporting.
1.18.5 It is clarified that the ownership of the IMIS including but not limited to the data/ information
therein, software, hardware etc. shall be with the Authority throughout the Project Period and
beyond. The Operator shall transfer the source code and other relevant documents requested
by the Authority, to the Authority on or before the Expiry Date.
Page 160 of 432

Page 161 of 432

SCHEDULE 4B: OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS DURING TRANSITION PERIOD
1.1 Implementation of the approved Detailed Design and Drawings

1.1.1 During the Transition Period, the Operator will implement the Agreed SIP in accordance to
Article 12, Good Industry Practice and reasonable care will be taken by the Operator to
minimize service interruptions, traffic disruptions and ensure good and timely communications
with Customers in the Service Area. All the works and interventions proposed as part of the SIP
will be in conformity with the relevant industry standards and the Environmental Code of
Practice.
1.1.1 For implementation of requisite works identified in IIP, the Operator will be responsible for
designing, constructing, executing and making such assets operational. The Operator shall
procure at its own cost and expense and maintain in a time bound manner any inventory of
materials that may be required for implementation of IIP.
1.1.2 The Operator will be continue to operate and maintain IMIS and keep it operational.
1.1.3 The Operator will be responsible for the construction, works and services as per SIP and in
accordance with Good Industry Practice and relevant industry standards and as per the
provisions of the this Agreement.
1.1.4 The Operator will be responsible for the testing, and quality assurance necessary for the
performance of the works and services. The Operator will ensure that all equipment, machinery,
pipes, fittings, materials, services and supplies used in the works contracts are in accordance
with the terms of this Agreement, applicable standard specifications as well as the applicable
national standards.
1.1.5 The Operator will be responsible for the performance and quality of services provided by
service contractors.
1.1.6 On completion of the capital works, the Operator will ensure that all GIS and asset registers are
updated to capture the results of the capital works and will compile As-Built Drawings within the
appropriate system.
1.1.7 The Operator will implement the Standard Operating Procedures and Policy in accordance with
Good Industry Practice and the Standard Operating Procedures duly identifying gaps if any for
further improvement of service delivery.
1.1.8 Road Restoration: The Operator is responsible for carrying out road restoration on completion
of laying of pipes and refilling of the trench.
Specification for restoration of Bituminous (Asphalt) Roads
a) Wet mix macadam – 150 mm thick
b) Primer coat - 0.6 kg per sqmetre
c) Tack Coat – 0.2 kg per sq meter.
d) Bituminous macadam – 50 mm thick
e) Open graded pre mix carpet – 20 mm thick
Specification for restoration of Concrete Roads
a) Wet mix macadam – 150 mm thick
Page 162 of 432

b) Sub base mix M 5 grade concrete – 100 mm thick

c) Unreinforced Pavement Quality Concrete pavement mix grade M20/M30 – 100 mm thick
Specification for restoration of Macadam Road
a) Wet mix macadam – 150 mm thick.
1.2 Operation and Maintenance of the Existing Project Facilities

1.2.1 During the Transition Period, the Operator shall operate and maintain the Project Facilities in
accordance with this Agreement in compliance with the provisions of this Agreement,
Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits, and conform to Technical Specifications and Good
Industry Practice.
1.2.2 The Operator will be responsible for day to day operation and maintenance of the Project
Facilities in the Effective Service Area.
1.2.3 In preparing the SIP, the Operator will estimate the levels of leakage using accepted
international practice as set out by the International Water Association and will come to an
agreement on the SIP with the engineering institute of repute (e.g. IITs) or any other persons /
agency as appointed by the Authority. The Operator will report leakage on this basis for each
DMA in Effective Service Area and will prepare a summary report every month comparing the
actual and the planned leakage levels with a commentary on any differences.
1.2.4 Services will include planning and undertaking routine operations and maintenance activities
and attending to emergencies as they arise as laid out in the agreed Emergency Response
Plan and the Environmental Code of Practice.
1.2.5 The Operator will be responsible for
a) Distributing the water from Designated Reservoir or water distribution point as specified by
the Authority to the Customers addressing leakage in the networks, to the extent required to
meet the Performance Standards, through leakage repair, pipe rehabilitation, pipe
replacement, pressure management and active leakage control;
b) Operationalizing the Hydraulic Zones and its DMAs in the Effective Service Area as
proposed in the Agreed THP including for on-going pressure and flow monitoring,
establishment of telemetry system, and data analysis;
c) Preparation of annual water balance for all DMAs in Effective Service Area and non-DMA
areas in the Effective Service Area;
d) Providing assistance to the Authority in providing new connections (water connections), and
regularizing illegal connections (water connections) in conformity with standards finalized in
the Agreed SIP;
e) Operating the Customer Service Centers (CSCs) and grievance redressal system;
f) Sampling treated water as it leaves the storage reservoir to ensure that it meets the Water
Quality Standards;
g) Sampling treated water at Customer taps to check for residual chlorine levels;
h) Updating the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) to reflect experience gained during the
Transition Period;
Page 163 of 432

i) Updating the annual Operation and Maintenance Plan (O&M Plan).

1.2.6 The Operator may interrupt provision of water services if such interruption is necessary for
implementation of SIP during the Transition Period or for Major Maintenance and conforms to
Good Industry Practice. Provided further that such interruption shall be undertaken by the
Operator only in accordance with the approved O&M Plan with written notice to the Authority
and the Technical Auditor and notification to the Customers as per the Standard Operating
Procedures for communication. For the avoidance of doubt, it is agreed that the Operator shall
at all times be responsible for ensuring safe operation of the Project Facilities in the Effective
Service Area and meeting the Performance Standards. Notwithstanding anything contained
herein this Agreement, the service levels within the Effective Service Area shall be at least at
the same level as at the time of Effective Date and documented in the approved O&M Plan
submitted by the Operator.
1.2.7 The Operator will ensure that during the Transition Period:
a) Planned maintenance of all electro-mechanical equipment & other devices existing,
supplied, installed/erected and commissioned in the Effective Service Area is carried out as
per the O&M Plan;
b) Planned maintenance (including routine preventive maintenance) of all valves and
pipeline/appurtenances/electro-mechanical equipment and other devices supplied,
installed/erected& commissioned in the Effective Service Area is carried out as per the O&M
Plan;
c) Planned maintenance activities of the all other Project Facilities in the Effective Service Area
in accordance with Good Industry Practice is carried out.
d) Provision of chemicals, consumables, spares
e) Planning and implementing routine operations and maintenance activities and attending to
emergencies as they arise as laid out in the agreed Emergency Response Plan.
1.2.8 The Operator shall fully operate and maintain the IMIS system during the Transition Period and
will ensure that IMIS contains data / information of all operational activities, maintenance
activities, Customer billing activities, leakage management activities etc. in accordance with this
Agreement. The Operator will ensure that the asset registers and its corresponding GIS
information is updated to reflect any changes to the Project Facilities during the Transition
Period.
1.2.9 The Operator shall fully operate and maintain the Laboratories during the Transition Period and
will ensure that number of water quality samples are tested is in accordance with CHPEEO
guidelines.
1.2.10 The Operator will be responsible for analyzing the recorded information / data and to facilitate
improved operational performance and improved billing performance as per the Performance
Standards.
1.2.11 The Operator shall provide the Authority and the Technical Auditor and any other agency
appointed by the Authority, with access at all times to the Project Facilities and to view all data
and reports held by the various electronic information systems managed by the Operator.
1.2.12 For all expansions of water supply network / pumping stations etc., not covered under the SIP,
the Operator shall initiate a Change in Scope request which shall be approved by the Authority
as per Article 16.
Page 164 of 432

1.3 Customer Services

1.3.1 The Operator will be responsible for all communications and outreach activities in the Service
Area as agreed with and in collaboration with the Authority.
1.3.2 The Operator will be responsible for operating the Customer Service Centers (CSCs) and
grievance redressal system;
1.3.3 The Operator operate all CSCs including one central control center to facilitate receiving and
resolving Customer requests, complaints, and grievances in the Effective Service Area related
to new connections, service deficiencies, resolution of billing disputes, inappropriate actions by
staff, etc.
1.3.4 The CSCs will function between 8am to 8pm during business days including Saturdays and
between 8am to 1pm during public holidays including Sundays. The CSCs will have reasonable
space and furniture for the Customers to wait, interact and represent their requirements. The
expenses for furniture for the CSC would be borne by the Operator. The land and building for
CSC would be provided by the Authority.
1.3.5 The Operator will equip CSCs with sufficient human resources (employees or agents of the
Operator) with proficiency in local language, hardware and software to facilitate continuous
record of Customer requests, monitoring the resolution, and reporting completion of necessary
actions and tasks.
1.3.6 The Operator will ensure that its Employees and all vehicles used by it carry the logo of the
Operator. All communications sent out by the Operator should make it clear that these are
being sent out on behalf of the Authority.
1.3.7 The Operator shall with written instructions from the Authority replace illegal service
connections with legal connections where the Customer applies to the Authority for the
provision for a new connection and the Authority authorizes the same. If the Customer does not
apply for a new connection or if the Authority does not approve such application, the Operator
shall recommend the Authority to disconnect such illegal connections after providing the
Customer notice of 15 (fifteen) days.
1.3.8 The Operator shall, in consultation with the Authority, notify the communities and the
Customers in the Service Area well in advance regarding the plans and timelines of conversion
to continuous pressurized water supply, including the procedures that will be followed and
actions that will need to be taken by the consumers/ households, billing related issues, type of
supported / guidance available from the Operator.
1.3.9 The Operator shall cooperate and collaborate with the various mechanisms instituted by the
Authority for facilitating outreach to the Customers in the Service Area.
1.3.10 The Operator shall, in consultation with the Authority, provide clear information to Customers on
connection policy for existing connection holders, new connections, regularization of illegal
1.3.11 The Operator shall issue dummy bills to Customers to test the billing system and to make
Customers aware of the new procedures, payment facilities and Customer complaint and
information mechanisms.
Page 165 of 432

1.3.12 The Operator shall provide information on the importance of safe storage and handling of water
after the conversion to Project Facilities to provide continuous water supply and on the
1.3.13 The Operator shall provide 48 hours advance warning to Customers of planned maintenance
that will affect such Customers.
1.4 Billing
1.4.1 Operating will be responsible for generating water and sewerage bills for all Customers in the
entire Service Area. (including the Service Area under the Authority)..
1.4.2 The Operator will be responsible for, amongst others:
a) Read all Customer water meters in the Service Area in accordance with the general
instructions of Authority and applicable bye-laws;
b) Register all Customer water meter readings in the appropriate Customer database for the
entire Service Area (as a part of IMIS);
c) Update Customer database by house to house surveys and checks for the entire Service
Area;
d) Maintain and updated Customer database and link to the GIS for the entire Service Area;
e) For Non-Effective Service Area, rotate regularly the meter readers and meter reading routes;
f) Under Effective Service Area all meters are expected to be AMR meters, hence the
Operator will read meters and identify and rectify faulty readings on real time basis;
g) Set up a thorough illegal connections detection program including prevention of misuse of
fire hydrants for the Effective Service Area;
h) Conduct regular surveys for meter tampering and by-passes;
i) Facilitate the Authority to introduce a public awareness programme and request the
assistance of the Customers in reducing fraudulent actions.
1.4.3 During the commissioning of a rehabilitated DMA in Effective Service Area, the Operator will
issue dummy bills for a period of three months to make Customer aware of the water charges,
new procedures, payment facilities and Customer complaint and information mechanisms.
When the Customer is issued dummy bills, it will be charged based on the previous month’s
bills or as per the relevant regulation issued by the Authority to this effect.
1.4.4 The Operator will identify and record all outstanding accounts and submit to the Authority a
summary and analysis of unpaid accounts once in every three months.
1.5 Annual SIP
1.5.1 The Operator will update the Agreed SIP each year (“Annual SIP”) to capture improved data
on asset condition and performance, experience from operation of the Facilities, actual
progress in implementing the Agreed SIP and from any other information that will improve the
quality of the Agreed SIP (including the O&M Plan and the SOP and Agreed THP) to reflect the
current situation;
Page 166 of 432

1.5.2 The Operator shall update the SIP to capture entire Service Area, improved data on asset
condition and performance, experience from operation of the Project Facilities, actual progress
in implementing the SIP and from any other information that will improve the quality of the SIP;
1.5.3 The annual update will include a section on progress made in the previous year in implementing
the Agreed SIP, identifying any reasons for delays or lower than expected performance, and
outlining the actions to be taken to a) eliminate such occurrences reoccurring and b) recover
from the delays and lower performance identified.
1.5.4 The Operator will propose revisions to the Agreed SIP to reflect the more up to date
information.
1.6 Progress Reporting and Record Keeping
1.6.1 The Operator will prepare monthly operational performance reports of the service performance
in accordance to Performance Standards and M&E Plan agreed to in the Agreed SIP;
1.6.2 The Operator will prepare monthly progress reports on physical progress, costs, service levels
and other critical matters.
1.6.3 All Records will be made available upon the request of the Technical Auditor, the engineering
institute of repute (e.g. IITs) or any other persons / agency as appointed by the Authority or the
Authority.
1.6.4 The Operator will ensure that all O&M records (the “Records”) for the Facilities are kept
including:
a) Log book showing flows, pressure & discharge in the production, transmission, storage,
distribution system, levels in storage reservoirs, water quality, , and interruption of power if
any, to be recorded;
b) History sheet of overhauling / maintenance / replacement of consumable / non consumable
related to all the important mechanical equipment;
c) Manual indicating the location, type, and operation of all electromechanical equipment;
d) O&M Plan including, inter alia, major maintenance management, work scheduling,
inspections, preventive maintenance, monitoring and control, operations management etc.
e) Monthly compilation of complaint redressal performance
f) Annual fitness certificate of the transport vehicles and loading equipment
g) Disagreements/ disputes, if any and proposed measures to be taken
h) Brief report of any accident/incident related to the Project, injury/ fatality, property damage,
cause of accident and actions taken to avoid recurrence
i) Copies of any reports submitted for purposes of regulatory compliance and of notices
received or reports or notices submitted to any competent authority or otherwise
j) Any other report that may be reasonably required by the Authority for itself or to fulfil any
regulatory compliance.
k) The frequency and formats for the reports to be submitted will be finalized in consultation
with the Technical Auditor and will form part of the O&M Plan.
1.6.5 The Operator will also ensure records related regulatory compliance and health and safety
management are also kept.
Page 167 of 432

1.6.6 The Operator will finalize the formats for the records in consultation with the Technical Auditor
and document the same.
Page 168 of 432

SCHEDULE 4C: OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS DURING SUSTAINING PERIOD
1.1 Operation and Maintenance of the Project Facilities

1.1.1 During the Sustaining Period, the Operator shall operate and maintain the Project Facilities in
accordance with this Agreement in compliance with the provisions of this Agreement,
Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits, and conform to Technical Specifications and Good
Industry Practice.
1.1.2 The Operator will be responsible for day to day operation and maintenance of the Project
Facilities and maintaining the Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply (including removal of
illegal connections). It would include continued provision of continuous 24x7 pressurized water
supply and in the event of no water supply to any zones, water as per Water Quality Standards
for drinking purposes will be planned for by the Operator. The quality of service provided will be
in accordance with the Performance Standards in detailed in Schedule 5.
1.1.3 In preparing the SIP, the Operator will estimate the levels of leakage using accepted
international practice as set out by the International Water Association and will come to an
agreement on the SIP with the engineering institute of repute (e.g. IITs) or any other persons /
agency as appointed by the Authority. The Operator will report leakage on this basis for each
Hydraulic Zones and DMAs and will prepare a summary report every month comparing the
actual and the planned leakage levels with a commentary on any differences.
1.1.4 Services will include planning and undertaking routine operations and maintenance activities
and attending to emergencies as they arise as laid out in the agreed Emergency Response
Plan and the Environmental Code of Practice.
1.1.5 The Operator will be responsible for
a) Rehabilitation, and O&M of Designated Reservoir
b) Distributing the water from the Designated Reservoirs to the Customers addressing leakage
in the networks, to the extent required to meet the Performance Standards, through leakage
repair, pipe rehabilitation, pipe replacement, pressure management and active leakage
control;
c) Operationalizing the Hydraulic Zones and its DMAs in the Effective Service Area as
proposed in the Agreed THP including for on-going pressure and flow monitoring,
establishment of telemetry system, and data analysis;
d) Preparation of annual water balance for all DMAs in Effective Service Area and non-DMA
areas in the Effective Service Area;
e) Providing assistance to the Authority in providing new water supply connections, and
regularizing illegal connections (water connections) in conformity with standards finalized in
the Agreed SIP;
f) Operating the Customer Service Centers (CSCs) and grievance redressal system;
g) Sampling treated water at storage reservoir to ensure that it meets the Water Quality
Standards;
h) Sampling treated water at Customer taps to check for residual chlorine levels;
i) Updating the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) to reflect experience gained during the
Transition Period;
Page 169 of 432

j) Updating the annual Operation and Maintenance Plan (O&M Plan).

1.1.6 The Operator may interrupt provision of water services if such interruption is necessary for
Major Maintenance during the Sustaining Period and conforms to Good Industry Practice.
Provided further that such interruption shall be undertaken by the Operator only in accordance
with the approved O&M Plan with written notice to the Authority and the Technical Auditor and
notification to the Customers as per the Standard Operating Procedures for communication. For
the avoidance of doubt, it is agreed that the Operator shall at all times be responsible for
ensuring safe operation of the Project Facilities and meeting the Performance Standards.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein this Agreement, the service levels within the Service
Area shall be at least at the same level as at the time of Effective Date and documented in the
approved O&M Plan submitted by the Operator.
1.1.7 The Operator will ensure that during the Sustaining Period:
a) Integrated Management Information System (IMIS) including Computerized Maintenance
Management System is completely operational and updated
b) Planned maintenance of all electro-mechanical equipment & other devices existing,
supplied, installed/erected and commissioned is carried out as per the O&M Plan;
c) Planned maintenance (including routine preventive maintenance) of all valves and
pipeline/appurtenances/electro-mechanical equipment and other devices supplied,
installed/erected& commissioned is carried out as per the O&M Plan;
d) Planned maintenance activities of the all other Project Facilities in accordance with Good
Industry Practice is carried out.
e) Provision of chemicals, consumables, spares
f) Planning and implementing routine operations and maintenance activities and attending to
emergencies as they arise as laid out in the agreed Emergency Response Plan.
1.1.8 The Operator shall fully operate and maintain the IMIS system during the Sustaining Period and
will ensure that IMIS contains data / information of all operational activities, maintenance
activities, Customer billing activities, leakage management activities etc. in accordance with this
Agreement. The Operator will ensure that the asset registers and its corresponding GIS
information is updated to reflect any changes to the Project Facilities during the Sustaining
Period.
1.1.9 The Operator shall fully operate and maintain the Laboratories during the Sustaining Period and
will ensure that number of water quality samples are tested is in accordance with CHPEEO
guidelines.
1.1.10 The Operator will be responsible for analyzing the recorded information / data and to facilitate
improved operational performance and improved billing performance as per the Performance
Standards.
1.1.11 The Operator shall provide the Authority and the Technical Auditor and any other agency
appointed by the Authority, with access at all times to the Project Facilities and to view all data
and reports held by the various electronic information systems managed by the Operator.
1.1.12 For all expansions of water supply network / pumping stations etc., not covered under the
Agreed SIP, the Operator shall initiate a Change in Scope request which shall be approved by
the Authority as per Article 16.
Page 170 of 432

1.2 Customer Services

1.2.1 The Operator will be responsible for all communications and outreach activities in the Service
Area as agreed with and in collaboration with the Authority.
1.2.2 The Operator will be responsible for operating the Customer Service Centers (CSCs) and
grievance redressal system;
1.2.3 The Operator operate all CSCs including one central control center to facilitate receiving and
resolving Customer requests, complaints, and grievances in the Service Area related to new
connections, service deficiencies, resolution of billing disputes, inappropriate actions by staff,
etc.
1.2.4 The CSCs will function between 8am to 8pm during business days including Saturdays and
between 8am to 1pm during public holidays including Sundays. The CSCs will have reasonable
space and furniture for the Customers to wait, interact and represent their requirements. The
expenses for space and furniture for the CSC would be borne by the Operator.
1.2.5 The Operator will equip CSCs with sufficient human resources (employees or agents of the
Operator) with proficiency in local language, hardware and software to facilitate continuous
record of Customer requests, monitoring the resolution, and reporting completion of necessary
actions and tasks.
1.2.6 The Operator shall equip CSCs with sufficient human resources (employees or agents of the
Operator) to coordinate all communication and outreach activities and to work in collaboration
with the Authority to facilitate Stakeholder Outreach. The expenses related to operationalization
of the CSC would be borne by the Operator.
1.2.7 The Operator will ensure that its Employees and all vehicles used by it carry the logo of the
Operator. All communications sent out by the Operator should make it clear that these are
being sent out on behalf of the Authority.
1.2.8 The Operator shall with written instructions from the Authority replace illegal service
connections with legal connections where the Customer applies to the Authority for the
provision for a new connection and the Authority authorizes the same. If the Customer does not
apply for a new connection or if the Authority does not approve such application, the Operator
shall recommend the Authority to disconnect such illegal connections as per the Connection
Policy.
1.2.9 The Operator shall, in consultation with the Authority, notify the communities and the
Customers in the Service Area well in advance regarding the plans and timelines of conversion
to continuous pressurized water supply, including the procedures that will be followed and
actions that will need to be taken by the consumers/ households, billing related issues, type of
supported / guidance available from the Operator.
1.2.10 The Operator shall cooperate and collaborate with the various mechanisms instituted by the
Authority for facilitating outreach to the Customers in the Service Area.
1.2.11 The Operator shall, in consultation with the Authority, provide clear information to Customers on
connection policy for existing connection holders, new connections, regularization of illegal
Page 171 of 432

1.2.12 The Operator shall provide information on the importance of safe storage and handling of water
after the conversion to Project Facilities to provide continuous water supply and on the
1.2.13 The Operator shall provide 48 hours advance warning to Customers of planned maintenance
that will affect such Customers.
1.3 Billing
1.3.1 During the Sustaining Period, the Operator will be responsible for billing activities in the
Sustaining Period.
1.3.2 The Operator will be responsible for, amongst others:
a) Read all Customer water meters in accordance with the general instructions of Authority in
the Service Area;
b) Register all Customer water meter readings in the appropriate Customer database (as a part
of IMIS);
c) Update Customer database by house to house surveys and checks;
d) Maintain and updated Customer database and link to the GIS;
e) For Non-Effective Service Area, rotate regularly the meter readers and meter reading routes;
f) Under Effective Service Area all meters are expected to be AMR meters, hence the
Operator will read meters and identify and rectify faulty readings on real time basis
g) Set up a thorough illegal connections detection program including prevention of misuse of
fire hydrants;
h) Conduct regular surveys for meter tampering and by-passes;
i) Facilitate the Authority to introduce a public awareness programme and request the
assistance of the Customers in reducing fraudulent actions.
1.3.3 From the Sustaining Period Commencement Date the Operator will have full responsibility for
billing of all Customers in the Service Area for, and on behalf of, the Authority, which will be on
a monthly basis unless agreed otherwise with the Authority.
1.3.4 The Operator will identify and record all outstanding accounts and take all necessary measures
to collect outstanding accounts and submit to the Authority a summary and analysis of unpaid
accounts once in every three months.
1.4 Capacity Building of Authority Staff
1.4.1 The Operator will implement the Capacity Building Plan during the Sustaining Period. The
Operator will though its own personnel or from external experts, will conduct trainings/ seminars
with an aim to build capacities of Authority staff across all levels to handle various aspects of
the water supply services.
1.5 Annual SIP
1.5.1 The Operator will update the Agreed SIP each year (“Annual SIP”) to capture improved data
on asset condition and performance, experience from operation of the Project Facilities, actual
progress in implementing the Agreed SIP and from any other information that will improve the
quality of the Agreed SIP (including the O&M Plan and the SOP) to reflect the current situation;
Page 172 of 432

1.5.2 The Operator shall update the SIP to capture improved data on asset condition and
performance, experience from operation of the Project Facilities, actual progress in
implementing the SIP and from any other information that will improve the quality of the SIP;
1.5.3 The annual update will include a section on progress made in the previous year in implementing
the Agreed SIP, identifying any reasons for delays or lower than expected performance, and
outlining the actions to be taken to a) eliminate such occurrences reoccurring and b) recover
from the delays and lower performance identified.
1.5.4 The Operator will propose revisions to the Agreed SIP to reflect the more up to date
information, including a revised rolling procurement plan for the next two year period of which
the first twelve (12) months will be fixed and the remaining period indicative.
1.6 Progress Reporting and Record Keeping
1.6.1 The Operator will prepare monthly operational performance reports of the service performance
in accordance to Performance Standards and M&E Plan agreed to in the Agreed SIP;
1.6.2 The Operator will prepare monthly progress reports reporting on physical progress, costs,
service levels and other critical matters.
1.6.3 All Records will be made available upon the request of the Technical Auditor, the engineering
institute of repute (e.g. IITs) or any other persons / agency as appointed by the Authority or the
Authority.
1.6.4 The Operator will ensure that all O&M records (the “Records”) for the Facilities are kept
including:
a) Log book showing flows, pressure & discharge in the production, transmission, storage,
distribution system, levels in storage reservoirs, water quality flows, and interruption of
power if any, to be recorded;
b) History sheet of overhauling / maintenance / replacement of consumable / non consumable
related to all the important mechanical equipment;
c) Manual indicating the location, type, and operation of all electromechanical equipment;
d) O&M Plan including, inter alia, major maintenance management, work scheduling,
inspections, preventive maintenance, monitoring and control, operations management etc.
e) Monthly compilation of complaint redressal performance
f) Annual fitness certificate of the transport vehicles and loading equipment
g) Disagreements/ disputes, if any and proposed measures to be taken
h) Brief report of any accident/incident related to the Project, injury/ fatality, property damage,
cause of accident and actions taken to avoid recurrence
i) Copies of any reports submitted for purposes of regulatory compliance and of notices
received or reports or notices submitted to any competent authority or otherwise
j) Any other report that may be reasonably required by the Authority for itself or to fulfil any
regulatory compliance.
k) The frequency and formats for the reports to be submitted will be finalized in consultation
with the Technical Auditor and will form part of the O&M Plan.
Page 173 of 432

1.6.5 The Operator will also ensure records related regulatory compliance and health and safety
management are also kept.
1.6.6 The Operator will finalize the formats for the records in consultation with the Technical Auditor
and document the same.
Page 174 of 432

SCHEDULE 5: PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
1.1 Performance Standards

1.1.1 The performance of the Operator under the Agreement is subject to two sets of Performance
Standards
a) Milestones Standards (applicable during Start Up Period and Transition Period)
b) Required Service Level Standards or RSLS (applicable during Transition Period and
Sustaining Period)
1.1.2 Methodology for Measurement: The Technical Auditor will develop a robust methodology and
framework for measurement and monitoring of Performance Standards in line with this
Schedule. The Authority review the framework in consultation with the engineering institute or
any other persons / agency appointed by the Authority provide comments/suggestions to the
Technical Auditor.
1.1.3 The measurement of the Operator’s performance shall be as per the methodology and
framework prepared by the Technical Auditor and approved by the Authority. The format shall
be in line with the industry good practices. Upon the agreement, the agreed methodology will
form the basis for monitoring the performance of the Operator and will be applied during the
Agreement for determination of performance of the Operator and for payment of the Operator
Payments in accordance with Article 22 and Schedule 6.
1.2 Milestone Standards during Start Up Period
1.2.1 The purpose of the Start Up Period Milestones is to provide the Parties with measurable
indicators of progress towards achieving conversion to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water
Supply within the required timeframe, and to ensure certain activities critical to the Authority are
implemented in a timely manner.
1.2.2 Late or incomplete delivery of these Milestones will give rise to Liquidated Damages in
accordance with Schedule 6 of this Agreement.
1.2.3 Start Up Period Milestone Standards are as follows:
Start Up Period Milestone Standards
Unit of Within 120 days Within 150
Milestones
Measurement from ED1 days from ED
A Preparation of SIP
Topographical Survey Map, Infrastructure
Survey and Digital Elevation Model of the
Service Area and GIS Mapping of all WSS Sq. kilometers 75% 100%
asset as a part of developing an Asset
Register
Number of
Validate Customer Survey and creation of
Customers in 75% 100%
Customer database
Service Area
As per timelines set out in Article 2.4
Transition Handover Plan (THP) Job
and Article 6.2
Submission of Draft Service Improvement Job As per timelines set out in Article 2.4
1
ED - Effective Date
Page 175 of 432

Start Up Period Milestone Standards

Unit of Within 120 days Within 150
Milestones
Measurement from ED1 days from ED
Plan (SIP) and Article 6.2
Approval of Service Improvement Plan As per timelines set out in Article 2.4
Job
(SIP) and Article 6.2
Integrated Management Information As per timelines set out in Article 2.4
Job
Systems (IMIS) and Article 6.2
1.3 Milestone Standards during Transition Period

1.3.1 The purpose of the Transition Period Milestones is to provide the Parties with measurable
indicators of progress towards achieving conversion to Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water
Supply within the required timeframe, and to ensure certain activities critical to the Authority are
implemented in a timely manner.
1.3.2 The agreed upon total quantities. milestones and specifications will be captured in much more
detail by the Operator in the Agreed SIP which needs to be updated every year by the
Operator.
1.3.3 Total quantities, milestones and specifications in the heads given in the Schedule 5, Article
1.3.5, may be revised, where necessary, and finalized during the discussion on the SIP
between the Authority and the Operator and relevant stakeholders.
1.3.4 Late or incomplete delivery of these Milestones will give rise to Liquidated Damages in
accordance with Schedule 6 of this Agreement.
1.3.5 Transition Period Milestone Standards are as follows:
Transition Period Milestone Standards
Within 6
Within 12 Within 24 Within 36 Within 48
Unit of months
Milestones ## months months months months
Measurement from
2 from TCD from TCD from TCD from TCD
TCD
B Implementation of SIP
Planning, detailed engineering design, procurement, construction, installation, commissioning,
supervision, testing and commencing operations (wherever applicable):
Connections with Continuous Number of
B1 10% 40% 80% 100%
24x7 Pressurized Water Supply connections
Network
B2 Water supply feeder networks length in 30% 70% 100%
Kilometers
Capacity of
B3 Service storage reservoirs storage in 50% 100%
Cum
Network
B4 Distribution network length in 10% 40% 80% 100%
Kilometers
Non-revenue water control –
B5 One time 10% 40% 80% 100%
implementation of SCADA
2
TCD – Transition Commencement Date
Page 176 of 432

1.4 Required Service Level Standards (RSLS) during the Transition Period and Sustaining Period
1.4.1 The purpose of the Required Service Level Standards is to provide the Authorities and Parties
with measurable indicators of O&M performance of the water supply system being operated by
the Operator in the Effective Service Area after the Progressive Handover Date during the
Transition Period and Sustaining Period.
1.4.2 RSLS is divided into three categories
a) RSLS for efficient management: Incentivizing the Operator for better performance through
performance fees.
b) Mandatory RSLS for Commissioned DMAs Mandatory RSLS is defined for dis-
incentivizing the Operator on non-achievement / non-maintenance of required standards
through Liquidated Damages.
c) Mandatory RSLS for non-commissioned areas in the Effective Service Area:
Mandatory RSLS is defined so as to ensure that the Operator meets at least the existing
performance standards in the areas within the Effective Service Area which are yet to be
commissioned.
1.4.3 RSLS for efficient management: For efficient management of the water supply system, the
Operator will achieve and maintain the RSLS as stipulated below.
S.
Description Details
No.
1. Parameter Continuous Pressurized Water Supply within DMA in Effective Service Area
Required 95% of the pressure readings maintained at a minimum level as specified in 24
Service Level hours in the Effective Service Area.
To be achieved at the pressure measuring point from commissioning date of that
Standards
DMA and maintained throughout the contract period.
At least 5 continuous pressure measuring point with logger (CMP) will be
established in each DMA per approved Service Improvement Plan (SIP). Readings
at the CMPs will be taken on hourly basis during supply hours.
Compliance on continuity of service = 100* (Total Number of readings of pressure

equal to or more than Specified / Total number of readings of pressure in the
Effective Service Area).
Measured by
For illustration purpose, if an area of 5 CMP is in a DMA in service. Total CMPs in 1
DMA are 5. Hourly readings are 24 in a day at each CMP and the month is of 30
days. Total readings in a month will be 5X24X30 = 3600. If 3420 readings (which is
95% of 3600) is equal to or more than specified pressure at respective CMPs,
Operator will be eligible for getting performance fees under this criteria. It may be
noted that non-function of CMPs shall be considered as non-performing readings.
An electronic registry maintained by the Contractor; the registry shall include
detailed database and summary tables pressure logs at each of the CMP
The pressure log database shall include:
Monitored by
i. Time and date
ii. CMP identification number
iii. Pressure in meters
Allowable i. Areas which are undergoing rehabilitation / replacement not exceeding the
Page 177 of 432

S.
Description Details
No.
Exclusions time frame as defined in the Agreed THP
ii. Planned maintenance periods not exceeding 8 hours each
iii. Shortage of bulk water below the Projected Daily Water Demand
iv. Interruption due to mains bursts not exceeding 12 hours
v. Third party causes like power failure and fire fighting
vi. Force Majeure continuing for more than 30 days
2. Parameter NRW (applicable to DMA in Effective Service Area)
Required
Service Level 20%
Standards
Measured by To be prepared by the Operator and verified by the Technical Auditor
Electronic registry from bulk flow meter recorded at inlet points for system input
volume and corresponding registry from bulk flow meter record at Designated
Reservoirs and certified import export points. Adjustment of volume export or import
Monitored by from or in the project battery limit respectively and all import or export points shall
be installed with meters.
Electronic registry from bulk flow meter at DMA and consumer meter readings as
per the billing records for the period under review
i. Areas which are undergoing rehabilitation / replacement not exceeding the
time frame as defined in the Agreed THP
ii. Planned maintenance periods not exceeding 8 hours each
iii. Shortage of bulk water below the Projected Daily Water Demand
iv. Third party causes such as power failure and fire fighting
Allowable
v. Force Majeure continuing for more than 30 days
exclusions
vi. If bulk inlet and tapping of the storage reservoirs is not measured for volume
vii. If un-metered supply, detected by Operator & not allowed to disconnect or
metered by the Authority within 7 days
viii. Damage to physical assets (pipelines, valves, pumping machinery etc.) by any
third party (not part of this Project)
Efficiency in redressal Customer Complaints (applicable for Customers in the
3. Parameter
Effective Service Area)
95% of complaints from Customers in the Effective Service Area should be
resolved within the time period stipulated for respective category of complaint.
A list of category of complaint and the time period to be resolved is given below:
o Sanction of Water Connection ( Domestic /Commercial) – 7 days
o Leakage of 0.5” water lines – 24 hours
o Leakage of public stand post – 24 hours
Required o Mixing of drainage with water line – 24 hours
Service Level o Testing of meters (fast or slow) & conveying the test results to the complainant
Standards – 24 hours
o Replacement of defective meters – 3 days
o Checking of blocked /leaking meters – 3 days
o Failure of water supply due to Electrical/mechanical faults – 3 days
o Failure of water supply due to large scale leakage in pipes – 24 hours
o Failure of water supply due to bad quality of water – 3 days
o Complaints about faulty billing – 3 days
Page 178 of 432

S.
Description Details
No.
Percentage of total number of Customer complaints addressed with the stipulated
time divided by total number of complaints during the period under review
Measured by
Resolution of complaints = 100 x (total number of complaints resolved within
timeframe / total number of complaints received during the period under review)
An electronic registry maintained by the Operator, the registry shall include detailed
database and summary tables including:
o Time and date
o Complaint number
o Customer name
Monitored by o Customer identification number
o DMA number
o Nature of complaint
o Time and date at which Customer complaint is resolved
o Action taken report
o Time and Date of resolution of complaint
For other complaints for which redressal is not possible within the above timeframe
Allowable - the Technical Auditor needs to be listed them separately and needs to be certify.
exclusions Exclusions allowed in case of Force Majeure event continuing for more than 30
days during the period
1.4.4 Mandatory RSLS for Commissioned DMAs: The Operator will be obliged to maintain the
required standards across following parameter failing which the Operator Payments will be
deducted through Liquidated Damages as detailed in Schedule 6.
a) Quality of water does not meet the Water Quality Standards
b) Delay in providing water connection to Customers
1.4.5 Mandatory RSLS for non-commissioned areas in the Effective Service Area: The
Mandatory RSLS for each non-commissioned areas under Hydraulic Zone will be based on the
Baseline Study undertaken by the Operator and as approved by the PBC Engineer. The
Operator will be required to operate and maintain the non-commissioned areas under Hydraulic
Zone better than the baseline levels defined in the Baseline Study for that Hydraulic Zone till the
time the those areas converts into Commissioned DMA. The baseline levels will be defined by
the Operator for the following parameter failing which the Operator Payments will be deducted
through Liquidated Damages as detailed in Schedule 6.
a) Quality of water does not meet the Water Quality Standards
b) Delay in providing water connection to Customers
Page 179 of 432

SCHEDULE 6: OPERATOR PAYMENTS
1.1 Operator Remuneration, Liquidated Damages and Incentives

1.1.1 Operator Payments are subject to provision of Article 5, Article 6, Schedule 5, and Schedule 7
and is detailed in the sections below.
1.1.2 Operator Remuneration including Payment Terms and Payment Schedule is detailed separately
for the three components in Schedule 6-Article 1.2, Schedule 6-Article 1.3, and Schedule 6-
Article 1.4.
a) SIP Fees (A) - Payment for preparation of SIP, identification of DMA boundaries;
b) DMA Establishment Fees (B) – Payment for creation and commissioning of a DMA.
c) Works Fees (C) - Payment for construction works for implementation of IIP; and
d) O&M Fees (D) - Payment for O&M services
1.1.3 Liquidated Damages are detailed in Schedule 6-Article 1.5 and Schedule 6-Article 1.6 and are
applicable due to two reasons:
a) Non-achievement of Milestone Standards: On the account of delay in completion of any
activity during Start Up Period and Transition Period
b) Non-achievement of RSLS: On the account of non-achievement of RSLS during the
Transition Period and the Sustaining Period
1.1.4 Operator Payments are subject to Indexation as detailed in Schedule 6-Article 1.9.
1.1.5 Liquidated Damages and Incentives as estimated by the Technical Auditor and as approved by
Authority shall be adjusted from the respective Operator Payments.
1.2 SIP Fees (A)

1.2.1 The Operator will be paid the SIP Fees (A) in accordance with Article 22.2 as per the schedule
given below:
Amount
Fee allocated for Payment Terms
the activity
Preparation of SIP including all
expert services, identification of
DMA boundaries , completion of
survey & investigations, creation
of hydraulically isolated network,
consumer survey, hydraulic Payment on completion of following
modelling, submission of revised deliverables
Lump sum
A1 SIP & drawings etc. complete.  30% of (A1) on submission of Draft SIP
This includes but is not limited to: (A1)  70% of (A1) on approval of SIP
 Topographical Survey
Map,
 Infrastructure Survey
and Digital Elevation
Model of the Service
Area
Page 180 of 432

Amount
the activity
 GIS Mapping of all water
supply assets as a part
of developing an Asset
Register
 Customer Survey and
creation of Customer
database
 Identification of DMA
boundaries
 Preparation and
approval of THP
 Preparation and
approval of SIP
Payment on completion of following
deliverables
 40% of (A2) on design and
development of IMIS including
Development and procurement of all necessary software
operationalization and launch of Lump sum license and hardware to operate the
IMIS including migration of (A2) IMIS
A2
existing information on  30% of (A2) on migration of existing
Customers and assets Customer database and asset details
to new software system
 30% of (A2) on commissioning and
launch of IMIS after one month of
generation of Customer bills for the
entire Service Area
1.3 DMA Establishment Fees (B)

1.3.1 The Operator will be paid the DMA Establishment Fees (B) in accordance with Article 22.2 as
per the schedule given below:
Amount
the activity
(B1) is a one-time payment which will be paid
to the Operator on a per connections basis for
every Commissioned DMA.
Further, (B1) per connection will be paid based

(B1) = on the following
 DMA Creation Fees = 30% of B1
B1 DMA Establishment Fee
Fees per  DMA Commissioning Fees = 70% of
water supply B1
connection
(in INR) DMA Creation Fees
DMA Creation Fees equal to 30% of B1 per
connection will be paid to the Operator upon
isolation of DMA (based on number of
connections in the DMA).
Page 181 of 432

Amount
the activity
Payment to Operator = DMA Creation Fees per
connection X (number of connections in
isolated DMA)
Monitoring of achievement and payment will be

certified by the Technical Auditor and will be
approved by PBC Engineer after successful
zero pressure test for the DMA.
DMA Commissioning Fees

DMA Commissioning Fees equal to 70% of B1
per connection will be paid to the Operator
upon converting every connections in the
Commissioned DMA.
Payment to Operator = DMA Commissioning

Fees per connection X (number of connections
which in the Commissioned DMA)
Monitoring of achievement and payment will be

certified by the Technical Auditor and will be
approved by PBC Engineer based on 7 days
monitoring period or any other period specified
by Authority.
1.4 Works Fees (C)

1.4.1 The Operator will be paid the Works Fees (C) for the construction works undertaken during the
Transition Period as given below:
% of payment
Sl. Description of item with brief allowed on the
Performance level of works
No. specification basis of
performance
1.0 Civil Work –civil works of electrical 1. Stage -1- On physical 30%
Substation & rehabilitation, General Civil completion of foundation of the
work not covered in component mention component.
below 2. Stage -2- On physical 30%
completion of 50% of the works.
3. Stage-3 – On physical 30%
completion of remaining 50% of
the works.
4. On completion of 3 months trial 10%
run
Total 100%
Page 182 of 432

% of payment
performance
2.0 Construction of RCC/ steel/ glass fused As per the approved quantities as 85%
treated water sump/ storage reservoir/ per bid price sheet
BPT having provision for all inlet, outlet &
overflow arrangement; calibrated water
level indicator; Air Vent Pipe; Man Hole
with Cover; CI Lugs inside the sump etc.
Testing and completion 10%
On completion of 3 months trial 5%
run
3.0 RCC Single Storied Clear Water Pump 1.Foundation upto plinth level 25%
Room with RCC framed structure at 2. On completion of superstructure 25%
treatment plant near to clear water sump of & wall
suitable size , having steel casement 3. On completion of roof slab 25%
window / ventilator, MS Rolling Shutter, C.C. 4.On finishing civil works 10%
flooring with metallic concrete hardener, 5. on finishing of electrical 10%
grading of roof with cement mortar and installation
providing & laying 6 course water proof roof 6.Painting and finishing 5%
treatment with bitumen felt over roof etc.,
with provision for Sanitary Toilet, internal
water supply & sanitary installation work
(Toilet door shall be of solid molded PVC
frame & 25 mm. thick PVC shutter),internal
electrification (with concealed copper wiring
of required C/S. area) with all necessary
electrical fittings & fixtures viz., light / fan /
power socket etc., necessary plinth
protection work, white ant treatment.
Total 100%
4.0 Electro-mechanical Components 1. On supply & delivery of 70%

(Excluding clear water Pumps & Pipe line materials
work ) 2. On installation 15%
3. Testing and completion 10%
run
Total 100%
5.0 Supplying, laying, jointing, testing and 1. on supply & delivery of pipe 70 %
completion of GI / MS pipeline of 2. On completion of laying 15 %
appropriate size and length (as per all including all necessary earth work,
relevant BIS specification) raw & clear supporting structures, anchor /
water pipe line of length as required thrust block, restoration of any
including all necessary earthwork, valves & property damaged during laying of
specials, valve chamber, supporting pipe, road crossing, if any, all
structures, anchor / thrust block etc., complete.
Page 183 of 432

% of payment
performance
3. on completion of field Hydraulic 10 %
testing of the pipe line
run
Total 100%
Providing clear water pumping 1. On supply & delivery of 70%

6.0 machinery (conforming to all relevant BIS materials
or ISO specification) with variable frequency 2.On installation 15%
drive where required for all the respective 3. Testing and completion 10%
clear water pumping including all necessary 4. On completion of 3 months trial 5%
electrical and other installation works, run
providing all necessary suction/ delivery
piping arrangement with control valves &
specials, arrangement for priming pumps
with standby provision, priming water tank
with staging & required GI Pipes & specials
etc. (common priming arrangement for all
the pumps for different route). furnishing the
Manufacturer's test certificate &
characteristic performance curve of the
pumps, all complete, All pumps, electrical
drive motors & other appurtenances shall be
of reputed make & conforming to BIS
Specification and other regulatory norms,
current at the time of design and execution.
Total 100%
7.0 Staff quarter with RCC framed structure 1. on completion of the work 100%
having 600 mm. high plinth & 3300 mm.
finished roof height comprising of 1 bed
room with attached toilet, 1 living room, 1
kitchen & 1 entry veranda having aluminum
casement window / ventilator, 1st. class
local hard Wood door frame, 1st. class local
hard Wood paneled shutter (Toilet door
shall be of solid molded PVC frame & 25
mm. thick PVC shutter), internal wall
finished with plastic paint & exterior
surfaces finished with weather coat cement
paint with RCC roof slab including all
necessary internal water supply & sanitary
installation work , internal electrification
(with concealed copper wiring of required
Page 184 of 432

% of payment
performance
C/S. area) with all necessary electrical
fittings & fixtures viz., light / fan / power
socket etc., necessary plinth protection
work, white ant treatment.
8.0 3.50 mt. wide internal road made of 1. on completion of the work 100%
asphaltic concrete inside the treatment
plant area, land scrapping & arboriculture,
compound illumination with sufficient nos. of
250 Watt HPSV street light luminaries
mounted on 3.0 m. high GI pole & wiring
with 6.0 sq.mm. PVC insulated copper
conductor in loop within the treatment plant
site including all necessary labour &
materials.
9.0 Development of Approach Road of AA 1. on completion of the work 100%
Class loading conforming to MORT&H
specifications with latest revisions and to
the Treatment Plant with cement concrete
pavement from the nearby public road
(formation width at Top 5.5 mt., paved
width- 3.75 mt.) complete in all respect. .
Total 100%
10.0 SCADA system: Installation, synchronizing, 1. on supply & installation 70%

testing and completion of SCADA system, 2. On successful completion and 30%
of reputed make and conforming to relevant testing including 3 months trial run
BIS Code of Practices with latest
amendment current at the time of execution
for flow control and monitoring water
distribution in the Effective Service Area:
(a) Ultrasonic level (sump) sensor &
transmitter
(b) Pressure sensor & transmitter and
pressure regulating valve
(c) Flow meter with signal generation
(d) Valve actuator Motor
(e) Valve actuator Drive
(f) Programmable logic controller/remote
terminal unit
Total 100%
1.5 O&M Fees (D)

1.5.1 The Operator will be paid the O&M Fees (D) for O&M activities carried out as per the schedule
given below:
Page 185 of 432

To be quoted
Fee Payment Terms
as
O&M Fees for managing water Calculation methodology and the
connections in Effective Service Area in INR per payment terms shall be in accordance
Quote for managing one (1) water water with Article 22.4
connection (D1) in the Effective connection per
D1
Service Area during the month month Actual amount to be paid shall be
multiplied by total number of water determined by the Schedule 6-Article
connections in the Effective Service (D1) 1.5.2, and Schedule 6-Article 1.5.3 given
Area below.
O&M Fees for meter reading, billing Not to be
INR 17 per connection per billing cycle on
D2 for area outside the Effective Service quoted by the
meter reading and billing.
Area and within the Service Area Operator
1.5.2 O&M Fees (D) for the period = {(O&M Fees for managing water connections in Effective
Service Area) + (O&M Fees for meter reading and billing for area outside the Effective Service
Area) for the project period
1.5.3 O&M Fees (D) comprises fixed and variable portions:
a) Fixed: 75% of the O&M Fees for the period calculated in Schedule 6-Article 1.5.2 would be
the fixed portion. This shall be paid to the Operator at the end of every month in accordance
with Article 22.5.
b) Variable: The remaining 25% portion of the O&M Fees will be payable as a Performance
Fee based on achievement of Performance Standard as detailed in Schedule 6-Article 1.5.4
given below.
1.5.4 Variable portion of O&M Fees (D) payable will be calculated as below:
Performance Fee payable during Sustaining
Performance Standard
Period
Failure to achieve Minimum Service Level Standards
0
as given below
O&M Fees for the Period (as calculated in
Achieve Required Service Level Standards (RSLS) for Schedule 6-Article 1.5.2) x (40%) x Weightage for
a Performance Standard as per Schedule 5 the Performance Standards given in Schedule 6-
Article 1.5.5 below
O&M Fees for the Period (as calculated in
Schedule 6-Article 1.5.2) x (80%) x Weightage for
Achieve Maximum Service Level Standards as below
the Performance Standards given in Schedule 6-
Article 1.5.5 below
For performance level above the minimum but below
RSLS and for performance level above the RSLS but On proportionate basis
below maximum
1.5.5 Performance Standards for calculating the O&M Fees (D)

Required
Minimum
Performance Weight- Service Level Maximum Service
Service Level
Standards age Standards Level Standards
Standards
(RSLS)
Page 186 of 432

Required
Minimum
Performance Weight- Service Level Maximum Service
Service Level
Standards age Standards Level Standards
Standards
(RSLS)
Continuous Pressurized
Water Supply within
1 30% 95% 65% 100%
DMA in Effective
Service Area
NRW (applicable to
2 DMA in Effective 40% 20% 25% 15%
Service Area)
Efficiency in redressal
Customer Complaints
3 (applicable for 30% 95% 80% 100%
Customers in the
Effective Service Area)
1.6 Liquidated Damages on non-achievement of Milestone Standards

1.6.1 The amount to be payable as Liquidated Damages for delay in submission of various
deliverables of Start Up Period would be INR 1,00,000/- (Rupees one lakhs) per day of delay.
The maximum Liquidated Damages for delay in submission of various deliverables of Start Up
Period would be 50% of SIP Fees
1.6.2 The amount of payable as Liquidated Damages for delay in implementation of IIP would be INR
2,00,000/- (Rupees two lakhs) per dayof delay. . The maximum Liquidated Damages for delay
in implementation of each of the project components would be {10% x Works Fees (C)).
In case, the delay is attributable to the Authority or its agents, then the corresponding period of
delay being attributable to the Authority or its agents would be adjusted with the timelines for
the corresponding Milestone.
It is clarified that if the Operator is able to meet the project timelines by Scheduled TCD, it will
be entitled for reimbursement without any interest of Liquidated Damages for delay charged at
intermediate milestones if applicable. It is clarified that the Liquidated Damages for delay would
be charged based on the net delay between the scheduled SPCD and actual SPCD, subject to
the adjustment of delay attributable to the Authority or its agent.
1.7 Liquidated Damages on the non-achievement of RSLS in Commissioned DMAs

1.7.1 Water Quality: For each sample at consumer tap not confirming to Water Quality Standards,
the Operator shall pay the Liquidated Damages amounting to INR 1000 per sample escalated
at the rate of 5% per annum from the Effective Date.
1.7.2 Delay in providing connection: For each day of delay in excess of the stipulated time period
for providing new water connections or reconnection to a Customer, the Operator shall pay the
Liquidated Damages amounting to INR 50 per connection per day, escalated at the rate of 5%
per annum from the Effective Date.
Page 187 of 432

1.8 Liquidated Damages on the non-achievement of RSLS in non-commissioned areas of

Hydraulic Zones
1.8.1 Water Quality: For each sample at consumer tap not confirming to Water Quality Standards,
the Operator shall pay the Liquidated Damages amounting to INR 1000 per sample escalated
at the rate of 5% per annum from the Effective Date.
1.8.2 Delay in providing connection: For each day of delay in excess of the stipulated time period
for providing new water connections or reconnection to a Customer, the Operator shall pay the
Liquidated Damages amounting to INR 50 per connection per day, escalated at the rate of 5%
per annum from the Effective Date.
1.9 Indexation of Operator Payments

a) All bid prices are as on 28 days before the date of bid submission (“Bid Due Date”).
b) No indexation is permitted in under SIP Fees (A) i.e. SIP Fees (A) is not subject to any price adjustment
due to inflation.
c) No indexation is permitted in under DMA Establishment Fees (B) i.e. DMA Establishment Fees (B) is
not subject to any price adjustment due to inflation.
d) For bids quoted by the bidder under Works Fees (C) the price adjustment shall be as per the Schedule
30., For bids quoted by the bidder under O&M Fees (D), each payment (after necessary adjustments on
the account of Liquidated Damages, Incentives and other adjustments) will be adjusted using the
multiplication factor below:
Multiplication factor = 1+ 80% x { [Index indexation date / Indexbase date] – 1 }
Where the indexation date is the date on which payment is requested by the Operator and Base date is
the Bid Due Date.
e) Indexation for O&M Fees (D) would be based on Consumer Price Index for Urban (CPI-Urban) for the
State of Himachal Pradesh (Published by the Central Statistics Office (CSO), Ministry of Statistics and
Programme Implementation, Government of India).
Page 188 of 432

SCHEDULE 7: BID PRICE SCHEDULE

[As per the bid price sheet submitted as part of the bid]
Estimated
Total
Sl. Operator Quote of the Operator
Details Operator
No. Payments in Indian Rupees (INR)
Payments
(INR)
Lump sum quote for undertaking INR [●]
Operator obligations during Start Up (A1)
Period (A1)
1 SIP Fees (A) Development and operationalization
and launch of IMIS including INR [●]
(A2)
migration of existing information on (A2)
Customers and assets
DMA INR [●]
2 Establishment DMA Establishment Fees (B1) * 35,000
Fees (B) (B1)
To be quote for implementation of

SIP as per the BOQ INR [●]
3 Works Fees (C) (C)
(proportionately allocated on cost of (C)
respective component)
(D1) quoted for
each year *
number of
INR [●] connections for
the
O&M Fees for Water Connections in per water connection corresponding
4 O&M Fees (D) Effective Service Area: Quote per per month (D1) year
Water Connection Month
(quoted
(See Note 1) separately in
the bid price
sheet)
[---Sum of
TOTAL
above---]
Note 1:
Actual Operator Payments against O&M Fees (D) would be determined by actual number of water
connections in the Effective Service Area.
However, for the purposes of evaluation of proposals of prospective Bidders and for the purposes of
Minimum Sub-Account Balance, the projected number of connections managed by the Operator on
cumulatively on a monthly basis as defined in the tables below will be considered.
Page 189 of 432

Projected number of water connections in Effective Service Area

Number of
connection
months
Year
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 managed on a
cumulative
basis
Year 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2,500 7,500
Year 2 3,000 3,500 4,000 4,500 5,000 5,500 6,250 7,000 7,750 8,500 9,250 10,000 74,250
Year 3 11,000 12,000 13,000 14,000 15,000 16,000 17,000 18,000 19,000 20,000 21,000 22,000 1,98,000
Year 4 24,000 26,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 3,84,000
Year 5 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 6 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 7 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 8 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 9 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 10 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 11 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 12 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 13 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 14 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Year 15 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 4,20,000
Total 52,83,750
Page 190 of 432

SCHEDULE 8: APPLICABLE PERMITS

Both the SJPNL and the Operator will be responsible for obtaining various permits, authorizations and
consents to enable them to carry out their duties. These will include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Permits to be obtained by SJPNL (as needed for the execution of Project)
a) Abstraction licences from various departments

b) Planning permissions
c) Public way-leaves that may be required from time to time
d) Discharge consents
e) Disposal licenses
f) Permissions to enter public and industrial properties
2. Departments permits to be obtained by Authority (SJPNL) (as needed for the execution of Project)
i) Town Planning Department

ii) Heritage Department
iii) Forest Department
iv) Traffic Department
v) Electricity Board/Telecom Department
vi) HP PWD – for roads
vii) Himachal Pradesh Pollution Control Board
3. Permits to be obtained by the Operator (as needed for the execution of Project)
a) Vehicle and plant licenses

b) Licenses to store
c) Health and Safety certificates
d) Fire certificate
e) Approval from Labour Inspector
f) Approval from District Health Officer
g) Insurance as appropriate
h) Licenses to carry out water operations
4. Departments permits to be obtained by Operator (as needed for the execution of Project)
i) RTO Department
ii) Industrial Department
iii) Health Department
iv) Fire Department
v) Labour Commission Department
Page 191 of 432

SCHEDULE 9: SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Survey Equipment and Field Assistance to the PBC Engineer
The Operator shall make available to the PBC Engineer required survey equipment, suitably educated
and trained survey assistants and labours for use on and about the Site in sufficient numbers and at all
reasonable times. The above mentioned equipment shall be the property of the Operator upon the
completion of the Contract.
Safety Equipment to the PBC Engineer
The Operator shall provide the PBC Engineer with the safety equipment at each site office. The
Operator shall replace each item after it wears out and becomes unsuitable for use.
Operator's Offices, Stores and Services
The Operator shall provide, erect, construct, maintain and subsequently remove proper offices, stores,
workshops, laboratories, storage and parking areas for his own use. Such facilities shall be sufficiently
sized and equipped to enable him to manage his operations in a professional manner and to enable
him to carry out all his obligations under the Contract. Sheds for storage of materials that may
deteriorate or corrode if exposed to the weather shall be weatherproof, adequately ventilated and
provided with raised floors. No material shall be placed directly on the ground. Within his offices a
meeting room shall be available for site meetings with the PBC Engineer and the Authority.
First Aid at Office and work site
The Operator shall make his own arrangements for treatment of casualties on the Site for such
instance first-aid units as may be thought necessary. The Operator shall be responsible for the
construction of such first-aid units and their management and operation and the removal by ambulance
of injured or sick employees to nearby hospitals. The first-aid service shall cover the Operator's own
personnel as well as that of the Authority, the PBC Engineer and all sub-contractors.
Testing Facilities, Laboratory
Within 14 days of issue of Notice to Proceed, the Operator shall establish, in the campus of site office,
an on-site fully furnished and adequately equipped field laboratory staffed by qualified personnel
suitable for construction material testing except cement and steel etc. He will make the facility to test
other material in the approved independent material testing laboratory. The name and qualifications of
independent testing laboratories shall be submitted to PBC Engineer for approval no less than thirty
calendar days prior to the date the laboratories are to be used. Once approved, dismissal and
replacement of the approved independent testing laboratory shall require written authorization by the
PBC Engineer. The site laboratory shall be functional till the performance based work is completed.
Laboratory and equipment shall become the property of the Operator upon completion of the Contract
If Project Manager found that Laboratory arranged by the Operator is not being maintained properly
then Project Manager has right to deduct a reasonable amount from payment. The calibration of the
laboratory equipment’s and instruments shall at the initial stage to be certified by agencies approved by
Page 192 of 432

the PBC Engineer. Laboratory equipment’s shall be properly maintained and calibrated throughout the
period of the contract by the operator at his own expense. The Operator shall notify the PBC Engineer
in sufficient advance prior to conducting any tests for the materials and work. The PBC Engineer will
also inspect the laboratory and the Operator shall provide adequate facilities to the PBC Engineer for
his independent verification of the accuracy and adequacy of the facilities.
The Operator shall be responsible for the sampling, curing, and transport to the laboratories of all
materials for testing, and all testing costs including laboratory fees, and/or all costs in running the on-
site laboratory, i.e., chemicals, reagents, and other test consumables, staff, and utilities.
Site Safety
The Operator shall at all times in the conduct of his work and that of his Sub-contractors adhere to the
established rules and regulations concerning all safety matters at Site such as the recommendations
contained in the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction", published by the Associated General
Operators of America, Inc., or other internationally recognized recommendations to the extent that
such provisions do not conflict with the applicable laws. This is especially important wherever it is
necessary to enable the free passage of the public through the Site.
The Operator's safety officer shall have the requisite qualification and the authority to issue instructions
to the Operator's personnel regarding protection measures to prevent accidents.
The Operator shall provide the public with adequate information on all risks with respect to the
construction works. If the general public sustains any kind of bodily injury or death, the Operator shall
be responsible for providing all necessary medical care and compensation.
During construction the Operator shall erect, maintain and subsequently remove sufficient barricades,
guards, lighting, sheeting, shoring, temporary sidewalks and bridges, danger signals as well as
temporary covering of potential accident areas, as approved by the PBC Engineer.
All open excavations along pipe lines shall be protected sufficiently to keep out livestock, and ensure
the safety of workmen and members of the public and be in accordance with the directives of the
police and the other local regulations.
The Operator shall be responsible for ensuring that all persons working in the vicinity of power lines are
aware of the relatively large distance that high voltage electricity can "short" to earth when cranes or
other large masses of steel are in the vicinity of power lines.
Where work is to be carried out in the proximity of buildings, bridges, tanks or other structures, the
Operator shall take all necessary precautions, including shoring and strutting, where necessary, to
ensure the safety of the structures that are at risk.
The Operator shall be responsible for all damages or injury which may be caused on any property by
trespass by the Operator's or his Sub-contractor's employees in the course of their employment,
whether the said trespass was committed with or without the consent or knowledge of the Operator.
Land sliding and Slope Protection Safety
Page 193 of 432

Site Specific of landslides
The purpose of site specific studies is to investigate a landslide in detail, employing both surface and
sub-surface exploration techniques to establish the type of slide, causative factors leading to slope
instability, stability status of the slope, monitoring of the slide to understand its dynamic behaviour, the
extent of damages caused and likely to be caused due to further sliding, the mechanism of sliding and
finally to suggest the most appropriate corrective measures to stabilise the slide.
Landslide Remediation Practices
Remediation practices, including slope geometry correction, providing protection to the toe of slope by
retaining structures, management of the surface and sub-surface water including the development of
pore pressures, nailing, bolting, anchoring, micro piling, application of geo-grids and geo-textiles and
afforestation, constitute powerful elements of most geo-technical packages commonly used for
improving the stability of problematic slopes and landslide sites in India.
Landslide Risk Assessment
Hence, landslide risk is a combination of the probability of landslide occurrence and its consequences.
The management of this risk involves the complete process of risk assessment and risk control. Risk
assessment—the process of risk analysis and risk evaluation—is the first and most important step of
risk management. Conducting risk assessment can provide information on the location of the hazard,
the value of land and property on this location, and an analysis of the risk to life, property, and the
environment that may result from natural hazard events. The complete risk management process
comprises three components:
i) Risk analysis.
ii) Risk evaluation.
iii) Risk treatment.
Risk Evaluation:
While evaluating risk, it is important to distinguish between acceptable risk that society is prepared to
accept without regard to its management, and tolerable risk that it is willing to live with in the
confidence that it is being properly controlled and monitored. This applies to loss of property and life.
Geotechnical Investigations
The study of the landslide boundaries, exposed lithology, discontinuities, shear zones, water springs,
aquifers, slope subsidence, heave, cracks, behaviour of buildings, etc., can provide a sense of
direction to the nature and quantum of the ensuing detailed sub-slope geotechnical investigation.
Guidelines will be developed to usher in the culture of sound geotechnical investigation suited to
different geological settings and anthropogenic situations. Systematic scientific geotechnical
investigation will become an essential component of any important landslide management initiative.
Since most landslides are the result of poor slope and sub-slope drainage, detailed hydrological
Page 194 of 432

studies of the catchments associated with landslides are essential. In areas of complex landforms with
water streams, springs and ill-defined overland flow, radio isotope studies are often useful in mapping
subterranean water flow while investigating the causative factors of a landslide.
The geotechnical investigation of landslides, which in their wetter manifestations take on the character
of a flow, calls for a different kind of investigation. In most such cases the laws of fluid mechanics tend
to take over from the laws of soil mechanics. The major difference lies in the short-lived nature of slip
surfaces and the kinetics of mass movement.
Landmass Improvement Techniques
The stabilization of hill slopes is also achieved by improving the mechanical characteristics of
potentially unstable ground by means of two different approaches:
i) The insertion of reinforcement elements into the ground.
ii) The improvement of the mechanical characteristics of the ground volume affected by
landslides through chemical, thermal or mechanical treatment.
Reinforcement technology has found wide application in measures for slope protection. This can be
achieved by the installation of large diameter wells supported by one or more crowns of consolidated
and possibly reinforced earth columns, anchors, networks of micro piles, nailing and grouting with
cement or chemical grouting, depending upon the properties of the material.
The improvement of the mechanical characteristics of the ground can also be achieved through
thermal treatment of potentially unstable hillsides made up of clayey materials or by using electro-
osmotic treatment in the case of homogenous clayey ground.
Strengthening of Buildings and Safety of Critical Facilities from Slides
Government buildings, hospitals, schools, archaeological monuments, nuclear structures, dams,

highways, bridges, and commercial establishments are critical to the national economy and compete
for priority depending on their relative importance in a given situation. Equal attention must also be
paid to the safety of other infrastructure such as water pipelines, sewerage networks, oil pipelines,
electrical supply lines, flyovers, underpasses, metro/rail networks, etc. the economic, scientific, and
technical means for mitigating landslide hazard are limited.
Implementation of Landslide Management Plans
Institutional Mechanisms
The development and implementation of disaster plans will be a coordinated programme of the
NDMA, GSI as the nodal agency, and the national, state, district, and local administrations.
The capacity and potential of other government organizations, knowledge institutions and academic
institutions will be harnessed and incorporated into the national landslide hazard mitigation endeavour.
Slope Protection
Page 195 of 432

Prediction
Short-term prediction of mass movement events is somewhat more problematic. For earthquake
triggered events, the same problems that are inherent in earthquake prediction are present. Slope
destabilization and undercutting triggered events require the constant attention of those undertaking or
observing the slopes, many of whom are not educated in the problems inherent in such
processes. Mass movement hazards from volcanic eruptions can be predicted with the same degree of
certainty that volcanic eruptions can be predicted, but again, the threat has to be realized and warnings
need to be heeded.
Some warning signs can be recognized individual by observations of things around you:
Prevention and Mitigation
All slopes are susceptible to mass movement hazards if a triggering event occurs. Thus, all slopes
should be assessed for potential mass movement hazards. Mass movement events can sometimes be
avoided by employing PBC Engineering techniques to make the slope more stable. Among them are:
 Steep slopes can be covered or sprayed with concrete covered with a wire mesh to prevent
rock falls.
 Retaining walls could be built to stabilize a slope.
 If the slope is made of highly fractured rock, rock bolts may be emplaced to hold the slope
together and prevent failure.
 Drainage pipes could be inserted into the slope to more easily allow water to get out and avoid
increases in fluid pressure, the possibility of liquefaction, or increased weight due to the
addition of water.
 Over steepened slopes could be graded or terraced to reduce the slope to the natural angle of
repose.
 In mountain valleys subject to mudflows, plans could be made to rapidly lower levels of water
in human-made reservoirs to catch and trap the mudflows.
Protection of Overhead and Underground Services & Safety Measures
The Operator will be held responsible for any damage to known services (i.e. overhead services that
are visible within the Site and underground services shown on the drawings) and he shall take all
necessary measures to protect them. All work or protective measures shall be subject to approval of
the PBC Engineer. In the event of a service being damaged he shall inform the PBC Engineer and the
authority concerned, the Operator shall not repair any such service unless instructed to do so.
Operator will map the underground utilities. Where no underground services are shown on the
drawings or scheduled but the possibility of their presence can reasonably be inferred, the Operator
shall, in collaboration with the PBC Engineer, ascertain whether any such services exist within the
relevant section of the Site. The Operator shall complete such an investigation well in advance of the
start of construction work in the said section and he shall submit a report in good time to enable the
PBC Engineer to make whatever arrangements are necessary for the protection, removal or diversion
of the services before any construction activities commences.
Page 196 of 432

As soon as any underground service not shown on the drawings is discovered, it shall be deemed to
be a known service and the Operator will be held responsible for any subsequent damage to it. If such
a service is damaged during the course of its discovery, the cost of making good such damage will be
met by the Authority unless he establishes that the Operator did not exercise reasonable diligence and
that the damage was avoidable.
Where the authority concerned elects to carry out on its own account any alterations or protective
measures, the Operator shall co-operate with and allow such authority reasonable access and
sufficient space and time to carry out the required work.
Safety Measures for Manholes
When workers are employed in sewers and manholes, which are in active use, the operators shall
ensure that the manhole covers are opened and ventilated at least for an hour before the workers are
allowed to get into the manholes, and the manholes so opened shall be cordoned off with suitable
railing and provided with warning signals or boards to prevent accident to the public. In addition, the
operator shall ensure that the following safety measure are adhered to:-
a) Entry for workers into the line shall not be allowed except under supervision of the JE or any
other higher officer.
b) At least 5 to 6 manholes upstream and downstream should be kept open for at least 2 to 3 hours
before any man is allowed to enter into the manhole for working inside.
c) Before entry, presence of toxic gases should be tested by inserting wet lead acetate paper,
which changes color in the presence of such gases and gives indication of their presence.
d) Presence of Oxygen should be verified by lowering a detector lamp into the manhole. In case,
no Oxygen is found inside the sewer line, workers should be sent only with Oxygen kit.
e) Safety belt with rope should be provided to the workers. While working inside the manholes,
such rope should be handled by two men standing outside to enable him to be pulled out during
emergency.
f) The area should be barricaded or cordoned of by suitable means to avoid mishaps of any kind.
Proper warning signs should be displayed for the safety of the public whenever cleaning works
are undertaken during night or day.
g) No smoking or open flames shall be allowed near the blocked manhole being cleaned. (h) The
malba obtained on account of cleaning of blocked manholes and sewer lines should be
immediately removed to avoid accidents on account of slippery nature of the malba.
h) Workers should not be allowed to work inside the manhole continuously. He should be given rest
intermittently. The PBC PBC Engineer may decide the time up to which a worker may be
allowed to work continuously inside the manhole.
i) Gas masks with Oxygen Cylinder should be kept at site for use in emergency.
j) Air-blowers should be used for flow of fresh air through the manholes. Whenever called for,
portable air blowers are recommended for ventilating the manholes. The Motors for these shall
be vapor proof and of totally enclosed type. Non sparking gas engines also could be used but
they should be placed at least 2 meters away from the opening and on the leeward side
protected from wind so that they will not be a source of friction on any inflammable gas that
might be present.
Page 197 of 432

k) The workers engaged for cleaning the manholes/sewers should be properly trained before
allowing to work in the manhole.
l) The workers shall be provided with Gumboots or non-sparking shoes, bump helmets and gloves,
non-sparking tools, safety lights and gas masks and portable air blowers (when necessary).
They must be supplied with barrier cream for anointing the limbs before working inside the sewer
lines.
m) Workmen descending a manhole shall try each ladder stop or rung carefully before putting his
full weight on it to guard against insecure fastening due to corrosion of the rung fixed to manhole
well.
n) If a man has received a physical injury, he should be brought out of the sewer immediately and
adequate medical aid should be provided to him.
o) The extent to which these precautions are to be taken depend on individual situation but the
decision of the PBC Engineer regarding the steps to be taken in this regard in an individual case
will be final.
Signboards
Signboards shall be placed at each of the project offices, at important locations and at each DNI zone,
in english, information about the project and Authority, and the names of the PBC Engineer and
Operator in a form and size to be agreed by the PBC Engineer. They shall be of durable construction
capable of withstanding the effects of the climate until the end of the performance based contract
period.
The Operator shall keep the signboards in good repair for the duration of the contract and shall remove
them on completion of the Contract.
Besides these signboards the Operator shall not, except with the written authority of the PBC
Engineer, exhibit or permit to be exhibited on the Site any other form of advertisement.
Site Drainage
The Operator shall keep each section of the works well drained until the PBC Engineer certifies that it
is substantially complete and shall ensure that, so far as is practicable, all work is carried out in the dry.
Site areas shall be kept well drained and free from standing water except where this is impracticable
having regard to methods of Temporary Works properly adopted by the Operator.
The Operator shall provide, operate and maintain in sufficient quantity such pumping equipment, well
points, pipes and other equipment as may be necessary to minimize damage, inconvenience and
interference and shall construct, operate and maintain all temporary coffer-dams, sumps, ditches,
drains and other temporary works as may be necessary to remove water from the Site while
construction is in progress. Such Temporary Works and construction equipment shall not be removed
without the approval of the PBC Engineer.
Notwithstanding any approval by the PBC Engineer of the Operator's arrangements for the removal of
water, the Operator shall be responsible for the sufficiency thereof and for keeping the Works safe at
all times and for making good at his own expense any damage to the Works.
Page 198 of 432

The Operator shall be responsible to keep the Site clear of water at whatever pump rate is found
necessary.
The Operator’s site drainage facilities shall not cause pollution in any local watercourses, he shall be
responsible for any legal action resulting from pollution events.
Detours and Traffic Control
The Operator shall program his work in such a way that, wherever the temporary closure of street
sections to public thoroughfare cannot be avoided, the duration of traffic diversion can be kept as short
as possible. No streets shall be closed and no detours shall be introduced and no traffic diverted until
the Operator's proposals have been approved by the PBC Engineer and the appropriate Government
authorities, such as the Public Works Department or Police department.
Where work is to be carried out in public roads, the Operator shall give notice to the PBC Engineer
sufficiently in advance of the date on which he wishes to commence such work.
The Authority shall be responsible for obtaining the permission of the PBC Engineer, public works
department and the police. The Operator shall assist the Authority in seeking permissions from the
relevant authorities. in for activities he intends to carry out in public roads. Two copies of the Operator's
proposals to the relevant authorities shall be submitted to the PBC Engineer. One copy of all obtained
approvals shall be submitted to the PBC Engineer.
The Operator's shall consider that processing of the documentation required by the local authorities
prior to the cutting of existing public roads takes approximately 30 days. During the monsoon period no
road cuttings are normally allowed.
Detours shall be selected in such a way that the inconvenience to the affected traffic as well as to the
inhabitants of the affected areas is kept to a minimum.
The Operator shall furnish, install and maintain at all times during the execution of the Works all
necessary traffic signs, barricades, lights, signals and other traffic control devices, including flagging
and other means of guiding traffic through the work zone. Traffic control shall be managed in
accordance with prevailing rules and regulations, and with the approval and to the satisfaction of the
PBC Engineer.
All devices mentioned above shall be in conformity with the requirements of the Roads Department. All
traffic signs and control devices to be furnished and installed by the Operator shall be approved by the
PBC Engineer for their location, position, visibility, adequacy and manner of use under specific job
conditions.
All traffic control devices necessary for the initial stage of construction shall be properly placed and
operational before any construction is allowed to start. When work of a progressive nature is involved,
the necessary signs shall be moved concurrently where they are needed.
If the PBC Engineer determines that proper provisions for safe traffic control are not being provided or
maintained, he may restrict construction operations affected by such defective signs or devices until
Page 199 of 432

such provisions are established or maintained, or may altogether order suspension of the Work until a
proper traffic control is achieved. In case of serious or wilful disregard by the Operator of the safety of
the public or his employees, the PBC Engineer may take necessary steps to rectify the situation and
deduct the cost thereof from monies due or becoming due to the Operator. The Operator shall be
responsible for all resulting delays.
The Operator shall designate or otherwise employ personnel to furnish continuous surveillance of the
traffic control operations. The designated personnel shall be available day and night to respond to calls
involving damage due to traffic accidents.
At sections where traffic is in operation and when ordered by the PBC Engineer, the movements of the
Operator's equipment from one place of work to another shall be subject to traffic control. During rush
hours movement of larger vehicles, such as trucks, cranes, dumpers, etc. through main thoroughfare
are not permitted by the police. Spillage resulting from hauling operations along or across the road way
shall be removed immediately at the Operator's expense.
The cost of road construction for detours will be paid separately but costs of traffic control is deemed to
be included in the rates for works.
Provision of Temporary Services
When the execution of the Works requires the temporary disconnection of existing public utilities, the
Operator shall provide the affected users with temporary services in at least the same standard as the
original services.
For water supply he may install temporary lines or arrange for regular supply by tankers. The amount
of water to be provided for the interruption period for a specific area shall be assessed by the Operator.
The Operator shall submit to the PBC Engineer, for its approval, the recommended volume of water to
be provided.
When forced to disconnect existing sewers/drainage facility, the Operator shall install temporary pipes
of adequate size to carry off sewage/drainage. No sewage/drainage shall be allowed to flow upon the
ground surface or into the trench excavation.
No valve or other controls in public service facilities shall be operated by the Operator without approval
of the PBC Engineer and the relevant authorities. All users affected by such operation shall be notified
by the Operator at least one hour before the operation and advised of the probable time when service
will be restored.
Protection of Adjoining Property and Reinstatement upon Completion
The Operator shall be responsible and take all measures in order to protect adjoining property
including buildings, electrical and telephone poles, bridges and culverts, retaining walls, compound
walls and fences, and other structures. Prior to the commencement of the activities, the Operator shall
assess the probability and extent of unavoidable damages, if any, to the building and properties and
submit his assessment to the PBC Engineer. The PBC Engineer may make his own opinion and if
required may order arrangements for protection or repair of such likely unavoidable damage in which
Page 200 of 432

event the Operator shall complete the activities.
Temporary facilities shall be provided by the Operator, only for as long as required after which he shall
dismantle and remove the same from their place of use as speedily as possible. Re-usable
components shall be safely stored by the Operator in his yard. The place of use shall be cleared and
reinstated immediately to at least the condition existing before the temporary facilities were provided,
and to the satisfaction of the PBC Engineer.
Coordination with Other Authorities
Statutory Services
As far as possible the Operator shall acquaint himself with the actual location of all existing public
utilities such as sewers, water mains, drains, cables for electricity, telephone lines, lighting poles,
masts, etc., before commencing any activities likely to affect the existing utilities. The Operator shall
with the assistance of the Authority obtain such information directly from the responsible authorities as
early as possible.
Notices, Permits
Well in advance of the programmed start of any work which may affect traffic or any existing utilities the
Operator shall give advance information to the Authority/PBC Engineer indicating the type, the exact
location, the programmed starting time and the expected duration of the activities and shall provide
whatever particulars may be required by the authorities to issue any required permits and make all
necessary arrangements. The Authority will provide necessary permissions.
Page 201 of 432

SCHEDULE 10: MINIMUM BULK WATER DEMAND

The Minimum Bulk Water Demand is the cumulative water availability in million liters per day (MLD) at the
Designated Reservoir. The Authority or its agents shall measure the quantity of water at each Designated
Reservoir. The Authority may install bulk water meters to measure the quantity of water discharged on each
day.
The Technical Auditor shall calculate Minimum Bulk Water Demand (the “Minimum Bulk Water Demand”)
based on the following formula:
Minimum Bulk Water Demand for every year = domestic water requirement (calculated at 135 liters per
capita per day) + non-domestic water demand (calculated as per CPHEEO guidelines) x (1 + percentage of
NRW)
where, the NRW percentage for an area would be dependent on the Baseline Study and Schedule 5.
An indicative Minimum Bulk Water Demand are as follows:
S NO Year Quantity (in MLD)
1 2019 30
2 2020 30
3 2021 30
4 2022 30
5 2023 30
6 2024 30
7 2025 35
8 2026 35
9 2027 35
10 2028 35
11 2029 35
12 2030 35
13 2031 40
14 2032 40
15 2033 40
16 2034 40
17 2035 40
The number of Designated Reservoirs which would receive bulk water may change depending on the
change in Service Area or depending on the hydraulic design of the Project.
Page 202 of 432

SCHEDULE 11: COMPLETION CERTIFICATE FORMAT
1. I/We, …… (Name of the Technical Auditor), acting as Technical Auditor, under and in accordance
with the Agreement dated …….. (the “Agreement”), for improvements to water service to achieve a
Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply in Shimla (“Project”), through ….. (Name of Operator), hereby
certify that the tests and inspection have been successfully undertaken to determine compliance of the
Project with the provisions of the Agreement, and I/We am/are satisfied that the Project can be safely and
reliably placed in commercial service of the Customers thereof.
2. It is certified that, in terms of the aforesaid Agreement, all works forming part of the Project have
been completed, and the Project is hereby declared fit for entry into commercial operation or entry into
Sustaining Period on this the day of [•].
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED For and on behalf of TECHNICAL AUDITOR by:
(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Address)
Page 203 of 432

SCHEDULE 12: TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR TECHNICAL AUDITOR
1. Scope
1.1. Terms of Reference for the Technical Auditor (the “TOR”) are being specified pursuant to the
Agreement dated……..(the “Agreement”), which has been entered into between the Authority
and……..(the “Operator”) for undertaking improvements to water service to achieve a Continuous
24x7 Pressurized Water Supply in Shimla (“Project”), in accordance with the terms and conditions
set forth in the Agreement and a copy of which is annexed hereto to form part of this TOR.
1.2. This TOR shall apply to the entire duration of the Project.
2. Definitions and interpretation
2.1. The words and expressions beginning with or in capital letters used in this TOR and not defined
herein but defined in the Agreement shall have, unless repugnant to the context, the meaning
respectively assigned to them in the Agreement.
2.2. References to Articles, Clauses and Schedules in this TOR shall, except where the context
otherwise requires, be deemed to be references to the Articles, Clauses and Schedules of the
Agreement, and references to Paragraphs shall be deemed to be references to Paragraphs of this
TOR.
2.3. The rules of interpretation stated in Article 1.2, Article 1.3 and Article 1.4 of the Agreement shall
apply, mutatis mutandis, to this TOR.
3. Role and functions of the Technical Auditor
3.1. The role and functions of the Technical Auditor shall include the following:
a) Review, providing comments and approval of the CAR, THP, SIP, updated SIPs and other
documents (as defined in the Agreement) submitted by the Operator;
b) Review, verify and approval of the Detailed Designs and Drawings and documents as set forth in
Paragraph 4;
c) review, inspection and monitoring of construction works in the Transition Period as set forth in
Paragraph 4;
d) conducting tests on completion of construction and issuing completion certificate as set forth in
Paragraph 4;
e) review, inspection and monitoring of O&M in the Sustaining Period as set forth in Paragraph 5;
f) during the Transition Period, at the end of every month or as may be required by the Authority,
certify the value of civil works done by the Operator, for that month, or for the period specified;
g) review, inspection and monitoring of Handback Requirements as set forth in Paragraph 6;
h) determining, as required under the Agreement, the costs of any works or services and/or their
reasonableness;
i) determining, as required under the Agreement, the period or any extension thereof, for performing
any duty or obligation;
j) undertake safety audit of the Project;
Page 204 of 432

k) setting out a mechanism in consultation with the Authority and the Operator for assessment of
achievement by the Operator of the Performance Standards.
l) advising on procedure for constant monitoring of achievement of the Performance Standards by the
Operator during the Project Period;
m) scrutinizing the invoices raised by the Operator for all Operator Payments or by works contractor/
service provider and make necessary recommendations to the Authority;
n) assisting the Parties in resolution of disputes in accordance with the Agreement;
o) assisting the Authority in issuing certificate of Transition Period Commencement and certificate of
Sustaining Period Commencement;
p) advise on claims or disagreements between the Parties;
q) undertaking all other duties and functions in accordance with the Agreement.
3.2. The Technical Auditor shall discharge its duties in a fair, impartial and efficient manner, consistent
with the highest standards of professional integrity and Good Industry Practice.
4. Transition Period
4.1. During the Start Up Period and Transition Period, the Technical Auditor shall undertake a detailed
review and inspection of the Designs and Drawings to be furnished by the Operator along with
supporting data, including the geo-technical and hydrological investigations, hydraulic isolation of
the DMAs and installation of boundary gate valves, characteristics of materials from borrow areas
and quarry sites, topographical surveys and Customer surveys. The Technical Auditor shall
complete such review and approval and send its comments/observations to the Authority and the
Operator within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of such Designs and Drawings. In particular, such
comments shall specify the conformity or otherwise of such Designs and Drawings with the Scope
of the Project and Technical Specifications.
4.2. The Technical Auditor shall review and approve any modified Designs and Drawings or supporting
Documents sent to it by the Operator and furnish its comments within 7 (seven) days of receiving
such Designs and Drawings or Documents.
4.3. The Technical Auditor shall review the Designs and Drawings and furnish its comments thereon to
the Authority and the Operator within 7 (seven) days of receiving such Designs and Drawings. The
Technical Auditor shall also review the Safety Report and furnish its comments thereon to the
Authority within 15 (fifteen) days of receiving such report.
4.4. The Technical Auditor shall review and approve the detailed design, construction methodology,
quality assurance procedures and the procurement, engineering and construction time schedule
sent to it by the Operator and furnish its comments within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt thereof.
4.5. In respect of the Designs and Drawings, Documents and Safety Report received by the Technical
Auditor for its review and comments during the Transition Period, the provisions of Paragraph 4
shall apply, mutatis mutandis.
4.6. The Technical Auditor shall review the monthly progress report furnished by the Operator and send
its comments thereon to the Authority and the Operator within 7 (seven) days of receipt of such
report.
4.7. The Technical Auditor shall inspect the construction works and the Project frequently in a month,
preferably after receipt of the monthly progress report from the Operator, but before the 20th
(twentieth) day of each month in any case, and make out a report of such inspection (the
Page 205 of 432

“Inspection Report”) setting forth an overview of the status, progress, quality and safety of
construction, including the work methodology adopted, the materials used and their sources, and
conformity of construction works with the Scope of the Project and the Technical Specifications. In a
separate section of the Inspection Report, the Technical Auditor shall describe in reasonable detail
the lapses, defects or deficiencies observed by it in the construction of the Project. The Inspection
Report shall also contain a review of the maintenance of the existing lanes in conformity with the
provisions of the Agreement. The Technical Auditor shall send a copy of its Inspection Report to the
Authority and the Operator within 7 (seven) days of the inspection.
4.8. The Technical Auditor shall inspect the Project on regular basis, to identify any lapses, defects or
deficiencies, and ensure that corrective remedial steps are taken up by the Operator.
4.9. For determining that the Additional Project Facilities conform to Technical Specifications, the
Technical Auditor shall require the Operator to carry out, or cause to be carried out, tests on a
sample basis, to be specified by the Technical Auditor in accordance with Good Industry Practice
for quality assurance. The Technical Auditor shall issue necessary directions to the Operator for
ensuring that the tests are conducted in a fair and efficient manner, and shall monitor and review
the results thereof.
4.10. The sample size of the tests, to be specified by the Technical Auditor under Paragraph 5.5,
shall comprise 10% (ten per cent) of the quantity or number of tests prescribed for each category or
type of tests in the Quality Control Manuals; provided that the Technical Auditor may, for reasons to
be recorded in writing, increase the aforesaid sample size by up to 10% (ten per cent) for certain
categories or types of tests.
4.11. The timing of tests referred to in Paragraph 4.10, and the criteria for acceptance/ rejection of
their results shall be determined by the Technical Auditor in accordance with the Quality Control
Manuals. The tests shall be undertaken on a random sample basis and shall be in addition to, and
independent of, the tests that may be carried out by the Operator for its own quality assurance in
accordance with Good Industry Practice.
4.12. In the event that the Operator carries out any remedial works for removal or rectification of
any defects or deficiencies, the Technical Auditor shall require the Operator to carry out, or cause to
be carried out, tests to determine that such remedial works have brought the Project Facilities into
conformity with the Technical Specifications, and the provisions of this Paragraph 4 shall apply to
such tests.
4.13. In the event that the Operator fails to achieve any of the Performance Standards, the
Technical Auditor shall undertake a review of the progress of construction and identify potential
delays, if any. If the Technical Auditor shall determine that completion of the Additional Project
Facilities is not feasible within the time specified in the Agreement, it shall require the Operator to
indicate within 15 (fifteen) days the steps proposed to be taken to expedite progress, and the period
within which the SPCD shall be achieved. Upon receipt of a report from the Operator, the Technical
Auditor shall review the same and send its comments to the Authority and the Operator forthwith.
4.14. If at any time during the Transition Period, the Technical Auditor determines that the
Operator has not made adequate arrangements for the safety of workers and Customers in the
zone of construction or that any work is being carried out in a manner that threatens the safety of
the workers and the Customers, it shall make a recommendation to the Authority forthwith,
identifying the whole or part of the Additional Project Facilities that should be suspended for
ensuring safety in respect thereof.
Page 206 of 432

4.15. In the event that the Operator carries out any remedial measures to secure the safety of
suspended works and Customers, it may, by notice in writing, require the Technical Auditor to
inspect such works, and within 3 (three) days of receiving such notice, the Technical Auditor shall
inspect the suspended works and make a report to the Authority forthwith, recommending whether
or not such suspension may be revoked by the Authority.
4.16. If suspension of Additional Project Facilities is for reasons not attributable to the Operator,
the Technical Auditor shall determine the extension of dates set forth in the Implementation
Schedule, to which the Operator is reasonably entitled, and shall notify the Authority and the
Operator of the same.
4.17. The Technical Auditor shall carry out, or cause to be carried out, all the required Tests and
issue a Completion Certificate, as the case may be. For carrying out its functions under this
Paragraph 4.17 and all matters incidental thereto, the Technical Auditor shall act under and in
accordance with the provisions of the Agreement.
4.18. Upon reference from the Authority, the Technical Auditor shall make a fair and reasonable
assessment of the costs of providing information, works and services as set forth in the Agreement
and certify the reasonableness of such costs for payment by the Authority to the Operator.
4.19. The Technical Auditor shall aid and advise the Operator in preparing the O&M Plan.
4.20. The Technical Auditor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring the quality of
implementation. Corrective steps towards quality enhancement, based on site visits and tests shall
be carried out. Technical designs with cost implications to the Authority shall be arrived at after
consent from Technical Auditor, as and when the need for the same arises, prior to the
communication to Operator.
5. Sustaining Period
5.1. In respect of the Designs and Drawings, Documents and Safety Report received by the Technical
Auditor for its review and comments during the Sustaining Period, the provisions of Paragraph 4
shall apply, mutatis mutandis.
5.2. The Technical Auditor shall review the annual Maintenance Programme furnished by the Operator
and send its comments thereon to the Authority and the Operator within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt
of the Maintenance Programme.
5.3. The Technical Auditor shall review the monthly status report furnished by the Operator and send its
comments thereon to the Authority and the Operator within 7 (seven) days of receipt of such report.
5.4. The Technical Auditor shall inspect the Project once every month, preferably after receipt of the
monthly status report from the Operator, but before the 20th (twentieth) day of each month in any
case, and make out an O&M Inspection Report setting forth an overview of the status, quality and
safety of O&M including its conformity with the Maintenance Requirements and Safety
Requirements. In a separate section of the O&M Inspection Report, the Technical Auditor shall
describe in reasonable detail the lapses, defects or deficiencies observed by it in O&M of the
Project. The Technical Auditor shall send a copy of its O&M Inspection Report to the Authority and
the Operator within 7 (seven) days of the inspection.
5.5. The Technical Auditor may inspect the Project more than once in a month, if any lapses, defects or
deficiencies require such inspections.
5.6. The Technical Auditor shall in its O&M Inspection Report specify the tests, if any, that the Operator
shall carry out, or cause to be carried out, for the purpose of determining that the Project is in
Page 207 of 432

conformity with the Maintenance Requirements. It shall monitor and review the results of such tests
and the remedial measures, if any, taken by the Operator in this behalf.
5.7. In respect of any defect or deficiency, the Technical Auditor shall, in conformity with Good Industry
Practice, specify the permissible limit of deviation or deterioration with reference to the Technical
Specifications and shall also specify the time limit for repair or rectification of any deviation or
deterioration beyond the permissible limit.
5.8. The Technical Auditor shall determine if any delay has occurred in completion of repair or remedial
works in accordance with the Agreement, and shall also determine the Damages, if any, payable by
the Operator to the Authority for such delay.
5.9. The Technical Auditor shall examine the request of the Operator for closure of any lane(s) of the
carriageway for undertaking maintenance/repair thereof, keeping in view the need to minimize
disruption in traffic and the time required for completing such maintenance/repair in accordance with
Good Industry Practice. It shall grant permission with such modifications, as it may deem
necessary, within 3 (three) days of receiving a request from the Operator. Upon expiry of the
permitted period of closure, the Technical Auditor shall monitor the re-opening of such lane(s), and
in case of delay, determine the Damages payable by the Operator to the Authority.
5.10. The Technical Auditor shall monitor and review the curing of defects and deficiencies by the
Operator.
5.11. In the event that the Operator notifies the Technical Auditor of any modifications that it
proposes to make to the Project, the Technical Auditor shall review the same and send its
comments to the Authority and the Operator within 15 (fifteen) days of receiving the proposal.
6. Termination
6.1. At any time, not earlier than 90 (ninety) days prior to Termination but not later than 15 (fifteen) days
prior to such Termination, the Technical Auditor shall, in the presence of a representative of the
Operator, inspect the Project for determining compliance by the Operator with the Handback
Requirements and, if required, cause tests to be carried out at the Operator’s cost for determining
such compliance. If the Technical Auditor determines that the status of the Project is such that its
repair and rectification would require a larger amount, it shall recommend retention of the required
amount in the Escrow Account and the period of retention thereof.
6.2. The Technical Auditor shall inspect the Project once in every 15 (fifteen) days during a period of 90
(ninety) days after Termination for determining the liability of the Operator, in respect of the defects
or deficiencies specified therein. If any such defect or deficiency is found by the Technical Auditor, it
shall make a report in reasonable detail and send it forthwith to the Authority and the Operator.
7. Meetings, Records and Reporting
7.1. Meetings
The TA shall attend regular meetings (“Project Review Meetings” or “PRMs”) with the Authority, the
Operator, third party works contractors, and service provider to be held at least once a month during the
Project Period to report on progress and quality of work performed by the Operator, third party works
contractors, and service provider and to discuss problems or other pertinent matters relating to the work.
The TA shall take notes at the meetings and produce the PRM minutes and provide a copy to each
stakeholder who attended or would normally be present at the meeting. The PRM minutes should
highlight all elements of the project on which there are delays or other problems with summary of actions
taken or to be taken to resolve these with clear allocation of responsibility for each.
Page 208 of 432

7.2. Reporting requirements:

TA shall prepare a schedule of reports and the frequency of submission and shall finalize the same in
consultation with the Authority. The indicative schedule is provided below:
Monthly Progress Reports 5 copies
Monthly and Periodic Reports 5 copies
Final Completion Report at end of Transition Period 5 copies + a soft copy
a) In addition to attending the review meetings hereinabove mentioned, the TA shall also participate in
emergency or extra-ordinary meetings of the Parties held to deal with any Force Majeure Event or
other exigencies.
b) The TA shall prepare and submit to the Authority, Progress Reports in the schedule mentioned
above of Project which shall include:
o construction schedule for the succeeding month;
o report on Tests
o report on notices issued
o issues, if any, with regard to the works along with the details of the action taken for the
resolution of the same;
o issues, if any, with regard to invoices and payments; and
o photographic record of progress of works over the previous week.
7.3. The TA shall, in the ordinary course, maintain records of the activities undertaken by it in discharge
of its functions and responsibilities. This would include records in respect of the following:
a) Manpower deployed and other organizational arrangements of the TA;
b) Reviews of documents submitted to it by the Operator to implement capital works, such as manuals,
drawings, As-Built Drawings, schedules, plans and reports;
c) Inspections undertaken and notices/ instructions issued to the Operator;
d) Review of compliance with Operator Agreement and Third Party Contracts;
e) Tests;
f) Payment of Operator Payments, and deduction of other adjustments for shortfall in performance
g) Force Majeure Events;
h) Breaches and defaults by the Parties.
7.4. The TA shall prepare a report on Handback Requirements, and compliance of the same by the
Operator.
7.5. The TA shall prepare any other report as may be reasonably required by the Authority or as may be
necessary to give effect to the provisions of the Agreement.
8. Duration
8.1. The appointment of TA shall be for a period of four years from award of the appointment, and may
be extended on mutually agreeable terms. The Authority will contract with the TA and make
payments.
Page 209 of 432

9. Technical Auditor Team and Skill Requirement

9.1. It is envisaged that the prospective Technical Auditor will deploy skills internally or procure them
from outside experts.
a) Team Leader – The Team Leader shall be a professionally qualified, preferably post-Graduate, Civil
Engineer with at least 15 years of experience and should be well-versed with supervision of water
supply contracts. The Team Leader shall have experience on projects financed by multilateral and
international agencies with capability to handle environmentally sound construction methods. The
Team Leader shall have suitable experience in handling design and performance monitoring of
network systems.
b) Civil Engineers - The Civil Engineer (for assessing the quality and Performance Standards in
SJPNL) shall be a professionally qualified Graduate Civil Engineer with at least 10 years of
experience in construction management and quality assurance. The Civil Engineer is expected to be
familiar with various standards / specifications, contract procedures, design and quality controls in
relation to advance network management.
c) Junior Engineer – The Junior Engineer shall be a professionally-qualified graduate engineer or its
equivalent with at least 5 years professional experience and shall be familiar with documentation and
reporting tools.
d) Support Staff – Field Engineers, Surveyors, Lab Technicians, Site Supervisors, Quality Control
Engineers and Administrative Staff, as appropriate to their individual tasks.
e) The team shall also draw upon specific experience in carrying out its activities from sector experts,
as applicable.
f) Environmental Engineer – An environmental engineer with post-graduation in Environmental
Engineering or related professional qualification, with 10 years of experience in preparation and
implementation of environmental assessments and management plans for urban infrastructure
projects.
Page 210 of 432

SCHEDULE 13: ESCROW AGREEMENT
THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT (“Escrow Agreement”) is entered into on this day of …[date]…...
AMONGST
(1) Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited (hereinafter referred to as “SJPNL”), a company organized,
incorporated, registered and existing under the Companies Act having its registered office at
______________[insert address] (hereafter referred to as the “Authority” which expression shall,
unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its administrators, successors and
assigns);
and
(2) [Name of the Operator], a joint venture of (i) [please insert name of the lead member] (“Lead
Member”); (ii) [please insert name of second member]; (iii) [please insert name of the third member];
and (iv) [please insert name of fourth member]; who have together formed a joint venture agreement
(“JVA”) dated [date on which JVA was executed]. The joint venture shall be represented by the Lead
Member, designated as such under the terms of the JVA. [Name of the Operator] is a limited liability
company established under the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 with CIN [●] and having its
registered office at [registered address], (hereinafter referred to as the “Operator” which expression
shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its successors and permitted
assigns and substitutes);
and
(3) [Name of the Escrow Bank], having its registered office at [registered address of the Escrow Bank],
(hereinafter referred to as the “Escrow Bank” which expression shall, unless repugnant to the
context or meaning thereof, include its successors and substitutes).
WHEREAS:
(A) The Authority has entered into an Agreement dated [date of Agreement] with the Operator (the
“Agreement”) for implementation of continuous pressurized water supply in Shimla (“Project”), in
accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in the Agreement and a copy of the Agreement is
annexed hereto and marked as Annex-A to form part of this Escrow Agreement.
(B) The Agreement requires the Operator and Authority to establish an Escrow Account, inter alia, on
the terms and conditions stated therein.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and the respective covenants and agreements set
forth in this Escrow Agreement, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, and intending
to be legally bound hereby, the Parties agree as follows:
1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1.1 Definitions
Page 211 of 432

In this Escrow Agreement, the following words and expressions shall, unless repugnant to the context or
meaning thereof, have the meaning hereinafter respectively assigned to them:
“Escrow Agreement” means this Escrow Agreement and any amendment thereto made in accordance with
the provisions contained herein;
“Agreement” means the Agreement referred to in Recital (A) above and annexed hereto as Annex-A, and
shall include all of its Recitals and Schedules and any amendments made thereto in accordance with the
provisions contained in this behalf therein;
“Cure Period” means the period specified in this Escrow Agreement for curing any breach or default of any
provision of this Escrow Agreement by the Operator, and shall commence from the date on which a notice is
delivered by the Authority, to the Operator asking the latter to cure the breach or default specified in such
notice;
“Escrow Account” means an escrow account established in terms of and under this Escrow Agreement, and
shall include all the Sub-Accounts;
“Escrow Default” shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in Clause 6.1;
“Parties” means the parties to this Escrow Agreement collectively and “Party” shall mean any of the Parties
to this Escrow Agreement individually;
“Payment Date” means, in relation to any payment specified in Clause 4.1, the date(s) specified for such
payment;
“Sub-Accounts” means the respective Sub-Accounts of the Escrow Account, into which the monies specified
in Clause 4.1 would be credited every month and paid out if due, and if not due in a month then appropriated
proportionately in such month and retained in the respective Sub Accounts and paid out therefrom on the
Payment Date(s).
1.2 Interpretation
1.2.1 The words and expressions beginning with capital letters and defined in this Escrow Agreement shall
have the meaning ascribed thereto herein, and the words and expressions used in this Escrow Agreement
and not defined herein but defined in the Agreement shall, unless repugnant to the context, have the
meaning ascribed thereto in the Agreement.
1.2.2 References to Clauses are, unless stated otherwise, references to Clauses of this Escrow
Agreement.
1.2.3 The rules of interpretation stated in Article 1.2.1, Article 1.2.2 and Article 1.2.3 of the Agreement
shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to this Escrow Agreement.
2. ESCROW ACCOUNT
2.1 Escrow Bank to act as trustee
2.1.1 The Operator hereby appoints the Escrow Bank to act as trustee for the Authority, and the Operator
in connection herewith and authorizes the Escrow Bank to exercise such rights, powers, authorities and
discretion as are specifically delegated to the Escrow Bank by the terms hereof together with all such rights,
powers, authorities and discretion as are reasonably incidental hereto, and the Escrow Bank accepts such
appointment pursuant to the terms hereof.
2.1.2 The Operator hereby declares that all rights, title and interest in and to the Escrow Account shall be
vested in the Escrow Bank and held in trust for the Authority and the Operator, and applied in accordance
Page 212 of 432

with the terms of this Escrow Agreement. No person other than the Authority, and the Operator shall have
any rights hereunder as the beneficiaries of, or as third party beneficiaries under this Escrow Agreement.
2.2 Acceptance of Escrow Bank
The Escrow Bank hereby agrees to act as such and to accept all payments and other amounts to be
delivered to and held by the Escrow Bank pursuant to the provisions of this Escrow Agreement. The Escrow
Bank shall hold and safeguard the Escrow Account during the term of this Escrow Agreement and shall treat
the amount in the Escrow Account as monies deposited by the Operator, or the Authority with the Escrow
Bank. In performing its functions and duties under this Escrow Agreement, the Escrow Bank shall act in trust
for the benefit of, and as agent for, the Authority, and the Operator or their nominees, successors or assigns,
in accordance with the provisions of this Escrow Agreement.
2.3 Establishment and Operation of Escrow Account
2.3.1 Within 30 (thirty) days from the date of this Escrow Agreement, and in any case prior to the 90
(ninety) days from the Effective Date, the Operator and the Authority shall open and establish the Escrow
Account with the (name of Branch) Branch of the Escrow Bank. The Escrow Account shall be denominated
in Indian Rupees.
2.3.2 The Escrow Bank shall maintain the Escrow Account in accordance with the terms of this Escrow
Agreement and its usual practices and applicable regulations, and pay the maximum rate of interest payable
to similar Customers on the balance in the said account from time to time.
2.3.3 The Escrow Bank and the Operator shall, after consultation with the Authority, agree on the detailed
mandates, terms and conditions, and operating procedures for the Escrow Account, but in the event of any
conflict or inconsistency between this Escrow Agreement and such mandates, terms and conditions, or
procedures, this Escrow Agreement shall prevail.
2.4 Escrow Bank’s fee
The Escrow Bank shall be entitled to receive its fee and expenses in an amount, and at such times, as may
be agreed between the Escrow Bank, the Operator and the Authority. For the avoidance of doubt, such fee
and expenses shall form part of the O&M Expenses and shall be appropriated from the Escrow Account in
accordance with Clause 4.1.
2.5 Rights of the parties
The rights of the Authority, and the Operator in the monies held in the Escrow Account are set forth in their
entirety in this Escrow Agreement and the Authority, and the Operator shall have no other rights against or to
the monies in the Escrow Account.
3. DEPOSITS INTO ESCROW ACCOUNT

3.1 Deposits by the Operator
3.1.1 The Operator agrees and undertakes that it shall deposit into and/or credit the Escrow Account with:
(a) all monies received in relation to the Project from any source, including the Authority;
(b) all funds received by the Operator from its Members including Lead Member, in any manner
or form;
(c) all User Charges billed and collected from the Customers; and
(d) all proceeds received pursuant to any insurance claims.
Page 213 of 432

3.1.2 The Operator may at any time make deposits of its other funds into the Escrow Account, provided
that the provisions of this Escrow Agreement shall apply to such deposits.
3.2 Deposits by the Authority
The Authority agrees and undertakes that, as and when due and payable, it shall deposit into and/or credit
the Escrow Account with:
(a) all Operator Payments (as defined in Article 22 of the Agreement) and any other monies
disbursed by the Authority to the Operator;
(b) all proceeds received pursuant to any insurance claims.
(b) all Termination Payments.
Provided that, notwithstanding the provisions of Clause 4.1.1, the Authority shall be entitled to appropriate
from the aforesaid amounts, any Operator Payments due and payable to it by the Operator, and the balance
remaining shall be deposited into the Escrow Account. In the event of a shortfall in the payment of the
Operator Payments from the Escrow Account or in the event of a shortfall in maintaining the Minimum Sub-
Account Balance (as defined in the Agreement), the Authority shall upon receiving notice from the Escrow
Bank transfer the shortfall amount from the Operations Bank Account to the relevant Sub-Account set up in
accordance with this Escrow Agreement.
3.3 Interest on Deposits
The Escrow Bank agrees and undertakes that all interest accruing on the balances of the Escrow Account
shall be credited to the Escrow Account; provided that the Escrow Bank shall be entitled to appropriate
therefrom the fee and expenses due to it in relation to the Escrow Account and credit the balance remaining
to the Escrow Account.
4. WITHDRAWALS FROM ESCROW ACCOUNT

4.1 Withdrawals during Project Period
4.1.1 At the beginning of every month, or at such shorter intervals as the Operator may by written
instructions determine, the Escrow Bank shall withdraw amounts from the Escrow Account and appropriate
them in the following order by depositing such amounts in the relevant Sub-Accounts for making due
payments, and if such payments are not due in any month, then retain such monies in such Sub-Accounts
and pay out therefrom on the Payment Date(s):
a) all taxes due and payable by the Operator for and in relation to its obligations under the
Agreement;
b) all payments and Damages certified by the Authority as due and payable to it by the Operator
pursuant to the Agreement;
c) O&M expenses and other costs incurred by the Authority, provided it certifies to the Escrow
Bank that it had incurred such expenses in accordance with the Agreement and that the
amounts claimed are due to it from the Operator;
d) all payments relating to Works Fees (C), subject to and in accordance with the conditions, if any,
set forth in the Agreement;
e) all payments relating to Major Maintenance of the Project Facilities, subject to and in accordance
with the conditions, if any, set forth in the Agreement;
f) O&M Fees, subject to and in accordance with the conditions, if any, set forth in the Agreement;
Page 214 of 432

g) balance, if any, in accordance with the joint instructions of the Operator and the Authority.
4.1.2 No later than 60 (sixty) days prior to the commencement of each Accounting Year, the Operator
shall provide to the Escrow Bank, with prior written approval of the Authority details of the amounts likely to
be required for each of the payment obligations set forth in this Clause 4.1; provided that such amounts may
be subsequently modified, with prior written approval of the Authority, if fresh information received during the
course of the year makes such modification necessary.
4.2 Withdrawals upon Termination
Upon Termination of the Agreement, all amounts standing to the credit of the Escrow Account shall,
notwithstanding anything in this Escrow Agreement, be appropriated and dealt with in the following order:
a) all taxes due and payable by the Operator for and in relation to its obligations under the Project;
b) all payments and Damages certified by the Authority as due and payable to it by the Operator
pursuant to the Agreement, including claims in connection with or arising out of Termination;
c) O&M expenses and other costs incurred by the Authority, provided it certifies to the Escrow
Bank that it had incurred such expenses in accordance with the Agreement and that the
amounts claimed are due to it from the Operator;
d) retention and payments arising out of, or in relation to, liability for defects and deficiencies set
forth in Article 34 of the Agreement;
e) incurred or accrued Operator Payments;
f) any other payments required to be made under the Agreement; and
g) balance, if any, in accordance with the joint instructions of the Operator and the Authority.
Provided that the disbursements specified in this Sub-clause (g) of this Clause shall be
undertaken only after the Vesting Certificate has been issued by the Authority.
4.3 Application of insufficient funds
Funds in the Escrow Account shall be applied in the serial order of priority set forth in Clauses 4.1 and 4.2,
as the case may be. If the funds available are not sufficient to meet all the requirements, the Escrow Bank
shall apply such funds in the serial order of priority until exhaustion thereof.
4.4 Application of insurance proceeds
Notwithstanding anything in this Escrow Agreement, the proceeds from all insurance claims, except life and
injury, shall be deposited into and/or credited to the Escrow Account and utilized for any necessary repair,
reconstruction, reinstatement, replacement, improvement, delivery or installation of the Project Facilities and
the balance remaining, if any, shall be applied in accordance with the provisions contained in the Agreement.
4.5 Withdrawals during Suspension
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Escrow Agreement, the Authority may exercise all
or any of the rights of the Operator during the period of Suspension under Article 28 of the Agreement. Any
instructions given by the Authority to the Escrow Bank during such period shall be complied with as if such
instructions were given by the Operator under this Escrow Agreement and all actions of the Authority
hereunder shall be deemed to have been taken for and on behalf of the Operator.
5. OBLIGATIONS OF THE ESCROW BANK

5.1 Segregation of funds
Page 215 of 432

Monies and other property received by the Escrow Bank under this Escrow Agreement shall, until used or
applied in accordance with this Escrow Agreement, be held by the Escrow Bank in trust for the purposes for
which they were received, and shall be segregated from other funds and property of the Escrow Bank.
5.2 Notification of balances
Seven (7) business days prior to each payment date (and for this purpose the Escrow Bank shall be entitled
to rely on an affirmation by the Operator and/or the Authority as to the relevant payment dates), the Escrow
Bank shall notify the Authority of the balances in the Escrow Account and Sub-Accounts as at the close of
business on the immediately preceding business day.
5.3 Communications and notices
In discharge of its duties and obligations hereunder, the Escrow Bank:
a) may, in the absence of bad faith or gross negligence on its part, rely as to any matters of fact
which might reasonably be expected to be within the knowledge of the Operator upon a
certificate signed by or on behalf of the Operator;
b) may, in the absence of bad faith or gross negligence on its part, rely upon the authenticity of any
communication or document believed by it to be authentic;
c) shall, within five (5) business days after receipt, deliver a copy to the Authority of any notice or
document received by it in its capacity as the Escrow Bank from the Operator or any other
person hereunder or in connection herewith; and
d) shall, five (5) business days after receipt, deliver a copy to the Operator of any notice or
document received by it from the Authority in connection herewith.
5.4 No set off
The Escrow Bank agrees not to claim or exercise any right of set off, banker’s lien or other right or remedy
with respect to amounts standing to the credit of the Escrow Account. For the avoidance of doubt, it is
hereby acknowledged and agreed by the Escrow Bank that the monies and properties held by the Escrow
Bank in the Escrow Account shall not be considered as part of the assets of the Escrow Bank and being trust
property, shall in the case of bankruptcy or liquidation of the Escrow Bank, be wholly excluded from the
assets of the Escrow Bank in such bankruptcy or liquidation.
5.5 Regulatory Approvals
The Escrow Bank shall use its best efforts to procure, and thereafter maintain and comply with, all regulatory
approvals required for it to establish and operate the Escrow Account. The Escrow Bank represents and
warrants that it is not aware of any reason why such regulatory approvals will not ordinarily be granted to the
Escrow Bank.
6. ESCROW DEFAULT
6.1 Escrow Default
6.1.1 Following events shall constitute an event of default by the Operator (an “Escrow Default”) unless
such event of default has occurred as a result of Force Majeure or any act or omission of the Authority:
(a) the Operator commits breach of this Escrow Agreement by failing to deposit any receipts into the
Escrow Account as provided herein and fails to cure such breach by depositing the same into the Escrow
Account within a Cure Period of 5 (five) business days;
(b) the Operator causes the Escrow Bank to transfer funds to any account of the Operator in breach of
the terms of this Escrow Agreement and fails to cure such breach by depositing the relevant funds into the
Page 216 of 432

Escrow Account or any Sub-Account in which such transfer should have been made, within a Cure Period of
5 (five) business days; or
(c) the Operator commits or causes any other breach of the provisions of this Escrow Agreement and
fails to cure the same within a Cure Period of 5 (five) business days.
6.1.2 Upon occurrence of an Escrow Default, it shall be treated as the Operator Event of Default and the
consequences thereof shall be dealt with under and in accordance with the provisions of the Agreement.
7. TERMINATION OF ESCROW AGREEMENT
7.1 Duration of the Escrow Agreement
This Escrow Agreement shall remain in full force and effect so long as any sum remains to be advanced or is
outstanding from the Operator in respect of the its obligations remain to be discharged, unless terminated
earlier by consent of all the Parties or otherwise in accordance with the provisions of this Escrow Agreement.
7.2 Substitution of Escrow Bank
The Operator may, by not less than 45 (forty five) days prior notice to the Escrow Bank, and the Authority,
terminate this Escrow Agreement and appoint a new Escrow Bank, provided that the new Escrow Bank is
acceptable to the Authority and arrangements are made satisfactory to the Authority for transfer of amounts
deposited in the Escrow Account to a new Escrow Account established with the successor Escrow Bank.
The termination of this Escrow Agreement shall take effect only upon coming into force of an Escrow
Agreement with the substitute Escrow Bank.
7.3 Closure of Escrow Account
The Escrow Bank shall, at the request of the Operator and the Authority, after payment of all outstanding
amounts under the Agreement including the payments specified in Clause 4.1 and Clause 4.2, and upon
confirmation of receipt of such payments from respective Parties, close the Escrow Account and Sub-
Accounts and pay any amount standing to the credit thereof to the Operator and the Authority. Upon closure
of the Escrow Account hereunder, the Escrow Agreement shall be deemed to be terminated.
8. SUPPLEMENTARY ESCROW AGREEMENT
8.1 Supplementary Escrow Agreement
The Operator and the Authority shall be entitled to enter into a Supplementary Escrow Agreement with the
Escrow Bank providing, inter alia, for detailed procedures and documentation for withdrawals from Sub-
Accounts pursuant to Clause 4.1.1 and for matters not covered under this Escrow Agreement such as
restrictions on withdrawals by the Operator in the event of breach of this Escrow Agreement or upon
occurrence of an Escrow Default, procedures relating to operation of the Escrow Account and withdrawal
therefrom, reporting requirements and any matters incidental thereto; provided that such Supplementary
Escrow Agreement shall not contain any provision which is inconsistent with this Escrow Agreement and in
the event of any conflict or inconsistency between provisions of this Escrow Agreement and such
Supplementary Escrow Agreement, the provisions of this Escrow Agreement shall prevail.
9. INDEMNITY
9.1 General indemnity
9.1.1 The Operator will indemnify, defend and hold the Authority, and the Escrow Bank, harmless against
any and all proceedings, actions and third party claims for any loss, damage, cost and expense arising out of
any breach by the Operator of any of its obligations under this Escrow Agreement or on account of failure of
the Operator to comply with Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits.
Page 217 of 432

9.1.2 The Authority will indemnify, defend and hold the Operator harmless against any and all
proceedings, actions and third party claims for any loss, damage, cost and expense arising out of failure of
the Authority to fulfil any of its obligations under this Escrow Agreement materially and adversely affecting
the performance of the Operator Obligations under the Agreement or this Escrow Agreement other than any
loss, damage, cost and expense arising out of acts done in discharge of their lawful functions by the
Authority, its officers, servants and agents.
9.1.3 The Escrow Bank will indemnify, defend and hold the Operator and the Authority harmless against
any and all proceedings, actions and third party claims for any loss, damage, cost and expense arising out of
failure of the Escrow Bank to fulfil its obligations under this Escrow Agreement materially and adversely
affecting the performance of the Operator Obligations and the Authority Obligations under the Agreement
other than any loss, damage, cost and expense, arising out of acts done in discharge of their lawful functions
by the Escrow Bank, its officers, servants and agents.
9.2 Notice and contest of claims
In the event that any Party hereto receives a claim from a third party in respect of which it is entitled to the
benefit of an indemnity under Clause 9.1 or in respect of which it is entitled to reimbursement (the
“Indemnified Party”), it shall notify the other Party responsible for indemnifying such claim hereunder (the
“Indemnifying Party”) within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of the claim and shall not settle or pay the claim
without the prior approval of the Indemnifying Party, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or
delayed. In the event that the Indemnifying Party wishes to contest or dispute the claim, it may conduct the
proceedings in the name of the Indemnified Party and shall bear all costs involved in contesting the same.
The Indemnified Party shall provide all cooperation and assistance in contesting any claim and shall sign all
such writings and documents as the Indemnifying Party may reasonably require.
10. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
10.1.1 Any dispute, difference or claim arising out of or in connection with this Escrow Agreement, which is
not resolved amicably, shall be decided finally by reference to arbitration to a Board of Arbitrators comprising
one nominee of each Party to the dispute, and where the number of such nominees is an even number, the
nominees shall elect another person to such Board. Such arbitration shall be held in accordance with the
Rules of Arbitration of the International Centre for Alternative Dispute Resolution, New Delhi (the “Rules”) or
such other rules as may be mutually agreed by the Parties, and shall be subject to the provisions of the
Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996.
10.1.2 The Arbitrators shall issue a reasoned award and such award shall be final and binding on the
Parties. The venue of arbitration shall be Shimla and the language of arbitration shall be English.
11. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
11.1 Governing law and jurisdiction
This Escrow Agreement shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with and governed by the laws of
India, and the Courts at Shimla shall have jurisdiction over all matters arising out of or relating to this Escrow
Agreement.
11.2 Priority of agreements
In the event of any conflict between the Agreement and this Escrow Agreement, the provisions contained in
the Agreement shall prevail over this Escrow Agreement.
11.3 Alteration of terms
Page 218 of 432

All additions, amendments, modifications and variations to this Escrow Agreement shall be effectual and
binding only if in writing and signed by the duly authorized representatives of the Parties.
11.4 Waiver
11.4.1 Waiver by any Party of a default by another Party in the observance and performance of any
provision of or obligations under this Escrow Agreement:
(a) shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any other or subsequent default hereof or of
other provisions of or obligations under this Escrow Agreement;
(b) shall not be effective unless it is in writing and executed by a duly authorized representative
of the Parties; and
(c) shall not affect the validity or enforceability of this Escrow Agreement in any manner.
11.4.2 Neither the failure by any Party to insist on any occasion upon the performance of the terms,
conditions and provisions of this Escrow Agreement or any obligation thereunder nor time or other
indulgence granted by any Party to another Party shall be treated or deemed as waiver of such breach or
acceptance of any variation or the relinquishment of any such right hereunder.
11.5 No third party beneficiaries
This Escrow Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties and no other person or entity shall have any
rights hereunder.
11.6 Survival
11.6.1 Termination of this Escrow Agreement
a) shall not relieve the Parties of any obligations hereunder which expressly or by implication
survive termination hereof; and
b) except as otherwise provided in any provision of this Escrow Agreement expressly limiting the
liability of either Party, shall not relieve either Party of any obligations or liabilities for loss or
damage to the other Party arising out of, or caused by, acts or omissions of such Party prior to
the effectiveness of such termination or arising out of such termination.
11.6.2 All obligations surviving the cancellation, expiration or termination of this Escrow Agreement shall
only survive for a period of three (3) years following the date of such termination or expiry of this Escrow
Agreement.
11.7 Severability
If for any reason whatever any provision of this Escrow Agreement is or becomes invalid, illegal or
unenforceable or is declared by any court of competent jurisdiction or any other instrumentality to be invalid,
illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality or enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not be affected
in any manner, and the Parties will negotiate in good faith with a view to agreeing to one or more provisions
which may be substituted for such invalid, unenforceable or illegal provisions, as nearly as is practicable to
such invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision. Failure to agree upon any such provisions shall not be
subject to dispute resolution under Clause 10.1 of this Escrow Agreement or otherwise.
11.8 Successors and Assigns
This Escrow Agreement shall be binding on and shall inure to the benefit of the Parties and their respective
successors and permitted assigns.
11.9 Notices
Page 219 of 432

All notices or other communications to be given or made under this Escrow Agreement shall be in writing
and shall either be delivered personally or sent by courier or registered post with an additional copy to be
sent by facsimile or e-mail. The address for service of each Party, its facsimile number or e-mail are set out
under its name on the signing pages hereto. A notice shall be effective upon actual receipt thereof, save that
where it is received after 5.30 (five thirty) p.m. on a business day, or on a day that is not a business day, the
notice shall be deemed to be received on the first business day following the date of actual receipt. Without
prejudice to the foregoing, a Party giving or making a notice or communication by facsimile or e-mail shall
promptly deliver a copy thereof personally, or send it by courier or registered post to the addressee of such
notice or communication. It is hereby agreed and acknowledged that any Party may by notice change the
address to which such notices and communications to it are to be delivered or mailed. Such change shall be
effective when all the Parties have notice of it.
11.10 Language
All notices, certificates, correspondence and proceedings under or in connection with this Escrow Agreement
shall be in English.
11.11 Authorized representatives
Each of the Parties shall, by notice in writing, designate their respective authorized representatives through
whom only all communications shall be made. A Party hereto shall be entitled to remove and/or substitute or
make fresh appointment of such authorized representative by similar notice.
11.12 Original document
This Escrow Agreement may be executed in four counterparts, each of which when executed and delivered
shall constitute an original of this Escrow Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF THE PARTIES HAVE EXECUTED AND DELIVERED THIS ESCROW
AGREEMENT AS OF THE DATE FIRST ABOVE WRITTEN.
THE COMMON SEAL OF THE OPERATOR has been affixed pursuant to the resolution passed by the
Board of Directors of the Operator at its meeting held on the________ day of _____ hereunto affixed in the
presence of __________ (authorized representative of the Operator), who has signed these presents in
token thereof and __________, Company Secretary / Authorised Officer who has countersigned the same in
token thereof :
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED For and on behalf of the OPERATOR:

(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Address)
(Fax No.)
(e-mail address)
Page 220 of 432

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED For and on behalf of the AUTHORITY:

(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Address)
(Fax No.)
(e-mail address)
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED For and on behalf of the ESCROW BANK:
(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Address)
(Fax No.)
(e-mail address)
Page 221 of 432

SCHEDULE 14: ENVIRONMENTAL CODE OF PRACTICE
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The proposed Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited (SJPNL) will complement the past and ongoing efforts
of Government of Himachal Pradesh (GoHP) to improve water supply services to the residents of the state of
Himachal Pradesh. The program component of the SJPNL will support policy reforms and consolidate
institutional development and governance improvement in the urban sector in the state, while the investment
component of the SJPNL will invest in water distribution network improvements in the project cities each
having a population, and identified considering the lack of basic services at present and willingness to
undertake reforms and institutional restructuring.
SJPNL water supply project is one of the projects proposed under the SJPNL. Water supply at present in
Shimla is intermittent, unreliable and suffers with huge losses and quality issues.
Project Scope. The project is formulated to address gaps in water infrastructure in a holistic and integrated
manner. The main objective of the SJPNL is to improve water efficiency, security, and provide safe treatment
and will have an important effect on public health and environment. Investments under this project include (i)
distribution network improvement (ii) provision of bulk water meters (iii) provision of house service
connections including consumer meters.
Implementation Arrangements. SJPNL shall be the Executing Agency (EA) and Implementing Agency (IA).
For monitoring environmental compliance, SJPNL shall appoint a Compliance and Safeguard Expert (CSE).
The CSE shall report to the MD Cum CEO of SJPNL.
The Operator shall be responsible for ensuring environmental compliances during the complete Project
Period (including construction and operations). The Operator personnel shall include Environment, Health
and Safety (EHS) supervisors. The Operator shall follow the reporting requirements stipulated by the CSE.
The CSE shall monitoring environmental compliances and submit monthly report to the Design Build
Operations Engineer. In case of non-compliance of environmental norms, applicable Liquidate Damages
may be deducted as per the Schedule 8 of the contract.
Environmental Management Plan (EMP): An environmental management plan (EMP) will be prepared
during the Start Up Period by the Operator, which includes (i) mitigation measures for environmental impacts
during implementation; (ii) an environmental monitoring program, and mitigating, monitoring, and reporting;
(iii) public consultation and information disclosure; and (iv) a grievance redressal mechanism.
Locations of the proposed infrastructures were considered to further reduce impacts. These include (i)
locating facilities on government-owned land to avoid the need for land acquisition and relocation of people;
and (ii) laying of pipes in ROW alongside main/access roads, to reduce acquisition of land and impacts on
livelihoods specifically in densely populated areas of the town.
Potential impacts were identified in relation to location, design, construction and operation of the improved
infrastructure. During the construction phase, impacts mainly arise from the need to dispose of moderate
quantities of waste soil and disturbance of residents, businesses, and traffic. These are common temporary
impacts of construction in urban areas, and there are well developed methods for their mitigation. Mitigation
measures have been developed to reduce all negative impacts to acceptable levels. Resettlement Plan
Page 222 of 432

prepared for the Project addresses temporary resettlement/livelihood issues resulting mainly from laying of
pipelines in busy commercial areas.
Measures such as appropriate scheduling of works (non-monsoon season, low traffic hours, etc.,) and
minimizing inconvenience by best construction methods will be employed. Traffic management plan will be
prepared for pipe laying works on busy roads. In the operational phase, all facilities and infrastructure will
operate with routine maintenance, which should not affect the environment. Facilities will need to be repaired
from time to time, but environmental impacts will be much less than those of the construction period as the
work will be infrequent, affecting small areas only.
Mitigation measures will be developed to reduce all negative impacts to acceptable levels. Mitigation will be
assured by a program of environmental monitoring to be conducted during construction. The environmental
monitoring program will ensure that all measures are implemented, and will determine whether the
environment is protected as intended. It will include observations on- and off-site, document checks, and
interviews with workers and beneficiaries.
Consultation, Disclosure and Grievance Redress. Public consultations were done in the preparation of
the project. Consultations will continue throughout the project implementation period with the assistance of
the NGOs. A grievance redressal mechanism is required to ensure any public grievances are addressed
quickly.
Monitoring and Reporting. The PBC Engineer will be responsible for monitoring. The Operator will submit
monthly/semi-annual monitoring reports to SJPNL. SJPNL will post the environmental monitoring reports on
its website.
Page 223 of 432

I. INTRODUCTION
A. Background
Environmental Regulatory Compliance

Table 1 presents a summary of environmental regulations and mandatory requirements
applicable to the Project.
Table 1: Applicable Environmental Regulations
Applicable Law Description Requirement
Water (Prevention and Act was enacted to provide for the Water treatment plant (WTP) requires
Control of Pollution) prevention and control of water CFE and CFO from HPPCB.
Act of 1974, Rules of pollution and the maintaining or
All relevant forms, prescribed fees
1975, and restoring of wholesomeness of
and procedures to obtain the CFE and
amendments water, by Central and State Pollution
CFO can be found in the HPPCB
Control Boards and assigning to
website (www.hppcb.gov.in).
CPCB/SPCBs powers and functions
relating to water pollution control.
Control of water pollution is
achieved through administering
conditions imposed in consent
issued under provision of the Water
(Prevention and Control of Pollution)
Act of 1974. These conditions
regulate the quality and quantity of
effluent, the location of discharge
and the frequency of monitoring of
effluents.
Such projects have to obtain

Consent For Establish (CFE) from
Himachal Pradesh Pollution Control
Board (HPPCB) before starting
implementation and Consent For
Operate (CFO) before
commissioning.
Air (Prevention and This Act was to achieve prevention, WTP does not require CFE and CFO
Control of Pollution) control and abatement of air under the Air Act. The following will
Act of 1981, Rules of pollution activities by assigning require CFE and CFO from HPPCB:
1982 and regulatory powers to Central and (i) diesel generators (more than 5
amendments. State boards for all such functions. KVA); (ii) Batching Plant hot mix
The Act also establishes ambient air plants; and (iii) stone crushers, if
quality standards. The projects installed for construction. All relevant
having potential to emit air pollutants forms, prescribed fees and
into the atmosphere have to obtain procedures to obtain the CFE and
CFE and CFO. The operator of the CFO can be found in the HPPCB
Page 224 of 432


project/facility has the responsibility website (www.hppcb.gov.in).
to adopt necessary air pollution
control measures for abating air
pollution.
Environment Emissions and discharges from the Applicable standards for Ambient air
(Protection) Act, 1986 facilities to be created or refurbished quality and vehicle exhaust emission
and CPCB or augmented shall comply with the norms Applicable noise standards.
Environmental notified standards. Rule 3 of the Act
Standards. Noise specifies ambient air quality
Pollution (Regulation standards in respect of noise for
and Control) Rules, different areas/zones.
2000 amended up to
2010.
Environment Policy Follows the National Project implementation should adhere

Guidelines – Himachal Environment Policy, 2006 and core to the policy aims of: conservation &
Pradesh objectives and policies are: - enhancement of environmental
Conserve and enhance resources, Integration of
environmental resources; assure environmental concerns into
environmental sustainability of key projects/plans, and capacity building
economic sectors; and, improve in environmental management under
environmental governance and water sector, major concerns, as the
capacity building it recommends policy notes, are: huge water losses &
specific strategies and actions to wastage, declining water availability,
address the key environmental pollution Relevant recommendations
issues: water resources, for the project include:
desertification and land degradation, control of losses, integrated water
forest and biodiversity, air quality, resources management, control of
climate change: adoption and raw water pollution, reuse and
mitigation, mining, industry, tourism, recycling - avoid/minimize use of
energy, urban development, etc. forest lands. With reference to
Climate change adoption & mitigation
following should be considered in the
project: diminishing flows in surface
water bodies, and ground water
depletion, and revival traditional
water bodies as water sources
(lakes/tanks) equal stress on demand
side management in water - minimize
energy use - design energy efficiency
systems.
Labour Laws The operator shall not make Applicable labor laws including
employment decisions based upon amendments issued from time to time
personal characteristics unrelated to applicable to establishments engaged
Page 225 of 432


job requirements. The operator shall in construction of civil works.
base the employment relationship
upon equal opportunity and fair
treatment, and shall not discriminate
with respect to aspects of the
employment relationship, including
recruitment and hiring,
compensation (including wages and
benefits), working conditions and
terms of employment or retirement,
and discipline.
The operator shall provide equal

wages and benefits to men and
women for work of equal value or
type.
Forest (Conservation) The Forest (Conservation) Act Applicable for work in forest areas.
Act, 1980 prohibits the use of forest land for
non-forest purposes without the
approval of Ministry of Environment
and Forests (MoEF), Government of
India.
Forest Right Act, 2006 The Forest Right Act recognizes and Applicable for work in forest areas.
vest the forest rights and occupation
in forest land in forest dwelling
schedule tribes and traditional forest
dwellers who have been residing in
forest for generations and whose
rights could not be recorded.
Determine the level of environmental assessment required to address the potential impacts.
Level of environmental assessment required for each category is presented below.
i) Category A: Projects with potential for significant adverse environmental impacts. An

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is required to address significant impacts.
ii) Category B: Projects likely to have some adverse environmental impacts, but of lesser degree
and/or significance than those for Category A.
iii) Category C: Projects unlikely to have adverse environmental impacts. No EIA, although
environmental implications are still reviewed.
The environmental impacts of water supply project shall be identified and assessed as part of
the planning and design process.
B. Report Structure
This Report may contain nine (9) sections: (i) Executive summary; (ii) Introduction and
regulatory framework (iii) Description of the project (iv) description of the environment; (v)
Page 226 of 432

Anticipated environmental impacts and mitigation measures; (vi) public consultation and
information disclosure; (vii) Grievance redress mechanism; (viii) Environmental management
plan, and, (ix) Conclusion and recommendation.
II. Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

C. Introduction
Potential environmental impacts of the proposed infrastructure components are presented in
this section. Mitigation measures to minimize/ mitigate negative impacts, if any, are
recommended along with the agency responsible for implementation. Monitoring actions to be
conducted during the implementation phase is also recommended to reduce the impact.
Screening of potential environmental impacts are categorized into four categories considering
project phases: location impacts and design impacts (pre-construction phase), construction
phase impacts and operations and maintenance phase impacts.
a. Location impacts include impacts associated with site selection and include loss of on-site
biophysical array and encroachment either directly or indirectly on adjacent environments. It
also includes impacts on people who will lose their livelihood or any other structures by the
development of that site.
b. Design impacts include impacts arising from Investment Program design, including
technology used, scale of operation/throughput, waste production, discharge specifications,
pollution sources and ancillary services.
c. Construction impacts include impacts caused by site clearing, earthworks, machinery,

vehicles and workers. Construction site impacts include erosion, dust, noise, traffic
congestion and waste production.
d. O&M impacts include impacts arising from the operation and maintenance activities of the
infrastructure facility. These include routine management of operational waste streams, and
occupational health and safety issues.
D. Pre-Construction Impacts
Design of the Proposed Components. The Central Public Health and Environmental
Engineering Organization (CPHEEO) manual suggests a design period of 15/30 years in
general while designing the systems for water supply components. It is proposed to consider
2050 as the design year for all the components in order to maintain unanimity in the design
period and design population. The rate of water supply has been taken as 135 lpcd for 100%
population.
Utilities. Telephone lines, electric poles and wires, water lines within the proposed project
locations may require to be shifted in few cases. To mitigate the adverse impacts due to
relocation of the utilities, the Operator, in collaboration with Authority will (i) identify the
locations and operators of these utilities to prevent unnecessary disruption of services during
construction phase; and (ii) prepare a contingency plan to include actions to be done in case
of unintentional interruption of services.
Page 227 of 432

Social and Cultural Resources. Any work involving ground disturbance can uncover and
damage archaeological and historical remains. For this project, excavation will occur in
project sites, so it could make medium risk of such impacts if the site contains any
archaeological and historical remains. The Operator in consultation with the Authority will
consult necessary departments to obtain an expert assessment of the archaeological
potential of the site so as to ;
i) Consider alternatives if the site is found to be of high risk;
ii) Include state and local archaeological, cultural and historical authorities, and interest groups
in consultation forums as project stakeholders so that their expertise can be made available;
and
iii) Develop a protocol for conducting any excavation work, to ensure that any chance finds are
recognized and measures are taken to ensure they are protected and conserved.
Site selection of construction work camps, stockpile areas, storage areas, and
disposal areas.
Priority should be to locate these near the project location. However, if it is deemed necessary
to locate elsewhere, sites to be considered will not promote instability and result in destruction
of property, vegetation, irrigation, and drinking water supply systems. Residential areas will
not be considered for setting up construction camps to protect the human environment (i.e., to
curb accident risks, health risks due to air and water pollution and dust, and noise, and to
prevent social conflicts, shortages of amenities, and crime). Extreme care will be taken to
avoid disposals near forest areas, water bodies, swamps, or in areas which will
inconvenience the community.
Operation of work camps can cause temporary air and noise pollution from machine
operation, water pollution from storage and use of fuels, oils, solvents, lubricants. Potential
impacts are negative but short-term and reversible by mitigation measures.
Mitigation Measures
The Operator will be required to undertake mitigation measures as follows:
(i) Consult CSE before locating project offices, sheds, and construction plants.
(ii) Minimize removal of vegetation and disallow cutting of trees.
(iii) Provide drinking water, water for other uses, and sanitation facilities for employees.
(iv) Ensure conditions of livability at work camps are maintained at the highest standards
possible at all times.
(v) Prohibit employees from poaching wildlife and cutting of trees for firewood.
(vi) Train employees in the storage and handling of materials which can potentially cause
soil contamination.
(vii) Recover used oil and lubricants and reuse or remove from the site.
(viii) Manage solid waste according to the following preference hierarchy: reuse, recycling
and disposal to designated areas.
(ix) Remove all wreckage, rubbish, or temporary structures which are no longer required.
(x) Construction sites should be kept free of clutter and debris;
Page 228 of 432

(xi) Keep storage, staging and work areas, along with walkways on the construction site,
free of obstructions and debris;
(xii) First aid box and firefighting equipment should be provided at site;
(xiii) Proper drinking and sanitation facilities should be provided at site.
(xiv) Construction sites should be kept free of water logging or stagnation of water;
(xv) Place protective guards across areas where workers could fall or could face an
impalement hazard;
(xvi) Store tools and materials neatly and out of the way in storage bins or lockers and keep
flammable or hazardous waste, if any, in covered, segregated waste containers.
(xvii) Request CSE to report in writing that the camp has been vacated and restored to pre-
project conditions before acceptance of work.
Site selection of sources of materials. Extraction of materials can disrupt natural land
contours and vegetation resulting in accelerated erosion, disturbance in natural drainage
patterns, ponding and water logging, and water pollution. To mitigate the potential
environmental impacts, locations of quarry site/s and borrow pit/s (for loose material other
than stones) would be assessed by PBC Engineer. Priority would be sites already permitted
by Mines and Geology Department. If new sites are necessary, these would be located away
from population centres, drinking water intakes and streams, cultivable lands, and natural
drainage systems; and in structurally stable areas. It will be the Operator’s responsibility to
verify the suitability of all material sources and to obtain the approval of Department of Mines
& Geology and local revenue administration. If additional quarries will be required after
construction is started, then the Operator shall use the mentioned criteria to select new quarry
sites PBC Engineer.
E. Construction Impacts
The civil works for the project include earth work excavation for pipeline trenches, pipe laying,
installing valves, flow meters and data loggers, shifting of public utilities and providing house
service connections. Earth work excavation will be undertaken by machine (backhoe
excavator) and include danger lighting and using sight rails and barricades at every 100 m.,
while pipe laying works will include laying pipes at required gradient, fixing collars, elbows,
tees, bends and other fittings including conveying the material to work spot and testing for
water tightness.
The excavation is done in such a way that there will be a minimum depth of 1.2 m above the
water pipe line. Sufficient care will be taken while laying so that existing utilities and cables
are not damaged and pipes are not thrown into the trenches or dragged, but carefully laid in
the trenches. Trenches deeper than 2 m will be protected by bracings to avoid collapse of
trenches, and also to avoid any risk to surrounding buildings. Once they are laid, pipes will be
joined as per specification and then tested for any cracks of leakages. The minimum working
hours will be 8 hours daily, the total duration of each stage depends on the soil condition and
other local features. The excavation of trenches for water pipes is estimated to generate of
soil, this soil will be used for refilling the trench after placing the pipe.
Although construction of these project components involves quite simple techniques of civil
work, the invasive nature of excavation and the project locations in the built-up areas of the
town where there are a variety of human activities, will result in impacts to the environment
Page 229 of 432

and sensitive receptors such as residents, businesses, and the community in general. These
anticipated impacts are temporary and for short duration. Water lines will be laid on either
side of the roads/streets.
Physical impacts will be reduced by the method of working and scheduling of work, whereby
the project components will be (i) constructed by small teams working at a time; (ii) any
excavation done near sensitive area like school, religious places and house will be protected
as per standard norms etc.
Sources of Materials. Significant amount of gravel, sand, coarse aggregate, and cement will
be required for this project. The Operator will be required to:
(i) Use material sources permitted by the Authority in consultation with PBC Engineer /
Technical Auditor (TA)
(ii) Submit to PBC Engineer on a monthly basis documentation of sources of materials.
Air Quality. Emissions from construction vehicles, equipment, and machinery used for
excavation and construction will induce impacts on the air quality in the construction sites.
Anticipated impacts include dusts and increase in concentration of vehicle-related pollutants
such as carbon monoxide, sulphur oxides, particulate matter, nitrous oxides, and
hydrocarbons. These however will be temporary limiting to construction activities only. To
mitigate the impacts, Operators will be required to:
(i) Consult with PBC Engineer on the designated areas for stockpiling of, soils, gravel, and other
construction materials;
(ii) Damp down exposed soil and any stockpiled material on site by water sprinkling;
(iii) Use tarpaulins to cover sand and other loose material when transported by trucks;
(iv) Clean wheels and undercarriage of haul trucks prior to leaving construction site
(v) Don't allow access in the work area except workers to limit soil disturbance and prevent
access by barricading and security personnel
(vi) Fit all heavy equipment and machinery with air pollution control devices which are operating
correctly
Surface Water Quality. Run-off from stockpiled materials, and chemical contamination from
fuels and lubricants during construction works can contaminate downstream surface water
quality of the streams. These potential impacts are temporary and short-term duration only.
However, to ensure that these are mitigated, Operator will be required to:
(i) Prepare and implement a spoils management plan;
(ii) Avoid stockpiling of earth fill especially during the monsoon season unless covered by
tarpaulins or plastic sheets;
(iii) Prioritize re-use of excess spoils and materials in the construction works. If spoils will be
disposed, consult with PBC Engineer on designated disposal areas;
(iv) Install temporary silt traps or sedimentation basins along the drainage leading to the water
bodies;
Page 230 of 432

(v) Place storage areas for fuels and lubricants away from any drainage leading to water bodies;
(vi) Dispose any wastes generated by construction activities in designated sites; and
(vii) Conduct surface quality inspection according to the Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
Noise and Vibration Levels.
Construction works will be conducted along the roads in Greater Shimla Area, where there are
houses, schools and hospitals, religious places and small-scale businesses. The sensitive receptors
are the general population in these areas. Increase in noise level may be caused by excavation,
particularly breaking of cement concrete or bitumen roads, operation of construction equipment like
concrete mixers, and the transportation of equipment, materials, and people. Vibration generated from
construction activity, for instance from the use of pneumatic drills, will have impact on nearby
buildings. This impact is negative but short-term, and reversible by mitigation measures.
CPCB Noise Ambient Standards
Area Code Category of Area Limit in dB (A)
Day Time Night Time
A Industrial Area 75 70
B Commercial Area 65 55
C Residential Area 55 45
3
D Silence Zone 50 40
Source: Environmental Standards for Ambient Air, Automobiles, Fuels, Industries and Noise
Mitigation Measures
(i) Plan activities in consultation with CSE so that activities with the greatest potential to
generate noise are conducted during periods of the day which will result in least
disturbance;
(ii) Horns should not be used unless it is necessary to warn other road users or animals of
the vehicle’s approach.
(iii) Minimize noise from construction equipment by using vehicle silencers, fitting jack
hammers with noise-reducing mufflers, and use portable street barriers to minimize
sound impact to surrounding sensitive receptor.
(iv) DGs being used at site should have sound reducing enclosures, preferably silent DGs
should be used at site.
(v) Maintain maximum sound levels not exceeding 80 decibels (dBA) when measured at a
distance of 10m or more from the vehicle/s and equipments.
(vi) Identify any buildings at risk from vibration damage and avoiding any use of pneumatic
drills or heavy vehicles in the vicinity.
(vii) Consult the custodians of important buildings, cultural and tourism authorities and local
communities in advance of the work to identify and address key issues, and avoid
working at sensitive times, such as religious and cultural festivals.
(viii) Provide all workers appropriate protection gears like ear plug/muff, working in high
3
Silence zone defined as areas up-to 100 meters around such premises as hospitals, educational institutions and
courts. The silence zones to be declared by the competent authority.
Page 231 of 432

noise conditions.
(ix) Keep all vehicles and equipments in good conditions to avoid excessive noise
generation.
(x) Provide noise barriers near sensitive receptors like schools, hospitals, temples, courts
etc and consult in advance with sensitive receptors about the working hours (specially
schools, offices, courts etc) and avoid noisy works in those hours.
(xi) Avoid noisy works in nights in inhabited areas to avoid any disturbance to habitants.
(xii) Consult in advance with habitants and inform them about the nature and duration of
works.
Traffic Diversion and/or Road Closure

If traffic diversion and/or road closure is required for the proposed works, prior consent from traffic
department will be required and prior information to affected areas and public should be disseminated
through consultations with PBC Engineer and CSE. Proper road signage and traffic aids should be
provided at site. Excavation along the roads, hauling of construction materials and operation of
equipment on-site can cause traffic problems. Potential impact is negative but short term and
reversible by mitigation measures.
Mitigation Measures
(i) Prepare and implement a plan for traffic management.
(ii) Plan transportation routes so that heavy vehicles do not use narrow local roads,
except in the immediate vicinity of delivery sites.
(iii) Schedule transport and hauling activities during non-peak hours Locate entry and exit
points in areas where there is low potential for traffic congestion.
(iv) Keep the site free from all unnecessary obstructions.
(v) Drive vehicles in a considerate manner.
(vi) Coordinate with Traffic Police for temporary road diversions and for provision of traffic
aids if transportation activities cannot be avoided during peak hours.
(vii) Notify affected sensitive receptors by providing sign boards informing nature and
duration of construction works and contact numbers for concerns / complaints.
Wherever road width is minimal, there will be temporary loss of access to pedestrians and vehicular
traffic including 2 wheelers during the laying of pipes. Under those circumstances, operator shall
adopt following measures:
(i) Inform the affected local population 1-week in advance about the work schedule.
(ii) Plan and execute the work in such away that the period of disturbance / loss of access
is minimum.
(iii) Provide pedestrian access in all the locations until normalcy is restored. Provide
wooden/ metal planks over the open trenches at each house to maintain the access.
Landscape and Aesthetics. The construction works does not envisage any cutting of trees,
but it will produce excess excavated earth, excess construction materials, and solid waste
such as removed concrete, wood, packaging materials, empty containers, spoils, oils,
lubricants, and other similar items. Haphazard disposal of these will have negative impacts on
Page 232 of 432

landscape and overall aesthetics. These impacts are negative but are of short-term and
reversible by mitigation measures. The Operator will be required to:
i. Prepare and implement spoils management plan;
ii. Avoid stockpiling of excess excavated soils;
iii. Coordinate with SJPNL for beneficial uses of excess excavated soils or immediately
dispose to designated areas;
iv. Recover used oil and lubricants and reuse or remove from the sites;
v. Manage solid waste according to the following preference hierarchy: reuse, recycling and
disposal to designated areas;
vi. Remove all wreckage, rubbish, or temporary structures which are no longer required; and
vii. Request PBC Engineer to report in writing that the necessary environmental restoration
work has been adequately performed before acceptance of work.
Surface and Groundwater Quality. Another physical impact that is often associated with
excavation is the effect on drainage and the local water table if groundwater and surface
water collect in the voids. However, to ensure that water will not pond in pits and voids near
project location, the Operator will be required to conduct excavation works in non-monsoon
season to the maximum extent possible.
Accessibility. Excavation along the roads, hauling of construction materials and operation of
equipment on-site can cause traffic problems. Potential impact is negative but short term and
reversible by mitigation measures. The Operator will be required to:
i) Prepare and implement a Traffic Management Plan
ii) Plan transportation routes so that heavy vehicles do not use narrow local roads, except in the
immediate vicinity of delivery sites;
iii) Schedule transport and hauling activities during non-peak hours;
iv) Locate entry and exit points in areas where there is low potential for traffic congestion;
v) Keep the site free from all unnecessary obstructions;
vi) Drive vehicles in a considerate manner;
vii) Coordinate with Traffic Police for temporary road diversions and for provision of traffic aids if
transportation activities cannot be avoided during peak hours; and
viii) Notify affected sensitive receptors by providing sign boards informing nature and duration of
construction works and contact numbers for concerns/complaints.
Wherever road width is minimal, there will be temporary loss of access to restrains and
vehicular traffic (including 2-wheelers) during the laying of pipes. Under those circumstances,
Operator shall adopt following measures:
i) Inform the affected local population 1-week in advance about the work schedule
ii) Plan and execute the work in such a way that the period of disturbance/ loss of access is
minimum.
Page 233 of 432

iii) Provide pedestrian access in all the locations until normalcy is restored. Provide
wooden/metal planks over the open trenches at each house to maintain the access.
Community Health and Safety.
Hazards posed to the public, specifically in high- pedestrian areas may include traffic
accidents and vehicle collision with pedestrians. Potential impact is negative but short-term
and reversible by mitigation measures. The Operator will be required to:
i) Plan routes to avoid times of peak-pedestrian activities.
ii) Liaise with PBC Engineer in identifying risk areas on route cards/maps.
iii) Maintain regularly the vehicles and use of manufacturer-approved parts to minimize
potentially serious accidents caused by equipment malfunction or premature failure.
iv) Provide road signs and flag persons to warn of on-going trenching activities.
Central part of the town is characterized by narrow roads. Particularly, the areas located on
hill slopes have very narrow roads with sharp turns and are accessible only to pedestrians.
Besides impeding the access, the trench excavation and pipe laying will pose safety risks to
pedestrians, and the people living in these areas. Though the width (<500 mm) and depth
(<750 mm) of trench is minimal, it will pose safety risk, especially for children and elders. The
Operator will be required to:
i) Provide prior information to the local people about the nature and duration of work
ii) Conduct awareness program on safety during the construction work
iii) Undertake the construction work stretch-wise; excavation, pipe laying and trench refilling
should be completed on the same day
iv) Provide barricades, and deploy security personnel to ensure safe movement of people and
also to prevent unnecessary entry and to avoid accidental fall into open trenches
Work Camps.
Operation of work camps can cause temporary air and noise pollution from machine
operation, water pollution from storage and use of fuels, oils, solvents, and lubricants.
Potential impacts are negative but short-term and reversible by mitigation measures. The
Operator will be required to:
i) Consult PBC Engineer before locating project offices, sheds, and construction plants;
ii) Minimize removal of vegetation and disallow cutting of trees;
iii) Provide drinking water, water for other uses, and sanitation facilities for employees;
iv) Ensure conditions of liveability at work camps are maintained at the highest standards
possible at all times;
v) Prohibit employees from poaching wildlife and cutting of trees for firewood; Train employees
in the storage and handling of materials which can potentially cause soil contamination;
vi) Recover used oil and lubricants and reuse or remove from the site;
vii) Manage solid waste according to the following preference hierarchy: reuse, recycling and
disposal to designated areas;
Page 234 of 432

viii) Remove all wreckage, rubbish, or temporary structures which are no longer required; and
ix) Request Technical Auditor (TA) to report in writing that the camp has been vacated and
restored to pre-project conditions before acceptance of work.
Debris disposal.
Prior to the commencement of works, Operator shall identify a debris disposal site in
consultation with the PBC Engineer and adhering to following criteria:
i) The site shall be selected preferably from barren, infertile lands. In case agricultural land
needs to be selected, top-soil stripping, stacking and preservation should be undertaken prior
to initiation of any activities.
ii) Debris disposal site shall be at least 200 m away from surface water bodies.
iii) No residential areas shall be located within 100 m downwind side of the site.
iv) The site is minimum 250 m. away from sensitive locations like hospitals, religious places,
ponds/lakes or other water bodies.
v) The local governing body and community shall be consulted while selecting the site.
F. Operation and Maintenance Impacts

Operation and Maintenance of the bulk water supply system will be carried out by the Operator.
The system have a design life of 30 years, during which shall not require major repairs or
refurbishments and should operate with little maintenance beyond routine actions required to
keep the equipment in working order. The stability and integrity of the system will be monitored
periodically to detect any problems and allow remedial action if required. Any repairs will be small-
scale involving manual, temporary, and short-term works involving regular checking and recording
of performance for signs of deterioration, servicing and replacement of parts will be done by the
Operator.
Recurrence of pipe bursting and leakage problems can be managed by the leak detection and
water auditing surveys by the Operator.
Improper disposal of silt and debris removed from trenches could cause inconvenience to public.
Silt and debris shall be collected in trucks and transported to the approved disposal site and or
can be used as covering material for wastes being land filled.
Repair works could cause some temporary disruption of activities at locations of social and
cultural importance such as schools, hospitals, religious places, tourist sites etc., so the same
precautions as employed during the construction period should be adopted. Operator needs to:
(i) Identify any buildings at risk from vibration damage and avoiding any use of pneumatic
drills or heavy vehicles in the vicinity.
(ii) Complete work in these areas quickly.
(iii) Consult the custodians of important buildings, cultural and tourism authorities and local
communities in advance of the work to identify and address key issues, and avoid
working at sensitive times, such as religious and cultural festivals.
Summary of Environmental Management Plan (EMP) & Conclusions
Page 235 of 432

Table below presents a summary of the EMP framed, with an objective to minimize negative
environmental impacts of the proposed continuous bulk water supply improvement works. Table
below also includes the potential environmental issues and necessary mitigation measures for the
same. The responsibility for their compliance thus would be binding for the prospective Operator as
the contract condition.
Table : Environmental Management Plan
Sl. Possible Suggested Mitigation Agency
Activity
No. Environmental Impact Measures Responsible
A. Construction Phase
1. Laying of 1. Disturbance to 1. Any shifting of cable Operator /
Pipe Lines other services should be attended with Authority
minimum period of
disturbance.
2. Jointing of pipes and Operator

2. Soil contamination pressure test to ensure
strength of pipes to
prevent cross
contamination due to
seepage of wastewater
3. Water
contamination 3. Same as 2. Operator
4. The excess earth Operator /

4. Disposal of excess should be transported to Authority
earth. designated site in
consultation with the
Authority (SJPNL).
5. Damage to roads 5. The road cut works Operator

should be restored within
a reasonable time.
6. Safety of residents
6. Provision of temporary Operator
& road users in the
crossings / bridges,
implementation
wherever necessary to
area.
facilitate normal
movement during
construction.
2 Presence of Labour 1. Sanitation 1. Adequate sanitation Operator
camps facilities should be
provided to the
workers.
Operator
2. Water supply 2. Adequate potable
water supply to be
provided for the
construction workers.
Operator
3. Adequate safety
3. Safety of Labour
precautions like
wearing of gloves,
helmets, earplugs,
safety shoes etc.,
should be provided
and the same has to
Page 236 of 432

Sl. Possible Suggested Mitigation Agency

Activity
No. Environmental Impact Measures Responsible
be ensured during
the construction
phase.
B. Operation and Maintenance
1. Implementation of Generation of additional Provision of safe sewage Operator
continuous wastewater and sanitation facilities
pressurized water
supply project
Appendix 1: National Ambient Air Quality Standards

Concentration in ambient
air
Time
SL Industrial, Method of
Pollutants weighted Ecologically
NO: Residential, measurement
average Sensitive
Rural &
Areas
Other Areas
1 Sulphur Dioxide Annual 24 50 20 Improved West and
(SO2) hours Geake- Ultraviolet
80 80
fluorescence
µg/m3
2 Nitrogen Dioxide Annual 24 40 30 Modified Jacob &
(NO2) µg/m3 hours Hochheiser (Na-
80 80
Arsenite)
Chemiluminescence
3 Particulate Matter Annual 24 Gravimetric
hours
(Size less than 10 60 60 -TOEM
µm) or PM10 µg/m3
100 100 -Beta attenuation
4 Particulate Matter Annual 24 Gravimetric

hours
(Size less than 2.5 40 40 -TOEM
µm) or PM2.5 µg/m3
60 60 -Beta attenuation
5 Carbon Monoxide 8 hours 02 02 Non Dispersive Infra-Red
(CO) mg/m3 (NDIR) Spectroscopy
1 hours 04 04
Appendix 2: National Ambient Air Quality Standards in Respect of Noise
Limit in dB (A)
Area code Category of area/zone
Day time Night time
A Industrial area 75 70
B Commercial area 65 55
C Residential area 55 45
D Silence zone 50 40
Appendix 3: Vehicle Exhaust Emission Norms
1. Passenger Cars
Norms CO( g/km) HC+ NOx(g/km)
Page 237 of 432

Norms CO( g/km) HC+ NOx(g/km)

1991Norms 14.3-27.1 2.0(Only HC)
1996 Norms 8.68-12.40 3.00-4.36
1998Norms 4.34-6.20 1.50-2.18
India stage 2000 norms 2.72 0.97
Bharat stage-II 2.2 0.5
Bharat Stage-III 2.3 0.35 (combined)
Bharat Stage-IV 1.0 0.18 (combined)
2. Heavy Diesel Vehicles
Norms CO( g/kmhr) HC (g/kmhr) NOx (g/kmhr) PM(g/kmhr)

1991Norms 14 3.5 18 -
1996 Norms 11.2 2.4 14.4 -
India stage 2000 norms 4.5 1.1 8.0 0.36
Bharat stage-II 4.0 1.1 7.0 0.15
Bharat Stage-III 2.1 1.6 5.0 0.10
Bharat Stage-IV 1.5 0.96 3.5 0.02
Source: Central Pollution Control Board
CO = Carbon Monoxide; g/kmhr = grams per kilometer-hour; HC = Hydrocarbons; NOx = oxides of

nitrogen; PM = Particulates Matter
Appendix 4: Drinking Water Standards

Permissible
limit in the
Substance or Requirement Undesirable effect
No. absence of Remarks
characteristic Desirable limit outside the desirable
alternate
Source
Essential Characteristic
1. Color Hazen 5 Above 5, consumer 25 Extended to 25 only
Units, Max acceptance decreases if toxic substance
are not suspect in
absence of alternate
sources
2. Odor Unobjectionable - - a) test cold and
when heated
b) test are several
dilutions
3. Taste Agreeable - - Test to be
conducted only after
safely has been
established
4. Turbidity (NTU) 5 Above 5, consumer 10 -
Max acceptance decreases
5. pH value 6.5 to 8.5 Beyond this range the No -
water will after the relaxation
mucous membrane
and/or water supply
system
Page 238 of 432

Permissible
limit in the
alternate
Source
6. Total Hardness 300 Encrustation in water 600 -
(mg/L) CaCO3 supply structure and
adverse effects on
domestic use
7. Iron (mg/L, Fe) 0.3 Beyond this limit 1.0 -
Max taste/appearance are
affected; has adverse
effects on domestic
uses and water supply
structure and promotes
iron bacteria
8. Chlorides 250 250 Beyond effects outside 1000 -
(mg/L, Cl) Max the desirable limit
9. Residual free 0.2 - - To be applicable
Chlorine (mg/L), only when water is
Max chlorinated. Tested
at customer end.
When protection
against viral
infection is required,
it should be min. 0.5
mg/L.
Desirable Characteristics
10. Dissolved solids 500 Beyond this, 2000 -
mg/L. Max palatability decreases
and may cause
gastrointestinal
irritation.
11. Calcium (mg/L, 75 Encrustation in water 200 -
Ca) Max. supply structure and
adverse effects on
domestic use.
12. Magnesium 30 Encrustation in water 100 -
(mg/L, Mg) Max supply structure and
adverse effects on
domestic use.
13. Copper (mg/L, 0.05 Astringent taste dis 1.5 -
Cu) Max coloration and
corrosion of pipes
fittings and utensils will
be caused beyond this.
14. Manganese 0.1 Beyond this limit 0.3 -

(mg/L, Mn) Max taste/appearance are
affected, has adverse
effect on domestic use
and water supply
structure
15. Sulphate (mg/L, 200 Beyond this causes 400 May be extended
SO4) Max. gastro intestinal upto 400 provided
irritation when magnesium (as Mg)
magnesium or sodium does not exceed 30
Page 239 of 432

Permissible
limit in the
alternate
Source
are present
16. Nitrate (mg/L, 45 Beyond this methaemo 100 -

NO3) Max. globinemia takes
place.
17. Fluoride (mg/L, 1.0 Fluoride may be kept 1.5 -
F) Max. as low as possible.
High fluoride may
cause fluorosis.
18. Phenolic 0.001 Beyond this, it may 0.002 -
Compounds cause objectionable
(mg/L C6H5OH) taste and odor
Max.
19. Mercury (mg/L, 0.001 Beyond this the water No To be tested when
Hg) Max becomes toxic Relaxation. pollution is
suspected
20 Cadmium (mg/L, 0.01 Beyond this the water No To be tested when
Cd) Max becomes toxic Relaxation. pollution is
suspected
21. Selenium (mg/L, 0.01 Beyond this the water No To be tested when
Se) Max becomes toxic. Relaxation. pollution is
suspected
22. Arsenic (mg/L, 0.05 Beyond this the water No To be tested when
As) Max. becomes toxic Relaxation pollution is
suspected
23. Cyanide 0.05 Beyond this the water No To be tested when
becomes toxic Relaxation pollution is
suspected
24. Lead (mg/L Pb) 0.05 Beyond this the water No To be tested when
Max. becomes toxic Relaxation pollution is
suspected
25. Zinc (mg/L, Zn) 5 Beyond this limit it can 15 To be tested when
Max. cause astringent taste pollution is
and an opalescence in suspected
water
26. Anionic 0.2 Beyond this limit it can 1.0 To be tested when
detergents (mg/L, cause a light froth in pollution is
MBAS) water suspected
Max
27. Chromium (mg/L, 0.05 May be carcinogenic - -
Cr6+ above this limit
28. Polynuclear - May be carcinogenic - -
Aromatic
Hydrocarbons
(mg/l, PAH) Max
29. Mineral oil (mg/L) 0.01 Beyond this limit, 0.03 To be tested when
undesirable taste and pollution is
odor after chlorination suspected
takes place
30. Pesticides (mg/L) Absent Toxic 0.001 -
max
Radioactive materials
Page 240 of 432

Permissible
limit in the
alternate
Source
31. Alpha emitters - - 0.1 -
Bq/L Max
32. Beta emitters - - 1.0 -
Pci/L Max
33. Alkalinity (mg/L,) 200 Beyond this limit, taste 600 -
Max becomes unpleasant
34. Aluminum 0.03 Cumulative effect is 0.2
(mg/L,Al) Max reported to cause
dementia
35. Boron (mg/L) 1.0 - 5.0 -
Max
Appendix 5: Sample Compliance with Environmental Criteria for Project Selection
Applicability Environmental Selection Criteria Compliance (to

be filled after
assessment)
All Projects i. Comply with all requirements of relevant national and state
laws.
ii. Avoid significant environmental impacts.
iii. Avoid and/or minimize involuntary resettlement by prioritizing

rehabilitation over new construction, using vacant government
land where possible, and taking all possible measures in design
and selection of site or alignment to avoid resettlement impacts
iv. Avoid locating projects in forest areas
v. If there are underground asbestos cement (AC) pipes in the

existing systems, the project design should include that the AC
pipes are left undisturbed in the ground
vi. Prior to site clearance & trench exaction for pipes, exact
location of underground AC pipes should be ascertain with the
SJPNL
vii. Avoid where possible, and minimize to extent feasible,

facilities in locations with social conflicts.
viii. Avoid where possible locations that will result in

destruction/disturbance to historical and cultural places/values.
ix. Avoid tree-cutting where possible. Retain mature roadside

trees which are important/valuable or historically significant. If
any trees have to be removed, plant two new trees for every
Page 241 of 432


be filled after
assessment)
one that is lost.
x. Ensure all planning and design interventions and decisions

are made in consultation with local communities and include
women. Reflect inputs from public consultation and disclosure
for site selection.
Water Supply i. Comply with all requirements of relevant national and local
laws, rules, and guidelines.
ii. Utilize water sources at sustainable levels of abstraction only

(i.e. without significant reductions in the quantity or quality of the
source overall); augmentation of water supply from an existing
groundwater source or development of new groundwater source
should be supported by groundwater studies establishing water
availability and sustainability
iii. Avoid using water sources that may be polluted by upstream

users;
iv. Avoid water-use conflicts by not abstracting water that is

used for other purposes (e.g., irrigation);
v. Locate all new facilities/buildings at sites where there is no

risk of flooding or other hazards that might impair functioning of,
or present a risk of damage to water treatment plants,
tanks/reservoirs, or their environs.
vi. Locate pipelines within road right of way (RoW) as far as

possible, to reduce the acquisition of new land. Ensure that
pipeline routes do not require the acquisition of land from
private owners in amounts that are a significant proportion of
their total land holding (>10%).
vii. Ensure that communities who relinquish land needed for

pipelines or other facilities are provided with an improved water
supply as part of the scheme.
viii. Avoid all usage of pipes that are manufactured from

asbestos concrete.
ix. Ensure water to be supplied to consumers will meet national

drinking water standards at all times.
x. Ensure that improvements in the water supply system are

combined with improvements in wastewater and drainage to
deal with the increased discharge of domestic wastewater.
Page 242 of 432


be filled after
assessment)
xi. Ensure appropriate training will be provided to SLPNL staff

on the operations and maintenance of the facilities.
xii. Ensure sludge management facilities are included in the

water treatment plant.
Appendix 6: Salient Features of Major Labor Laws Applicable to Establishments Engaged in

Construction of Civil Works
i) Workmen Compensation Act, 1923 - The Act provides for compensation in case of injury by
accident arising out of and during the course of employment.
ii) Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 - Gratuity is payable to an employee under the Act on
satisfaction of certain conditions on separation if an employee has completed 5 years’ service
or more or on death at the rate of 15 days wages for every completed year of service. The
Act is applicable to all establishments employing 10 or more employees.
iii) Employees’ PF and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 - The Act provides for monthly
contributions by the employer plus workers @10 % or 8.33 %. The benefits payable under
the Act are:
(a) Pension or family pension on retirement or death as the case may be; (b) deposit
linked insurance on the death in harness of the worker; (c) payment of PF
accumulation on retirement/death etc.
iv) Maternity Benefit Act, 1951 - The Act provides for leave and some other benefits to women
employees in case of confinement or miscarriage etc.
v) Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970 - The Act provides for certain welfare
measures to be provided by the Operator to contract labour and in case the Operator fails to
provide, the same are required to be provided by the Principal Employer by Law. The
principal employer is required to take Certificate of Registration and the Operator is required
to take a License from the designated Officer. The Act is applicable to the establishments or
Operator of principal employer if they employ 20 or more contract labour.
vi) Minimum Wages Act, 1948 - The employer is supposed to pay not less than the Minimum
Wages fixed by appropriate Government as per provisions of the Act if the employment is a
scheduled employment. Construction of Buildings, Roads, and Runways are scheduled
employment.
vii) Payment of Wages Act, 1936 - It lays down as to by what date the wages are to be paid,
when it will be paid and what deductions can be made from the wages of the workers.
viii) Equal Remuneration Act, 1979 - The Act provides for payment of equal wages for work of
equal nature to Male and Female workers and not for making discrimination against Female
employees in the matters of transfers, training and promotions etc.
ix) Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 - The Act lays down the machinery and procedure for resolution
Page 243 of 432

of industrial disputes, in what situations a strike or lock-out becomes illegal and what are the
requirements for laying off or retrenching the employees or closing down the establishment.
x) Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946 - It is applicable to all establishments

employing 100 or more workmen (employment size reduced by some of the States and
Central Government to 50). The Act provides for laying down rules governing the conditions
of employment by the employer on matters provided in the Act and get the same certified by
the designated Authority.
xi) Trade Unions Act, 1926 - The Act lays down the procedure for registration of trade unions of
workmen and employees. The trade unions registered under the Act have been given certain
immunities from civil and criminal liabilities.
xii) Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986 - The Act prohibits employment of
children below 14 years of age in certain occupations and processes and provides for
regulation of employment of children in all other occupations and processes. Employment of
child labour is prohibited in Building and Construction Industry.
xiii) Inter-State Migrant Workmen's (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act,
1979 - The Act is applicable to an establishment which employs 5 or more inter-state migrant
workmen through an intermediary (who has recruited workmen in one state for employment
in the establishment situated in another state). The inter-state migrant workmen, in an
establishment to which this Act becomes applicable, are required to be provided certain
facilities such as housing, medical aid, traveling expenses from home up to the establishment
and back, etc.
xiv) The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of
Service) Act, 1996 and the Cess Act of 1996 - All the establishments who carry on any
building or other construction work and employ 10 or more workers are covered under this
Act. All such establishments are required to pay Cess at rate not exceeding 2% of the cost of
construction as may be notified by the Government. The employer of the establishment is
required to provide safety measures at the building or construction work and other welfare
measures, such as canteens, first-aid facilities, ambulance, housing accommodation for
workers near the workplace etc. The employer to whom the Act applies has to obtain a
registration certificate from the Registering Officer appointed by the Government.
Appendix 7: Sample Outline Spoil Management Plan
 The Spoil Management Plan should be site specific and be part of the monthly Construction
Management Plan.
 The Operator, in consultation with the SJPNL, has to find out appropriate location/s for the
disposal of the excess soil generated. The spoils should be deposited only at these sites.
 Further precautions need to be taken in case of the contaminated spoils.
 The vehicle carrying the spoil should be covered properly.
 The spoils generating from each site should be removed on the same day or immediately
after the work is complete. The site / road should be restored to the original condition.
I. Spoils Information
Page 244 of 432

The spoil information contains the details like a) The type / material, b) Potential contamination by
that type, c) Expected volume (site / component specific), d) Spoil Classification etc.
II. Spoils Management

The Spoil Management section gives the details of a) Transportation of spoil b) disposal site
details c) Precautions taken d) Volume of contaminated spoil, if present, d) Suggested reuse of
disposal of the spoil
III. Documentation
The volume of spoil generated (site specific, date wise), site disposed, reuse / disposal details
should be documented properly.
Appendix 8: Sample Outline Traffic Management Plan
A. Principles for TMP around the Water Pipes Construction Sites
One of the prime objectives of this TMP is to ensure the safety of all the road users along the
work zone, and to address the following issues:
(i) the safety of pedestrians, bicyclists, and motorists travelling through the construction zone;
(ii) protection of work crews from hazards associated with moving traffic;
(iii) mitigation of the adverse impact on road capacity and delays to the road users;
(iv) maintenance of access to adjoining properties; and
(v) addressing issues that may delay the project.
B. Operating Policies for TMP
The following principles will help promote safe and efficient movement for all road users
(motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians, including persons with disabilities) through and around
work zones while reasonably protecting workers and equipment.
i) Make traffic safety and temporary traffic control an integral and high-priority element of project
from planning through design, construction, and maintenance.
ii) Inhibit traffic movement as little as possible.
iii) Provide clear and positive guidance to drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians as they approach
and travel through the temporary traffic control zone.
iv) Inspect traffic control elements routinely, both day and night, and make modifications when
necessary.
v) Pay increased attention to roadside safety in the vicinity of temporary traffic control zones.
vi) Train all persons that select, place, and maintain temporary traffic control devices.
vii) Keep the public well informed.
viii) Make appropriate accommodation for abutting property owners, residents, businesses,
emergency services, railroads, commercial vehicles, and transit operations.
Page 245 of 432

Illustrates the operating policy for TMP for the construction of water pipes and the along
various types of roads.
C. Analyze the impact due to street closure
Apart from the capacity analysis, a final decision to close a particular street and divert the
traffic should involve the following steps:
a. approval from the SJPNL/ Public Works Department (PWD) to use the local streets as
detours;
b. consultation with businesses, community members, traffic police, PWD, etc., regarding the
mitigation measures necessary at the detours where the road is diverted during the
construction;
c. determining of the maximum number of days allowed for road closure, and incorporation of
such provisions into the contract documents;
d. determining if additional traffic control or temporary improvements are needed along the
detour route;
e. considering how access will be provided to the worksite;
f. contacting emergency service, school officials, and transit authorities to determine if there are
impacts to their operations; and
g. developing a notification program to the public so that the closure is not a surprise. As part of
this program, the public should be advised of alternate routes that commuters can take or will
have to take as result of the traffic diversion.
If full road-closure of certain streets within the area is not feasible due to inadequate capacity
of the detour street or public opposition, the full closure can be restricted to weekends with
the construction commencing on Saturday night and ending on Monday morning prior to the
morning peak period.
D. Public awareness and notifications
As per discussions in the previous sections, there will be travel delays during the
constructions, as is the case with most construction projects, albeit on a reduced scale if
utilities and traffic management are properly coordinated. There are additional grounds for
travel delays in the area, as most of the streets lack sufficient capacity to accommodate
additional traffic from diverted traffic as a result of street closures to accommodate the works.
The awareness campaign and the prior notification for the public will be a continuous activity
which the project will carry out to compensate for the above delays and minimize public
claims as result of these problems. These activities will take place sufficiently in advance of
the time when the roadblocks or traffic diversions take place at the particular streets. The
reason for this is to allow sufficient time for the public and residents to understand the
changes to their travel plans. The project will notify the public about the roadblocks and traffic
diversion through public notices, ward level meetings and city level meeting with the elected
representatives.
The PBC Engineer will also conduct an awareness campaign to educate the public about the
following issues:
Page 246 of 432

i) traffic control devices in place at the work zones (signs, traffic cones, barriers, etc.);
ii) defensive driving behaviour along the work zones; and
iii) reduced speeds enforced at the work zones and traffic diversions.
It may be necessary to conduct the awareness programs/campaigns on road safety during

construction.
The campaign will cater to all types of target groups i.e. children, adults, and drivers.
Therefore, these campaigns will be conducted in schools and community centres. In addition,
the project will publish a brochure for public information. These brochures will be widely
circulated around the area and will also be available at the PBC Engineer, and the Operator's
site office. The text of the brochure should be concise to be effective, with a lot of graphics. It
will serve the following purpose:
i) explain why the brochure was prepared, along with a brief description of the project;
ii) advise the public to expect the unexpected;
iii) educate the public about the various traffic control devices and safety measures adopted at
iv) the work zones;
v) educate the public about the safe road user behaviour to emulate at the work zones;
vi) tell the public how to stay informed or where to inquire about road safety issues at the work
vii) zones (name, telephone, mobile number of the contact person; and
viii) indicate the office hours of relevant offices.
E. Install traffic control devices at the work zones and traffic diversion routes
The purpose of installing traffic control devices at the work zones is to delineate these areas
to warn, inform, and direct the road users about a hazard ahead, and to protect them as well
as the workers. As proper delineation is a key to achieve the above objective, it is important to
install good traffic signs at the work zones. The following traffic control devices are used in
work zones:
 Signs
 Pavement Markings
 Channelizing Devices
 Arrow Panels
 Warning Lights
Procedures for installing traffic control devices at any work zone vary, depending on road
configuration, location of the work, construction activity, duration, traffic speed and volume,
and pedestrian traffic. Work will take place along major roads, and the minor internal roads.
As such, the traffic volume and road geometry vary. The main roads carry considerable traffic;
internal roads in the new city areas are wide but in old city roads very narrow and carry
considerable traffic. However, regardless of where the construction takes place, all the work
Page 247 of 432

zones should be cordoned off, and traffic shifted away at least with traffic cones, barricades,
and temporary signs (temporary “STOP” and “GO”).
Illustrates a typical set-up for installing traffic control devices at the work zone of the area,
depending on the location of work on the road way, and road geometrics:
 Work on shoulder or parking lane
 Shoulder or parking lane closed on divided road
 Work in Travel lane
 Lane closure on road with low volume
 Lane closure on a two-line road with low volume (with yield sign)
 Lane closure on a two-line road with low volume (one flagger operation)
 Lane closure on a two lane road (two flagger operation)
 Lane closure on a four lane undivided Road
 Lane closure on divided roadway
 Half road closure on multi-lane roadway
 Street closure with detour
The work zone should take into consideration the space required for a buffer zone between
the workers and the traffic (lateral and longitudinal) and the transition space required for
delineation, as applicable. For the works, a 30 cm clearance between the traffic and the
temporary STOP and GO signs should be provided. In addition, at least 60 cm is necessary to
install the temporary traffic signs and cones.
Traffic police should regulate traffic away from the work zone and enforce the traffic diversion
result from full street closure in certain areas during construction. Flaggers/ personnel should
be equipped with reflective jackets at all times and have traffic control batons (preferably the
LED type) for regulating the traffic during night time.
In addition to the delineation devices, all the construction workers should wear fluorescent
safety vests and helmets in order to be visible to the motorists at all times. There should be
provision for lighting beacons and illumination for night constructions.
Page 248 of 432

SCHEDULE 15: VESTING CERTIFICATE
1. Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited (the “Authority”) refers to the Agreement dated ….. (the
“Agreement”) entered into between the Authority and …. (the “Operator”) for undertaking
improvements to water service to achieve a Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply in Shimla
(“Project”), in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in the Agreement.
2. The Authority hereby acknowledges compliance and fulfilment by the Operator of the Handback
Requirements set forth in Article 30 of the Agreement on the basis that upon issue of this Vesting
Certificate, the Authority shall be deemed to have acquired, and all title and interest of the
Operator in or about the Project and all the Project Facilities shall be deemed to have vested unto
the Authority, free from any encumbrances, charges and liens whatsoever.
3. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained hereinabove, it shall be a condition of this
Vesting Certificate that nothing contained herein shall be construed or interpreted as waiving the
obligation of the Operator to rectify and remedy any defect or deficiency in any of the Handback
Requirements and/or relieving the Operator in any manner of the same.
Signed this ….. day of….., 20….. at …..

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED
For and behalf of THE OPERATOR by:
For and behalf of THE AUTHORITY by:
Page 249 of 432

SCHEDULE 16: DELETED
Page 250 of 432

SCHEDULE 17: FORMAT FOR MOBILIZATION ADVANCE SECURITY
WHEREAS:
(A) [•] (the “Operator”) and the Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited (the “Authority”) have
entered into an Agreement dated ………… (the “Agreement”) whereby the Authority has
agreed to the Operator for undertaking improvements to water service to achieve a
Continuous 24x7 Pressurized Water Supply in Shimla (“Project”), in accordance with the
terms and conditions set forth in the Agreement.
(B) The Agreement requires the Operator to furnish a Performance Security to the Authority in a
sum of Rs. [•] crores (the “Guarantee Amount”) as security as security for the Mobilization
Advance (as defined in the Agreement) received in accordance with the Agreement.
(C) We, [•] through our Branch at …………. (the “Bank”) have agreed to furnish this Bank
Guarantee by way of Mobilization Advance Security.
NOW, THEREFORE, the Bank hereby, unconditionally and irrevocably, guarantees and affirms as
follows:
1. The Bank hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees the due performance of the
Operator Obligations during the Transition Period against which the Mobilization Advance is
paid, under and in accordance with the Agreement, and agrees and undertakes to pay to the
Authority, upon its mere first written demand, and without any demur, reservation, recourse,
contest or protest, and without any reference to the Operator, such sum or sums upto an
aggregate sum of the Guarantee Amount as the Authority shall claim, without the Authority
being required to prove or to show grounds or reasons for its demand and/or for the sum
specified therein.
2. A letter from the Authority, under the hand of an Officer not below the rank of [Executive
Engineer] in the Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited, that the Operator has committed default
in the due and faithful performance of all or any of its obligations under and in accordance with
the Agreement shall be conclusive, final and binding on the Bank. The Bank further agrees that
the Authority shall be the sole judge as to whether the Operator is in default in due and faithful
performance of its obligations during the Transition Period under the Agreement and its decision
that the Operator is in default shall be final, and binding on the Bank, notwithstanding any
differences between the Authority and the Operator, or any dispute between them pending
before any court, tribunal, arbitrators or any other authority or body, or by the discharge of the
Operator for any reason whatsoever.
3. In order to give effect to this Guarantee, the Authority shall be entitled to act as if the Bank were
the principal debtor and any change in the constitution of the Operator and/or the Bank, whether
by their absorption with any other body or corporation or otherwise, shall not in any way or
manner affect the liability or obligation of the Bank under this Guarantee.
4. It shall not be necessary, and the Bank hereby waives any necessity, for the Authority to
proceed against the Operator before presenting to the Bank its demand under this Guarantee.
5. The Authority shall have the liberty, without affecting in any manner the liability of the Bank
under this Guarantee, to vary at any time, the terms and conditions of the Agreement or to
extend the time or period for the compliance with, fulfilment and/ or performance of all or any of
the obligations of the Operator contained in the Agreement or to postpone for any time, and
from time to time, any of the rights and powers exercisable by the Authority against the
Operator, and either to enforce or forbear from enforcing any of the terms and conditions
Page 251 of 432

contained in the Agreement and/or the securities available to the Authority, and the Bank shall
not be released from its liability and obligation under these presents by any exercise by the
Authority of the liberty with reference to the matters aforesaid or by reason of time being given
to the Operator or any other forbearance, indulgence, act or omission on the part of the
Authority or of any other matter or thing whatsoever which under any law relating to sureties and
guarantors would but for this provision have the effect of releasing the Bank from its liability and
obligation under this Guarantee and the Bank hereby waives all of its rights under any such law.
6. This Guarantee is in addition to and not in substitution of any other guarantee or security now or
which may hereafter be held by the Authority in respect of or relating to the Agreement or for the
fulfilment, compliance and/or performance of all or any of the obligations of the Operator under
the Agreement.
7. Notwithstanding anything contained hereinbefore, the liability of the Bank under this Guarantee
is restricted to the Guarantee Amount and this Guarantee will remain in force until the
Mobilization Advance has been recovered in full from the payments received by the Operator
under the Agreement and unless a demand or claim in writing is made by the Authority on the
Bank under this Guarantee, no later than 3 (three) months from the date of expiry of this
Guarantee, all rights of the Authority under this Guarantee shall be forfeited and the Bank shall
be relieved from its liabilities hereunder.
8. The Bank undertakes not to revoke this Guarantee during its currency, except with the previous
express consent of the Authority in writing, and declares and warrants that it has the power to
issue this Guarantee and the undersigned has full powers to do so on behalf of the Bank.
9. Any notice by way of request, demand or otherwise hereunder may be sent by post addressed
to the Bank at its above referred Branch, which shall be deemed to have been duly authorised
to receive such notice and to effect payment thereof forthwith, and if sent by post it shall be
deemed to have been given at the time when it ought to have been delivered in due course of
post and in proving such notice, when given by post, it shall be sufficient to prove that the
envelope containing the notice was posted and a certificate signed by an officer of the Authority
that the envelope was so posted shall be conclusive.
10. This guarantee shall also be operational at our branch at Shimla, from whom, confirmation
regarding the issue of this guarantee or extension/renewal thereof shall be made available on
demand. In the contingency of this guarantee being invoked and payment thereunder claimed,
the said branch shall accept such invocation letter and make payment of amounts so demanded
under the said invocation.
11. This Guarantee shall come into force with immediate effect and shall remain in force and effect
for a period of [•] years and [•] months or until it is released earlier by the Authority pursuant to
the provisions of the Agreement.
Signed and sealed this day of …..., 2018 at ……..

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED For and on behalf of the BANK by:
(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Code Number)
(Address)
Page 252 of 432

SCHEDULE 18: FORMAT FOR START UP PERIOD PERFORMANCE SECURITY
WHEREAS:
sum of Rs. [•] crores (the “Guarantee Amount”) as security for due and faithful
performance of its obligations, under and in accordance with the Agreement, during the
Start Up Period (as defined in the Agreement).
Guarantee by way of Performance Security.
follows:
Operator Obligations during the Start Up Period, under and in accordance with the Agreement,
and agrees and undertakes to pay to the Authority, upon its mere first written demand, and
without any demur, reservation, recourse, contest or protest, and without any reference to the
Operator, such sum or sums upto an aggregate sum of the Guarantee Amount as the Authority
shall claim, without the Authority being required to prove or to show grounds or reasons for its
demand and/or for the sum specified therein.
Engineer] in the Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited, that the Operator has committed default
in the due and faithful performance of all or any of its obligations under and in accordance with
the Agreement shall be conclusive, final and binding on the Bank. The Bank further agrees that
the Authority shall be the sole judge as to whether the Operator is in default in due and faithful
performance of its obligations during the Start Up Period under the Agreement and its decision
Page 253 of 432

the Agreement.
is restricted to the Guarantee Amount and this Guarantee will remain in force until the expiry of
60 (sixty) days from the Scheduled TCD under the Agreement and unless a demand or claim in
writing is made by the Authority on the Bank under this Guarantee, no later than 3 (three)
months from the date of expiry of this Guarantee, all rights of the Authority under this Guarantee
shall be forfeited and the Bank shall be relieved from its liabilities hereunder.
to the Bank at its above referred Branch, which shall be deemed to have been duly authorized
10. This Guarantee shall also be operational at our branch at [_________], from whom, confirmation
Signed and sealed this day of …................., at …..........…..

(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Code Number)
(Address)
Page 254 of 432

SCHEDULE 19: FORMAT FOR TRANSITION PERIOD PERFORMANCE SECURITY
WHEREAS:
Transition Period (as defined in the Agreement).
Guarantee by way of Performance Security.
follows:
Operator Obligations during the Transition Period, under and in accordance with the Agreement,
Engineer] in Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited, that the Operator has committed default in
the due and faithful performance of all or any of its obligations under and in accordance with the
Agreement shall be conclusive, final and binding on the Bank. The Bank further agrees that the
Authority shall be the sole judge as to whether the Operator is in default in due and faithful
performance of its obligations during the Transition Period under the Agreement and its decision
Page 255 of 432

the Agreement.
is restricted to the Guarantee Amount and this Guarantee will remain in force until the expiry of
180 (one hundred eighty) days from the Sustaining Period Commencement Date under the
Agreement and unless a demand or claim in writing is made by the Authority on the Bank under
this Guarantee, no later than 3 (three) months from the date of expiry of this Guarantee, all
rights of the Authority under this Guarantee shall be forfeited and the Bank shall be relieved
from its liabilities hereunder.
to the Bank at its above referred Branch, which shall be deemed to have been duly authorised
10. This Guarantee shall also be operational at our branch at [_________], from whom, confirmation
Signed and sealed this day of …................., at …..........…..

(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Code Number)
(Address)
SCHEDULE 20: FORMAT FOR SUSTAINING PERIOD PERFORMANCE SECURITY
Page 256 of 432

WHEREAS:
entered into an Agreement dated ….. (the “Agreement”) whereby the Authority has
Sustaining Period (as defined in the Agreement).
(C) We, [•] through our Branch at ……… (the “Bank”) have agreed to furnish this Bank Guarantee
by way of Performance Security.
follows:
Operator Obligations during the Sustaining Period, under and in accordance with the Agreement,
Engineer] in Shimla Jal Prabandhan Nigam Limited, that the Operator has committed default in
the due and faithful performance of all or any of its obligations under and in accordance with the
Agreement shall be conclusive, final and binding on the Bank. The Bank further agrees that the
Authority shall be the sole judge as to whether the Operator is in default in due and faithful
performance of its obligations during the Sustaining Period under the Agreement and its decision
differences between the Authority and the Operator, or any dispute between them pending before
any court, tribunal, arbitrators or any other authority or body, or by the discharge of the Operator
for any reason whatsoever.
4. It shall not be necessary, and the Bank hereby waives any necessity, for the Authority to proceed
against the Operator before presenting to the Bank its demand under this Guarantee.
5. The Authority shall have the liberty, without affecting in any manner the liability of the Bank under
this Guarantee, to vary at any time, the terms and conditions of the Agreement or to extend the
time or period for the compliance with, fulfilment and/ or performance of all or any of the
obligations of the Operator contained in the Agreement or to postpone for any time, and from time
to time, any of the rights and powers exercisable by the Authority against the Operator, and either
to enforce or forbear from enforcing any of the terms and conditions contained in the Agreement
and/or the securities available to the Authority, and the Bank shall not be released from its liability
and obligation under these presents by any exercise by the Authority of the liberty with reference
to the matters aforesaid or by reason of time being given to the Operator or any other
Page 257 of 432

forbearance, indulgence, act or omission on the part of the Authority or of any other matter or
thing whatsoever which under any law relating to sureties and guarantors would but for this
provision have the effect of releasing the Bank from its liability and obligation under this
Guarantee and the Bank hereby waives all of its rights under any such law.
the Agreement.
7. Notwithstanding anything contained hereinbefore, the liability of the Bank under this Guarantee is
restricted to the Guarantee Amount and this Guarantee will remain in force until the expiry of 180
(one hundred eighty) days from the end of the Project Period or the Transfer Date under the
Agreement, whichever is earlier and unless a demand or claim in writing is made by the Authority
on the Bank under this Guarantee, no later than 3 (three) months from the date of expiry of this
Guarantee, all rights of the Authority under this Guarantee shall be forfeited and the Bank shall be
relieved from its liabilities hereunder.
9. Any notice by way of request, demand or otherwise hereunder may be sent by post addressed to
the Bank at its above referred Branch, which shall be deemed to have been duly authorised to
receive such notice and to effect payment thereof forthwith, and if sent by post it shall be deemed
to have been given at the time when it ought to have been delivered in due course of post and in
proving such notice, when given by post, it shall be sufficient to prove that the envelope
containing the notice was posted and a certificate signed by an officer of the Authority that the
envelope was so posted shall be conclusive.
10. This Guarantee shall also be operational at our branch at [_______], from whom, confirmation
demand. In the contingency of this guarantee being invoked and payment thereunder claimed, the
said branch shall accept such invocation letter and make payment of amounts so demanded
11. This Guarantee shall come into force with immediate effect and shall remain in force and effect for
a period of [•] years and [•] months or until it is released earlier by the Authority pursuant to the
provisions of the Agreement.
Signed and sealed this day of …….….., at …….….

(Signature)
(Name)
(Designation)
(Code Number)
Page 258 of 432

SCHEDULE 21: M&E PLAN
To be prepared by the Technical Auditor in consultation with the PBC Engineer.
Page 259 of 432

SCHEDULE 22: DELETED
Page 260 of 432

SCHEDULE 23: WATER QUALITY STANDARDS,
Water Quality Standards refers to the quality of water supplied by the Operator.
A. Water Quality Standards
 All physical, chemical and biological parameters listed in CPHEEO Manual

 Water sampling at Customer points: Samples to be tested for residual Chlorine, turbidity and
pH at Customer points as per CPHEEO Manual: 12 samples per 50000 population plus 600
samples per year as per PH
WATER QUALITY STANDARDS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of water works management is to ensure that the water supplied is free from
pathogenic organism, clear, palatable and free from, undesirable taste and odour, of reasonable
temperature, neither corrosive nor scale forming and free from minerals which could produce
undesirable physiological effects.
SECTION A
Drinking Water Quality Standards as per CPHEEO Manual, 1999
The physical and chemical quality of drinking water should not exceed the limits shown in
Table 2.1.
Table 2.1 : Water Quality Standards as per CPHEEO Manual (1999)
S.N. Characteristic Acceptable Cause for rejection
1 Turbidity (JTU scale) 2.5 10
2 Color (Platinum Cobalt scale) 5.0 25
3 Taste and Odor Unobjectionable
4 pH 7.0 to 8.5 < 6.5 or > 9.2
5 Total dissolved solids 500 mg/I 1500 mg/I
6 Total hardness as CaCO3 200 600
7 Chlorides as CI 200 1000
8 Sulphates as SO4 200 400
9 Fluorides as F- 1.0 1.5
10 Nitrates as NO3 45 45
11 Calcium as Ca 75 200
10 Design of Water Treatment Plants
12 Magnesium as Mg 30 150
13 Iron as Fe 0.1 1.0
14 Manganese as Mn 0.05 0.5
15 Copper as Cu 0.05 1.5
16 Zinc as Zn 5.0 15.0
17 Phenolic compounds as phenol 0.001 0.002
18 Anionic detergents as MBAS 0.2 1.0
19 Mineral oils 0.01 0.3
Page 261 of 432

S.N. Characteristic Acceptable Cause for rejection

Toxic Materials
20 Arsenic as As 0.01 0.05
21 Cadmium as Cd 0.01 0.01
22 Chromium as Cr+6 0.05 0.05
23 Cyanide as CN 0.05 0.05
24 Lead as Pb. 0.05 0.05
25 Selenium as Se 0.01 0.01
26 Mercury as Hg 0.001 0.001
27 Polynuclear Aromatic Hydro 0.2 µ g/l 0.2 µ g/l
carbons(PAH)
28 Gross activity 3 PCi/l 3 PCi/l
29 Gross activity 30 PCi/l 30 PCi/l
(PCi = Pico Curie)
Bacteriological Standards
30 Fecal coliforms number 0/100 ml
31 Coliform organisms number 01100 ml
Note: Unit for parameters 5 to 26 is mg/l
Source: CPHEEO manual on WS & T (3rd) 1999
Page 262 of 432

Page 263 of 432

Page 264 of 432

Page 265 of 432

Page 266 of 432

Table 6: Characteristic of sludge for use as soil conditioner

Concentration not to exceed (mg/kg dry
Parameters
basis, except pH value and C/N ratio) *
Arsenic 10.00
Cadmium 5.00
Chromium 50.00
Copper 300.00
Lead 100.00
Mercury 0.15
Nickel 50.00
Zinc 1000.00
C/N ratio 20-40
PH 5.5-8.5
Arsenic 10.00
*Compost (final product) exceeding the above stated concentration limits shall not be used for food
crops. However, it may be utilized for purposes other than growing food crops.
Source: Municipal Solid Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2000, Government of India
Page 267 of 432

SCHEDULE 24: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Applicable Codes & Specifications

The following specifications, standards and codes are made a part of the specification. All standards,
tentative specifications, specifications, codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest editions.
The Operator may propose, at no extra cost to the Authority, the use of any relevant authoritative
internationally recognized Reference Standard and seek approval of the Engineer‐in‐charge before
adopting the same.
All details, materials and equipment supplied and workmanship performed shall comply with the
specified Standards. If Bidder offers equipment to other Standards, the equipment/material should be
equal or superior to those specified and full details of the difference shall be supplied and approval is
sought from the Engineer‐in‐charge.
Certain specifications issued by national or other widely recognized bodies are referred to in this
specification. In referring to the Standard Specifications the following abbreviations are used:
• IS : Indian Standard
• ANSI : American National Standards Institute
• API : American Petroleum Institute
• ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers
• ASTM : American Society of Testing and Materials
• AWS : American Welding Society
• AWWA : American Water Works Association
• ISO : International Organization for Standardization
• DIN : Deutsche Institute fur Nuremburg
• BS : British Standard
• IEC : International Electro‐technical Commission
• IEE : Institution of Electrical Engineers
• IEEE : Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
• NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association
• AGMA : American Gear Manufacturer’s Association
In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein, this specification shall
govern.
1. IS : 2062 Steel for general structural purposes.
2. IS : 808 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column, channel and angle sections.
3. IS : 814 Covered Electrodes for manual Metal Arc Welding of carbon and C‐Mn steel.
Page 268 of 432

4. BS EN 499 Welding Consumables. Covered Electrodes for Manual Metal Arc Welding of Non
Alloy and Fine Grain Steel. Classification
5. AWS : A‐5.1 Specification for Mild Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes.
6. IS : 3613 Acceptance Tests for Wire Flux combinations for Submerged ‐ Arc Welding.
7. AWS : A‐5.17 Specification for Bare Mild Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc
Welding.
8. IS : 1367 ‐ Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners
9. IS : 1367 Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners
10. IS : 2016 Plain Washers.
11. IS : 2074 Ready Mixed Paint, Red Oxide Zinc Chrome and Priming.
12. IS : 102 Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Red Lead, nonsetting, Priming.
13. IS : 1786 High Strength Deformed Steel Bars and Wires for Concrete Reinforcement
14. IS : 432 Specification for Mild Steel & (Part‐I) Medium Tensile bars and hard drawn steel wire
for concrete reinforcement : mild Steel & Medium tensile steel bars.
15. IS.432 Specification for mild steel & (Part‐II) Medium Tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel
wires for concrete reinforcement : Hard drawn steel wire
16. IS : 269 Specification for Ordinary and Low heat portland cement
17. IS : 8041 Specification for Rapid hardening Portland Cement
18. IS : 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural source for concrete
19. IS :12330 Specification for Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement
20. IS : 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
21. IS : 800 Code of practice for General Construction in Steel.
22. IS : 816 Code of practice for use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in mild steel.
23. IS : 4353 Submerged Arc Welding of Mild Steel & Low Alloy Steels – Recommendations.
24. IS : 817 Code of practice for Training and Testing of Metal Arc Welders.
25. IS : 1182 Recommended practice for Radiographic examination of Fusion ‐ Welded Butt Joints
in steel plants
26. IS : 2595 Code of Practice for Radiographic Testing.
27. IS : 3658 Code of Practice for Liquid Penetrant Flaw Detection
28. IS : 5334 Code of practice for Magnetic Particle Flaw Detection of welds.
29. ASTM E 94 Guide for Radiographic Testing
30. ASTM E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination.
31. ASTM E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination.
32. IS : 3600 Methods of Testing Fusion Welded Joints and weld metal in steel (Parts 1 to 9)
Page 269 of 432

33. IS : 4853 Recommended Practice for Radiographic Inspection of Fusion Welded Butt Joints in
Steel Pipes.
34. IS : 3589 Seamless or Electrically welded steel pipes for Water Gas and Sewage (168.3 to
2032 Outside Diameter)
35. IS : 6631 Steel pipes for Hydraulic Purposes
36. IS : 7343 Code of practice for ultrasonic Testing of Ferrous Welded Pipes and Tubular
Products
37. IS : 2598 Safety Code for Industrial Radiographic Practice
38. IS : 5822 Code of Practice for Laying of Electrically Welded steel pipes for water supply
39. IS : 1608 Mechanical testing of Metals.
40. IS : 9595 Metal Arc welding of Carbon and Carbon‐Manganese Steels.
41. IS : 2825 Code of unfired Pressure Vessels
42. IS:5504 & IS:3589 Code for SW PIPES (SAW)
43. IS:10748 Requirement for Weldable Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Strip in Coils.
44. IS 10234 : Recommendation for radiography for general pipeline welding.
45. API‐1104 Welding of pipeline & related facilities
46. IS: 3370
47. IS:456 IS:10262 and SP:23 for design mix
48. Any other relevant code
General Civil Engineering Works
 MATERIALS
The term “materials” shall mean all materials, goods and articles of every kind whether raw,
processed or manufactured and equipment and plant of every kind to be supplied by the Operator for
incorporation in the Works.
Except as may be otherwise specified for particular parts of the works the provision of clauses in
“Materials and Workmanship” shall apply to materials and workmanship for any part of the works.
All materials shall be new and of the kinds and qualities described in the Contract and shall be at least
equal to approved samples.
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards (with amendments)
current on the date of submission of the tender.
Where the relevant standard provides for the furnishing of a certificate to the PBC Engineer, at his
request, stating that the materials supplied comply in all respects with the standard, the Operator shall
obtain the certificates and forward it to the PBC Engineer
Page 270 of 432

 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIALS
The Operator shall submit samples of such materials as may be required by the PBC Engineer and
shall carry out the specified tests directed by the PBC Engineer at the Site, at the supplier’s premises
or at a laboratory approved by the Engineer-in- charge.
Samples shall be submitted and tests carried out sufficiently early to enable further samples to be
submitted and tested if required by the PBC Engineer. Approval by the PBC Engineer as to the
placing of orders for materials or as to samples or tests shall not prejudice any of the Authority’s
powers under the Contract.
ITEM WISE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Establishment of District Meter Areas
Creation & Establishment of DMA’s covering 35,000 connections:-
The scope of work to be executed as a part of this item are establishment of the DMA/ zones /
subzones by measuring the inflow, outflow, pressure, water consumption, consumer meter
replacement, water quality etc. with all necessary work to facilitate the work within the scheduled
period as mentioned. The Operator need to provide all the necessary manpower, materials,
equipment’s etc. for implementation of the services listed below. Authority requirement for DMA
establishment, hydraulic modeling consumer survey, etc.
 Validation of the Network like boundaries, pipeline network, valves, washout etc.
 Customer awareness & Conservation programs for 35,000 connection consumers in the all
DMA’s.
 Consumer survey: number of current consumers: location of 35,000 connection consumers in

the all DMA’s.
 Flow and pressure measurements by installing flow and pressure measuring devices.
 Review of existing functioning of the area with valves, supply hours, and updating of map.
 Updating of the network map: GIS map of the network. The cost of tracing equipment’s, all the
trial pits required for validation of the network etc.
 Develop a Record Plan for each DMA zone which will include a schematic diagram of the
feeder and distribution network including sizes and materials, inflow meters location,
boundary valves, other valves, major consumers etc.
 Establishment of the consumption in each of the DMA's zones.
 Establishment of baseline UFW levels using the flow data from the DMA meters and the
consumption assessed.
 Condition assessment of pipe & make repair, rehabilitation plan.
 Assessment of the non-leakage components of the UFW.
 Assessment of the various baseline levels in the zones.
Cost under this item includes:-
Page 271 of 432

1. Experts services
2. Design & SIP
3. Survey & investigation
4. Software & hardware’s
5. Report generation
6. Water balance
7. Man power, equipment’s
8. All item other than bills of quantity
9. Training
The scope of work to be executed as a part of this item is design and freezing of boundary of DMA’s
within operational zones using the existing assets of the Water Distribution System. With the isolation
of DMA’s if any area affected for water supply, Operators shall need to make temporary arrangement
of water supply for the affected area. It also includes the new proposal of the pipe line, valves etc.
complete to establish the hydraulically discrete areas.
The detailed scope is as below:
 Development of the Hydraulic Model and Hydraulic Analysis by providing Water Gems
/equivalent software of unlimited nodes and pipes.
 Hydraulic analysis shall be done through latest version of Water Gems/equivalent software.
The cost of Water Gems /equivalent software need to be considered in the item. No separate
payment shall be made.
 Formation of District Meter Areas.
 Identification of Average Zonal Pressure (AZP) and Critical Pressure Points (CPP) for each
of the Pilot zones and providing of data logger on the same.
 Procurement and installation of bulk / DMA meter on inlet and outlet: volume of production
(Distribution input).
 Procurement of DMA meters, for flow measurement, and consumer meters, valves for
assessing consumption need to be done during this phase of the contract.
 Preparation & execution of rehabilitation & Development plan for achievement of the
performance targets as set in the contract.
 Final output of DMA establishment is development of water balance & carried out zero
pressure test in a hydraulic distribution area.
Water Loss (NRW) detection / reduction and management services:-
1. The Operator has to take all necessary action, provide all required services and materials and
equipment and carry out all works required to achieve the main objective of the Contract and
reduce water loss in selected DMA’s of Shimla. The following (non-exhaustive) list summarizes
the activities the Operator is normally expected to carry out (without limiting the Operator's
obligations and the scope of work):
Page 272 of 432

a. All leaks detection methods, technology & equipment’s, manpower etc. All items,
equipment’s
b. Leak detection surveys (using all kind of equipment and technologies, from simple
sounding with a listening stick to leak noise correlators and leak noise loggers as
appropriate, helium gas), note that all required leak detection equipment has to be
provided by the Operator (but will not revert to the Authority at the end of the
Contract).
c. Pressure management: stabilizing, managing and reducing average DMA pressure
using PRVs and controllers and various techniques as appropriate; when doing
pressure reduction, the Operator has to ensure that all the volume of water supplied
to consumers in the DMA is the same or better than the baseline levels at the start of
the project. Level of minimum pressure will depend on the type of housing and the
general availability of tanks. Pressure management has to be done in close co-
operation with the consumers in the DMA to reduce the risk of complaints. All
required customer information and education is part of the Operator's duties and cost
for these activities covered under scope of services envisaged in this contract.
d. Leak detection surveys, repairs and pressure fine-tuning shall be repeated and/or
shall continue until an acceptable level of leakage is achieved. The acceptable level
of leakage might vary from one DMA to the other, it is up to the Operator to decide at
which point the effort for further leakage reduction becomes prohibitively high;
e. Detecting illegal connections: Should the Operator find illegal connections he shall
report them to the Authority.
2. The fixed and performance fee together cover all fixed cost, overheads, profit and all
manpower, machinery, equipment, transport as well as all materials and works required to carry
out all activities that might become necessary to achieve the objective of the Contract.
1. All repairs to be carried out for leak reduction.
Achieving continuous (24 x 7) pressurized water supply in DMA :-
Achieving and maintaining continuous (24 x 7) pressurized water supply in respective DMA, maintain
minimum positive 7 m of water column at consumer end of DMA, monitoring for flow and pressure
data including logging and data transfer to the central server. Establishment of the Target NRW after
completion of all water loss reduction activities in a DMA and continuous monitoring of inflow,
pressure and minimum night flow to become aware of new leaks.
Carrying Out Internal Water Audit Leak Test of Consumer: (upon request of Consumer with
cost of internal water audit borne by Consumer)-
 After completing HSC, after billing for one month found excessive billing from normal, in
that case required internal water audit leak test of consumer premises for checking leakages
in the existing piping system, leakages of under ground tank & overhead storage tank of
consumer concealed water piping, leaking taps, defective float valves etc. may be carried
out by Operator & if any leakages found it should be brought on notice of the consumer &
give him the required suggestion to solve the problem in writing. Operator shall maintain list
of higher consumption consumer regularly conduct internal water audit/leak test for such
consumer. The cost of internal water audit shall be borne by the Consumer.
Process :-
Page 273 of 432

Finding out visible leaks, with closing all known tabs and checking the consumption during
supply hours of one hour and identifying the leakages & creating inspection check list report.
And provide check list to the consumer for further repairing work. This item only includes
identification of leakages.
 All equipment’s should be used to detect the leak etc. complete
A. Technical Specification :
Distribution Network / Transmission Main & Pumping Main

Item No. 1: - G.I. Pipes Complete with G.I. Fittings
Item includes: ‐ Providing and laying G.I. pipes complete with G.I. fittings including trenching
and refilling etc.
Specification: ‐ Pipes‐Galvanized Iron
The pipes (tubes) shall be galvanized mild steel hot finished seamless (HFS) or welded (ERW) HRIW
or HFW screwed and socketed conforming to the requirements of IS 1239-2000 Part‐I for medium
grade. They shall be of the diameter (nominal bore) specified in the description of the item, the
sockets shall be designated by the respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended.
Galvanizing shall conform to IS 4736: The zinc coating shall be uniform adherent, reasonably smooth
and free from such imperfections as flux, ash and dross inclusions, bare batches, black spots,
pimples, lumping runs, rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The pipes and sockets shall be
cleanly finished, well galvanized in and out and free from cracks, surface flaws laminations and other
defects. All screw threads shall be clean and well cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with
the axis of the tube.
All screwed tubes and sockets shall have pipe threads conforming to the requirements of IS Screwed
tubes shall have taper threads while the sockets shall have parallel threads.
All tubes shall withstand a test pressure of 50 Kg/sq.cm without showing defects of any kind. Fittings:
The fittings shall be of mild steel tubular or wrought steel fittings conforming to IS1239 (Part‐2) or as
specified. The fittings shall be designated by the respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they
are intended.
Pipe shall be supplied from the SJPNL approved list of the firms after third party inspection by
approved by SJPNL inspection charges shall be borne by the Operator.
Hydraulic Test of G.I. Pipeline: ‐
1. G.I. pipes and Fittings:
2. All the Pipes, specials and fitting of GI shall be supplied and tested as per relevant IS codes
and specifications
a. Factory Test Pressure: as per IS 3589
b. Site Test Pressure: as per IS 5822
Suitable section as directed by the PBC Engineer shall be taken for such testing from time to time
during progress of the work and satisfactory test given for that section. All testing apparatus, gauges,
connections, etc. and water required for testing shall be arranged by the operator at his cost. The
SJPNL does not undertake any responsibility to supply water for testing which the operator has to
Page 274 of 432

arrange by paying the required charges directly. The SJPNL shall have the right to recover such
charges from his bills if complaints are received that operator has not paid the charges thereof. If
there is delay in testing, the operator shall refill the trenches for the time being and reopen them at
time of testing at his own cost failure of which shall entitle the SJPNL to do the refilling and reopening
of trenches at the risk and cost to the operator. If the trenches are filled due to any reason
whatsoever before testing, the operator shall have to open them for testing at no extra cost.
1. Satisfactory hydraulic test shall be recorded when the section under test shall withstand the
pressure as specified by the PBC Engineer for about 15 minutes without operating the test
pump. The test pressure being maintained at the specified figures during that 15 minutes
interval.
2. The field test pressure to be imposed should be not less than the maximum of following.
a) 1.5 times the maximum sustained operating pressure in the pipeline.
b) 1.5 times the maximum static pressure (with minimum design pressure as 6.0 kg/sqcm) in
the pipeline in the pipe line
c) Sum of maximum sustained operating pressure and maximum surge pressure.
d) Sum of maximum pipe line static pressure and maximum surge pressure,
The testing conditions for the pipelines are summarized as follows:
• Pre test and saturation period with addition of make‐up water
Pressure : Test pressure
Duration : 24 hrs for M.S pipes
• Pressure test with addition of make‐up water
Duration : 3 hrs
After filling, the pipeline shall be pressurized to the specified operating pressure and left for a period
of time to achieve stable conditions. The pipeline shall then be pressurized upto the full test
pressure and the section under test completely closed off. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
pipeline is free of air. For this if required or if asked by the Engineer, water release test shall be
carried out.
If the test is not satisfactory, the fault shall be found and rectified. In case fault cannot be identified
easily, the section under test shall be sub‐divided and each part tested separately.
If it is required to test a section of a pipe line with a free end, it is necessary to provide temporary
support against the considerable end thrust development by the application of the test pressure.
The end support can be provided by inserting a wooden beam or similar strong material in a short
trench excavated at right angle to the main trench and inserting suitable packing between the support
and pipe end.
Item No. 2(a): - Providing MS Pipe
Page 275 of 432

Providing, fabricating, testing, painting, supplying and installation of M.S. Pipes & Specials of
specified ID / OD & specified wall thickness conforming to IS 3589-2001. Pipes shall be flanged with
slip-on-boss flanged available open confirming to IS 6392-1971.
Pipes shall be made from steel plates conforming to relevant IS 2062 grade Fe410 or strips by butt
welding longitudinally or spirally. The weld shall be continuous. Prior to welding, edges of plates or
strips may be prepared suitably where required by the process of manufacture.
All pipes and specials shall be manufactured out of new mild steel plates/steel strips/coils, which shall
be free from any cracks, surface flaws, laminations, excessive pitting or any other defects. The pipes
shall be mill manufactured of either plate welded or spiral welded variety with longitudinal or spiral
welds confirming to respective standards from a mill which can establish with authenticity having
supplied similar pipes in the last 3 years which shall be truly cylindrical, and straight in axis. The
process of manufacture shall be as per IS: 3589.
The external circumference of the pipe pieces, which are to be fixed adjacent to flange adopter with
fixed outer diameter shall not deviate from theoretical by more than 1 mm. The pipe shall be rolled to
the extent it is truly cylindrical. The external longitudinal/spiral welding of the pipe shall be ground
smooth flush with surface to the satisfaction of the Authority or his Representative. Nothing extra cost
shall be charged by the Operator for grinding work.
TOLERANCE
The tolerance on the pipe body shall be + 0.75 % for all sizes of pipes. The tolerance on specified wall
thickness shall be - 2% / + 10% Straightness - Finished pipe shall not deviate from straightness by
more than 0.2% of the total length. Checking shall be carried out using a taut string or wire from end
to end along the side of the pipe to measure the greatest deviation.
Length - Straight pipe shall not vary from the specified overall length by +10 mm or -10 mm for length
up to and including 6 m.
INSIDE / OUTSIDE COATINGS of Pipelines
The Operator shall select scheme for lining and coating of pipes on the basis of soil & water reports
and his own supporting investigations such as soil resistivity and other supplementary data.
Acceptable linings are:
Cement mortar (shop applied, confirming to Annex – A – IS: 3589: 2001
Cement mortar (in‐situ) Conforming to IS: 11906 limited to joints only.
Food grade 100% solid Liquid – Epoxy system conforming to Annex – B – IS: 3589: 2001
Acceptable External coatings for buried pipes are but preferred coating shall be Fusion bonded Epoxy
coating: (for trenchless laid pipe only.)
For above ground pipes only:
Liquid – Epoxy system conforming to Annex – B – IS: 3589: 2001
Fusion bonded Epoxy conforming to Annex – C – IS: 3589: 2001
For buried pipes:
Coal tar wrapping/Tape coating system conforming to Annex – D – IS: 3589: 2001 and IS: 10221
Page 276 of 432

External coatings for above ground pipes shall be resin epoxy.
The Operator shall supply the required dia of pipe at his cost. The pipes shall be accepted after
the third party inspection from Technical Auditor or any other agency as authorized by SJPNL, the
charges for the same shall be borne by the Operator
Item No. 2(b):- Laying Of Pipeline
General
After having carried out excavation of trenches as is explained in these specifications elsewhere the
loose materials from the sides or the edges of the trench shall be prevented from falling inside the
trench. Properly designed bedding as per site conditions for resting of the pipes shell then be
provided before starting with the laying. The excavation of trenches for laying of M.S. pipe shall be as
per IS: 5822. Design of bedding with respect to installation condition shall be submitted by the
Operator for approval by the Authority unless specified otherwise, the M.S. pipeline shall be buried
with minimum cover of 1.0 meter above socket top as shown on drawings to be submitted by the
Operator and approved by the Authority. No material shall be erected unless it has been previously
passed by the Authority or his Representative.
Lowering and Jointing
Before pipes are lowered the trenches shall be examined as per IS: 5822. Also pipe handling and
inspection. Pipe laying below ground and pipe laying above ground shall be as per IS: 5822. Jointing
of pipes shall be beveled but joint of IS 3589.
Welding
Unless specified otherwise all M.S. pipes and specials shall have butt‐welded joint. Where shown on
drawings, flanged joints or collar sleeve collar. Collar sleeve joints shall be provided.
The welding of pipes in the field should comply with IS: 816. Electrodes for welding should comply
with IS: 814. The welded joints shall be tested in accordance with IS: 3600 (Part‐1) and other
relevant Codes. One test specimen taken from at least one field joint out of 10 shall be subjected to
test as per IS:5822 i.e. the Operator shall carry out all test for welding as are described under IS:5822.
Saddle Supports
Unless otherwise specified pipeline shall be laid underground. However in certain reaches it shall be
on steel saddle supports, over the proposed bridge, spaced at suitable intervals. The material and
construction of Steel structures such as saddles, anchor blocks, crossings etc. associated with the
work of pipeline shall conform with the relevant I.S. Codes, good engineering practice and as
directed by the Authority or his Representative. The pipes to be laid at saddle supports shall be
erected at mean temperature. Saddle supports shall either be sliding type or fixed type, detailed
design and drawings including fabrication drawing for which shall be supplied by the Operator. In case
of sliding support, the pipe shall be allowed to slide freely over the plate embedded in the saddle.
Alternatively to achieve fixity, the pipe shall be anchored by providing suitable anchor bases with
steel clamps. The rate for laying the pipe on saddle support shall be included in laying, aligning,
welding, provision of rigging screws with screw eyes etc. all complete in the Contract of Operator.
Below the pipes in the above alignment, the Operator shall provide necessary bedding/saddle
supports required as per structural designs, which shall be got approved from the Authority or his
Representative.
Page 277 of 432

Hydraulic Test of MS Pipeline: ‐
1. MS pipes and Fittings:
2. All the Pipes, specials and fitting of DI shall be supplied and tested as per relevant IS codes
and specifications
a. Factory Test Pressure: as per IS 3589
b. Site Test Pressure: as per IS 5822
Suitable section as directed by the PBC Engineer shall be taken for such testing from time to time
during progress of the work and satisfactory test given for that section. All testing apparatus, gauges,
connections, etc. and water required for testing shall be arranged by the operator at his cost. The
SJPNL does not undertake any responsibility to supply water for testing which the operator has to
arrange by paying the required charges directly. The SJPNL shall have the right to recover such
charges from his bills if complaints are received that operator has not paid the charges thereof. If
there is delay in testing, the operator shall refill the trenches for the time being and reopen them at
time of testing at his own cost failure of which shall entitle the SJPNL to do the refilling and reopening
of trenches at the risk and cost to the operator. If the trenches are filled due to any reason
whatsoever before testing, the operator shall have to open them for testing at no extra cost.
1.1] The field test pressure to be imposed should be not less than the maximum of following.
a) 1.5 times the maximum sustained operating pressure in the pipeline.
b) 1.5 times the maximum static pressure (with minimum design pressure as 6.0 kg/sqcm) in the
pipeline in the pipe line
c) Sum of maximum sustained operating pressure and maximum surge pressure.
d) Sum of maximum pipe line static pressure and maximum surge pressure,
The testing conditions for the pipelines are summarized as follows:
• Pre test and saturation period with addition of make‐up water
Duration : 24 hrs for M.S pipes
• Pressure test with addition of make‐up water
Duration : 3 hrs
After filling, the pipeline shall be pressurized to the specified operating pressure and left for a period
of time to achieve stable conditions. The pipeline shall then be pressurized upto the full test
pressure and the section under test completely closed off. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
pipeline is free of air. For this if required or if asked by the Engineer, water release test shall be
carried out.
If the test is not satisfactory, the fault shall be found and rectified. In case fault cannot be identified
easily, the section under test shall be sub‐divided and each part tested separately.
If it is required to test a section of a pipe line with a free end, it is necessary to provide temporary
support against the considerable end thrust development by the application of the test pressure.
Page 278 of 432

The end support can be provided by inserting a wooden beam or similar strong material in a short
trench excavated at right angle to the main trench and inserting suitable packing between the support
and pipe end.
Leakage Test for MS Pipeline
Test criteria for permissible losses in M.S pipes shall be as under
Q = 1 litre per km per length per 10mm diameter of pipe per 30mtr test pressure per 24 hrs. All
pressure testing at site should be carried out hydrostatically. The pipes shall be accepted to have
passed the pressure test satisfactorily, if the quantity of water required to restore the test pressure
does not exceed the amount ‘Q’, calculated by the above formula.
If it is required to test a section of a pipeline with a free end, it is necessary to provide

temporary support against the considerable end thrust developed by the application of the test
pressure. The end support can be provided by inserting a wooden beam or similar strong material in
a short trench excavated at right angle to the main trench and inserting suitable packing between the
support and the pipe end.
No section of the pipe work shall be accepted by the Engineer until all requirements of the test
have been obtained.
On completion of a satisfactory test any temporary anchor blocks shall be broken out and stop ends
removed. Backfilling of the pipeline shall be completed.
During testing if any joints are found leaking they shall be repaired and / or redone by the operator
at his cost till the test is found satisfactory. Similarly, any pipes collars, specials, show hair
cracks, leaks etc. during testing the operator shall replace them with sound pipes and specials etc.
free of cost. The hydraulic test shall be given in presence of the PBC Engineer.
Cleaning Out after Testing
On completion of a satisfactory test any temporary anchor blocks shall be broken out and stop ends
removed. Backfilling of the pipeline shall be completed.
All pipes or joints which are proved to be in any way defective shall be replaced or remade and
re‐tested as often as may be necessary until a satisfactory test shall have been obtained. Any work
which fails or is proved by test to be unsatisfactory in any way shall be redone by the operator.
After the completed pipeline is tested, approved, backfilled and the Operator has removed all
temporary works and has reconnected any parts temporarily removed from the pipeline, the Operator
shall finally clean out the whole pipeline and flush it through with water.
Disinfection
After cleaning out, disinfection shall be performed in the following manner: after flushing the pipes the
system shall be drained completely, all valves shall be closed carefully and the system filled with a
strong chlorine solution of about 5 ppm free chlorine. This solution shall remain in the system for a
period as directed but not exceeding 24 hours uninterruptedly. Chlorine residual tests shall be
done at various points by an orthotolidine reagent with a color scale. The disinfection process shall
be repeated until the chlorine residual is not less than 1 ppm at all sampling points. After
disinfection the entire pipeline shall be rinsed with potable water till the chlorine residual is less than
Page 279 of 432

2 ppm at various points of testing. Operator will not paid separately for this activity.
After completion of disinfection and rinsing the results shall be reported by the Operator in writing
and signed by the Operator and the Engineer.
The Operator shall provide at his own expense such sampling points as the Engineer may direct if
permanent points are not available or suitably located.
Water for Testing and Cleaning
The Operator shall provide all water required for testing, cleaning and disinfection of the pipeline at
his own cost and shall use only potable water. Operator shall also bear the cost of chemical required
for disinfection.
Disposal of water after testing, disinfection and cleaning shall be arranged by the Operator with prior
approval from the Engineer. The disposal shall be done in such a manner as will not cause any
harm to any standing crop, cultivated land, damage to roads or structures, cause submergence
and/or nuisance to any public or vehicular traffic.
 Demolishing Rcc Work
The different activities under this item shall be executed as per the corresponding
specifications detailed in general specifications given in the CPWD Specifications for works for
this item .
 Demolishing Brick Work
this item .
 Demolishing Cement Concrete Work
this item .
 Piping To Be Removed:
Where indicated on the Drawings, pipe (and conduit) shall be drained and the contents properly
disposed. The pipe (or conduit) shall then be completely removed from the site, including fittings,
valves, and other in-line devices. Connections to existing piping to remain shall be plugged by
mechanical means (M.J. plugs, tie-rods, or thrust blocks). Piping shall be removed in accordance with
Specification Section 02080 "Abandonment, Removal and Salvage or Disposal of Existing Pipe."
 Dismantling Joint
D.I/M.S Dismantling joints shall be installed in such a manner that valves can be dismantled without
stress to the joints. Dismantling joints shall be suitable for installation with all valves of different
diameters.
The dismantling joint shall be designed for a hydrostatic pressure of 10 kg/sq.cm. The sliding flange
shall be machined smooth and shall slide at least 30 mm to disengage fully mating flange. All the
fasteners for the dismantling joint shall be of SS 304. These shall be completely leak proof with proper
gasket arrangement. Flange dimensions shall conform to latest relevant IS code 13382 (First Revision
Page 280 of 432

2004 & Second Revision 2012). Flanged specials shall be supplied with required nuts, bolts and
rubber gaskets. The dismantling joint shall be internally and externally coated with hot applied (dip)
bituminous paint.
 Fire Hydrant
EXTERNAL FIRE HYDRANTS VALVE
All the fire hydrant valves shall confirm to IS: 5290. The hydrants shall be oblique pattern ISI marked
(IS:5290), made of Stainless Steel (SS304), having 75 mm flanged inlet, and 63 mm female
Instantaneous outlet, provided with C.I. /SS hand wheel for operation, and PVC blank cap with chain.
Operator shall provide for each external fire hydrant 02 nos. of 63mm dia. 15 m long RRL hose pipe
with SS male and female instantaneous type couplings machine wound with copper wire (hose to
IS:636 type certification), SS-304 branch pipe with nozzle to IS:903.
Each external hydrant hose cabinet shall be provided with a drain in the bottom plate.
Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE-BOX”.
FIRE HOSE
All hose pipes shall be of 63 mm diameter re-enforced synthetic rubber lined (RRL), Type-A”
conforming to IS: 636. The hose shall be provided with stainless steel - 304 delivery coupling male &
female part and copper wire binding. The hose shall be capable of withstanding a bursting pressure of
38 Kg/Sq.cm without undue leakage or sweating. Hose shall be provided with instantaneous spring-
lock, type couplings.
BRANCH PIPE, NOZZLE
Short Branch Pipe with Nozzle, ISI marked, conforming to IS: 903, made of Stainless Steel (SS304),
fitted with 20 mm bore nozzle, for projecting water in form of solid jet. The Branch shall have 63mm
Male Instantaneous Inlet, suitable for use with 63 mm size Firefighting hoses and suitable for working
pressure up to 12 Kg/cm2.
HOSE CABINET
Hose cabinet shall be provided for all internal and external fire hydrants. Hose cabinets shall be Made
of 16 gauge MS (size 750mmx600x250mm) powder coated sheet of fully welded construction with
hinged double front door partially glazed (3 mm glass panel) with locking arrangement, stove
enameled fire red paint (shade No. 536 of IS:5) with “FIRE HOSE BOX” written on it prominently.
The hose cabinet shall be of size to accommodate the following:
i. Hose pipe (2 length of 15 m)
ii. Branch pipes, nozzles (2 sets)
HOSE REEL
Hose reel shall be swinging wall mounting type conform to IS : 884, heavy duty, 20 mm dia. and 30
meter length thermoplastic/rubber hose fitted with SS nozzle, mild steel pressed reel drum which can
swing up to 170 degree with wall brackets of cast iron finished with red and black enamel complete.
The Hose Reel shall provide a good range jet at the specified pressure for effective firefighting. Drum
shall be painted - Fire Red Color as per IS: 5 Shade No. 536.
Page 281 of 432

FIRE BRIGADE CONNECTION
4-Way fire brigade inlet made of Stainless steel body, having 4 Nos. 63 mm size male Instantaneous
inlets (with inbuilt NRV) inlet made of Stainless Steel (SS304) and 150 mm size flanged outlet, Fire
Brigade inlet body shall be provided with drain valve for draining water after operation.
This connection shall be taken directly into hydrant main, the connection shall be fitted with isolating
valve and NRV in a position approved by the Project Manager.
In addition to the emergency, fire brigade connection shall be taken from the four 63mm
instantaneous inlets direct to hydrant main so that the fire brigade may pump to the hydrants main
when hydrant pumps fail to start.
The fire brigade connection shall be fitted with four numbers of 63mm instantaneous inlets in a glass
fronted wall box at a suitable position at street level, so located as to make the inlets accessible from
the outside of the building. The size of the wall box shall be adequate to allow hose to be connected
to the inlets, even if the door cannot be opened and the glass has to be broken. ”FIRE BRIGADE
INLET” painted on the inner face of the glass in 50 mm size block letter. Each such box shall be
provided with a steel hammer with chain for breaking the glass.
 Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD)
Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) method including preparation and setting up the plant and
equipment, preparing new pipe work material, installing new pipe work, hydro/ pneumatic testing and
commissioning pipe work or making the system ready for commissioning by HDD operation including,
all related civil and mechanical work like excavation, shoring/ strutting, etc, drilling, stringing, reaming
and pulling back the new pipe work on the designed bore path alignment, proper disposal of drilling
fluid all-inclusive as per Ind STT:101-2007 code of Practice for Horizontal Directional drilling
Technique suiting Indian Conditions.
Description
This pipe installation method is called Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD). This method is defined
as a steerable technique for the installation of pipes, conduits, and cables in an arc shape using
a surface launched drilling rig. This method requires the execution of a pilot bore which is then
enlarged with the use of a reamer prior to installation of the product pipe. Depending on the diameter
of the product pipe, multiple enlargements may be required. The excavation is performed by the
mechanical action of a fluid assisted cutting head.
Allowable forces
In case of G.I./M.S. pipe, an extra 1.8 m section of the pipe must be pulled out of the borehole to
check for any sign of stress or damage.
Allowable pulling force for all diameters shall be determined depending on the pipe size, wall
thickness, manufacturer, field conditions, pull distance, manhole integrity, bearing capacity of soils,
adjacent infrastructure, related equipment, cable strength, and all other related considerations.
Construction
Minimum Allowable Depths
The minimum allowable installation depth of cover of a HDD installed pipe under the road and
shoulder surface is correlated to the pipe diameter.
Page 282 of 432

Table 1- Minimum Allowable Depth

Pipe Diameters Depth of Cover
Small (< 100 mm) 1.0 m
Mini (100 – 300 mm) 1.3 m
Medium (325- 600 mm) 1.5 m
Large (> 600 mm) 2.5 m
To help with future locating of installed pipes, installation of a trace wire on plastic pipes and
submission of an as- built (both plan and profile) for all installations are required.
In locations where the road surface is super elevated, the minimum depth of the bore shall be
measured from the lowest side of the pavement surface.
Equipment
Equipment used for this method varies greatly. However, the basic operations of boring and pulling
the pipe into position are essential. Please refer to the specific operator’s manual for more
information.
Method
(a) The ends of each section of G.I./M.S. pipe shall be inspected and cleaned as necessary to be
free of debris immediately prior to joining the pipes by means of thermal butt fusion/electro
fusion.
(b) The handling of the joined pipeline shall be in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by
dragging it over sharp or jagged objects. Sections of the pipes with cuts and gouges
exceeding 10 percent of the pipe wall thickness or kinked sections shall be removed and the
ends re-joined.
(c) G.I./M.S. Pipes shall be stored on level ground, free of sharp objects, which could damage
the pipe. Stacking of the polyethylene pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause
excessive deformation, bending, or warping of the bottom layers of pipes under anticipated
temperature condition.
(d) Sufficient space shall be allocated to fabricate and layout the product pipeline into one
continuous pipe length, thus enabling the pull back to be conducted during a single operation.
If space considerations are discovered that make this impossible, the permit applicant shall
obtain specific alternative instructions from the Authority’s Engineer.
(e) Sufficient space is required on the rig side of the machine to safely set up and perform the
operation.
(f) The drill path alignment shall be as straight as possible to minimize the frictional resistance
during pullback and maximize the length of the pipe that can be installed during a single pull.
(g) The radius of curvature is determined by the rig. The minimum radius of curvature of HDD
path should be 1,200 times the nominal diameter of the pipe to be installed.
(h) The required piping shall be assembled in a manner that does not obstruct adjacent roadways
or public activities. The HDD operator shall erect temporary fencing around the entry and exit
pipe staging areas.
(i) Several pre-reams may be employed to gradually enlarge the hole to the desired diameter
and reduce road surface heaving potential. No back ream diameter increase shall exceed
Page 283 of 432

37.5 mm. Furthermore, during the final pullback, the pullback rate shall not exceed 3 m per
minute.
(j) The pipe shall be sealed at both ends with a cap or a plug to prevent water, drilling fluids and
other foreign materials from entering the pipe as it is being pulled back.
(k) Pipe rollers, skates or other protective devices shall be used to prevent damage to the pipe,
eliminate ground drag, reduce pulling force, and reduce the stress on the pipe and joints.
(l) The drilling fluid in the annular region outside of the pipe shall not be removed after
installation, and remain in place to provide support for the pipe and neighbouring soil.
(m) Should the drilling operation be unsuccessful, the Operator shall ensure the backfill of any
void(s) with flow able fill.
(n) Entry penetration angles are limited by equipment capabilities. However, according to most
HDD drilling rigs’ design, the best entry angle should be between 100 and 120.
(o) Exit angles should generally range from 50 (for large diameter steel pipelines) to 120.
However, when high exit angles are encountered or designed, the pipe must be supported in
an elevated position during the pullback operation to prohibit the pipe from bending,
deforming, kinking, or even breaking.
Drilling Site
(a) Location
A minimum distance of 6 m, from the edge of the paved shoulder or curb to the face of any
equipment, and supplies, shall be maintained in areas posted at 50 kmph or less; otherwise, a
minimum distance of 9 m shall be maintained.
(b) Protection
• At discretion of owner’s Engineer/Inspector, traffic barriers shall be installed adjacent to machine

site locations according to the owner’s plans and current Standard Specifications for such
Construction. Temporary beam guardrail shall also be installed according to the current Standard
Specifications for Construction.
• Fencing barriers shall be installed adjacent to equipment and supplies with suitable fencing and
plastic drums to prohibit pedestrian access to the work site. Equipment shall not be used as
fencing to protect access pits.
Overcut Allowance
The overcut diameter shall not exceed the outside diameter (OD) of the pipe by more than 37.5 mm,
to ensure excessive voids are not created resulting in post installation settlement.
Watertight Joints
Water tight pipe joints are required to ensure, the integrity of the road bed. Pipe shall be constructed
to prevent water leakage or earth infiltration throughout its entire length.
A watertight specification refers the HDPE specification & hydraulic testing should be given as per the
technical specification of HDPE pipe given in contract.
Drilling Fluids
Page 284 of 432

(a) Drilling fluid shall be used during drilling and back reaming operations. Using water exclusively
may cause a collapse of the borehole while in unconsolidated soils, and may also cause soil
swelling while in clay soils. Either case may significantly impede the installation of the pipe.
(b) Excess drilling fluid shall be contained within a lined pit or containment pond, or trailer-mounted
portable tank, until removed from the site.
(c) All drilling fluids shall not enter the streets, manholes, sanitary and storm sewers, and other
drainage systems, including streams and rivers.
(d) Any damage to any highway or non- highway facility caused by escaping drilling fluid, or the
directional drilling operation, shall be immediately restored by the HDD operator.
Pipe Locating and Tracking
(a) During construction, continuous monitoring and plotting of pilot drill progress shall be undertaken
to ensure compliance with the proposed installation alignment and allow for appropriate course
corrections to be undertaken.
Monitoring shall be accomplished by manual plotting based on location and depth readings
provided by the locating/tracking system or by computer generated bore logs which map the bore
path based on information provided by the locating/tracking system. Readings or plot points shall
be undertaken on every drill rod.
(b) Pipe installed by the HDD method shall be located in plan as shown on the drawings, and shall
be no shallower than shown on the Drawings unless otherwise approved. The Operator shall plot
the actual horizontal and vertical alignment of the pilot bore at intervals not exceeding 9 m. This
“as built” plan and profile shall be updated as the pilot bore is advanced. The HDD operator shall
at all times provide and maintain instrumentation that will accurately locate the pilot hole and
measure drilling fluid flow and pressure. The HDD operator shall grant the Engineer/ Inspector
access to all data and readout pertaining to the position of the bore head, the fluid pressures, and
flows.
Settlement/Heaving Monitoring
(a) This method shall be performed in a manner that will minimize the movement of the ground in
front of, above, and surrounding the boring operation; and will minimize subsidence of the surface
above and in the vicinity of the boring.
(b) Potential settlement shall be monitored at each edge of right of way, each shoulder point, each
edge of pavement, the edge of each lane (or centreline for two lane roads), and otherwise at
15 m intervals along the pipe centreline.
(c) A survey shall be performed 1 day prior to initiating this operation at each required monitoring
location. A similar survey shall then be performed at each location, on a daily basis, until the
permitted activity has received a final inspection. This survey establishes the pre-existing and
post construction conditions, and the amount of settlement. All survey readings shall be recorded
to the nearest one-hundredth (0.01) of a meter. Whenever possible, trenchless pipe installations
shall not be installed directly under a pavement crack. Digital photographs of the pavement
conditions shall also be taken prior and after the pipe installation.
(d) All operations shall stop immediately whenever monitored points indicate a vertical change in
Page 285 of 432

elevation of 12 mm or more, or any surface disruption is observed. The Operator shall then
immediately report the amount of settlement to the owner’s Engineer/ Inspector.
Ground Water Control
Dewatering is not an issue with this method of installing pipe.
Boring Failure
(a) Should anything prevent completion of this operation, the remainder of the pipe shall be
constructed by methods approved by the PBC Engineer.
(b) Abandonment of any component of the installation shall only be allowed as approved by the
owner’s PBC Engineer.
Contamination
When an area of contaminated ground is encountered, all operations shall stop immediately, and shall
not proceed until approved by the PBC Engineer. Any slurry shall be tested for contamination and
disposed of in a manner, which meets locally applicable requirements.
Bulkhead
Pipe ends shall be temporarily sealed with a cap until the connection is made permanent, to prevent
water or earth infiltration.
Work Site Restoration
(a) Access pits and excavations shall be backfilled with suitable material, and in a method approved
by the PBC Engineer.
(b) The disturbed grass-surface area shall be top soiled, seeded, fertilized, mulched, and anchored
according the tender Specifications for construction. Slopes steeper than 1-on-3, shall be sodded.
If a final site restoration is not completed within 5 days after completion of the operation, the
installation of temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be required.
(c) Upon completion of the work, the Operator shall remove and properly dispose of all excess
materials and equipment from the work site.
(d) The permit, including the surety requirements, shall remain in effect for a minimum of one year
after completing the work to monitor for settlements of the pavement and/or slope.
Item No. 3:- Providing M.S Special
Specials – Fabrication
Generals
Specials, such as tees, Y‐pieces, bends (single or composite), tapers, tees, blank flanges and gap
pieces, collars etc. shall necessarily be in steel and shall be manufactured as per IS : 7322
standards and applicable codes and tested in the same manner as the pipes. Small branches, single
piece bends etc. may be fabricated at the site. Care shall be taken to ensure that the fabricated
fittings have at least the same strength as the pipeline to which they are to be joined and tested.
Bends
i. Bends shall be fabricated taking into account the vertical and horizontal angles for each case as
Page 286 of 432

per the IS code.
ii. The bends shall have welded joints and the upstream and downstream ends of each bend shall
have a straight piece of variable lengths as required at site.
iii. Bends shall be designed with deflection angle of maximum 10 degree between segments.
STEEL FLANGES
The flanges and their dimensions of drilling, wherever not specified, shall be in accordance with
IS:6392 – 1971 or its latest revision. The flanges shall be slip on boss type NP 1N/mm2. Prior to
welding flange.
Mechanical Joints - Fittings and specials (JIFFy)
Mechanical jiffy collar coupling should be of exact size, dia. and to the specifications and these jiffy
fittings should be of standard quality and confirming to IS standards (preferably be purchased from
authorized dealer)
Rubber Gaskets shall be as per IS specifications mentioned in the schedule.
Synthetic rubber ring dimension should be as per IS 12820 / 89 and quality should be as per I.S.
5382/1985 and suitable for jointing of D.I. pipes as per I.S. 8329-2000 or C.I. pipes as per I.S. 1536-
2001. Mechanical joint Bends, Tees, Reducer, Adopter etc. shall be of exact size, dia degree and as
per standard specifications.
The special shall be coated or protected from rusting and shall be suitable for D.I. pipes (as per IS
8329/2000) or C.I. pipes (as per IS 1536-2001).
Mechanical compression sealing flanged socket tail piece (Jiffy flange adopter) shall be of exact size
and dia. to match D.I. pipes (IS 8329-2000). Mechanical Joint double socket reducer shall be as per
IS 13382-1992 and suitable to D.I. pipes (IS 8329-2000) sealing gaskets of S.B.R. shall be as per IS
12820-1989.
This item includes providing of special transporting the special to site and testing. It also includes cost
of entire jointing material, cost of specials, and nut-bolts etc. Only labour charges required for jointing
shall be paid separately under relevant items of this tender.
Item No. 4:- Supply, Installation, Testing, and Commissioning of Flow Control Valve
Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning Hydraulically Operated Diaphragm controlled, Straight
Body type (No Y Type), Rate of Flow (RF) Valve with latching solenoid controlled by TORO battery
Controller. FUNCTION: Valve opens and controls the flow for designed hours and after that time
closes until next cycle. The Valve during operation gives a fixed flow to the downstream. The Valves
also Maintains a constant downstream pressure regardless of fluctuations in inlet pressure or flow.
Valve shall be supplied from the SJPNL approved list of the firms after third party inspection.
Material of construction
Body, Cover & Stem Cap in Ductile Iron ASTM A 536 65/45/12. Stem, Seat Ring, Spring of SS: 316.
Diaphragm, Seals, O-Rings EPDM/Buna N. The Valve body will be straight type and not Y type. The
SS: 316 Seat Rings shall be guaranteed for life of the Valves for potable water use only. The Valve
shall have removable Stem Cap for in line inspection and easy maintenance. The painting shall be
Page 287 of 432

NSF 61 fusion bonded epoxy coating safe for drinking water. All external fasteners shall be SS: 304.
Item No. 5:- Providing Pressure Reducing Valves
Item Includes:- Providing Valve of approved make from SJPNL
The Pressure Reducing Valve shall reduce higher pressure to lower preset downstream pressure
regardless of fluctuating demand or varying upstream pressure head.
Main Valve:
The main valve shall be a center guided, diaphragm actuated globe valve of either oblique (Y) or
angle pattern, design. The body shall have a replaceable, raised, stainless steel seat ring. The valve
shall have an unobstructed flow path with no stem guides, bearings, or supporting ribs. The body
and cover shall be ductile iron. All external bolts, nuts, and studs, shall be Duplex coated. All valve
components shall be accessible and serviceable without removing the valve from the pipeline.
Actuator: The actuator assembly shall be double chambered with an inherent separating partition
between the lower surface of the diaphragm and the main valve. The entire actuator assembly (seal
disk to top cover) shall be removable from the valve as an integral unit. The stainless steel valve
shaft shall be center guided by a bearing in the separating partition. The replaceable radial seal disk
shall include a resilient seal and shall be capable of accepting a V-Port Throttling Plug by bolting.
Control System: The control system shall consist of a 2-Way adjustable, direct acting, pressure
reducing pilot valve, a needle valve, isolating cock valves, and a filter. All fittings shall be forged
brass or stainless steel. The assembled valve shall be hydraulically tested and factory adjusted to
customer requirements. The required numbers of switch/contacts meet requirements for PLC
system.
Quality Assurance: The valve manufacturer shall be certified according to the ISO 9001 Quality
Assurance Standard. The main valve shall be certified as a complete drinking water valve.
Material of construction :
Body, Cover & Stem Cap in Ductile Iron ASTM A 536 65/45/12. Stem, Seat Ring, Spring of SS: 316.
Diaphragm, Seals, O-Rings EPDM/Buna N. The Valve body will be straight type and not Y type. The
SS: 316 Seat Rings shall be guaranteed for life of the Valves for potable water use only. The Valve
shall have removable Stem Cap for in line inspection and easy maintenance. The painting shall be
NSF 61 fusion bonded epoxy coating safe for drinking water. All external fasteners shall be SS: 304.
The valves shall be accepted after the third party inspection from Technical Auditor or any other
agency as authorized by SJPNL.
Item No. 6 & 7: - D.I Sluice Valve /Isolation Valve /Scour Valve
Manufacturing, supply and delivery of DI D/F non-rising spindle soft seated glandless Gate Valves
with body and bonnet of Ductile cast iron of grade GGG-40, wedge with fully encapsulated EPDM
rubber W-270 (approved for drinking water) and seals of NBR. The valves should be with replaceable
stem nut and replaceable sliding shoes. Valve stems shall be of single piece thread rolled. Valve shall
have 3 “O” rings of NBR for stem sealing. Gate valve shall be compatible for buried applications
without valve chamber. Face-to-face dimensions as per BS 5163-89/IS 14846-PD/EN 558F4 and
flange connections as per IS 1538, Maximum Valve operating torque should be at least 40% less than
the torque as stated in the standard EN 1074. Electrostatic epoxy powder/liquid coating (EP-P) inside
Page 288 of 432

and outside color blue RAL 5005 with minimum coating thickness of 250 microns. The EPDM rubber
& Epoxy Powder should be approved by W 270. (EP-P it is a resi-coat powder approved for drinking
water application, applied through fusion bonding technology process by dipping the shot-blasted
casted components heated up to 200 deg C).
Body, Bonnet Ductile Iron GGG 40 (EN-JS- 1030) / Spheroidal

Graphite Iron
IS: 1865 Gr 400/12 IS: 1865 Gr 400/12
Wedge (fully rubber Ductile Iron GGG 40 (EN-JS- 1030) / Spheroidal
encapsulated) Graphite Iron IS: 1865 Gr 400/12 encapsulated
with EPDM rubber - W270 approved grade.
Spindle/Stem SS: IS: 6603 12Cr13/22Cr 13;AISI 410/AISI 420
Stem Nut Brass
Bonnet Gasket EPDM rubber - W270 approved grade
Internal Fasteners Stainless Steel SS316/304
Stem Sealing Toroidal NBR sealing rings (Min 03 ‘O’ Rings)
Coating Inside & Outside epoxy powder coated; DFT
minimum 250 micron, shade RAL 5005 (BLUE)
The Operator shall supply the required dia of valves at his cost. The valves shall be accepted after
the third party inspection from Technical Auditor or any other agency as authorized by SJPNL, the
charges for the same shall be borne by the Operator
Item No. 8:- D.I Tamper Proof Air Valve
Providing and supplying, lowering laying & jointing at site ductile iron/spheroidal Graphite (S.G) iron
single/ double chamber tamper proof air valve without isolating sluice valve . Valves in accordance
with BSEN 1074-4 of PN 10/16 rated with body and bonnet of ductile iron confirming to EN 1563/IS
1865 Gr. 500/7 or Gr 400/15 floats, Float guide , seat ring of stainless steel 1.4436/1.4306, seat ring
gasket of Water Regulations Advisory Scheme (WRAS) approved Ethylene Propylene Diene
Monomer (EPDM) rubber (suitable for drinking water), internal fasteners of stainless steel A2 body
and bonnet coated inside and outside with electrostatically applied epoxy powder coated blue colour
(suitable for drinking water) as per DIN 30677-2 & GSK guidelines with a coating thickness of min.
250 microns. Flange connections as per IS 1538 raised face & pressure testing at manufactures
works shall be done as per IS 14845. Including all taxes and transportation charges etc. complete
The Operator shall supply the required diameter of valves at his cost. The valves shall be accepted
after the third party inspection from Technical Auditor or any other agency as authorized by
SJPNL, the charges for the same shall be borne by the Operator
Item No: -9 Electromagnetic Flow Meter with Battery Operated
Providing installing Electromagnetic Flow Meters with cost of accessories required. Flow Meter are to
be fixed for measurement of water flowing in & out of the distribution.
General Technical Specification & Conditions for Electromagnetic (Full bore) :-
1.1 SJPNL has provided the size of pipe is indicative. The actual size, O.D.I.D., thickness shall be
measured by Manufacture before supply of meter, any deviation and delay or damage cost due to
non-fitting of meter shall be borne by Manufacture. The liquidity damage due to delay in fitting for
wrong selection of fittings and accessories lies with Manufacture.
1.2 If there is any problem with ovality of pipes after the pipes are cut, the Operator as per the
relevant standards shall jack up the pipes and the jointing work shall be carried out.
Page 289 of 432

1.3 The Manufacture will have a full system of local offices in India and full-service capability in the
Metro-cities throughout the country. Full contact details for key personnel, both national and local
shall be furnished on request. The supplier shall provide evidence of at least five years
involvement in the manufacturing of meters worldwide.
1.4 The sensor / transmitter cables shall be capable of withstanding the climatic condition as
applicable at site and should be weatherproof. The cable shall be installed in a suitable uPVC
duct to minimize the risk of damage during excavations for other works. All the cable laid at a
minimum depth of 0.5 m below the ground. Maximum length between the sensor & the transmitter
shall not be more than that recommended by the meter Manufacture.
1.5 The Electromagnetic battery-operated flow meter shall have inbuilt integral maintenance free
batteries with a minimum of 10 years life, on continuous operation and rated not worse than IP68
protection.
1.6 The portable devices shall be compatible to the logger & flow meters for the purpose of retrieving
data and resetting the data loggers / meter as part of this contract. The portable download
devices should be simple to operate, robust in construction. The portable download devices
should be compatible for downloading the data to a desktop or laptop computers. Supply of
portable download devices also includes supply of necessary programming and communication
leads for connection with data logger and desktop / laptop computers. All the necessary software
for downloading of data from logger to portable devices & software for download of data from
portable devices to laptop / desktop computers to be provided by the Operator.
1.7 The flow meter shall be supplied with compatible features for “Gateway for Remote Monitoring of
flow meter via Web Browsers”. The system should enable remote monitoring, remote diagnosis
and remote configuration of connected HART sensors/actuators, either via telephone lines
(analogue and ISDN), Ethernet TCP/IP and mobile communications (GSM). The measured data
shall be web-compatible.
1.8 All safety precaution with lighting protection shall be provided to all the flow meters, the failure /
damage to flow meter for any reason for the warranty and period of annual maintenance contract
shall be with Manufacture, hence, cost of insurance against all failure / damage (if any) shall be
borne by Manufacture no additional payment will be made.
Full bore electromagnetic flow meter shall consist of flow sensor (i.e. flow tube), flow transmitter and
flow indicator and integrator and any other item required to complete the system. To avoid the effects
of disturbances in the velocity profile, a straight and uninterrupted run, upstream as well as
downstream from the location of the flow meter shall be provided, as required by the flow meter
manufacturer and in line with the applicable standards. Operator shall finalize the exact location of
flow meter in consultation with Authority’s Representative.
Flow measurement shall not be affected by physical properties of water viz., temperature, pressure
etc., within given limits. Operator shall provide compensating electronic circuits, if required.
Operator shall construct a suitable concrete chamber for enclosing flow meter if it is to be mounted on
underground pipe lines. A concrete enclosure shall be constructed above the chamber for housing the
flow transmitter. For surface pipelines, a concrete cabin shall be constructed around the pipeline for
housing the flow meter and the flow transmitter.
Page 290 of 432

A lockable enclosure shall be provided for the flow transmitter cum computing unit. Flow meters shall
be suitable for the water turbidity at site during various seasons. Flow tube shall be rugged in
construction and shall be suitable for continuous operation. Flow tube shall have waterproof
construction and shall be suitable for installation on underground /above ground pipe lines.
The flow computer and transmitter shall be a single unit suitable for field mounting. It shall accept
inputs from flow tube process the signals and shall provide an output proportional to the flow rate. The
output shall be suitable for transmitting over a long distance.
Full bore electromagnetic flow meters should be designed, manufactured and calibrated according to
ISO:17025 standard. The flow meter shall be capable of measuring bi-directional flow. Meter shall be
a velocity sensing electromagnetic type, microprocessor based signal converter, sealed housing,
flanged tube meter for 1.0 MPa working pressure. The meter shall be manufactured to highest
standard.
The meter shall be equipped with minimum six digit digital totalizes, reading in units of kiloliters and
shall be accurate within 0.5% of true flow. The accuracy should be inclusive of linearity, hysteresis,
repeatability and pressure effect. The meter assembly shall operate within a range of 0.3 m/sec to 4
m/sec and be constructed as follows:
Meter Tube (Sensor) shall be fabricated from stainless steel tube and use class ANSI / PN10 flat
face carbon steel flanges in accordance with IS 1538. The internal and external of the meter tube
shall be blasted to near white and lined with hard rubber and with drinking water approval for linear
preferably by SBR or EPDM. Meter tube shall have a constant nominal inside diameter offering no
obstruction to the flow.
Coil Housing: All flow meters within the premises of DAMs (for flow meters in submerged condition)
should be fully welded to the tube providing completely sealed environment for all coils, electrode
connections and wiring harness capable of submerged or buried operation. Coil protection shall be IP
68 only.
Upto 600mm dia. die cast aluminum epoxy coated / Stainless steel housing is acceptable.
Above 600mm dia. the housing should be Stainless steel only.
Signal Converter shall be pulsed DC coil excitation type with auto zeroing. The signal converter shall
be remotely mounted away from the meter. The converter shall indicate direction of flow and provide a
flow rate indication and a total of flow volume for both forward and reverse directions. The converter
shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA output into minimum 500-ohm load and a frequency output of a
maximum of 0-800 HZ and a scaled pulse output. The microprocessor based signal converter shall
have a self-diagnostic test mode and a backlit display that continuously displays 'Rate of Flow' and
'Total Volume'.
The converter shall be compatible with Microsoft Windows and other software programmes with built
in terminal communication capabilities of RS 232/HART interface.
The converter shall be remotely mounted up to 200 m from the sensor, and shall be supplied with all
calibration complete for desired requirements. Converter shall be supplied with a programmable low
flow drop out and empty pipe zero return. The signal converter housing should be die-cast aluminum
with glass window. The converter cum transmitter should be fully programmable from the front fascia.
Page 291 of 432

The programming should be user friendly, self-prompting menu driven. The complete meter assembly
and signal converter must be wet accuracy tested and calibrated as a unit near minimum,
intermediate and maximum specified flow ranges of the meter (full range of flow). The volume of water
used to conduct the test must be shown on a shipping tag attached to the meter. To calibrate these
meters, only direct volume comparison calibration method should be used. The overall accuracy of
the calibration rig should be at least three times better than the accuracy of the full bore
electromagnetic flow meter. All the meters shall be calibrated for a minimum of 3 point. The magnetic
flow meter should perform within the required accuracy of measured value without being affected by
change in pressure due to demand fluctuation. The length of the sensor should be strictly as per ISO
up to DN 600 mm and for other sizes it should be as per the standard.
To avoid ingress of water in the sensor housing, sensor has to be of fully welded construction. The
maximum distance between flow sensor and the signal converter transmitter can be at 150 mtr.
Supplier should give calibration certificate for all the flow meters. The flow meter should have
grounding rings only.
Flow Sensor:
Type : Pulse DC excitation
System : Separate with cable output
Power Supply : 240 V AC, 50 Hz
End Connection : CS Flanges
Flange Rating : PN 10
Electrode : SS 316
Electrode type : Round Head Electrodes
Meter Tube : SS 304
Liner : Hard Rubber
Coil Housing : SS 304 with fully welded construction
Protection category : IP 68
Connection / Junction Box : SS 304
Earthing : Grounding Rings (Grounding Electrode Not acceptable)
Accuracy : ±0.5 % of MV inclusive of linearity,
Repeatability, pressure effects and hysteresis
Marking : Flow direction with arrow, size Serial No. & make.
Flow Transmitter / Converter:
Type: Micro processor based & Modular
Mounting: Remote
Display language: English
Display Two line back lit LCD for indication of actual flow rate, forward, reverse and sum totalizer.
Page 292 of 432

Empty Pipe Detection: Required.
Output: One current output (4 – 20 mA)
Protection Category: IP 68
Enclosure: Die cast aluminum with polyurethane finish with glass window
Programming: From front fascia through keypad / optical pin programming. Programming should be
done without the opening of display cover.
Power Supply: 240 V AC, 50 Hz
Cable Gland: ½” NPT, 4 glands double compression type
Mounting: Wall Mounted
Interface: HART
Power failure mode: Provision of RAM /PROM to store parameter entered and measured flow data
during power failure.
Separation: Up to 100 metres.
Terminal: Shock -Hazard - Protected push lock Terminal
Error identification: 0/3.6/22 mA
Interchange ability: Fully interchangeable with all the flow Sensors
These tests should be performed in the in‐house laboratory of the meter manufacturer.
The Authority will depute Third Party Inspection Agency to the meter manufacturing facility of the
manufacturer to inspect the meter as per QAP approved by PBC Engineer, inspection charges and
all other charges shall be borne by the Operator.
Item No. 10:- Pressure Transmitters
a) Pressure measuring system shall consist of pressure transducer and transmitter and digital
pressure indicator and any other items required to complete the pressure measuring system.
Pressure transmitters shall be provided with a test port so that in-site calibration can be carried
out.
b) Pressure transmitter shall be rugged in construction and shall be suitable for continuous
operation. Pressure transmitters shall be designed for operation over 130% of full range. They
shall be capable of withstanding surge pressures likely to occur in the monitored system.
c) Pressure transmitters shall be suitable for field mounting. They shall provide 4-20 mA DC output
proportional to pressure. Transmitter output shall be isolated and shall be suitable for transmitting
over long distance. Pressure transmitters shall have high degree of weatherproof protection as
specified in technical particular.
d) Pressure sensor shall be capable of operating in the range of pumps discharge pressure, and be
of the diaphragm type. It shall be provided complete with impulse tubing, fittings, two valve
manifolds with drain cock/calibration valve. Local and remote display units shall be provided
I) General
Page 293 of 432

1 Accuracy of measuring loop ± 0.1% of full scale or better

II) Pressure sensor and transmitter
1 Sensor Diaphragm Sensor
2 Material of sensor and other SS 316
wetted parts
3 Transmitter type 2-wire, Indicating type
4 Range Adjustable over full span
5 Zero and span adjustment Required
6 Output signal 4-20mA DC, Isolated
7 Power Supply 24V DC Ext
8 Enclosure protection IP 67 of IS 13947 Part I
9 Accessories 2-valve manifold with drain cock, impulse tubing,
snubbers and all installation hardware
III) Digital Pressure Indicator
Specifications shall be as given under ‘Digital Panel Meters’.
B. Civil Work for Distribution System/Transmission Main & Pumping Main Technical
Specification
Item No. 1:- Excavation for Pipe Trench
(i) Excavation of Soft Soil
The Operator shall furnish all tools, plant instruments, qualified supervisory personnel, labour,
materials, any temporary works, consumables, any and everything necessary, whether or not such
items are specifically stated herein for completion of the work in accordance with the Department’s
Requirements.
The Operator shall survey the site before excavation and set out all lines and establish levels for
various works such as grading, basement, foundations, plinth filling, roads, drains, cable trenches,
pipelines etc. Such survey shall be carried out by taking accurate cross sections of the area
perpendicular to established reference/grid lines at 8 m in case of buildings and 30 m in case of roads
and pipe lines works intervals or nearer, if necessary, based on ground profile and thereafter properly
recorded.
The excavation shall be carried out to correct lines and levels. This shall also include, where required,
proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting and maintaining of
substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at night.
Excavated material shall be dumped in regular heaps, bunds, riprap with regular slopes and levelling
the same so as to provide natural drainage. Rock/soil excavated shall be stacked properly as
approved by the PBC Engineer. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid along the centre of heaps,
the harder and more weather resisting materials forming the casing on the sides and the top. Topsoil
shall be stock piled separately for later re-use.
Drainage and Dewatering:-
No distinction shall be made as to whether the material condition strata is being excavated in dry,
moist or wet. Diversion of all storm water and pumping out of all storm and seepage water shall be
undertaken to keep the trenches pit reasonably dry for lowering, laying, jointing and testing of the
pipes i.e. till the completion of the work.
Shoring and Strutting:-
The items include all shoring and strutting that may be required. On no account the width of
Page 294 of 432

trenches more than these mentioned hereinafter shall be measured. If excavation, more than the
specified, is required for the purposes of keeping pumping machinery, stepping due to loose fill
materials or for any other reasons, the same will be at the Operator’s cost.
Lighting, Barricading and Guarding:-
These items also include necessary lighting at night at site of work and at intervals of 150 meters
along the excavated trenches, and at all crossings and barricading the same by fencing so as to
avoid any accident. A watchman must be employed at site of work and places where the trenches,
cross over any traffic roads to caution the vehicles and pedestrians etc. These
arrangements shall be maintained till the completion of work and at the cost of the Operator.
Alignment and Levels:-
Before the trench excavation is commenced, sight rails shall be erected at every 30 m. and at all
points of changes of direction, gradient, and at ends. The excavation work shall be preceded by a
joint survey along the alignment of the mains to obtain ground levels at every 30 m or less
distance. Temporary bench marks shall be constructed at every 300 m. distance along the alignment
and shall be maintained till the completion of the work. All labour and materials required for the survey
work, and fixing bench marks etc. shall be provided by the Operator at his own cost.
Depth and Grades of Trenches:-
The trenches shall be excavated to the grade and depth and on the line as shown on the approved
drawings. The depth of excavation and the level of the pipes inverts shall be checked by means of
boning rods of suitable, lengths. The final measurements of the depth of excavation shall be taken as
the difference between the levels of the pipe top and the corresponding ground level added by the
total out diameter of the pipe. Depth of murum bedding sand bedding wherever provided will be
added to the above measurement for arriving at the total depth of excavation. Thus the depth of
excavation to be paid for shall be finalized only after the pipes are laid and jointed. Additional depths
required to be excavated at sockets, collars, specials, joints and for any other working facilities shall
not be measured nor paid for. The depths to be considered shall be average depth in every 30 M
length.
Width of Trench
(c) Upto one metre depth the authorized width of trench for excavation shall be arrived at by adding
25 cm to the external diameter of pipe (not socket/ collar) cable, conduit etc. Where a pipe is laid
on concrete bed/ cushioning layer, the authorized width shall be the external diameter of pipe (not
socket/ collar) plus 25 cm or the width of concrete bed/ cushioning layer whichever is more.
(d) For depths exceeding one metre, an allowance of 5 cm per metre of depth for each side of the
trench shall be added to the authorized width (that is external diameter of pipe plus 25 cm) for
excavation. This allowance shall apply to the entire depth of the trench. In firm soils the sides of
the trenches shall be kept vertical upto depth of 2 meters from the bottom. For depths greater than
2 meters, the excavation profiles shall be widened by allowing steps of 50 cm on either side after
every two metres from bottom.
(e) Where more than one pipe, cable, conduit etc, are laid, the diameter shall be reckoned as the
horizontal distance from outside to outside of the outermost pipes, cable, conduit etc.
(f) Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, width of trench shall be suitably increased or side sloped or
Page 295 of 432

the soil shored up as directed by the Engineer‐in‐Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the
Operator to take complete instructions in writing from the Engineer‐in‐ Charge regarding increase
in the width of trench. Sloping or shoring to be done for excavation in soft, loose or slushy soils.
The maximum permissible width as specified below or the actual width excavated whichever is less
shall be recorded and paid for. Extra width at colors, joints and also at specials for working facility shall
neither be measured nor paid for:
Table 2: Maximum Permissible width
Sr. No. Diameter of Pipe Permissible Width of Trenches

1. 1000 mm 1.70 M
2. 900 mm 1.60 M
3. 800 mm 1.60 M
4. 700 mm 1.30 M
5. 600 mm 1.20 M
6. 500 mm 1.10 M
7. 450 mm 1.10 M
8. 400 mm 1.00 M
9. 350 mm 0.95 M
10. 300 mm 0.90 M
11. 250 mm 0.85 M
12. 200 mm 0.85 M
13. 150 mm 0.75 M
14. 100 mm 0.75 M
Dressing and Consolidation of the Trenches :‐
The bed of the trenches shall be well rammed before laying the pipe. Hollows if any shall be filled
with murrum duly rammed without extra cost. The whole bed of the trenches shall be so dressed in
grade and line that the pipes are given continuous bearing for their whole lengths except at sockets,
or the collars and specials joints etc. Necessary pits for socket collar and specials joints etc. shall
be provided in approved manner.
Filling in Excess Depths :‐
Depths of pit / trenches excavated in excess of requirements shall be refilled by selected hard murum
well rammed and watered for trenches to the required level and grade.
Classification of Excavation :‐
For pipe line trenches all the materials and strata encountered in the excavation shall mainly be
classified in three categories.
Excavation (soft soil, hard murum and boulders)
All excavation operations manually or by mechanical means shall include excavation and ‘getting out’
the excavated materials. In case of excavation for trenches, basements, water tanks etc. ‘getting out’
Page 296 of 432

shall include throwing the excavated materials at a distance of at least one meter or half the depth of
excavation, whichever is more, clear off the edge of excavation. In all other cases ‘getting out’ shall
include depositing the excavated materials as specified. The subsequent disposal of the excavated
material shall be either stated as a separate item or included with the items of excavation stating lead.
During the excavation the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained. Excavation shall be done
from top to bottom. Undermining or undercutting shall not be done.
In firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical upto a depth of 2 meters from the
bottom. For greater depths, the excavation profiles shall be widened by allowing steps of 50 cms on
either side after every 2 meters from the bottom. Alternatively, the excavation can be done so as to
give slope of 1:4 (1 horizontal: 4 vertical). Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps
shall be suitably increased or sides sloped or the soil shored up as directed by the Engineer‐in‐
Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the Operator to take complete instructions in writing from the
Engineer‐in‐Charge regarding the stepping, sloping or shoring to be done for excavation deeper than
2 meters.
The excavation shall be done true to levels, slope, shape and pattern indicated by the Engineer‐in‐
Charge. Only the excavation shown on the drawings with additional allowances for centering and
shuttering or as required by the Engineer‐in‐Charge.
In case of excavation for foundation in trenches or over areas, the bed of excavation shall be
to the correct level or slope and consolidated by watering and ramming. If the excavation for
foundation is done to a depth greater than that shown in the drawings or as required by the
Engineer‐in‐Charge, the excess depth shall be made good by the Operator at his own cost with the
concrete of the mix used for levelling/ bed concrete for foundations. Soft/defective spots at the bed of
the foundations shall be dug out and filled with concrete (to be paid separately) as directed by the
Engineer‐in‐Charge.
While carrying out the excavation for drain work care shall be taken to cut the side and bottom to
the required shape, slope and gradient. The surface shall then be properly dressed. If the
excavation is done to a depth greater than that shown on the drawing or as required by the
Engineer‐in‐Charge, the excess depth shall be made good by the Operator at his own cost with stiff
clay puddle at places where the drains are required to be pitched and with ordinary earth, properly
watered and rammed, where the drains are not required to be pitched. In case the drain is required is
to be pitched, the back filling with clay puddle, if required, shall be done simultaneously as the
pitching work proceeds. The brick pitched storm water drains should be avoided as far as possible in
filled‐up areas and loose soils.
In all other cases where the excavation is taken deeper by the Operator, it shall be brought to the
required level by the Operator at his own cost by filling in with earth duly watered, consolidated and
rammed.
In case the excavation is done wider than that shown on the drawings or as required by the
Engineer‐in‐Charge, additional filling wherever required on the account shall be done by the
Operator.
The excavation shall be done manually or by mechanical means as directed by Engineer‐in‐charge

considering feasibility, urgency of work, availability of labour /mechanical equipment’s and other
factors involved. Operator shall ensure every safety measures for the workers.
Page 297 of 432

(ii) Excavation in Hard murum
Detailed specification as per above.
(iii) Excavation in Soft Rock
All excavation operations shall include excavation and ‘getting out’ the excavated matter. In case of
excavation for trenches, basements, water tanks etc. ‘getting out’ shall include throwing the
excavated materials at a distance of at least one meter or half the depth of excavation, whichever is
more, clear off the edge or excavation. In all other cases ‘getting out’ shall include depositing the
excavated materials as specified. The subsequent disposal of the excavated material shall be
either stated as a separate item or included with the item of excavation stating lead.
During the excavation, the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained. Excavation shall be
done from top to bottom. Undermining or under cutting shall not be done.
Where blasting operations are prohibited or are not practicable, excavation in hard rock shall be done
by chiseling.
In ordinary rock excavation shall be carried out by crowbars, pick axes or pneumatic drills and blasting
operation shall not be generally adopted.
If the excavation for foundations or drains is done to a depth greater than that shown in the
drawings or as required by the Engineer‐in‐Charge. The excess depth shall be made good by the
Operator at his own cost with the concrete of the mix used for levelling/ bed concrete for foundations.
Soft/ defective spots at the bed of foundations shall be dug out and filled with concrete (to be paid
separately) as directed by the Engineer‐in‐Charge.
In all other cases where the excavation is taken deeper by the Operator, it shall be brought to the
required level by the Operator by filling with earth duly watered, consolidated and rammed.
In case the excavation is done wider than that shown on the drawings or as required by the
Engineer‐in‐Charge, filling wherever required on this account shall be done by the Operator.
Only the excavation shown on the drawings or as required by the Engineer‐in‐Charge shall be
measured and recorded for payment except in case of hard rock, where blasting operations have
been resorted to, excavation shall be measured to the actual levels, provided the
Engineer‐in‐Charge is satisfied that the Operator has not gone deeper than what was unavoidable.
The excavation shall be done manually or by mechanical means as desired by

Engineer‐in‐Charge considering feasibility, urgency of work, availability of labour /mechanical
equipment’s and other factors involved Operator shall ensure every safety measures for the workers.
(iv) Excavation in Hard Rock
Earth work by mechanical means involves careful planning keeping in view site conditions i.e. type of
soil, nature of excavation, distances through which excavated soil is to be transported and working
space available for employing these machines. The earth moving equipment should be accordingly
selected.
The earth moving equipment consists of excavating and transporting equipment. Excavating
equipment’s may be further classified as excavators and tractor based equipment’s.
Excavation with chiseling or tractor Mounted Road Breaker
Page 298 of 432

Tractor Mounted Compressor
 Tractor Mounted Compressor Specially modified to use double Drill or Breaker
Accessories AS PER REQUIREMENT

Compressor Technology Screw
Compressor Type Air Compressor
Number of Compression Stages Single Stage
Horse Power ABOVE 100
Discharge Pressure 14 BAR
Maximum Flow Rate 121 - 500 cfm
Air Tank Capacity AS PER REQUIREMENT
Power Source Diesel
Lubrication Style Oil Flooded
Cooling Method Air Cooled
Features:
 World Class Air End - Low rotor speed, few moving parts & efficient design of compressor
minimizes wear & tear, ensuring reliability and long working life.
 Clean Intake Air - The single high performance two-stage air intake filter prevents dust & dirt
particles from entering the compressor & engine. A service indicator on the filter tells you that it
needs maintenance & replacement.
 Ease of Operation - All the controls are grouped on a single panel for easy monitoring, safety
and fool-proof operation.
 Easy Access - The canopy doors open outwards providing easy access to the machine. With
doors up and out of the way, routine maintenance can be performed in less time.
 Highly transportable – Your operators will appreciate the small dimensions and light weight of
Size 1 compressors, as they can easily maneuver the machines from one location to another.
 Operating Economy - You can count on economical fuel consumption and continuous airflow at
stable pressure as it's fully automated step less control constantly adapts the compressor output
to air demand. Its Euro compliant fuel efficient engines offer best operating economy.
Technical Specifications
Model KD 325 KD 400 KD 450
FAD (m3/min) 8.28 10.5 12.6
Operating Pressure (kg/cm2g) 8.5 12.0 14.0
Tank Capacity (oil) 30 34 34
Tank Capacity (fuel) 100 150 200
Dry Weight (kg) 1450 2100 2140
No. of Cylinders 4 6 6
Engine Full Load Speed (rpm) 2600 2300 2100
Starting Voltage 12 24 24
Page 299 of 432

Excavators:- Excavators generally used at site are as follows:
(i) Dipper–shovel : It is used for excavating against a face or bank consisting of open‐top bucket or
dipper with a bottom opening door, fixed to an arm or dipper stick which slides
and pivots on the jib of the crane. It is suitable for excavating all clay chalk and
friable materials and for handling rock and stone. However, it is not suitable for
surface excavation for which a skimmer is used.
(ii) Backhoe : It is similar to face shovel except that the dipper stick pivots on the end of the
jib and the dipper or bucket works towards the chassis and normally has no
bottom door but is emptied by swinging away from the chassis to invert the
bucket. It may be designed to carry both a front –mounted bucket loading
mechanism and a rear mounted backhoe. It is mainly used to excavate
trenches and occasionally used for the excavation of open areas such as small
basements.
In the backhoe mode the bucket lifts, swings and discharges materials while
the undercarriage is stationary. When used in the ‘loader’ mode, the machine
loads or excavated through forward motion of the machine, and lifts, transports
and discharges materials.
(iii) Skimmer : This arrangement is similar to the face shovel except that in this case the
bucket slides on rollers directly along the jib and thus has a more restricted
movement. It is used for surface excavation and levelling in conjunction with
transport to haul away the excavated material.
(iv) Dragline : It is usually fitted with a long slender boom or jib and the bucket, which in
operation faces towards the machine and has no door, is supported by cable
only as on a crane. It works from the side of the excavation at normal ground
level and is used for excavating large open excavations such as basements
when the depth is beyond the limit of the boom of a backhoe. Itis commonly
used for open cast mining operations.
(v) Clamshell : It consists of two hinged half‐buckets or jaws pivoted to a frame which is
suspended by cable from a long jib of an excavation. The grab is used for deep
excavations of limited area on all types of soil except rock. Crane and Grab is a
variant of this type of equipment.
Tractor–based Equipment:- It is a self–propelled crawler or wheeled machine used to exert a

push or pull force through mounted equipment. It is designed either as attachments to normal
tracked or wheeled tractors or as machines in which the earth moving attachments and the tractor
are designed as a single integrated unit. A tractor, which is hydraulically operated, can be rigged
as:
(i) Loaders : It is used for loading, light dozing, scraping and grabbing operations, lifting
and transporting the materials (loose earth, rubble, sand, gravel aggregate
etc) at various sites through forward motion of the machine.
(ii) Tractor Shovel : This consists of a tipping bucket at the front attached by strong pivoted arms
or booms to the frame of the machine. It is used for stripping top soil,
excavating against a face, bulldozing and for loading spoil or loose materials.
Page 300 of 432

It is similar to crawler dipper‐shovel.
(iii) Trench Digger : It operates on the same principle as a backhoe excavator except that the
bucket is controlled by hydraulic rams instead of cables and pulleys.
(iv) Scraper : Scrapers provide unique capability to excavate, load, haul and dump
materials.
Scrapers are available in various capacities by a number of manufacturers

with options such as self – loading with elevators, twin engines or push‐pull
capability. They are cost effective where the haul distance is too long for
bulldozers, yet too short for trucks. This distance typically ranges from 120 m
to 1200 m; however, the economics should be evaluated for each project.
Scraper has an open bowl with a cutting edge positioned between the axles,
which cut, loads, transports, discharges and spreads through forward motion
of the machine. Loading through forward motion of the machine can be
assisted by a powered mechanism (elevator) fixed to the scraper bowl.
(v) Bulldozer and Angle‐dozer : The most common equipment used for clearing and leveling
activities is a bulldozer. The terms bulldozer is used to define a tractor
mounted with a dozing blade. The bulldozer consists of a rectangular steel
blade with renewable cutting edge set at right angles (capable of only tilting but
not angling) to the direction of travel and attached by steel arms to the side
frames of a crawler tractor. It may be used for excavating natural soil or for
moving loose soil or debris, which is pushed forward as the tractor forces it
ahead.
(vi) Angle dozer is capable of both tilting and angling
Transporting Equipment
This implies horizontal movement primarily but it can involve some vertical movement too.
(i) Dumpers : These are self‐propelled wheeled machines, having an open body.
It is designed for the transport of excavated materials and consists of a
shallow tipping hopper or skip mounted on a wheeled chassis, such as, power
barrow, dumper, multi‐skip dumpers, high discharge dumpers, dump truck,
etc. These can be rear dump, side dump or bottom dump.
(ii) Vibratory Roller : It is a single Drum Vibratory Roller for compaction of embankments, etc. The
smooth drum version is for compaction of granular and mixed soil. The sheep
foot Roller consists of a hallow cylindrical steel drum or drums on which
projecting feet are mounted. These feet penetrate into the fill as a roller
moves forward and cause compaction. The geometry of the foot may be
sheep, club pyramid, cone or cylinder foot. Such rollers are employed for
compaction (densification) of cohesive and semi‐cohesive soils.
Providing, Temporary crossing over the Trenches :‐
Where the trenches are excavated across roads or along roads in a village or town area,
suitable and safe temporary crossing, duly approved by the Engineer shall be provided. Such
crossings shall be maintained in proper conditions till the completion of the work. As for as possible
trenches along/across roads, shall be excavated in such a way that at least 5.0 M. clear width of the
road is available for the traffic. In case this is not possible, adequate diversion shall be provided by the
Page 301 of 432

Operator at his cost, such costs being deemed as included in the unit rates for these item of
excavation. All crossings and diversions shall be suitably barricaded with railing on either side of
the road and lighted at night.
Backfilling of Trenches of Pipeline: ‐
All fill material shall be subject to the PBC Engineer’s approval. If any material is rejected by PBC
Engineer, the Operator shall remove the same forthwith from the site. Surplus fill material shall be
deposited / disposed off as directed by Engineer-in- charge after the fill work is completed.
No earth fill shall commence until surface water discharges and streams have been properly
intercepted or otherwise dealt with to the approval of the PBC Engineer. All the trenches will be
refilled and compacted in layers as specified in Standard Specifications. Operator will take regular
photographs of refilling in layers and compaction of each layer to required density.
Filling Trenches with Stone Dust: ‐
The stone dust shall be filled 100% in across road crossing until the road restoration completed. So
also the work shall be carried out as per the directives of the Engineer‐in‐charge. For supplying
stone dust or laying in the trench where the road crossing is done.
Crossing of pipe lines, cables and underground obstructions etc.:-
Since the alignment passes through township, there is every possibility of coming across pipelines of
water supply, drainage lines and cables of telephones and M.S.E.B. This item includes the risk and
restoring cost of damaged cables for rejoining as well as for carefulness and awareness during
excavation, to avoid breakage of water pipe lines of small and larger diameter and also drainage pipe
lines, cables etc. The item covers the cost of renovation of any damaged cables / pipelines during
excavation. The Operator is therefore requested to go through all the details of existing lines / cables
etc. along the alignment of distribution mains before submission of tender.
Item No. 2:- RCC Valve Chambers :-
The work which shall be carried out as per Construction Specification contained in this section,
involves construction of RCC manholes at site or prefabricated as instruction of site in charge.
Manholes:
RCC Chambers will be provided at where it necessary. However if required the same has to be
provided in the road. This type of Chamber will be used when manholes are provided in footpath.
RCC Chambers: the wall will be constructed in cast in situ RCC. The roof will also be heavy duty RCC
slab in two halves.
Specification for Reinforced Cement Concrete Manholes:
a) Chambers, due to constraints of the location, may have to be constructed on the road. The wall,
roof and floor thickness will be 15 cm. The Manhole chamber with above said measurement
should be constructed with solid RCC blocks having 15 cm thickness / or with prefabricated CC
structure. The top of the manhole should be covered with prefabricated CC structure. The top of
the manhole should be covered with RCC slabs. The RCC slabs so covered should be flush with
the level of the adjacent ground; footpath etc., the drawing for manhole may be referred.
Page 302 of 432

b) All chambers / manholes shall be made water proof using water proofing compound. Necessary
care shall be taken at construction joints to make the jointing chamber water proof. Whenever
required, special water proofing treatment like guniting chemical water proofing treatment, cement
based water proofing treatment, polythene sheet water proofing treatment etc., may be resorted
as per direction of PBC Engineer.
c) The Manhole chamber with the said measurement should be constructed using reinforced cement
concrete (RCC) casting. The top of the manhole should be covered with RCC slabs of size 15cm
(thick) × 40 cm (width).
d) After excavation, bottom of the pit shall be leveled and shall be free from stones and other objects
and obstructions. Necessary space shall be prepared to accommodate sump. 75mm cement
concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size)
shall be laid in level as a base course. Over this 10 cm RCC with 1:1½:3 mix shall be laid with 6
mm rod and 10×10 cm grid.
e) Curing of concrete: After the concrete hardens, it shall be protected from quick drying with moist
gunny bags, sand or any other materials approved by Site Engineer. The curing shall be done for
a minimum period of 5 days or as determined by the Site Engineer.
f) Finishing chambers / pedestal: The internal faces of roof, walls and neck of chamber and exposed
areas of pedestals shall be finished smooth with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand),
finished smooth with a floating coat of neat cement.
g) Finishing of outer surface of chambers: Finishing of outer face of the chamber shall be done with
12 mm thick cement plaster 1:3 (1 Cement: 3 fine sand).
h) Finishing of floor of chambers: The floor of manhole / hand hole including sump shall be finished
with 40 mm thick (av) cement concrete flooring by providing adequate slope.
i) Fixtures pulling – in – eyelet: It shall be secured to the reinforcement bar in the manhole floor and
embedded in such way that a pulling force of 3 Tones can be withstood. An eyelet shall always be
provided for each duct nest assembly and placed in the center line of the duct at the opposite
corner or rear corner in the base of the Chamber.
j) Holding bolts for pedestals: These shall be fixed during casting of pedestals. To maintain their
position, templates shall be used after obtaining their approval from PBC Engineer. (Modified &
Amended)
k) Vertical Racking: Regarding Vertical Racking arrangement:-
Vertical Racking arrangement has been changed. Ladder in minimum three steps may be
provided for going inside & coming outside from the manhole using 12mm dia M.S. rod on smaller
size of walls and on opposite side and fixing it in RCC (as per drawing given).
The arrangement for pipe openings shall be done
Frame and cover assembly: The frame for the cover shall be fixed as per standard drawings.
The top level of frame shall be flush with road level or footpath level as the case may be.
Cover Lifting arrangement:
Page 303 of 432

Cover lifting arrangement may be as per drawing given. 16mm did rod of 40Cm. in U shape at
existing positions and a bowl of S.F.R.C iron of 10cm. dia is to be provided so that the cover may
be lifted easily.
l) Loading : The manhole cover and frame shall be able to withstand heavy duty grade of loading
conforming to relevant IS Code, square type and shall be galvanized according to ISO : 1460 R &
R 1461 or IS 4736.
m) Manufacture: Chamber cover and frame shall be MS Galvanized. Channels for cover and frames
shall be folded with MS Galvanized sheet as per direction of the PBC Engineer. The inner cover
shall be filled with cement concrete 1:1:2 (1 Cement: 1 coarse sand: 2 graded stone).
n) Marking: Each manhole cover and frame shall have a permanent marking sunk cast on them
providing following information. Year of manufacture. Figure of SJPNL emblem.
Stores to be Procured by the Operator
All materials for use shall be new and duly tested as per approved standards and shall comply the
material specifications. Where no spec. is specified, it shall conform to BIS/ISI/PWD standards.
Construction of chambers (manhole) should be done as per the specification at places as instructed
by the Site Engineer. The cost shall be paid at, with count on basic unit. In case dimensional variation
is required due to site condition, the payment will be proportional to the volume of chamber.
Specification for stone aggregates, coarse sand, fine sand
Stone aggregate: Stone aggregate to be used in the work shall be hard broken stone and shall be
conform to PWD specification.
Coarse Sand: Coarse sand to be used shall conform to PWD specifications
Fine Sand: Fine sand for finishing to be used in the work shall conform to PWD specifications Note:
Where only one variety of sand is available, the sand will be sieved for use in finishing work as
directed by the PBC Engineer in order to obtain smooth surface and nothing extra will be paid on this
account.
Testing of Material: To have the quality control on the material used for construction OF manhole;
Operator will prepare Cubes of a size as desired by site in charge using the same material which is
used for construction of manhole. These cubes will be sent for testing by an authorized testing
laboratory for verifying the quality of material.
Final Inspection:
No work shall be treated as complete until acceptance testing and quality control checks are
completed and found satisfactory. All the defects pointed out by PBC Engineer shall be rectified and
go re-tested by the Operator at his own cost before the work is treated as completed. The
responsibility of non-clearing the defects and thus non-completion of work shall always rest with the
Operator.
The rejection of the work shall be intimated to all concerned to ensure prompt action.
ENGINEERING INSTRUCTIONS:
Page 304 of 432

A. SAFTEY PRECAUTIONS WHILE CONSTRUCTION OF MAHNOLE:
General:
I. Where a road or footpath is to be kept opened up in the course of work, special care shall be
taken to see that proper protection is provided to prevent any accidents from occurring. Work
shall be done in such a manner that it will not unduly inconvenience pedestrians or occupants
of buildings or obstruct road traffic.
Danger from Falling Material:
II. Care shall be taken to see that apparatus, tools or other excavating implements are not left in
a dangerous or insecure position as to fall or be knocked into the trench thereby injuring any
workmen who may be working inside the trench.
Danger of Cave-In :
III. When working in deep trenches in loose soil, timbering up the side will prevent soil
subsidence. The excavated material shall be kept far enough from the edge of the trench or
pit. Vehicles or heavy equipment must not be permitted to approach too close to the
construction site.
Precautions while working on Roads:
IV. The flags and the lamps shall be placed in conspicuous position so as to indicate the
pedestrians and drivers of vehicles the full extent, i.e. both width and length of the obstruction.
The distance between lamps or between floors shall not generally exceed 1.25 m, along the
width and 6 m, along length of the obstruction in non-congested areas, but 4 m along the
length in congested areas. If the excavation is extensive, sufficient notices to give adequate
warning of the danger, shall be displayed conspicuously not less than 1.25 m, above the
ground and close to the excavation.
V. Where any excavation is not clearly visible for a distance of 25 m, to traffic approaching from
any direction or any part of the carriage way of the road in which the excavation is not clearly
visible for a distance of 25 m. To traffic approaching from any direction or any part of the
carriage way of the road in which the excavation exists, a warning notice shall be placed on
the kerb or edge of all such roads from which the excavation is not visible. Such warning shall
be placed at a distance of 25 m. From the excavation or as near the distance as is practicable
but not less than 10 m. From the junction of an entering or intersecting road with in the road in
which the excavation exists.
VI. All warnings, in these cases shall have a red back ground and shall be clearly visible and
legible. All warning lamps shall exhibit a red light, but white lights may be used in addition to
facilitate working at night. Wherever required a passage for pedestrians with foot bridge shall
be provided. At excavations tools and all materials likely to offer obstruction shall be properly
folded round and protected.
VII. While permission for manhole work will be taken by SJPNL but the manhole should be
properly covered while no work is going on to avoid any accident. Operator shall be solely
responsible in case of laxity on his part.
VIII. Operator shall provide the caution board of appropriate size at his own cost on all the sides of
the manhole stating “Caution, SJPNL manhole work is progress.”
Page 305 of 432

Damage to Utilities:
IX. The damage to the exposed utilities shall be Operator’s responsibility. Round the clock safety
of utilities shall be sole responsibility of the Operator and the damage cost shall be deducted
from the Operator. While constructing manholes the utilities should be properly
accommodated in manholes.
Traffic Control:
X. The Police authorities are normally responsible for the control of traffic and may require the
setting up of traffic controls to reduce the inconvenience occasioned by the establishment of a
single line of traffic due to restriction in road width or any other form of obstruction caused by
the work. As far as possible, such arrangements shall be settled in advance. If there are any
specific regulations imposed by the local authorities, these shall be followed. For control of
traffic if any liaison with local bodies/ Police is required it will be managed by the Operator.
Important Instructions for RCC Manhole:
1. The size of the RCC Manhole (L×B×H) is Internal Dimensions
2. The size of the RCC MH Cover (L×B×H) is Internal Dimensions
3. The RCC MH Cover reinforcement & cement concrete Mixture 1:1:2 (1-Cement, 1-Coarse
Sand, 2-Graded stone of aggregate 2.5mm nominal size with 12mm reinforcement and
10×10 cm grid.
4. The internal faces of roof/walls and neck of chamber and exposed Areas of Pedestals
shall be finished smoother with cement mortar 1:3 (1-Cement: 3-Coarse Sand) finished
smooth with a floating coat of neat cement.
5. Finishing of outer face of the chamber shall be done with 12mm thick Cement plaster 1:3
(1-Cement: 3-Fine sand).
6. The floor of Manhole shall be finished with 40mm Thick (av.) cement concrete flooring by
providing adequate slope.
Item No. 3:- Anchor/Thrust Blocks

The Operator shall provide anchor/thrust blocks at all bends, at dead ends and at all other places
both below and above ground as directed by the Engineer. Anchor blocks shall be in cement
concrete as per dimensions given in the approved drawings. The grade of concrete as specified in
the relevant sections of the specification shall be strictly followed. Shuttering shall be as required and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The thrust faces of all blocks shall be placed directly against the undisturbed faces of
excavations and the shape and size of the blocks shall be as shown on the drawings or as otherwise
determined by the Engineer having regard to the nature of the ground and the load or thrust to be
encountered. The concrete shall be placed around the fitting in such a way that the coupling are not
covered or fixed by it to allow for flexibility and to provide access to the collars for replacing when
necessary.
Before casting concrete, bituminous felt shall be wrapped around the fitting at the interface between
concrete and fitting. Where required, anchor clamps shall be cast into the anchor blocks.
Item No. 4:- Road Restoration
Page 306 of 432

Specification:-
Reinstating the road surfaces with excavation, by providing & laying , spreading graded course
aggregate confirming with table 400-13 to wet mix macadam specification including premixing the
material with water at OMC in mechanical plant carriage of mixed material by tipper to site laying in
uniform layers with paver finisher in sub-base/base course on well prepared surface and compacting
with vibratory roller, 25 mm thick premixed bitumen carpet with hot mixed seal coat including
compacting etc. complete.
Tarring :-
Road cuts shall be reinstated by with 25 mm thick premix bitumen carpet with hot mixed seal coat
including all material and labour, required for tar / Asphalt roads as per standard specification for the
item of work.
Wet mix macadam:
Wet mix macadam construction i s an improvement over the conventional water bound macadam
providing speedy and more durable construction. It differs from the water b o u n d m a c a d a m in
that graded aggregates (conforming to requirements indicated in Table 3) and granular
materials are mixed with predetermined quantity of water in accordance with the specifications to
form dense mass which is spread and wiled to approved lines, grades and cross-section to serve as
pavement course(s).
Table 3: Physical requirements of coarse aggregates for wet mix macadam for sub-
base/base courses
S.No. Test Test Method Requirements

1. * Los Angeles Abrasion IS:2386 (part IV) 40 per cent (Max)
Value
2. * Aggregate Impact Value IS:2386 (part IV) or 30 per cent (Max)
IS:5640
3. Combined Flakiness and IS:2386 (part I) 30 per cent (Max)
Elongation Indices (Total)
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of the two tests
The specified grading for the aggregates as per Table 4 and granular materials should be used
for mixing. Quantity of water should not vary from OMC determined as per IS: 2720 (Pt. VIII), by
more than agreed limit.
Table 4: Grading requirements to aggregates for wet mix macadam
S.No. IS sieve designation Per cent by weight passing the IS sieve
1. 53 mm 100
2. 45 mm 95 - 100
3. 26.5 mm -
4. 22.4 mm 60 - 80
5. 11.2 mm 40 - 60
6. 4.75 mm 25 - 40
Page 307 of 432

7. 2.36 mm 15 - 30
8. 600 micron 8 - 22
9. 75 micron 0-8
General guideline and Procedure for Wet mix macadam
1. P.I. value of Materials finer than the 425 micron sieve should be less than 6.
2. The mix should be prepared in approved mixing plant at site in project area of suitable
capacity having provision for controlled addition of water and forced/positive mixing
arrangement, like, pug mill or pan type mixes of concrete batch/plant
3. The mixed material should be uniformly wet and no segregation should be permitted.
4. The mix should be spread uniformly and evenly in required quantities on the prepared sub
grade/sub-base either by a ~elf-propelled paver finisher or a motor grader fitted with blades
having hydraulic control suitable for initial adjustment and maintaining the same. In no case
should the mix be dumped in heaps on the area.
5. The thickness of single compacted wet mix macadam layer should not be less than 75 mm nor
more than 100 mm. However, the compacted thickness of single layer of the sub-base may be
increased up to 200 mm provided vibratory roller of approved type is used for compaction. The
roller speed should not exceed 5 Km / hour.
6. Rolling should continue till density achieved is at least 98 per cent maximum dry density as
per IS: 2720 (Part VIII).
7. When surface irregularity of wet mix macadam exceeds permissible tolerance or where
the course is otherwise defective (like, sub grade soil getting mixed with the aggregates), the full
thickness of the layer should be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added
premixed material as applicable and re-compacted. The area treated in this manner should
not be less than 5 m long and 2 m wide.
8. It is not advisable to lay the wet mix macadam during rains and the tempo of work suffers
during rains.
9. After construction of the top WMM layer will need immediate sealing with bituminous surfacing.
10. Provision of adequate drainage for the foundation area for the construction courses assumes
greater importance in this method of construction.
Bitumen Bound Bases and Surfacing
General requirement: General requirement on materials, mixing, transporting, laying, compaction,

joints and construction of bituminous pavement layers are laid down in his Ministry’s Specifications.
Prime Coat
General guideline for Prime Coat
1) Prime coat consists of application a single coat of low viscosity liquid bituminous material to
a pours granular surface preparatory to the superimposition of bituminous treatment or mix. The
choice of printer shall depend upon the porosity of the surface to be printed. Details are
available in this Ministry’s Specifications.
Page 308 of 432

2) Bituminous Printer should not be applied on a wet or dusty surface. At the time of
application temperature in the shade should not be less than 100C.
3) The primer distributor should be self- propelled or towed bitumen pressure sprayer capable
of spaying the material uniform ally at the specified rate and temperature. Hand spraying
should be resorted to only in small areas and areas inaccessible to the pressure sprayer.
4) After application of cut back, the surface should be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours.
5) The quantity viscosity and temperature of lying should be as specified in table 5
Table 5: Viscosity requirement and quantity of bituminous primer
Type of surface Kinematic Viscosity of Quantity per 10sq.m

Primer at 600C (kg)
(Centistokes)
Low porosity 30-60 6 to 9
Medium porosity 70-140 9 to 12
High porosity 250-500 12 to 15
Tack-Coat:
General guideline for Tack-Coat
1) The binder for tack coat should be a bituminous emulsion complying with IS: 8887 or cut-back
as per IS: 217, to be used restrictively for site at sub-zero temperature or for emergency
application.
2) The quantity of binder should be as per Table 6.
3) The binder should be applied uniformly with bitumen pressure sprayer capable of spraying
bitumen at specified rate and temperature to provide a uniform unbroken spread of bitumen.
4) No more than the necessary tack coat for the day's operation should be placed.
5) The succeeding construction should be made only after curing of the tack coat
Table 6: Rate of application of tack coat
S.No. Type Surface Quantity of liquid bituminous

material in kg per 10 sq.m. area
i) Normal bituminous surfaces 2.0 to 2.5
ii) Dry and hungry bituminous surfaces 2.5 to 3.0
iii) Granular surfaces treated with primer 2.5 to 3.0
iv) Non bituminous surfaces
a) Granular base (not primed) 3.5 to 4.0
b) Cement Concrete pavement 3.0 to 3.5
Note: Where the material to receive an overlay is a freshly laid bituminous layer that has not
Page 309 of 432

been subjected to traffic or contaminated by dust, a tack coat is not mandatory where the
overlay is completed within two days.
Bituminous Macadam and Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam
General guideline for Bituminous macadam and dense graded bituminous Macadam
1) The work consists of construction of a single layer of compacted crushed aggregates

premixed with bituminous binder. Bituminous Macadam is more open graded than the Dense
Graded Bituminous Macadam.
2) Physical requirements of aggregate for BM and Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam are given
in Table 7.
3) The filler shall be graded within the limit in table 8.
4) For Bituminous Macadam, the bitumen content for premix should be 3 to 3.5 per cent by weight
of total mix except otherwise directed. The composition of Bituminous Macadam should conform
to Table 9. The manufacturing and rolling temperature are given in Table 10. For dense graded
bituminous macadam aggregate gradation and requirement of mix are indicated in Table Nos.
11 and Marshall Properties should be according table 12.
5) The requirements for minimum per cent voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) are set out in Table
13.
6) Job mix formula for Dense Graded Bituminous shall comply with the Ministry’s Specifications
and should be design in lab or other agency and should get approval from PMU before
implementation.
7) The construction operation for Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam including lying of and stress
absorbing layer should be in accordance with the Ministry's Specifications.
8) For more detail refer Ministry’s specification for Bituminous Macadam & for Dense Graded
Bituminous Macadam.
Table 7: Physical requirements for coarse aggregate for Bituminous Macadam and
Dense graded bituminous macadam
S.No. Property Test Specification

1. Cleanliness (dust) Grain size analysis Max 5% passing
0.075mm sieve
2. Particle shape Flakiness and Elongation Index Max 30%
(Combined)2
3. Strength* Los Angeles Abrasion Value) Max 35%
Aggregate Impact Value Soundness Max 27%
4. Durability Soundness: Sodium Sulphate Max 12% Max 18%
Magnesium Sulphate
5. Water Absorption Water absorption Max 2%
6. Stripping Coating and Stripping of Bitumen
Minimum retained coating
Aggregate Mixtures 95%
7. Water Sensitivity** Retained Tensile Strength Min 80%
Notes: 1. IS: 2386 Part I 5. IS: 2386 Part 5
Page 310 of 432

2. IS: 2386 Part I 6. IS: 2386 Part 3
(The elongation test to be done only on non-flaky aggregates in the sample)
3. IS: 2386 Part 4* 7. IS: 6241
4. IS: 2386 Part 4* 8. AASHTO T283**
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of these two tests.
** The water sensitivity test is only required if the minimum retained coating in the
stripping test is less than 95%.
Table 8:. Grading requirements for mineral filler

Cumulative per cent passing by weight
S. No. IS Sieve (mm)
of total aggregate
1. 0.6 100
2. 0.3 95 - 100
3. 0.075 85 - 100
Table 9: Composition of bituminous macadam
Mix designation Grading I Grading 2

Nominal aggregate
40 mm 19 mm
size
S.No.
Layer thickness 80-100 mm 50-75 mm
Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate
IS Sieve <mm
passing
1. 45 mm 100 -
2. 37.5 mm 90 - 100 -
3. 26.5 mm 75 -100 100
4. 19 mm - 90 - 100
5. 13.3 mm 35 - 61 56 - 68
6. 4.75 mm 13 - 22 16 - 36
7. 2.36 mm 4 - 19 4 - 19
8. 0.3 mm 2 - 10 2 - 10
9. 0.075 mm 0-8 0-8
Bitumen content, % by weight of
3.1 -3.4 % 3.3 -3.5 %
total mixture
Bitumen grade 35 to 90 35 to 90
Note : Appropriate bitumen contents for conditions in cooler areas of India may be up to 0.5%
higher subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Table 10: Manufacturing and Rolling Temperatures of BM / DBM
Bitumen Bitumen Mixing

Aggregate
Penetration Mixing Temp. (°C) of Rolling (°C) Laying (°C)
Temp. (°C)
Grade Temp. (°C) Mixed
35 160-170 160-175 170 Max. 100 Min. 130 Min.
Page 311 of 432

65 150-165 150-170 165 Max. 90 Min. 125 Min.

90 140-160 140-165 155 Max. 80 Min 115 Min.
Table 11:. Composition of dense graded bituminous macadam pavement layers
Grade of Mix Grading I Grading 2

Nominal aggregate size 40 mm 19 mm
S.No. Layer thickness 80-100 mm 50-75 mm
Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate
IS Sieve <mm
passing
1. 45 mm 100 -
2. 37.5 mm 90 - 100 100
3. 26.5 mm 63 - 93 90 - 100
4. 19 mm - 71 - 95
5. 13.3 mm 55 - 75 56 - 80
6. 4.75 mm 38 - 54 38 - 54
7. 2.36 mm 28 - 42 28 - 42
8. 0.3 mm 7 - 21 7 - 21
9. 0.075 mm 2-8 2-8
Bitumen content, % by weight of total Min. 4.0 % Min. 4.50 %
mixture
Bitumen grade 65 or 90 65 or 90
Note : 1. The combined aggregate grading shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the
high limit on the adjacent sieve.
2. Determined by the Marshall method.
Table 12: Marshall Properties Requirements for dense graded bituminous macadam
layers
S.No. Requirement of property of mix from Standard

Marshall sample
1. Minimum stability (kN at 60°C) 9.0
2. Minimum flow (mm) 2
3. Maximum flow (mm) 4
4. Compaction level (Number of blows) 75 blows on each of the two faces of
the specimen
5. Per cent air voids 3 -6

6. Per cent voids in mineral aggregate See table 9.28 below
(VMA)
7. Per cent voids filled with bitumen (VFB) 65 -75
Page 312 of 432

Table 13. Minimum per cent voids in mineral aggregate (VMA)
Nominal Minimum VMA, per cent Related to Design Air Voids,

S.No. Maximum Particle percent
Size 3.0 4.0 5.0
1. 9.5 mm 14.0 15.0 16.0
2. 12.5 mm 13.0 14.0 15..0
3. 19.0 mm 12.0 13.0 14.0
4. 25.0 mm 11.0 12.0 13.0
5. 37.5 mm 10.0 11.0 12.0
Note : 1. The nominal maximum particle size is one size large than the first sieve to retain more
than10 per cent.
2. Interpolate minimum voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA) for design air voids values
between those listed
Bituminous Concrete and Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete
General guideline for Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete and Bituminous Concrete
1) The work consists of construction, in a single or multiple layers of bituminous concrete

prepared as per specified job mixed formula, on previously prepared bituminous base. A
single layer shall be 25 mm to 100 mm in thickness.
2) The coarse aggregate for semi-dense bitumen concrete should satisfy
the criteria laid in Table 14. Aggregate gradation is indicated in table 15 and SDBC should
satisfy the Marshall requirement indicated in table 16.
3) The Job mix formula for SDBC should be in accordance with Ministry’s specifications
and should be design in lab or other agency and should get approval from PMU before
implementation.
4) The coarse aggregate for bituminous concrete mix should satisfy the requirement
mentioned in table 1 7 . Composition of bituminous concrete pavement layers and Marshall
Properties Requirements for bituminous pavement layers is indicated in table 18 and 19
respectively.
5) The mix design and construction operations of BC should be confirm to Ministry’s
specifications and should be design in lab or other agency and should get approval from
PMU before implementation.
6) For more detail refer road specification for Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete and Bituminous
Concrete.
Fine Aggregate for Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete and Bituminous Concrete
1) The fine aggregate shall be the fraction passing the 2.36 mm and retained on the 0.075 mm
sieve consisting of crusher run screening, natural sand or mixture of both. These shall be clean,
hard, durable, uncoated, dry and free from soft or flaky pieces and organic or other
deleterious substances.
2) The grading of the fine aggregates inclusive of filler shall be as given in table 4.
Table 14. Physical requirements for coarse aggregate for Semi-dense graded bituminous
macadam
S. No. Property Test Specification
Page 313 of 432

Cleanliness (dust) Grain size analysis Max 5% passing 0.075mm

1.
sieve
Particle shape Flakiness and Elongation Index
2. Max 30%
(Combined)
Strength* Los Angeles Abrasion Value) Max 35%
3.
Aggregate Impact Value4 Max 27%
4. Polishing Polish stone Value Min 55
Durability Soundness:6 Sodium Sulphate
5. Max 12% Max 18%
Magnesium Sulphate
Stripping Coating and Stripping of Bitumen Minimum retained coating
7.
Aggregate Mixtures 95%
Notes: 1. IS:2386 Part I 6. IS:2386 Part 5
2. IS:2386 Part I 7. IS:2386 Part 3
(the elongation test to be done only on non-flaky aggregates in the sample)
3. IS:2386 Part 4* 8. AASHTO T283**
4. IS:2386 Part 4* 9. IS:6241
5. BS:812 Part114
* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of these two tests.
** The water sensitivity test is only required if the minimum retained coating in the
stripping test is less than 95%.
Table 15. Composition of Semi- dense bituminous concrete pavement layers
Grade of Mix Grading 1 Grading 2

S. No.
Layer thickness 35- 40 mm 25- 30 mm
IS Sieve <mm Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate passing
1. 19 mm 100
2. 13.2 mm 90 - 100 100
3. 4.75 mm 70 - 100 90 - 100
4. 2.36 mm 35 - 51 35 - 51
5. 1.18 mm 24 - 39 24 - 39
6. 0.60 mm 15 - 30 15 - 30
7. 0.3 mm 9 - 19 9 - 19
9. 0.075 mm 3-8 3-8
Bitumen content, % by weight of total
Min. 4.50 % Min. 5.00 %
mixture
Bitumen grade 65* 65*
Page 314 of 432

* Only exceptional circumstances, 80/100 penetration grade bitumen may be used, as

approved by the engineer.
Table 16. Marshall Properties Requirements for Semi-dense bituminous concrete layers
S.No. Requirement of property of mix from Standard

1. Minimum stability (kN at 60°C) 8.20
the specimen
(VMA)
7. Per cent voids filled with bitumen 65 -78
(VFB)
Table 17. Physical requirements for coarse aggregate for bituminous concrete
S.No. Property Test Specification

1. Cleanliness (dust) Grain size analysis Max 5% passing
0.075mm sieve
2. Particle shape Flakiness and Elongation Index Max 30%
(Combined)
3. Strength* Los Angeles Abrasion Value) Max 30%
Aggregate Impact Value Max 24%
4. Polishing Polish stone Value Min 55
5. Durability Soundness: Sodium Sulphate Max 12%

Magnesium Sulphate Max 18%
7. Stripping Coating and Stripping of Minimum retained coating 95%

Bitumen Aggregate Mixtures
Table 18. Composition of bituminous concrete pavement layers
Grade of Mix Grading 1 Grading 2

S.No.
Layer thickness 50- 65 mm 30 – 45 mm
IS Sieve <mm Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate passing

1. 26.5 mm 100
2. 19 mm 79 -100 100
Page 315 of 432

3. 13.2 mm 59 - 79 79 -100
4. 9.5 mm 52 - 72 70 - 88
5. 4.75 mm 35 - 55 53 - 71
6. 2.36 mm 28 - 44 42 - 58
7. 1.18 mm 20 - 34 34 - 48
8. 0.60 mm 15 - 27 26 - 38
9. 0.3 mm 10 - 20 18 - 28
10. 0.15 mm 5 - 13 12 - 20
11. 0.075 mm 2-8 4 - 10
Bitumen content, % by weight of total
Min. 5.0 – 6.00 % Min. 5.00 – 7.00 %
mixture
Bitumen grade 65* 65*
Table 19: Marshall Properties Requirements for bituminous concrete layers
S. No. Requirement of property of mix Standard
1. Minimumfrom Marshall
stability (kN at sample
60°C) 9.00
the specimen
(VMA)
7. Per cent voids filled with bitumen 65 -75
8. (VFB)of stability on immersion in water at Min. 75 % retained strength
Loss
60 C (ASTM-D-1075)
Item No. 5:- Utility Shifting
Shifting of utility such as OFC cables, electric poles, water network, sewer network and storm
drainage. Provision for deposit work as per consultation with authority. It is clarified that the utility
shifting (if any) would be paid at actuals.
C. Construction of Reservoirs/BPT & Tanks Technical Specification

Item No. 1:- Construction of RCC Reservoir`s:-
1. Excavation
The excavation shall be carried out manually or by mechanical means in all strata upto required
depth as specified in the approved design & drawing. No blasting shall be permitted in any case.
The excavation shall be done to correct lines and levels. This shall also include, where required
proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting & maintaining of
Page 316 of 432

substantial barricades around excavated areas and working lamps at night for ensuring safety.
This should also include dumping of excavated materials in regular heaps bunds at a safe
distance from work site as directed by Engineer. During excavation or dumping activity no
damage should cause to adjoining properly / structure. If water is met within the excavations due
to spring seepage, rains or other causes, it shall be removed by suitable diversions pumping or
bailing out and excavation kept dry whenever so required as directed by Engineer. Care shall be
taken to discharge the drained water into suitable outlet as not to cause damage to the works,
crops or any other property. If any such damage is caused it shall be the sole responsibility of the
Operator to repair/ restore to the original condition at his own cost or compensate for the damage.
Grading in the vicinity of excavations shall be controlled to prevent surface water running into
excavated area and excavations shall be kept free of water.
The excavation shall be done to correct line and levels. This shall also include, where required,
proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting and maintaining of
substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at night for ensuring safety.
Any extra excavation done below the level or outside the line shall be filled with P.C.C.1:4:8.
All the excavated materials shall be the properly of the Authority. Selected excavated material
shall be used for refilling in the way as directed by Engineer. Unsuitable and surplus material not
intended for use shall be transported with all lifts & leads and disposed off as directed by
Engineer.
2. Back Filling
Backfilling of masonry/ concrete/ pipe trenches shall be done with approved material after
masonry/ concrete/ pipe lines are fully set. This should be carried out in such & way as not to
cause any thrust or damage on any part of the structure. All the spaces and the sides of
excavation shall be refilled to the original surface making due allowance for settlement, in layers
not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to the 95 % density, using suitable compaction
equipment such as mechanical tamper, rammer or plate compactor etc. after necessary watering
as directed by the Engineer.
3. Bed Concrete
The leveling course or bed concrete in M 15 ( 1:2:4) nominal mix with 40 mm graded metal shall
be provided below foundation minimum 150 mm thick with 100 mm projection all around.
4. Material
The Operator shall notify the Engineer of his proposed source of materials prior to delivery. If it is
found after testing & trial that sources of supply previously approved do not produce uniform &
satisfactory product of desired quality or if product from any other source proves unacceptable at
any time Operator shall furnish acceptable material from other sources as directed & approved by
Authority.
5. Sand/ Fine Aggregate
For plain and reinforced cement concrete or prestressed concrete works fine aggregate shall
consist of clear, hard strong, durable uncoated & well graded particles of natural sand. The
source of sand shall be Narmada River only as approved by Engineer. The sand shall not contain
dust, lumps soft or flaky materials mixed or other deleterious materials in such quantities as to
reduce the strength and durability of the concrete, or to attack the embedded steel. Fine
aggregate having porositive alkali-silica reaction shall not be used. All sand shall pass through a
screen of 3/16” mesh. All fine aggregate shall confirm to I. S. 383 and test for conformity shall be
carried out as per IS 2386 (Part I to VIII). The fineness modules of fine aggregate shall neither be
less than 2.0 nor greater than 3.5.
Page 317 of 432

No crushed sand or combination of natural sand & crushed sand shall be allowed to be used.
Fine aggregate shall be stacked on brick platform on dry ground free form any possibility of
seepage of water into the stock yard. The stock of fine aggregate shall be covered by HDPE
sheet and it shall be separated from course aggregate stock with a wall separator to avoid mixing
of aggregates.
6. Metal or Coarse Aggregate
For plain or reinforced cement concrete or prestressed concrete works, course aggregate of
required size shall consist of clean, hard strong, dense, non porous & durable pieces of crushed
black basalt metal. They shall not consist of pieces of disintegrated stones, soft flaky elongated
particles, salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other deleterious materials in such quantities as to
reduce the strength and durability of the concrete or to attack the steel reinforcement. Coarse
aggregate having positive alkali silica reaction shall not be used. All coarse aggregate shall
confirm to IS 383 & test for conformity shall be carried out as per I. S. 2386 (Part I to VIII). The
course aggregate shall be stored on brick platform in open hard and dry ground free from
admixture of foreign materials such as clay grass etc. It shall be as per I. S. 4082 – 1977. The
stock of course aggregate shall be covered by HDPE sheet and it shall be separated from fine
aggregate stock with a wall separator to avoid mixing of aggregates.
7. Bricks
The specification shall be as per given in general specification given in civil engineering works.
8. Cement
Cement to be used in the works shall be any of the following types with the prior approval of the
Engineer:
1. Ordinary Portland Cement, 43 Grade, conforming to IS: 8112.
Cement of Ultratech, Ambuja, ACC or equivalent make to IS shall only be used. As far as possible
only one brand of cement as approved by Engineer shall be used during entire construction.
Frequent change in brand will not be allowed.
Only fresh and tested cement shall be used during construction. Cement bags shall be stocked in
well guarded and closed store on raised platform. Care should be taken that the bags do not
catch any moisture or dampness. Heaters shall be provided in the store to eliminate the possibility
of moisture and dampness.
Cement conforming to IS: 8112 and IS: 12269 may be used provided the minimum cement
content mentioned elsewhere from durability considerations is not reduced. From strength
considerations, these cements shall be used with a certain caution as high early strengths of
cement in the 1 to 28-day range can be achieved by finer grinding and higher constituent ratio of
C3S/C2S, where C3S is Tricalcium Silicate and C2S is Dicalcium Silicate. In such cements, the
further growth of strength beyond say 4 weeks may be much lower than that traditionally
expected. Therefore, further strength tests shall be carried out for 56 and 90 days to fine tune the
mix design from strength considerations.
Cement conforming to IS: 8041 shall be used only for precast concrete products after specific
approval of the Engineer.
Total chloride content in cement shall in no case exceed 0.05 percent by mass of cement also,
total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) shall in no case exceed 2.5 percent
and 3.0 percent when tri-calcium aluminate percent by mass is upto 5 or greater than 5
respectively.
Page 318 of 432

Irrespective of manufacturer’s test certificate if the sample fails during testing the entire lot of
cement form which the representative sample has been taken, shall be rejected & Operator has to
replace it with fresh lot, confirming to all tests as stipulated and as directed by Engineer.
9. Water
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids,
alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or
steel. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. Mixing and curing
with sea water shall not be permitted. As a guide, the following concentrations represent the
maximum permissible values:
1. To neutralise 200 ml sample of water, using phenolphthalein as an indicator, it should not
require more than 2 ml of 0.1 normal NaOH.
2. To neutralise 200 ml sample of water, using methyl orange as an indicator, it should not
require more than 10 ml of 0.1 normal HCl.
3. The permissible limits for solids shall be as follows when tested in accordance with IS: 3025:
1. Organic 200 mg/lit
2. Inorganic 3000 mg/lit
3. Sulphates (SO4) 500 mg/lit
4. Chlorides (Cl) 500 mg/lit *
5. Suspended matter 2000 mg/lit
* In case of structures of lengths 30m and below, the permissible limit of chlorides
may be increased upto 1000 mg/lit.
All samples of water (including potable water) shall be tested and suitable measures
may be where necessary to ensure conformity of the water to the requirements stated
herein.
4. The pH value shall be in the range of 6.5 to 8.
10. Steel Reinforcement
For plain & reinforced cement concrete or prestressed concrete works, the reinforcement steel
shall consist of following grades of reinforcing bars.
Grade designation Bar type confirming to governing I. S. Characteristic strength
specification fy MPa
Fe 500 I. S. 1786 High yield strength 500

deformed bars
All steels shall be procured from original manufacturers. No re-rolled steel shall be incorporated in
the work. TMT of Fe 500 grade steel of SAIL, TATA TISCON, RINL (VIZAG), JSW,JSPL or
equivalent shall only be used. Only new steel shall be delivered to site with manufacturer’s test
certificate. After receipt at site, sample for each dia of bar shall be taken and sent for testing to
approved testing laboratory as directed by Engineer. Desired characteristic of test shall be got
confirmed and only after satisfactory test results the steel shall be allowed to be used. Every bar
shall be inspected before assembling on the work and defective, brittle or brunt bar shall be
discarded. Cracked ends of bar shall be discarded. Bar bending & cutting work shall be carried
Page 319 of 432

out in separate work yard near the work site. Steel shall be stacked on wooden blocks so as not
to have contact with soil.
11. Tests & Standard of Acceptance
All materials, even though stored in an approved manner shall be subjected to an acceptance test
prior to their immediate use. Independent testing of cement and steel for every consignment shall
be done by the Operator at site or in the laboratory approved by the Engineer before use. Any
cement & steel with lower quality than those shown in manufacturer’s certificate shall be debarred
from use. In case of imported cement, the same series of tests shall be carried out before
acceptance.
12. Testing and Approval of Material
The Operator shall furnish test certificates from the manufacturer/supplier of materials along with
each batch of material(s) delivered to site.
The Operator shall set up a field laboratory with necessary equipment for testing of all materials,
finished products used in the construction as per requirements of conditions of contract and the
relevant Specifications. The testing of all the materials shall be carried out by the Engineer for
which the Operator shall make all the necessary arrangements.
Tests which cannot be carried out in the field laboratory have to be got done at the Operator’s
cost at any approved Engineering College/ testing laboratory/testing institutions approved by the
Engineer.
13. Form Work
As far as possible plywood centering & form work shall be provided to have very smooth form
finish. If steel centering / form work is to be used it should be in perfect line & length without any
buckling or dent. The entire form work, whether of steel, plywood or wooden planks, shall be very
strongly propped and braced with sufficiently strong vertical & horizontal members and the entire
supporting structure shall be sufficiently strong to take up load of concrete and all stresses it may
be subjected to without any deflection. The form work shall be very smooth and entirely free from
any dust particles, dirt and its inner surface shall be oiled with shuttering oil for easy removal of
form work and shall be water tight. The centering or form work to be used shall be got approved
from Engineer. It will be obligatory on the part of Operator to submit & get approved the design for
centering work if asked for at any stage & level of construction by the Engineer. The Operator
shall be wholly & fully responsible for any defects in the entire form work & its supporting
structure.
14. C. I Pipes & Specials
C. I. flanged pipe centrifugally cast with horizontal double pipe shall be used for Inlet, Outlet,
Overflow, Washout and Bypass and shall confirm to I. S. 718 with upto date amendments. C. I.
flanged specials & fittings shall confirm to I. S. 1538 - 1993 with upto date amendments. Pipes
and specials shall subject to inspection & testing by third party as mentioned in the tender. The
jointing of pipes and specials shall be flanged joint and will confirm to IS 3114 – 1985 (Latest
edition). C.I duck foot bend, Paddle collar & bell mouth as per standard also be provided.
15. Concrete
All concrete in the works shall be controlled concrete as defined in I. S. 456 with up to date
amendments unless it is a nominal mix concrete. Whether reinforced or otherwise all controlled
concrete work to be carried out as per standard specification.
Minimum compressive strength of 15 cm. Cubes at 7 and 28 days after mixing, conducted in
accordance with IS: 516.
16. Admixtures
Page 320 of 432

Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of IS: 9103. In addition, the following conditions
shall be satisfied:
“Plasticisers” and “Super - Plasticisers” shall meet the requirements indicated for “Water reducing
Admixture”.
Except where resistance to freezing and thawing and to disruptive action of deicing salts is
necessary, the air content of freshly mixed concrete in accordance with the pressure method
given in IS: 1199 shall not be more than 2 per cent higher than that of the corresponding control
mix and in any case not more than 3 per cent of the test mix.
The chloride content of the admixture shall not exceed 0.2 per cent when tested in accordance
with IS: 6925. In addition, the maximum permissible limit of chloride content of all the constituents
as specified shall also be observed.
Uniformity tests on the admixtures are essential to compare qualitatively the composition of
different samples taken from batch to batch or from the same batch at different times.
The tests that shall be performed along with permissible variations in the same are indicated
below:
 Dry Material Content: to be within 3 per cent and 5 per cent of liquid and solid admixtures
respectively of the value stated by the manufacturer.
 Ash content: to be within 1 per cent or the value stated by the manufacturer.
Relative density (for liquid admixtures): to be within 2 percent of the value stated by the
manufacturer.
All tests relating to the concretes admixtures shall be conducted periodically at an independent
laboratory and compared with the data given by the manufacturer.
Admixtures may be used in concrete only with the approval of Engineer based upon evidence
that, with the passage of time, neither the compressive strength nor its durability will reduce.
Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any concrete containing
reinforcement, or embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted to be used, such as
in mass concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to the mixing water in an amount
not to exceed 1½ percent of the weight of the cement in each batch of concrete. When
admixtures are used, the designed concrete mix shall be corrected accordingly. Admixtures shall
be used as per manufacturer's instructions and in the manner and with the control specified by
Engineer. However, the specific requirements as given above shall be adhered to.
17. Mix Design
This is to investigate the grading of aggregates, water cement ratio, workability and the quantity of
cement required to give preliminary and works cubes of the minimum strength specified. The
proportions of the mix shall be determined by weight. Adjustment of aggregate proportions due to
moisture present in the aggregate shall be made. Mix proportioning shall be based on the
principles given in IS: 456-2000 and SP: 23-1982 “Handbook for Design Mix Concrete.”
Whenever there is a change either in required strength of concrete, or water-cement ratio or
workability or the source of aggregates and / or cement, preliminary tests shall be repeated to
determine the revised proportions of the mix to suit the altered conditions. While designing mix
proportions, over-wet mixes shall always be avoided.
While fixing the value for water / cement ratio for preliminary mixes, assistance may be derived
from the graph (Appendix A IS: 456) showing the relationship between the 28-day compressive
strengths of concrete mixes with different water / cement ratios and the 7 day compressive
strength of cement tested in accordance with IS: 269. The cost getting of mix design shall be
borne by the Operator.
Page 321 of 432

18. Preliminary Tests

Tests specimens shall be prepared with at least two different water / cement ratios for each class
of concrete, consistent with workability required for the nature of the work. The materials and
proportions used in making preliminary tests shall be similar in all respects to those, to be actually
employed in the works as the object of these tests is to determine the proportions of cement,
aggregates and water necessary to produce concrete of required consistency and to give the
specified strength. It will be Operator's sole responsibility to carry out statement of proportions
proposed to be used for the various concrete mixes. For preliminary tests, the following procedure
shall be followed:
Materials shall be brought to the room temperature and all materials shall be in a dry condition.
The quantities of water, cement and aggregates for each batch shall be determined by weight to
an accuracy of 1 part in 1000 parts.
The mix design shall be got approved and certified by the approved Engineering College or
approved testing laboratory as directed by Engineer.
19. Cover Blocks
For bottom covers of beams, slabs etc. separators or cover blocks of precast cement mortar of
suitable size with wire embedded as directed will be used and tied to the reinforcement bars
between layers of reinforcement. Separators consisting of pieces of suitable diameters shall also
be used. In such case the required cover to the bars will be ensured as per I. S. 456 – 2000.
Cover blocks should be of cement product having water cement ratio not more than 0.40. Such
blocks can be made using press (Normally used for block making) or using high dose (about 2 %)
of super plasticizer.
20. Concrete Mixing
The concrete shall be only machine-mixed. Mixing shall be continued for at least 2 minutes after
all materials and water placed in the drum. The drum shall revolve for 14 to 18 revolutions per
minute or as specified by the makers. The capacity of the mixer will be such that a whole bag of
cement is used in each batch. Spare mixture shall invariably be provided before start of
concreting work.
In case of break – down of machine, the Operator shall deploy spare machine immediately. In no
case hand mixing shall be allowed.
21. Consistency
The consistency of each batch of concrete shall be measured immediately after mixing, by the
slump test, care should be taken to ensure that no water or other material is lost, the material
used for the slump test may be remixed with the remainder of the concrete for making the
specimen test cubes. The period of re-mixing shall be as short as possible yet sufficient to
produce a homogeneous mass.
22. Placing
The forms will be first just moistened before placing concrete. The concrete shall be placed in
position within 20 minutes after adding water to the concrete. It shall be slowly deposited in its
place in uniform layers.
23. Tamping, Ramming and Consolidating
For all RCC reservoirs and other works which are considered by the Engineer to be important
mechanical vibrators shall invariably be used by the Operator at his cost. The Operator shall
provide at least 4 vibrators in good working condition, so as to have two as standby to prevent
interruption in work. The concrete being laid shall be vigorously vibrated during laying and also
Page 322 of 432

rodded by bars where vibrator cannot reach so that dense and complete filling is assured. The
Operator shall make his own arrangements for procuring vibrators.
The efficiency of tamping and consolidation shall be judged by absence of any air pockets and
absence of honey combing any defective consolidation and tamping shall be entirely on
Operator’s risk and costing will have to be entirely pulled down if so directed and redone properly
entirely.
24. Construction Joints & Keys
Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of the part of the work between
predetermined construction joints, as specified hereinafter. Time lapse between the pouring of
adjoining units shall be as specified on the Drawings or as directed by Engineer.
If stopping of concreting becomes unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed construction joint
shall be made where the work is stopped. Joints shall be either vertical or horizontal, unless
shown otherwise on Drawings. In case of an inclined or curved member, the joint shall be at right
angles to the axis of the member. Vertical joints shall be formed against a stop board; horizontal
joints shall be level and wherever possible, arranged so that the joint lines coincide with the
architectural features of the finished work. Battens shall be nailed to the formwork to ensure a
horizontal line and if directed, shall also be used to form a grooved joint. For tank walls and
similar works joints shall be formed as per IS: 3370. Concrete that is in the process of setting shall
not be disturbed or shaken by traffic either on the concrete itself or upon the shuttering. Horizontal
and vertical construction joints and shear keys shall be located and shall conform to the
requirements of the plans unless otherwise directed by Engineer. Where not described, the joint
shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Column Joint
In a column, the joint shall be formed 75 mm below the lowest soffit of the beams including
haunches if any. In flat slab construction, the joint shall be 75 mm below the soffit of column
capital. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in columns, piers or walls,
before depositing in beams, girders or slabs supported thereon.
2. Beam and Slab Joints
Concrete in a beam shall be placed throughout without a joint but if the provision of a joint is
unavoidable the joint shall be vertical and at the centre or within the middle third of the span
unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Where a beam intersects a girder, the joints in the
girder shall be offset by a distance equal to twice the width of the beam and additional
reinforcement provided for shear. The joints shall be vertical throughout the full thickness of
the concrete member. A joint in a slab shall be vertical and parallel to the principal
reinforcement. Where it is unavoidably at the right angles to the principal reinforcement, the
joint shall be vertical and at the middle of the span.
Page 323 of 432

3. Joints in Liquid Retaining Structures
Vertical construction joints in watertight construction will not be permitted unless indicated on
the Drawings. Where a horizontal construction joint is required to resist water pressure,
special care shall be taken in all phases of its construction to ensure maximum
water-tightness.
4. Treatment of construction joints on resuming concreting
A drier mix shall be used for the top lift of horizontal pours to avoid laitance. All laitance and
loose stones shall be thoroughly and carefully removed by wire brushing / hacking and
surface washed.
Just before concreting is resumed, the roughened joint surface shall be thoroughly cleaned
and loose matter removed and then treated with a thin layer of cement group of proportion
specified by Engineer and worked well into the surface. The new concrete shall be well
worked against the prepared face before the grout mortar sets. Special care shall be taken to
obtain thorough compaction and to avoid segregation of the concrete along the joint plane.
25. Curing
All RCC work will be watered and kept constantly wet for 21 days after initial set casting by means
of wet gunny bags and ponding as directed by the Engineer. This operation shall start
immediately after initial set of the concrete. Should the Operator fail to water the concrete –
continuously, it will be done immediately at Operator’s risk and cost.
26. Removal of Form
It shall be as under, subject to the written approval and modification by the Engineer.
S. Type of Formwork Minimum Period
No. before striking
formwork
a. Vertical formwork to columns, walls, beams 16-24 h
b. Soffit formwork to slabs (Props to be refixed immediately after removal 3 days

of formwork)
c. Soffit formwork to beams (Props to be refixed immediately after 7 days

removal of formwork)
d. Props to slabs
1. Spanning up to 4.5 m 7 Days
2. Spanning over 4.5 m 14 Days
e. Props to beams and arches
1. Spanning up to 6 m 14 Days
2. Spanning over 6 m 21Days
27. Inspection
The work of each category of operation i.e. completion of form work placing reinforcement,
concreting, removal of form etc. must be got inspected by the Engineer before commencing and
Page 324 of 432

succeeding operation in case of RCC elevated reservoir and major RCC jobs. In all cases,
however, before the concrete is laid it must be got inspected and approved by the Engineer and
concreting shall be commenced with due approval from him. In case of RCC reservoir and other
major works concreting must be done in presence of Engineer himself. In case of failure to
comply with above specifications, the work is liable to be pulled down if directed, for any work
which is done contrary to specification and no payment thereof shall be admissible.
28. Finish and Quality of Concrete
The concrete work should be off shutter finish. The RCC work cast shall be dense mix,
homogenous without any honey combing true in size, alignment and shape. Any defective work
shall not be entitled for full tendered rates for payment and if the defects are major no
measurements and payment are admissible and Operator shall have to pull down such defective
work and redo at this cost. The decision of the Engineer regarding such defective work and the
directions, viz. pulling it down or rectification as may be necessary shall be final and binding on
the Operator.
All RCC work shall be finished as directed by the Engineer. It should be clearly understood that
the finishing is not meant to cover the casting defects but only to give a smooth appearance. In
case of RCC reservoirs and other major RCC works Operator shall not commence finishing
unless and until Engineer has inspected the casting of concrete after removal of form and has
satisfied about its quality failing which it shall be regarded that the casting was defective and
action deemed fit as per tender specification will be taken since finishing has to commence
immediately after removal of forms. The forms removal in RCC reservoirs and other major work
shall be done in presence of Engineer.
Cube casting acceptance of concrete will be as specified in IS 456 – 2000 and relevant ISS.
Unacceptable quality concrete shall be demolished and redone without any extra cost by the
Operator.
The cube test result shall be as under:
28 Days test : M 15 M 25 M 30
150 Kg/cm2 250 Kg/cm2 300 Kg/cm2
Surfaces not in contact with form work and not subject to any plaster shall be finished by a float to
present a smooth and uniform appearance. Surfaces which are in contract of form work for which
no plastering is provided as per drawing shall also be finished smooth as directed.
In case, whether would be specified in the tender item or not the finish shall be such as to match
with the rest of the structure to present a harmonious appearance as per requirement at site and
as directed by the Engineer and Operator shall have to do it at his own cost. Failure to do proper
finishing as directed shall attract the rejection of work done by the Operator. The decision of
Engineer in this respect shall be final and binding on the Operator.
29. Testing
All structure meant to hold water shall be tested for water tightness test at Operator’s cost, by
filling them to their desired level. The water tightness test shall be considered satisfactory when
the fall in water level after the container is filled to the FSL is not more than 5 mm / 24 hours and
there is no leakage and sweating from outside or bottom whatsoever.
Operator has to make his own arrangements for water for testing at his cost and these
arrangements shall be such that immediately after completion of structure work the containers are
filled with water. After the satisfactory water tightness test the container shall be kept constantly
filled with water at Operator’s cost till the completion of work.
Page 325 of 432

In case of RCC elevated reservoirs and other major RCC works from batches or concrete mix
actually being laid, testing cubes shall be cast periodically as directed by and in presence of the
Engineer and these cubes shall be got tested after they have attained the full strength, at site
laboratory.
Cube casting acceptance of concrete will be as specified in I. S. 456 – 2000 and relevant ISS.
Unaccepted quality concrete shall be demolished and redone without any extra cost by the
Operator.
30. Lowering, Laying, Jointing & Testing of pipes
C. I. flanged double flange pipe shall be erected and hoisted truly in plumb for inlet, outlet,
overflow, washout & bypass. It should be jointed to duck foot bend fitted on the supporting RCC
columns casted from foundation level to 1 m. below ground level. The upper portion of the pipes
shall be fitted with the bell mouth at appropriate level. Care should be taken that pipe assembly
work do not go eccentric. Horizontal piping work shall be completed with D. I. Sluice valves of PN
1 rating shall be fixed for Inlet, Outlet, Bypass & washout at predefined horizontal position as
directed by Engineer. A washout valve shall be provided at the end of washout pipe. After
completion of pipe assembly job the piping system shall be hydraulically tested. No leakage from
any joint should be observed. Testing procedure shall be repeated till desired results are
obtained. The puddle collar should be provided along with casting of bottom slab/wall. Leaving
hole for subsequent placement of puddle collar is not allowed.
On the bottom floor of the water container cast iron or stainless steel grate should be provided
over the outlet pipe bell mouth & washout pipe bell mouth. This is essential to prevent any
accident for the labour attending to periodical cleaning of the tank.
The piping shall be done inside the tank & inlet pipe bell mouth shall be 5 cm above the FSL and
over flow pipe bell mouth level shall be at almost FSL and outlet pipe bell mouth shall be 20 mm
from bottom and scoured pipe should be flush to bottom slab.
The vertical pipe assembly shall be painted in approved colour preferably black or as directed by
Engineer. The arrows showing the direction of flow and the nomenclature of the pipe shall be
marked on pipe surface with white paint or as directed. No lead base paint shall be used either for
painting or lettering work.
31. Lowering, Laying of Drainage Pipe
RCC NP 3 pipes of 400 mm dia shall be laid as per gradient and alignment as directed by
Engineer. The pipes shall be socket & spigot jointed with the rubber rings i.e. flexible jointing. The
work shall be carried out as per standard specification and as directed by Engineer. After
completion of work, leakage test shall be carried out. No leakage shall be observed either through
pipe or joint. After the testing is completed satisfactorily, pipe line trenches shall be refilled with
selected excavated material in layers duly watered and rammed as directed.
32. R. C. C. Stair Case
R. C. C. stair case of 1.0 meter clear width shall be provided form G.L. to top slab gallery level
and then top slab to bottom of slab inside container with G.I railing. It should have roof slab at top
level. Structural details shall be as per approved design and drawing. The tread and rise of the
steps shall be 300 mm and 150 mm respectively. The stair case shall be provided with parapet
from side. A sturdy rolling shutter of 2.5 m height with locking arrangement shall be provided at
the start of the stair case. The construction of stair case should progress as along the main
reservoir structure & it should not lag behind in any way. The Engineer should be able to inspect
& check the reinforcement at each brace level using this stair case only.
33. G. I. Pipe Railing
Page 326 of 432

Hand railing around the walkway (Balcony), stairs and landing shall be fixed on a side requiring
safety. Railing to consist of 32 mm diameter Class B GI pipes in three rows (one at the top and
other at equal interval above finished floor level) and 1000 mm high fixed in 150 mm dia R.C.C.
vertical post at a maximum distance of 2000 mm centers with all accessories like elbows, tees
etc. including welding, threading and fixing in cement concrete floor. Railing shall be painted in
three coats of approved oil paint to protect it against corrosion as directed by Engineer.
34. Electronic Water Level Indicator
The electronic water level indicators are used for direct measurement of liquid level in tanks. The
specifications of electronic water level indicator shall be under:
1. Electrical
Power supply: Operating voltage 230 V AC nominal + 10 %, 50 Hz with Battery back
up of approved make.
Indication: 16 x 2 alphanumeric LCD
Low level and high level audio alarm (adjustable).
2. Mechanical
Mounting: Wall type.
Size: 255 mm (W) x 182 mm (H).
Enclosure: IP 65 (Splash proof) UV protected virgin plastic cabinet.
The display unit shall be housed in splash proof cabinet to with stand the harsh environment
generally encountered in practice. Clear LCD display shall be easily readable from a wide viewing
angle.
The sensors shall be of sufficient length and resolutions so that the unit can be used any where in
premises irrespective of the size & shape of the tank.
Electronic Water level indicator of approved make with constant display placed in office room
shall be provided as directed by Engineer.
35. Lightening Arrestor
Lightening Arrestor shall be copper bar of 25 mm diameter and 2000 mm long connected by
aluminum strip of 25 mm width and 3 mm thickness and the strip shall be connected to a copper
plate of 900 mm x 900 mm x 6 mm embedded below ground with 50 mm diameter G. I. pipe etc.
as per the drawings all complete. Earthing shall comply to IS- 3043.
36. Ventilating Dome & Ventilators
A R.C.C. ventilator of 2.0 m dia supported on four RCC columns as shown in the drawing fixed
with 24 gauge square mesh of 14 gauge SS wire around the circumference shall be provided at
top slab. In addition to this 6 Nos. of C. I. ventilators (J type) of 150 mm dia. shall be provided &
fixed in roof slab as directed by Engineer.
37. Plinth Protection
Plinth protection all around the structure shall be provided as directed by Engineer. The width of
plinth protection shall be 1.5 m and shall have slope towards the edge so that the water is drained
out and do not enter the foundation. The plinth protection shall be with interlock C. C. blocks fixed
on 150 mm thick P. C. C. M 15 grade. The overburden or top soil from a depth of 0.3 m shall be
removed by excavation & it shall be filled with murrum & boulder in layers. This filling shall be
watered and well rammed as directed by Engineer. On this PCC, M 15 grade shall be provided
and finished smoothly.
38. Office
The office room shall have minimum carpet area of 16.0 m 2 to be constructed at each service
reservoir below staircase. It shall be constructed in R.C.C. framed structure with B.B. masonry
Page 327 of 432

walls. The design and plan shall be got approved from the Engineer. The structural details shall
be as under:
1. Structure : R.C.C. framed structure with brick masonry walls.
2. S.B.C. : Same as adopted for respective overhead reservoir.
3. Foundation Depth : Minimum 1 mtr below G. L.
4. Plinth height : Top of ground brace level.
5. Lintel height : 2.4 mtr above floor level.
6. Room height : 3050 mm from top of finished floor level to bottom of roof
slab.
7. Location : In the overhead reservoir premises as directed by Engineer.
8. Flooring : kota stone flororing in all rooms and white glazed tile
flooring
in sanitary block.
9. Walls : Brick masonry walls of 230 mm thick duly plastered from
inside
& outside as directed.
10. Distempering : Distempering shall be provided from inside & snowcem &
Painting painting from outside.
11. Door & windows : Fully paneled wooden flush doors of size as directed. Fully
glazed M. S. windows of size as directed.
12. Ventilators : M. S. ventilators with glass.
13. Water supply & : As directed by Engineer.
Drainage
14. Internal & External : It shall be as per standard code and practice
The whole construction of the office room shall be carried out as approved & as directed by Engineer.
D. Plantation Technical Specification
Item No. 1 Plantation
 Planting large flowering/Shady trees (Ht. 2 mtr.):-
Digging pit with size 0.9m x 0.9m x 0.9m, removing and conveying unwanted stuff to a required
distance as directed. Filling the pit with approved excavated material upto a height of 0.30m, and
remaining height of 0.60m.with fresh garden soil & manure in 3:1 proportion. Mixing soil & manure
thoroughly well, leveling, as directed, watering previous night, planting two to three year old minimum
2.0 Mtr. height, healthy trees sapling as per specifications. Maintaining till well established by
watering, weeding, stirring of soil replacing of casualties etc. complete
E. Staff Quarter & Pump House Technical Specification

Item No.1:- Staff Quarter & Pump House
Excavation for foundation in earth, soil of all types, sand, gravel and soft murum
(i) Excavation For Building & Foundation
Excavation
1. General
The specifications contained in the standard specification published by Public Works

Department, Government of Himachal Pradesh shall apply. In addition to above following
Page 328 of 432

specification shall apply. In case of any discrepancy between the two the below given
specifications shall govern.
2. Excavation for Foundation Columns footings etc.
Soft materials shall include all type of earthy or sandy materials, soils of all types, clay, soft,
average hard murum i.e. all kinds of disintegrated rock, shingles, clay, sand, made- up' soils,
bricks, bats and isolated boulders up to the size of 0.1 cum. The excavation macadam
bound surface shall also be classified in soft materials.
All foundation of Column footings shall be excavated by open excavation widths and depths shown in the
approved drawings or to such greater or smaller depths as may be found necessary or so ordered to
him by Engineer-in- Charge.
Should any excavation be taken down below the specified levels, the Operator shall fill in such
excavation at his own cost with concrete as specified for foundations, well rammed in position unit it is
brought up to the level.
The Operator shall notify when the excavation is completed and no concrete or masonry shall be laid
until the strata for each individual footing, rafts etc. is approved.
The Operator shall keep the site clear of water at all times. To this end he shall provide arrangements
for bailing and pumping or any special arrangement as required for the purpose.
All foundation pits shall be refilled to the original surface of the ground with approved material, which shall
be suitably consolidated.
3. Earth Filling
The space around the foundations in the trenches or sites shall be cleared of all trash and loose debris
and filled with approved excavated earth, all clods being broken. Filling shall be done in 200 mm. layers;
each layer to be moistened and well rammed.
4. Shoring
Shoring shall be done at no extra cost when sides of excavation do not stand up by themselves and
sloping or stopping is not feasible or econ
Providing & laying Plain Cement Concrete. (M-15)
This specification covers the requirements of ordinary cement concrete of the specified proportions for
use in various concrete works.
 Material for Construction :-
Aggregate and sand
The aggregate and sand should conform to IS-383 and 1542 respectively.
 Cement
The cement shall be brought by the operator. The operator shall use fresh cement conforming
to IS 8112-1989.
 Water
Page 329 of 432

Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to IS : 456-2000 and free from injurious
amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials that may be deleterious to
concrete or steel. The pH value of water shall not be less than 6.
 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer conforming to IS 1791. The mixing shall be
continued until there is uniform distribution of materials and the mass is uniform in colour and
consistency. If there is segregation after unloading, the concrete should be remixed.
 Testing of Concrete Cube
In respect of concrete to be carried in M-15 as per appendix-8 Quality control test and their
frequencies.
 Concrete Laying
The forms shall first be lightly moistened before laying concrete. The concrete shall be placed
in position within 20 minutes after adding water to the mix and shall be slowly deposited in its
place and not thrown or dumped from a height shall be placed in uniform layers. For vertical
walls or water retaining structure water stoppers shall be provided.
 Tamping, Ramming and Consolidating
The efficiency of tamping and consolidation shall be judged by absence of any air pockets
and absence of honey combing Any defective consolidation and tamping shall be entirely on
Operator's risk and costing will have to be entirely pulled down if so directed and redone
properly entirely at the cost of the Operator.
 Curing
All CC work will be watered and kept constantly wet for 28 Days after initial setting curing
shall be done by means of wet gunny bags and pounding as directed by the Engineer- In –
Charge. This operation shall start immediately after initial setting of the concrete. If the
operator fails to water the concrete continuously, it will be done immediately at operators
Cost.
 Removal of Form
It shall be generally subject to the written approval and modification by the Engineer- In-
charge
(ii) Reinforced Cement Concrete
 General
The aggregates and cement shall be proportioned by weight only. The mixing shall always be
carried out in a mechanically operated mixer in such a way so as to avoid any loss of water or
cement. The drum of the mixer should be free from holes to avoid any loss of water or cement. No
hand mixed concrete will be allowed. The concrete so prepared, shall be carefully conveyed,
placed in position and compacted using suitable type of mechanical vibrator, as rapidly as
practicable, but in no case the time required till compaction shall exceed 30 minutes after mixing.
During concreting, standby concrete mixer and vibrator shall be kept available at site. Ordinary
Portland Cement (OPC) conforming to IS: 8112-1989 mark (grade-43) shall only be used. Cement
Page 330 of 432

manufactured in mini-cement plants shall not be used. All reinforcement used shall be of HCRM /
CRS (Corrosion Resistant Steel) (Fe-500) having ISI mark and shall be clean and free from loose
mill scales, rust and coating of oil or other coatings which may destroy or reduce bond. Minimum
size of reinforcement bars shall be of 8 mm. Only steel shuttering shall be used. Shuttering shall
be new or in a good condition without holes or dents and the Operator shall get the same
approval by the Engineer, before its use. The individual elements of shuttering shall correctly
match with the required shape of structural member to ensure a gap-free shuttering. Suitable
systems have to be provided for keeping the shuttering in place and in case of walls, maintaining
the supports at an appropriate distance. The construction joints should be predetermined by the
Engineer and these have to be executed with utmost care. Before commencing concreting for
subsequent lifts/ panels, surface previously concreted member shall be thoroughly cleaned to
remove all loose materials in contact with it. Honeycombing has to be avoided by suitably fixing of
shuttering, preparation of surface of joints and proper use of vibrators. The exposed surfaces of
concrete shall be kept continuously in a wet condition by ponding or covering with a layer of
sackings, canvas, Hessian or similar materials and kept continuously wet for at least 21 days from
the date of placing of concrete.
To obtain a dense concrete and to reduce chances of honeycombing, adequate admixture

approved by Engineer shall be used as integral water proofing compound in concrete work. The
quantity of the admixture to be used shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer.
 Materials
All Material shall comply with the relevant specification described in subsequent clauses in PWD
standard specification.
 Water
Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to IS : 456-2000 and free from injurious
amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials that may be deleterious to concrete
or steel. The pH value of water shall not be less than 6.
 Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be any of the following :
 HCRM / CRS (Corrosion Resistant Steel) bar.
All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud or
other coatings which may destroy or reduce bond.
 Admixtures
Accelerating, retarding, water reducing and air entraining admixtures shall conform to IS : 9103
and integral water proofing admixtures to IS : 2645.
Admixtures may be used in concrete as per manufacturer’s instructions only with the approval of
the PBC Engineer. An admixture’s suitability and effectiveness shall be verified by trial mixes with
the other materials used in the works. If two or more admixtures are to be used simultaneously in
the same concrete mix, their interaction shall be checked and trial mixes done to ensure their
compatibility. There should also be no increase in risk of corrosion of the reinforcement or other
embedment.
Page 331 of 432

Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any concrete containing
reinforcement or embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted such as in mass
concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to the mixing water by an amount not
exceeding 1.5 percent of the weight of the cement in each batch of concrete. The designed
concrete mix shall be corrected accordingly.
 Samples and Tests of Raw Material
All materials used for the works shall be tested before use.
Manufacturer’s test certificate shall be furnished for each batch of cement /steel and when
directed by the Engineer samples shall also be got tested by the Operator in a laboratory
approved by the PBC Engineer.
Sampling and testing shall be as per IS : 2386 under the supervision of the PBC Engineer.
Water to be used shall be tested to comply with requirements of IS : 456.
The Operator shall furnish manufacturer’s test certificates and technical literature for the
admixture proposed to be used. If directed, the admixture shall be got tested at an approved
laboratory at no extra cost.
 Design Mix Concrete
 Mix Design and Testing
For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS : 10262 and SP 23 to provide
the grade of concrete having the required workability and characteristic strength not less than
appropriate values given in IS:456. The design mix shall be cohesive and does not segregate
and should result in a dense and durable concrete and also capable of giving the finish as
specified. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in watertight concrete. The
Operator shall exercise great care while designing the concrete mix and executing the works to
achieve the desired result.
The minimum cement content for Design Mix Concrete shall be as per IS:456.
The minimum cement content stipulated above shall be adopted irrespective of whether the
Operator achieves the desired strength with less quantity of cement. The Operator’s quoted rates
for concrete shall provide for the above eventuality and nothing extra shall become payable to the
OPERATOR in this account. Even in the case where the quantity of cement required is higher
than that specified above to achieve desired strength based on an approved mix design, nothing
extra shall become payable to the OPERATOR.
It shall be the Operator’s sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs at his own cost. He shall
furnish to the PBC Engineer at least 30 days before concreting operations, a statement of
proportions proposed to be used for the various concrete mixes and the strength results obtained.
The strength requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as per IS : 516
shall comply with the requirements of IS : 456.
 Batching & Mixing of Concrete
Proportions of aggregates and cement, as decided by the concrete mix design, shall be by
weight. These proportions shall be maintained during subsequent concrete batching by means of
weigh batchers capable of controlling the weights within one percent of the desired value.
Page 332 of 432

Amount of water added shall be such as to produce dense concrete of required consistency,
specified strength and satisfactory workability and shall be so adjusted to account for moisture
content in the aggregates. Water-cement ratio specified for use by the PBC Engineer shall be
maintained. Each time the work stops, the mixer shall be cleaned out and while recommencing,
the first batch shall have 10% additional cement to allow for sticking in the drum.
Arrangement should be made by the Operator to have the cubes tested in an approved laboratory
or in field with prior consent of the PBC Engineer. Sampling and testing of strength and
workability of concrete shall be as per IS:1199, IS : 516 and IS : 456.
 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer conforming to IS 1791. The mixing shall be
continued until there is uniform distribution of materials and the mass is uniform in colour and
consistency. If there is segregation after unloading, the concrete should be remixed.
 Formwork
Formwork shall be all inclusive and shall consist of but not be limited to shores, bracings, sides of
footings, walls, beams and columns, bottom of slabs etc. including ties, anchors, hangers, inserts,
false work, wedges etc.
The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall the responsibility of
the Operator. However, if so desired by the PBC Engineer, the drawings and calculations for the
design of the formwork shall be submitted to the PBC Engineer for the approval.
Formwork shall be designed to fulfill the following requirements:
Sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the concrete at all stages and
appropriate to the methods of placing and compacting. Made of suitable materials.
Capable of providing concrete of the correct shape and surface finish within the specified
tolerance limits.
Capable of withstanding without deflection the worst combination of self weight, reinforcement
and concrete weight, all loads and dynamic effects arising from construction and compacting
activities, wind and weather forces.
Capable of easy striking out without shock, disturbance or damage to the concrete.
Soffit forms capable of imparting a camber if required. Soffit forms and supports capable of being
left in position if required
Capable of being cleaned and/or coated if necessary immediately prior to casting the concrete;
design temporary openings where necessary for these purposes and to facilitate and the
preparation of construction joints.
The formwork may be of timber, plywood, steel, plastic or concrete depending upon the type of
finish specified. Sliding forms and slip form may be used with the approval of the PBC Engineer.
Timber for formwork shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes, loose knots, worm holes,
warps and other surface defects. Joints between formwork and structures shall be sufficiently
tight to prevent loss of slurry from concrete, using seals if necessary.
The faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and two coats of
approved mould oil applied before fixing reinforcement. All rubbish, particularly chippings,
Page 333 of 432

shavings, sawdust, wire pieces dust etc. shall be removed from the interior of the forms before the
concrete is placed. Where directed, cleaning of forms shall be done by blasting with a jet of
compressed air at no extra cost.
Forms intended for reuse shall be treated with care. Forms that have deteriorated shall not be
used. Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, nails removed, holes suitably
plugged, joints repaired and warped lumber replaced to the satisfaction of the PBC Engineer.
The Operator shall equip himself with enough shuttering to allow for wastage so as to complete
the job in time.
Permanent formwork shall be checked for its durability and compatibility with adjoining concrete
before it is used in the structure. It shall be properly anchored to the concrete.
Wire ties passing through beams, columns and walls shall not be allowed. In their place bolts
passing through sleeves shall be used. Formwork spacers left in-situ shall not impair the desired
appearance or durability of the structure by causing spalling, rust staining or allowing the passage
of moisture.
For liquid retaining structures, sleeves shall not be provided for through bolts nor shall through
bolts be removed if provided. The bolts, in the latter case, shall be cut at 25 mm depth from the
surface and the hole made good by cement mortar of the same proportion as the concrete just
after striking the formwork.
Where specified all corners and angles exposed in the finished structure shall have chamfers or
fillets of 20 mm x 20 mm size.
Forms for substructure may be omitted when, in the opinion of the PBC Engineer, the open
excavation is firm enough (in hard non-porous soils) to act as a form. Such excavations shall be
larger, as approved by the PBC Engineer, than that required as per drawing to compensate for
irregularities in excavation.
The Operator shall provide adequate props carried down to a firm bearing without overloading
any of the structures.
The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the side shuttering of beams can be
removed without disturbing the bottom shuttering. If the shuttering for a column is erected for the
full height of the column, one side shall be built up in sections as placing of concrete proceeds or
windows left for placing concrete from the side to limit the drop of concrete to 1.0 m or as
approved by the PBC Engineer. The Operator shall temporarily and securely fix items to be cast
(embedment’s/ inserts) in a manner that will not hinder the striking of forms or permit loss of grout.
Formwork showing excessive distortion, during any stage of construction, shall be repositioned
and strengthened. Placed concrete affected by faulty formwork, shall be entirely removed and
formwork corrected prior to placement of new concrete at Operator’s cost.
 Preparation Prior to Concrete Placement
Before concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the formwork shall be cleaned and
mould oil applied, inserts and reinforcement shall be correctly positioned and securely held,
necessary openings, pockets, etc. provided.
All arrangements- formwork, equipment and proposed procedure, shall be approved by the PBC
Engineer. Operator shall maintain separate Pour Card for each pour as per the format enclosed.
Page 334 of 432

 Check for Reinforcement and Concreting
All reinforcement shall be got checked and recorded prior to pouring of concrete, by a
representative of the Engineer.
Minimum Requirement for all Reinforced or Plain Concrete Structures
All blinding and leveling concrete shall be minimum 100 mm thick in concrete M15 grade.
All structural reinforced concrete other than for water retaining structures shall at least be of M25
grade with maximum 20mm size downgraded coarse aggregates.
The minimum grade of concrete for water retaining structures shall be M30 having maximum
20mm size downgraded coarse aggregates.
Minimum cover to reinforcement for all water retaining structures shall be 40mm including the
bottom of the roof. For other structures the minimum clear cover shall be as specified in IS:456 –
2000.
Approved quality water proofing compound (chloride free) shall be added during concreting of all
water retaining structure, in the proportion specified by the manufacturer/as per design mix or
upto 2% (percent) by weight of cement.
The minimum thickness required for different reinforced concrete members shall be as per the
working structural drawings to be provided to him within 15 days of award of the work.
 Transporting, Placing and Compacting Concrete
Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the formwork with minimum time lapse by
methods that shall maintain the required workability and will prevent segregation, loss of any
ingredients or ingress of foreign matter or water. During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be
transported in deep containers other suitable measures to reduce loss of water by evaporation
and heat loss in cold weather may also be adopted.
In all cases concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final position to
avoid rehandling. To avoid segregation, concrete shall not be rehandled or caused to flow. For
locations where direct placement is not possible and in narrow forms and Operator shall provide
suitable drops and “Elephant Trunks”. Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than
1.0 m. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or formwork.
Concrete shall not be placed in flowing water. Under water, concrete shall be placed in position
by tremies or by pipeline from the mixer and shall never be allowed to fall freely through the
water.
While placing concrete the Operator shall proceed as specified below and also ensure the
following:
Continuously between construction joints and pre-determined abutments.
Without disturbance to forms or reinforcement.
Without disturbance to pipes, ducts, fixings and the like to be cast in; ensure that such items are
securely fixed. Ensure that concrete cannot enter open ends of pipes and conduits etc.
Without dropping in a manner that could cause segregation or shock.
Page 335 of 432

In deep pours only when the concrete and formwork designed for this purpose and by using
suitable chutes or pipes.
Do not place if the workability is such that full compaction cannot be achieved.
Without disturbing the unsupported sides of excavations; prevent contamination of concrete with
earth. Provide sheeting if necessary in supported excavations, withdraw the linings progressively
as concrete is placed.
If placed directly onto hardcore or any other porous material, dampen the surface to reduce loss
of water from the concrete.
Ensure that there is no damage or displacement to sheet membranes.
Record the time and location of placing structural concrete.
Concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes of leaving the
mixer. Concrete shall be compacted during placing with approved vibrating equipment without
causing segregation until it forms a solid mass free from voids thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into all corners of the formwork. Immersion vibrators
shall be inserted vertically at points not more than 450 mm apart and withdrawn slowly till air
bubbles cease to come to the surface, leaving no voids. When placing concrete in layers
advancing horizontally, care shall be taken to ensure adequate vibration, blending and melding of
the concrete between successive layers. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with
reinforcement, formwork and finished surfaces after start of initial set. Over-vibration shall be
avoided; under vibration is likewise harmful.
The vibrator should penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and atleast 15 cm into the
preceding layer if there is any. It should be held generally 5 to 15 sec. until the compaction is
considered adequate and then withdrawn slowly at thereof about 8 cm/s.
Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment after getting the
complete procedure approved by the PBC Engineer. The slump shall be held to the minimum
necessary for conveying concrete by this method. When concrete is to be pumped, the concrete
mix shall be specially designed to suit pumping. Care shall be taken to avoid stoppages in work
once pumping has started.
Except when placing with slip forms, each placement of concrete in multiple lift work, shall be
allowed to set for at least 24 hours after the final set of concrete before the start of subsequent
placement. Placing shall stop when concrete reaches the top of the opening in walls or bottom
surface of slab, in slab and beam construction, and it shall be resumed before concrete takes
initial set but not until it has had time to settle as approved by the PBC Engineer. Concrete shall
be protected against damage until final acceptance.
 Mass Concrete Works
Sequence of pouring for mass concrete works shall be as approved by the PBC Engineer. The
Operator shall exercise great care to prevent shrinkage cracks and shall monitor the temperature
of the placed concrete if directed.
 Curing
Page 336 of 432

Curing and protection shall start immediately after the compaction of the concrete to protect it
from Premature drying out, particularly by solar radiation and wind;
 leaching out by rain and flowing water;
 rapid cooling during the first few days after placing;
 high internal thermal gradient;
 low temperature of frost;
 vibration and impact which may disrupt the concrete and interfere with its bond to the
reinforcement
 After the concrete has begun to harden i.e. 1 to 2 hr. after laying curing shall be started.
 All concrete, unless approved otherwise by the PBC Engineer, shall be cured by use of
continuous sprays or ponded water or continuously saturated coverings of sacking,
canvas, hessain or other absorbent material for the period of complete hydration with a
minimum of 10 days. The quality of curing water shall be the same as that used for
mixing.
 Where a curing membrane is approved to be used by the PBC Engineer, the same shall
of a non-wax base and shall not impair the concrete finish in any manner. The curing
compound to be used shall be approved by the PBC Engineer before use and shall be
applied with spraying equipment capable of a smooth, even textured coat.
 When concrete is used as subgrade for flooring, the flooring may be commenced before
the curing period of subgrade is over, but curing of subgrade shall be continued along
with the top layer of flooring for a minimum period of 10 days.
 Curing may also be done by covering the surface with an impermeable material such as
polyethylene, which shall be well sealed and fastened.
 Acceptance of Concrete
The concrete tested in accordance with ‘Testing of Concrete’ clause above, shall meet the criteria
for acceptance of concrete as per IS:456-2000. The strength of concrete shall be the average
strength of three specimens tested at 28 days and conform to strength requirements for different
grades of concrete. If 7 days tests show crushing strengths that are too low than required,
corrective measures shall be taken at once, at the Engineers direction, without waiting for the
results of the 28 days test.
 Failure to Meet Strength Requirements
In case where concrete tested fails to meet the test requirements, the Engineer shall have the
right to require any one or all the following additional tests. The Operator, at his own expense,
shall carry out such tests. The Engineer shall be the final authority for interpreting the results and
shall decide upon the acceptance or otherwise.
Curing and load testing of the concrete member concerned represented by the test, which failed.
Replacement of any such portions of the structure. No payment shall be made for the dismantling
of the concrete, relevant formwork, or reinforcement. The Operator at his own expenses shall
Page 337 of 432

make good embedded parts and/ or reinforcement that may get damaged during dismantling.
Extended curing of concrete represented by the specimen.
Collecting and testing of a core specimen from the hardened concrete. The location number and
size of such specimen shall be taken as directed by the Engineer. Any other test such as,
ultrasonic and/ or rebound hammer test, etc. as decided by the Engineer.
 Construction Joints and Keys
The position and arrangement of construction joints shall be as indicated by the operator in his
working drawings dually approved by the department. Concrete shall be placed without
interruption until completion of work between construction joints. If stopping of concreting
becomes unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed construction joint shall be made with the
approval of the PBC Engineer.
Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be coated with cement
slurry and encased in lean concrete as indicated on the drawings or as approved by the Project
Manager.
Before resuming concreting on a surface which has hardened all laitance and loose stone shall be
thoroughly removed by wire brushing/hacking and surface washed with high pressure water jet
and treated with thin layer of cement slurry for vertical joints and horizontal layers.
When concreting is to be resumed on a surface, which has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be
removed by wire brushing, the surface wetted, free water removed and a coat of cement slurry
applied. On this, a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm thickness shall be placed and well
rammed against the old work. Thereafter work shall proceed in the normal way.
For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered with a layer of mortar about 10-15 mm thick
composed of cement and sand in the concrete mix. This cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly
mixed and applied immediately before placing concrete.
 Foundation Bedding
All earth surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed, shall be well compacted
and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or spongy areas shall be cleaned out and filled
with either soil-cement mixture, lean concrete or clean sand compacted as approved by the
Project Manager. The surfaces of absorptive soils shall be moistened.
Concrete shall not be deposited on large sloping rock surfaces. The rock shall be cut to form
rough steps or benches by picking, barring or wedging. The rock surface shall be kept wet for 2
to 4 hours before concreting.
Excavation, in clay or other soils that are likely to be affected by exposure to atmosphere, shall be
concreted as soon as they are dry. Alternatively, unless otherwise mentioned the bottom of the
excavation shall be protected immediately by 8 cm thick layer of cement concrete not leaner than
M10 or in order to obtain a dry hard bottom, the last stretch of excavation of about 10 cm shall be
removed just before concreting.
 Repair and Replacement of Unsatisfactory Concrete
Page 338 of 432

Immediately after the shuttering is removed, all defective areas such as honey-combed surfaces,
rough patches, holes left by form bolts etc, shall be inspected by the Project Manager who may
permit patching of the defective areas or reject the concrete work.
All through holes for shuttering shall be filled for full depth and neatly plugged flush with surface.
Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by the Operator at no additional cost to the
Authority.
For patching of defective areas all loose materials shall be removed and the surface shall be
prepared as approved by the Project Manager.
Bonding between hardened and fresh concrete shall be done either by placing cement mortar or
by applying epoxy. The decision of the Project Manager as to the method of repairs to be
adopted shall be final and binding on the Operator. The surface shall be saturated with water for
24 hours before patching is done with cement sand mortar. The use of epoxy for bonding fresh
concrete shall be carried out as approved by the Project Manager.
 Hot Weather Requirements
Concreting during hot weather shall be carried out as per IS 7861 (Part I).
Adequate provision shall be made to lower concrete temperatures, which shall not exceed 40 deg
C at time of placement of fresh concrete.
Where directed by the Project Manager, the Operator shall spray non-wax based curing
compound on unformed concrete surfaces at no extra costs.
 Cold Weather Requirements
Concreting during cold weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861(Part II).
The ambient temperature during placement and upto final set shall not fall below 5 deg. C.
Approved antifreeze/accelerating additives shall be used where directed.
For major and large scale concreting works the temperature of concrete at times of mixing and
placing, the thermal conductivity of the formwork and its insulation and stripping period shall be
closely monitored.
 Liquid Retaining Structures
The Operator shall take special care for concrete for liquid retaining structures, underground
structures and those others specifically called for to guarantee the finish and water tightness.
The Operator shall make all arrangements for hydro-testing of structure, all arrangements for
testing such as temporary bulk heads, pressure gauges, pumps, pipe lines etc.
The Operator shall also make all temporary arrangements that may have to be made to ensure
stability of the structures during construction.
Any leakage that may occur during the hydro-test or subsequently during the defects liability
period or the period for which the structure is guaranteed shall be effectively stopped either by
cement/epoxy pressure grouting, guniting or such other methods as may be approved by the
Project Manager. All such rectification shall be done by the operator to the entire satisfaction of
the Project Manager at no extra cost to the department.
Page 339 of 432

(iii) Providing and fixing in position HCRM / CRS (Corrosion Resistant Steel) bar reinforcement
The steel reinforcement shall be HCRM / CRS (Corrosion Resistant Steel) bar reinforcement & conform to
IS:226, IS:432, IS:500, IS:1786, IS:1139 and latest as applicable
Laps
Laps and splices for reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings. Splices in adjacent bars
shall be staggered and the locations of all splices, except those specified on the Drawings, shall
be approved by Engineer. The bars shall not be lapped unless the length required exceeds the
maximum available length of bars at site Bending
1. Reinforcing bars supplied bent or in coils, shall be straightened before they are cut to size.
Straightening of bars shall be done in cold and without damaging the bars. This is considered as
a part of reinforcement bending fabrication work.
2. All bars shall be accurately bent according to the sizes and shapes shown on the detailed working
Drawings / bar bending schedules. They shall be bent gradually by machine or other approved
means. Reinforcing bars shall not be straightened and rebent in a manner that will injure the
material and bars containing cracks or splits shall be rejected. They shall be bent cold, except
bars of over 25 mm in diameter which may be bent hot if specifically approved by Engineer. Bars
which depend for their strength on cold working, shall not be bent hot. Bars bent hot shall not be
heated beyond cherry red colour (nor exceeding 845oC) and after bending, shall be allowed to
cool slowly without quenching. Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means used for
straightening and rebending be such as shall not, in the opinion of Engineer, injure the material.
No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the work without approval, whether or not it is
partially embedded in hardened concrete. Bars having kinks or bends other than those required
by design shall not be used.
 Fixing
Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed by any approved means and maintained in the correct
position shown in the Drawings by the use of blocks, spacers and chairs as per IS:2502 to
prevent displacement during placing and compaction of concrete. Bars intended to be in contact
at crossing points shall be securely bound together at all such points with number 16 gauge
annealed soft iron wire. The vertical distances required between successive layers of bar in
beams or similar members shall be maintained by the provision of mild steel spacer bars at such
intervals that the main bars do not perceptibly sag between spacer bars.
 Welding of Bars
When permitted or specified on the Drawings, joints of reinforcement bars shall be butt welded so
as to transmit their full strength. Welded joints shall preferably be located at points
where the reinforcement steel will not be subject to more than 75 % of the maximum permissible
stresses and the welded joints should be staggered such that, at any one section, not more than
33% of bars are welded. Only electric arc welding using a process which excludes air from the
molten metal and conforms to any or all other special provisions for the work will be accepted.
Suitable means shall be provided for holding the bars securely in position during welding. It must
be ensured that no voids are left in welding and when welding is done two or three stages, the
Page 340 of 432

previous surfaces shall be cleaned properly. Ends of bars shall be cleaned of all loose scale, rust,
grease, paint and other foreign matter before welding.
Only competent welders shall be employed on the work. The MS electrodes used for welding
shall conform to IS: 814. Welded pieces of reinforcement shall be tested. Specimens shall be
taken from the actual site and their number and frequency of test shall be as directed by the
Engineer.
 Cover
Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, clear concrete cover for reinforcement (exclusive of
plaster or other decorative finish) shall be as follows:
1. At each end of reinforcing bar, not less than 25 mm nor less than twice the diameter of the bar.
2. For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a column, not less than 40 mm, nor less than the diameter of
the bar. In case of columns of minimum dimension of 20 cm. or under, with reinforcing bars of 12
mm and less in diameter, a cover of 25 mm may be used. For longitudinal reinforcing bars in a
beam, not less than 25 mm nor less than the diameter of the bar.
3. For tensile, compressive, shear, or other reinforcement in a slab or wall, not less than 13 mm, nor
less than the diameter of such reinforcement.
4. For any other reinforcement, not less than 13 mm, nor less than the diameter of such
reinforcement.
5. For footings and other principal structural members in which the concrete is deposited directly
against the ground, cover to the bottom reinforcement shall be 75 mm. If concrete is poured on
a layer of lean concrete the bottom cover may be reduced to 50 mm.
6. For concrete surfaces exposed to the weather or the ground after removal of forms, such as
retaining walls, grade beams, footing sides and top, etc., not less than 50 mm for bars larger than
16 mm diameter and not less than 40 mm for bars 16 mm diameter or smaller.
7. Increased cover thickness shall be provided, as indicated on the Drawings, for surfaces exposed
to the action of harmful chemicals (or exposed to earth contaminated by such chemical), acid,
alkali, saline atmosphere, sulphurous smoke, etc.
8. For reinforced concrete members, totally or periodically immersed in sea water or subject to sea
water spray, the cover of concrete shall be 50 mm more than those specified in (1) to (5) above.
9. For liquid retaining structures, the minimum cover to all steel shall be 40 mm or the diameter of
the main bar, whichever is greater. In the presence of sea water and soils and waters of a
corrosive character the cover shall be increased by 10 mm.
10. Protection to reinforcement in case of concrete exposed to harmful surroundings may also be
given by providing a dense impermeable concrete with approved protective coatings, as specified
on the Drawings. In such a case the extra cover mentioned in (8) and (9) above, may be
reduced by Engineer to those shown on the Drawings.
11. The correct cover shall be maintained by cement mortar cubes or other approved eons.
Reinforcement for footings, grade beams and slabs on subgrade shall be supported on precast
concrete blocks as approved by Engineer. The use of pebbles or stones shall not be permitted.
Page 341 of 432

12. The 28 day crushing strength of cement mortar cubes / precast concrete cover blocks shall be at
least equal to the specified strength of concrete in which these cubes / blocks are embedded.
13. The minimum clear distance between reinforcing / bars shall be in accordance with IS: 456 or as
shown in Drawings.
 Inspection
Erected and secured reinforcement shall be inspected and approved by Engineer prior to
placement of concrete.
 Payment
For payment of work done under this item, the actual quantity of steel embedded in concrete as
calculated and approved by PBC Engineer, irrespective of the level or the height at which the
work is done, shall be taken. The unit rate for reinforcement shall include all wastage, binding
wire, etc. for which no separate payment shall be made. Laps as shown in Drawings or as
approved by Engineer and minimum number of chairs and spacer bars shall be measured and
paid for.
(iv) Filling in plinth and floors with approved excavated material:-
Backfilling shall be done with approved material after concrete or masonry is fully set and carried
out in such a way as not to cause undue thrust on any part of the structure. All space between
foundation masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation shall be refilled to the original surface
in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. The compaction shall be done with the
help of suitable equipment such as mechanical tamper, rammer, plate vibrator etc., after
necessary watering, so as to achieve a density not less than the field density before excavation.
(v) Disposal of Surplus excavated materials
All the excavated materials shall be the property of the Authority. The material obtained from the
excavation shall be used for filling up of (i) roadway embankment, (ii) the existing is in the right-of-
way and (iii) for landscaping of the road as directed by the Engineer, including leveling and
spreading with all lifts and lead up to 100 mm and no extra payment shall be made for the same.
All hard materials, such as hard moorum, rubble, etc., not intended for use as above shall be
stacked neatly on specified land as directed by the Engineer with all lifts and lead up to
1000m.Unsuitable and surplus material not intended for use within the lead specified above shall
also, if necessary, be transported with all lifts and lead beyond initial 1000m, disposed off or used
as directed by the Engineer.
(vi) Filling in plinth and floors with operators material(murum)/stone dust:-
Trenches shall be backfilled with approved selected material from outside only, shall be got
approved from the PBC Engineer after the successful testing of the pipeline as directed by
Authority’s Representative. Backfilling shall be in accordance with requirements specified above
in standard specifications and or as shown on Drawings.
The stone dust shall be got approved from the PBC Engineer. So also the work shall be carried
out as per the directives of the PBC Engineer. No extra lead or lift shall be payable.
(vii)Filling in plinth and floors with operators material/brought from outside
Page 342 of 432

Backfilling of masonry / concrete / hume pipe drain excavation shall be done with approved
material after concrete / masonry / hume pipe is fully set and carried out in such a way as not to
cause undue thrust on any part of the structure and / or not because differential settlement. All
space between the drain walls and the side of the excavation shall be refilled to the original
surface making due allowance for settlement, in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted
thickness to the required density, using suitable compaction equipment such as mechanical
tamper, rammer or plate compactor / vibrator, etc. after necessary watering, so as to achieve a
density not less than the field density before excavation or as directed by the Engineer.
(viii) Brick work
 Materials
Bricks used in the works shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS: 1077, IS 2180, IS
2222, IS 2691, IS 3952, IS 6165. The class of the bricks shall be as specifically indicated in the
respective items of work prepared by the Operator.
Brick shall be sound, hard, homogeneous in texture, well burnt in kiln without being vitrified, hand/
machine moulded, deep red, cherry or copper coloured, of regular shape and size and shall have
sharp and square edges with smooth rectangular faces. The bricks shall be free from pores,
cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. They shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp
corners and shall be uniform in colour, tolerance of brick dimension shall be ± 3 % of designation
10 & above and ± 8 % lower designation. Hand moulded bricks shall be moulded with a frog and
those made by extrusion process may not be provided with a frog. Bricks shall give a clear ringing
sound when struck.
 Compressive Strength
Five bricks shall be tested. The average compressive strength shall be as per class designation.
 Water Absorption
Five bricks shall be tested for water absorption and shall not exceed 20 % by weight.
 Efflorescence
Five bricks shall be tested for efflorescence. The efflorescence shall be ‘nil’ to ‘moderate’
Sample bricks shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval and bricks supplied shall
conform to approved samples. If demanded by Project Manager, brick samples shall be got
tested as per IS : 3495 by Operator. Bricks rejected by Project Manager shall be removed from
the site of works within 24 hours.
Mortar for brick masonry shall consist of cement and sand.
Mortar leaner than 1.5 and richer than 1:3 shall not be used.
 Preparation of Mortar
Materials
Water
Water used shall be clean and reasonably free from injurious or deleterious materials such as oils,
acids, alkalis, salts. The pH value of water shall not be less than 6.
Page 343 of 432

 Cement
Cement shall conform to any of the following:
43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement IS : 8112
 Sand
Sand for masonry mortars shall confirm to IS 2116
Mortars shall be prepared and tested as per IS 2250. Mixing of cement mortar shall be done in
mechanical mixers.
 Workmanship
Workmanship of brick work shall conform to IS: 2212. All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in
clear water for at least one hour immediately before being laid. The cement mortar for brick
masonry work shall be as specified in the respective item of work prepared by the Operator. Brick
work 230 mm thick and over shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified. 100mm/
115 mm thick brickwork shall be laid with stretchers. For laying bricks, a layer of mortar shall be
spread over the full width of suitable length of the lower course. Each brick shall be slightly
pressed into the mortar and shoved into final position so as to embed the brick fully in mortar.
Only full size bricks shall be used for the works and cut bricks utilized only to make up required
wall length or for bonding. Bricks shall be laid with frogs uppermost.
All brickwork shall be plumb, square and true to dimensions shown. Vertical joints in alternate
courses shall come directly one over the other and be in line. Horizontal courses shall be
levelled. The thickness of brick courses shall be kept uniform. In case of one brick thick or half
brick thick wall, at least one face should be kept smooth and plane, even if the other is slightly
rough due to variation in size of bricks. For walls of thickness greater than one brick both faces
shall be kept smooth and plane. All interconnected brickwork shall be carried out at nearly one
level so that there is uniform distribution of pressure on the supporting structure and no portion of
the work shall be left more than one course lower than the adjacent work. Where this is not
possible, the work be raked back according to bond (and not saw toothed) at an angle not
exceeding 45 deg. But in no case the level difference between adjoining walls shall exceed one
meter. Brickwork shall not be raised more than one metre per day.
Bricks shall be so laid that all joints are well filled with mortar. The thickness of joints shall not be
less than 6 mm and not more than 10 mm. The face joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of
10 mm/ 15 mm by raking tools during the progress of work when the mortar is still green, so as to
provided a proper key for the plastering/ pointing respectively to be done later. When plastering
or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be uniform in thickness and be struck flush
and finished at the time of laying. The face of brickwork shall be cleaned daily and all mortar
droppings removed. The surface of each course shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt before
another course is laid on top.
During harsh weather conditions, newly built brick masonry works shall be protected by tarpaulin
or other suitable covering to prevent mortar being washed away by rain.
Brickwork shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for at least seven days after 24 hrs of
laying. The arrangement for curing shall be got approved from the Project Manager.
Page 344 of 432

Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided to facilitate execution of
the masonry works. The scaffolding shall be designed adequately considering all the dead, live
and possible impact loads to ensure safety of the workmen, in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in IS : 2750 and IS : 3696 (Part - I). Scaffolding shall be properly maintained during the
entire period of construction. Single scaffolding shall not be used on important works and will be
permitted only in certain cases as decided by the Project Manager. Where single scaffolding is
adopted, only minimum number of holes, by omitting a header shall be left in the masonry for
supporting horizontal scaffolding poles. All holes in the masonry shall be carefully made good
before plastering/ pointing.
In the event of usage of traditional bricks of size 230 mm x 115 mm x 75 mm, the courses at the
top of the plinth and sills as well as at the top of the wall just below the roof/ floor slabs and at the
top of the parapet shall be laid with bricks on edge.
All brick work shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural members.
To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the brick masonry following measures
shall be adopted.
For resting RCC slabs, the bearing surface of masonry wall shall be finished on top with 12 mm
thick cement mortar 1:3 and provided with 2 layers of Kraft paper Grade 1 as per IS : 1397 or 2
layer of 50 micron thick polyethylene sheets.
RCC/ steel beams resting on masonry wall shall be provided with reinforced concrete bed blocks
of 150 mm thickness, projecting 150mm on either sides of the beam, duly finished on top with 2
layer of Kraft paper Grade 1 as per IS : 1397 or 2 layers of 50 micron thick polyethylene sheets.
Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick masonry and concrete before taking up
plastering work.
Bricks for partition walls shall be stacked adjacent to the structural member to predeflect the
structural member before the wall is taken up for execution. Further, the top most course of half
or full brick walls abutting against either a deshuttered slab or beam shall be built only after any
proposed masonry wall above the structural member is executed to cater for the deflection of the
structural element.
Reinforced cement concrete transoms and mullions of dimensions as indicated in the construction
Drawings to be prepared by the Operator are generally required to be provided in the half brick
partition walls.
Where the drawings prepared by the Operator indicate that structural steel sections are to be
encased in brickwork, the brickwork masonry shall be built closely against the steel section,
ensuring a minimum of 20 mm thick cement-sand mortar 1:4 over all the steel surfaces. Steel
sections partly embedded in brickwork shall be provided with bituminous protective coating to the
surfaces at the point of entry into the brick masonry.
(ix) Cement Plastering Work
Materials
The proportions of the cement mortar for plastering shall be 1:4 (one part of cement to four parts
of sand). Cement and sand shall be mixed thoroughly in dry condition and then just enough water
added to obtain a workable consistency. The quality of water and cement shall be as per relevant
Page 345 of 432

IS standards. The quality and grading of sand for plastering shall conform to IS: 1542. The
mixing shall be done thoroughly in a mechanical mixer unless hand mixing is specifically
permitted by the Project Manager. If so desired by the Project Manager sand shall be screened
and washed to meet the Specifications. The mortar thus mixed shall be used as soon as possible
preferably within 30 minutes from the time water is added to cement. In case the mortar has
stiffened due to evaporation of water this may be re-tempered by adding water as required to
restore consistency but this will be permitted only upto 30 minutes from the time of initial mixing of
water to cement. Any mortar which is partially set shall be rejected and removed forthwith from
the site. Droppings of plaster shall not be re-used under any circumstances.
Workmanship
Preparation of surfaces and application of plaster finishes shall generally conform to the
requirements specified in IS: 1661 and IS : 2402.
Plastering operations shall not be commenced until installation of all fittings and fixtures such as
door/ window panels, pipes, conduits etc. are completed.
All joints in masonry shall be raked as the work proceeds to a depth of 10 mm / 20mm for brick/
stone masonry respectively with a tool made for the purpose when the mortar is still green. The
masonry surface to be rendered shall be washed with clean water to remove all dirt, loose
materials, etc., Concrete surfaces to be rendered shall be roughened suitably by hacking or bush
hammering for proper adhesion of plaster and the surface shall be evenly wetted to provide the
correct suction. The masonry surfaces should not be too wet only damp at the time of plastering.
The dampness shall be uniform to get uniform bond between the plaster and the masonry
surface.
Interior Plain Faced Plaster
This plaster shall be laid in a single coat of 12 mm thickness. The mortar shall be dashed against
the prepared surface with a trowel. The dashing of the coat shall be done using a strong
whipping motion at right angles to the face of the wall or it may be applied with a plaster machine.
The coat shall be troweled hard and tight forcing it to surface depressions to obtain a permanent
bond and finished to smooth surface. Interior plaster shall be carried out on jambs, lintel and sill
faces, etc. as shown in the drawing and as directed by the Project Manager.
Plain Faced Ceiling Plaster
This shall be applied in a single coat of 6 mm thickness. Application of mortar shall be as

stipulated in above paragraph.
Exterior Plain Faced Plaster
This plaster shall be applied in 2 coats. The first coat or the rendering coat shall be
approximately 14 mm thick. The rendering coat shall be applied as stipulated above except
finishing it to a true and even surface and then lightly roughened by cross scratch lines to provide
bond for the finishing coat. The rendering coat shall be cured for at least two days and then
allowed to dry. The second coat or finishing coat shall be 6mm thick. Before application of the
second coat, the rendering coat shall be evenly damped. The second coat shall be applied from
top to bottom in one operation without joints and shall be finished leaving an even and uniform
surface. The mortar proportions for the coats shall be as specified in the respective item of work.
The finished plastering work shall be cured for at least 7 days.
Page 346 of 432

Interior plain faced plaster 20 mm thick if specified for uneven faces of brick walls or for random/
coursed rubble masonry walls shall be executed in 2 coats similar to the procedure stipulated in
above paragraph.
For external plaster, the plastering operation shall be commenced from the top floor and carried
downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operations for the walls shall commence at the top
and carried downwards. Plastering shall be carried out to the full length of the wall or to natural
breaking points like doors/ windows etc. Ceiling plaster shall be completed first before
commencing wall plastering.
The finished plaster surface shall not show any deviation more than 4mm when checked with a
straight edge of 2 m length placed against the surface.
To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the plastering work following measures
shall be adopted.
Plastering work shall be deferred as much as possible so that fairly complete drying shrinkage in
concrete and masonry works take place.
Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick masonry and concrete to overcome
reasonably the differential drying shrinkage/ thermal movement.
Ceiling plaster shall be done, with a trowel cut at its junction with wall plaster. Similarly trowel cut
shall be adopted between adjacent surfaces where discontinuity of the background exists.
(x) Rough Cast Plaster
Rough cast finish comprises of a mixture of sand and gravel in specified proportions dashed over
a freshly plastered surface.
The joints shall be raked out, dust and loose mortar, shall be brushed out. The surface shall be
thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering is commenced Mortar of
specified mix using the type of sand described in the item shall be used, where coarse sand is to
be used, the fineness modulus of the sand shall not be less than 2.5 mm.
The plaster base over which rough cast finish is to be applied shall consist of two coats, under
layer 12 mm thick and top layer 10 mm.
The top layer shall be applied a day or two after the under layer has taken initial set. The latter
shall not be allowed to dry out, before the top layer is laid on. The mortar used for applying top
layer shall be sufficiently plastic and of rich mix 1:3 (1 cement, 3 fine sand) or as otherwise
specified so that the mix of sand and gravel gets well pitched with the plaster surface. In order to
make the base plastic, about 10 % of finely grinded hydrated lime by volume of cement, shall be
added when preparing mortar for the top layer
It shall be ensured that the base surface which is to receive cast mixture is in plastic state.
The rough cast mixture shall consist of sand or gravel or crushed stone of uniform colour from
2.36 mm to 12.5 mm or as specified and in the proportions as specified accurately to the effect
required. The mixture shall be wetted and shall be dashed on the plaster base in plastic state by
hand scoop so that the mix gets well pitched into the plaster base. The mix shall again be dashed
over the vacant spaces if any so that the surface represents a homogeneous surfaces of sand
mixed with gravel. A sample of rough cast plaster shall be got approved by the Engineer.
Page 347 of 432

(xi) Providing and laying cement concrete flooring 50mm thick with M20 cement concrete
Floors of Pump house supporting pump and pipe gallery shall be 50 mm. thick I.P.S. flooring in c.c. 1:1 1/2:3
with iron.
(xii)Providing and laying Chequered Tiles
Chequered Tile Flooring
Chequered Tiles
The tiles shall be of nominal sizes such as 20 x 20 cm 25 x 25 cm and 30 x 30 cm or of standard

sizes with equal sides. The size of tiles to be used shall be as shown in Drawings or as required
by the Engineer. The centre to centre distance of chequers shall not be less then 2.5 cm and not
more than 5 cm.
The overall thickness of the tiles shall not be less than 22 mm. The grooves in the chequers shall
be uniform and straight. The depth of the grooves shall not be less than 3 mm. The chequered
tiles shall be cement tiles, or terrazzo tiles as specified in the description of the item. The
thickness of the upper layer, measured from the top of the chequers shall not be less than 6 mm.
The terrazzo tiles shall be given the first grinding with machine before delivery to site. The tiles
shall conform to the Specifications for plain cement concrete or terrazzo tiles in respect of method
of manufacture and the mix of the backing and wearing layers. Laying, curing, Polishing and
Finishing
Except that the polishing of the tiles and the chequer grooves, after laying, may be done by hand.
Special care shall be taken to polish the grooves in such a manner as to get a uniform section
and that their finish shall match with the finish of flat portion of the tiles. Cement concrete files
normally do not require polishing concrete tiles normally do not require polishing but where
polishing is required the same shall be done as described above.
 Chequered Tiles in Stair Treads
Chequered Tiles
The Specifications for tiles shall be as except in the following respects:
1. The length of the tiles including nosing shall be as specified.
2. The nosing edge of the tile shall be rounded.
3. The minimum thickness of the tile shall be 30 min.
4. The front portion of the tile for a minimum length of 75 mm from and including the nosing shall
have grooves running to the nosing and at centres not exceeding 25 mm., Beyond that the
tiles shall have the normal chequer pattern.
5. The nosing shall also have the same wearing layer as the top.
Preparation of Surface and Laying
RCC or brick work in treads on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned wetted and mopped.
The bedding for tiles shall be with lime mortar of either 1:1:1 (1 lime putty: 1 surkhi:
Page 348 of 432

1 coarse sand) or 1:4 (1 cement: 4 course sand) or of specified mix. The minimum thickness of
bedding mortar at any place shall be 10 min., Bedding mortar shall be spread, tamped and
corrected to proper levels. After laying bedding mortar, neat grey cement slurry of honey like
consistency shall be spread over the mortar at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per square metre over
each tread. Tiles shall be washed cleaned and shall be fixed in this grout one at another.
Each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded, and is in level and
line with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines. The
surface shall be checked with a straight edge during laying to obtain a true surface.
The square end of the tile shall, as far as possible butt against the riser face of the concrete or
brick tread and in any case shall be embedded under the side wall plaster, skirting or dado and
under the riser tile or other finish to a depth of not less than 10 min.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed, these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size (along the
groove of the chequers where the cut edge is exposed) and used. The cut in the case of
embedded edges will be neat and true while the cut in the case of exposed edges shall in addition
be rubbed smooth to ensure a straight and true joints.
After the tiles have been laid surplus cement grout shall be cleaned off.
Curing, Polishing and Finishing
The Specifications shall be as described in except that polishing of the treads nosing and
chequered grooves, after laying, may be done by hand in the same manner as specified
under terrazzo the flooring. Special care shall be taken to polish the nosing and the grooves in
such a manner as to get a uniform, section for the grooves and the nosing and their finish shall
match with the finish of the flat portion of the tiles.
(xiii) Providing and laying ceramic tiles of having size 30 cm x 30 cm confirming to

I.S.15622/2006 (group D II-A) and 7 to 8 mm thick for flooring in required position laid on a
bed of 1:4 cement mortar including cement float, filling joint with white/colour cement
slurry cleaning curing etc. complete.
Ceramic Tiles shall be best quality of approved make, size of 200 x 200 mm., 200 x 100 mm. or
other sizes as specified in the items. Tiles shall be flat, free to shape, free from blemishes, Tiles
with crazing spot, broken edges, crack shall not be used. Colour of tiles shall be as approved by
the Engineer.
a) Laying of floor
It shall be laid to grade with straight joints over cement mortar (1:4) bedding 20 mm. average
thickness and pointed with white cement slurry or mixed with colour pigment if required. Tiles
shall be soaked in clean water 24 hours before fixing. It should be brushed on the underside
with cement slurry before laying. It shall be cut neatly around the outlet. The finished floor
shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
b) Laying of Dado
Tiles shall be laid on 20 mm. thick cement mortar bedding of 1:4 mix with a floating layer of
cement. The tiles shall be fixed in C.M. 1:1 with a groove joint 6 mm. thick and finished with
cement in joints. Joints shall be raked and the pointing white cement shall also be raked
pointing. A sample dado shall be prepared ahead of starting the main work and shall be
Page 349 of 432

approved by Engineer. Tiles shall be fixed in absolute plumb, straight lines without
kinks protrusions and waviness etc. and pointing shall be uniform throughout.
c) Measurements
All measurements shall be of finished dimensions deducting all openings in floor, walls etc.
No extra shall be paid for specials in tiles such as angles, corners, edge etc. but the area
covered by such specials shall be included in the finished dimensions.
(xiv) Providing cement based water proofing treatment to terraces
The Specifications shall be as described in (IS: 2645-1975)
Providing cement based water proofing treatment to terraces (Indian water proofing or alike) with
brick bats laid in required slope to drain the water for any span after cleaning the base surface.
Applying a coat of cement slurry admixed with approved water proofing compound and laying the
brick bats on bottom layer in CM 1:5 admixed with approved water proofing compound filling upto
half depth of brick bats, curing this layer for three days, applying cement slurry over this layer
joints of brick bats with CM 1:3 admixed with approved water proofing compound. Marking
finished surface with false squares of 300mm x 300mm making the junctions at the parapet
rounded and tapered top for required height, with drip mould at the junction of plaster and parapet
and curing and covering 10 days guarantee against leakproofness on court fee stamp paper of Rs
500/- including ponding test. etc complete
Before starting the work of the proofing work the construction of parapet walls, including finishing
should be completed. Similarly, the ancillary items like haunches, khurras, grooves to tack the
fiber cloth layer, fixing up of all down take pipes, water pipes and electric conduits etc. should be
completed and no such work should be allowed on the area to be treated during the progress of
water proofing Preparing the Surface. The surface of the slab should be roughened by scrapping
when the slab concrete is still green, however, the surface need not be hacked. In case the slab is
already cast and surface fairly finished, the same shall be cleaned neatly of all mortar droppings,
loose materials etc.
Providing and Laying of Slurry under Base Coat
The quantity of water required to prepare the slurry with 2.75 kg of blended cement to be painted
over an area of 1 sqm. Depending upon the surface area that has to be covered, the required
quantity of slurry should be prepared using 2.75 kg. Blended cement + water per sqm. area to be
covered, taking particular care to see that only that much quantity of slurry shall be prepared
which can be used within 30min of preparation i.e. before the initial setting time of cement. The
prepared slurry shall be applied over the dampened surface with brushes very carefully, including
the joints between the floor slab and the parapet wall, holes on the surfaces, joints of pipes,
masonry/concrete etc. The application of the slurry should continue upto a height of 300 mm on
the parapet wall and also, the groove as shown in Fig 17.6. The slurry should also be applied upto
a height of 15 cm over pipe projections etc.
Laying Base Coat 20 mm thick
Just after the application of slurry and when the application is still green, 20 mm thick cement
plaster as base coat with cement mortar 1:5 (1 blended cement: 5 coarse sand) shall be evenly
applied over the concrete surface taking special care to check that all the corners and joints are
Page 350 of 432

property packed and the application of the base coat shall be continued upto a height of 300 mm
over the parapet wall.
Laying Brick Bat Coba
In coba of brick bat the brick bat of size 2.5 cm to 11.5 cm out of well burnt bricks shall be used
and shall be properly dampened for six hours before laying. Brick bats shall be laid to required
slope/gradient over the base coat of mortar leaving 15 to 25 mm gap between two bats. Cement
mortar 1:5 (1 blended cement: 5 coarse sand) shall be poured over the brick bats and joints filled
properly.
Under no circumstances dry brick bats should be laid over the base coat. The haunches/goal at
the junction of parapet wall and the roof shall be formed only with brick bat coba as shown in
Fig.6. In case the brick bat coba is laid on the base coat. Immediately on initial set there will be no
necessity of applying cement slurry over the base coat before laying the brick bat coba. However,
if the brick bat coba is to be laid on the subsequent day, cement slurry prepared as described in
para 17.7.3 shall be applied over the top surface of the base coat, and then only the brick bat
coba shall be laid.
Application of Slurry over Brick Bat Coba
After two days of curing of brick bat coba cement slurry prepared as per para 17.7.3 shall be
applied on the surface of brick bat coba. The application of slurry shall be the same as described
in para 17.5.3 which should cover the haunches/goal, and the remaining small portion of parapet
wall and also inside the groove.
Laying Finishing Layer (Protective Coat)
Just after on applying the cement slurry over the surface of the brick bat coba and when the slurry
applied is still green, the fiber glass cloth as specified in para 17.6.4 shall be spread evenly on the
surface without any kink & pressed to see that no air spaces exist. The fiber glass cloth shall be
taken up to a height of 30 cm on parapet walls & tucked in the groove specially prepared at that
height. 20 mm thick layer of cement plaster, without leaving any joints shall be applied with
cement mortar 1:4 (1 blended cement: 4 coarse sand) over the entire fiber glass cloth including
the haunches/goal and the small portion on the parapet wail. The groove in the parapet wall over
the haunches shall also be filled neatly packing the mortar firmly in the groove. The surface of the
finishing layer (protective coat) shall be neatly finished with cement slurry prepared as per para
17.7.3. The finished surface shall be allowed to dry for a while and then pattern of 300 mm x 300
mm groove, 8 mm deep shall be made over the complete surface area.
Curing and Testing the Treatment
The entire surface thus treated shall be flooded with water by making kiaries with weak cement
mortar, for a minimum period of two weeks.
Measurement
The measurement shall be taken along the finished surface of treatment including the rounded
and tapered portion at junction of parapet wall. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a
cm and area shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 sqm. Deduction in measurement shall not be
made for openings or recesses or chimney stacks, roof lights or neither khurras of neither area
Page 351 of 432

upto 0.40 sqm nor anything extra shall be paid for making such openings, recesses etc. For areas
exceeding 0.40 sqm deduction will be made in the measurements for the full openings and
nothing extra shall be paid for making such openings.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations described
above.
(xv)Providing and laying damp proof course 50 mm thick in M20 cement concrete
Providing and laying damp proof course 50 mm thick in M20 cement concrete layer and bitumen /
using cement with waterproofing compound curing, formwork etc. complete.
Materials and Workmanship
All the walls in a building shall be provided with damp-proof course covering plinth to prevent
water from rising up the wall. The damp-proof course shall run without a break throughout the
length of the wall, even under the door or other opening. Damp-proof course shall consist of
minimum 50 mm thick cement concrete of M-20 mix with nominal reinforcement and approved
water-proofing compound admixture conforming to IS: 2645 in proportion as directed by the
manufacturer. Concrete shall be with 10 mm down graded coarse aggregates.
The surface of brick work/stone masonry work shall be levelled and prepared before laying the
cement concrete. Side shuttering shall be properly fixed to ensure that slurry does not leak
through and is also not disturbed during compaction. The upper and side surface shall be made
rough to afford key to the masonry above and to the plaster. Damp-proof course shall be cured
properly for at least seven days after which it shall be allowed to dry for taking up further work.
Miscellaneous Inserts, Bolts Etc.
All the miscellaneous inserts such as bolts, pipes, plate embedment’s etc., shall be accurately
installed in the building works at the correct location and levels, all as detailed in the construction
Drawing to be prepared by the Operator. Operator shall prepare and use templates for this
purpose, if so directed by the Project Manager. In the event, of any of the inserts are improperly
installed, operator shall make necessary arrangement to remove and reinstall at the correct
locations/levels all as directed by the PBC Engineer.
Base Concrete
The thickness and grade of concrete and reinforcement shall be as specified in items of works
prepared by the Operator.
Before placing the blinding concrete, the sub-base of rubble packing shall be properly wetted and
rammed. Concrete for the base shall then be deposited between the forms, thoroughly tamped
and surface finished level with the top edges of the forms. Two or three hours after the concrete
has been laid in position, the surface shall be roughened using steel wire brush to remove any
scum or laitance and swept clean so that the coarse aggregates are exposed. The surface of the
base concrete shall be left rough to provide adequate bond for the floor finish to be provided later.
(xvi) External Surface Primer coat providing and applying primer coat for all surfaces to receive
oil bound distemper treatment etc. complete. Primary Coats This shall be applied
Page 352 of 432

immediately after the surface preparation and should have the properties of adhesion,
corrosion inhibition and imperviousness to water and air.
The primer shall be ready mixed primer of approved brand and manufacture. Prime coat to be
used shall conform to the Specification of primers approved by the Engineer
Plastered Surface: The complete dry surface shall be painted. Trial patches of primer shall be
laid at intervals and where drying is satisfactory, painting shall then be taken in hand before
primer is applied holes and undulations, shall be filled up with plaster of Paris and rubbed smooth.
Application
The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and spread even and
smooth.
(xvii) External Surface Distemper Coat Providing and applying washable oil bound Distemper of
approved colour and shade to old or new surfaces in one coat including scaffolding,
preparing the surface.(Excluding the primer coat) etc. complete.
 Oil emulsion (Oil Bound) washable distemper as per IS 428 of approved brand and
manufacture approved by PBC Engineer or as specified in item shall be used. The primers
where used as on new work shall be cement primer or distemper primer as described in the
item. These shall be of the same manufacture as distemper. The distemper shall be diluted
with water or any other prescribed thinner in a manner recommended by the manufacturer.
Only sufficient quantity of distemper required for day’s work shall be prepared.
The distemper and primer shall be brought by the operator in sealed container in sufficient
quantities at a time to complete the work of a fortnight’s work. The empty containers shall not
be removed from the site of work, till this item of work has been completed and passed by the
PBC Engineer.
 Preparation of the Surface
(a) In case of new work the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or colour
wash by washing and scrubbing. The surface shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48
hours. It shall then be sand papered to give a smooth and even surface. Any unevenness
shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire
surface including filling up the undulations and then sand papering the same after it is dry.
 Distemper Coat: In case of new work, after the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours,
the surface shall be sand papered to make it smooth for receiving the distemper, taking care
not to rub out the priming coat. All loose particles shall be dusted off after rubbing. One coat
of distemper properly diluted with thinner (water or other liquid as stipulated by the
manufacturer) shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed immediately by
vertical ones which together constitute one coat.
The subsequent coats shall be applied, in the same way. Two or more coats of distemper as
are found necessary shall be applied over the primer coat to obtain an even shade. A time
interval shall be at least 24 hours between successive coats to permit proper drying of the
preceding coat.
In the case of old work the distemper shall be applied over the prepared surface in the same
manner as in new work. One or more coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be
Page 353 of 432

applied to obtain an even and uniform shade. 15 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall
be used. After each days work, brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap
solution and hung down to dry. Old brushes which are dirty and caked with distemper shall
not be used on the work.
 All other specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures and measurements shall
be as described in respective para.
 The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the above operations
(excluding priming coat) described above.
(xviii) Providing and applying putty to new plastered surfaces in two coats to receive approved
paint in all positions including all materials, labour scaffolding and curing etc. complete.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old wash by washing and scrubbing. The surface
shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. It shall then be sand papered to give a smooth
and even surface. Putty shall be made with plaster of paris mixed with water.
Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, on the entire surface including filling up
the undulations and then sand papering the same after it is dry.
(xix) Providing and applying plastic emulsion paint of approved quality, colour and shade to old
and new surfaces in two coats including scaffolding, preparing the surface. (excluding the
primer coat)etc. complete.
Plastic emulsion paint as per IS: 5411 of approved brand and manufacture and of the required
shade shall be used.
Painting on new surface
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted off. All rust, dirt, scales, smoke splashes,
Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its
containers, when applying also, the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so
that its consistency is kept uniform.
The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off, the latter in
the direction of the grains of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over
with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternately in
opposite direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly kin a direction at right angles
to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full
process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.
Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done by spraying. Spray machine used may be (a) high
pressure (small air aperture) type, or (b) a low pressure (large air gap) type, depending on the
nature and location of work to be carried out. Skilled and experienced workmen shall be brought
to the requisite consistency by adding a suitable thinner.
Spraying should be done only when dry condition prevails. Each coat shall be allowed to dry out
thoroughly and rubbed smooth before the next coat is applied. This should be facilitated by
thorough ventilation. Each coat except the last coat, shall be lightly rubbed down with sand paper
or fine pumice stone and dust cleaned off before the next coat is laid.
Page 354 of 432

No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the containers shall be
kept properly closed.
No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panels, angles of
mouldings etc. shall be left on the work, mortar droppings and grease shall be thoroughly
removed before painting is started. The prepared surface shall have received the approval of the
Engineer after inspection, before painting is commenced application.
The number of coats shall be as stipulated in the item. The paint will be applied in the usual
manner with brush, spray or roller. The paint dries by evaporation of the water content and as
soon as the water has evaporated the film gets hard and the next coat can be applied. The time of
drying varies from one hour on absorbent surface to 2 to 3 hours on non-absorbent surfaces.
The thinning of emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine. Thinning with water will
be particularly required for the under coat which is applied on the absorbent surface. The quantity
of water to be added shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions.
The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If necessary more coats will be
applied till the surface presents a uniform appearance.
Precautions
Old brushes if they are to be used with emulsion paints, should be completely dried of turpentine
or oil paints by washing in warm soap water. Brushes should be quickly washed in water
immediately after use and kept immersed in water during break periods to prevent the paint from
hardening on the brush. In the preparation of wall for plastic emulsion painting, no oil base putties
shall be used in filling cracks, holes etc.
Splashes on floors etc. Shall be cleaned out without delay as they will be difficult to remove after
hardening. Washing of surfaces treated with emulsion paints shall not be done within 3 to 4
weeks of application.
 The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the above operations
(excluding priming coat) described above.
(xx)Providing and applying two coats of exterior weather shield paint of approved manufacture
and of approved colour to the plastered surfaces. The item includes a minimum of 2 coats
of acid/ alkali resisting paint applied over the prepared dry surfaces by brushing. Primer
coat shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions, cleaning, preparing the plaster surface,
applying primer coat, scaffolding if necessary, and watering the surface for two days etc
 For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt dust, algae,
grease and other foreign matter by brushing and washing. Pitting in plaster shall be made
good and a coat of water proof cement paint shall be applied over patches after wetting them
thoroughly.
 The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or spraying
machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. It shall be
applied on the surface which is on the shady side of the building so that the direct heat of the
Page 355 of 432

sun on the surface is avoided. The method of application of paint shall be as per
manufacturer’s Specification. The completed surface shall be watered after the day’s work.
 The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 24 hours. Before
application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous coat shall not be
wetted.
 `The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the above operations
(including priming coat) described above.
(xxi) Providing and fixing rolling shutter from steel laths of minimum thickness 0.9mm with lock
plate of 3.15 mm thickness reinforced with 35 x 35 x 5 mm angle section fitted with sliding
bolts and handles for both sides, deep M.S Channel section of depth and thickness not
less than 65 mm and 3.15 mm respectively with hold fast arrangement, M.S bracket plate
300x300x3.15 mm minimum size and shape with square bar, M.S sheet not less than
0.9 mm thickness and of any size top and safety device including mechanical gear
operation arrangement consisting of worm gear wheels and worms of high grade C.I or
M.S and one coat of red leaf primer etc. complete (IS: 6248-1979).(without mech. gear).
 The specifications lays down requirements of providing and fixing steel rolling shutters with
accessories locking arrangement top hood cover and painting in three coats of synthetic
enamel paint of approved quality and shade. The specification for this work as per standard
specification of Red Book - and as directed by PBC Engineer.
 MATERIALS
The rolling shutters shall conform to IS:6248:1979. Rolling shutter shall be supplied of
specified type with accessories. The size of the rolling shutters shall be as specified in the
drawings. The shutters shall be constructed with interlocking lathe sections foamed from cold
rolled steel strips not less than 0.9 mm thick and 80 mm wide for shutters upto 3.5 m width
and not less than 1.25 mm thick and 80 mm wide for shutters 3.5 m width and above unless
otherwise specified. Guide channels shall be of mild steel deep channel section and or rolled
pressed or built up (fabricated) jointless construction. The thickness of sheet used shall not
be less than 3.15 mm.
Head cover shall be made of M.S. sheet not less than 0.9 mm thick for shutters upto 3.5 m
width. For shutters having width 3.5 mm and above the thickness of M.S. sheet for the hood
cover shall not be less than 1.25 mm.
The spring shall be of best quality and shall be manufactured from tested high tensile spring
steel wire or strip of adequate strength to balance the shutters in all positions. The spring
pipe shaft etc. shall be supported on strong M.S. or Malleable C.I. brackets the brackets shall
be fixed on or under the lintel as specified with raw plugs and screws bolts etc.
The rolling shutters shall be self-rolling type upto 8 Sq.mt clear area without ball bearing and
upto 12 Sqm. Clear area with ball bearing. If the rolling shutters are of larger size, then gear
operated type shutters shall be used.
Page 356 of 432

The locking arrangement shall be provided at the bottom of shutters at bottom ends. The
shutters shall be opened from outside.
The shutters shall be complete with door suspension shafts, locking arrangements, pulling
hooks, handless and other accessories.
 Workmanship
Rolling shutters and top hood with all accessories shall be supplied of specified type and shall
be got approved before fixing by the PBC Engineer. The fixing shall be done in true line and
level. The damaged work shall be made good to the level of original works. The fixing work
shall be done to the entire satisfaction of the PBC Engineer. After the erection and fixing the
rolling shutters with hood shall be painted with synthetic enamel paint in three coats. The
paint shall be of approved quality and shade.
(xxii) Providing and fixing M.S grill door 24 kg/sq.m of various sizes as per detailed drawing
without hot dip coating, Iron fixtures and fastening and three coats of oil painting etc.
complete.
 The type, over all sizes, side opening position of steel doors, Windows and ventilators, shall
be specified as per details given in IS: 1038, specifications for steel doors, windows and
ventilators.
 Fabrication
 Both the fixed and opening frame shall be constructed of sections which have been cut to
length and mitered. The corners of fixed and opening frames shall be electrically flash butt
welded to form a solid and true right angle and all frames shall square and flat.
 Sub-dividing bars of the units shall be tensioned and riveted into the frame. No face welding
at the joint of sub-dividing bars and frame is required. The horizontal glazing bars shall pass
through the vertical bars and the joints closed by hydraulic pressure.
(xxiii) Providing and fixing Country cut teak wood single leaf paneled door shutter without
fanlight and 25mm thick as per drawing consisting of T.W. top rail size 100mm x 25mm and
bottom lock rail 200mm x 25mm insert panel 12 mm thick commercial ply faced T.W.
particle board with phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin (Generally confirming to ISI 3097)
excluding frame, including stainless steel fixture and fastening and T.W. beading to
junctions of paneled inserts and as instructed by the PBC Engineer including 3 coats of oil
painting etc. complete.
Paneling
(1) The panel inserts shall be either framed into the grooves or housed in the rebate of stiles and
rails-Timber, plywood, and particle board panels and shall be fixed only with grooves. The depth
of the groove shall be 12 mm and its width shall accommodate the panel inserts such that the
faces are closely fitted to the sides of the groove.
(2) Panel inserts shall be framed into the grooves of stiles and rails to the full depth of the groove
leaving space of 1.5 mm. Width and depth of the rebate shall be equal to half the thickness of
stiles and rails. Glass panels, asbestos panels wire gauze panels and panel inserts of cupboard
shutters shall be housed in the rebates of stiles and rails.
Page 357 of 432

(a) Timber Panels: Timber panels shall be preferably made of timber of large width; the minimum
width and thickness of the panel shall be 100 mm, and 15 mm respectively. When made from
more than one piece, the pieces shall be jointed with a continuous tongued and grooved joint
glued together and reinforced with headless nails at regular intervals not exceeding 100 mm.
Depth and thickness of such joint shall be equal to one-third of thickness of panel. The
panels shall be designed such that no single panel exceeds 0.5 square meters in area. The
grains of timber panels shall run along the longer dimensions of the panels. All panels shall
be of the same species of timber unless otherwise specified.
(b) Plywood Panels: Plywood boards used for paneling of shutters shall be of grade as specified
Each panel shall be a single piece of thickness, 12 mm thickness for single panel construction
unless otherwise specified.
(c) Veneered Particle Board Panels: Veneered Particle board used for paneling of shutters shall
be Exterior Grade bonded with BWP type synthetic resin adhesive as specified. Each panel
shall be a single piece of thickness 12 mm unless otherwise specified.
(d) Fiber Board Panels: Fiber board used for paneling of shutters shall be Exterior Grade
bonded with BWP type synthetic resin adhesive each fiber board panel shall be a single piece
unless otherwise specified.
(e) Wire Gauze Panels: Wire Gauze used for paneling of shutters shall be woven with 0.63 mm
dia galvanized mild steel wire to form average aperture size of 1.40 mm as specified in 8.2.7.
Wire gauze shall be securely housed into the rebates of stiles and rails by giving right angles
bend turned back and fixed by means of suitable staples at intervals of 75 mm and over this
wooden beading shaft be fixed. The space "between the rebate and the beading shall be
fixed with putty to give a neat finish. Each wire gauze panel shall be a single piece, and the
panels shall be so designed that no single panels exceeds 0.5 sqm in area.
However, care shall be taken to prevent sagging of wire gauge, of panel by providing and
fixing 20 x 20 mm square or equivalent beading to the external face to the required patterns
as decided by the PBC Engineer.
(f) Glass Panels: Glass paneling (Glazing) shall be done as specified in 8.2.6. Glazing in the
shutters of doors, windows and ventilators of bath, WC and Lavatories shall be provided with
frosted glass the weight of which shall be not less than 10 kg/sqm. Frosted glass panes shall
be fixed with frosted face on the inside. Glass panels shall be fixed by providing a thin layer of
putty conforming to IS 419 applied between glass pane and all along the length of the rebate
and also between glass panes and wooden beading.
(g) Putty can be prepared by mixing one part of white lead with three parts of finely powdered
chalk and then adding boiled linseed oil to the mixture to form a stiff paste and adding varnish
to the paste at the rate of 1 liter of varnish to 18 kg of paste. Fixing of glass panes without
beading shall not be permitted. Glazing shall be done after the shutters have been primed
and prepared for painting, so that wood may not draw oil out of putty.
(h) Finish: Panels of shutters shall be flat and well sanded to a smooth and level surface.
Beading
Beadings in Panelled shutter shall be provided where specified in architectural drawings or

directed by the PBC Engineer. Each length of beading shall be single piece. Joints at the
Page 358 of 432

corners shall be mitered and exposed edges shall be rounded. Beading shall be fixed with
headless nails at 75 mm intervals. For external shutters, the beading shall be fixed on the
outside face.
Machine/Factory made Shutters
Machine made shutters, where specified, shall be procured from an approved factory. For
machine made shutters, operations like sawing, planning, making tongue and tenons, cutting
grooves, mortises and rebates, drilling holes and pressing of joints shall be done by suitable
machines. Machines made shutters shall be brought to the site fully assembled but without
any priming coat. Panel inserts of sheet glass and wire gauze may, however, be fixed at site.
Fixing of Shutters
a) Side hung shutters :- For side hung shutters of height upto 1.2 m, each leaf shall be
hung on two hinges at quarter points and for shutter of height more than 1.2 m, each leaf
shall be hung on three hinges one at the centre and the other two at 200 mm from the top
and bottom of the shutters.
b) Top hung and bottom hung shutters shall be hung on two hinges fixed at quarter points of
top rail or bottom rail. Centre hung shutter shall be suspended on a suitable pivot in the
centre of the frame. Size and type of hinges and pivots shall be as specified. Flap of
hinges shall be neatly counter sunk into the recesses cut to the exact dimensions of flap.
c) Screws for fixing the hinges shall be screwed in with screw driver and not hammered in.
Unless otherwise specified, shutters of height more than 1.2 mm shall be hung on butt
hinges of size 100 mm and for all other shutters of lesser height butt hinges of size 75
mm shall be used.
d) For shutter of more than 40 mm thickness butt hinges of size 125 x 90 x 4 mm shall be
used. Continuous (piano) hinges shall be used for fixing cup-board shutters where
specified.
Fittings
Fittings shall be provided as per schedule of fittings decided by PBC Engineer, and as per
schedule (given for guidance) shall be as given below. Cost of providing and fixing shutter
shall include cost of hinges and necessary screws for fixing the same. All other fittings shall
be paid for separately. The fittings shall conform to relevant specifications
(xxiv) Providing and fixing steel window of various sizes as per detailed drawing without hot dip
zinc coating, without ventilators, including fabricating/ glazing with plane/ obscured glass
panels of approved type and quality, iron oxidised fixtures and fastenings, oil painting two
coats complete.(BdT53 P No 509 )
Materials
Hot rolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel doors, windows and ventilators shall conform
to IS: 7452 which are suitable for single glazing Pressed steel door frames for steel flush doors
shall be out of 1.25mm thick mild steel sheets of profiles as per IS : 4351. Transparent sheet
glass shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2835. Wired and figured glass shall be as per IS:
5437. Builder's hardware of fittings and fixtures shall be of the best quality from the approved
manufacturers.
Page 359 of 432

Workmanship
All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be of the type as specified in the respective items of
work prepared by the Operator and of sizes as indicated in the drawings prepared by the
Operator. Steel doors widows and ventilators shall conform to the requirements as stipulated in
IS: 1038. Steel windows shall confirm to IS: 1361 if so specified.
Doors, windows and ventilators shall he of an approved manufacture. Fabrication of the unit shall
be with rolled section cut in correct lengths and meter. Corners shall be welded to form a solid
fused welded joint conforming to the requirements of IS: 1038. Tolerance in overall dimensions
shall be within ± 1.5mm. The frames and shutters shall be free from warp or buckle and shall be
square and truly plain. All welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and contact surfaces.
Punching of holes, slots and other provisions to install fittings and fixtures later shall be made at
the correct locations as per the requirements. Samples of the units shall be got approved by the
Engineer before further manufacture/purchase by the Operator. Type and details of shutters,
hinges, glazing bar requirement, couplings, locking arrangement, fittings and fixtures shall be as
described in the respective items of work and / or as shown in the Drawings prepared by the
Operator for single or composite units.
For windows with fly proof mesh as per the item of work prepared by the Operator, rotor operator
arrangement, for the operation of the glazed shutters from the inside shall be provided. Pressed
steel door frames shall be provided with fixing lugs at each jamb, hinges, lock-strike plate, mortar
guards, angle threshold, shock-absorbers of rubber or similar material as per the requirements of
IS: 4351. Pressed steel door frames shall be fixed as 'built-in' as the masonry work proceeds.
After placing it plumb at the specified location, masonry walls shall be built up solid on both side
and each course grouted with mortar to ensure solid contact with the door frame, without leaving
any voids. Temporary struts across the width shall be fixed, during erection to prevent bow/sag of
the frame.
Door shutters of flush welded construction shall be 45mm thick, fabricated with two outer skills of
1.25mm thick steel sheets, 1mm thick steel sheet stiffeners and steel channels on all four edges.
Double shutters shall have meeting stile edge beveled or rebated. Provision of glared viewing
panel, louvers shall be made as per the items of works and/or Drawings prepared by the
Operator. Shutters shall be suitably reinforced for lock and other surface hardware and to prevent
sagging/twisting.
Single sheet steel door shutters shall be fabricated out of 1.25mm thick steel sheets, mild steel
angles and stiffeners as per the Drawings prepared by the Operator. Doors, windows and
ventilators shall be fixed into the prepared openings. They shall not be 'built-in' as the masonry
work proceeds, to avoid distortion and damage of the units. The dimensions of the masonry
opening shall have 10mm clearance around the overall dimensions of the frame for this purpose.
Any support of scaffolding members on the frames/glazing bars is prohibited.
Glazing of the units shall be either with flat transparent glass or wired / figured glass of the
thickness as specified in the items of works prepared by the Operator. All have properly squared
comer and straight edges. Glazing shall be provided on outside of the frames. Fixing of the
glazing shall be either with spring glazing clips and putty conforming IS or with metal beads. Pre-
formed PVC or rubber gaskets shall be provided for fixing of beads with concealed screw. The
Page 360 of 432

type of fixing the glazing shall be as indicated in the items of work and/or in Drawing prepared by
the Operator.
Steel doors windows and ventilators shall be provided with finish of either painting as specified or
shall be hot dip galvanized with thickness of the zinc coating as stipulated or as described in
respective items of works prepared by the operator.
The material of the Builders hardware of fittings and fixtures of chromium plated
steel, cast brass, brass copper oxidized or anodized aluminium shall be as specified in the items
of work prepared by the Operator, The number, size and type of fittings and fixtures shall be as in
the Drawings /items of works prepared by the Operator.
Installation of the units with fixing lugs, screws, mastic caulking compound at the Specified
locations shall generally conform to the requirements of IS:1081.
Necessary, holes etc., required for fixing shall be made by the Operator and made good after
installation. Workmanship expected is of a high order for efficient and smooth operation of the
units.
(xxv) Providing and fixing single or double leaf paneled door shutter excluding frame with
glazed openable fanlight shutter 35 mm thick as per detailed drawing consisting paneled
vertical styles 100 mm x 35 mm and lock and bottom rail 200 mm x 35 mm and panels 12
mm thick both side commercial ply faced particle board including stainless steel fixtures
and fastening and T.W. beading at junctions of panel inserts and as instructed by the PBC
Engineer including 3 coats of oil painting etc. complete.
Specifications as mentioned in (xxiii) above
(xxvi) Providing and fixing steel ventilator fully glazed partly fixed as per detailed drawing
without hot dip zinc coating including fabricating, glazing with plain/ obscured glass
panels and approved type and quality and iron oxidized fixtures and fastening, Oil paint
two Coats etc.
Specifications as mentioned in (xxiv) above
(xxvii) Providing, Hoisting and fixing in position CI Manhole, Frame and cover of best quality and
of required size and shape with locking arrangement including applying two coats of anti
corrosive paint, etc. complete
The manhole frame and covers of size 0.90 m X 0.60 m clear inside should be provided having 35
Kg weight and shall be fixed at top slab & shall be of cast iron only. Mild steel covers shall not be
allowed. Necessary locking arrangement and painting with two coats of anticorrosive paint of
approved quality from inside and outside
(xxviii) Providing and fixing PVC rain water Pipes of 160 mm outer dia.
Providing and fixing PVC rain water Pipes of 160 mm outer dia. And having wall thickness of 2.2
to 2.7 mm confirming to IS 13592-1992 Including proper rainwater receiving recess with PVC
plug, bend, necessary fittings, such as offset, shoes, including the fixing of pipe on wall using
approved wooden cleats projecting 25 mm to 40mm from face of the wall a fixing with clips of
approved quality and number, filling the joints using rubber gasket with solvent cement and
properly resting the shoes of pipes on CC or masonry blocks, including necessary scaffolding.
Page 361 of 432

All the PVC fittings and additional two piece socket clips shall be got approved from PBC
Engineer etc. complete.
F. Pumping Machinery Technical Specification

Item No.1:- Pumping Machinery Technical Specification
SUBMERGED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPs
HT Submerged Vertical/ Horizontal Pump set.
General
1. Submerged Vertical/ Horizontal pump coupled with motor, for raw water of specific
gravity 1.05. The rated speed for pump shall not be exceeding the rated speed of the
motor.
2. The designed head specified above includes static head, friction losses & other losses
after discharge flange, but exclude the suction losses in suction & discharge head. The
bidder should include these losses to calculate the total head.
3. The pump set shall be of Compact Unitary construction. The pump casing shall be of high
efficiency, Volute Casing type with the Impeller mounted directly onto the Extended Solid
Motor Shaft (without any couplings). The pump set should be Single Stage type i.e. it
should have only one impeller & one Casing – Two stages shall not be allowed (except
for heads ≥ 90m). Pump Casing shall be high efficiency, Centrifugal Volute type.
4. The pump & motor shaft shall be the same unit. Shaft coupling shall not be acceptable.
Pump shaft shall be SS 410 stainless steel.
5. The impeller shall be 316 stainless steel, dynamically balanced, double shrouded non
clogging design having a long throat without acute turns.
6. The pump volute shall be grey cast iron, ASTM A-48 class 35B single piece design with
smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the impellor.
7. The pump maybe mounted directly into the water body (Canal / Sump / River or
unscreened Open well/ Jack well), so it may suck up lot of silt, clay, pebbles & vegetation.
Hence it should be reliable & robust.
Installation
The pumps should always be suitable for Vertical/Horizontal & Portable Installation & be inter-
changeable between these modes throughout their working lifetime (by suitable use of base
frames/ auto coupling systems, which can be ordered either during the main P.O. or at a later
stage).
The detailed scope of supply & mode of installation shall be as per the specific tender data
sheets.
The pump shall be offered with fully portable & robust MS portable base frame.
In case the pump is to be installed on a Concrete Canal Bed where vibrations are to be
suppresed; the pump should be provided with Anti Vibration Shock Pads between the pump &
the Base frame.
Page 362 of 432

Pump End Design
Speed to achieve best efficiency, reasonable cost & yet long life, the speed of the pump set
should be such that the Specific Speed (Ns) of the pumps (calculated as per for Single Stage,
Single Suction Impeller pumps assuming duty point as the best efficiency point ); should not
exceed :
o 58 for upto DN 100,
o 70 for pumps upto DN 200,
o 116 for pumps upto DN 500 &
o 125 for larger pumps.
Where Ns = rpm x √(Q m3/s)_
(H m) 0.75
in addition to 5.1.1; Motors > 113 kW &/or with Pump’s duty point flow rate > 100lps shall be
limited to maximum of 1500rpm.
The pump shall be capable of developing the required total head at rated capacity for its
continuous operation. Pumps of particular category shall be identical and shall be suitable for
parallel operation.
The head capacity curve shall be continuously rising towards shut off with the highest at shut
off. The shut off head shall be atleast 120% of the specified duty point head. The Impeller
shall be of high efficiency Multi Channel Enclosed type (except for Specific Speeds ≥ 90
where Semi Open Impellers shall be allowable).
Suction Strainer
The pump is fitted directly with a Suction Bell mouth to which is compulsorily fitted a Heavy
duty Strainer (to avoid pick up of gravel, pebbles, vegetation, etc.)
Sizing of the Suction Strainer should be as per the Larger of the two at the duty point flow, the
Suction Velocity (at Strainer Holes), should never exceed 3.0m/s & at the duty point flow, the
total cumulative Suction Area of all the Strainer Holes should always be ≥ 2.0 times the
Impeller’s Suction Eye Area.
However Large & Slow Speed pumps (with Solid Handling Ability ≥ 75mm, Nozzle Size ≥
300mm & of Speeds ≤ 1000rpm) may be offered without Suction Strainer.
The pump’s solid handling size & maximum hole size of suction strainer should be as per
below mentioned chart.
Design of Impeller & Strainer
Min Thickness of Max. Permissible Hole Size of

Pump Delivery Size
Suction Strainer Suction Strainer
DN 25, DN 32 & DN 40 2mm Not more than 4mm
Page 363 of 432

DN50 & DN65 Not more than 6mm
DN80 Not more than 8mm

3mm
DN 200 Not more than 21mm
DN 250 5mm Not more than 30mm
DN 300 & DN 350 Not more than 40mm
DN 400 & above 7mm Not more than 50mm
The pump set shall be suitable for starting with delivery valve open as well as closed at any
operating point. The motor should also start accordingly. The pump set shall be capable of
withstanding the accidental rotation in reverse direction.
Fully filled up & Stamped Data Sheets as per attached format shall be submitted along with
the Technical Bid without which the Commercial Bid shall be rejected.
3.1.2 Induction Motor (Submerged) Vertical/Horizontal Design
The motor shall be of Squirrel Cage, Induction type, Air Filled yet capable of Water Immersion
upto 20mwc for S1 duty – Motors with Oil or Water filled windings shall not be allowed.
It is rated for 6.6 KV ± 10 % KV, 3 phase 50 ± 5% c/s A.C. Its winding should be insulatted
with moidture resistant Class “H” insulation * (withstanding winding hot spot temperature of up
to 185°C respectively) while the nominal temp rise of winding hotspot should not exceed that
of class “B”.
It should be wound using Dual Coated, Super Enamelled; Copper wire with high temperature
index as per I.S. 4800 Part-13. PVC / Poly propylene – poly ethylene insulation for winding
wires shall not be allowed. Motor’s Insulation should be Vacuum Varnish Impregnated & Oven
Baked to ensure a Moisture Impervious & Mechanically Robust insulation. Dip or Pour type
Air Dry Varnishing shall not be allowed.
The Motor Rating should be higher of the two criteria :
atleast 7 ½ % / 10% over Maximum pump shaft input at any point of the curve for motors upto
200kW/ Above 200kW respectively &/or
20% over pump shaft input @ duty point (i.e. bkW)
The Motor’s Rotor shall be of Dual Cage Copper Bar Brazed type* to assure :
Long Corrosion free Service life (in presence of high moisture inevitable in submerged motors
Aluminum corrodes much faster than Copper),
Ease of Onsite Repairing & beneficial Fly Wheel type Inertial effect (as compared to
aluminum rotor, copper rotor is heavy) which reduces detrimental effects of water hammer
Better Motor Efficiency & Cooler Operating Temperature
Page 364 of 432

* Motors rated ≤ 90kW may be however supplied with Aluminum Die Cast Rotors but Dual
Cage Copper Bar shall always be preferred.
Motor Cooling:
To restrict the Dead Water Level (in case of Vertical Installation) in the Sump to 1m, Medium
sized, Vertical pumps (≥55kW) should have a Cooling Jacket – i.e. motor cooling is
accomplished by circulation of pumped water between the motor casing & the jacket shell -
this jacket shell is fed by cold water from the pump casing & discharges its heated water back
into the sump (in case of Wet Installation) or Pump casing (in case of Dry Installation) by
integrally cast ducts. There should not be any pipes, hoses, etc for this circulation.
In case the pumps are to be installed horizontally OR the dead water level in the sump
exceeds 1.5m from the pump centerline, the motor can be cooled just by water immersion i.e.
no jacketing is required. The mode of cooling (either direct immersion or via jacket cooling)
should also be clearly mentioned in the data sheets.
Motor Protection
Thermal Overload Protectors (Bi Metallic Over Load Relays) should be embedded in each
phase of the stator winding to detect overheating & trip the motor from the control panel in the
event of the temperature exceeding the safe operating limit (above 130C).
To detect primary Mechanical Seal’s Leakage a Moisture Sensor shall be provided in

intermediately Oil Chamber (& not in the Motor casing or else where) – this shall detect water
mixing in oil by mode of increased leakage current from the moisture sensor.
Cables
A watertight Cable Junction Box sealed from the motor shall be provided for the motor power
and signaling cables.
The cable shall be brought directly out of the submerged motor without joints, and shall be of
sufficient length, minimum 15 m to be terminated in an IP 67 junction box (in the scope of
electrical Operator) outside adjacent to the wet well & above the HFL. They shall be sized in
accordance with the electricity utility regulations and BS 7671.
It should have Power as well as Control Cables of Dual Sheathed EPRS / PVC Armoured
type with Copper Core of required size as per detail engineering. However the Cross Section
of the cable be shall ample enough to ensure a Voltage Drop of not more than 2% at actual
site conditions.
Shaft & Bearings
The Solid Shaft shall be supported by heavy duty Ball or Roller bearings with a minimum L10
life of 75,000 hours in accordance with BS 5512. The bearing should be of Metric Series &
not Imperial ones. The lower bearing shall be two row of angular contact bearings to
compensate the axial thrust & radial force. Single row lower bearing shall not be
considered acceptable.
Oil Lubricated bearings shall not be allowed.
In case the motor is to be driven via a VFD, atleast one of the bearings (DE or NDE) should
Page 365 of 432

be Current Insulated to prevent “electric fluting damage” caused by Harmonics.
Stuffing Box / Oil Chamber
The pressurized entry of water into the motor (from the pump’s volute casing) should be
prevented by Two separate mechanical seals in mounted in a Tandem mode within an oil
chamber.
The Primary (Inboard) seal should always be of Silicon Carbide or Tungsten Carbide faces to
withstand erosive wear due to any silt particles.
The Secondary (Outboard) seal should be of Carbon v/s Cast Chrome Molybdenum Steel or
Silicon Carbide or Tungsten Carbide – i.e. Thermally Unstable materials like Alumina/
Aluminum Oxide shall not be allowed.
Testing
The pump set shall be tested at the in accordance of ISO 9906 or IS 9137 or IS 5120
(Tolerance Class 2); with or without VFD. Schedule of performance guarantee as descriped in
section 4 (A) should be ensureed by the Operator.
In case of MNC pump manufacturer not having adequate testing facility within reasonable
distance (i.e. decided by the area of operation of the TPI); the pumps should be tested at the
Alternative Test Bed or at Field within 30 days of installation which the Operator/
manufacturer is bound to offer at no extra cost. The Field Testing shall include the following:
Motor Routine Tests :
IR
HV
No Load Amperes, Vibration, etc.
Pump Performance Testing (in accordance with IS 5120 / IS ISO 9906, Grade 2 -5% / ISO
2548-5%) :
Measurement of Head, Discharge, Motor Input at atleast 6 different points to plot the Actual
Performance Curves
All the Extra Charges for such Field Testing shall be borne by the Operator. It is clarified that,
in case of Field Testing Failure; SJPNL reserves the right to detain the pumps in their custody
until the Operator replaces the failed pumps with New pumps which shall again be subjected
to Retesting. No extra charges shall be allowed by SJPNL to the Operator.
The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency & specific gravity) shall
be minimum 1.15.
Materials of Construction
Motor Casing, Oil Chamber &
Cast Iron (FG 260 as per IS 210 or GG25 or EN-JL1040)
other parts
Aluminum Die Cast or Dual Cage Copper
Motors ≤ 200kW
Motor ‘s (Squirrel Cage) Rotor Bar
Motors > 200kW Dual Cage Copper Bar only
Page 366 of 432

Motor Cooling Jacket (if

SS 202 or Epoxy Coated MS
applicable)
Faces :
 Primary (Inboard) : Silicon Carbide v/s Silicon Carbide or
Tungsten Carbide v/s Tungsten Carbide
 Secondary ( Outboard ) : Carbon v/s Cast Chrome
Mechanical Seals
Molybdenum Steel or Silicon Carbide or Tungsten Carbide
Elastomers:
 All “O” rings of Viton only
 & Bellows of either Viton OR Nitrile
Fasteners Stainless Steel or Hot Dip Galvanized BHT Alloy Steel
Pedestal cum
Auto Delivery Bend
Coupling Ductile Cast Iron or Cast Steel (SG 400/12 or EN-JS1050 or GGG
Slider Bracket
System 40) or WCB
(if Guide Rail Pipes /
applicable) Wires & Foundation SS 304 / SS 316
Bolts
Pumps with Duty Point Head rating
≤ 80m & Delivery Size ≤ DN
100mm; Cast Iron (FG 260 as per IS
Pumps with Duty Point Head rating 210 or GG25 or EN-JL1040)
≤ 60m & Delivery Size ≤ DN
Pump (Volute) Casing 125mm
Ductile Cast Iron or Cast
Pumps with Duty Point Head rating
Steel
> 80m Pumps with Duty Point
(SG 400/12 or EN-JS1050 or
Head rating > 60m & Delivery Size
GGG 40 or or ASTM 80-55-
> DN 1225mm
06 or WCB)
Suction Bellmouth &
miscellaneous pump parts
Cast Austenitic Stainless Steel (SS 316 or CF 8M or 1.4406) or
Impeller
Bronze
Wearing Rings (Suction Head Cast Austenitic Stainless Steel (SS 316 or CF 8M or 1.4406) or
Casing & Impeller) Bronze
Stainless Steel (SS 410 or SS 430 or 1.4021 or 1.4460)*
* Larger Motors (i.e. > 200kW) may be supplied with High Carbon
Pump-Motor Shaft
Alloy Steel Shaft (EN 8 or DIN 1.7225 or others) protected with SS
316 Shaft Sleeves
Suction Strainer MS (C15) Fabricated with Epoxy Coating
Portable Stand (if applicable) MS (C15) Fabricated with Epoxy Coating
Data Sheet for Dry Motor, Wet Installed Submerged Vertical/Horizontal Pump set
Submerged Centrifugal pump is used for Water Intake/ Transfer /

1. Application
Lift & may be mounted in Canal, Sump, Lake or Jack well either
Page 367 of 432

Vertically depending upon the site conditions
2. Type of motor Squirrel cage induction type with IP68 enclosure

3. Rated Flow m3/hr
4. Rated Head mwc
5. No. of units.
6. Supply system fault level 20 MVA
7. Supply Line side Solidly-earthed
Rated voltage / Rated
8. 6.6 KV / Suitable for pump as per previously outlined margin norms
KW
9. No. of Phases & frequency 3 Phase & 50 Hz.
± 10% voltage variation
10. Supply condition ± 5% frequency variation
± 10% combined voltage and frequency variation
11. Speed 1000 rpm max. (as dictated by 5.1)
Duty condition as per IS
12. S1 suitable for constant operation
325 or equivalent
13. Method of starting Soft Starter
Starting torque & Pull Out Sufficient enough to start the pump with delivery valve open and
14. Torque when other pumps are running. Sufficient to bring the motor to
normal speed in minimum time
Class of Insulation & temp. Class “H” but Temperature rise restricted to that of class “B” i.e.
15.
rise by thermometer 75°C
16. Ambient temperature 45° C
Surface cooled by circulation of water through jacket shell.
a) Type of Cooling
17. ≥ IP 68 (should withstand upto 20m of Water Immersion) on S1
b) Degree of protection
basis
18. Cable details ≥ 3 1/8 Cores (minimum 1/8 cores required as Earth)
Shaft orientation. Pump set should be suitable for Any position – i.e. Vertical or
19.
Horizontal / Vertical Horizontal or Inclined
20. Type of bearings Ball / Roller / Thrust Anti Friction type
Bi Metallic Thermal Over
Yes, one in each phase; for trip, alarming and indicating set to trip
21. Load Relay for Winding
@ 130 °C
required ?
Bearing Over Required for motors > 113kW By Bi Metallic Overload Thermal
22.
Temperature Detectors Switches set to Trip @ 95 °C
23. Winding connections 6 Terminals
IS 325, 8225, 4889, 4772, 4029, 4691 and other relevant Indian
24. Standards to be followed Standard or equivalent BSS. Testing as per ISO 9906 or IS 9137
or IS 5120
SITC of Pumpset with 10m Cable
25. Scope of Supply √ Along with 10m Alloy Steel Chain & install as per
any of the 3 mentioned modes.
Page 368 of 432

Shall be Pumpset fitted with Base Frame Horizontal,

intimated at Portable; Wet (Submerged) Installation.
Detailed
Engg
Stage
I/We are bound to supply the above Item of stated manufacture having rated capacity, material
of construction and other requirements mentioned in the data sheet.
Factory test:-
i. Review raw material test certificate & quality control procedure.
ii. Pump shall be tested at hydrostatic pressure equal to twice duty head of 1.5 times
shut at head, which ever is higher.
Performance test:-
The test shall be carried out as per IS 5120 for pumps with reduced speed test. The
test shall be carried out at manufacturers work. The test shall cover.
a) Duty Point
b) 2 Point above duty point
c) 2 Point below duty
d) Shut off head.
e) Power consumption at all above points
All the instruments required for these tests shall be arranged by the Operator at his cost
G. Express Feeder, Substation and Transformer

Item No. 1:- Express Feeder, Substation & Transformer
 SUB-STATION STRUCTURE
 Sub-Station Gantry :
Towers (columns) and beams (gantries) for supporting stain insulators and flexible bus bars shall be
provided. Support structures for post-insulators, current transformers, voltage transformers, surge
arrestors, isolators shall be provided as required as per drawings. The substation structure shall be
built with Galvanised steel- fabricated structures. The steel sections shall be galvanized by hot-dip
zinc coating or hot zinc spraying. The galvanising is essential to prevent corrosion and rusting.
Aluminum or Zinc rich paint shall be given in addition for better protection and appearance. Following
type of construction shall be used for galvanized steel structures.
 Standard large sections such as channels, I-sections.
 Lattice structure formed by bolting/welding light angles and flat sections.
 Galvanising and Painting
Each separate members is treated and galvanized in the factory before dispatch. The galvanizing is
done under close quality control. The surface of steel shall be very clean to ensure proper hot dip
galvanizing.
Page 369 of 432

Before dispatching to site, the members are given aluminium paint coatings. After erection, the
structures are subjected to weathering period of one year and then painted again with aluminium
paint.
 Dimensioning
The dimension of structures is decided by the following
 Clearance between the earthed structure and nearest live part, requirements of ground clearance.
 Section clearance requirements.
 Requirements of height and width for movement of largest equipment and crane.
Main factors in Designing Support structures
 Loading due to tension in flexible conductors and earth wires.
 Wind pressure (min 195 kg/m 2 on 1.5 times projected area).
 Weight of conductors.
 Weight of structure itself.
 Loading at the time of erection and maintenance.
 Factor of safety - 2 to 2.5
 Insulators:
Types of insulators:
 Pin insulators
 Post insulators
 Strain insulators
 Suspension insulators
The insulation shall have adequate creapage distance. The choice of creapage distance shall be
based on high pollution in the sub-station (25 mm/kV). The insulation level shall be based on :
 Nominal voltage and highest system voltage.
 One minute power frequency withstand voltage.
 Standard lighting impulse with stand level.
Material:
 Porcelain
Electrical Insulation level
Nominal system voltage - 22 kV
Maximum system voltage - 23kV
One min. power frequency with-stand - 75 kV
Page 370 of 432

Impulse with-stand - 170 kV
Number of discs in the string
i. Suspension Tension - 3-4
ii. Surge arresters - 4-5
 Transformers
 Handling
When lifting a transformer by the lugs or shackles provided for this purpose, simultaneous use should
be made of all such lugs and shackles in order to avoid any unbalance while lifting. Before lifting,
complete transformer, it should be ensured that all cover bolts are tightened fully. In case it is
necessary to use jacks for lifting, projections provided for the purpose of jacking should be used.
Jacks should never be used under valve or cooling tubes.
It may be necessary under certain circumstances to place jacks under stiffening curbs on the tank
base. For transporting transformers from stores to site, the transformers shall be loaded on a suitable
capacity truck or trailer.
The transformers shall be properly supported by steel ropes and stoppers on the trailer to avoid
damage in transit due to jerks and vibrations. At no instance, a transformer shall be kept on bare
ground where it is not possible to unload the transformer directly on a foundation, these shall be
unloaded on a properly built wooden sleeper platform. A transformer shall never be left without putting
stoppers to the wheels.
Assembly of loose supplied items- Damages of any nature shall be brought to the attention of site
engineer before lifting material from stores failing which it will be to Main Vendor’s account.
Following checks are to be carried out:
i) All the accessories have been fixed properly and transformer conservator tank and neutral
are properly earthed. The transformer dehydration is over and results are Satisfactory and
approved by the PBC Engineer.
ii) The oil level, in the transformer conservator tank and all the bushings is up to the marked
point and the oil has been tested for dielectric strength.
iii) The Silica gel is in reactivated condition, the breather pipe is clear from any blocking and
contains oil up to the proper level.
iv) The explosion vent diaphragm does not have any dents accumulation of oil and air has been
released.
v) The operation of off-load Tap changer is satisfactory.
vi) The Buchholz relay has been checked up for any friction in the movement and floats are free.
All the other protective relays, alarm and annunciation relays have been tested.
vii) All the metering equipment has been tested. Polarity test of transformer winding is alright.
Phase sequence and connections have been checked for proper vector group.
viii) The ratio test on all the tap positions is alright.
Page 371 of 432

ix) Gaps of arcing horns for the bushings are alright and earth connections for the surge diverters
have been checked.
x) The winding and oil temperature thermometer pockets contain oil.
xi) The transformers fitted with fan for forced air cooling have been checked.
xii) The simulation tests for all the alarms, annunciation and trip circuits have been checked and
are alright.
xiii) The insulation resistance of all the control circuits and IR value of the transformer winding and
all the incoming and outgoing cables have been checked and in order.
xiv) All the valves in the cooling system and valve between the Buchholz relay and the
conservator tank are in open position.
xv) The transformer has been cleaned from outside.
xvi) The earth leads have been cleaned from outside.
xvii) All the tools and other materials have been removed from the transformer vicinity.
xviii) The setting of all the protective relays are at the desired value and trip supply is available.
 Power/Motor Control Center
Erection and checking shall be carried out as described in item no. 6.1 for panels.
 Busduct
Erection will include following:
Identification and storage of all parts of Busduct as soon as they are received at site. This shall be
carried out with reference to the approved vendor drawings, additional tag nos. if required shall be
painted for easy identification.
Checking of supply of hardware as per MTO.
Erection of Busduct received in parts after ensuring all parts are identified.
Cleaning of all contact surfaces and application of petroleum jelly before making connection.
Checking of the earth continuity of Busduct.
Sealing of wall opening where Busduct enters after installing M.S. lintel.
Checking IR value of each assembled phase between switchgear and transformer.
 Cables
Transporting the cables from stores to place of installation. The drums under the custody of the Main
Vendor shall be neatly arranged in the yard near his site office. The drum shall not be rolled for
transportation more than 10mtr. Truck/Trailer shall be used for transportation for distance more than
10mtr.
The cables shall be rolled out for equipment and cutting shall be as per site requirement. Cable jacks
and cable rollers shall be used during laying of cable.
The cables shall be tested for insulation value before laying. Drum schedule to be prepared by Main
Vendor.
Page 372 of 432

The cables shall be laid in trenches, trays, along walls or structural support as per the requirement.
The cables shall be neatly laid and clamped. The crossing of cables shall be avoided. The
arrangement of cables on the tray/trench shall be decided based on the cable schedule and layout
drawings and shall be approved by the site engineer.
Clamping of cable shall be done by 18 SWG thick aluminium clamps at an interval of 0.5mtr. for
vertical run and 1mtr. for horizontal run. When cables are cleated on wall/structures, the spacer and
saddle shall be used at 300 mm interval or less depending on the location and shall be approved by
site engineer.
The cable terminations shall be done as per standard practice and crimping type of terminations shall
be considered.
The glanding shall be done with suitable arrangement for earthing the gland. Wires/sleeves required
for effectively earthing the glands shall be included in the termination materials.
The unused cores of the multi-core cables shall be properly taped. The tag carrying the cable number
shall be at interval of 20mtr. for underground cable, and 30mtr for above ground cable and at all
bends and route changes of the cable run. Material of tag shall be aluminium for above ground cables
and of lead for buried cables. Sample of tags, shall be approved by site engineer.
The cable numbers shall be painted near the terminal blocks in MCC/Distribution boards/
Switchboards.
For main power cables, loop shall be provided near terminations.
All cables coming from floor/trench shall be taken trough a G.I. Pipe. The length of the pipe shall be
decided by the Main Vendor and approved by the site engineer.
The glands supplied by the Main Vendor shall be suitable for cable sizes mentioned and if necessary;
reducers shall be provided by the Main Vendor. The Main Vendor shall indicate the requirement of
reducers and supply the same after approval of rates by Owner.
The Main Vendor shall supply and install the ferrules for multi-core cable connections. The ferrule
marking shall be identical to the wires connected to the terminals.
The lugs used shall be tinned copper for copper cable and AL lugs for AL Cable, crimping type of
reputed make. The lugs used for multi strand control cable shall be PVC sleeved crimping type copper
lugs.
The connections between the junction boxes / control panels to components like pressure switches,
limit switch shall be through flexible conduits. The length of each of the flexible conduit shall not
exceed 120 cm. The cables coming from switchboards to the cable tray shall be taken through branch
trays and the cables shall be clamped neatly. The arrangement shall be approved by site engineer.
Main cable runs are to be routed as shown on the contract drawings. Any modifications found
necessary due to site conditions; must be approved by Owner. Details of routes not shown in details
on these drawings are to be determined on site by discussion with site engineer.
PVC insulated and/or served cables shall not run parallel within 100 mm of, or be installed above
and in line with, any heated pipes or duct. Where crossing above heated pipes or ducts is
unavoidable the cable must be kept at least 150 mm from the outer surface of such pipes or ducts or
the insulation thereof.
Page 373 of 432

On main horizontal cable runs, where cables are supported, suitable mild steel saddles, cleats or clips
shall be used. Between these fixing points cables shall be laid neatly in position on the intervening
racks. On vertical cable runs and horizontal runs other than the main horizontal runs, cables shall be
fixed at one meter intervals. Where different sized cables are together the maximum fixing intervals
are to be those required for the smallest cable, unless the smaller cables are bunched with larger
cables and supported by them throughout the complete multi-cable run.
NOTE: Where the installation/layout drawings indicate that the cables are to be run or fixed other than
in accordance with this specification, the drawings shall be deemed to be correct.
Cable run in RCC trenches are to be run on the trays/floor of trench. Cable ducts in the ground shall
be sealed against the ingress of water, foreign matter and vermin, at both ends by means of non-
setting compound and/or suitable wood plugs fitted over the cable and into the duct. Where ducts are
not in use they shall be sealed in a similar manner.
Cables laid direct in the ground shall be laid on a bedding of 150 mm of sand and covered by 150 mm
layer of sand, on top of sand tiles/bricks covering to be done. The depth of laying shall be such as to
provide 750 mm minimum cover for low voltage cables and 1000 mm cover for high voltage cables.
All non used open entries in equipment and open ends of conduit are to be sealed by means of
conduit plugs (or blanking plates if entries are not of standard conduit sizes) at all time.
NOTE: This is particularly important where equipment is located in position, but electrical installation
is incomplete.
Where cables pass through floors, they shall be protected by metal / PVC pipes or other suitable
means. Holes in floors, walls, etc. will be made and reinstalled by the Main Vendor unless otherwise
stated.
All cables laid underground shall be protected with good quality brick and interlocked concrete tiles
marked “Electric” or “Telephone” cables.
Cable joints shall be mechanically and electrically sound and except for buried cables they shall be
accessible for inspection. Underground joints shall be specially protected with a double layer of bricks
and cast iron joint markers (marked ‘Cable- Joint’), shall be installed to indicate the position of the
joint. Where corrosion of armour or gland might occur, it shall be effectively protected by suitable
means.
The Main Vendor shall test all cables for proper insulation before they are transported for laying and
shall furnish a certificate of acceptance to this effect. Any subsequent damage to the cable shall be
made good by the Main Vendor, at his own cost.
 Cable Marking
All cables shall be externally marked at either end with the respective identification numbers by
means of non-deteriorating material. Cable markers shall be approved by OWNER.
Where conductors are left to be terminated by another party or left to be connected later, they must
be individually identified.
 Cable Glands
Cable glands shall be made of nickel plated drawn brass bar and shall be double compression type,
with double seal cone grip arrangement. Gland shall be complete with check nut and PVC hood.
Page 374 of 432

When preparing cables prior to fitting glands, the gland manufacture’s instruction for cable preparation
shall be observed. In all cases, where armoured cables are used, care shall be taken to ensure that
the layer of the armour is maintained after the gland is completely fitted.
The preferred method of terminating conductors is by means of solderless compressed Connectors.

Deviations from the above shall be subject to approval of OWNER’s Engineer.
Connectors shall be of the correct size for the conductor concerned and as manufactured by Dowell’s
or approved equivalent make.
All connectors shall be marked with the size reference for identification with correct compression tool.
This reference shall be located on the palm of the contact faces where possible.
The palm of the connector shall be of such shape and size that standard washers as per relevant IS
applicable to the size of stud for which the connector is designed shall lie flat on both faces of the
connector palm when the holes in the washers and the palm are co-incident.
Compression tools shall be designed and supplied for specific use with the connectors used, and
shall be regularly serviced by the maker.
 Motors
The motors will be installed and aligned by mechanical Main Vendors.
The cable termination at the motor end shall be done by the Main Vendor and the connection shall
ensure direction of rotation as required for the coupled equipment.
The Main Vendor shall check the cable entry provided on the motor cable box for fixing the gland and
inform the HCC/Owner’s representative of requirement of reducers, if any sufficiently in advance.
The motors may require modifications re-orientation of cable/terminal box for cable termination. The
Main Vendor shall carry out the same as per requirement of site engineer.
The unused cable gland cutout in the motor cable box shall be plugged effectively
The Motor shall be earthed at two different points. The earthing strip shall be neatly laid and clamped
In case of cables coming from trench/ground, G.I pipes shall be used to bring the cable and the
opening of the pipes shall be sealed with compound after commissioning the motor.
Motors of belt driven equipment shall have flexible earthing strip.
The motors shall be run on no-load for four hours. No load current of motor to be recorded. No load
run of the Motor will be during any part of the day or any day of the week as per site engineer’s
instructions. Area shall be cordoned off and danger board displayed before start of no load run.
The over current relays in the MCC shall be set at the full load current given on the nameplate of the
motor.
The equipment number shall be painted on the motor.
The motors shall be tested for insulation value before commissioning. The insulation value of
individual motors shall be recorded properly and handed over to Owner’s representative. If required,
heating up the winding shall be carried out by the Main Vendor as per instruction of site engineer of
OWNER.
Page 375 of 432

The load current of the motors shall be recorded for all motors whenever run by Mech./Process
Group with clip-on ammeter. Clip-on ammeter will be arranged by Main Vendor.
If required, and instructed by site engineer of HCC/OWNER, decoupling of drives shall be done by
Electrical Main Vendor.
Canopy if required shall be fabricated and installed as per site engineer’s instructions. The canopies
shall be installed after checking the direction of rotation and commissioning of equipment.
Push Button Station
Push Button station enclosures shall be die-cast aluminium station enclosures shall be die-cast
aluminium LM6 having minimum 3 mm thickness.
The enclosure shall be weatherproof, IP 55 suitable for outdoor installation .All mating surfaces shall
be with continuous non-deteriorating type special rubber gaskets/neoprene gaskets.
All internal wiring upto the terminal block in the push button station shall be carried out with 1.5 mm2
stranded copper conductors. Wires on terminal block and component shall be terminated using
crimping type lugs. ISI approval stamp shall be embossed on the internal wires at regular intervals.
Two threaded entries shall be provided on each push button station at the bottom for fixing cable
glands, suitable for the cable sizes.
For ease in cable termination, the minimum distance between the terminal blocks and the cable
entry/gland plate shall be 50 mm. The terminals shall be suitable for 2.5 mm2 size of cables. All the
components in the Push Button Stations i.e. push button elements, terminals, ammeter, selector
switches shall be mounted on the body of Push Button Stations only. Mounting of these components
on the cover is not acceptable. On the cover, only the operating knobs and handles of switches shall
be mounted.
The enclosure shall be provided with two[2] nos. of external earthing terminals and one [1] no. internal
earthing terminal earthing terminal complete with nut and spring washers for termination of 6 mm2
aluminium conductors. The earthing terminals shall be clearly identified by an symbol marked in
legible and indelible manner on or adjacent to the terminal While providing the earthing terminals on
the enclosure, care should be taken such that weather proof-ness of enclosure is not sacrificed.
 Components specifications.
 Push buttons
Each push button shall be provided with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts, each rated to carry, make and break
10A at 240 AC or 10A at 30v DC. Colour of the actuators of stop push button shall be Red and that of
start push button shall be Green. Stop and emergency trip push button shall be mushroom head type
and shall have stay-put feature i.e. once the stop push button is pressed, it remains in pressed
position until its actuator is turned in either direction or pulled manually. Push buttons shall be Spring
Return type. Start push button shall be totally shrouded type to prevent the accidental start of the
motor. Suitable locking arrangement shall be provided for stop push button. Small hylam piece at the
end of actuator shall be provided, if required, for satisfactory operation of contact element.
 TNC Control switches & Selector Switches
TNC Switch shall be spring return to neutral type and selector switches shall be Stay-put type.
Number of positions & poles of switch shall be as per requirement. Switch shall be provided with cam
Page 376 of 432

shaped handle for selector switch and pistol grip for TNC switch. Contacts of control switches shall be
rated to carry, make and break 10A at 240V AC, or 10A at 110V DC. ON/OFF control switch [2 pole]
shall be rated for 6A, 240V AC & switch shall have wing type knob for operation. Suitable locking
arrangement shall be provided for Selector switch.
 Terminal blocks.
Terminal blocks shall be made from good quality moulded phenolic resin or other suitable synthetic
insulating materials. Terminal blocks shall be clip on type. Voltage grade of terminal block shall be
1100V. Minimum number of terminals shall be as per the requirement.
One sample of each type of Push button station shall be furnished to Owners site Engineer for
approval before commencement of manufacture of entire quantity.
Certified copies of routine test certificate along with those of all components shall be furnished after
the inspection.
 Installation
The push button stations shall be mounted on column/wall/structure depending upon the requirement.
The mounting arrangement shall ensure that the push buttons are kept minimum 50 mm away from
the surface of the wall/column.
The cables shall be taken through G.I. pipes in case of cables from trench/ ground.
The push buttons shall be mounted such that the actuators are at an approximate elevation of 1200
mm from finished floor level.
The labels of the push button shall be checked and if necessary new labels shall be provided. The
labels of the push button shall be installed to have easy access for operation.
The earthing wires shall be connected to the push button through lugs. The earthing points shall be
connected by separate wires.
The cable tag of the control cable of the push button shall be as near to the push button as possible.
Each push button shall be tested for operation of push buttons element and insulation value before
installation.
The mounting structure shall be painted with specified paint and the shade shall be approved by site
engineer.
Cleaning the push buttons, if necessary after commissioning.
The unused cutouts for cables in the push buttons shall be plugged.
If required, an additional 2.5 mm thick epoxy painted aluminium canopy covering top and sides of
Push Button shall be provided to give adequate protection against weather.
 Distribution Boards / Control Panels [Wall Mounted]
The board shall be installed on wall/column/ structure as required with necessary framework at an
approximate elevation of 1200 mm from finished floor level.
Balance activity.
Page 377 of 432

 Lighting System
The lighting fixtures in the plant shall be fed from lighting panel and group controlled from MCB’s on
Lighting Panel. Lighting Panels shall be mounted approximately 1200 mm above finished grade level.
The lighting layouts furnished by Owner shall indicate approximate locations of lighting fixtures. The
electrical Main Vendor shall determine, with approval of the Engineer-in charge or his authorized
representative the exact locations of each fixture in order to avoid interference with piping or other
mechanical equipment and also with a view to obtain as uniform illumination as practicable, and to
avoid objectionable shadows. Conduit/cable run shown on drawing are only indicative. These shall be
laid out by the Main Vendor to suit field conditions as per directions of the PBC Engineer.
Mounting Height for Light Fittings shall be as indicated on Layout drawings.
Socket outlets in outdoor areas shall be approximately 1200 mm above finished grade and 300 mm
above grade in office area.
Fixtures shall be firmly supported from the structures, support clamps etc., may be bolted or welded
to the existing steel work or metal inserts. In case of concrete where supports are not available,
fixtures will be fixed to or supported from concrete surface with the help of anchor fastener. In such
cases special care shall be taken to see that anchoring is firm. All hardware shall be galvanized or
zinc passivated.
Main Vendor shall keep a close watch on the lighting MTO sheets issued to him. Any discrepancy
noticed between the figure given in MTO and the actual requirement at site, shall be immediately
brought to the notice of PBC Engineer by the Main Vendor.
 Conduit System
Surface conduit system of wiring shall be adopted as specified in the drawings. Suitable pull boxes for
inspection type fittings will be used to facilitate drawing of wires. Conduit accessories shall be
galvanized and shall conform to IS-1653.
Only threaded type conduit fitting shall be used. Pin Grip type clamp type fittings are not acceptable.
Conduit ends shall be free from sharp edges or burrs. The ends of all conduits shall be reamed and
neatly bushed with bakelite bushings.
In order to minimize condensation of sweating inside the conduit system, all outlets shall be properly
drained and ventilated in such manner so as to prevent entry of insects.
The outer surface of the conduit pipes, including all accessories forming part of the conduit system,
shall be adequately treated when such system is exposed to weather. In all cases bare threaded
portion shall be treated with anti-corrosive preservative or covered with approved plastic compound.
Conduit connection to outlet boxes shall be by means of screwed hubs or check nuts on either side.
Conduit pipes shall be fixed by 22 gauge ribbed G.I. saddles on 25 x 3 mm G.I. saddle bars in an
approved manner at intervals of not more than 300 mm. Saddle shall be fixed on either side of
couplers bends or similar fittings, at a distance of 30 mm from the center of such fittings. The cost of
saddle bars, saddles, clamps, etc. shall be deemed to have been included in the installation of
conduits.
Wiring for exhaust fans shall be terminated in receptacles to the exhaust fan shall be by means of a
flexible cord equivalent in size to the main run of wires.
Page 378 of 432

After erection, the entire conduits systems shall be tested throughout for mechanical and electrical
connection to earth by means of approved type earthing clamps, in accordance with Indian Electricity
Rules.
 Battery and Battery charger
The battery and charger shall be installed as per details given in the drawings.
The battery shall be charged as per instructions from manufacturer.
The earthing shall be done with two distinct earthing strips.
 Capacitors
The capacitor units shall be inspected and insulation value shall be checked and recorded.
The aluminium link connection shall be checked and tightened.
The units shall be installed on framework near switchgear.
The units shall be earthed with two distinctive earth strips.
 Convertor / Invertor Panel
 Cable Trays
The cable trays shall be ladder type unless otherwise specified.
The trays shall have to be painted with two coats of primer followed by two coats of final paint shade
as approved by site Engineer.
The trays shall have suitable provision for clamping at an interval of 500mm.
The earthing strip for the earthing ring shall be run along the side of the tray.
The connection between individual equipment to the ring shall be by welding or brazing or with lugs.
The trays shall be supported as per installation drawings. If necessary, additional supports shall be
provided. The supporting arrangement shall be approved by site engineer.
The bending of trays shall be smooth and the curvature sufficient for easy bending of cables in it.
 Earthing
All electrical equipment must be efficiently double earthed in accordance with the requirement of IS
3043 and relevant regulations of Electric Supply Authority.
The earth pits shall be as per drawing with proper arrangement for testing.
All earthing conductors shall be hot dip galvanized steel / electrolytic grade bare copper conductor.
The main earthing rings shall be done as per practice laid in Indian standard.
The earthing of individual electrical equipment by two distinct strips/conductors shall be done as per
practice laid in Indian Standard.
The sizes of conductors for earthing various equipment; shall be as per relevant earthing drawing and
Bill of Quantity.
All electrical equipment shall be connected to the earth bus at two points except the lighting fittings
and junction boxes.
Page 379 of 432

Following earthing resistance shall be measured and recorded in the presence of site engineer during
the dry season.
i) Resistance of each earth electrode with electrode isolated from the system.
ii) Combined earth resistance of the installation measured at the substation, switchroom and any
other point as directed by the site engineer.
iii) The method of testing shall be as per IS-3043. The Main Vendor shall prepare the test report
in the format given in Appendix-C of IS.
iv) The effective earth resistance of the system shall be less than one ohm. If necessary no. of
earthpits to be increased, after obtaining the approval of site Engineer.
All hardware for bolted joints shall be galvanized and the size of the bolt shall not be more than
quarter of the size of earth conductor.
Tinned copper lugs shall be provided where round earthing conductors are used.
All joints in the main earthing conductors shall be welded. Welded potion shall be applied with
Bitumen paint.
Terminal joints on the equipment shall be bolted.
The earthing conductors running underground shall be laid approximately 600 mm below the grade
level.
Where the earthing terminal diameter provided on equipment is larger than quarter of the size of the
earth conductor, connection shall be made using a wider flat welded to the conductor.
The quality of galvanizing shall be subject to test in the presence of site engineer.
The pipes shall be earthed by connecting to a common earth grid.
For equipment earthing, suitable GI bolts with spring and plain washers to suit the thread of earth
boss of vessels etc. shall be provided by Electrical Main Vendor.
 Materials for Earthing
The following materials shall be used for earthing depending upon the site conditions and the contract
requirements.
(a) Tinned copper in the form of flats or wires (solid or stranded).
(b) Galvanized iron /MS in the form of flats and wires / wirerope.
(c) Aluminium either bare or insulated in form of flats or wires.
(d) PVC cable, wire, etc.
 Earth Pits
The number of earth pits will depend upon soil resistivity and the voltage of the system. The location
& number of the earth pit indicated on the drawing are tentative. Main vendor shall revise this
quantity[if required] based on actual measured soil resistivity. The earth pit together with the electrode
shall be constructed as indicated in the drawing or per I.S. 3043. The minimum distance between two
earth pits shall not be less than twice the length of the electrode. A bolted assembly link shall be
Page 380 of 432

provided in the connection between earth electrode and the main earth conductor. GI pipe for
watering shall be included in the rate of earth pit.
Removable test links shall be provided near the earth pits to facilitate testing of earth pits.
 Earth Bus and Earth Wires
The earth wire may be of solid bars or flats or stranded. Sufficient care should be taken to prevent
corrosion and mechanical damage. Interconnections of earth continuity conductors and main and
branch earth wires shall be made in one of the following manners:
1) Riveted connection
2) Welded connection (mainly applicable in the case of M.S.).
3) Brazed connection (for copper)
4) Bolted connection.
Framework and other non-current carrying metal work associated with each system. Transformer,
tanks, switchgear framework, etc. shall be earthed. Extraneous metal framework not associated with
the power system e.g. boundary fence, steel structure, sheaths of communication cables etc. will have
to be earthed. Each incoming and outgoing cable shall be bonded to the switchboard earth so that the
armour and sheathing with feeders and interconnection shall form an earth system.
 Earthing of Transformer
For Transformers, 415V neutral shall be solidly earthed by means of two separate and distinct
connections to earth using 50 x 6 mm GI flats as indicated in drawings. Each connection shall be
connected to an independent earth pit near the transformer as indicated on drawing. The earth pits
shall be interconnected between themselves and the main earthing loop to form an earthing ring. The
neutral earthing leads shall be kept away from the transformer tank.
 Earthing of Distribution Boards, MCCs etc.
Distribution boards and MCCs shall be provided with two separate and distinct earth connections from
the main loop.
A separate earth bar shall be provided throughout the length of the MCC or distribution board, and
individual connections to various items of equipment in the distribution board or MCC shall emanate
from the above bus bar in the form of a ring.
 Earthing of Motors, Starters and Push Buttons
All the motors shall have 2no. distinct earth provided with separate connection from main earth loop.
Where the terminal box is not part of the motor frame or where a sealing box is used, a bond shall be
provided from the gland plate or armour clamp to the motor frame.
Starters and push buttons shall be double earthed using armour of the cables as the second point of
earthing.
 Lightning Protection
The plant and structures shall be protected against lightning in accordance with requirements of IS-
2309. Air terminal rods shall be provided at the top most points of buildings and structures.
Page 381 of 432

Horizontal Roof conductors shall be run as indicated on drawing. Hot dip galvanized 25 x 6 mm G.I.
strips shall be used for horizontal air termination.
Downcomers shall be installed as per layout drawing along the periphery of the buildings and
structures and connected to separate earthing pit. Distance between two downcomers shall not be
more than 30 meters. Each downcomer shall be provided with a test link for testing the installation.
Portion at the conductor below ground shall be painted with bituminous paint.
Vertical air terminal rod [wherever specified in layout drawing] shall have 150 mm dia GI or 75 mm dia
copper sphere with 5 nos. 150 mm long conical GI/Copper spikes. The spikes shall be screwed and
welded/brazed to the sphere. The whole assembly shall be fixed to a GI rod of not less than 50 mm
nominal bore by means of flanged connections. The downcomer shall be connected to the flange and
welded/brazed. The top of the air terminal rod shall be two meters above top most point of structure.
 Safety
All electrical equipment operating on 415 V or higher voltage shall be provided with caution notice
boards of approved typed and shall be affixed permanently in a conspicuous position. Where a group
of equipment is located within. a switch/control room or within a fenced area, the notice board shall be
fixed at the entrance.
In front of all the switch boards, rubber mats shall be provided for personal safety.
 Testing and commissioning of Electrical Equipment and Installation
 General
The electrical installation and the various electrical equipments shall be tested and certified test
results shall be furnished as directed by OWNER site engineer.
The testing of all electrical equipment as well as the system as a whole shall be carried out to ensure
that the equipment and its components are in satisfactory condition and will successfully perform its
functional requirements.
Tests in accordance with the specified or applicable latest relevant Indian Standards codes of
Practice or regulations shall be carried out by the Main Vendor, who shall provide at his own
expenses all appliances, instruments, labour and other facilities required for such tests.
Before each test on any apparatus, the Main Vendor shall obtain the permission from the site
engineer and all tests shall be conducted in the presence of duly authorized representative. Records
of each test shall be prepared immediately after the test; and this record shall be signed by Main
Vendor’s representative conducting the test; and the site engineer attending the test. Six copies of
this record shall be handed over to OWNER.
All testes shall be carried out by qualified testing personnel.
Before starting the testing of various equipment, the Main Vendor shall ensure that the erection
works have been carried out and completed in all respects.
The Main Vendor must ensure that oil immersed apparatus, dash-pots, etc. are filled with correct type
of oil up to correct level before testing the apparatus.
The Main Vendor must ensure that all safety gadgets are in position and must ensure all the earthing
connections are proper and tight.
Page 382 of 432

The Main Vendor shall take all safety precautions as per standard code of practice to prevent danger
to the testing and other personnel in the vicinity of testing equipment.
The Main Vendor must put up appropriate warning boards on all the under test
The Main Vendor shall cordon of the area where high voltage tests are in progress and put up danger
boards on all the sides warning the persons.
While conducting the various tests, the Main Vendor shall take suitable precautions to prevent
damage to the various meters instruments and instrument transformers.
 Switchgear
Pre-commissioning check list: The testing shall be carried out as per testing schedule. However,
before commissioning any switchgear panel, circuit breaker, motor starter etc the following points
must be checked and ensured for safe energizing of the switchboard.
The erection of equipment to be commissioned is complete in all respect with its auxiliaries and all the
mountings including earthing. Openings in floor within and outside panels have been sealed off. All
covers and door gaskets are intact to make enclosure vermin proof.
All the metering instruments have been checked and calibrated. Indicating lamps are healthy and are
in position. All power and control fuses are of proper rating and show continuity.
Air vent pipe of CIRCUIT BREAKER is free and spouts, shutter mechanism is ok. Mechanical parts of
breaker closing and tripping mechanism clearances have been checked, and lubricated and circuit
breaker contact travel, contact pressure and resistance are O.K. buffers are free and fully lubricated.
Di-electric strength of oil is not less than 50 KV at 2.5 mm gap for one minute and oil level is OK.
Manual closing and tripping has been checked for cleanliness, and adequate contact pressure.
Auxiliary contacts in series with tripping circuits open with breaker opening.
The polarity test and ratio test of all the P.T.s. and C.T.s. to the correct vector group connections.
Wiring continuity and correctness are ensured in the protection and measurement circuits. Polarity of
DC battery supply for all the circuits is correct.
The high voltage test on circuit breaker, bus bars and outgoing and incoming cables have been
conducted and results are satisfactory.
All the protective relays including thermal overload relays have been tested for secondary injection
tests and operation of all the current and voltage operated relays have been tested. (Primary injection
tests are to be carried out for differential protection, etc, at full/reduced current to ensure total wiring
correctness). Simulation tests to check all protection, alarm and annunciation systems are functioning
as per required settings.
IR values have been recorded for bus-bars, circuit breaker, incoming and out going cables, control
wiring and potential transformers. Joint resistance of bus-bars have been recorded and found to be
satisfactory. High voltage test of all circuit breakers, bus-bars and cables have been conducted and
certificates approved by site in-charge. All the surroundings and panels have been cleaned and
temporary earth loads have been removed.
 High Voltage Switchgear (above 1000V AC)
Insulation resistance test with 2500 V megger for main circuits. The minimum value of insulation
resistance shall be 100 megaohms.
Page 383 of 432

Insulation resistance test with 500 V megger for control, metering and relaying circuits. The minimum
value of insulation resistance shall be 1 megaohm.
Power frequency high voltage test.
 Test to ensure CT polarity and ratio.
Relay operation test by primary and secondary injection method.
Testing of dielectric strength of insulating oil in case of oil filled circuit breaker.
Functional check of the control circuits
Checking of all relay settings as per drawing.
ON/OFF operation of the breakers both manually and electrically in “Test” as well as “Service”
position.
Test to ensure adequate charge in the battery by discharge resistor and voltmeter.
Testing of closing and tripping coils of breakers at the minimum voltage specified.
 Low Voltage Switchgear including variable speed drive panels
Insulation resistance test with 1000 V megger for main circuits. The minimum value of insulation
resistance shall be 1 megohm.
Insulation resistance test with 500 V megger for control, metering and relaying circuits. The minimum
value of insulation resistance shall be 1 megaohm
Relay operation test by secondary injection method.
Functional test of the control circuits
Checking of setting of all relays/releases as per drawings
ON/OFF operation of breakers both manually and electrically in “Test” as well as “Service” positions.
Transformers
Insulation tests between phases and phase to earth shall be conducted.
Three samples of oils from each transformer shall be taken and tested for dielectric strength.
The silica gel of the breather shall be tested for the dryness; if necessary, it shall be reactivated.
Operation of Buchholz Relay, temperature relay and alarm contacts shall be checked.
Ratio and polarity tests shall be conducted and recorded and the tap shall be set to appropriate
position and locked.
Following tests shall be carried out :
HV test, if directed by Owner, shall be in accordance with IS- 2026-1962
Insulation resistance to earth of each winding to earth using 1000 V and megger for winding up to
1000V and 2500V megger for winding of higher voltages (IS-2026-1962:17.9).
Oil test should (IS-335:1953) withstand 50 KV (IS-6792-1972).
Polarity and phasing check (IS-2886: 1967:12.2).
Page 384 of 432

Buchholz relay operation test (by compressed air or other approved suitable means).
Alarm checks
Buchholz.
Oil temperature.
DC winding resistance measurement at various taps if directed by site engineer.
Observations After Commissioning
The inrush of magnetizing current and no load current.
Alarm if any or any relay flag has operated.
Voltage and current on all the three phases.
Transformer hum or abnormal noise.
Circulation of oil and leakages.
Record current, voltage, cooling air temperature, winding temperature winding temperature and oil
temperature reading, hourly, for 24 hours.
Cable end boxes for any over heating.
 Motor
Each motor shall be tested for smooth noiseless working.
No load current on each phase of the motor shall be checked and recorded.
Testing and commissioning of all H.V. motors shall cover:
Power connection from MCC to auxiliary motors associated with the main motor
All interconnected control wiring between motor control cubicle, circuit breakers temperature detecting
devices, interlocks and connections for space heaters etc.
Testing commissioning and setting of relays, alarms, indication, etc, for motor.
 Motor Starters
Insulation resistance test of Min. Value 100 megaohm, using 1000V megger.
Insulation resistance of 1 megaohm earth of main circuit using 500V megger.
Each starter shall be tested for correct operation.
The thermal overload and under voltage releases must be checked for proper working and final
overload setting shall be fixed properly so that while in the use, setting does not get altered due to
vibration or any other operating conditions.
 Bus Duct
Insulation resistance test with 2500 V megger for bus-ducts rated above 1.1 KV grade and 1000V
megger for bus-ducts rated upto 1.1 KV.
DC high voltage test for bus duct rated above 1.1 KV.
Distribution Boards, Push Buttons and Other Apparatus (Main Vendor to List Items)
Page 385 of 432

Insulation resistance to earth, using 1000V megger, min. 1 mega ohm for equipment connected to
main circuits and 500V megger for equipment connected to auxiliary and control circuits.
 Relays
Each relay shall be tested with a secondary injection test set having a timer.
The Main Vendor shall test each relay for the correct current time characteristics.
The relay shall be tested under each tap. Each relay shall be set for the proper safety and operation
of the system to which it is connected.
The relay timings shall be set in such a way that the circuit breaker nearest to the fault only trips
without affecting other circuits.
 Battery & Battery Charger
The Main Vendor shall keep log sheets of the battery cells indicating the voltage and specific gravity
of each cell from time to time of initial charging up to the time of commissioning of the electrical
equipment.
The Main Vendor must check the battery voltage on each trip coil and ensure that the trip coils of the
various circuit breakers are receiving the correct voltage.
The Main Vendor must check the correct operation of the battery charger equipment.
Battery and battery charger will be commissioned as per manufacturer’s instruction.
Battery charger shall be loaded by water resistance load for full load for a period of 24 hours to
ascertain the charger performance before battery is taken up for initial charging.
 Instruments
The zero error of each instrument shall be corrected and tested for correct indication over the entire
range.
All recording and instruments shall be calibrated for correctness before installation.
 Earthing
Resistance of all earth electrodes and total resistance of each group shall be tested to prove that the
values do not exceed that specified in codes of practice or regulations and recorded. Earth pit
resistance shall not be more than 5 ohms and grid resistance shall not be more than 1ohms.
The continuity of earthing and resistance of each earthing connection to the equipment shall be tested
and recorded.
 Miscellaneous
All miscellaneous equipment such as rectifiers, electromagnet, klaxon, plug sockets, limit switches,
alarms, pressurizing equipment, etc. shall be tested according to the manufacturer’s instruction,
standard practice or the advice of OWNER.
 Cable and Wiring
The following test shall be carried out on all the cables:
All low voltage control wiring and cables operating at a voltage below 250V shall be tested for
insulation and continuity with 500V megger.
Page 386 of 432

All medium voltage wiring and cables working at a voltage not exceeding 1100V shall be tested for
insulation and continuity first with a 1000V megger.
All high voltage exceeding 1100V shall be tested for insulation and continuity test with a 2500 V
megger.
High voltage tests shall be carried out on all cables working at a voltage exceeding 1100V after laying
and jointing according to relevant IS. Leakage current shall be recorded.
Testing of cable installation: DC test voltages after installation (before commissioning) shall be as per
IS-1255-83. D.C. test voltage for old cables shall be 1.5 times rated voltage or less depending on the
age of the cables, repair work or nature of jointing work carried out etc. In any case the test voltage-
should not be less than the rated voltage.
 Guarantee
Electrical Installation shall be guaranteed for trouble free operation for a period of 18 months from
date of commissioning. Any defects discovered during this period shall be rectified by the Main
Vendor free of cost.
 Deviations
Should the vendor desire to deviate from this specification in anyway he shall draw specific attention
to such deviation.
Unless such deviations are recorded in the deviation sheets with the offer, it will be assumed that the
offer is made in conformity with the specification.
H. SCADA Technical specification

Item No.1:- Design, Supply, Installation, Testing, Interfacing, Integration of PLC and
Commissioning of SCADA (Cloud Based) System Software
The scope of the works includes design, manufacture, testing at works (FAT), supply at site, storage
at site, installation / erection, testing, commissioning, programming, integrating with existing systems,
providing, field testing (SAT) and development of integrated SCADA server and Monitoring system
consisting of Central SCADA with cloud server facility, PLCs at various locations with HMIs, flow
meters, pressure transmitters, chlorine analysers and automation of valves through actuator control
within 40% water supply distribution network of SJPNL.
General Description of Proposed System
The Telemetry / SCADA specified herein shall be designed, manufactured, installed, tested and shall
provide along with the following functions:
 To provide central monitoring system and Master Control Centre to collect, store, control and
monitor the Water Distribution Management System (WDMS) for all ESRs/ GSRs covering
40% project area water supply components.
 To monitor Real-time water distribution & management process
 To perform calculations based on sensor and manual operator data inputs.
 Store and retrieve all the information of each locations.
 Compile and prepare daily, weekly and monthly reports for water & energy and as directed by
PBC Engineer.
Page 387 of 432

 Provide mimic / graphic display to indicate water supply and distribution system through
extensive graphics support, which also reduces the learning curve of an average operator. All
the data logged at central server shall be analysed through representation of this data in
various meaningful user defined graphs, trends and customized analytical requirements of the
system.
All the required field instruments to measure flow, level and pressure, residual chlorine shall be
provided, calibrated, tested and installed. The signals from the field instruments both existing and
newly proposed instrumentation shall be wired to the PLCs with necessary programming etc.
Complete for further communication and data integration with Central SCADA Server software.
The system shall be open system architecture utilizing standard operating and communication
systems like GPRS. The system supplier shall provide documentation of successful field performance
of the proposed system, including hardware and software applications. Unproven or proprietary
systems shall not be acceptable.
The SCADA System project Plan
The Operator is expected to personally visit, inspect and collect all the required field details
personally and include in the scope of work all the components that may be required to make
the system fully operational.
It shall provide an overview of the proposed system including systems architecture, diagrams, the
approach to work, the proposed work schedule (Bar chart) indicating milestones and potential
meetings, project personnel while submitting the System Improvement Plan (SIP) for approval of
Engineer. It shall also include the project timelines for implementation of proposed central SCADA
system and monitoring system with details of schedules which shall illustrate all major project
milestones including the following:
1. Schedule for all subsequent project submittals.
2. Tentative dates for all project meetings.
3. Schedule of manufacture and staging of all instrumentation and control system

equipment.
4. Schedule for Factory Acceptance Test.
5. Schedule for shipment of all instruments and control system equipment all peripheral
devices.
6. Schedule for equipment start up.
7. Schedule Field Acceptance Test.
8. Schedule for all Training.
The Operator should take note of the importance of this obligation and perform assessment of the
system and objectives envisaged under this project.
Operator shall be responsible to provide the following;
a) Layout drawings for each piece of equipment fabricated or assembled by the Operator, showing
the position of each component with required clearance where applicable, and with overall
dimensions.
Page 388 of 432

b) Wiring diagrams indicating each component of the system and all wiring and cabling thereto,
showing manufacturers, types, duties, ranges and nomenclature, referencing the P&I diagram
where applicable, with inputs, output, cable wiring and terminal identifications clearly marked.
c) PLC IO instrumentation drawings, cable along with sizings and cable layout trenches as per site
condition.
d) Communication details / protocol details for all communicating instruments viz. PLC, GPRS
telemetry, SCADA, etc. shall be provided.
e) Mimic video displays in the form of hard copies or photographs which are clearly legible and are
notated to indicate dynamic data and control pick points where applicable.
f) Control video displays in the form of hard copies or photographs which are clearly legible and are
notated to indicate dynamic data and control pick points.
g) Complete input and output list giving type, circuit number, tag name, short description, outstation,
database reference, associated field device, range (if applicable), critical/non-critical alarm status
and the like.
h) Description of quality control methods and approvals.
i) Calibration certificates for all the instruments along with test procedures.
j) Detailed works and acceptance test procedures.
k) Programme for manufacture, delivery, installation and commissioning.
l) Appendices, as necessary, to include manufacturer’s literature for each item of equipment

supplied.
m) Operation and maintenance manuals detailing the following:
 General description and operating principles;
 Technical description of the equipment – manufacturer’s standard brochures only being

acceptable if the particular item of equipment described is clearly designated, adequate
information is supplied, and irrelevant information is deleted or otherwise delineated;
 Complete operating instructions defining the sequence of operation, including flow charts;
 Procedures for dismantling, cleaning, servicing, replacing parts and reassembling, including
recommended clearance and tolerance;
 Details of all instrument and equipment settings as applicable to this contract;
 Maintenance and lubrication schedules;
 Fault diagnosis procedure;
 Dated and priced list of significant spare parts and special tools, including identification
numbers and sources of supply;
 Simplified arrangement drawings showing all components of the equipment.
n) General operating manual comprising the following:
 General description and operating principles;
Page 389 of 432

Operating instructions for normal procedures in a step-by-step format including control operations,
requirements for display or printing of data, performance monitoring, response to alarms or failures,
changing of operational parameters, and manual data entry.
Equipment’s / Instrumentation/ Software, SCADA etc. Shall be provided as per Approved Make
specified at Annexure-1 of this document
 SCADA PC Consol
The local SCADA System shall be located in the control room to be set up by Operator within
project area or location specified by Engineer. The system shall have all the facilities such as
communication ports and modules for interfacing, data recording and display with the Central
Monitoring System at control room of proposed SCADA & Monitoring System. Operator shall
provide all the required furniture for the PCs & system with air-conditioning unit.
SCADA Pc configuration:- Reputed make Industrial grade PC with latest i5 series, 3 GHz or
above, 4 MB L@ cache, 8GB RAM, 1000 GB HDD, 10/100 Ethernet, Keyboard, optical Mouse,
1.44 MB FDD, CD/DVD ROM, DVD writer, Windows latest operating software with commercial
grade LED monitor not less than 50” etc. and all required accessories. The Operator shall supply
and install all necessary cables, and connectors, UPS (Power supply backup) etc.
 SCADA Server & Software’s
The Operator shall supply all programming (PLCs) and SCADA software’s necessary to provide a
fully debugged water distribution management system (WDMS) and control operation of valves
actuators. SCADA System shall communicate with field PLC through GPRS for data and
information. The software required shall consist of those programs necessary for the system to
efficiently perform the functions specified herein, plus enable convenient and efficient preparation
of new programs. The system shall be capable of operating in a foreground/background mode.
The Operator shall assume complete responsibility for the successful operation of all software
and application programs provided as part of the system. All programs can be completely
debugged and operable prior to delivery of the system. The SJPNL shall not be required to
expend any programming effort in order to achieve a fully operational system.
Operating system, database software, monitoring & display software, water distribution planning
software etc. and all other required peripherals shall be provided under this contract for achieving
required functionality of the SCADA system.
The central processor shall be provided with self-test diagnostic routines, which are automatically
executed every time the processor is powered up or the bootstrap routine is initiated. The
Operator shall supply and install all necessary cables and connectors etc.
It is under the scope of this contract that the Operator shall provide the web enabled facility/ cloud
server facility for server data of whole Central monitoring System including internet facility and
necessary communications. SJPNL users can be able to access this data with user name and
password facility. Operator shall maintain the website through entire operation & maintenance
period and store the data up to the complete contract period.
 SCADA Integration
The new SCADA software shall be compatible to connect with the existing SCADA system to
retrieve the relevant data of the existing system. The required hardware/ software/ interfacing
Page 390 of 432

devices/cabling/licenses required for establishing a seamless channel for communication shall be

in the scope of the bidder.
The bidder is required to understand the existing SCADA of SJPNL at the time of bidding and will
understand the integration requirements.
 End User Interface
There shall be three levels of End user Interface
i) Central Monitoring Station

The Central Monitoring Station shall have the following main components
1. Screens to display the layout schematic of the system as per actual configuration on the
field
2. Online and historical trends plotted with respect to benchmark graphs. The benchmarks
are to be arrived at using practical data over a reasonable period of time
3. Settings screen for important parameters like timing, pressure and flow, residual chlorine
User login and authentication screens
4. Dashboards of important KPIs as specified by the PBC Engineer
5. Bar graphs as per PBC Engineer to be plotted against Benchmark levels
ii) Cloud based web Pages
1. Important Data to be uploaded to the cloud using state of the art protocols like IOT drivers etc.
and viewed using Http protocol. Any software/hardware/drivers required for the same shall be
provided by Operator
2. This shall be only in view mode and no changes shall be possible in this method
3. It should be possible to add a link to these webpages on the SJPNL website. The link to be
added by the customer using the services of the service provider/agency maintaining the
website of SJPNL
iii) Apps
1. Apps for IOS and android devices to be developed by the Operator
2. Apps to be downloadable by users/citizens if required
3. Screens of the apps to be developed as per PBC Engineer
4. No Changes to be possible using the apps.
Item No. 2 to 9:- INSTRUMENTATION
Particulars are as mentioned in respective items under INSTRUMENTATION shall also

complying the following specifications
Instrumentation and control for the plant shall include the following:
a) Instrumentation:
Supplying, Installing, commissioning & testing of Ultrasonic Raddar type level transmitter CE marked
with following technical parameters at Raw Water Pump House and Interfacing with PLC panel
including mounting arrangement.
Output-4-20 mA
Power supply - 24V DC ext.
Display - 4" LED
Range- 0 to 15 mtrs
Page 391 of 432

Accuracy - +/- 0.25% of Full Scale or better Enclosure- IP 67

Mounting - On PLC panel s:.
b) Turbidity analyser
Supply, Installation, commissioning, testing of Turbidity Anayser as per ISO 7027 scattering light
method at A.F. and Interfacing with PLC panel. Turbidity analyser shall comprises of 3 components
i.e. sensors, signal distributor and transmitter with indicator. with 2 Outputs, 1 to PLC & another to
Local Display with mounting arrangement.
Overall Range : 0 ‐ 2000 NTU
Accuracy : +/‐ 0.02 NTU
Supply Voltage : 230 V ac
Output : 4‐20 mA:.
c) pH analyser
Supply, Installation, Testing of pH analyser as per IUPAC ( International Union for Pure & Applied
Chemistry)at A.F. and Interfacing with PLC panel including mounting arrangement.
Range : 0 -14 ,
pH Accuracy : Better than 0.1% of full scale ,
Supply Voltage : 24V dc,
Output : 4 - 20 mA
As per IEC 61000-6-2 & IEC 61000-6-3 .
d) Full-Bore Electromagnetic Flow Meter:
Supply, install and commission Electromagnetic Flow Meter (EMF) As Per ISO 4064, for Raw/Pure
water with accuracy +/-0.5% of measured value & protection as per given specifications for size 100
mm-1000mm including sensor, transmitter surge arrestor, cable suitable size for 25 mtrs built in GSM
( with SJPNL and its charges, valid for 36 months) including the pipe cutting, leveling and installation
of flow meter in the pipelines with necessary tool tackles, cranes including 36 months guarantee etc
complete, as may be required at site & based on technical specifications t:
e) Pressure transmitter CE marked with following technical parameters at Raw Water Pump
House and Interfacing with PLC panel including Mounting arrangement.
Output 4-20 mA
Power supply - 24V DC ext.
Display - 4" LED
Accuracy - +/- 0.1 % of full scale or better
Enclosure- IP 67:
f) Power analyzer :
Supplying, Installing, commissioning & testing of Power Analyser interfacing to PLC Panel
with modbus communications port, as per IEC 62053 and in the prescribed format
including mounting arrangement :
g) Temperature Gauge:
Supply, delivery, installation, testing, training and commissioning of Temperature Gauge to
measure temperature of motors at pump house / BPS :
h) RPM meter:
Page 392 of 432

Supply, delivery, installation, testing, training and commissioning of RPM measuring instruments
consisting of transducers, transmitters, sensors, converters, cables, structure required for mounting
the transducer viz: chambers, platforms, railings etc and all required installation hardware complete
and as directed by Engineer-in -charge
Design Requirements:
Philosophy of Instrumentation and control is that the system is for remote as well as local
semiautomatic and manual operation of Raw Water Pumping Station. In the event of failure of the
semiautomatic controls or by operator choice it shall be possible to revert to manual operation of each
item of plant independent of PLC functions.
AUTOMATION & LOCAL SCADA
Particulars are as mentioned in respective items under Automation & Local SCADA shall also
complying the following specifications Programmable Logic Controllers:
Codes and Standards:
The design material, construction features, manufacture, inspection and testing of Programmable
Logic Controllers (PLC) shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety
codes. The PLC shall comply with the latest applicable standards and codes. If any such standards
are not applicable then the same shall comply with the available recommendations of professional
institutes like NEMA, IEC, ANSI, ISA, IEEE, DIN and VDE
I. Design and Construction Requirements

a) This shall comprise of programmable systems based on operational logic for safe and automatic
operation of Raw Water Intake Pump House, Raw Water Pumping Station (RWPS) of specified
parameters. PLC shall be provided as a stand alone controller to perform combinational and
sequential logic functions, status monitoring and reporting functions with counter and timer
facilities, for each station.
b) PLC shall comprise of necessary processors, Input /Output (I/O) modules, communication
interface modules and man-machine interface required to perform the desired functions.
c) PLC shall have the following attributes as a stand alone controller:
i) It shall carry out sequential start/stop logic implementation for operation of the filters.
ii) It shall carry out computation and interfacing for data acquisition, data storage and
retrieval.
iii) It shall accept downloaded program from a programmer.
iv) It shall have different functional modules to perform the desired functions.
v) It shall scan the inputs in time cycles and update the status of inputs/outputs.
vi) To avoid spurious output because of output module failure, all commands shall be
associated with release signals. Release signals shall include information on healthiness
of the hardware, software and power supply modules.
vii) It shall have relays, counter/timer functions, internal registers/ flags, watch dog timer,
set/reset facilities, up-down counter etc.
viii) It shall have provision for spare input and output modules.
Page 393 of 432

d) The PLC system shall be expandable and shall be modular in construction so as to carry out the
future expansion without any hardware modifications.
e) The PLCs shall have analog and digital signal monitoring capability for checking the healthiness
of the signals. In case of detection of any unhealthy signal "PLC trouble" alarm shall be
generated. In case of failure of a PLC, the status of all the outputs of the PLC shall be stay put.
f) PLC shall be 32 bit microprocessor based with state of the art technology. System components
shall be carefully chosen so that the reliability of the PLC shall be high. PLC shall use open
standard bus protocols and structures for all communication within and outside the system.
g) In case of system failure or power supply failure all the outputs shall attain pre-determined fail
safe condition. Spurious signals shall not cause equipment operation.
h) The PLC used shall have a proven record in the type of application concerned and in the
prevailing environmental conditions.
i) It shall be possible to perform the simulation functions and testing the program by changing the
status of contacts and monitoring the output.
j) The PLC system shall support ‘hot swapping’ of I/O modules i.e., removal and insertion of I/O
modules under power on condition.
k) The design of system configuration and development of PLC software shall be undertaken by the
PLC manufacturer or System Integrator authorized by the PLC manufacturer.
Memory Unit:
a) Memory unit shall comprise of highly reliable memory chips which are industry standard, proven
design with fast random access and suitable for operation in process environments. Main memory
shall be modular and facility shall be provided for up gradation and expansion of memory to meet
future demands.
b) Sufficient program memory and data memory space shall be provided. At least 50% extra
memory space shall be provided over the actual requirements. System initialization and
application software shall be stored in EEPROM or EPROM with necessary hardware. Running
data shall be stored in a RAM with internal battery back-up. The battery back-up provided shall
last for at least one month with life of battery a minimum of 3 years. Appropriate programs for
application software modification shall be provided.
Input / Output Modules:

a) Standard rack mounted I/O modules with plug-in cards shall be provided. Field wiring shall be
terminated in screwed terminal blocks and interconnected to the processor I/O system with pre-
fabricated cables and plug in card type connectors.
b) 20% extra I/Os of installed capacity for each type shall be provided as spares and shall be wired
to the terminal block of the control panel. Provision shall be made for future expansion of extra I/O
modules of the installed capacity.
c) Some of the common features of the I/O modules shall be as follows:
i. All inputs shall be terminated with input protective network and necessary isolating
barriers.
ii. Filters for noise rejection.
Page 394 of 432

iii. Provision for isolation of faulty channels.
iv. Input /output status shall be indicated by LEDs.
v. Test points and fault indication LEDs shall be provided to carry out module testing.
vi. Surge withstand facility as per IEEE standards.
vii. All the modules shall be of addressable type.
viii. Protection for continuous overload upto 20% of all input ranges.
ix. All outputs shall be provided with fuse protection and fuse failure detection. The fuses
may be mounted externally from the output module.
x. The I/O modules shall have diagnostic features i.e., in case of failure of any I/O
channel an alarm "PLC trouble" shall be generated automatically.
xi. Internal battery backup.
d) Analog input modules
They shall consist of an input isolation unit, signal conditioning unit and an analog to digital
converter (ADC). In addition, the following features shall be provided:
i. Cross talk attenuation.
ii. Provision for monitoring of the ADC for overflow detection.
iii. Gain amplifier with high common mode rejection ratio.
iv. Accuracy for analog signals shall be minimum + 0.5%.
v. Screwed terminals with fuse and LED for indication of ‘fuse blown’ shall be provided for each
analog input.
e) Digital input modules
The following design features shall be provided.
i. Contact bounce protection.
ii. Choice of type of contacts.
iii. Screwed terminals with fuse and LED for indication of ‘fuse blown’ shall be provided for each
digital input.
f) Digital output modules
The digital output module shall provide contact closure output by driving relays. The features to
be provided are as follows:
i. Contact bounce protection.
ii. Relay output to operate pump motors and motorized valve actuators.
iii. Fail safe position in case of output module failure and fault indication.
The digital input and digital output modules shall not have more than 16 channels in each module.
The analog input modules shall not have more than 8 channels in each module.
Default Values:
Page 395 of 432

Every operator selectable parameter shall be provided with a default value held in EPROM or
EEPROM in the relevant PLC.
The default value shall be used if no other value has been entered through the local SCADA system
or if the value entered through the local SCADA system has been lost. The default values shall be
made available for interrogation by the local SCADA system at all times.
Sensible and logical default values shall be inserted prior to the start of system tests. The default
values at the time of handing over the plant shall be those found operationally suitable during
commissioning.
The PLCs shall make available for interrogation by the local SCADA for bits corresponding to the
following PLC faults:
(a) failure of PLC as indicated by the PLC watchdog relay;
(b) failure of each I/O card;
(c) failure of communication link
(d) status of 24 V DC power supply for I&C system.
Software
The on line real time operating system supplied shall be proven for similar application and shall be
able to support all the equipment/peripherals.
PLC programming shall be carried using latest available industrial standard formats for logic. The PLC
programming shall be prepared using the PLC manufacturers recommended windows based PLC
coding and documentation software. The PLC code shall be structured in the manner of the best
industry standard and have comprehensive subroutine and rung annotation. Ladder program will be
preferred.
The PLC shall be commissioned using RAM memory storage modules which shall be replaced with
an Erasable read only memory (EPROM) or electrically erasable read only memory (EEPROM) when
testing is complete.
PC based Local SCADA System.
A PC based local SCADA system shall be provided Raw Water Intake Pump House, Raw Water
Pumping Station (RWPS). The local SCADA system shall be located in the Raw Water Pumping
Station (RWPS),the local SCADA system shall have all facilities such as communication ports and
modules for interfacing with the central SCADA system.
Engineering Station cum Operator Station
The engineering station cum operation station shall consist of branded personal computer. The
Control room shall consist of following.
Supply, delivery, erection, installation, testing, training and commissioning of PCs, Software’s,
Keyboards, Printers etc. including all associated software’s like Operating system, database software,
application software, resource planning, WDM software etc.& its all accessories as per the General
Specifications described in Section 4: Technical Specifications for telemetry / SCADA of this
document. Minimum configuration for 5 nos. PCs are :- Reputed make PC with P4 (Dual Core), 3 GHz
or above, 1MB L2 cache, 4GB RAM, 880 GB HDD, 10/100 Ethernet, Keyboard, Mouse, 1.44MB FDD,
CDROM, Windows latest software inclusive of license with not less than 42" commercial grade
Page 396 of 432

monitor (LCD) along with all networking components to connect with server and other PCs. Software’s
Consisting of Windows based MMI Software inclusive of license to provide dynamic graphics, process
mimics, real time & historical trending, group displays, faceplate displays, alarm management and
reports and all mounting structures viz, furniture’s, chambers, platforms, railings, cables etc.
Programming Software
(a) The programming software shall help in maximizing performance, saving on project development
time and improve productivity.
(b) The programming software shall be able to operate on Windows- XP, or Windows-NT operating
system.
(c) The programming software shall have an online editing feature which is used to modify the
application program while the process is still operating.
(d) Features like drop and drag editing to copy instructions or part of a program within a project or
across projects to save project development time.
(e) Make system backup copies while the system is online
(f) Upload and down load programs to the PLC
Human Machine Interface (HMI) Software
(a) The HMI shall be designed for use in Microsoft Windows NT/Windows XP and shall use OLE,
DDE, OPC and Active X technologies for optimal performance and integration with other software
systems.
(b) The HMI shall have several Methods for collecting data from programmable controllers. One
method shall rely on OPC servers. And still another shall use a C-API interface through direct
device tags.
(c) The tag database shall be organized in a hierarchy, each level represented by a folder that can be
expanded or collapsed.
(d) The HMI shall have the ability for the current value of a tag to be updated from the device it is
connected to and stored in RAM so it is immediately accessible to all parts of the HMI.
(e) The tag database shall provide the ability to generate tag names of up to 40 characters long.
(f) The HMI shall have the ability to create a tag whose value is the result of an expression. The
expression can be made up of mathematical operations, tag values, if-then-else logic and other
special functions. The current value of the derived tag shall be stored in an analog, digital or string
tag in a value table.
(g) The HMI shall provide a Macro capacity that will execute system commands, user defined
commands and other macros.
(h) The alarm system shall have the ability to monitor any analog or digital tag for alarms, up to a
maximum of 10,000 tags.
(i) The alarm system shall have the ability to define up to eight different severity classes to visually
and audibly distinguish alarms.
Page 397 of 432

(j) The alarm system shall have the ability to use system default messages or create unique
message to describe an alarm log message to a file to a printer or to both suppress alarms for
maintenance and tuning purposes and set up global alarm monitoring.
(k) The alarm system shall provide a means of displaying up to 1000 tags that are in alarm. This
alarm summary display shall be fully configurable.
(l) The alarm system shall have the ability to create alarm log files periodically, at specified times
and on event. This alarm log system shall have the ability to automatically purge old files after a
specified time.
(m) The HMI shall have the ability to trigger actions based on an event that has an expression applied
to it. An expression is an equation containing tag values, mathematical operations, if-then-else
logic, or other functions. An action shall have the ability to produce a variety of functions including,
but not limited to, initiating a snapshot of tag values, displaying an error screen and changing a
tag value.
(n) The HMI shall have the ability to allow certain users or groups of users to access only certain
parts of the system. The security shall be based on a series of codes. Each code shall allow the
users, or groups of users, with security privileges for that code to access the assigned
combinations of security codes allowing for each user to access a different set of features.
(o) The security system shall assign each person a user account with a login name password and
any desired macros. The HMI shall have a minimum of 17 different security codes.
(p) The HMI shall provide a graphics display editor for creating displays using graphic objects. The
graphics display editor shall have the ability to drag and drop objects from a pre-configured
graphics library, paste objects that are copied to the clipboard from another Windows application,
and insert objects created by another windows application using OLE. The graphic display editor
shall allow the user to create libraries of graphic objects.
(q) The graphic display editor shall have the ability to attach as a minimum the following control to
objects: blinking colors, visibility, rotation, horizontal and vertical movement resizing (width and
height) fill and touch.
Additional Requirements
The HMI package shall be able to specifically provide the following Features
Display status of water pumps in a graphical and tabular format (i.e. running, stopped, fault etc)
Annunciator alarms associated with the area of the plant concerned including details of the time the
alarm occurred
The HMI package shall be able to provide facilities for the operator station
Adjust process set points
Select process modes
Acknowledge alarms
View a journal of unacknowledged alarms
View a journal of the last 200 alarms acknowledged and unacknowledged.
Page 398 of 432

Display process set points
Provide real time and historic trending of local analogue values
Provide data archiving of all local analogue values.
Prepare daily and weekly reports (providing details of daily and weekly throughputs against numbers
of pump running hours and power usage)
Display a total running hour’s log of local transmission pump drives, etc.
Any additional features required to assist in the effective and efficient operation of the Raw water
Pumping station.
Power monitoring using various analogue / digital inputs provided from the HT switchgear.
Graphic screens shall be provided as follows however not limited to this:
1. Main and subsystem menus
2. Raw water Pumping station overview (i.e. in flow, out flow, levels, power supply status, pH,
turbidity)
3. Overview of control system
4. Screens to permit viewing of process set points.
The screens shall display data commensurate with their size and the area of and number of items
covered. In addition to the specific screen requirements stated above, any additional screens to
ensure comprehensive coverage of the Works needs to be provided.
A comprehensive screen navigation system shall be provided giving access to all screens via a
system of minus and short cuts (i.e. it shall be possible to follow the process from one screen to
another by clicking the mouse cursor on screen ‘hotspots’ to effect the move from one screen to
another).
The system shall be capable of storing real time data for one day and historic data for 60 days.
The sample rates for archiving shall be the same as for trending. The archives shall be stored in daily
files. The system shall provide capacity to store archives for 60 days. A warning alarm shall be
provided to the operator to advise that archiving to disk should take place or archiving to the MMI and
the archived data viewed using the trend facility.
The HMI shall have the ability to record specific tag values under certain conditions several models
shall define these conditions. This data that is collected shall be stored in dbf (d Base IV) format for
displaying in trends, archiving for future processing or analysis, and/or using with third-party software
such as FoxPro, Crystal Reports, and Microsoft Excel, for display or analysis. It shall be possible to
log historical data directly to an ODBC compliant database
The Operator shall provide a disc with the MMI in order to download archive data or to upload
previously stored archive data onto electronic storage media.
Printers
Two types of printers shall be supplied for reports, alarms and events as detailed below. It shall be
possible to configure any text output from the control station to either of these printers.
Page 399 of 432

It shall be possible to add additional printers if required. Additional printers shall be capable of being
assigned the functions of alarm/event logging, or report printing.
Alarm / Event printers, shall offer at a minimum of 100 characters per second, upper and lower case
ASCII character set with true descenders, a minimum of 132 characters per line, and a self-test facility
capable of printing automatically the entire character set.
The minimum size of printer buffers shall be 4 K characters.
Each printer type shall connect to the system using the standard interfaces such as RS 232/Ethernet
with both RTS/CTS control signal and XON/XOFF data transfer control methods supported.
All printer types shall be of a low noise type.
Printer’s types shall be provided with all necessary cables and connectors.
Alarm / Event Printer
The Alarm / Event printer shall be a dot matrix printer with a minimum of four colors available. Alarms
shall be high lighted by coloured printing (i.e. plant alarms red/system alarm orange/ return to normal
green) white events and alarm acceptance shall be printed in black. This printer shall be located in the
control room in a self-contained printer stand. The Operator shall supply and install all necessary
cables and connectors etc.
Report Colour Printer
The report colour printer shall be an A4 printer capable of producing high quality text and graphical
reports for plant and management proposed and full colour high quality prints of screen display
mimics trends etc. In text mode the printer shall be capable of upto 7 pages per minute for text and
one minute per page for graphics. The resolution shall be 600 by 600 dpi for colour and 600 by 600
dpi for black as a minimum. The Operator shall supply and install necessary cables, and connectors
etc.
Control Modes
The control modes of equipment / processes shall be as described below.
Semi Auto Control Mode
(A) Raw water pumps: These shall be operated on the basis of discharge valve, availability of pump,
desired levels in sump.
Manual control mode from SCADA system.
In this mode water pumps and all valve operations shall be carried out from the local PC based
SCADA system by the SCADA system operator. The control commands will be routed through the
PLC.
Similarly all the operations can be carried out through ICP manually.
Local control mode
In the ‘Local’ mode the water pumps shall be carried out through push buttons provided either on local
panel or console near to the equipment. These operations shall be independent of PLC function.
J. House Service connection Technical Specification

Item No. 1:- G.I. Pipes Complete with G.I. Fittings
Page 400 of 432

Specification :‐ Pipes‐Galvanized Iron
The pipes (tubes) shall be galvanized mild steel hot finished seamless (HFS) or welded (ERW) HRIW
or HFW screwed and socketed conforming to the requirements of IS 1239-2000 Part‐I for medium
grade. They shall be of the diameter (nominal bore) specified in the description of the item, the
sockets shall be designated by the respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended.
Galvanizing shall conform to IS 4736 : The zinc coating shall be uniform adherent, reasonably smooth
and free from such imperfections as flux, ash and dross inclusions, bare batches, black spots,
pimples, lumping runs, rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The pipes and sockets shall be
cleanly finished, well galvanized in and out and free from cracks, surface flaws laminations and other
defects. All screw threads shall be clean and well cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with
the axis of the tube.
All screwed tubes and sockets shall have pipe threads conforming to the requirements of IS Screwed
tubes shall have taper threads while the sockets shall have parallel threads.
All tubes shall withstand a test pressure of 50 Kg/sq.cm without showing defects of any kind. Fittings:
The fittings shall be of mild steel tubular or wrought steel fittings conforming to IS1239 (Part‐2) or as
specified. The fittings shall be designated by the respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they
are intended.
Pipe shall be supplied from the SJPNL approved list of the firms after third party inspection by
approved by SJPNL inspection charges shall be borne by the Operator.
 Brass Ferrules
The Brass ferrules for connection with C.I. main shall generally conform to IS 2692. It shall be of non
ferrous materials with a C.I. bell mouth cover and shall be of nominal bore as specified. The ferrule
shall be fitted with a screw and plug or valve capable of completely shutting off the water supply to the
communication pipe, if and when required.
Fixing Ferrules
For fixing brass ferrule the empty main shall be drilled and tapped at 45 degree to the vertical and the
ferrule screwed in. The brass ferrule must be so fitted that no portion of the shank shall be left
projecting within the main into which it is fitted.
Measurements
Ferrule shall be enumerated.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in fixing the brass ferrule.
 Ball Valve (Brass)
The ball valve shall be of Brass or Gunmetal as specified conforming to IS 1703 (Fig. 18.1). The ball
valve shall be of following two classes:—
(a) High Pressure: High pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation ‘HP’ and are
designed for use on mains having pressure of 0.175 MPa or above.
Page 401 of 432

(b) Low Pressure: Low Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation ‘LP’ and are designed
for use on mains having a pressure up to. 0.175 MPa.
The ball valves shall be of following nominal sizes 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm and 50
mm. The nominal size shall correspond with the nominal bore of the inlet shanks. Polyethylene floats
shall conform to IS 9762.
 Painting with Synthetic Enamel Paint
Synthetic Enamel Paint (conforming to IS 2933) of approved brand and manufacture and of the
required colour shall be used for the top coat and an undercoat of ordinary Paint of shade to match
the top coat as recommended by the same manufacturer as far the top coat shall be used.
Painting on New Surface
Preparation of surface shall be as specified as the case may be.
Application : The number of coats including the undercoat shall be as stipulated in the item.
(a) Under Coat : One coat of the specified ordinary Paint of shade suited to the shade of the top coat,
shall be applied and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade of wet
abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and all loose particles
dusted off.
(b) Top Coat : Top coats of synthetic enamel Paint of desired shade shall be applied after the
undercoat is thoroughly dry. Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found necessary to ensure
properly uniform glossy surface.
Other details shall be as specified as far as they are applicable.
 Fixing Surface Box (Masonry Chamber)
The C.I. surface box shall be fixed on the top of masonry chamber in plain or reinforced cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as the case
may be.
Measurements
Masonry chambers shall be enumerated under the relevant items.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above,
except the excavation in saturated soil, soft or decomposed and hard rock if met with. The difference
of cost, between ordinary soil and saturated soil or soft or decomposed or hard rock as the case may
be, shall be paid for separately.
Item No. 2:- Providing and Installing Domestic Customer Fully AMR Meters
Providing, installing and giving satisfactory field testing AMR WATER METER
Specifications
Meter shall be manufactured as per ISO 4064 standards & have European Economic Council (EEC)
or International Organization of Legal Metrology (OIML)/MID pattern approvals & shall bear EEC
marking on dial of water meter for each size.
1. The water meters of domestic sizes shall be equipped with RF based AMR technology, directly
Page 402 of 432

fitted on the water meter & wireless, , multi-jet, inferential type, dry dial, MID approved water
meters .
2. Water meters of each size should have been duly tested and passed as per the relevant
standards and specifications from Fluid Control Research Institute (FCRI) Kerala for
performance test supported with test certificate.
Applicable Standards:
Water meter straight reading means – 15mm size domestic water meters, inferential type, multi jet,
magnetically coupled, having dry dial, Class ’B’ conforming to IS-779: 1994 with up to date
amendments or ISO 4064:1993 standard with EEC/OIML/MID certification mark shall be with
protection class of IP-68.
The meters shall be supplied complete with G I fittings, brass nuts and brass nipples. Strainer &
sealing shall be provided as per relevant IS provision.
Material of construction:
a) The manufacturer shall provide specific details of materials used for various parts of the meter
which must meet the specifications for the material of construction of the individual parts of the
meters as per IS 779:1994 (latest amendments) or ISO 4064: 1993.
b) The body of the meter shall be of either Brass or Bronze. The firm shall specifically mention in
the offer, the metal used in manufacturing. Material that come in contact with the water supply
shall withstand 2 ppm (parts per million) of chlorine residual in the water supply and shall be
resistant to corrosion.
c) The water meter and accessories shall be manufactured from materials of adequate strength
and durability. The materials, which come in contact with the potable water, shall not create a
toxic hazard, shall not support microbial growth, and shall not give rise to unpleasant taste or
discoloration in the water supply. However, the spindle and bearings inside the hydraulic
chamber shall be made of polished stainless steel with hard metal tip/ sapphire.
d) The internal pressure cup shall be made of low-ferrous brass not exceeding 0.02% Fe contents /
Engineering plastic. Furthermore the internal pressure cup should overlap the meter body. The
lower case of the meter shall be painted with thermal painting externally. The painting materials
should be safe for human uses and not affect human health (Health certificates should be
included in the bidding documents). The painting colour shall be decided in consultation with the
department after order of award.
e) Variation in weight of the meter will be permissible to ± 5% of the weight indicated by the bidder
in his technical bid.
f) Each meter should be supplied in separate individual box with its accessories and test
certificates and guarantee card for free repair/ replacement for duration of 5 years. The no. of
individual boxes of meters shall not exceed 30 nos in each cartoon.
g) Supply shall be made strictly as per the sample meters including the weight as approved by the
Board after testing at National Physical Laboratory or at Fluid Control Research Institute, Kerala.
h) Minimum three meters shall be sent for testing at FCRI from each batch of supplied
meters before installation at site
Page 403 of 432

Markings on the Body of the Meter:
(a) Marking on dial/ cap.
i. Class “B”
ii. Multijet/ Model
iii. Magnetic Type
iv. As per IS: 779-1994 OR ISO: 4064-1993.
v. ISI OR EEC or MID/OIML Code No.
vi. Make/Brand
vii. Sl. No. / Year of Manufacture.
viii. SJPNL
(b) Embossing/ engraved on meter body.
i. 15 mm
ii. Direction of flow of water on both sides of the body of meter.
The Totalizer and Totalizer Shield :-
The totalizer shall be designed in such a way that if the totalizer protective glass is broken for a
reason or another the totalizer cannot be removed from its place. The totalizer protective cover shall
be made of sturdy glass and shall have a thickness of not less than 5mm and shall pass specified
tests. Sturdy glass is defined as the ability of the counter protection glass to withstand, without
damage, a free fall of a metal ball weighing 27.2 grams from a vertical distance of not less than 70
cm or sturdy Engineering plastic window subject to clear visibility till end of contract period
guaranteed by bidder may be allowed.
Totalizer :-
a) It shall be of straight reading type
b) The totalizer shall register in cubic meter units
c) The totalizer reading should be less than 1KL
d) The totalizer shall consist of a row of minimum five on-line consecutive digits to read at least
99,999 m3.
e) Another three digits or pointers shall register flows in litres and be of a Different colour.
f) The totalizer should be of closed type.
g) The totalizer must be suitable for test on an electronic test bench.
h) Totaliser shall be made of copper CAN having 5mm thickness mineral glass or any other
Suitable material required to maintain IP 68 protection class.
i) Meter will be provided with monolithic seal with copper wire.
AMR SYSTEM
Page 404 of 432

1. The water meters shall have the anti – magnetic properties / immunity, as specified in ISO: 4064
– 2005, when tested with 400 gauss magnet is mandatory. For AMR system resistivity against
application of magnate is not required
2. The remote reading of AMR water meter needs two way communications without affecting
battery life and reading perforations throughout O&M period.
3. The remote readings of AMR water meter should be obtainable by either ‘Walk by’ or ‘Drive by’
methods.
4. The AMR trans-receivers shall be wireless and have IP 68 protection class i.e. no ingress of
water after submerging AMR water meter for 48 hours under 3 meters of water column.
5. The AMR trans-receivers shall be used (RF End units/ Wireless RF transmitter/Receiver) for
communication and remote reading. If the water meter & AMR trans-receivers are independent
units then they must be from the same manufacturer AMR shall be obtainable even under
submerged conditions.
6. Remote readings of different water meters shall be obtained with single command. The remote
readings shall have instant reading facility. The remote readings and dial readings of water
meters shall match at all the times.
7. All A. M. R. readings shall show the date and time of the reading recorded.
8. The AMR system shall have facility to detect the reverse flow in water meters readings on the
Hand Held Device (HHU) i.e. AMR reading device and on computer screen.
9. The AMR system shall have the facility to record the abnormalities like application of very high
consumptions, water leakages etc. along with necessary alarms in HHU and in software
10. The battery life of AMR water meter shall not be less than 7 (seven) years from successful
installation of said AMR water meter along with its AMR system, the battery life shall be
calculated by considering the monthly remote reading. During remote reading the battery life of
AMR water meter shall be displayed / indicated on HHU.
11. If the AMR communication frequency is using / operating on paid frequency band, then the AMR
water meter manufacturer has to produce the valid copy of license issued by Govt. of India /
Department, of Telecom (DOT), for using the said operating frequency band. The cost of the
same will be presumed as included in the quoted rates.
12. The technically qualified bidders shall obtain license for using frequency band to conduct the
demo in the area of demonstration. The bidder will have to start the demonstration within 10
days of submission of bids and hence they would be allowed to produce the certificate till such
time.
13. The AMR water meter shall not get affected for its AMR functioning due to High Tension or High
Voltage line concentration.
14. All the time electronic index of the water meter shall match with mechanical index.
15. All water meter shall be fitted with RF based wireless remote transreceivers for AMR reading. It
shall be either inbuilt or directly fitted on the water meter without wires.
16. The water meters fitted with A.M.R. shall have the facility to transmit reading in maximum
submerged condition (as specified for IP-68 compliance) & the remote readings should be
Page 405 of 432

obtained outside the meter chamber, with water meter in submerged condition & lid of the
chamber closed.
17. The manufacturer shall specify the frequency of the AMR operating system & shall possess the
necessary license of said operating frequency, as per norms of Department of
telecommunication, Govt. Of India issued by Government of India (GOI) / Department of
Telecom (DOT). In case, if he claims frequency of the operation in the free band, necessary
documents / clearance from GOI / DOT shall be submitted, along with the offer. However, the
Utility reserves the right for acceptance of offered frequency & Power subjected to the guidelines
issued by DOT / WPC.
18. AMR system should be compatible for up gradation to fixed network if required in future.
Lab Testing:
The lab testing shall include following tests as per ISO:4064:2005 standards . The same will be
conducted at FCRI, Palghat.
i. Accuracy testing of water meters at Qn.
ii. Accuracy testing of water meter at Qn after clamping the magnet on the water meter.
iii. IP 68 testing of water meter& AMR system.
iv. Remote reading of water meter in dry i.e. open air condition.
v. Remote reading of water meter in submerged condition i.e. under water, with under variable
water depth conditions.
vi. Remote reading with different tamper alarms for back flows, magnet and physical damage, etc.
vii. Response time of AMR reading on HHU.
viii. Visual inspection of AMR water meter and its AMR system along with its software.
ix. Real Index test i.e. all the time electronic index of the water meter shall match with mechanical
index.
x. Demonstration of uploading of readings from hand held unit to PC and vice versa.
xi. Life cycle and endurance test.
These tests should be performed in the in‐house laboratory of the meter manufacturer.
The Authority will depute Third Party Inspection Agency to the meter manufacturing facility of the
manufacturer to inspect the meter as per QAP approved by PBC Engineer, inspection charges and
all other charges shall be borne by the Operator.
Item No. 3:- Providing Pressure Reducing Valves
Item Includes:- Providing Valve of approved make from SJPNL.
 DEFINITION
This valve reduces the pressure of the water that goes through it, and is used to obtain a regulated
and constant value at its outlet. It is installed at the water mains (for a bungalow as for a flat). It
protects the whole installation from problems due to excess pressure: noises in the pipes, water
hammer, splashes, premature wear of household electrical appliances and taps. The pressure
reducing valves are completely automatic.
Page 406 of 432

 Pressure Reducing Valve
Specially adapted to water installations in flats and houses, PRECISIO is more convenient, reduces
water circulation noises and guarantees compliance with sound level requirements.
Body and head in DZR brass, corrosion resistant.
Regulation is achieved by harnessing the diaphragm to a disc-yoke assembly.
Seat Stainless Steel.
The screw and nut system allows easy setting adjustment.
Two 1/4" (8x13) side connections for pressure gauge.
Max. inlet pressure : 25 bar.

Adjustable : 1,5 to 5 bar.
Delivered preset at 3 bar.
Max. temperature : 80°C.
Approval : NF EN 1567.
Item No – 4 Making Interconnection
This item, includes cost of all labour required for excavation for this job work in all strata including
dewatering (Also dewatering by Pump if necessary) cutting of existing M.S./C.l./D.I. pipe jointing to the
existing distribution mains of M.S./C.I. by welding method or by any other method i.e. Flanged joint
lead joint or mechanical joint etc. This item also includes labour cost for lowering laying carting of
materials required and refilling the trenches for this job work.
The item includes cost of jointing material i.e. welding or nut bolts rubber packing or pig lead etc.
However the cost of specials required for connection is not included in this item. The same shall be
procured by the operator and it will be paid under the respective items of Price bid.
The permission required from SJPNL for cutting of existing pipe line and making cross connection to
existing one shall be the responsibility of the Operator.
K. Operation and Maintenance of Distribution System/Transmission Main & Pumping Main

& SCADA
Item No-1 Operation & Maintenance Services
Page 407 of 432

Operators shall comply to the O & M services obligations. However, following are the minimum
obligations covered under the scope of Operation and Maintenance of Operator.
1. Maintaining the minimum personnel as specified in contract during the previous month.
2. Compliance with the obligations under the Contract.
3. Providing and maintain continuous pressurised water supply to the respective water districts or
DMA’s specified in the project area
a. Providing water supply to the Consumers at the minimum service levels of PCC without
further deterioration
b. Water Demand Management in DMA’s
c. Emergency water supply
d. Network Operations and Management
e. O & M of assets within Established DMA’s
f. Flow and pressure monitoring
g. Repair of leaks and bursts and valves
h. New Connections as per directives and approval by SJPNL
i. Consumer Services including attending to complaints received through SJPNL and their
resolution
j. O & M of SCADA and monitoring System of project area with web enabled facility
k. O & M of PLCS , Flow Meters, Chlorine Analysers, level, pressure meters
l. Information management and reporting
m. O & M of existing and new instrumentation of project area
n. Consumer services like complaint resolution, water awareness & conservation programmers,
campaign, media co-ordination, and society meetings etc.
Page 408 of 432

SCHEDULE 25: MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Maintenance Requirements
The Operator shall, at all times, operate and maintain the Project in accordance with the provisions of
the Agreement, Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits. In particular, the Operator shall, at all times
during the Transition Period, and the Sustaining Period, conform to the maintenance requirements set
forth in this Schedule 25 (the “Maintenance Requirements”).
The Operator shall repair or rectify any defect or deficiency within the time limit agreed between the
Parties and any failure in this behalf shall constitute a breach of the Agreement. Upon occurrence of
any breach hereunder, the Authority shall be entitled to recover Damages as set forth in Article 6.1.17
of the Agreement, without prejudice to the rights of the Authority under the Agreement, including
Termination thereof.
2. Repair/rectification of defects and deficiencies
The obligations of the Operator in respect of Maintenance Requirements shall be to undertake repair
or rectification in accordance with Good Industry Practice and within the time limit specified by the
Technical Auditor. The Technical Auditor shall specify the permissible limit of deviation or
deterioration with reference to the Technical Specifications and any deviation or deterioration beyond
the permissible limit shall be repaired or rectified by the Operator in accordance with Good Industry
Practice and within the time limit specified by the Technical Auditor.
The Operator shall at all times maintain an adequate inventory of spares and consumables to meet
the Maintenance Requirements.
3. Extension of time limit
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary specified in this Schedule 25, if the nature and extent of any
defect or deficiency justifies more time for its repair or rectification than the time specified herein, the
Operator shall be entitled to additional time in conformity the Good Industry Practice. Such additional
time shall be determined by the Technical Auditor and conveyed to the Operator and the Authority
with reasons thereof.
4. Emergency repairs/ restoration
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Schedule 25, if any defect, deficiency or
deterioration in the Project poses a hazard to safety or risk of damage to property, the Operator shall
promptly take all reasonable measures for eliminating or minimizing such danger.
5. Periodic Inspection by the Operator
The Operator shall, through its engineer, undertake a periodic visual inspection of the Project in
accordance with the O&M Plan and maintain a record thereof in a register to be kept in such form and
manner as the Technical Auditor may specify. Such record shall be kept in safe custody of the
Operator and shall be open to inspection by the Authority and the Technical Auditor at any time during
office hours.
All defects and deficiencies specified in this Schedule 25 shall be repaired and rectified by the
Operator so that the Project conforms to the Maintenance Requirements on the Transfer Date.
Page 409 of 432

SCHEDULE 26: COMMISSIONING OF DMAs AND ACHIEVING 24x7 DMAs
Methodology of Services
A. Distribution Network Improvement (DNI) on DMA basis:

1. The Distribution Network Improvement (DNI) shall be based on DMA basis. The Operator
shall, set up hydraulically isolated District Metered Areas (DMAs) within the Service Area of
each ESR. Each DMA comprising of about 500 to 2000 consumer connections shall be
considered as basic administrative unit for the purpose of sectional commissioning and O & M
purpose. The Operator shall design water supply distribution network on DMA basis to ensure
equitable, continuous, pressurized water supply to the Consumers by using the hydraulic
model and simulating both present (2019) and future (Year 2035) conditions,. Each DMA
preferably have one inflow point and be isolated by installing valves / end plugs. DMA at entry
point will be provided with a bulk flow meter. Each DMA will have atleast five Critical
Measurement Points (CMPs) in each zone (Area in command of one ESR) for continuous
logging of pressure, and the CMPs shall be such that they should be at the highest and
farthest points from the command reservoir. The performance parameters of the Operator
including O& M period shall be assessed on DMA basis. DMA wise monthly reports will be
generated to assess the DMA performance. Monthly meter readings will be taken and will be
linked to the NRW assessment system. SJPNL also may suggest good management
practices. Lessons learnt from other utilities/agencies will also be incorporated for better
management services
B. Methodology for designing of DNI

2. The existing distribution system will not be used in the proposed Distribution Network
Improvement (DNI) plan, as the entire existing distribution network will be replaced with new
one under this contract. Since entire distribution system shall be new; therefore no
measurement of current NRW level is required. Scope of Operator will involve both technical
and consumer orientation with social approach. The consumers shall be taken in confidence
and be informed time to time for the status update. Disconnections of old connections and old
pipelines is very critical. Operator will disconnect old connections and pipelines on
commissioning of new pipelines. It will be verified by project consultant before making
payment in DMA. All the connections shifted from old to new system and new connections
given shall be recorded on GIS based database duly attaching each connection with meter
serial number to respective property with social and contact data of each consumer available
in database. This database shall be of use to understand demand of water and also for
servicing consumers..
3. Works shall be planned and executed to provide continuous pressurised water supply in each
DMA. The Zones/DMAs shall be equipped with the instrumentation for monitoring the
performance of service delivery in the area. The instrumentation capable of transferring the
Page 410 of 432

real time data to the SCADA system shall include the parameters of performance evaluation
of the Operator during the operation, maintenance and service delivery. It shall include the
DMA inlet flow meter, DMA outlet flow meter if any (if the outlet of one DMA forms the inlet for
other), the pressure transducers at critical measurement points. The consumer meter reading
data for a given month of all the consumers within DMA shall be entered in the computer
every month and shall be used in conjunction with the Zone/DMA inlet and outlet meter data
for the month to work out the NRW of the Zone/DMA/complete system. The pressure
readings transmitted by the pressure transducers at critical points in DMA shall not only be
used for the performance monitoring and payment mechanism but also for continuously
improving the model, using it for providing connections to the new consumers duly
understanding its effect on the system' interpreting the possible leakages in the DMA using
the bulk flow meter and consumer meter data and running the model to understand the
implication of the pressure readings.
4. The Operator's approach and methodology towards this work shall be in line with the overall
principles and thinking of the Authority stated above. The SIP for DNI shall be compatible with
these concepts.
C. Methodology for measurement of NRW and real losses during operation services
5. The Operator's methodology shall also spell out how the NRW and real losses will be
measured within his battery limit which starts at designated reservoir and ends at the
consumers in 14 zones. The Authority’s Concept for this is described below and the
Operator's methodology shall be generally in tune with it with further better modification.
6. The International Water Association (IWA) matrix method for the assessment of water loss at
different stages shall be followed. A typical IWA water balance matrix is given below:
Billed Water Exported

Billed Billed Metered
Authorized Consumption
Consumption Billed un-metered
Own Water Authorized Revenue
Consumption
Source Export Consumption Water
Unbilled Metered
Unbilled
Consumption
Authorized
Unbilled Un-metered
Consumption
Corrected Consumption
System Unauthorized
Input Consumption
Apparent
Volume Customer Metering Non
Losses
Inaccuracies and Data
Handling Errors Non-
Water Water Water Revenue
Leakage on Transmission
Imported Supply Losses Water
and/or Distribution Mains (NRW)
Leakage and Overflow at
Real Losses
Utility’s Storage Tanks
Leakage on Service
Connection upto point of
Page 411 of 432

Customer metering
Figure 1 - IWA water balance matrix
7. The application of this matrix for the performance based operation payment will be with
control point for input measurement at designated reservoir outlet flow meter feeding to water
supply system and the consumption based on the sum of meter readings of the consumers
which are billed or unbilled. During initial take over period, NRW will be calculated from water
supplied from and measured at ESR/GSR outlet to the connected consumer consumption
based on the sum of meter readings of the consumers which are billed or unbilled.
8. The schematic of this control point measurements and stage wise measurement.
9. For stage wise application water balance between following has to be analyzed:
 WTP and Designated Reservoir
 Designated Reservoir and All GSR/ ESRs
 Each ESR/GSR and DMA under it.
Other permutations can be achieved using the flow meters at outlets and the level sensors for
each tank and consumer meters for SR to consumer reach. The data can provide priority
action areas depending on the % and absolute value of NRW in the respective reaches
10. The monitoring is to be started as soon as DMA is commissioned and the Operator will submit
details in key parameters (pressure, bulk supply, consumer readings zone/ DMA wise etc).
The complete water supply system will be controlled and operated on SCADA. The bulk
supply of water at each stage i.e. CWR, GSR/ESR, Zone & DMA will be accessed through
SCADA on specifically designed software. Bulk flow meter reading should registered every
day at fixed time (generally before start of supply in morning). It should be accomplished
through SCADA report generation. Domestic water meter reading at stipulated time in
stipulated periodicity (the periodicity can be kept weekly or as felt fit by the PBC Engineer).
The consumer reading should be manually fed in software evolved for SCADA operation
dovetailed with other SCADA accessed details. The format output for the monitoring should
be evolving in such manner which shall clearly shows key parameters of water supply system
specifically NRW evaluation calculations. As per the assessment of NRW, other interventions
required to control leakages/losses should also be identified which will have to be taken up to
accomplish desired performance parameters specified under the contract.
D. Methodology for commissioning of zone cum DMA

11. The Operator shall give a complete methodology for commissioning of DMAs which shall
include an exhaustive and sequential method with the formats designed to achieve and
monitor:
 The distribution system pipelines in a DMA/ zone hydraulically tested
Page 412 of 432

 Readiness of database of all the properties and consumer registered / unregistered to

be connected to the new system on GIS based map of the DMA with clear indication of
roads.
 Proposal to connect all the consumers to the new system and methodology for pressure
and flow control of each consumer vis-à-vis his registered demand.
 Public awareness programs planned to achieve people's participation in managing

demand by using the continuously available water to their absolute need only and not to
waste, and to communicate importance of metered system and its benefit.
 The water to be taken in SR shall be calculated based on the demand of the population
with ceiling of 135 lpcd in any case. In no case in order to sustain demand of one zone
for continuous water supply, other area shall suffer. A continuous consumer awareness
to spread the demand in different hours of the day to bring it to the use pattern
considered in design shall be tried. The initial teething troubles shall be overcome at the
earliest but not later than 45 days of commissioning of zone/DMA.
 The billing shall be on time without fail for which a detail program shall be prepared. The
first bill on time gives early signal for those who have increased demand just because
water is available continuously.
 A vigilant surveillance to see that no reverse flow occur, no high consumptions go un

noticed shall be done for first some months. The pattern of water flowing out of SR be
critically observed for the entire day at 10 minutes interval for initial months. Unusual
night flows shall be checked by surveillance visits in the night at the time when unusual
high flow is seen on bulk outlet meter.
E. Methodology for Measurement of Performance Standards

12. The Operator shall develop a robust methodology and framework for measurement and
monitoring of Performance Standards stipulated under the contract and proposed as part of
the SIP. The Authority with the assistance of the Authority’s representative or Auditing Body
shall verify the same and upon agreement between the Parties the agreed methodology shall
form the basis for monitoring the performance of the Operator and apply the Non
Performance Adjustments on the eligible Operating Payments in case of failure to meet the
performance standards.
F. Methodology for Site Acquaintance

13. As part of this activity, Operator is required to:
i. Establish contact with all relevant stakeholders SJPNL, Electricity Distribution

Company, Telecommunication companies and the local traffic police and
other government agencies including consultants under the SJPNL,
Page 413 of 432

ii. become familiar with the water supply system, and the applicable standards
and guidelines for water supply design, and with existing assets and current
on-going works in the Service Area. The Operator shall also study the works
being done by SJPNL and other departments being undertaken during the
same period in the same area.
iii. Satisfy himself with the nature and scope of work and the prevailing Site
conditions.
iv. Be familiar with governing Laws and regulations in order to undertake

studies and construction activities under the Contract such as:
a. Environmental and social impact assessments and prevention,

mitigation and monitoring of impacts during construction;
b. Compensation for damages to property or services;
c. Occupational health and safety including workers compensation;
d. Signage for construction works and;
e. The permissions and co-ordination required from the different

agencies
v. The Operator shall review and validate the Detailed Project Report of the
project which will enable him to prepare SIP:
(i) in line with the Detailed Project Report (DPR) approved for funding,
(ii) in compliance to the terms and conditions of the Project, statutory

requirements of Government of India and Government of Himachal
Pradesh and
(iii) in coordination with the on-going and programmed activities of

SJPNL and GoHP as the case may be.
(iv) Any deviations to the document, data provided by SJPNL and

consultation shall be highlighted and got approved as part of the SIP.
vi. In case of any interventions proposed in the SIP, which are not part of the
DPR or those interventions which are part of the DPR but require
improvement from conventional design practices, the Operator shall provide
sufficient explanation and justification as to how implementing such
interventions would influence the achievement of the Performance Standards
stipulated in the document.
vii. In a situation where the Authority does not agree to the interventions
proposed in SIP, there may be mutually agreed revision of the Performance
Standards.
Page 414 of 432

Page 415 of 432

SCHEDULE 27: FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS OF IMIS
Integrated Management Information System (IMIS)

The Operator shall establish, develop and maintain all Integrated Management Information System
(IMIS) related to water Supply & distribution management (WDMS) & CMS system. The IMIS shall be
compatible to integrate with GIS system of SJPNL. It shall have the capabilities for facility
management, inventory management, operational job management, consumer data base and records
and data management as well as all capabilities necessary for safe and efficient management,
operation and maintenance of the Facilities.
Reporting Requirements
The Operator shall prepare and submit for approval, plans and periodic reports on those plans,
progress of Works and Services, performance standards etc., including exceptional reports on
emergencies if any. The reporting requirements shall be as instructed by PBC Engineer / SPJNL time
to time. The Operator shall as part of the baseline system improvement / construction plan, the
Operations and Maintenance Plan and the training plan, develop the required formats for the periodic
reports and also identify any critical reporting requirements in order to enable timely decision making
by the Authority.
The Operator shall prepare and submit for approval a System Improvement plan, Construction Plan
defining and scheduling all instrumentation, automation and SCADA works and proposed system
architecture plan for successful establishment of Central Monitoring System (CMS). The Construction
Plan shall be finalized and approved within 45 days from the handover date of an hydraulic zone in
consultation with SJPNL. The construction plan shall include: procurement and resource planning for
instrumentation, automation & the proposed CMS system along with financial plan.
The Operator shall provide computer hardware and software for SCADA data analysis and reporting
that shall meet the following objectives:
i. Daily and monthly water production, supplied through designated reservoir, OHT /GSR locations
and inlet of DMA shall be generated & provided through e-mail, sms, mobile app, display, web
page etc. to SJPNL
ii. Daily and monthly water balance for each water production, transmission and storage, sub-
system. Each sub-system typically consists of one storage reservoir and DMA, sub DMA.
iii. Hourly and daily water balance of each storage reservoir, presenting inflow, water level
fluctuations.
iv. Daily and monthly water delivery from Designated reservoir to each OHT/GSR level & DMA
v. Hourly pressure logs at various Measuring Points on transmission, OHT/ GSR and Critical points
In DMA shall be provided.
vi. Graphic presentation of all the above.
An integrated reporting package shall be able to generate, print and export reports:
 Triggered by SCADA events
Page 416 of 432

 On user demand like water audit report, energy report, location wise report, instrumentation
downtime report, asset utilization report, maintenance due & maintenance log report etc.
 On timed schedules
Report generation shall use latest technology in database access and be capable of combining data
from multiple databases via ODBC/SQL. This shall include SCADA and non-SCADA databases.
Reports shall be able to be generated in a number of formats including:
 HTML for viewing via Web interface

 PDF format
 CSV format
 MS Office® suite format
Generated reports shall be able to be:

 viewed in Rich Clients and Web Clients
 printed on a local or network printer
 stored on disk file, locally or remotely
 e-mailed to assigned users
The Operator shall prepare and submit for approval a Training Plan, defining all on-the job and class
room training of SJPNL staff to be conducted during the Project. The Training Plan shall be finalized
and approved within 6 months from the Commencement Date.
Annual Plan and Budget (APB). On an annual basis, the Operator will prepare an Annual Plan and
Budget specifying the budget which is expected to be required for construction works and for
operation & maintenance services.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall provide the details of the regular and periodic maintenance
of Works, and shall ensure that at all times during the Operation Service Period, the CMS
infrastructure are maintained in a manner that it complies with the Performance Standards. Such
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include but not be limited to the following:
 Intervals and procedures for the carrying out of inspection of all instrumentation and SCADA
system;
 Criteria to be adopted for deciding maintenance needs;
 Preventive maintenance schedule;
 Calibration schedule and compliance records
 Intervals at which the Operator shall carry out periodic maintenance;
 Intervals for major maintenance and the scope thereof;
 Server and web related maintenance ;
Monthly Operating Performance Report (MOPR); The MOPR shall include: a detailed progress report
on the implementation of the Operation and Maintenance Plan; Performance Standards achieved or
maintained during the month; exceptional reports on emergencies; etc. This would include a
Page 417 of 432

summary analysis of the CMS infrastructure, performance analysis, SCADA reports, downtime issues
and handling.
Annual Operating Performance Report (AOPR). The AOPR shall include the comprehensive details of
all equipment’s, instrumentation, SCADA system and water supply components and CMS
infrastructure performance
QUALITY ASSURANCE& CONTROL

Operator shall prepare detailed plan for this Contract for Quality Assurance and Quality Control and
get it approved from the Authority’s Representative or PB Engineer. The Operator shall deploy
adequate number of suitable experts whose sole responsibility shall be to strictly implement the
QA/QC plan and conduct necessary tests to ensure highest quality standard. All other measures that
the Operator may feel necessary or as may be directed by the Authority’s Representative or PB
Engineer or his representative shall be followed.
Shop Drawings for equipment’s / works

The Operator shall prepare shop drawings before manufacturing, ordering, installing any equipment,
materials etc. The shop drawings shall follow the design and detailed requirements as indicated by
the PBC Engineer’s specifications and shall incorporate the fabrication details. Six copies of these
shop drawings shall be submitted by the Operator i.e. two copies to the PBC Engineer and Four
copies to Consultants/ PMC. After due checking, the consultant will forward three copies to SJPNL
with his comments within seven days. The PBC Engineer shall, at his earliest convenience scrutinize
these comments from consultant and return one copy to the Operator with his comments/approval.
Only on receipt of the approval of the shop drawings, further work shall be proceeded with by the
Operator. The Operator shall submit these shop drawings to the PBC Engineer at the earliest, but
within 30 days from the award of work considering the overall time schedule, to allow the PBC
Engineer reasonable time to scrutinize. Any plea of delay on this aspect, shall not be entertained, as
per the Operator's request.
Drawings, Maintenance Manual for works

All the drawings, documents and data sheets as detailed below shall be delivered after checking &
verifications from the consultants to the PBC Engineer for his approval. The approval of the
drawings/data sheets/documents/ QAP by the engineer shall in no way relieve the Operator from his
obligations to get the drawings approved from the statutory bodies before execution of the work and
provide a complete and satisfactory plant and installation as per intent and purpose as laid down in
the specifications. Any omission and/or errors shall be made good or rectified whether or not the
drawings were approved or not, at no extra cost to SJPNL.
Pre-Dispatch Inspections Outside Shimla city

In the event the Operator proposes to procure material which requires pre-dispatch inspection of the
Authority’s representative from outside of the Authority’s city, the Operator will have to arrange and
provide for the cost the travel to the manufacturer’s place, accommodation, local transport and food
for the representatives of the Authority. Such costs will be incorporated in the tendered cost of such
items and no separate payment will be made for the same.
Material
Page 418 of 432

All material used shall be new and conform to the relevant specifications or standards or as per
approved Quality Assurance Plan. Reconditioned parts/Equipment’s shall not be accepted.
Working Conditions
It will be the Operator’s responsibility to acquaint himself with the local prevailing conditions of
temperature, humidity, rainfall, dust and other conditions. All the equipment’s supplied shall be
suitable for satisfactory operation under such abnormal conditions as prevalent.
Conformity to Specification
The work is to be executed in accordance to the specifications (mentioned under this contract) and
the relevant I.S. Codes.
Approval of Materials
All materials used on the work shall be new and of the best quality available, conforming to the
relevant specifications specified under this contract and as per the good Engineering practices. Prior
approval should be obtained in writing from the PBC Engineer or Authority’s representative while
approving the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for all materials proposed to be used.
Shop Inspection and Testing

Operator shall depute the Third Party Inspecting Agency (TPIA) for the shop Inspection & Testing at
his own cost for the items specified under this contract. TPIA shall be approved by SJPNL.
The PBC Engineer or his appointed inspecting agent shall be entitled at all reasonable times during
manufacture to inspect, examine and test in the Operator’s premises, the materials and workmanship,
of all plant to be supplied under the contract and if part of the said plant is being manufactured on
other premises, the Operator shall obtain permission to inspect, examine and test the same at such
premises for the PBC Engineer. Such inspection, examination and testing or waiving of the same
shall not relieve the Operator from any obligation under the contract. The Operator shall give the PBC
Engineer minimum 30 days' notice in writing of the date and the place at which any Plant will be ready
for testing.
All instruments used for such tests shall be calibrated and certified by an approved testing authority
and the calibration certificate shall be valid at the time of tests. The calibration certificate shall be
produced by the Operator, at the time of carrying out every test, showing the readings obtained, all
calculations and full details of the calibration.
The expenses for shop inspection of finished equipment and witnessing of performance tests at
manufacture’s work as specified shall be borne by the Operator. The charges towards to & fro travel,
boarding, lodging etc for third party agency including their inspection fee shall be borne by Operator.
The expenses incurred for above shall be deemed to be included in the prices quoted for the
equipment. The above arrangements shall be made in advance and intimated to the department
before any inspection has to be carried out at the manufacture’s works. The delay in the inspection
due to any reasons whatsoever shall be attributable to the Operator.
Test Certificate
Page 419 of 432

All manufacturer’s certificates of test proof sheets, etc. showing that the equipment, material also
have been tested in accordance with the requirements of the SJPNL, appropriate Indian Standard,
Statutory requirement, other relevant standard specification or this specification are to be supplied
free of charge on request. In case of dispute, SJPNL or Authority shall have the right to get the
material tested at the cost of the Operator as per the specification. Materials, which are not supported
by the test certificates or for which test results do not tally with relevant standard specifications, shall
not be used.
Quality Certificate of Equipment/ Material

The Operator shall be required to produce a manufacturer’s quality certificates for the equipment and
materials supplied by the Operator. Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s certificates, the engineer may
ask for testing of materials in approved test houses. The test result shall satisfy the requirements of
the relevant Indian Standards/ SJPNL.
Records & Usage of Equipment/ Material

The Operator shall maintain a detailed report of all equipment/materials received at the site in his
stores or storage and working areas in the vicinity of the site and shall make such records available to
the PBC Engineer at such times as the latter may reasonably require.
Development of Integrated Management Information System (IMIS)

a) The objective of the IMIS is to compile and analyse data/ information from the entire WSS system
in the Service Area with respect to all matters including but not limited to asset management,
water quality, service delivery, Customer information, billing and collection, stores management,
financial management, and various other operational parameters as suggested by SJPNL.
b) The Operator will conceptualize and design a comprehensive Integrated Management Information
System (IMIS) including Functional Specification Requirement and System Specification
Requirements for the IMIS,
c) No later than thirty (30) days from the Effective Date, the Operator shall provide a conceptual
design including Functional Specification Requirement and System Specification Requirements
for the IMIS to the Authority and the Technical Auditor.
d) No later than one hundred and twenty (120) days from the Effective Date, the Operator shall
provide a draft version of the IMIS to the Authority.
e) The Authority shall within thirty (30) business days of receipt of the draft version from the
Operator shall review and, in consultation with the Technical Auditor approve or suggest revisions
to the draft version of the IMIS.
f) The Operator shall within 15 days of the receipt of the comments on the draft IMIS shall
incorporate and re-submit the revised draft version of the IMIS.
g) Subject to satisfactory incorporation of the changes suggested, the Authority shall approve the
revised IMIS and authorize the Operator to implement and commission the IMIS.
h) If the Operator is unable to launch the approved IMIS before 15 days of Scheduled TCD, the
Authority may, at its sole discretion, agree to provide additional time to the Operator to complete
these obligations. If the Operator can reasonably demonstrate that the delay is due to a failure on
the part of the Authority or its agents or information requested by the Operator available to the
Operator in a timely manner or due to an event of Force Majeure, then the Operator will be
granted such extension of time for the launch of the IMIS.
Page 420 of 432

i) If the Operator fails to meet the time line set out in this section and as extended as per the terms
and conditions of the contract then:
v. the Operator will use its best endeavors to mitigate any delay in the launch of IMIS;
vi. the date from which to calculate achievement of milestones for purposes of calculating
performance fee under Schedule 5 and Schedule 6 shall remain unchanged/ extended only to
the extent of the extension of time;
vii. if such delay is for thirty (30) days or more, then the Authority will have the right to terminate
the Agreement immediately and termination conditions pertaining to Operator Event of Default
shall apply.
viii. if such delay is for less than thirty (30) days, the Operator will be liable to Liquidated Damages.
Page 421 of 432

SCHEDULE 28: INDICATIVE TIMELINES FOR HANDOVER OF HYDRAULIC ZONES
Hydraulic Zones (Zone Timelines for initiation of Timelines of handover from

number 1-14) preparation of SIP (Operator Effective Date for O&M
may initiate preparation of
SIP for all Zones after
Effective Date)
Zone 1 Effective Date Six months
Zone 2-4 Six months 12 months
Zone 5-9 12 months 18 months
Zone 10-14 18 months 24 months
Page 422 of 432

SCHEDULE 29: LIST OF ITEMS FOR THE CAPITAL WORKS
1. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
a. Pipe Network:
Galvanized Iron Pipes (Heavy Approximate length

class)
80 mm 204369.00 mt.
100 mm 31083.00 mt.
150 mm 510121.00 mt.
MS ERW Pipelines
ID 206.5 mm dia & 6.3 mm thk. 21412.00 mt.
ID 260.4 mm dia & 6.3 mm thk. 5643.00 mt.
ID 309.7 mm dia & 7.1 mm thk. 6620.00 mt.
ID 339.6 mm dia & 8 mm thk. 163.00 mt.
ID 388.8 mm dia & 8.8 mm thk. 302.00 mt.
Flow Pressure
Isolation
Diameter Control Reducing Scour Valve Air Valve
Valve
Valves Valves
25 mm dia 2.00 Nos.
50 mm dia 60.00
Nos.
250 mm dia 10.00 Nos. 12.00 Nos. 8.00 Nos.
300 mm dia 25.00 Nos. 6.00 Nos. 41.00 Nos.
400 mm dia 1.00 No. 3.00 Nos. 1.00 Nos.
150 mm dia 21.00 Nos.
200 mm dia 30.00 Nos.
250 mm dia 10.00 Nos.
300 mm dia 25.00 Nos.
400 mm dia 1.00 No.
d. Pressure Transmitters: 640 Nos
e. House Service Connection & Consumer Metering
i House Service Connection of G.I. pipes with G.I. fittings complete including
Chamber.
20 mm dia 1650 Nos.
25 mm dia 1100 Nos.
ii Domestic battery-operated ultrasonic AMR water meters
Page 423 of 432

20 mm dia 1650 Nos.

25 mm dia 1100 Nos.
iii Direct acting PRV for each house service
connection
20 mm dia 1650 Nos.
25 mm dia 1100 Nos.
2. STORAGE RESERVIORS:
Capacity Enhancement of existing

i) Tanks
244.00 367.00 Cum
1 Corner House 21 Dhalli_WTP2_Sump
Cum
1797.00 407.00 Cum
2 Totu 22 Sackrala
Cum
509.00 462.00 Cum
3 Kelestone 1 23 Basant Vihar
Cum
506.00 340.00 Cum
4 Fingask_2 24 Vikas nagar
Cum
713.00 128.00 Cum
5 Tutikandi_2 25 IAS_Colony2
Cum
437.00 849.00 Cum
6 Advance Study Steel Tank 26 HP PWD Near Kusumpti
Cum
739.00 2003.00
7 Chakkar/Sandal 27 Jakhu
Cum Cum
713.00 227.00 Cum
8 Kamnadevi Temple 28 North_Oak_1
Cum
1131.00
9 Tara Hall ii New Tanks
Cum
413.00 565.00 Cum
10 Phagali 1 Z7_Tutikandi_3
Cum
604.00 1005.00
11 Mains_Field1 2 Z6_Baluganj_Harinagar
Cum Cum
362.00 393.00 Cum
12 Shivpuri 3 Z4_New1
Cum
731.00 1272.00
13 Khalini Forest Steel Tank 4 Z3_Knolls_Wood
Cum Cum
291.00 1272.00
14 SDA Complex 5 Z8_Dhingo5
Cum Cum
142.00 884.00 Cum
15 New_Shimla_Sector3A 6 Z5_Dhingodevi4
Cum
298.00 501.00 Cum
16 New_Shimla_Sector4 7 Z1_Dhingodevi3
Cum
1056.00 10.00 Cum
17 Dhingodevi1 8 Z11_Sargeen_Chowk
Cum
113.00 565.00 Cum
18 Dhingodevi2 9 Z10_Tibti_Panthaghati
Cum
1.00 Cum 1901.00
19 Mashobra 10 Z2_Jakhu2
Cum
220.00 565.00 Cum
20 Dhalli_WTP1_Sump 11 Z9_Shoghi
Cum
3. TRANSMISSION MAIN
a. Pipe network
Page 424 of 432

class)
100 mm 1602.00 mt.
150 mm 10601.01 mt.
ii MS ERW Pipelines
ID 260.4 mm dia & 6.3 mm thk. 5220.00 mt.
ID 309.7 mm dia & 7.1 mm thk. 1589.00 mt.
ID 339.6 mm dia & 8 mm thk. 5394.00 mt.
ID 388.8 mm dia & 8.8 mm thk. 3293.00 mt.
ID 437 mm dia & 10 mm thk. 506.00 mt.
ID 486 mm dia & 11 mm thk. 1161.00 mt.
ID 585 mm dia & 12.5 mm thk. 3067.00 mt.
ID 585 mm dia & 15 mm thk. 83.00 mt.
b. Electronically Controlled Valves
Flow Pressure
Isolation Scour
Valve Valve
Valves Valves
150 mm dia 29.00 Nos. 26.00 Nos. 28.00 Nos. 27.00 Nos. 1.00 No.
600 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 3.00 Nos.
80 mm 2.00 Nos.
100 mm 7.00 Nos.
150 mm 23.00 Nos.
200 mm 22.00 Nos.
250 mm 8.00 Nos.
300 mm 17.00 Nos.
400 mm 9.00 Nos.
450 mm 6.00 Nos.
500 mm 4.00 Nos.
d. Pressure Transmitter = 162 Nos
4. BPT & TANKS:
BPT Tanks
1 667 Cum 1 17 Cum
2 667 Cum 2 4 Cum
3 430 Cum 3 192 Cum
4 100 Cum 4 71 Cum
5 325 Cum
6 74 Cum
7 88 Cum
8 102 Cum
Page 425 of 432

9 102 Cum
10 497 Cum
11 49 Cum
5. Pumping Main:
a. Pipe Lines
Approx. Length
class)
100 mm 621.70 mt.
150 mm 22.80 mt.
ii MS ERW Pipelines
ID 206.5 mm dia 29.30 mt.
ID 260.3 mm dia 373.10 mt.
ID 309.7 mm dia 22.90 mt.
ID 312.7 mm dia 90.50 mt.
ID 341.5 mm dia 1424.40 mt.
ID 396.4 mm dia 464.70 mt.
ID 419 mm dia 1102.30 mt.
ID 585 mm dia 16.80 mt.
Flow Pressure
Isolation Scour
Valve Valve
Valves Valves
25 mm dia 5.00 Nos.
50 mm dia 3.00 Nos.
100 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 1.00 No.
150 mm dia 3.00 Nos. 2.00 Nos. 3.00 Nos.
200 mm dia 4.00 Nos. 4.00 Nos. 5.00 Nos.
250 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 1.00 No.
300 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 2.00 Nos.
400 mm dia 1.00 No.
500 mm dia 1.00 No.
600 mm dia 1.00 No. 1.00 No. 2.00 Nos.
100 mm 2.00 Nos.
150 mm 3.00 Nos.
200 mm 4.00 Nos.
250 mm 4.00 Nos.
300 mm 2.00 Nos.
450 mm 1.00 No.
600 mm 2.00 Nos.
d. Pressure Transmitter: 34 Nos
6. Pumping Machinery, Transformer & Substation

 Pumping machinery along with its allied accessories complete with a provision of 100%
standby.
 Transformer and Substation along with its allied accessories
Particulars Pump HP Transformer
Page 426 of 432

Pump house (PH Kamnadevi) to the Kamnadevi Temple 110.00 BHP 1 No

Sanjauli tank to the BPT1 150.00 BHP 1 No
Sump Digodevi Rest to various tanks in this area 150.00 BHP 1 No
Kusumpti tank to HP PWD Near Kusumpti 990.00 BHP 1 No
Sanjauli tank to Jakhu tanks 20.00 BHP 1 No
Sanjauli tank to North_Oak_1 360.00 BHP 1 No
Head work to Ridge and Sanjauli tanks 110.00 BHP 1 No
7. Pumping House cum Attendant Quarter:
Pump house cum attendant quarter 2 Nos. of 600 Sqm. Each for Kusumpti
1200.00 Sq.mt.
tank to HP PWD Near Kusumpti and Sanjauli tank to North_Oak_1
8. STAFF QUARTERS:
Staff quarters Type-I, II & III. At New Reservoir (11 Nos.) 1100.00 Sq.mt
Staff quarters Type-I, II & III. At New Reservoir 100 sqm (15 Nos) 1500.00 Sqm
Staff quarters Type-I, II & III. At New Reservoir 100 sqm x 7 pumping station 700.00 Sqm
9. SCADA WORK: For Distribution, transition and Pumping system

S. N Particulars No
i Interfacing Software Design to PLC 1 No.
ii Installation of the software 1 No.
iii Centralized Historian Server 1 No.
Iv Secondary Computer Station 1 No.
v 46" LCD monitor at Conference Room 1 No.
Page 427 of 432

Schedule 30 : PRICE ADJUSTMENT

1. General
This Schedule lays down the procedure for determining the price adjustment to be applied to the
works fees in the contract.
For the purpose of Price Adjustment, ‘Base Date’ shall be the date 28 days prior to the Bid Due Date.
Thus Base date for this contract is [__.__.2019].
Weightings for labour and various materials to be used in the Price Adjustment formulas laid down in
the Tables under Clause 2 and 3 of this Schedule shall be based on the figures quoted by the
Operator as a part of its bid, and as accepted by the Authority.
The Works Fees shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in rates and price of labour, materials,
fuels and lubricants in accordance with the following principles and procedures and as per formula
given in the contract. The price variation clause to be included shall be read as follows:
(a) The Price Adjustment shall apply for the work done from the TCD upto end of the Agreement or
extensions granted by the PBC Engineer/ Authority and shall not apply to the work carried out beyond
the stipulated time for reasons attributable to the Operator.
(b) The Price Adjustment shall be determined during each month from the formula given.
(c) Following expressions and meanings are assigned to the work done during each month:
(i) Labour Component- P1 = [20]%

(ii) Material (Pm) = [75] %
(iii) POL component (Pf) = [5] %
Total 100 %
(iv) Cement Component = As per Actual in MT
(v) Steel- = As per actual in MT
(vi) Steel plates/ pipe - = As per actual in MT
1. Price adjustment for Works Fees

R = Total value of work done during the month. It would include the amount of secured advance
granted, if any, during the month, less the amount of secured advance recovered, if any during the
month. It will exclude value for works executed under variations for which price adjustment will be
worked separately based on the terms mutually agreed.
To the extent that full compensation for any rise or fall in costs to the Operator is not covered by the
provisions of this or other clauses in the contract, the unit rates and prices included in the contract
shall be deemed to include amounts to cover the contingency of such other rise or fall in costs.
If during the operative period of the contract as defined in condition below, there shall be any variation
in the Cement , Steel bar, steel plates, metal pipes , then subject to the other conditions mentioned
below, price adjustment on account of this shall be calculated as below.
The formula (e) for adjustment of prices are:

R = Value of work during the month
(i) Adjustment for labour component

Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost due to labour shall be paid in accordance with
the following formula:
Page 428 of 432

VL= 0.85 x P1/l00 x R x (L1 - Lo )/Lo

VL= increase or decrease in the cost of work during the month under consideration due to changes
in rates for local labour.
Lo = the consumer price index for industrial workers for the State on 28 days preceding the Bid Due
Date as published by Labour Bureau, Ministry of Labour & Employment, Government of India.
L1 = The consumer price index for industrial workers for the State for the during the month under
consideration as published by Labour Bureau, Ministry of Labour & Employment, Government of
India.
PI = Percentage of labour component of the work as quoted above
(ii) Adjustment for Cement component

Cement component
Star Rates
(1) Cement - Rs 5120 Per MT (Star Rate)
FORMULA FOR CEMENT COMPONENT
Vc = C0 (LcI- Lc0) x T
Lc0
WHERE
Vc = Amount of price variation in Rupees to be allowed for cement component.
C0 = Basic rate of cement in rupees per metric tonne as considered for working out value
(Star rate).
Lc0 = The all India Wholesale Price Index for Cement on 28 days preceding the Bid Due Date
as published by Office of Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce & Industry,
Government of India, New Delhi.
LcI = The all India Wholesale Price Index for the month under consideration as published by
Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce & Industry, Government of India, New Delhi
T = Tonnage of cement used in the permanent works for the month under consideration.
(iii) Adjustment for steel component
Star Rates
Tor/CTD bars - Rs 45000 Per MT (Star Rate)
FORMULA FOR TOR/CTD BARS COMPONENT
V5 = S0 (Sl1 - Sl0 ) x T
Sl0
Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost of steel procured by the Operator shall be paid
in accordance with the following formula
Vs = Increase or decrease in the cost during the month under consideration due to change of
rate for steel
C0 = Basic rate of steel bars and rods in rupees per metric tonne as considered for working out
value (Star rate).
Sl0 = The all India Wholesale Price Index for steel( bars and rods) on 28 days preceding Bid Due
Date as published by Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce & Industry, Government of
Page 429 of 432

India, New Delhi.

Sl1 = The all India Wholesale Price Index for steel (bars and rods) for the month under
consideration as published by Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce & Industry,
T = Tonnage of steel used in the permanent works during the month under consideration.
Note: For application of this clause index of bars and rods has been chosen to represent steel
group.
(iv) Adjustment for steel plates/pipe component
Star Rates
(2) Steel Plates - Rs 73000 Per MT ( Star Rate)
FORMULA FOR STEEL PLATES COMPONENT
V5 = S0 (Sp1 - Sp0 ) x T
Sp0
Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost of steel plates procured by the Operator shall
be paid in accordance with the following formula
Vs = Increase or decrease in the cost during the month under consideration due to change of
rate for steel plates
S0 = Basic rate of Mild Steel Long Products –Steel in rupees per metric ton as considered
for working out value (Star rate).
Sp0 = The all India Wholesale Price Index for Mild Steel Long Products –Steel on 28 days
preceding the Bid Due Date as published by Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce &
Industry, Government of India, New Delhi.
Sp1 = The all India Wholesale Price Index for Mild Steel Long Products –Steel for the month
under consideration as published by Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce & Industry,
T = Tonnage of steel plates used in the permanent works during the month under
consideration.
Note: For application of this clause index of Mild Steel Long Products –Steel has been chosen to
represent steel group.
(v) Adjustment of POL (fuel and lubricant) component
Price adjustment for increase or decrease in cost of POL (fuel and lubricant) shall be paid in
accordance with the following formula:
Vf = 0.85 x Pf /100 x R x (F1, - Fo)/Fo
Vf = Increase or decrease in the cost of work for the month under Consideration due to changes in
rates for fuel and lubricants.
Fo = The official retail price of High Speed Diesel (HSD) at the existing consumer pumps of IOC at
nearest center on the day 28 days prior to the Bid Due Date.
F1 = The official retail price of HSD at the existing consumer pumps of IOC at nearest center for the
15th day of month of the under consideration.
Pf = Percentage of fuel and lubricants component of the work as quoted above
Page 430 of 432

Note:
For the application of this clause, Index of High speed Diesel oil has been chosen to represent the
fuel and lubricant group.
(vi) Adjustment of Materials Component (Excluding Cement, steel, steel plates/ pipes and
POL)
Price adjustment for increase or decrease in cost of local materials other than cement, steel, steel
plates and POL procured by the Operator shall be paid in accordance with the following formula:
Vm = 0.85 x Pm /100 x R x (MI - M0 )/M0
Vm= Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the month under
consideration due to changes in rates for local materials other than
cement, steel, bitumen and POL.
M0 = The all India wholesale price index (all commodities) on 28 days preceding the Bid Due Date,
as published by the Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce & Industry, Government of India, New
Delhi.
MI = The all India wholesale price index (all commodities) for the month under consideration as
published by Economic Advisor, Ministry of Commerce & Industry, Government of India, New Delhi.
Pm = Percentage of local material component(other than cement, steel plates/ pipes, Steel bars, and
POL of the work as quoted above.
2. Determination of cost of diesel used in the DG set

The Operator shall use back-up power supply from the DG set during the period power supply from
the electricity utility company is not available. The DG set equipped with standard accessories will
record inter alia (i) energy supplied/generated by it and (ii) total period for which it was operated in a
month/quarter. Cost of diesel for which Operator will be entitled to compensation on account of
energy obtained from the back-up power supply unit shall be determined as under:
(1) Operator’s representative and the PBC Engineer shall jointly take the readings from the
meters and gauges (sealed jointly by them at the commencement of the O&M period) of
DG set every month to arrive at the total number of energy units (kWh) = E1 obtained from
the back-up power supply unit.
(2) Number of energy units (kWh) obtained from the back-up power supply unit during the
month for which Operator shall be entitled to compensation (referred to as ‘adjusted units
of back-up energy supply’) shall be determined in a series of steps that follow.
The Authority will first determine the short-fall in supply from the electricity utility company.
(3) Rated specific fuel consumption of the DG set specified by the manufacturer in its
specifications will then be used for determining the estimated diesel consumption during
the month for producing the ‘adjusted units of back-up energy supply’.
(4) Cost of estimated Diesel consumption in a month shall then be calculated on the basis of
price of diesel prevailing at mid-point of the month in IOC or HPCL’s (whichever is lower)
retail outlets in Shimla. The cost shall be calculated as cumulative for each month of the
quarter.
3. Conditions Applicable to Price Adjustment

The base date shall be the date 28 days prior to the Bid Due Date.
Page 431 of 432

The names of the applicable indices to be used and the value of the indices as at the base date are
as indicated in the Operator’s financial proposal.
Page 432 of 432

0 PBCDraftContractapril20

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

0 PBCDraftContractapril20

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Performance Based Contract (PBC)

Implementation of Continuous Pressurized Water Supply in Shimla

GREATER SHIMLA WATER SUPPLY AND SEWERAGE PROJECT

PERFORMANCE BASED CONTRACT (PBC)

IMPLEMENTATION OF CONTINUOUS PRESSURIZED WATER SUPPLY IN SHIMLA

SHIMLA JAL PRABANDHAN NIGAM LIMITED (SJPNL), (“AUTHORITY”)

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION ................................................................... 6

SCHEDULE 4B: OPERATOR OBLIGATIONS DURING TRANSITION PERIOD ........ 162

PERFORMANCE BASED CONTRACT (PBC)

THIS AGREEMENT is made on the [date] day of [month] [year].

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

maintained by the Parties under Applicable Laws in relation to the due

Change in Law means as defined in Article 21;

person who under Applicable Law is required to pay User Charges.

Indexation shall be as set forth in Schedule 6-Article 1.9

O&M means Operation and Maintenance

Mitigation Plan and approved by the Authority, in accordance with Schedule 4A

Sub-Clause shall refer to the sub-clause of this Agreement;

Plan (THP) approved by the Authority, in accordance with Schedule 4A

2. SCOPE OF THE PROJECT

2.1 Project Period

2.4 Activity Chart

2.4.3 List of submissions:

Document submission Key Date

4. TRANSITION PERIOD CONDITIONS

4.1 Satisfaction of Transition Period Conditions

4.4 Damages for delay by the Authority

5. PROGRESSIVE HANDOVER OF EXISTING PROJECT FACILITIES DURING THE TRANSITION

5.2 Handover Conditions for the Authority

5.3 Handover Conditions for the Operator

(i) detailed site investigations, updating of distribution network drawings, complete

(iv) Selection of location for DMA inflow chamber (if any);

5.4 Fulfilment of Handover Conditions

5.5 Preparation of Detailed Designs and Drawings

6.1.13 Connection to Users

6.3.7 Maintenance Expenditure and other Operational Expenditure

6.5 Protection of Environment and Ecological Balance

6.6 Confidentiality /Secrecy

6.7 Employment Of Labour / Employees

8. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

8.1 Mutual Representations and Warranties

i) none of its employees, consultants, service providers, suppliers, or Subcontractors,

9.1 Performance Security

10. RIGHT OF WAY

10.1 The Service Area

10.4 Access to the Authority and Technical Auditor

12. ACTIVITIES RELATED TO REHABILITATION OF EXISTING PROJECT FACILITIES AND

i. All non-metallic pipelines or underground components installed in the frame of the

13. MONITORING OF CONSTRUCTION

13.1 Monthly progress reports

14. COMPLETION CERTIFICATES

14.1 Provisional Certificate

15. SUSTAINING PERIOD CONDITIONS

16. CHANGE OF SCOPE

16.1 Change of Scope

16.4 Reduction in the scope of work

18. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

18.1 Safety Requirements

19. MONITORING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

19.1 Inspection and measurement of Performance Standards

20. TECHNICAL AUDITOR

20.1 Appointment of Technical Auditor

21. CHANGE IN LAW